THE BOOK WAS
DRENCHED
Text Cross Book
166196
i r r r T irr
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION, UNITED PROVINCES
CALENDAR
for the year
1928-1929
Published under the Authority of
The Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces, Allahabad
1929
Price, R*. 4.
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION, UNITED PROVINCES
CALENDAR
for the year
IQ28-IQ2Q
Published under the Authority of
The Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces, Allahabad
1929
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION, UNITED PROVINCES
CALENDAR
for the year
1928-1929
PRINTED BY THE
SUPERINTENDENT, GOVERNMENT PRESS, UNITED PROVINCES,
ALLAHABAD.
CONTENTS.
PAGES.
ALMANAC . . . . . . . . . . 1 26
PABT I. THE INTEBMEDIATE EDUCATION ACT, 1921 . . 26 35
Section 1. Short title, extent, and commencement . . 26-27
2. Definitions .. .. .. .. 27
3. Constitution of the Board . . . . 27-28
4. Term of office of members . . . . 29
5. Filling of vacancies on expiry of term of office . . ib
6. Publication of names . . . . . . ib
7. Powers of the Board . . . . . . 29-30
8. Exemption of certa-n universities from the opera-
tion of the Act . . . . . . 30
9. Powers of Minister . . . . . . 30-31
10. Officers of the Board . . . . . . 31
11. Powers and duties of Chairman . . . . ib
,, 12. Appointment, powers, and duties of Secretary . . 31-32
13. Appointment and constitution of Committees . . 32
14 Exercise of powers delegated by Board to Com-
mittees . . . . . . . . 33
15. Power of Board to make regulations . . . . 33-34
16. Previous pub x ication and sanction of regulations
made by Board . . . . . . 34
17. Duty of Board to submit regulations and power of
Minister to make regulations in default of
Board . . . . . . . . 16
18. Casual vacancies . . . . . . 35
19. Proceedings not invalidated by reason of vacancies ib
20. Power of Board and Committees to make byelaws ib
PABT II. -LIST OF OFFICEBS AND AtrrHOBrriES . . . . 36 50
Officers of the Board . . . . . . . . 36
Members of the Board . . . . . . . . 36 40
Members of the Committees of Courses . . . . 40 47
(1) Members of the Committee of Courses in English . . 40
(2) Ditto ditto in Sanskrit and
Hindi.. .. .. .. .. 40^1
(3) Members of the Committee of Courses in Arabic, Per-
sian, and Urdu . . . . . . . . 41
(4) Members of the Committee of Courses in History and
Civic .. .. .. .. 41-42
ii CALENDAR 1928-29
PAGES.
(5) Members of the Committee of Courses in Geography . .
42
(6) Ditto ditto in Bengali, Mara-
thi and Gujarat
ib
(7) Members of the Committee o Courses in Greek, Latin,
Hebrew and Modern European Languages
43
(8) Members of the Committee of Courses in Mathematics
ib
(9) Ditto ditto in Physics
ib
(10) Ditto d tto m Chemistry . .
44
(11) Ditto ditto in Biology
ib
(12) Ditto ditto in Agriculture
44-45
(13) Ditto ditto in Drawing,
Manual Training, Metal Work and etc.
45
(14) Members of the Committee of Courses in Commerce . .
ib
(15) Ditto ditto in Logic
46
(16) Ditto ditto in Economics ..
16
(17) Ditto ditto in Indian Music
ib
(18) Ditto ditto in Domestic
Science, Physiology, Hygiene and Child -Study
47
Members of the Examinations' Committee
ib
Ditto Recognition ditto
ib
Ditto Finance ditto
48
Ditto Curriculum ditto
48-49
Ditto Committee to scrutinize applications
from private candidates
49
Ditto Results Committee
ib
.Representatives of the Board on other Bodies
50
PABT HI. THE REGULATIONS OF THE BOABD
6188
Chapter I. Definitions
51-52
II. The Board .. ..
52
III. The Secretary . .
53-54
IV. Committees of the Board . .
54-55
99 V. Committees of Courses
5567
VI. The Examinations' Committee
5768
VII. Recognition of institutions by the Board
5863
VIII. The Finance Committee
6364
., IX. The Curriculum Committee
6465
X. Conditions under which grants-in-aid may
be given to recognized institutions . .
65
99 XI. Residence of students
6566
t , XIL Examinations ..
6674
XIII. High School Examination . .
7677
XIV. Intermediate Examination . .
7882
XV.- Intermediate Examination in Commerce
82-83
CONTENTS lii
PAGES.
Chapter XV(a). Intermediate Examination inAgricultupe 83-84
XVI. Election of members of the Board under
clauses (c) and (e) of sub-section (1) of
section 3 of the Intermediate Edu-
cation Act, 1921 . . . . 85-^-87
XVII Miscellaneous .. .. .. 87-88
PART IV.- RULES OF THE EXAMINATIONS' COMMITTEE . . 89-90
List of the Examination Centres . . . . . . 91 94
Rates of Honoraria . . . . . . . . 95 98
Boards of Moderators . . . . . . . . 99102
PAET V. MISCELLANEOUS RULES (e.g., TRAVELLING ALLOWANCE
BATES) . . . . . . . . 1 03
PART VI. -COURSES OF STUDIES FOR 1930 . . . . 104229
The High School Examination . . . . . . 104156
The Intermediate Examination . . . . . . 167 204
The Intermediate Examination in Commerce . . . . 205 211
The Intermediate Examination in Agriculture . . . . 212 229
COURSES OF STUDIES FOR 1931 230 372
The High School Examination . . . . . . 230293
The Intermediate Examination . . . . . . 294 341
The Intermediate, Examination in Commerce . . . . 342 350
The Intermediate Examination in Agriculture . . . . 351 372
PART VII. LIST OF INSTITUTIONS IN AND OUTSIDE THE UNITED
PROVINCES RECOGNISED FOR THE EXAMINATIONS
CONDUCTED BY THE BOARD OF 1930 . . 373 415
APPENDIX A. DATES OF EXAMINATIONS . . . . 416
B. BYELAWS OF THE BOARD . . . . 417 421
C. LIST OF THE PANEL OP INSPECTORS POR THE
INSPECTION OF INTERMEDIATE COLLEGES . 422426
D. LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF OF COLLEGES IN
AND OUTSIDE THE UNITED PROVINCES RECOG-
NISED BY THE BOARD . * . . 426 504
1 Meerut College .. . *. . 426428
2. D. A.-V. Intermediate College, Dehra Dun . . * . 428431
3. N. R. E. C. Intermediate College, Khurja . . . . 431432
4. Agra College .. .. .. .. 432-434
6. St. John's College, Agra . . . . . . 434-437
6. Kadhaawami Educational Institute, Agra . . . . 437 439
7. Balwant Rajput Intermediate College, Agra .. .. 439441
8. Dharma Samaj Intermediate College, Aligarh . . . . 442443
9. Bareilly College .. .. .. .. 444446
10. Shyam Sundar Memorial Intermediate College Chan-
dauai .. . .. .. 446448
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION, UNITED PROVINCES
ALMANAC
JANUARY, 1928-DECEMBER, 1929
ALMANAC,
JANUARY, 1928.
1 Sun.
2 j Mon.
3 Tues.
4 Wed.
5 Thur.
6 Fri.
7 Sat.
The Intermediate Education Act, 1921,
was published under section 81 of the
Government of India Act, (1922).
8 Sun.
9 Mon. j-)
10 Tues. | (Meetings of the Committees appointed by
11 Wed. j f the Board.
12 Thur. J
13 Fri.
14 Sat.
15 i Sun.
16 , Mon.
17 Tues.
18 Wed.
19 Thur,
20 Fri.
21 i Sat.
22 Sun.
23 Mon.
24 Tues.
25 Wed.
26 Thur.
27 Fri.
28 Sat.
29 Sun.
30
31
Mon.
Tues.
ALMANAC,
FEBBUABY, 1928.
1
Wed.
2
Thur.
3
4
Fri.
Sat.
The regulations of the Board of High
School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces, came into force (1923).
5
Sun.
6
Mon.
7
Tues.
8
Wed.
9
Thur.
10
Fri.
11
Sat.
12
Sun.
13
Mon.
14
Tues.
15
16
Wed.
Thur.
Meeting of the Board.
17
Fri.
18
Sat.
19
Sun.
20
Mon.
21
Tues.
22
Wed.
23
Thur.
24
Fri.
25
Sat.
26
Sun.
27
Mon,
28
Tues.
29
Wed.
ALMANAC.
MAEOH, 1928.
1
Thur.
2
Fri.
3
Sat.
4
Sun.
5
Mon.
6
Tues. !
7
Wed.
8
Thur. '
9
Fri. ;
10
Sat.
11
12
Sun.
Mon.
13
Tues.
14
Wed.
15
Thur.
16
Fri.
17
Sat,
18
Sun.
19
Mon.
20
Tues.
21
Wed.
22
Thur.
23 Fri.
24 Sat.
25
Sun.
26
Mon.
27
Tues.
28
Wed.
29
Thurs.
30
Fri.
31
Sat.
ALMANAC.
APBIL, 1928,
1
Sun.
Establishment of the Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, United
Provinces (1922).
2
Mon.
The Board's examinations of 1928 com-
3
Tues.
menced.
4
Wed.
5
Thur.
6
Fri.
7
Sat.
8
Sun.
9
Mon,
10
Tues.
11
Wed.
12
Thur.
13
Fri.
14
Sat.
15
Sun.
16
Mon.
17
Tues.
18
Wed.
19
Thur.
20
Fri.
21
Sat.
22
23
Sun.
Mon.
Inaugural meeting of the Board (1922).
24
Tues.
25
Wed.
26
Thur.
27
Fri.
28
Sat.
29
Sun.
30
Mon,
ALMANAC.
MAY, 1928.
1
Tues.
2
Wed.
3
Thur.
4
Fri.
5
Sat.
6
Sun.
7
Mon.
8
Tues.
9
Wed.
10
Thur.
11
Fri.
12
Sat.
13
14
Sun.
Mori.
15
Tues.
16
Wed.
17
Thur.
18
Fri.
19
Sa|.
20
Sun.
21
Mon.
22
Tues.
23
Wed.
24
Thur.
25
Fri.
26
Sat.
27
Sun.
28
Mon.
29
Tues.
30
Wed.
31
Thur.
ALMANAC.
JUNE, 1928.
1
Fri.
2
Sat.
3
Sun.
4
Mon.
5
Tues.
6
Wed.
7
Thur.
8
Fri.
9
Sat.
10
Sun.
11
Mon.
12
Tues.
13
Wed.
14
Thur.
15
Fri.
16
Sat.
17
Sun.
18
Mon.
19
Tues.
20
Wed.
21
Thur.
22
Fri.
23
Sat.
24
Sun.
25
Mon,
26
Tues.
27
Wed.
28
Thur.
29
Fri.
30
Sat.
ALMANAC.
JULY, 1928.
1
Sun.
. 2
Mon.
3
Tues.
4
Wed.
5
Thur.
6
Fri.
7
Sat.
8
Sun.
9
Mon.
10
Tues.
11
Wed.
12
Thur.
13
Pri.
14
Sat.
15
16
Sun.
Mon.
17
Tues.
18
Wed.
19
Thur.
20
Fri.
21
Sat.
22
Sun.
23 ! Mon.
24
Tues.
25
Wed.
26
Thur.
27
Fri.
28
Sat.
29
Sun.
30
Mon.
31
Tues.
ALMANAC.
AUGUST, 1928.
1
Wed.
2
Thur.
3
Fri.
4
Sat.
5
Sun.
6
Mon.
7
Tues.
8
Wed.
9
Thur.
10
Fri.
11
Sat.
12
Sun.
13
Mon.
14
Tues.
15
Wed.
16
Thur.
17
Fri.
18
Sat.
The first meeting of the first Board
fully constituted (1922).
19
Sun.
20
Mon.
21
Tues.
22
Wed.
23
Thur.
24
Fri.
25
Sat.
26
Sun.
27
Mon.
-28
Tues.
29
Wed.
30
Thur.
31
Fri.
10
ALMANAC.
SEPTEMBER, 1928.
1
Sat.
2
Sun.
3
Mon.
4
Tues.
5
Wed.
6
Thur.
7
Fri.
8
Sat.
9
Sun.
10
Mon.
11
Tues.
12
Wed.
13
Thur.
14
Fri.
15
Sat.
16
Sun.
17
Mon.
18
Tues.
19
Wed.
20
Thur.
21
Fri.
22
Sat.
23
Sun*
24
Mon.
25
Tues.
26
Wed.
27
Thur.
28
Fri.
29
Sat.
30
Sun.
The Intermediate Education Act, 1921,
received the assent of the Governor of
the United Provinces (1921.)
ALMANAC.
11
OCTOBER, 1928.
1
2
3
4
5
Mon.
Tues.
Wed.
Thur.
Fri.
Last date of receiving applications from
intending private candidates for the
examinations of 1929.
Meetings of Committees (1 3).
6
Sat.
7
Sun.
8
Mon.
9
Tues.
10
Wed.
11
Thur.
12
Fii.
13
Sat.
14
Sun.
15
Mon.
16
Tues.
17
Wed.
18
Thur.
19
Fri.
20
Sat.
21
Sun.
22
Mon.
23
Tues.
24
Wed.
25
*Thur.
26
Fri.
27
Sat.
28
Sun.
29
Mon.
30
Tues.
31
Wed.
12
ALMANAC.
NOVEMBER, 1928,
1 Thur.
2 i Fri.
3
Sat.
4
Sun.
r>
Mon. j
Tues.
)
7
8
Wed.
Thur.
sMcetinyv of Committees.
9
10
Fri.
Sat.
j- Annual meeting of the Board.
H
Sun.
12
Mori.
13
Tues.
14
Wed.
15 Thur.
10
Fri.
17 Sat,
IS
Sun.
19
Mon.
20
Tues.
21
Wed.
22
Thur.
23
Fri.
24
Sat.
25 Sun.
2(i Moil.
27 Tues.
28 Wed.
29
Thur.
30
Fri.
ALMANAC.
13
1 ' Sat.
DECEMBER, 1928.
2 Sun.
3 Men.
4 | Tucs.
5 ; Wed.
G ; Thur,
7 j Fri.
8 i Sat.
9 ; Sun.
10 : Won.
11 Tues.
12
13
Wed.
Thur.
14 Fri.
15 i Sat.
The Intermediate Education Act, 1921, re-
ceived the assent of the (Governor (General
(1921.)
16 Sun.
17 Mon.
18 , Tues.
19 j Wed.
20 Thur.
21 Fri.
22 I Sat.
23 ; Sun,
24 ; Mon.
25 I Tues.
20 i Wed.
27 ! Thur.
Fri.
28
29
Sat.
Last date of receiving application from re-
gular students for admission to the ex-
amination of 1929.
30
Sun.
31 ! Mon.
14
ALMANAC
JANUABY, 1929.
1
Tues.
2
Wed.
3
Thur.
4
Fri.
5
Sat.
6
Sun.
7
Mon.
8
Tues.
9
Wed.
10
Thur.
11
Fri.
12
Sat.
13
14
Sun.
Mon.
15
Tues.
16
Wed.
17
Thur.
18
Fri.
19
Sat.
20
Sun.
21
Mon.
22
Tues.
23
24
25
Wed.
Thur.
Fri.
} Meetings of the Committees appointed by
the Board.
26
Sat.
27
Sun.
28
Mon.
29
Tues.
30
Wed.
31
Thur.
ALMANAC,
15
FEBBTJABY, 1929.
1
Fri.
2
Sat.
3
Sun.
4
Mon.
5
Tues.
6
Wed.
7
Thur.
8
Fri.
9
Sat.
10
Sun.
11
Mon.
12
Tues.
Meeting of the Board.
13
Wed.
14
Thur.
15
Fri.
16
Sat.
17
Sun.
18
Mon.
19
Tues.
20
Wed.
21
Thur.
22
Fri.
23
Sat
24
Sun.
25
Mon.
26
Tues.
27
Wed.
28
Thur.
16
ALMANAC.
MAKOH, 1929.
1
Fri.
2
Sat.
3
Sun.
4
Mon.
5
Tues.
6
Wed.
7
Thur.
8
Fri.
9
Sat.
10
Sun.
11
Mon.
12
Tues.
13
Wed.
14
Thur.
15
Fri.
16
Sat.
17
Sun.
18
Mon.
19
Tues.
20
Wed.
21
Thur.
22
Fri.
23
Sat.
24
Sun.
25
Mon.
26
Tues.
27
Wed.
28
Thur.
The Board's examinations of 1929 com-
29
Fri.
menced.
30
Sat.
31
Sun.
ALMANAC.
17
APRIL, 1929.
1
Mon.
2
Tues.
3
Wed.
4
Thur.
5
Fri.
6
Sat.
7
Sun.
8
Mon.
9
Tues.
10
Wed.
11
Thur.
12
Fri.
13
Sat.
14
Sun.
15
Mon.
16
Tues.
17
Wed.
18
Thur.
19
Fri.
20
Sat.
21
Sun.
22
Mon.
23
Tues.
24
Wed.
25
Thur.
26
Fri.
27
Sat.
28
Sun.
29
Mon.
30
Tues.
18
ALMANAC.
MAY, 1929.
1
Wed.
2
Thur.
3
Fri.
4
Sat.
5
Sun.
6
Mon.
7
Tues.
8
Wed.
9
Thur.
10
Fri.
11
Sat.
12
13
Sun.
Mon.
14
Tues.
15
Wed.
16 Thur.
17 Fri.
18 Sat.
19 Sun.
20 Mon.
21 Tues.
22 Wed.
i 23 Thur.
24 Fri.
25 ; Sat.
26 Sun.
27 Mon.
28
Tues.
29
Wed.
30
Thur."
31
Fri.
AUTANAC.
tftjOT, 1929*
1
Sat.
2
Sun.
3
Mon.
4
Tues.
5
Wed.
6
Thur.
7
Fri.
8
Sat.
9
Sun.
10
Mon.
11
Tues.
12
Wed.
13
Thur.
14
Fri.
15
Sat.
16
Sun.
17
Mon.
18
Tues.
19
Wed.
20
Thur.
21
Fri.
22
Sat.
23
Sun.
24
Mon.
25
Tues.
26
Wed.
27
Thur.
28
Fri.
29
Sat.
S 30
Sun.
20
ALMANAC.
JULY, 1929.
1
Mon.
2
Tues,
3
Wed.
4
Thur.
5
Fri.
6
Sat.
7
Sun.
8
Mon.
9
Tues.
10
Wed.
11
Thur.
12
Fri.
13
Sat.
14
Sun.
15
Mon.
16
Tues.
17
Wed.
18
Thur.
19
Fri.
20
Sat.
21
Sun.
22
Mon.
23
Tues.
24
Wed.
26
Thur,
26
Fri.
27
Sat.
28
Sun.
29
Mon.
30
Tues.
31
Wed.
ALMANAC.
21
AUGTTST, 1929.
1
Thur.
2
Fri.
3
Sat.
4
Sun.
5
Mon.
6
Tues.
7
Wed.
8
Thur.
9
Fri.
10
Sat.
11
12
Sun.
Mon.
13
Tues.
14
Wed.
15
Thur.
16
Fri.
17
Sat.
18
Sun.
19
Mon.
20
Tues.
21
Wed.
22
Thur.
23
Fri.
24
Sat.
25
Sun.
26
Mon.
27
Tues.
28
Wed.
29
Thur.
30
Fri.
31
Sat.
i
22
4&MANAC.
SJCTOBMBER, 1929.
1
Sun.
2
Mon.
3
Tues.
4
Wed.
5
Thur.
6
Fri.
7
Sat.
8
Sun.
9
Mon.
10
Tues.
11
Wed.
12
Thur.
13
Fri.
14
Sat.
15
Sun.
16
Mon.
17
Tues.
18
Wed.
19
Thur.
20
Fri.
21
Sat.
22
Sun.
23
Mon.
24
Tues.
25
Wed.
26
Thur. H
27
Fri. ! j
28
Sat.
^ Meetings of the Committees appointed
29
Sun.
I by the Boarn.
30
Mon.
J
ALMANAC.
OCTOBER, 1929.
1
2
3
Tues.
Wed.
Thur,
Last date of receiving applications from in-
tending private candidates for the ex-
aminations of 1930.
4
Fri,
5
Sat.
6
Sun.
7
Mon.
8
Tues.
9
Wed.
10
Thur.
11
Fri.
12
Sat.
13
Sun.
14
Mon.
15
Tues.
16
Wed.
17
Thur.
18
Fri.
19
Sat.
20
Sun.
21
Mon.
22
Tues.
23
Wed.
24
Thur.
25
Fri.
26
Sat.
27
Sun.
28
Mon.
29
Tues.
30
Wed.
31
Thur.
24
ALMANAC.
NOVEMBER, 1929.
1
Fri.
2
Sat.
3
Sun.
4
Mon.
5
Tues.
6
Wed.
7
Thur.
8
Fri.
9
Sat.
10
Sun.
11
Mon.
12
Tues.
13
Wed.
14
Thur.
15
Fri.
16
Sat.
17
Sun.
18
Mon.
19
Tues.
20
Wed.
21
Thur.
22
Fri.
23
Sat.
24
Sun.
25
Mon.
26
Tues.
27
Wed.
28
Thur.
29
Fri.
30
Sat.
ALMANAC.
25
DECEMBER, 1929.
1
Sun.
2
Mon.
3
Tues.
4
Wed.
5
Thur.
6
Fit
7
Sat.
8
Sun.
9
Mon.
10
Tues.
11
Wed.
12
Thur.
13
Fri.
14
Sat.
15
16
Sun.
Mon.
17
Tues.
18
Wed.
19
Thur.
20
Fri.
21
Sat.
22
Sun.
23
Mon.
24
Tues.
25
Wed.
26
Thur.
27
Fri.
28
Sat.
29
Sun.
30
Mon.
31
Tues.
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIAT
EDUCATION, UNITED PROVINCES.
THE INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION ACT, 1921
UNITED PROVINCES ACT No. II OF 1921.
[PASSED BY THE LOCAL LEGISLATURE OF THE UNITED
PEOVINCES OF AGRA AND OUDH.]
Received the assent of the Governor of the United Provinces
of Agra and Oudh on the 30^ September, 1921, and of
the Governor -General on the 10th December, 1921, and
was published under section 81 of the Government of
India Act on the 1th January, 1922.
An Act for the establishment of a Board of High School
and Intermediate Education.
WHEREAS it is expedient to establish a Board to take
the place of the Allahabad University in regulating
and supervising the system of High School and Inter-
mediate education in the United Provinces, and to
prescribe courses for English Middle classes, subject to
the control of the Local Government : It is hereby
enacted as follows : -
Short title, 1. (l) This Act may be called the Intermediate
extent and
commence- Education Act, 1921.
ment * (2) It extends to the territories for the
being administered by the Local Government of the
United Provinces.
THE ACT 27
, (3) It shall come into force on such date as the
Local Government may, by notification in the Gazette,
direct.
2, In this Act, and in all regulations made here- Definitions,
under, unless there is anything repugnant in the subject
or context,
(a) " Board " means the Board of High School and
Intermediate Education ;
(6) " Institution " means the whole of an institu-
tion, or a part thereof, as the case may be ;
(c) " Minister " means Minister for Education in
the United Provinces ;
(d) " Recognition " means recognition for the pur-
pose of preparing candidates for admission to
the Board's examinations ;
(e) " Regulations " means regulations made by the
Board under this Act.
3. (1) The Board shall be established as soon as may Constitution
be after this Act has come into force, and shall consist
of
(a) the Director of Public Instruction (ex officio
Chairman) ;
(b) two Principals of Intermediate colleges main-
tained by Government, appointed by the
Minister ;
(c) four Principals of Intermediate colleges not
maintained by Government, elected from among
themselves ;
(d) one head master of a High School maintained by
Government, appointed by the Minister ;
(e) two head masters of High Schools not main-
tained by Government, elected from among
themselves ;
( / ) a representative of Engineering appointed by
the Minister ;
28 CALENDAR 1928-29.
(g) a representative of Agriculture, appointed by
the Minister ;
(h) a member of the Medical profession, appointed
by the United Provinces Medical Council ;
(i) a member of the staff of a Training College for
teachers, appointed by the Minister ;
(j) a representative of Industries, appointed by
the Minister ;
(k) a lady appointed by the Minister to represent
women's education ;
(I) representatives elected by Universities estab-
lished by law in the United Provinces, whose
number shall be, as nearly as possible, one-
third of the total number of the other members
of the Board ;
Explanation. The number of representatives to be
assigned to each University under clause (I) of
sub-section (1) shall be fixed by the Minister;
(m) three members elected by the non-official mem-
bers of the Legislative Council ;
(n) one member each appointed by the Upper India
Chamber of Commerce and the United Prov-
inces Chamber of Commerce ;
(o) one member each appointed by the British
Indian Association and by the Agra Landhol-
ders' Association.
(2) Persons not more than three in number may be
nominated by the Minister to secure the representation
of minorities not otherwise adequately represented.
(3) The Board shall be authorized to co-opt
persons, not exceeding three in number, on account of
their possessing expert knowledge in subjects of study
included in the courses prescribed by the Board.
THE ACT 2ft
4. (1) Members other than ex officio and co-opted Term of office
of members,
members shall hold office for a term of three years from
the date of the notification published under section 6.
(2) The term of office of co-opted members shall
terminate on the same date as that of other appointed
members.
5. When the prescribed term of office of members Filling of
other than ex officio members has expired, the vacancies expiry of
so caused shall be filled as soon as conveniently may be ^ e
in accordance with sub-section (1) of section 3.
6. The names of the persons who have been nomin- Publication
of names.
ated or elected to be members of the Board, in accord-
ance with sub-sections (1) and (2) of section 3 or with sec-
tion 5, shall be published by notification in the Gazette.
7. Subject to the provisions of this Act the Board Powers of
shall have the following powers, namely : e oar
(1) to prescribe courses of instruction for the Inter-
mediate classes and the High and Middle sections of
English schools in such branches of education as it may
think fit ;
(2) to grant diplomas or certificates to persons who
(a) have pursued a course of study in an institution
admitted to the privileges of recognition by
the Board ; or
(6) are teachers ; or
(c) have studied privately under conditions laid
down in the regulations, and have passed the
examinations of the Board under like condi-
tions ;
(3) to conduct examinations at the end of the High
School and Intermediate courses ;
(4) to recognize institutions for the purposes of its
examinations ;
(5) to admit candidates to its examinations ;
CALENDAR 1928-29.
Exemption
of certain
Universities
from the
operation of
the Act.
Powers of
Minister.
(6) to demand and receive such fees as may be pres-
cribed in the regulations ;
(7) to publish the results of its examinations ;
(8) to co-operate with other authorities in such
manner and for such purposes as the Board may deter-
mine ;
(9) to call for reports from the Department of Public
Instruction on the condition of recognized institutions
or of institutions applying for recognition ;
(10) to submit to the Minister its views on any
matter with which it is concerned ;
(11) to see the schedules of new demands proposed
to be included in the budget relating to institutions re-
cognized by it and to submit, if it thinks fit, its views
thereon for the consideration of the Minister ;
(12) to do all such other acts and things as may be
requisite in order to further the objects of the Board as a
body constituted for regulating and supervising High
School and Intermediate education.
8. Nothing in the Act shall affect the constitution,
powers or functions of the Benares Hindu University, the
Aligarh Moslem University or the Lucknow University,
except with their consent recorded in writing.
9. (1) The Minister shall have the right to address
the Board with reference to any of the work conducted
or done by the Board and to communicate to the Board
his views on any matter with which the Board is con-
cerned.
(2) The Board shall report to the Minister such
action, if any, as it is proposed to take or has been taken
upon his communication.
(3) If the Board does not, within a reasonable
time, take action to the satisfaction of the Minister, the
Minister may, after considering any explanation fur-
THE ACT 31
nished or representation made by the Board, issue such
directions consistent with this Act as he may think fit,
and the Board shall comply with such directions.
(4) In any emergency which, in the opinion of
the Minister, requires that immediate action should be
taken, the Minister may take such action consistent with
this Act as he deems necessary without previous con-
sultation with the Board, and shall forthwith inform the
Board thereof.
10. The following shall be the officers of the Board : Officers of
(1) The Chairman. theBoard *
(2) The Secretary.
(3) Such other officers as may be declared by the
regulations to be officers of the Board.
11. (1) It shall be the duty of the Chairman to see Powers and
that this Act and the regulations are faithfully observed, Chairman
and he shall have all powers necessary for this purpose.
(2) The Chairman shall have power to convene
meetings of the Board, and shall call a meeting at any
time after due notice, on a requisition signed by not less
than five members of the Board and stating the business
to be brought before the meeting.
(3) In any emergency, arising out of the adminis-
trative business of the Board, which, in the opinion of
the Chairman, requires that immediate action should be
taken, the Chairman shall take such action as he deems
necessary, and shall thereafter report his action to the
Board at its next meeting.
(4) The Chairman shall exercise such other powers
as may be prescribed by the regulations.
12. (1) The Secretary shall be appointed by the
Minister upon such conditions and for such period as the duties of
Minister may deem fit. ecre wy
He shall be removable from office by the votes of not
less than three-fourths of the members present at a
32
CALENDAR 1928-29.
Appointment
and constitu-
tion of
Committees.
special meeting of the Board at which not less than ne-
half of the total number of the members are present.
(2) The Secretary shall, subject to the control of
the Board, be the administrative officer of the Board.
He shall be responsible for the presentation of the annual
estimates and statement of accounts.
(3) He shall be responsible for seeing that all
moneys are expended on the purpose for which they are
granted or allotted.
(4) He shall be responsible for keeping the
minutes of the Board.
(5) He shall exercise such other powers as may be
prescribed by the regulations.
(6) He shall be entitled to be present and to
speak at any meeting of the Board, but shall not be
entitled to vote thereat.
13. (1) The Board shall appoint Committees of
Courses, an Examinations' Committee, a Committee for
Recognition, a Finance Committee, and such other com-
mittees, if any, as may be prescribed by the regulations.
(2) Such committees shall consist of members of
the Board and of such other persons, if any, as the Board
in each case may think fit.
(3) A Committee may co-opt persons to serve
thereon up to a limit of one-third of the total number
of members of the Committee.
(4) Members of Committees other than co-opted
members shall hold office for a period of three years.
The term of office of co-opted members shall be one
year :
Provided that the term of office of members of a
Committee, whether they are members of the Board or
not, shall not extend beyond that of appointed members
of the Board.
THE ACT 33
14. All matters relating to the exercise by the Board Ezerciseof
t _ DOWBrS
of powers conferred upon it by this Act which have by delegated by
regulation been delegated by the Board to any one of committees.
its committees shall stand referred to that Committee,
and the Board, before exercising any such powers, shall
receive and consider the report of the Committee with
respect to the matter in question.
REGULATIONS.
15. (1) The Board may make regulations for the Power of
purpose of carrying into effect the provisions of this Act. make
(2) In particular and without prejudice to the re s uafclons '
generality of the foregoing power the Board may make
regulations providing for all or any of the following
matters, namely :
(a) the constitution, powers and duties of com-
mittees ;
(6) the conferment of diplomas and certificates ;
(c) the conditions of recognition of institutions for
the purposes of its examinations ;
(d) the courses of study to be laid down for all
certificates and diplomas ;
(e) the conditions under which candidates shall be
admitted to the examinations of the Board
and shall be eligible for diplomas and certifi-
cates ;
(/) the fees for admission to the examinations of
the Board ;
(g) the conduct of examinations ;
(Ji) the appointment of examiners and their duties
and powers in relation to the Board's examina-
tions ;
(i) the election of members to the Board under
clauses (c) and (e) of sub-section (1) of section
3;
3
CALENDAR 1928-29
Previous
publication
and sanction
of regula-
tions made
by Board.
Duty of
Board to
submit
regulations
and power
of Minister
to make
regulations
in default of
Board.
( j ) the admission of institutions to the privileges
of recognition and the withdrawal of recogni-
tion;
(fc) all matters which by this Act are to be or may
be provided for by regulations ;
(I) the conditions under which grants-in-aid shall
be given to institutions recognized by the
Board.
16. Regulations under section 15 shall not be made
except after publication and shall not take effect until
they have been sanctioned by the Minister and published
in the Gazette.
17. (1) Within six months from the commencement
of this Act or within such further period as the Local
Government may fix in this behalf
(a) the Board, as constituted under this Act, shall
prepare a body of regulations for the sanction
of the Minister ;
(6) if any alterations in, or additions to, the draft
regulations submitted appear to the Minister
to be necessary, the Minister may, after con-
sulting the Board, sanction the proposed body
of regulations with such additions and altera-
tions as appear to be necessary.
(2) If a draft body of regulations is not submit-
ted by the Board within the period of six months from
the commencement of this Act or within such further
period as may be fixed under sub-section (1), the Minis-
ter may, within six months after the expiry of such
period or of such further period, make, after previous
publication, regulations which shall have the same force
as if they had been prepared and sanctioned under sub-
section (1).
THE ACT 35
1J5. All casual vacancies among the members (other Ca8Ual
than ex officio members) of the Board or of a committee va cancies.
appointed by the Board shall be filled, as soon as con-
veniently may be, by the person or body who appointed,
elected, or co-opted the member whose place has become
vacant and the person appointed, elected or co-opted to
a casual vacancy shall be a member of the Board or Com-
mittee for the residue of the term for which the person
whose place he fills would have been a member.
19. No act or proceeding of the Board or of a com- Proceedings
mittee appointed by it shall be invalidated merely by [^ j^^o
reason of the existence of a vacancy or vacancies among of vacancies,
its members.
20. (1) The Board and its Committees may make p werof
bye-laws consistent with this Act and the Regulations Committees
(a) laying down the procedure to be observed at to make bye-
their meetings and the number of members
required to form a quorum ;
(6) providing for all matters which consistently
with this Act and the Regulations arc to be
prescribed by byelaws ; and
(c) providing for all other matters solely concerning
the Board and its committees and not pro-
vided for by this Act and the regulations.
(2) The Board and its committees shall make bye-
laws providing for the giving of notice to the members
of the Board or Committee of the dates of meetings, and
of the business to be considered at meetings, and for the
keeping of a record of the proceedings of meetings.
(3) The Board may direct the amendment or recis-
sion of ly byelaw made by a Committee under this sec-
tion, and the Committee shall give Affect to any such
direction.
36 CALENDAR 1928-29
OFFICERS OF THE BOARD.
CHAIRMAN.
H. R. Harrop, Esq., M.A., M.L.C., Officiating Direc-
tor of Public Instruction, United Provinces, Allahabad
(ex-officio).
SECRETARY.
Rai Bahadur A. C. Mukerji, M.A., I.E.S.
MEMBERS OF THE BOARD.
Appointed by the Minister under clause (b), sub-section (1), section 3 of the
Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
1. W. G. P. Wall, Esq., M.SC., Inspector of Euro-
pean Schools, United Provinces, Naini Tal.
2. Rai Sahib Pandit Kali Prasad, B.A., Principal,
Government Jubilee Intermediate College,
Lucknow.
Elected by the Principals of Intermediate Colleges not maintained by Govern-
ment from among themselves under clause (c), sub-section (1), section 3
of the, Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
3. Hira Lai Khanna, Esq., M.SC., Principal, B. N.
Sanatan Dharm Intermediate College, Cawn-
pore.
4. Narayan Das, Esq., B.A., Principal, Radhaswami
Educational Institute, Agra.
5. Lala Diwan Chand, M.A., Principal, D. A.-V. Col-
lege, Cawnpore.
6. Lieut.-Col. T. F. O'Donnell, M.C., B.A., Principal,
Meerut College, Meerut.
Appointed by the Minister under clause (d), sub-section (1), section 3 of the
Intermediate Education Act f 1921.
7. Maulvi Mahdi Husain Nasiri, M.A., Head Master,
Government High School, Aligarh.
MEMBERS OF THE BOABD 37
Eleited by the Head Masters of High Schools not maintained by Govern-
ment from among themselves under clause (e), sub-section (1), section 3
of the Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
S. Kali Das Kapur, Esq., M.A., L.T., Head Master,
Kali Charan High School, Lucknow.
9. Devi Prasad Khattry, Esq., B.A., L.T., Head Master,
Pandit Pirthi Nath High School, Cawnpore.
Appointed by the Minister under clause (/), sub-section (1), section 3 of the
Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
10. Lala Wazir Sahai, Chief Engineer, Allahabad
Improvement Trust, Allahabad.
Appointed by the Minister under clause (g), sub-section (1), section 3 of the
Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
11. Lala Anand Sarup, Government Treasurer and
Honorary Magistrate, Muzaffarnagar.
Appointed by the United Provinces Medical Council under clause (h), sub-
section (1), section 3 of the Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
12. Rai Bahadur Dr. Baij Nath Vyas, M.B. (Punjab),
Reader in Materia Medica, King George's
Medical College, Lucknow.
Appointed by the Minister under clause (i), sub -section (1), section 3 of the
Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
13. A. A. Simpson, Esq., M.A., Principal, Training
College, Allahabad.
Appointed by the Minister under clause (j ), sub-section (1), section 3 of the
Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
14. Rai Bahadur Vikramajit Singh, B.A., LL.B., M.L.C.,
116, Civil Lines, Cawnpore.
Appointed by the Minister under clause (k), sub-section (1), section 3 of the
Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
15. Miss H. G. Stuart, M.A., O.B.E., Chief Inspectress
of Girls' Schools, United Provinces, Allahabad.
38 CALENDAR 1928-29
Elected by the Allahabad University under clause (I), sub-section (1), section
3 of the Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
16. Dr. D. R. Bhattacharya, D.SC., Ph.D., Dean of. the
Faculty of Science, Allahabad University,
Allahabad.
17. Pandit Amarnatha Jha, M.A., Reader in English,
Allahabad University, Allahabad.
Elected by the Lucknow University under clause (I), sub-section (1), section 3
of the Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
18. Dr. K. N. Bahl, M.SC., D. PHIL., D.SC., Professor of
Zoology, Lucknow University, Lucknow.
19. Dr. S. K. Mukerji, M.SC., D.SC. (London), F.L.S.,
Reader in Botany, Lucknow University, Luck-
now.
Elected by the Benares Hindu University under clause (1), sub-section (1),
section 3 of the Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
20. A. B. Dhruva, Esq., M.A., LL.B., Pro-Vice-Chancel-
lor, Benares Hindu University, Benares.
Elected by the Aligarh Muslim University under clause (I), sub-section (1),
section 3 of the Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
21. A. M. Kureishy, Esq., M.A., Principal, Aligarh
Muslim University Intermediate College, Ali-
garh.
Elected by the Agra University under clause (/), sub-section (1), section 3
o the Intermediate Education Act, 1921
22. Chhail Behari Capoor, Esq., B.A., LL.B., Beharipur,
Bareilly.
23. Kalka Prasad Bhatnagar, Esq., M.A., LL.B., Pro-
fessor, D. A.-V. College, Cawnpore.
24. B. G. Nandi, Esq., B.A., Professor, St. Andrew's
College, Gorakhpur.
MEMBERS OF THE BOARD 39
Elected by the non-official members of ike United Provinces Legislative
Council under clause (m), sub-section (1), section 3 of the Intermediate
Education Act, 1921.
25. Khan Bahadur Shaikh Abdullah Sahib, M.L.C.,
Vakil, Aligarh.
26. Muhammad Habib, Esq., B.A. (Oxon.), M.L.C.,
Bar.-at-Law, Professor, Aligarh Muslim Univer-
sity, Nili Chatr, Aligarh.
27. Rai Bahadur Mathura Prasad Mehrotra, B.A.,
M.L.C., Biswan, district Sitapur.
Appointed by the Upper India Chamber of Commerce under clause (n),
sub-action (1), section 3 of the Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
28. J. P. Srivastava, Esq., M. sc., M.L.C., Civil Lines,
Cawnpore.
Appointed by the United Provinces Chamber of Commerce under clause (/i),
(1), sub-section (1), section, 3 of the Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
29. B. N. Chopra, Esq., Assistant Secretary, United
Provinces Chamber of Commerce, Cawnpore.
Appointed by the British Indian Association under clause (o), sub-section
(1), section 3 of the Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
30. Rai Bahadur Kunwar Bisheshar Dayal Seth, M.L.C.,
Taluqdar of Moizuddinpur, district Sitapur.
Appointed by the Agra Landholders' Association under clause (o), sub-section
section 3 of the Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
31. Shyam Lai, Esq., M.A., LL.B., M.L.C., Nawabganj,
Cawnpore.
Nominated by the Minister under sub-section (2), section 3 of the Intermediate
Education Act, 1921.
32. Khan Bahadur Hafiz Hidayat Husain, B.A., Bar-
at-Law, M.L.C., Civil Lines, Cawnpore.
33. Dr. Sam Higginbottom, M.A., B.SC., D. PHILANV
Principal, Agricultural Institute, Naini, Allaha-
bad.
34. Khan Bahadur Maulvi Muhammad Ubaid-ur-Rah*
man Khan, M.L.C., Habibganj, Aligarh.
40 CALENDAR 1928-29
Co-opted by the Board of High School and Intermediate Education, United
Provinces, under sub-section (3^, section 3 of the Intermediate Educa-
tion Act, 1921.
35. P. Seshadri, Esq., M.A., Principal, S. D. College of
Commerce, Cawnpore.
36. S. C. Chatterji, Esq., M.A., Principal, Christ Church
College, Cawnpore.
37. Dr. Tara Chand, M.A., D. PHIL. (Oxon.), Principal,
Kayastha Pathshala University College, Allaha-
bad.
MEMBERS OF THE COMMITTEES OF COURSES.
(1) ENGLISH.
(1) Pandit Amaranatha Jha (Member, Board),
(Convener).
(2) P. Seshadri, Esq. (Co-opted Member, Board).
(3) Lieutenant-Colonel T. F. O'Donnell (Member,
Board).
(4) Lala Diwan Chand (Member, Board).
(5) D. P. Khattry, Esq. (Member, Board).
(6) Rai Sahib Pandit Kali Prasad (Member, Board),
(Co-opted Member).
(7) R, S. Weir, Esq., M.A., Offg. Assistant Dir-
ector of Public Instruction, United Provinces,
Allahabad (Co-opted Member).
(2) SANSKRIT AND HINDI.
(1) A. B. Dhruva, Esq 1 (Member, Board), (Convener).
(2) Pandit Ram Narayan Misra, B.A., Head Master,
Central Hindu High School, Benares City,
(on leave).
(3) Pandit Dharmendra Nath Sastri, M.A., M.O.L.
(Punjab), M.R.A.S., Professor, Meerut College,
Meerut.
MEMBERS OF THE COMMITTEES OF COURSES 41
(4) Pandit Ayodhya Nath Sh'arma, M.A. (Benares),
Professor, S. D. College of Commerce, Cawn-
pore.
{5) Dr. P. K. Acharya, M.A., Ph.D., D.Litt., Pro-
fessor, Allahabad University, Allahabad.
(6) Dr. Mangal Deva Shastri, M.A., D.phil., Pro-
fessor, Government Sanskrit College, Benares.
(Co-opted Member).
(7) Mr. Hari Har Nath Tandon, M.A., Professor,
St. John's College, Agra (Co-opted Member).
(3) ARABIC, PERSIAN AND URDU.
(1) Maulvi Mahdi Husain Nasiri (Member, Board),
(Convener).
(2) Dr. A. S. Tritton, Professor, Aligarh Muslim
University, Aligarh.
{3) Khan Bahadur Hafiz Hidayat Husain (Member,
Board).
(4) Daya Narayan Nigam, Esq., B.A., Professor,
Christ Church College, Cawnpore.
{5) Pandit Manohar Lai Zutshi, M.A., Principal,
Government Training College, Lucknow.
(6) S. M. Zamin AH, M.A., Lecturer, Allahabad Uni-
versity, Allahabad (Co-opted Member).
(7) Kabir Ahmad, Esq., M.A., Professor, Bareilly
College, Bareilly (Co-opted Member).
(4) HISTORY AND CIVICS.
(1) Dr. Tara Chand (Co-opted Member, Board),
(Convener).
(2) A. B. Dhruva, Esq. (Member, Board).
(3) Mohammad Habib, Esq. (Member, Board).
(4) K. D. Kapur, Esq. (Member, Board).
(5) Dr. Beni Prasad, Reader, Allahabad Univer-
sity, Allahabad.
(6) G. N. Bose-Mallick, Esq., M.A., Professor, Meerut
College, Meerut (Co-opted Member).
42 CALENDAR 1928-29
(7) L. N. Mathur, Esq., B.A., L.T., M.R.A.S., Head
Master, Janki Prasad Anglo- Sanskrit High
School, Khurja (Co-opted Member).
(5) GEOGRAPHY.
(1) H. B. Wetherill, Esq., M.A., Inspector of Schools,
Lucknow Division, Lucknow (Convener),
(resigned).
(2) K. Kishore, Esq., B.A., L.T., F.R.G.S., Registrar,
Departmental Examinations, United Prov-
inces, Allahabad.
(3) K. D. Kapur, Esq. (Member, Board).
(4) H. Tinker, Esq., B.SC., I.E.S., Inspector of Schools,
Allahabad Division, Allahabad.
(5) W. E. Andrews, Esq., M.A., Principal, La
Martiniere College, Lucknow.
(6) M. L. Agarwala, Esq., B.A., L.T., B.E.D. (Edin-
burgh), Lecturer, Training College, Allahabad
(Co-opted Member).
(6) BENGALI, MARATHI AND GUJARATI.
(1) A. B. Dhruva, Esq. (Member, Board), (Convener).
(2) Dr. S. K. Mukerji (Member, Board).
(3) Dr. P. K. Acharya, M.A., Ph.D., D.Litt., Pro-
fessor, Allahabad University, Allahabad.
(4) J. L. Sathe, Esq., i.c.s., Excise Commissioner,
United Provinces, Allahabad.
(5) A. C. Banerji, Esq., M.A., M.SC., F.R.A.S. (Eng.),
F.L.M.S. (London), Reader in Mathematics,
Allahabad University, Allahabad.
(6) Dr. K. C. Pandya, M.A., Ph.D., Professor, St.
John's College, Agra (Co-opted Member).
(7) S. V. Puntanbekar, Esq., M.A., Bar.-at-Law,
Professor, Benares Hindu University, Benares
(Co-opted Member).
MEMBERS OF THE COMMITTEES OF COURSES 4$
(7) GREEK, LATIN, HEBREW AND MODERN
EUROPEAN LANGUAGES.
(1) A. A. Simpson, Esq. (Member, Board),
(Convener).
(2) Dr. J. 0. Weir, B.A., LL.D., Principal, University
School of Law, Allahabad.
(3) Dr. N. R. Dhar, Professor, Allahabad Uni-
versity, Allahabad.
(4) D. Kerrin, Esq., M.A., Head Master, Boys' High
School, Allahabad (on leave).
(8) MATHEMATICS.
(1) R. H. Moody, Esq., M.A., Deputy Director of
Public Instruction, United Provinces,
Allahabad (Convener).
(2) Swami Dayal Seth, Esq., M.SC., Professor, Christ
Church College, Cawnpore.
(3) A. C. Banerji, Esq., M.A., M.SC., F.R.A.S. (Eng.),
F.L.M.S. (London), Reader in Mathematics,
Allahabad University, Allahabad.
(4) A. M. Kureishy, Esq. (Member, Board).
(5) Hira Lai Khanna, Esq. (Member, Board).
(6) D. P. Khattry, Esq. (Member, Board), (Co-
opted Member).
(1) J. A. Strang, Esq., M.A., B.SC., Professor, Luck-
now University, Lucknow (Co-opted Member).
(9) PHYSICS.
(1) W. G. P. Wall, Esq. (Member, Board), (Convener).
(2) Dr. M. N. Saha, Professor, Allahabad University,
Allahabad.
(3) Dr. Wali Mohammad, M.A., Ph.D., Professor,.
Lucknow University, Lucknow.
(4) S. K. Mukerji, Esq., M.SC., Agra College, Agra.
(5) Jai Narayan Budhwar, Esq., M.SC., Professor,.
Christ Church College, Cawnpore.
44 CALENDAR 1928-29
(10) CHEMISTRY.
(1) Dr. S. M. Sane, Professor, Lucknow University,
Lueknow (Convener).
(2) H. Krall, Esq., B.A., B.SC., Professor, Agra College,
Agra.
(3) Madho Prasad, Esq., M.sc., Professor, Meerut
College, Meerut.
(4) W. G. P. Wall, Esq., (Member, Board).
(5) Dr. N. G. Chatterji, Technological Institute,
Cawnpore.
(6) Pandit Durga Dutta Joshi, B.A., M.SC., Principal,
Government Intermediate College, Fyzabad,
(Co-opted Member).
(11) BIOLOGY.
(1) Dr. W. S. Dudgeon, Ph.D., Principal, Ewing
Christian College, Allahabad (Convener).
(2) Dr. K. N. Bahl (Member, Board).
(3) Dr. S. K. Mukerji (Member, Board).
(4) Dr. K. C. Mehta, Professor, Agra College, Agra.
(5) L. P. Mathur, Esq., M.SC., Professor, St. John's
College, Agra.
<6) Dr. D. R. Bhattacharya (Member, Board), (Go-
opted Member).
(12) AGRICULTURE.
(1) Dr. S. Higginbottom, (M mber, Board), (Con-
vener).
(2) Lala Anand Sarup (Member, Board).
(3) Shyam Lai, Esq. (Member, Board).
(4) C. Maya Das, Esq., M.A., B.SC., (Edin.), Principal,
Agricultural College, Cawnpore.
<5) H. N. Batham, Esq., M.A., Agricultural College,
Cawnpore.
MEMBERS OF THE COMMITTEES OF COURSES 45*
(6) T. S. Sabnis, Esq., M.SC., Professor, Agricul-
tural College, Cawnpore (Co-opted Member).
(7) Masson Vaugh, Esq., B.SC., Professor, Agricul-
tural Institute, Nairn, Allahabad (Co-opted
Member).
(13) DRAWING, MANUAL TRAINING, METAL WORK, ETC.
(1) G. F. Worthen, Esq., Officer on Special Duty,
Office of the Director of Public Instruction,
United Provinces, Allahabad (Convener).
(2) Lala Wazir Sahai (Member, Board).
(3) R. H. Moody, Esq., M.A., Deputy Director of
Public Instruction, United Provinces, Allaha-
bad.
(4) Asit K. Haldar, Esq., Principal, Government
School of Arts and Crafts, Lucknow.
(5) Maharaj Krishna Varma, Esq., Teacher, Agra
College, Agra.
(6) C. K. Buckley, Esq., Principal, Government
Textile School, Cawnpore (Co-opted Member).
(14) COMMERCE.
(1) J. P. Srivastava, Esq. (Member, Board), (Con-
vener).
(2) B. N. Chopra, Esq. (Member, Board).
(3) Boop Ram Gupta, Esq., Professor, St. John's
College, Agra.
(4) S. P. Shah, Esq., i.c.s., Director of Industries,
United Provinces, Cawnpore.
(5) Dr. D. Pant, Lecturer, Lucknow University,
Lucknow.
(6) D. K. Shakwalkar, Esq., M.A., LL.B., B. com.,
Professor, D. A. V. College, Cawnpore (Co-
opted Member).
(7) K. L. Govil, Esq., B.com., Professor, S. D. College
of Commerce, Cawnpore (Co-opted Member).
46 CALENDAR 1928-29
(15) LOGIC.
(1) Lala Diwan Chand (Member, Board), (Convener).
(2) S. C. Chatterji, Esq. (Co-opted Member, Board).
{3) E. Ahmad Shah, Esq., M.A., B. Litt., Reader,
Lucknow University, Lucknow.
(4) Narayan Das, Esq. (Member, Board).
(5) J. P. Suda, Esq., M.A., Professor, Mecrut College,
Meerut.
(16) ECONOMICS.
(1) C. D. Thompson, Esq., M.A., Head of the Econo-
mics department, Allahabad University,
Allahabad (Convener).
(2) S. K. Rudra, Esq., M.A. (Cantab), Reader,
Allahabad University, Allahabad.
(3) Gurniukh Nihal Singh, Esq., M.SC., Professor,
Benares Hindu University, Benares.
(4) Dr. L. K. Hyder, Professor, Aligarh Muslim
University, Aligarh.
(5) B. N. Chopra, Esq. (Member, Board).
(6) K. P. Bhatnagar, Esq., M.A., LL.B., Professor,
D. A. V. College, Cawnpore (Co-opted Member).
{!) Charan Adhar Kohly, Esq., M.A., Assistant
Master, Radhaswami Educational Institute,
Agra (Co-opted Member).
(17) INDIAN MUSIC.
(1) Lala Wazir Sahai (Member, Board), (Convener).
{2) Major D. R. Ranjit Singh, Man Bhawan, George
Town, Allahabad.
{3) V. A. Kashalkar, Esq., Sangit Pravin, Kayastha
Pathshala Intermediate College, Allahabad.
(4) Raja Nawab AH Khan, Lucknow.
{5) Jai Deva Singh, Esq., Teacher, Gurnarain Khattr
High School, Cawnpore.
MEMBERS OF THE COMMITTEES OF COURSES 47
(18) DOMESTIC SCIENCE, PHYSIOLOGY, HYGIENE
AND CHILD-STUDY.
<1) Miss H. G. Stuart (Member, Board), (Convener).
(2) Mrs. B. Padma Bai Rao, B.A., Lady Principal,
Theosophical National Girls' School and
Women's College, Benares.
<(3) Miss T. J. Gandhy, M.SC., Inspectress of Girls'
Schools, Allahabad Circle, Allahabad.
(4) Miss C. R. Poovaiah, B.A., Lady Principal,
Crosthwaite Girls' College, Allahabad.
{5) Miss M. K. Landrum, M.A., Teacher, Isabella
Thoburn College, Lucknow.
MEMBERS OF THE EXAMINATIONS' COMMITTEE.
<1) Dr. K. N. Bahl (Member, Board), (Chairman).
(2) Narayan Das, Esq. (Member, Board).
(3) Hira Lai Khanna, Esq. (Member, Board).
(4) K. D. Kapur, Esq. (Member, Board).
(5) Maulvi Mahcli Husain Nasiri (Member, Board).
{6) Rai A. C. Mukerji Bahadur, M.A., Secretary
of the Board, Secretary (Co-opted Member).
<7) Lt.-Col. T. F. O'Donnell (Member, Board),
(Co-opted Member).
MEMBERS OF THE RECOGNITION COMMITTEE.
(1) Lala Diwan Chand (Member, Board), (Convener).
(2) B. N. Chopra, Esq. (Member, Board).
(3) Rai Bahadur Mathura Prasad Mehrotra (Mem-
ber, Board).
,(4) Khan Bahadur Hafiz Hidayat Husain (Member,
Board).
(5) Khan Bahadur Sheikh Abdulla Sahib (Member,
Board)*
j(6) Narayan Das, Esq. (Member, Board).
,(7) The Deputy Director of Public Instruction,
United Provinces, Allahabad,
48 CALENDAR 1928-29
MEMBERS OF THE FINANCE COMMITTEE.
(1) The Assistant Director of Public Instruction,
United Provinces, Allahabad (Convener).
(2) Khan Bahadur Sheikh Abdulla Sahib (Member,
Board).
(3) Lala Diwan Chand (Member, Board).
(4) Rai Bahadur Mathura Prasad Mehrotra (Member,
Board).
(5) Khan Bahadur Hafiz Hidayat Husain (Member,
Board).
(6) Narayan Das, Esq. (Member, Board).
(7) Dr. Tara Chand (Co-opted Member, Board).
MEMBERS OF THE CURRICULUM COMMITTEE.
(1) H. B. Wetherill, Esq., M.A., Inspector of Schools,
Lucknow division, Lucknow (Convener) 9
(resigned).
(2) Dr. Tara Chand (Co-opted Member, Board).
(3) Miss H. G. Stuart (Member, Board).
(4) Hira Lai Khanna, Esq. (Member, Board).
(5) D. P. Khattry, Esq. (Member, Board).
(6) P. Seshadri, Esq. (Co-opted Member, Board).
(7) Narayan Das, Esq. (Member, Board).
(8) A. M. Kureishy, Esq. (Member, Board).
(9) Dr. S. K. Mukerji (Member, Board).
(10) Pandit Amaranatha Jha (Member, Board).
(11) Dr. W. S. Dudgeon, Ph.D., Principal, Ewing
Christian College, Allahabad.
(12) S. C. Chatterji, Esq. (Co-opted Member, Board).
(13) Miss C. R. Poovaiah, B.A., Lady Principal,
Crosthwaite Girls' College, Allahabad.
(14) K. G. Saiyidain, Esq., Principal, Training
College, Aligarh Muslim University, Aligarh.
(15) Misri Lai Gupta, Esq., M.A., L.T., Assistant Master,
Radhaswami Educational Institute, Agra.
MEMBERS OF THE COMMITTEES. 4&
(16) Shiva Nath Singh, Esq., B.A., L.T., Head Master,
K. D. J. High School, Maurawan.
MEMBERS OF THE COMMITTEE TO SCRUTINISE APPLICATIONS
FROM PRIVATE CANDIDATES.
(1) R. H. Moody, Esq., M.A., offg., Deputy Director
of Public Instruction, United Provinces,
Allahabad (Convener).
(2) W. G. P. Wall, Esq. (Member, Board).
(3) A. C. Banerji, Esq., M.A., M.SC., F.R.A.S. (Eng.) r
F.L.M.S. (London), Reader in Mathematics,
Allahabad University, Allahabad.
(4) Ganga Prasad, Esq., M.A., C.T., Head Master,
D. A.-V. High School, Allahabad.
(5) Devi Prasad, Esq., B.A., Head Master, C. A.-V,
High School, Allahabad.
MEMBERS OF THE RESULTS COMMITTEE.
(1) The Director of Public Instruction, United
Provinces, Allahabad (Chairman).
(2) R. H. Moody, Esq., M.A., offg. Deputy Director
of Public Instruction, United Provinces,
Allahabad.
(3) Dr. Tara Chand, M.A., D.phil. (Oxon.), Principal,
Kayastha Pathshala University College,
Allahabad.
(4) A. M. Kureishy, Esq., M.A., Principal, Aligarh
Muslim University Intermediate College,
Aligarh.
(5) The Secretary of the Board.
4
50 CALENDAR 1928-29
REPRESENTATIVES OF THE BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION, UNITED
PROVINCES, ON OTHER BODIES.
PROVINCIAL TEXT-BOOK COMMITTEE.
(1) Lala Diwan Chand, M.A., ")
(2) Narayan Das, Esq., B.A.,
> Members,
(3) Kali Das Kapur, Esq., M.A., L.T., | Board.
(4) Devi Prasad Khattry, Esq., B.A., L.T.,J
SENATE OF THE AGRA UNIVERSITY.
(1) Rai Bahadur Vikramajit Singh, "\
B.A., LL.B., M.L.C., f Members, Board.
{2) Pandit Amaranatha Jha, M.A., ;
OH. I.] REGULATIONS 51
REGULATIONS
of the
Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces.
N.B. These regulations are subject to amendtnent from time to time
as the Board may determine. Notice of such amendments will be given
in the Gazette.
CHAPTER I.
DEFINITIONS.
IN these regulations, unless there is anything repug-
nant in the subject or context, the following terms shall
have the following meaning :
(1) " Chairman " means the Chairman of the Board
of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces.
(2) " College " means an educational institution pre-
paring candidates for the Intermediate ex-
amination, or the Intermediate Examination
in Commerce or the Intermediate Examina-
tion in Agriculture of the Board, and recog-
nized by the Board for such a purpose.
(3) " Department " means the Department of Public
Instruction in the United Provinces.
(4) " Director " means the Director of Public In-
struction in the United Provinces.
(5) " Guardian " means the natural or legal guardian,
or a person approved by the head of the insti-
tution concerned as the guardian of a student
for the purposes of these regulations.
(6) " Head Master " means the head of a High
School recognized by the Board.
(7) " High School " means an educational institu-
tion preparing candidates for the High School
52 CALENDAR 1928-29 [CHS. I & II.
Examination of the Board and recognized by
the Board for such a purpose.
(8) " Inspector " means an inspecting officer of the
Education department.
(9) " Principal " means the head of a College.
(10) " Private candidate " means a candidate for
admission to an examination conducted by
the Board who has not, during the session
preceding the examination, been studying at
an educational institution of any kind.
(11) " Regular course of study" means a course of
study prescribed by the Board.
(12) " Scholar's Register " means the register contain-
ing the record of a scholar's progress kept in
the prescribed form* by the institution to
which he belongs.
(13) " Secretary " means thf Secretary of the Board of
High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces.
(14) Ck Session " means the period for which an insti-
tution is open for tuition during the twelve
months commencing with the formation of
new classes.
CHAPTER II.
THE BOAED.
1 . The Board shall meet ordinarily in the months of
November and February.
2. The meeting ^of the Board held in the month of
November shall be deemed to be the annual meeting of
the Board.
* The prescribed form is given in the United Provinces Educational
Code
CH, III.] THE SECRETARY 53
CHAPTER III.
THE SECRETARY.
1. All meetings* of the Board shall be convened
through the Secretary.
2. The Secretary shall conduct the official corre-
spondence of the Board under the authority of the Chair-
man .
3. All fees and dues payable to the Board, and all
sums received by the Secretary in his capacity as such,
shall be credited without delay into the Government
Treasury.
4. The Secretary shall be responsible, subject to the
control of the Examinations' Committee, for making
arrangements for the holding of the Board's examina-
tions.
5. The Secretary shall receive and, subject to the
-control of the Examinations' Committee, deal with
applications from candidates for admission to the
Board's examinations.
6. It. shall be the duty of the Secretary, on behalf
of the Board, to issue certificates in the prescribed form
to successful candidates of having passed the Board's
examinations .
7. The Secretary shall have charge of the Board's
library, and shall forward to Conveners of Committees of
Courses books received from the department or from
authors or publishers, and shall, at the request of
Conveners, circulate the same among the members.
8. The Secretary shall annually in the month of
March furnish the department with a list of schools and
colleges recognized for the purposes of the Board's
* A Press note giving a brief report of the proceedings of the Board
is published in the United Provinces Government Gazette and issued to the
papers as soon after each meeting as possible (vide Board's Resolution
no 9, dated the 17th, 18th and 19th August, 1922).
54 CALENDAR 1928-29 [CHS. Ill & IV.
examinations, specifying the optional subject or subjects
in which recognition has been granted.
9. The Secretary shall perform such other duties as
may be assigned to him by the Board or may be neces-
sary for the carrying out of its decisions.
CHAPTER IV.
COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD.
1. In addition to the committees specified in section?
13(1) of the Intermediate Education Act, 1921, the
Board shall appoint the following other committees :
(a) a curriculum committee to consider general ques-
tions relating to the curriculum ;
(6) a committee to scrutinize applications from
private candidates for permission to appear
at the Board's examinations ;
(c) a committee to bring out the results of examina-
tions.
2. The number of members appointed by the Board
to any committee shall, unless otherwise specified, be
not less than three and not more than five.
3. Election of members to fill up ordinary vacan-
cies in committees of the Board shall be held at the
meeting of the Board immediately following the occur-
rence of the vacancy and members shall hold office
from the date of election.
4. Except in the case of the Examinations' Com-
mittee, the Board shall appoint, at its annual meeting,
a member of each committee to be Convener of the
committee. In the event of the Convener ceasing to
hold office, the committee shall appoint a substitute
from among its own members to hold office till the next
annual meeting .of the Board.
CHS. IV & V.] COMMITTEE OF COUBSES.
55
5. The Secretary of the Board shall act as Secre-
tary of the Examinations' Committee, and shall perform
the functions performed by the Convener in other com-
mittees. Unless elected a member of the committee,
he will not have a vote.
CHAPTER V.
COMMITTEES OF COURSES.
1. The Board shall appoint Committees of Courses
in the following subjects which may be grouped in such
manner and with such additions and alterations as the
Board may from time to time decide :
(a) English.
(6) Sanskrit and Hindi.
(c) Arabic, Persian and
Urdu.
(d) History and Civics.
(e) Geography.
(/) Bengali, jMarathi
and Gujarati.
(g) Greek, Latin, Heb-
rew and Modern
European Langu-
ages.
(h) Mathematics.
(i) Physics.
(j) Chemistry.
(k) Biology.
(I) Agriculture.
(m) Drawing, Manual
Training and Metal
Work.
(n) Commerce.
(o) Logic.
(p) Economics.
(q) Indian Music.*
(r) Domestic Science,
Physiology, Hygiene
and Child-Study.
*The Board decided that Indian Music should be included in the
curriculum of High Schools as an optional subject in which no public
examination should be held. Heads of institutions teaching Indian
Music should grant a certificate to candidates who successfully complete
a four years' course in that subject (vide Board's Resolutions no. 9 and
15, dated 22nd February, 1924, and 8th November, 1924, respectively).
The Board decided at a later date that an examination in Music at the
High School stage may be held if at least six institutions provide instruc-
tion and apply for permission! to send up candidates for the examination
(vide paragraph 10 of the report of the meeting of the Examinations* Com-
mittee held on 9th November, 1927, adopted by the Board).
56 CALENDAR 1928-29 [CH. V.
2. Committees of Courses shall be constituted for
such other subjects of study as may from time to time
be prescribed by the Board.
3. Each Committee of Courses shall lay down a
syllabus in the subject with which it is concerned and
recommend or prescribe suitable text-books, when con-
sidered necessary, in conformity with that syllabus.
4. Every Committee of Courses shall ordinarily
meet in the month of February every year, and draw
up courses three years ahead of the examinations for
which they are intended to be prescribed. The draft
courses proposed by the Committee sliall be circulated,
as soon as may be, among the members of the Board.
Any observations made by members in regard thereto
shall be communicated by them direct to the Convener
concerned before the end of August in the same year.
If, in the opinion of the Convener, the nature of the cri-
ticisms received justifies the reconsideration of the courses
drawn up by the Committee, he shall summon another
meeting of the Committee to reconsider the courses or
ascertain by correspondence the views of the members
of the Committee on the suggestions received ; other-
wise the courses drawn up shall be taken to be finally
approved by the Committee.
5. The courses as finally approved by the Committee
shall be submitted to the Board at its annual meeting
by the Convener or by some other member of the Com-
mittee who is a member of the Board and is present at
the annual meeting.
6. The courses, as finally approved and sanctioned
by the Board, shall be printed in the prospectus and
issued by the Secretary nqt less than two years before
the date of the examination for which those courses
have been prescribed.
OHS. v THE EXAMINATIONS' COMMITTEE 57
& vi.]
7. If the Board is of opinion that a recommendation
made by a Committee of Courses requires reconsideration
it may refer the matter back to the Committee. After
considering the views of the Committee upon its
reference, the Board shall decide the matter.
8. A Committee may bring to the notice of the Board
any matter connected with the examinations or courses
in respect of the subject or subjects with which it is con-
cerned.
9. Any two or more Committees of Courses may,
and at the request of the Board shall, meet and render a
joint report upon any matter with which they are seve-
rally and jointly concerned.
CHAPTER VI.
THE EXAMINATIONS' COMMITTEE.
It shall be the duty of the Examinations' Committee,
subject to the sanction and control of the Board,
(a) to order examinations in conformity with the
regulations and to fix dates for holding them ;
(b) to consider the recommendations of the Com-
mittees of Courses with regard to examiners
and to prepare lists of examiners for the
approval of the Board ;
(c) to appoint boards of moderators on the recom-
mendation of the Committees of Courses ;
(d) to fix the number of question papers to be set
in each subject after receiving recommenda-
tions from the Committees of Courses con-
cerned ;
(e) to recommend the standard of length for written
tests in different subjects, after receiving
58 CALENDAR 1928-29 [CHS. vi & vn.
recommendations from the Committees of
Courses concerned ;
(/) ^ propose maximum and minimum marks for
each subject and for each part of a subject,
after receiving recommendations from the
Committees of Courses concerned ;
(g) to frame rules for the award of grace marks ;
(h) to prescribe forms of application to be filled up
by candidates applying for permission to appear
at examinations, and forms of certificates to
be granted to successful candidates ;
(i) to fix rates of honorarium for examiners, in-
vigilators, and others ;
0) to propose the opening and closing of centres
of examination ;
(k) to prescribe the mode of conducting the oral
'and practical tests, if any ;
(/) to consider all other matters arising out of the
conduct of examinations, and to make recom-
mendations, where necessary, to the Board.
CHAPTER VII.
RECOGNITION OF INSTITUTIONS BY THE BOARD.
1. The Committee of Recognition shall consist of
seven members, at least five of whom shall be elected
by the Board.
2. Its duties shall be to scrutinize applications for
recognition, to call for other information necessary for
purposes of recognition, and to perform such other
duties as may be delegated to it by the Board.
3. An institution desiring to be recognized for the
purposes of an examination conducted by the Board
shall not later than the month of October in the year
OH. VII.] BECOQNITION OF INSTITUTIONS BY THE 5
BOAED
preceding that in which it proposes to open classes in
preparation for an examination, apply to the Secretary
for permission to send up candidates.
4. On receipt of an application for recognition, the
Secretary shall forward it to the Inspector of Schools
within whose jurisdiction the institution is'situated with
a request for a local enquiry and a report and recom-
mendation regarding the fitness of the institution for re-
cognition. In the case of an Intermediate College the
Director of Public Instruction may associate with the
Inspector, for the purposes of the local enquiry and
report, one or more persons who will be chosen- from a
list of persons nominated by the Board. Such persons
shall be actually engaged in the work of teaching in the-
United Provinces. The report shall be submitted to the
Recognition Committee through the Director of Public
Instruction, who will add his comments and recommend-
ations, if any.
5. Applications for recognitions shall set out in
detail the following particulars, upon which the inspect-
ing authority should make its report and recommenda-
tion :
(a) whether there is a real need of the institution
in the locality ;
(6) the constitution of the governing body, if any ;
(c) the name of the manager or secretary or corre-
spondent, as the case may be ;
(d) the qualifications and rates of pay of the teach-
ing staff ;
(e) the examination or examinations for which it
desires recognition ;
(/) the subject or subjects of instruction in which,
the institution undertakes to make provision ;
60 CALENDAR 1928-29 [OH. VII.
(g) the accommodation provided in olass-rooms
and in hostels ;
(h) the provision made for the health, recreation
and discipline of scholars ;
(i) the financial position of the institution and the
sources and amount of income ;
(j) the scale of fees charged and the provision, if
any, for the admission of poor scholars ;
(k) the number of scholars in each class or section
of a class.
6. Any other information which the Board may
call for in connexion with the application shall be sup-
plied by the institution through the inspecting autho-
rity.
7. The inspecting authority in forwarding its report
shall state whether, and in what subjects or on what
conditions, recognition should, in its opinion, be
granted.
8. No institution shall be recognized unless it agrees
to comply with the following requirements :
(a) it shall, in the case of a High School, be open to
inspection by the inspecting officers of the
department, and in the case of an Interme-
diate College by the inspecting officer of the
department with whom the Director of Pub-
lic Instruction may, for purposes of formal
inspection, associate one or more persons
chosen from the list referred to in Regula-
tion 4 ;
(b) all information and returns called for by the
department or the Board shall be duly fur-
nished ;
OH. VII.] RECOGNITION OF INSTITUTIONS BY THE 61
BOARD
*(c) it shall not prepare and send up candidates for
a rival examination (High School, Interme-
diate, Intermediate in Commerce or Inter-
mediate in Agriculture) when an examination
of the same nature and similar standard is
held by the Board ;
(d) it shall make suitable arrangements for the
health, recreation and supervision of boarders
and for the sanitation of its premises generally.
9. If satisfied that an institution is deserving of
recognition, the Board shall direct the Secretary to enter
its name upon a list of recognized institutions to be kept
by him, and the Secretary shall inform the institution
and the Inspector of the division in which it is situated
in which subjects, on what conditions, and for what
examination or examinations it has been recognized.
10. Where an institution desires to add to the sub-
jects of instruction in respect of which recognition has
been granted, the procedure prescribed by the foregoing
regulations shall, as far as may be, be followed.
11. An institution recognized by the Board for the
purposes of any of its examinations shall submit to the
department annual returns giving the personnel and pay
of the teaching staff. Any change in the management
shall be communicated as soon after the change as
possible.
12. The department shall forward to the Secretary
copies of all notifications from a recognized institu*
tion communicating changes in management and in the
number, qualifications and salaries of the teaching
staff, the result of which, in its opinion, affects the
* This clause does not apply to the Cambridge School Certificate
Examination in the case of European schools.
62 CALENDAB 1928-29 [OH. VII.
fitness of the institution for continued recognition by
the Board.
13. If the department is of opinion that any insti-
tution recognized by the Board has, by reason of deterio-
ration, ceased to meet the requirements of the Board,
the department shall make a report to the Board. On
receipt of the department's report the Board may,
through the Divisional Inspector, institute such enquiry
as it thinks fit. The report of the Inspector will be sub-
mitted to the Board through the Director of Public
Instruction, who will add his comments, if any, and
the Board will take the report into consideration at
its next meeting and inform the department of its deci-
sion. In the case of an Intermediate College the Direc-
tor of Public Instruction may associate with the inspec-
tor for the purpose of the enquiry one or more persons
chosen from the list referred to in Regulation 4.
14. In any case in which the Board may decide
that action is necessary upon the report, it will first call
upon the authorities through the department to show
cause why such action should not be taken.
15. No action shall be taken by the Board on any
-report by the department without first giving the insti-
tution concerned an opportunity of making any repre-
sentation it may wish to make through the department
.to the Board.
16. The Board .shall, if satisfied that the institution
is no longer fit for recognition, direct the Secretary to
issue a warning to the governing body through the de-
partment that unless within a period fixed by the Board
the institution removes the defect or defects to which
attention has been called, it will be struck off the list
of recognized institutions or that recognition will be
^withdrawn in one or more optional subjects. The Board
<JHS. VII THE FINANCE COMMITTEE 63
& VIII.]
shall have power to extend from time to time the period
so fixed.
17. If within the time fixed by the Board, or within
such further time as may be allowed by it, the institu-
tion fails to satisfy the Board that it is conforming to
its requirements, the Board shall strike the institution
off the list of recognized institutions or shall withdraw
recognition in one or more optional subjects.
18. The Board may, at a subsequent date, after
report by an Inspector, re-instate an institution on the
list of recognized institutions, or, if recognition was
withdrawn in one or more optional subjects, restore
to it the privileges of preparing candidates therein.
19. No institution shall be recognized in any branch
of experimental science unless it satisfies the Board
(a) that the number of students assigned to a tingle
teacher in practical work at one time does nt
exceed 20 ;
(b) that suitable and, in the case of Intermediate
classes, separate laboratories for each branch
of experimental science are provided, and
that each of them is adequately equipped.
CHAPTER VIII.
THE FINANCE COMMITTEE.
1. The Finance Committee shall act as an advisory
t)ody in all matters concerning the finances of the Board.
2. It shall consist of
(a) the Assistant Director of Public Instruction,
ex-offiicio Convener ;
(6) one Principal of an Intermediate College not
maintained by Government, who is a member
of the Board ;
64 CALENDAR 1928-29 [CHS. VIII & IX.
(c) one representative of the non-official members
of the Legislative Council, who is a member
of the Board ;
(d) four other members elected by the Board.
3. The annual financial statement of the Board
shall first be laid before the Finance Committee before
being submitted to the Board.
4. The Finance Committee shall also see the sche-
dules of new demands proposed to be included in the
budget relating to institutions recognized by the Board,
and submit its views thereon for the consideration of the
Board.
CHAPTER IX.
THE CURRICULUM COMMITTEE.
1. The number of members appointed to the Curri-
culum Committee by the Board shall be twelve, of whom
at least nine shall be members of the different Commit-
tees of Courses.
2. The duties of the Curriculum Committee shall
be
(a) to consider the total number of compulsory
and optional subjects for each of the Board'a
examinations ;
(b) to arrange the standards of the courses for the
Middle, High School and Intermediate stages
in a regular graded order ;
(c) to prescribe curricula for the Intermediate
Examination leading to both University and
vocational courses ;
(d) to consider proposals for the introduction of new
subjects and the exclusion of existing sub-
jects ;
CHS. IX, X RESIDENCE OF STUDENTS AND 65*
& XI.] GRANTS-IN-AID
(e) to consider questions of the formation of groups,
of subjects and the alternation of one group
with another ;
(/) to lay down courses for the middle section of
English schools, and to recommend or pres-
cribe suitable text-books, when considered
necessary, in conformity with the syllabus.
CHAPTER X.
CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH GRANTS-IN-AID MAY BE GIVEN
TO RECOGNISED INSTITUTIONS.
1. No grant-in-aid shall be recommended to any
institution unless it has been recognized by the Board.
2. An institution receiving grant-in-aid shall, unless
specially exempted by the Government, invest all
Government grants not disbursed within a month of
their receipt in a Presidency or post office savings bank.
3. An institution shall be liable to have its grant
withdrawn if it continues, even after a warning by the
department to employ a teacher who takes an active
part in political agitation calculated to subvert the
authority of Government.
4. The provisions of the Educational Code, United
Provinces, with regard to grants-in-aid shall apply to
all institutions recognized by the Board, so far as they
are not inconsistent with these Regulations.
CHAPTER XI.
RESIDENCE OP STUDENTS.
1. Where accommodation is available, every stu-
dent of a recognized institution shall reside in a hostel
provided by it, or in a hostel recognized by the head
of the institution, or with a parent or guardian.
5
66 CALBNDAE 1928-29 [CHS. xi & XH.
2. Where no accommodation is available in a re-
cognized hostel, the head of an institution may permit
a student or students to live in lodgings reserved by the
keeper thereof for students of recognized institutions,
provided
(a) that the lodgings are open to inspection by the
head of the institution concerned or by any
member of the staff who is deputed for the
purpose ; and
(b) that the keeper is willing to submit to the re-
quirements regarding supervision of students
laid down by the head of the institution or
heads of institutions concerned.
CHAPTER XII.
EXAMINATIONS.
General Rules.
1. The Board shall conduct the following examina-
tions :
(a) The High School Examination.
(b) The Intermediate Examination.
(c) The Intermediate Examination in Commerce.
(d) The Intermediate Examination in Agriculture.
2. The Board's examinations shall be held at such
centres and on such dates and at such times as the Board
may from time to time appoint.
3. The tests at the Board's examinations may be
partly oral or practical and partly written. Oral and
practical tests shall be carried out by examiners appoint-
ed by the Board in such manner as the Examinations'
Committee may prescribe from time to time. Written
tests shall be by means of question papers, and the
H. XII.] EXAMINATIONS ft?
^question papers shall be given out simultaneously at
every centre at which the examination is being held.
4. Every candidate for admission to an examina-
tion held by the Board shall, not later than the seventh
>of January each year '
(a) pay the fee prescribed for the examination,
(6) state the optional subject or subjects in which
he desires to present himself for examination, and
(c) furnish the Secretary with a certificate showing
(i) that he has completed a regular course of
study* in a recognized institution, or
(ii) that he has been permitted by the Board to
appear as a private candidate.
i(iii) (for Science candidates of the High School
Examination only) that he has actually per-
formed the experiments laid down in the
syllabus.
5. The following fees shall be paid in respect of the
examinations held by the Board :
(1) High School Exa- Rupees 15 by each candi-
mination, date from a recognized
institution.
<2) Ditto . . Rupees 20 by each private
candidate.
{3) Intermediate Ex- Rupees 25 by each candi-
amination. date from a recognized
institution.
(4) Ditto . . Rupees 30 by private can-
didates.
(5) Intermediate Ex- Rupees 25 by each candi-
animation in Com- date from a recognized
merce. institution.
* See clause (11), Chapter I and Regulation 4, Chapter XV 11.
68
CALENDAR 1928-29
[CH. XII..
(6) Intermediate Ex-
amination in
Commerce.
(7) Intermediate Ex-
amination in
Agriculture.
(8) Examination in one
subject only.
(9) Examination in
one
Rupees 30 by private can-
didates.
Rupees 25 by each candi-
date from a recognized
institution and Rs. 30
by each private candi-
date (if any).
Rupees 5.
Rupees 5 for each subject.
more than
subject.
(10) Fee for checking the Rupees 10 per candidate.
results of failed
candidates.
(11) Fee for cornmuni- Rupees 2 per candidate,
eating the aggre-
gate marks ob-
tained by a can-
didate at an ex-
amination.
6. A candidate who fails to pass or who from sick-
ness or other sufficient cause is unable to present him-
self for any examination, shall not receive a refund of
his fee :
provided the board may, on application, admit a
candidate who was unable to present himself for any
examination to the next ensuing examination without
payment of a further fee :
provided also that the fee may not be held over for
the next ensuing examination in the case of a candidate
who absented himself from a part of the examination.
7. The Secretary shall, after satisfying himself
that a candidate has complied with all the requirements
CH. XII.] EXAMINATIONS 69
ior admission to an examination of the Board, furnish
the candidate with a card of admission, on presentation
of which to the local superintendent of the examination,
the candidate shall be permitted to sit for the examina-
tion.
8. Notwithstanding anything contained in these
Regulations, no candidate who is still undergoing rus-
tication or who has been expelled within the academical
year preceding the date of his application for permission
to appear at an examination shall be admitted to any
examination of the Board.
9. The Secretary, if satisfied that a candidate's
admission card has been lost or destroyed, may grant
a duplicate card on payment of a further fee of Rs. 2.
10. Private candidates* shall be eligible to appeal
at the Board's examinations on the conditions herein-
after laid down.
* The following rules for the admission of private candidates to the
Board's examinations have been approved by the Board (vide Board's
Resolution no. 22, dated November 8, 1924) :
1. Permission to appear as private candidates will be given to can-
didates who have appeared at a previous High School or Intermediate
Examination and have failed or to whom permission to appear as private
candidates has been given by the Board on a previous occasion.
2. Permission to appear as private candidates at the next ensuing
High School or Intermediate Examination will not be granted to candi-
dates who have failed to obtain promotion to the highest class of any High
^School or Intermediate College (i.e., to those who have been detained in
class IX or class XI).
3. (a) Private candidates may change their subjects of examination
from those previously offered by them, if more than one year has elapsed
since their last appearance at the examination ; they will not be required
to give any reasons for the change.
(6) Private candidates who appeared and failed at an examina-
*tion immediately prior to the submission of their application and desire
to offer for the next examination subjects other than those previously
offered must give an adequate explanation of the change and show that
they can satisfactorily complete the course of study in the new subjects.
70 CALENDAR 1928-29 [CH. XII.
11. A candidate who desires to offer himself for
examination as a private candidate shall, not later that*
the first of October preceding the date fixed for the next,
4. Candidates residing outside the present territorial jurisdiction
of the Board may be permitted to appear at the Board's examinations as
private candidates, provided they submit an adequate explanation as to
Why they prefer to take the United Provinces Board's examination.
5. Where an age-limit or other restriction is imposed by the Local
University or Examining Body, such restriction shall be rigorously enfor-
ced before permission to appear as private candidates at the Board's
examinations is granted to outside candidates.
6. Residents of places beyond the territorial jurisdiction of the
Board who have appeared and failed at an examination conducted by the
Board or its predecessors may be allowed to appear as private candidates
at a subsequent corresponding examination, notwithstanding anything
contained in rules 4 and 5 foregoing. Rules 4 and 5 will, however-,
apply to residents of such places who have passed any examination con-
ducted by the Board or its predecessors and desire to appear for the first
time at a higher examination conducted by the Board.
7. Private candidates shall not be allowed to offer for their exami-
nation any subject even if the subject is recognized for the examination
Which is not being taught in a recognized institution or in which no in-
stitution is recognized [vide Board's Resolution no. 34(6), dated November
6 and 7, 1925.]
8. Private candidates who have passed the Cambridge School Cer-
tificate Examination and intend to appear at the Intermediate Examina-
tion should specify in the application form the standard of attainment
in each of the subjects in which they have passed the Cambridge School
Certificate Examination as shown in the detailed result of the examina-
tion (vide Private Candidates Committee s Resolution no. 7 .dated Octo-
ber 3, 1925).
9 Permission to appear as private candidates at the High School 1
Examination shall not be given to candidates who have passed the Ver-
nacular Final Examination until five academical years have elapsed since
the date of their passing the Vernacular Final Examination nor shal
any students who have left school at a stage earlier than the High School
stage be permitted to appear at the High School Examination as private-
candidates in a year earlier than that in which they would have appeared
if they had continued their studies at a recognized institution up to thfc
High School Examination (vide Resolution 4 of the meeting of the Private
Candidates Committee held on October 1720 and November 1, 19J&
and Resolution 33 of the meeting of the Board held on November 9, 1928)1*
OH. XII.] EXAMINATION* 71
ensuing examination, send in an application to the Sec-
retary, through the Inspector of Schools of his division
or the Chief Educational Officer of the Indian State
where he resides, unless he is a failed candidate of a pre-
vious year, in which case the application may be for-
warded by the head of the institution at which he last
studied. In the case of a female candidate the appli-
cation may be forwarded by the head of any institution
recognized by the Board. The application should be
made in the prescribed form and should set forth :
(a) his age at the time of the application ;
(b) the conditions under which he has been study-
ing and is proposing to continue his stu-
dies ;
(c) *the optional subject or subjects which he offers^
provided that no practical work or practical
examination is prescribed for the subject or
subjects so offered.
10. All applications from intending private candidates should reach
the office of the forwarding officer not later than September 24 preceding
the date fixed for the next ensuing examination (vide Resolution 5 of the
meeting of the Private Candidates Committee held on October 17 20-
and November 1, 1928 and Resolution 33 of the meeting of the Board
held on November 9 1928).
*The following subjects prescribed for the Board's examinations
should be deemed subjects which involve practical work or a practical,
examination for purposes of this regulation and regulations 14(a) and.
17:-
High School Examination.]
(1) Physics and Chemistry. (3) Manual Training.
(2) Agriculture. (4) Metal Work
Intermediate Examination.
(1) Chemistry. (3) Biology.
(2) Physics. (4) Economics.
(5) Physiology, Hygiene and Child-Study (for girls only)
Commercial Diploma Examination.
Nil.
Agricultural Diploma Examination.
AH subjects egftpf English.
72 CALENDAR 1928-29 [CH. XII.
He should also forward the original copy of the
scholar's register granted to him by the institution, if
finy, at which he last studied.
12. Such applications from intending private can-
didates shall be referred to the Standing Committee
of the Board appointed to scrutinize applications from
private candidates.
13. Such applications, after being scrutinized by
the Committee, shall either be granted or rejected
by it.
14. Notwithstanding anything contained in these
Regulations, any female^candidate, who is not studying
at a recognized institution, may be admitted by the
Committee referred to in Regulation 12 above as a pri-
vate candidate to any of its examinations uncondition-
ally, except that before appearing at the Intermediate
examination two years should have elapsed since the
date of her passing the High School or an equivalent
examination.
14(a) Notwithstanding anything contained in these
Regulations, a student who has passed the High School
or an equivalent Examination and is studying in an
Intermediate class of a college recognized by the Board
may be permitted to appear as a private candidate at
the High School Examination of the Board in a single
subject not involving practical work or a practical
examination, and similar permission may be given to a
student who has passed the Intermediate Examination
and is studying for a higher examination to go up for
the High School or the Intermediate Examination in
A single subject not involving practical work or a prac-
tical examination.
14(6) Notwithstanding anything contained in these
Regulations, no male married candidates, except those
<JH. XII.] EXAMINATIONS 73
who are married before July 1, 1929, or who are at the
time of marriage not less than eighteen years of age,
shall be admitted from any institution recognized by
the Board to the High School Examination after the
examination of 1930. Such candidates may apply for
permission to appear as private candidates only at the
High School Examination with effect from the examina-
tion of 1931.
15. Except when otherwise provided in these Re*
gulations, the names of candidates who have passed
.an examination of the Board shall be placed in three
divisions, and further, the names of students from re-
cognized institutions shall be grouped according to the
institutions in which they have studied.
16. A candidate who has failed in an examination
may present himself for one or more subsequent exami-
nations, provided that he shall on each and every
such occasion satisfy the Secretary that he has fulfilled
the conditions laid down in the Regulations for the
.admission of candidates to the Board's examinations.
17. A candidate who has failed in an examination
may be admitted to a subsequent examination without
attending a regular course of study in a recognized insti-
tution, provided
(a) that he has not pursued his studies at an edu-
cational institution of any kind ;
(6) that, not later than the first of October prece-
ding the date fixed for the next ensuing exami-
nation, he sends an application to the Secretary
through and recommended by the head of the
institution at which he last studied, in the
prescribed form, setting out
<i) the conditions under which he has been study-
ing and is now proposing to continue hie
studies
74: CALENDAK 1928-29 [OH.
(ii) the dates of his failing in the examination ;
provided, further, that this Regulation shall not
a Pply * candidates who have taken a subject or sub-
jects for which practical work or a practical examination
is prescribed.
18. *Any candidate who has obtained 40 per cent,
of the aggregate number of marks, but has failed in one
subject only, obtaining not less than 25 per cent, in that
subject, shall be admitted to a subsequent examination
in the subject in which he failed on payment of the fee
perscribed in these Regulations ; and if he passes in that
subject he shall be deemed to have passed the examina-
tion.
19. Heads of recognized institutions are not enti-
tled to detain candidates who have fulfilled the condi-
tions laid down for permission to appear at one of the
Board's examinations, except for very grave reasons
and with the previous sanction of the Chairman of the
Board.
* Compartmental candidates have the option of appearing at the
examination as private candidates, provided they have not pursued their
studies at an educational institution of any kind during the session pre-
ceding the examination at which they intend to appear and subject to-
the restriction laid down in the second proviso to Regulation 17, Chap*
ter XII.
Compartmental candidates are not eligible for admission to class
XI of a recognized Intermediate College unless and until they have pass-
ed completely the High School Examination under Regulation 2 Chapter
XIII (vide Examinations' Committee's Resolution no. 9, dated February
6, 1925, adopted by the Board).
The prescribed fee for admission to the Compartmental examination?
is Rs 5.
failed candidates may have two chances of re- appearing at the
cotnpartmental examination in two consecutive years immediately fol*
lowing the year in which they appeared at the examination taking all the
subjects and were declared as eligible for the Compartmental examina-
tion (vide Board's Resolution no. 28, dated November 6 and 7, 1925, an<S
paragraph 42 6f the report of the meeting of the Examinations' Com-
mit.* hftld on November 9. 1927. adooted by the Board).
OH. XIII.] HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION 7&
CHAPTER XIII.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION.
1. The following are the subjects prescribed for the
High School Examination of the Board :
Compulsory.
(1) English.
(2) Mathematics.
(3) History or Geography.
(4) One of the following Modern Indian Langua-
ages :
Hindi, Urdu, Bengali, Marathi and Gujarati.
Optional.
(1) One of the following Classical Languages :
Sanskrit, Arabic, Persian and Latin.
(2) Commerce.
(3) Physics and Chemistry.
(4) Agriculture.
(5) Drawing.
(6) Manual Training.
(7) A Modern European Language.
(8) Domestic Science.
(9) Metal work.
(10) History or Geography.
(11) Book-binding.
(12) Spinning and Weaving.
(13) General Science (Physics, Chemistry and
Biology).
N. B. Candidates must take up one optional subject for examina-
tion, and no candidate will be examined in more than one such subject,
in addition to the compulsory subjects, at one and the same examina-
tion : provided that a candidate who has passed the High School or an
Equivalent examination in a place outside the United Provinces may
* A candidate taking History or Geography as a compulsory subject
must not offer the same subject as an optional subject*
76 CALENDAR 1928-29 [CH. XIH.
present himself for examination in any subsequent year in one or more
optional subjects without re-examination in the compulsory subjects ;
and such a candidate will, if successful, be entitled to have an entry made
in the certificate already granted to him, certifying in which additional
optional subject or subjects he has passed.
2. A candidate is not entitled to a certificate of
having passed the High School Examination unless he
qualifies separately in each subject offered by him
thereat.
3. Diaries shall be kept by all teachers employed
in teaching classes preparing for the High School Exa-
mination showing the work done in class in each sub-
ject taught by them, and such diaries shall be inspected
by the oral or practical examiners or by such other
authorities as the Board may depute.
4. The question papers set and the written answer-
books of all candidates at terminal examination shall
also be subject to inspection in such manner and by
.such authorities as the Board may direct.
5. The head of the institution shall furnish the oral
or practical examiner, or such other authority as the
Board may appoint, with a list of the candidates under-
going examination in the subject or subjects with which
he is concerned, and shall make an entry against each
name regarding the proficiency of the candidate as judged
by his record therein during the course of study pres-
cribed for the examination.
6. Cancelled.
7. Any candidate who has passed a *public exami-
nation in an Oriental Language (Sanskrit, Persian or
* (a) The following examinations are recognized by the Board as
public examinations in an Oriental Language under this Regulation
and Regulation 7, Chapter XIV :
(1) Maulvi, Alim, Mulla (now defunct) and Fazil in Arabic, and
Munshi and Kamil in Persian, conducted by the Education
department of the United Provinces (2) the Sanskrit Exa- .
minations conducted by, the Government Sanskrit College,
Benares, and by the Benares Hindu University (vwte
Boards' Resolution no. 33, dated November 6 and 7, 1925,
OH. XIII.] HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION 7T
Arabic) or the Vernacular Final Examination and in
addition the examination in advanced Urdu or Hindi
conducted by the department may be admitted as a
private candidate to the High School Examination in
English only, and shall, if successful, be entitled to a
certificate of having passed the examination in English
only. Similar concession may be given to candidates*
residing in the United Provinces, who have passed an
examination in a vernacular language (Hindi or Urdu)
conducted by the Oriental Faculty of the Punjab Uni-
versity.
8. *Candidates for the High School Examination
are permitted to answer questions in English, Urdu, or
Hindi in all subjects other than English.
and paragraph 2 of the report of the meeting of the Exa-
minations' Committee held on February 4, 1926, adopted
by the Board), (3) the Diploma Examinations in Arabic
and Persian conducted by the Lucknow University [vide
Board's Resolution no. 18(<7), dated November 3, 1926]
and (4) the Sanskrit examinations conducted by the De-
partment of Public Instruction, Jaipur State [vide resolu-
tion 7 of the meeting of the Examinations' Committee held
on November 8, 1928 and Resolution 31(c) of the meeting
of the Board held on November 9, 1928].
(6) Candidates residing in the United Provinces who have passed"
an examination (Sanskrit, Persian or Arabic) of the Orien-
tal Faculty of the Punjab University may also apply for
permission to appear at the High School Examination in
English only as private candidates (vide paragraph 39 of
the report of the meeting of the Examinations' Committee
held on November 9, 1927, adopted by the Board).
* This regulation should be read in the light of the following notes:
(1) A candidate for the High School Examination may answer ques-
tions in English in one or more subjects ami in Hindi or Urdu in the re-
maining subjects in which a vernacular medium is permitted.
(2) The option of using a vernacular medium of examination has
been given in the following subjects only and in the following manner
with effect from the date noted against each :
(a) Sanskrit and Hindi through the me-
dium of English or Hindi. ^ ")
(6) Arabic, Persian and Urdu through the I
medium of English or Urdu. |
(c) History and Geography through the VHigh School Exami
medium of English, Hindi or Urdu. nation of 1927.
(d) Agriculture through the medium of I
English, Hindi or Urdu. J
78 CALENDAR 1928-29 [CH. XIV.
CHAPTER XIV.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION.
1. Every candidate for admission to the Interme-
diate Examination shall be required to have passed
the Board's High School Examination, or to have passed
an examination which by Regulation is declared equi-
valent thereto, before entering upon the course of study
prescribed for the Intermediate Examination.
2. The following examinations are declared equi-
valent to the Board's High School Examination for the
purpose of enabling candidates to enter upon the course
of study prescribed for the Intermediate Examina-
tion :
(1) the Matriculation Examination of any Uni-
versity established by law in India approved
for the purpose by the Board. (The Matri-
culation Examinations of the following Uni-
versities are approved by the Board : Allah-
abad, the Punjab, Bombay, Calcutta, Madras,
Patna, Benares* and Aligarh*) ;
(2) the School-Leaving Certificate Examination
of the United Provinces, or of another prov-
ince, provided this examination is accepted
as equivalent to Matriculation by the Uni-
versity established by law in that province ;
(3) the Cambridge School Certificate (formerly called
Senior Local) Examination, provided a stu-
dent has passed in five of such subjects as are
recognized for the High School Examination
(e) Mathematics through the medium of \
English, Hindi or Urdu. f High School Exami-
(/) Domestic Science through the me- C nation of 1929.
dium of English, Hindi or Urdu. )
* By Matriculation Examination of the Benares Hindu and Aligarh
Muslim Universities the Admission Examination of the former and the
High School Examination of the latter are meant.
OH. XIV.] INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION 79
of the Board of High School and Intermediate
Education, United Provinces ;
(4) the Diploma Examination of the Chiefs' Col-
leges ;
(5) the High School Examination for European
Schools in the Central Provinces and in other
provinces ;
<6) the High School Certificate Examination of the
Board of High School Education, Central
Provinces ;
(7) the Anglo- Vernacular High School and the Eng-
lish High School Examinations of Burma ;
(8) the London University Matriculation Examina-
tion ;
(9) the English School-Leaving Certificate Exami-
nation of the Travancore State ;
*(10) the High School-Leaving Certificate Examina-
tion of Hyderabad (Deccan), provided a can-
didate has passed in class I or class II ;
'(11) the Secondary School-Leaving Certificate Exa-
mination of Mysore, provided a candidate
has been declared eligible for admission to a
University course ;
',(12) the Diploma Examination of the Royal Indian
Military College, Dehra Dun, so long as the
syllabus and the standard of the examination
continue to be the same as those of the exami-
nation recognized in the foregoing clause (4) ;
<(13) the High School Examination of the Board of
Secondary Education, Delhi, provided a can-
didate has passed the examination with an
additional subject under Regulation 3, Chap-
ter XI of the Delhi Board's Regulations, and
provided, further, that he has passed in five
80 CALENDAR 1928-29 [CH. XIV.
full subjects excluding Elementary Econo-
mics and (except in the case of female candi-
dates) Physiology and Hygiene, and Domestic
Science.
3. No candidate shall be admitted to the Interme-
diate Examination unless two academical years shall
have elapsed since the date of his or her passing the
High School or an equivalent examination :
* provided that candidates who have passed the
Cambridge School Certificate (Senior Local) Examina-
tion may be admitted to the Intermediate Examination
in the academical year following that in which they
pass the Cambridge School Certificate Examination.
4. Any student who has kept one academical year
at a college affiliated to the Universities of Calcutta,
Madras, Bombay, Patna, Benares, the Punjab, Nagpur,
Delhi or Aligarh after matriculation, may be allowed a
year corresponding to that which he has so kept, pro-
vided he produces a satisfactory certificate from the
Principal of a college affiliated to the Universities of Cal-
cutta, Madras, Bombay, Patna, Benares, the Punjab,
Nagpur, Delhi or Aligarh that the corresponding year
has been duly kept according to the regulations in force
at the University from which he has fttiigrated, and
that the said Principal has no objection to his transfer,
* Candidates intending to appear under this proviso are eligible to
appear as private candidates also, provided they fulfil the necessary con-
ditions [vide Board's Resolution no. 24 (last paragraph), dated Novem-
ber 8, 1924.]
t The Board has framed no rules nor prescribed any form regard-
ing migration of students from or to its territorial jurisdiction A candi-
date intending to migrate to a place outside the jurisdiction of the Board
should communicate with the Divisional Inspector of Schools through
the head of his last institution. In case the candidate is a resident of a
place outside the United Provinces, he should communicate with the
head of his last institution.
OH. XIV.] INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION 81
5. Every candidate for the Intermediate Examina-
nation shall be examined in English and any three of the
following subjects :
(1) Mathematics.
(2) Chemistry.
(3) Physics.
(4) Biology.
(5) Drawing.
(6) Economic,*,
(7) Civics.
(8) History and Allied Geography.
(9) Histories of Greece and Rome and Allied Geog-
raphy.
(10) Geography.
(11) Logic.
(12) A Modern Indian Language (Urdu or Hindi
or Bengali or Marathi or Gujarati), or a Modern
European Language (German or French).
(13) A Classical Language, viz., Sanskrit, Arabic,
Persian, Latin, Greek or Hebrew.
(14) ^Physiology, Hygiene and Child-Study (for
girls only).
(15) Physiology, Hygeine and Elementary Psycho-
logy (for boys only).
6. Any candidate who has passed the Intermediate
Examination of the Board or an examination equivalent
thereto may appear at any subsequent Intermediate
Examination or Examinations conducted by the Board
in any subject in which he has not previously passed the
Intermediate Examination, provided that in the case of
a subject for which practical work or a practical examina-
tion is prescribed he produces evidence satisfactory to
* A special subject intended to prepare girls either for the teaching
profession or for domestic life (vide Board's Resolution no. 3, dated Nov-
ember 8, 1924).
6
82 CALENDAR 1928-29 [CHS. xiv & xv.
the Board that he has completed the practical course
prescribed for the subject.
7. *Any candidate who holds a certificate of having
passed the High School Examination in English only
under Regulation 7, Chapter XIII, or of having passed
an examination equivalent to the High School Exami-
nation in English only under similar conditions, may be
admitted as a private candidate to the Intermediate
Examination in English only, provided at least one acade-
mical year shall have elapsed since the date of his or her
passing the High School or an equivalent Examination
in English, and such a candidate shall, if successful, be
entitled to a certificate of having passed the examination
in English only.
CHAPTER XV.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION IN COMMERCE.
1. Every candidate for admission to the Intermediate
Examination in Commerce shall be required to have
passed the Board's High School Examination or an
examination fequivalent thereto, and to have, since the
passing of this examination, prosecuted a regular course
of study for not less than two academical years at an
institution recognized by the Board for the Intermediate
Examination in Commerce.
2. I Inspecting officers of an Education department
and teachers in schools and colleges recognized by the
* Passing the High School Examination in all subjects may be ac-
cepted as a fulfilment of the condition of passing in English required in
this Regulation, provided that the candidate has also passed a recognized
public examination in an Oriental Language [vide Board's Resolution
no. 34(a), dated November 6 and 7, 1925].
t See Regulation 2, Chapter XIV.
J Failed candidates of the Intermediate Examination in Commerce
may also be admitted to a subsequent examination as private candidates
under Regulations 16 and 17, Chapter XII (vide paragraph 6 of the re-
port of the meeting of the Committee of Courses in Commerce held on
November 8, 1923).
CHS. XV INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION 83
& XV(a).] IN COMMERCE AND AGRICULTURE
Board may be admitted to this examination as private
candidates by special permission of the Board, provided
that by the date of the examination not less than two
academical years shall have elapsed since the date of
their passing the High School Examination or an exami-
nation equivalent thereto.
3. The following are the subjects of examination.
These may be arranged in alternative groups in such
manner and with such additions and alterations as the
Board may, from time to time, decide :
Compulsory.
(1) English.
(2) Book-keeping and Accountancy.
(3) Business Methods and Correspondence.
(4) (a) Elementary Economics.
(6) Commercial Geography.
Optional.
One of the following :
(1) Steno-typing (shorthand and typewriting).
(2) Elements of Banking.
(3) Elements of Industrial Organization.
(4) Mathematics.
CHAPTER XV(a).
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE.
1. Every candidate for admission to the Interme-
diate Examination in Agriculture shall be required to
have passed the Board's High School Examination, or
an examination equivalent * thereto, and to have, since
the passing of this examination, prosecuted a regular
course of study for not less than two academical years
* See Regulation 2, Chapter XIV.
84 CALBNDAB 1928-29 [OH. XV(a).
at an institution recognized by the Board for the Inter-
mediate Examination in Agriculture :
provided that a candidate who has passed the Inter-
mediate Examination of the Board or an examination
equivalent thereto with Chemistry and Biology aa
optional subjects, may be admitted to the Intermediate
Examination in Agriculture after prosecuting a regular
course of study for not less than one academical year
since the date of his passing the aforesaid examination
at an institution recognized by the Board for the Inter-
mediate Examination in Agriculture.
2. The following are the subjects of examination
arranged in groups. The Board may make such addi-
tions and alterations in them as it may from time to
time decide :
Group I. Chemistry and Physics.
Practical Chemistry and
Practical Physics.
Group II. Botany and Zoology.
Practical Botany and
Practical Zoology.
Group III. Physical properties of soil, Soil Geol-
ogy, Climatology.
Elements of Plant Feeding, Principles of
Manuring.
Principles of Irrigation and Drainage.
Practical Farming.
Practical A. Crop culture, Climatology.
Practical B. Farm Machinery, Animal Hus-
bandry.
Group IV. English.
Translation and Composition.
Essay and Unseen passages from text-
books.
Group V. Economics or Mathematics.
OH. XVI.] ELECTION 6F MEMBERS OF THE BOARD 85
CHAPTER XVI.
ELECTION OF MEMBERS OF THE BOARD UNDER CLAUSES
(C) AND (e) OF SUB-SECTION (1) OF SECTION 3 OF THE
INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION ACT, 1921.
1. An election to fill any vacancy amongst members
of the Board which is to be filled by election by Prin-
cipals of Intermediate Colleges not maintained by Gov-
ernment or by Head Masters of High Schools not main-
tained by Government shall be held on such dates as
the Chairman shall appoint.
2. As soon as the Chairman has fixed the date for
election, the Secretary shall circulate a notice to every
Principal or Head Master, as the case may be, inviting
the nomination of a candidate other than himself for
election within the time to be named in the notice. Such
time shall be not less than a fortnight from the date of
the issue of the notice. Such notice shall state the date
and hour up to which nomination will be received by the
Secretary at his office.
3. Within the said time any Principal or Head Mas-
ter, as the case may be, may propose a candidate other
than himself for election as a member, provided that
such candidate is willing to stand for .election. This
proposal need not be seconded.
4. On the expiration of the period fixed by the notice,
the Secretary shall, after scrutiny of the nominations
received, prepare and send to every voter* a list of candi-
dates who have been duly nominated, and have not
withdrawn their candidature, together with a voting
paper, and shall also specify the date fixed for election
and the time on the said date up to which votes must be
deposited with him : provided that if the number of such
candidates is equal to the number of vacancies, all such
candidates shall be deemed to be elected ; and provided,
86 CALENDAR 1928-29 fa 11 - XVI ~
further, that if the number of such candidates is less
than the number of vacancies, all such candidates shall
be deemed to be elected, and the Secretary shall invite
fresh nominations for the remaining vacancy or vacan-
cies.
5. The voting paper must be signed by the voter and
shall be placed by him in a sealed cover superscribed
" Voting paper for the election of a member of the Board. "
He shall either deliver the cover in person to the Secre-
tary at his office or send it by registered post to him.
The voting paper must reach the Secretary before the
e&piry of the time fixed within which votes will be
received. The Secretary shall deposit all covers con-
taining voting papers in a safe in his office, until the
time fixed by the Chairman for opening them, and for
scrutinizing and counting the votes.
6. The Chairman shall appoint two members of the
Board to act with the Secretary in the scrutiny and
counting of the votes.
7. At the time fixed for opening the covers of the
voting papers the covers shall be opened by the Secre-
tary in the presence of the said members, and the voting
papers shall then be duly scrutinized.
8. Every Principal or Head Master, as the case may
be, of an institution recognized by the Board shall be
entitled to vote. Every voter shall have as many votes
as there are vacancies to be filled : provided that no
voter shall give more than one vote to any one candidate,
If more than one vote be recorded by a voter for the
same candidate such votes shall be recognized as one
vote. If the voter records more votes than the vacan-
cies, his voting paper shall be declared invalid. The
decision of the Secretary and the two members of the
Board appointed to act with him shall be final as to
CHS. XVI & XVII.] MISCELLANEOUS S7
the validity of any votes recorded. In case of difference
of opinion between them, the decision shall be in accord-
ance with the opinion of the majority.
9. After the scrutiny is completed and the votes
have been counted, a statement shall be prepared for
submission to the Chairman, showing the number of
valid votes received by each candidate. Such state-
ment shall be signed by the Secretary and the said two
members of the Board.
10. A candidate who has received the largest num-
ber of valid votes shall be deemed to be elected. In the
event of two or more candidates obtaining an equal num-
ber of votes, the election shall be determined by lot to
be drawn in the presence of the Secretary and the two
members of the Board and in such manner as the Secre-
tary may think fit.
11. The voting papers shall be preserved in the Sec-
retary's office after the election till such time as the
Chairman may direct.
CHAPTER XVII.
MISCELLANEOUS.
1. Detailed information regarding the examinations
of the Board shall be given in the Prospectus of the Exa-
minations, which is issued annually by the Secretary of
the Board and can be obtained from the Superintendent,
Government Press, Allahabad, on payment of the fixed
price.
2. The rules of the Educational Code of the United
Provinces of Agra and Oudh shall apply to all institu-
tions recognized by the Board in so far as they are not
inconsistent with these regulations.
3. The Board shall, from time to time, prepare such
forms and registers as may be deemed necessary. The
88 CALENDAR 1928-29 [CH. XVII.
forms when so prepared shall be appended to these re-
gulations and shall, with such variations as circumstances
may require, be used for the respective purposes there-
in mentioned.
4. The Board shall, for the purposes of a regular
course of study, prescribe the minimum *number of meet-
ings of a class that must be held in preparation for any
of its examinations.
5. Admission to any class or section of a class shall
be limited to a maximum of 35 scholars in a class or sec-
tion of a class of a High School, excluding primary classes,
and 45 in a section of the Intermediate classes : provided
that in the case of colleges which were affiliated up to the
Intermediate standard by the Allahabad University the
maximum in a section may be 60 for a period of five
years.
* NOTE. " The f minimum number of days that recognized institu-
tions, including classes XI and XII, will be open will be 180; for other
recognized institutions, the minimum number will be 200.
No candidate will be presented for an examination of the Board by
& recognized institution unless he has been present (m classes IX and X
in the case of the High School Examination and in classes XI and XII in
the case of the Intermediate Examination) for at leant 75 per cent, of the
-days the institution was open during twoj academica* years.
In the case of failed and detained candidates the percentage will
be calculated for one academical year only.
The head of a recognized institution may condone a deficiency of
not more than six days. All cases in which this privilege is exercised
will be reported to the Board.
The Board may, in very special cases, condone a deficiency of not
more than 15 days.*'
t The minimum applies to the institution as a whole and not to
attendance in class X or class XII separately (vide paragraph 16 of the
minutes of the meeting of the Board held on November 30 and Decem-
ber 1, 1923).
J The two academical years need not be consecutive (vide resolution
20 of the meeting of the Examinations' Committee held on January 26,
1929, adopted by the Board).
The term " detained ' means detained for any cause either in class
X or class XII (vide resolution 20 of the meeting of the Examinations*
Committee held on January 25, 1929, adopted by the Board).
RULES OF THE EXAMINATIONS' COMMITTEE 89
RULES OF THE EXAMINATIONS' COMMITTEE.
Rules for the scrutiny of marks and the checking of the
results of failed candidates.
1. Any candidate who has failed at an examination
conducted by the Board may apply to the Secretary for
the scrutiny of his marks and the re-checking of his
result.
2. Such applications nmsD be made within two
months from the date of the publication of the result
and must be forwarded by the head of the institution or
other authority who forwarded the candidate's original
application for permission to appear at the examination.
3. All such applications must be accompanied by a
copy of the Treasury chalan showing that the prescribed
fee of Rs. 10 has been paid. In the case of candidates
belonging to Indian States this fee must be sent in cash
to the office of the Secretary.
4. A candidate shall not be entitled to a refund of
the fee unless as a result of the scrutiny he is declared
successful in the examination.
5. If on scrutiny and re -checking a failed candidate
is found to have passed, his name shall be at once pub-
lished in the Gazette in a supplementary list. In all
other cases the result of the scrutiny shall be eommuni-
cated to the candidate through the head of the institu-
tion or other forwarding authority as soon as possible.
6. The work of scrutiny does not include re-
examination of the answer -books of a failed candidate. It
consists of re-checking the marks entered in the answer-
books with a view to seeing whether there has been any
mistake in totalling the marks assigned to individual
questions or in the form of omitting the marks assigned
to any question.
90 CALENDAR 1928-29
Rules for communicating the aggregate marks obtained
by a candidate at an examination.
(1) Only the aggregate marks obtained by a candi-
date will be communicated.
(2) Any candidate desiring to know the total marks
obtained by him at an examination held by the
Board shall send an application to the Secre-
tary through the officer who forwarded his
application for admission to the examination,
not later than six months ordinarily after the
publication of the results in the United
Provinces Government Gazette.
(3) All such applications must be accompanied by a
copy of the treasury chalan showing that the
prescribed fee of Rs. 2 has been paid. In the
case of candidates belonging to Indian States-
this fee must be sent by money-order to the
Secretary.
N.B. Fees sent by money order by candidates residing in the-
United Provinces will not be accepted.
(4) No refund of the fee shall be allowed.
(5) Each application should furnish necessary infor-
mation on each of the following particulars :
(a) The name anji year of the examination.
(6) The name of the candidate.
(c) His roll number.
(d) The name of his college, or the district of which
he was a resident.
(e) The name of his examination centre.
(/) The subjects offered.
LIST OF EXAMINATION CENTRES 91
LIST OF EXAMINATION CENTRES.
List of Centres for the Intermediate Examination
of 1929.
1. St. John's College, Agra.
2. Radhaswami Educational Institute, Agra.
3. Ewing Christian College, Allahabad.
4. Kayastha Pathshala. Allahabad.
5. Government Intermediate College, Allahabad.
6. Government Intermediate College. Almora.
7. Bareilly College, Bareilly.
8. Queen's Intermediate College, Benares.
9. Christ Church College, Cawnpore.
10. D. A.-V. College. Cawnpore.
11. D. A.-V. Intermediate College. Dehra Dun,
12. Government Intermediate College, Etawah.
13. Government Intermediate College, Fyzabad.
14. St. Andrew's College, Gorakhpur.
15. Government Intermediate College, Jhansi.
10. Isabella Thoburn College, Lucknow.
17. Government Jubilee Intermediate College, Luck-
now.
18. Christian Intermediate College, Lucknow.
19. Meerut College, Meerut.
20. Government Intermediate College, Moradabad.
21. N. R. E. C. Intermediate College, Khurja.
22. S. S. Memorial Intermediate College. ChandausL
23. Government College, Ajmer.
24. Victoria College, Gwalior.
25. Indore Christian College, Indore.
26. Maharaja's Intermediate College, Jaipur.
List of Centres for the Commercial Diploma Exami-
nation of 1929.
1. St. John's College, Agra.
2. S. D. College of Commerce, Cawnpore.
92 OALENDAB 1928-29
3. D. A.-V. College, Cawnpore.
4. Christian Intermediate College, Lucknow.
5. S. S. Memorial Intermediate College, Chandausi.
6. Meerut College, Meerut.
7. Kayastha Pathshala College, Allahabad.
8. N. R. E. C. Intermediate College, Khurja.
9. Bareilly College, Bareilly.
List of Centres for the Agricultural Diploma Examina-
tion of 1929.
1. Ewing Christian College, Allahabad.
2. Sanatan Dharam College of Commerce, Cawnpore.
List of Centres for the High School Examination of 1 929.
1. D. A.-V. Intermediate College, Dehra Dun.
2. Government High School, Saharanpur.
3. Government High School, Muzaffarnagar.
4. Government High School, Meerut.
5. Nanak Chand A. S. High School, Meerut.
6. Government High School, Bulandshahr.
7. N. R. Edward Coronation Intermediate College,
Khurja.
8. Government High School, Aligarh.
9. Phul Chand Bagla A. S. High School, Hathras.
10. Government High School, Muttra.
11. Government High School, Agra.
12. St. John's High School, Agra.
13. Radhaswami Educational Institute, Agra.
14. Government High School, Mainpuri.
15. Government High School, Bareilly.
16. Government Bullock High School, Najibabad.
17. Government High School, Budaun.
18. Government Intermediate College, Moradabad.
19. Shiam Sundar Memorial Intermediate College,
Chandausi.
LIST OF EXAMINATION CENTKES 93
20. Government High School, Shahjahanpur.
21. Government High School, Farrukhabad.
22. Government High School, Fatehgarh.
23. Government Intermediate College. Etawah.
24. Government High School, Cawnpore.
25. P. Prithi Nath High School, Cawnpore.
26. Government Intermediate College, Allahabad.
27. Kayastha Pathshala Intermediate College, Allah-
abad.
28. City A.-V. High School, Allahabad.
29. Government Intermediate College, Jhansi.
30. MacDonnell High School, Jhansi.
31. Queen's Intermediate College, Benares.
32. London Mission High School, Benares.
33. Jai Narain's High School, Benares.
34. Udai Pratap College and Hewett Kshattriya-
High School, Benares.
35. Government High School, Jaunpur.
36. Government High School, Ballia.
37. Government Jubilee High School, Gorakhpur
38. Wesley High School, Azamgarh.
39. Government High School, Basti.
40. Government High School, Naini Tal.
41. Government Intermediate College, Almora.
42. Government High School, Srinagar (Garhwal).
43. Government Jubilee Intermediate College, Luck-
now.
44. Husainabad Government High School, Luck-
now.
45. Christian Intermediate College, Lucknow.
46. Isabella Thoburn Intermediate College, Luck*
now.
17. Government High School, Sitapur.
48. Government High School, Unao.
49. Government High School, Rae Bareli.
94 CALENDAR 1928-29
50. Government Intermediate College, Fyzabad.
51. Government High School, Gonda.
52. Government High School, Ajmer.
53. Maharana's Intermediate College, Udaipur.
54. Maharaja's Intermediate College, Jaipur.
55. Victoria College, Lashkar (Gwalior).
56. Government High School, Nowgong.
57. Maharaja Shivaji Rao High School, Indore.
58. Government Residency High School, Indore.
BATES OP HONORARIA
1. For setting a full
paper.
2. For marking each
answer-paper,
3. For the Practical
Examination
in Science (to
the External
Examiner
only).
4. To the Head Exa-
miner, in addi-
tion to the fee
for marking
answer -papers
RATES OF HONORARIA.
I. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION.
Rs. a. p.
40
1
1 8
Per candidate with a
minimum of Rs. 30
per college.
Rupees 50 to be paid
in respect of each
sub-examiner (if any)
working under him,
no additional fee
being paid for re-
examining marked
answer-books re-
ceived from sub-exa-
miners, or for sup-
plying models to
them. Ten models
at least should be
supplied to each sub-
examiner, and at
least 30 marked
answer-books of
each sub-examiner
should be called for
in three instalments
and re-examined
96
CALENDAR 1928-29
5.
6.
Rs. a. p.
30
by the Head Exami-
ner.
For translating a
paper.
For the Examiner who collaborates with the transla-
tors (Urdu, Hindi ancf Bengali) of English III
paper for the purpose of avoiding divergences be-
tween the Vernacular renderings the same
fee as for setting each of these papers.
Rs. a. p.
10
To the Head Ex-
aminer in
each practi-
cal exami-
nation in
Science.
Per hundred candi-
dates with a mini-
mum fee of Rs. 50
for the whole work.
1. For setting a
paper.
2. For marking each
answer-paper,
3. For marking Dic-
tation and
Shikast
sheets.
4. For Oral and
Practical Ex-
amination
per candi-
date.
5. To the Head
Examiner, in
addition to
II. HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION.
Rs. a. p.
30
080
15 Per hundred candi-
dates.
200 With a minimum of
Rs. 20 for each in-
stitutipn.
40 On the same con-
ditions as in
Intermediate.
OF HONORARIA 97
the fee for Rs. a. p.
marking an-
swer-papers
or setting
questions.
6. For translating a 20
paper.
7. To the Head Ex- 10 Per hundred candi-
aminer for dates,
checking Oral
or Practical
work done by
Sub-Exami-
ners.
8. For setting a 15
paper in
Dictation
and in Urdu
Shikast.
9. For the Examiner who collaborates with the trans-
lators (Urdu, Hindi and Bengali) of English
III paper for the purpose of avoiding divergences
between the Vernacular renderings the same
fee as for setting each of these papers.
III. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION IN COMMERCE.
Rs. a. p.
1. For setting a pa- 30
per.
2. For marking each 100
answer-
paper.
98 CALENDAR 1928-29
IV. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE.
Rs. a. p.
1. For setting a paper 30
2. For marking each 1
answer-
paper.
3. For the practical 100
examination
per candi-
date.
4. For translating a 20
paper.
BOABDS OF MODERATORS 9
The Boards of Moderators for the Board's Examinations
of 1930.
(1) ENGLISH.
(1) P. Seshadri, Esq., M.A., Principal, Sanatan Dharma
College, Cawnpore.
(2) B. Sanjiva Rao, Esq., M.A., Principal, Queen's
Intermediate College, Benares.
(3) Pandit Amaranatha Jha, M.A., Reader, Allahabad
University, Allahabad (to act as convener).
(2) MANUAL TRAINING.
(1) Lala Wazir Sahai, Chief Engineer, Improvement
Trust, Allahabad.
(2) G. F. Worthen, Esq.. Officer on Special Duty, Office
of Director of Public Instruction, United Prov-
inces, Allahabad (to act as convener).
(3) DRAWING.
(1) A. K. Haldar, Esq., Principal, Government School
of Arts and Crafts, Lucknow.
(2) Lala Wazir Sahai, Chief Engineer, Improvement
Trust, Allahabad.
(3) G. F. Worthen, Esq., Officer on Special Duty, Office
of Director of Public Instruction, United Prov-
inces, Allahabad (to act as convener).
(4) ECONOMICS.
(1) S. K. Rudra, Esq., M.A., Reader, Allahabad Univer-
versity Allahabad.
(2) C. D. Thompson, Esq., M.A., Allahabad University,
Allahabad (to act as convener).
(6) LOGIC.
(1) A. C. Mukerji, Esq., M.A.> Lecturer, Allahabad Uni-
versity, Allahabad.
100 CALENDAB 1928-29
/
(2) Narayan Das, Esq., B.A., Principal, Radhaswami
Educational Institute, Agra.
{3) Lala Diwan Chand, M.A., Principal, Dayanand
Anglo- Vedic College, Cawnpore (to act as con-
vener).
(6) DOMESTIC SCIENCE, PHYSIOLOGY, HYGIENE AND
CHILD -STUDY.
{!) Dr. K. N. 13ahl, Professor, Lucknow University,
Lucftnow.
(2) Dr. S. H. Commissariat, Superintendent, Medical
Aid to Women, Lucknow.
(3) Miss H. G. Stuart, Chief Inspectress of Girls' Schools,
United Provinces, Allahabad (to act as con-
vener).
(7) LATIN AND FRENCH.
(1) W. E. Andrews, Esq., M.A., Principal, La Martiniere
College, Lucknow.
(2) A. A. Simpson, Esq., M.A., Principal, Training
College, Allahabad (to act as convener).
(8) MATHEMATICS.
(1) A. M. Kureishy, Esq., Principal, Aligarh Muslim
University Intermediate College, Aligarh.
(2) J. A. Strang, Esq., M.A., B.SC., Professor, 'Lucknow
University, Lucknow.
(3) R. H. Moody, Esq., M.A., Deputy Director of Public
Instruction, United Provinces, Allahabad (to
act as convener).
(9) BIOLOGY.
(1) Dr. K. N. Bahl, ^ Professor, Lucknow University^.
Lucknow.
(2) Dr. W. S. Dudgeon, Professor, Ewing Christian
College, Allahabad (to act as convener).
BOARDS OF MODERATORS 101
(Iff) GEOGRAPHY.
(1) W. E. Andrews, Esq., M.A., Principal, La Martiniere
College, Lucknow.
(2) Munshi Lai Agarwala, Esq., Lecturer, Training
College, Allahabad.
(3) H. B. Wetherill, Esq., M.A., Inspector of Schools,
Lucknow division, Lucknow (to act as con-
vener).
(11) HISTORY AND CIVICS.
(1) Dr. Beni Prasad, Reader, Allahabad University,
Allahabad.
(2) Parmanand, Esq.. M.A.. Lecturer, Allahabad Uni-
versity, Allahabad.
(3) Dr. Tara Chand, M.A., D.PHIL. , Allahabad University,
Allahabad (to act as convener).
(12) CHEMISTRY.
(1) Dr. K. C. Pandya, Professor, St. John's College^
Agra.
(2) Dr. N. R. Dhar, Professor, Allahabad University,
Allahabad.
(3) Dr. S. M. Sane, Professor, Lucknow University,
Lucknow (to act as convener).
(13) PHYSICS.
(1) Saligram Bhargava. Esq., M.SC., Reader, Allahabad
University, Allahabad.
(2) Dr. Wali Mohammad, Professor, Lucknow Uni-
versity, Lucknow (to act as convener).
(14) COMMERCE.
(1) Dr. D. Pant, Professor, Lucknow University, Luck*
now.
102 CALENDAR 1928-29
<2) B. N. Chopra, Esq., Professor, S. D. College of
Commerce, Cawnpore.
(3) J. P. Srivastava, Esq., M.sc., Civil Lines, Cawnpore
(to act as convener).
(15) SANSKRIT, HINDI, BENGALI, MARATHI AND GUJARATI.
{!) J. L. Sathe, Esq., i.c.s., Excise Commissioner, United
Provinces, Allahabad.
{2) Rai Sahib Babu Shyam Sundar Das, B.A., Professor,
Benares Hindu University, Benares.
(3) Dr. P. K. Acharya, M.A., Ph.D., D. LITT., Professor,
Allahabad University, Allahabad.
{4) Pandit Ayodhya Nath Sharma, Professor, S. D.
College of Commerce, Cawnpore.
(5) A. B. Dhruva, Esq., M.A., Pro-Vice-Chancellor,
Benares Hindu University, Benares (to act as
convener).
(16) AGRICULTURE.
(1) H. N. Batham, Esq., Professor, Agricultural College,
Cawnpore.
(2) C. Maya Das, Esq., Principal, Agricultural College,
Cawnpore.
(3) Dr. S. Higginbottom, Principal, Allahabad Agri-
cultural Institute, Naini, Allahabad (to act as
*
convener).
(17) ARABIC, PERSIAN AND URDU.
(1) Dr. Tara Chand, Principal, Kayasth Pathshala
University College, Allahabad.
(2) S. M. Zamin Ali, Esq., M.A., Lecturer, Allahabad
University, Allahabad.
(3) Mahdi Husain Nasiri, Esq., M.A., Head Master,
Government High School, Aligarh (to act as con-
vener).
MISCELLANEOUS RULES 103
MISCELLANEOUS RULES.
Travelling Allowance Rules.
All members of the Board and of Committees appoint-
ed by the Board (official and non-official) attending meet-
ings, and examiners and inspectors appointed by the
Board who are required to perform journeys on duty
are entitled to travelling and halting allowances such as
are admissible to first-class officers according to the rules
laid down in Financial Handbook, volume III.
104 CALENDAR 1928-29
Maximum and minimum marks assigned to the various
subjects for the examination of 1930.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION.
Maximum marks . . 150 in English and 100 in
every other subject.
Minimum pass marks . . 50 in English and 33 in
every other subject.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION.
Maximum marks . . 150 in English and 100 in
every other subject.
Minimum pass marks . . 50 in English and 33 in
every other subject.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATIONS IN COMMERCE
AND AGRICULTURE.
Maximum marks . . 100 in each subject.
Minimum pass marks . . 33 ditto.
DISTINCTION.
Minimum marks required 75 per cent, of the aggre-
gate marks in a subject.
DIVISION.
Minimum pass marks re- 60 per cent, in the aggre-
quired for division I. gate.
Minimum pass marks re- 45 per cent, in the aggre-
quired for division II. gate.
Minimum pass marks re- 33 per cent, in the aggre-
quired for division III. gate.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 10&
COURSES OF STUDY.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930.
A. COMPULSORY SUBJECTS.
1. ENGLISH.
Three papers, each of three hours, will be set (1)<
on the Prescribed Course in Prose and Poetry with ques-
tions on Grammar, Idiom, etc.*; (2) on Unseen Passages
with questions on Grammar and Idiom ; (3) passages in
an Indian vernacular for translation into English and
a simple narrative or descriptive composition in Eng-
lish. There will be no oral test, but there will be an
examination in English dictation at each centre.
Books prescribed :
Group A.
1. Macmillan's English Prose Selections.
2. Modern English Prose by Brown, Macmillan's.
3. Jones' English Prose Selections (Indian Press,
Ltd., Allahabad. Revised edition, 1927).
Group B.
1. Paths of Peace, Book II, by Mrs. Laurence
Binyon, Oxford University Press. "
2. Self -Help, by Smiles, National Press, Allahabad.
3. Heroes of Exploration (Ker and Cleaver)
Blackie and Sons, Limited.
Group C.
1. Indian Schools Book of Verse, Part II, from
which the following poems are prescribed :
The Slave's Dream ; The Plate of Gold ; The Honest
Man ; Incident of the French Camp* ; The
Old Order Changeth ; My Heart Leaps Up
Under the Greenwood Tree ; Blow, Blow, Thou
Winter Wind ; The Burial of Sir John Moore ;
Abou Ben Adhem ; The Brook ; Ring Out
Wild Bells.
106 CALENDAR 1928-29
2. High School Poetry (Indian Press, Limited,
Allahabad), the whole book omitting " The Tiger/' " The
Isles of Greece," and "Horatius," Stanzas 120, 27, 28,
,33, 34 ? 3643, 45, 46, 5457 and 6064.
3. School Favourites, from which the following
poems are prescribed ;
Lochinvar ; The Poet's Song ; The Honest Man ;
The Plate of Gold ; The Deserted Village ; To
a Waterfowl ; To the Cuckoo, by Wordsworth ;
The Daffodils, by Wordsworth ; Alexander
Selkirk ; A Psalm of Life ; Ring Out Wild Bells ;
The Spacious Firmament.
N.B.* The above text-books are arranged in three groups, A,
J3 and C. Group A contains books of Prose Selections, Group B books
of Inspirational Stories, and Group C books of Poetry. Every school
must select for study one book only from each of the abovv groups.
Books recommended for rapid reading and indicating
the standard of the unseen passages to be set in the second
paper :
1. Folk Tales of the Nations (Nelson).
2. Scott's Ivanhoe (abridged), by P. Wren. Oxford
University Press, Hornby Road, Bombay. Re. 1.
3. Stories from the Arabian Nights (Senior Series).
Longmans, Green & Co. Sd.
4. Scott's Ivanhoe, Victory Series.
5. Tanglewood Tales, by N. Hawthorne, Longmans,
Green & Co. Is.
6. 'Stories from Arabian Nights (Teaching of English
.Series, Nelson's).
7. Tales from Dickens, by T. F. O'Donnell.
8. Jungle Book, Kipling (Macmillan's).
9. A Persian Hero. Edited by W. Grandy, Mac-
millan & Co. Is.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 107
10. Stories from Tagore. Macmillan & Co.
11. The Cloister and the Hearth, by Charles Reade.
Abridged and simplified by S. G. Dunn. Oxford Uni-
versity Press, Hornby Road, Bombay. Re. 1.
12. The Cloister and the Hearth, by Armour (Victory
Series).
13. Stories from Shakespeare, Wyatt. Oxford Uni-
versity Press.
14. The Story of Francis Drake, by H. R. Ford.
Herbert Strang's Readers, Grade IV. Oxford University
Press, Bombay. Is.
15. Stories from Don Quixote, by H. Martin, pub-
lished by the Standard Publishing House (Messrs. Atma
Ram & Sons), Lahore.
16. Stories of Greece and Rome, by H. Johnstone.
Longmans, Green & Co.
17. Indian Legends by Amaranatha Jha. (Victory
Series.)
18. Shakespeare in Prose, by I. C. Fortey (Blackie).
19. Tales from Indian History, by A. S. Roe. (Mac-
millan.)
20. The Use of Life, by Lord Avebury.
21. Tales of Troy, retold in English by Aubrey
Stewart, and edited by T. S. Peppin, Macmillan & Co.,
Ld. Price, Is. 9d.
22. Robinson Crusoe, abridged by Henry Martin (Ram
Narain Lai).
23. Rob Roy, abridged (Macmillan's).
24. The Golden Company (Oxford University Press).
25. Lamb's Tales from Shakespeare (Indian Press
School Classics).
108 CALENDAR 1928-29
II. MATHEMATICS,
There will be two papers, each of three hours one
in Arithmetic and Algebra and the other in Geometry
and Mensuration.
SYLLABUS.
1. Arithmetic and Algebra. The four simple rules ;
British "and Metric systems of measurement ; Factors ;
Prime numbers ; H. C. F. and L. C. M. ; Decimal fractions
(including conversion of a recurring decimal to a vulgar
fraction and conversely) ; Square Root ; Ratio, and Pro-
portion ; Average ; Percentages ; Profit and loss ; Inter-
est, simple and compound ; Present worth and discount ;
Simple equations of one or more unknown quantities ;
Quadratic equations of one unknown quantity ; Graphs
of statistics ; Graphs of straight lines, and graphical
solution of linear simultaneous equations ; Problems.
N.B. Candidates will bf> provided with squared paper, if necessary.
2. Geometry and Mensuration. The course includes
theoretical, practical and numerical Geometry, and every
candidate will be expected to answer questions in both
branches of the subject. The questions on Practical
Geometry will be set on the constructions contained in
the annexed Schedule A, together with easy extensions
of them. All figures should be drawn accurately, for
w T hich purpose every candidate should provide himself
with a graduated scale, a pair of set squares, a protractor,
a compass, and a hard pencil. The questions on Theo-
retical Geometry will consist of theorems and problems
contained in the annexed Schedules A and B, together
with easy extensions and deductions with numerical
illustrations. Any proof of a proposition will be accepted
which appears to the examiners to form part of a system-
atic treatment of the subject ; the order in which the
theorems are stated in Schedule B is not imposed as
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 109
the sequence of their treatment. In the proof of the
theorems hypothetical constructions will be permitted.
N. ft. Candidates will be provided with squared paptr, if necessary.
SCHEDULE A.
Bisection of angles and of straight lines.
Construction of perpendiculars to straight lines.
Construction of an angle equal to a given angle.
Construction of parallels to a given straight line.
Simple cases of the construction from sufficient data of
triangles and quadrilaterals.
Division of straight lines into a given number of equal
parts.
Construction of a triangle equal in area to a given
polygon.
Construction of tangents to a circle and of common
tangents to two circles.
Simple cases of the construction of circles from suffi-
cient data.
Construction of a rectangle equal to a given polygon.
Construction of a rectangle on a given base equal in
area to a given rectangle.
Construction of a square equal to a given rectangle.
Construction of a rectangle of given area the sum or
difference of whose sides is given. (These constructions
should be based on the propositions on the Geometry of
the circle.)
Construction of a fourth proportional to three given
straight lines and a mean proportional to two given
straight lines (as corollaries to previous constructions of
rectangles).
Construction of regular figures of 3, 4, 6 or 8 sides in
or about a given circle.
Mensuration of triangles and simple rectilineal figures ;
finding their area by means of field-book ; application of
110 CALENDAB 1928-29
formulae for length of circumference and for area of a
circle in terms of its radius.
SCHEDULE B.
Angles at a point.
If a straight line stands on another straight line the
sum of the two angles so formed is equal to two right
angles ; and the converse.
If two straight lines intersect, the vertically opposite
angles are equal.
Parallel straight lines.
When a straight line cuts two other straight lines, if
(i) a pair of alternate angles are equal ; or,
(ii) a pair of corresponding angles are equal ; or
(iii) a pair of interior angles on the same side of the
cutting line are together equal to two right
angles, then the two straight lines are parallel ;
and the converse.
Straight lines which are parallel to the same straight
line are parallel to one another.
Triangles and rectilineal figures.
The sum of the angles of a triangle is equal to two^
right angles.
If the sides of a convex polygon are produced in order
the sum of the angles so formed is equal to four right
angles.
If two triangles have two sides of the one equal to two
sides of the other, each to each, and also the angles con-
taining' by these sides equal, the triangles are congruent.
If two triangles have two angles of the one equal to
two angles of the other, each to each, and also one side of
the one equal to the corresponding side of the other,
triangles axe congruent.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 111
If two sides of a triangle are equal, the angles opposite
to these sides are equal ; and the converse.
If two triangles have the three sides of the one equal to
the three sides of the other, each to each, the triangles are
congruent.
If two right-angled triangles have their hypotenuses
equal and one side of the one equal to one side of the
other, the triangles are congruent.
If two sides of a triangle are unequal, the greater side
as the greater angle opposite to it ; and the converse.
Of all the straight lines that can be drawn to a given
straight line from a given point outside it, the perpendicu-
lar is the shortest.
The opposite sides and angles of a parallelogram are
equal, each diagonal bisects the parallelogram and the
diagonals bisect one another.
If there are three or more parallel straight lines and
the intercepts made by them on any straight line that
cuts them are equal, then the corresponding intercepts
on any other straight line that cuts them are also equal.
Areas.
Parallelograms on the same or equal bases and of the
same altitude are equal in area.
Triangles on the same or equal bases and of the same
altitude are equal in area.
Equal triangles on the same or equal bases are of the
same altitude.
Illustrations and explanations of the geometrical
theorems corresponding to the following algebraical iden-
tities :
(a -f b -f c +..)= ka -j- kb + kc +..
(a x b)*=a 2 x 2ab X b*.
(a 6) 2 =a 2 2o&46-.
a* 6 &== ( a -}- 6) (a 6).
112 CALBNDAB 1928-29
The square on a side of a triangle is greater than,
*cqual to, or less than the sum of the squares on the other
two sides, according as the angle contained by these sides
is obtuse, right or acute. The difference in the case of in-
equality, is twkn the rectangle contained by one of the
two sides and the projection on it of the other.
In any triangle the sum of the squares on two sides is
qual to twice the square on half the base together with
twice the square on the median which bisects the base.
Loci.
The locus of a point which is equidistant from two
fixed points is the perpendicular bisector of the straight
line joining the two fixed points.
The locus of a point which is equidistant from two
intersecting straight lines consists of the pair of straight
lines which bisect the angles between the two given lines.
The circle.
A straight line drawn from the centre of a circle to
bisect a chord which is not the diameter is at right angles
to the chord ; conversely, the perpendicular to a chord
from the centre bisects the chord.
There is one circle and one only which passes through
three given points not in a straight line.
In equal circles (or in the same circle) (i) if two arcs
subtend equal angles at the centres they are equal ; (ii)
conversely, if two arcs are equal, they subtend equal
angles at the centre.
In equal circles (or in the same circle) (i) if two chords
are equal, they cut off equal arcs ; (ii) conversely, if two
arcs are equal, the chords of the arcs are equal.
Equal chords in a circle are equidistant from the
centre ; and the converse.
The tangents at any point of a circle and the radius
through the point are perpendicular to one another.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 113
If two circles touch, the point of contact lies on the
straight line through the centres.
The angle which an arc of a circle subtends at the
centre is double that which it subtends at any point on
the remaining part of the circumference.
Angles in the same segment of a circle are equal, and
if the line joining two points subtends equal angles at
two other points on the same sides of it, the four points lie
on a circle.
The angle in a semi-circle is a right angle, the angle in
a segment greater than a semi-circle is less than a right
angle, and the angle in a segment less than a semi-circle
is greater than a right angle.
The opposite angles of any quadrilateral inscribed in
a circle are supplementary ; and the converse.
If a straight line touch a circle, and from the point of
contact a chord be drawn, the angles which this chord
makes with the tangent are equal to the angles in the
alternate segments.
If two chords of a circle intersect either inside or
outside the feircle the rectangle contained by the parts of
the one is equal to the rectangle contained by the parts
of the other.
The following books are suggested :
For Algebra
Ross : Elementary Algebra, Part I. Longmans,
Green & Co.
BAKER AND BOURNE : Elementary Algebra, Part I.
G. Bell & Sons.
H. S. HALL : School. Algebra, Parts I and II.
Macmillan 6s Co.
In Geometry
HALL AND STEVENS : A Shorter School Geometry,
Parts I and II. Macmillan & Co.
8
114 CALENDAB, 1928-29
Parkinson and Pressland : A Primer of Geometry,
Clarendon Press, Oxford (Indian edition).
Rs. 1-12.
PIEBPOINT'S Elements of Geometry.
III. HISTORY.
There will be two papers, each of three hours :
(1) Indian History and Allied Geography, and
(ii) English History and Allied Geography.
Indian History.
Indian History in outline from the earliest time to
the present day.
The following syllabus is suggested :
I. The influence of Geography on Indian History.
II. Ancient India
A. Vedic period till 600 B. C.
1. The Dravidians. *
2. The Aryan immigration.
3. Character of culture
(a) Vedic religion outline.
(b) Vedic society caste, woman.
(c) Literature Veda (Brahman, Upanishad,
Smriti).
B. Buddhists period 600180 B.C.
1. Life and teaching of Buddha.
(2) Mauryas, Asoka.
3. Culture
(a) Dharma.
(b) Government.
C. Hindu period 180 B. C. 650 A. D.
1. Sungas, Kanvas, Andhras.
2. Yuechis, Kushanas, Kanishka.
3. Guptas Samudragupta, Chandragupta, Vikra-
maditya.
4. Harsha.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 115
5. Culture
(a) Religion Puranas, Epic (toleration).
(6) Literature Kalidasa.
(c) Art Ajanta, Amaravati.
D. Rajput period 650 A. D. 1200 A.D.
1. The origin of Rajputs.
2. Rajput kingdoms ,tChauhans, Chandels, Gahar-
war (Rathor).
3. The South Pandyas, Pawars, Cholas and Ker-
alas.
4. The Deccan Yadavas, Chalukyas, Rashtra-
kutas.
III. Medieval India
A. Early Mediaeval.
1. Life and teaching of Muhammad.
2. The Arab expansion.
3. The Turks and their kingdoms.
4. Turkish invasions
(a) Mahmud of Ghazni.
(b) Muhammad Shahab-ud-din Ghori.
(c) The Slave kings Balban and Mongol in-
vasions.
(d) The Khiljis, Ala-ud-din, and conquest of the
south.
(e) The Tughlaks Muhammad and Firoz break-
up of early mediaeval empire.
(/) Provincial principalities and invasion of
Timur.
(g) The Hindu kingdoms of the south.
(h) Culture.
Religion Kabir.
Literature Growth of Modern Indian Languages.
116 CALENDAR, 1928-29
B. Later mediaeval
(a) 1. Sayyads and Lodis Dissensions.
2. Babar and Humayun Conquest and failure.
3. Sher Shah.
4. Akbar Conquest and Consolidation.
5 . Jahangir , Shah j ahan Prosperity .
6. Aurangzeb
Religious quarrels .
Conquest of the south.
7. Successors of Aurangzeb.
Decay of Empire.
(6) Mahrattas Shivaji The struggle with the
Mughals The Peshwas up to 1761.
(c) Sikhs Nanak and Guru Govind Singh.
(d) Early European settlements, 1600 1708.
1. Portuguese Discovery of the route from
Europe to India.
2. Dutch Settlement in the Spice archipelago.
3. English Embassies to Mughal emperors and
establishment of factories.
4. French Establishment of factories.
(e) Culture
Religion, Bhakti Movement.
Art Taj.
Literature 1. Hindi Tulsidasa, Surdasa, Rahim,
Malik, Md. Jaisi.
2. Urdu.
IV. Modern India
A. 1. Struggle between the empire and the Mahrattas.
2. Break-up of the empire and the establishment
of Subedars.
3. Sikhs Ranjit Singh.
4. Mahratta and other Indian States.
B. 1. Struggle of the European Powers. The
French and the British (1700 1763).
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 117
2. Struggle between the English and Indian
Princes (1756 1774). Conquest of Bengal.
C. British rule, 17741857
1. Warren Hastings
(i) Regulating Act.
(ii) Internal difficulties,
(iii) Wars with the Indian rulers.
2. Cornwallis
(i) The permanent settlement,
(ii) Wars with Indian rulers.
3. Wellesly
(i) The subsidiary alliance system,
(ii) The French rivalry,
(iii) Wars and expansions of British territory.
4. Minto
Embassies to Asiatic Powers.
5. Hastings Nepal War, Mahratta wars.
6. Beiitinck Reforms.
7. Auckland and Ellenborough Afghan Wars.
8. Hardinge Punjab War.
9. Dalhousie Completion of dominions.
D. British rule, 18571919
(a) Wars and expansions.
1, Afghanistan.
2. Burma.
(b) Internal developments
1. Constitutional, 1861, 1892, 1909, 1919.
2. Local Self -Government.
3. Education.
4. Justice.
5 . Administration .
(c) National movements
1. Hindu reforms.
2. Muslim reforms.
118 CALENDAR 1928-29
3. Growth of Nationalism, Indian National
Congress.
The following books indicating the scope and standard
of knowledge required are recommended :
1. V. A. Smith Oxford Student's History of India.
(Clarendon Press, Oxford). Us. 2.
2. It. D. Banerji History of India (The Book Co.,
College Square, Calcutta).
3. Thompson. History of India (Christian Litera-
ture Society, Madras).
4. Har Prasad Shastri. History of India (Blackie).
5. Hoernle and Stark. A History of India (Orissa
Mission Press, Cuttack).
6. E. B. Havell.A Short History of India (Mac-
millan & Co.)
7. Student's Atlas of Indian History (Macmillan).
8. Manmatha Nath Rai History of India in Urdu
and Hindi, second edition (Nand Kishore & Bros., Bena-
res).
9. Ishwari Prasad Student's History of India in
Hindi and Urdu, second edition. (The Indian 'Press,
Allahabad).
10. B. N. Mehta A Handbook of Indian History in
Hindi (University Book Depot, Agra).
English History.
English History in outline from 1485 A. D. to 1914.
The folowing syllabus is suggested :
I. The influence of Geography on English History
II. History of England, 14851688
A. Introductory to 1485
(a) Growth of Parliament.
(6) Evolution of commerce and industry.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 119
(c) Social changes.
(d) Relations with European countries, es-
pecially France.
B. Tudors, 14851603
(1) Monarchy and Parliament.
(2) Religious evolution.
(3) Growth of Commerce.
(4) Discoveries and beginning of colonial and
sea-power.
(5) Relations with European Powers.
C. Early Stuarts, 16031649
(1) Monarchy and Parliament.
(2) Religion Puritans and Anglicans.
(3) Commercial and Colonial expansion.
(4) Civil War.
D. The Commonwealth, 1649 1660
(1) Cromwell
(a) Scotland and Ireland.
(b) European powers, navigation laws.
(c) Religion Growth of Puritans.
(d) Parliament.
E. Later Stuarts, 16601688
(1) Parliament
(a) Parties.
(b) Cabinet.
(2) Relations with European Powers France and
Holland.
(3) Colonial and Commercial expansion.
III. Constitutional Government, 16881919
A. William and Mary and Anne, 16881714.
(1) Bill of Rights.
(2) Parliament
(a) Whigs and Tories.
(b) Cabinet.
120 CALENDAB 1928-29
(3) Affairs of Ireland.
(4) Relations with European Powers and growth
of Colonial Powers.
B. Early Hanoverians, 17141763
(1) Walpole, Pitt.
(2) European Wars.
(3) Colonial expansion.
C. Later Hanoverians, 1763 1830
(1) Industrial Revolution.
(2) American Revolution.
(3) French Revolution, Wars with France.
(4) Ireland Union.
D. Rise of Democracy
(1) 18301885.
(1) Reforms 1830, 1867, 1885.
(2) Relation with Europe
Crimean War ; England and Russia.
(3) Imperial development.
(2) 18851919.
(1) England and Russia.
Germany.
Empire.
(2) Ireland. .
(3) Internal developments
(a) Parliament.
(b) Commerce and Industry.
The following books indicating the scope and standard
of knowledge required are recommended :
1. S. R. Gardiner. A School Atlas of English
History. (Longmans, Green & Co.).
2. Ed. J. S. Lay. The English People (Macmillan).
3. Oman. Junior History of England (Arnold).
4. S. R. Gardiner. Outline of English History
(Longmans, Green & Co.).
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 121
5. T. F. Tout. A History of Great Britain, Book II.
(Longmans, Green & Co.)
6. Kerr and Rushbrook Williams. Growth of the
British Empire (Longmans, Green & Co.).
7. Macmillan's Atlas of the British Empire.
8. Guest, G. Outlines of British History (Oxford
University Press, 1922). 2s. 6d.
9. Pupils' Study Book of English History by J. T.
Mulley, Books II, III and IV, published by E. J. Arnold
& Sons.
10. Raghu Kul. Tilak : A History of Modern Eng-
land, Urdu and Hindi (Indian Press, Allahabad).
11. S. D. Tripathi Shastri : History of the English
People, Urdu and Hindi (Macmillan & Co.).
12. Ram Krishna Mathur : A Handbook of English
History available in one volume (Hindi and Urdu ver-
sions), (S. S. Mathur, Anand Pushtakalaya, Cawnpore).
or
Geography.
There will be two papers, each of three hours' dura-
tion, as follows :
Paper I General Geography of the World outside
of India (sections I and II of the syllabus).
Paper II India and its world relations (section III
of the syllabus).
SYLLABUS.
I. (a) Shape of the Earth ; rotation and revolution ;
latitude and longitude ; simple map projections ; dura-
tion of day and night ; seasons.
(b) Outlines of the relief and drainage of the lands,
and the nature and origin of the chief land-forms, in-
cluding coastal configuration.
122 CALENDAR 1928-29
(c) The atmosphere. Weather and climate. Sea-
sonal distribution over the globe of insolation, tempera-
ture, pressure, and rainfall. Winds ; Ferrels' law ; Buys
Ballot's law, cyclones and anti-cyclones. Climatic
regions.
II. (a) The world treated according to its major
natural regions. The knowledge of the principles of
physical geography and of the geographical distributions
should be applied to the study in outline of the major
natural regions of the world.
(b) The influence of his environment on man, his
activities, his industries ; exchange of commodities :
-communications ; growth of towns.
III. Geography of India in fuller detail. Its rela-
tions, physical and climatic, with contiguous areas ; and
its commercial relations with the world in general.
Books recommended :
The world in outline (Indian Press, Allahabad). Re. 1.
Herbertson : Junior Geography (Oxford University
Press). 3s. 6d.
Herbertson (F. D.) : Elementary Geography, Vol. I :
Physiography. 2s.
L'Estrange : Junior Course of Comparative Geog-
raphy (Philip) 3s. 6d.
Morrison : Junior Geography of India, Burma and
eylon (Nelson). Price, 12 annas.
Morrison : New Geography of the Indian Empire and
Ceylon (Nelson). Price, Re. 1.
Indian School Atlas (Oxford University Press). Price
Re. 1-6.
Philip's Visual Contour Atlas for India.
Johnston's Indian New Era Atlas.
Books of reference for teachers :
Herbertson : Senior Geography (Oxford University
Press). 3s. 6d.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 123
Tar and MacMurry : World Geography (Macmillan).
5s.
Chisholm : Smaller Commercial Geography (Long-
mans). 35. 6d.
Lyde : Man and his Markets (Macmillan). 2s.
Herbertson : Man and his Work (Black). Is. 6d.
Davis : Elementary Physical Geography (Ginn). 5s.
6d.
Mill : Realm of Nature (Murray). 5s.
F. G. French and L. Dudley Stamp. The Indian
Empire, Part I, Longmans, Green & Co.
H. Mackay : The Oxford Picture Geographies Moun-
tains and Plains, Rivers, the Coast. (Oxford University
Press.)
Unstead and Taylor : Essentials of World Geography
(Philip). 2s.
Books recommended for general reading for boys :
Leonard Brooks : New Regional Geographies, Book
IV. London University Press.*
W. H. Barker and L. Brooks : Junior Regional
Geographies, Book III. London University Press.
C. Morrison : Our World (Macmillan's).
Lyde : Man on the Earth (Blackie).
High Roads to Geography (Nelson).
Lands and their Stories (Blackie).
Peeps into Many Lands (Black).
IV. MODERN INDIAN LANGUAGES.
There will be two papers, each of three hours, in each
of these languages one paper will be set in Prose Text
and Unseen, and the other in Poetry Text and Com-
position. Grammatical questions will be set in both
the papers. The ability of the Urdu candidates to read
^hikast will be tested by means of a paper set for the
purpose.
124 CALENDAR 1.928-29
The following are the text-books prescribed :
Hindi.
Poetry : q^fei3?T USTToT^it Part I (published by the
Nagri Pracharni Sabha, Benares).
2. J|TJ ftrsrar by Siya Ram Sharan Gupta (Sahitya
Sadan, Chirgaon, Jhansi).
Prose : ^T^ ^f SftcT * by Pandit Ramchandra Shukla
(Nagri Pracharini Sabha, Benares).
Special attention should be paid to Hindi Composi-
tion. The following books are recommended for Gram-
mar and Composition :
1. r^RT tf^T^I by Ram Ratna. (Ratnasram, Agra).
2. ^rf^TFT f^^t ajT^t"* 1 ! by Kamta Prasad Guru.
(Nagari Pracharini Sabha, Benares.)
3. High School Hindi Vyakaran, by Ganga Prasad
(Publisher, Ram Dayal Agarwala, Allahabad).
Books recommended for supplementary reading :
1. Harishchandra . . " Satya Harishchandra "
(Nagari Pracharni Sabha,
Benares).
2. Lakshman Singh " Shakuiitala Natak " (Prose
edition), (Indian Press,
Ld., Allahabad).
3. Gadadhar Singh . . "Kadambari" (Indian Press,,
Ld., Allahabad).
4. Ganga Prasad . . Hindi Pros Selection Indian
Press, Allahabad.)
5. Ayodhia Nath . . "Ujjwal Tare" (Indian Press,
Allahabad).
6. Mishra Bandhu . . "Purva Bharata" (Ganga
Pustakamala, Lucknow).
7. Shridhar Pathak . . "Shrant Pathik" (Padmakot,
Allahabad).
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 125
8. Jagannath Das .. "Harish Chandra" N. P.
Sabha).
9. Deshvrat . . * 'Hindu Jati ka Swatantrya
Prem." Gandhi Hindi
Pustak Bhandar, Allah-
abad).
10. Chandra Shekhar " Viropakhyan." Sahitya
Shastri. Bhawan, Limited, Allah-
abad).
Urdu.
1. P;l **>* by Jalal-ud-din Ahmad, published by
Anwar Ahmadi Press, Allahabad (latest edition),
or
Kyaban Urdu, published by the Indian Publishing
House, Allahabad.
2. Nisab-i-Jadid, by Maulvi Mahdi Husain Nasiri,
published by the Anwar-i- Ahmadi Press, Allahabad.
3. Qawaid Urdu, by Jamaluddin Haidar, published
by Ram Dayal Agarwala, Allahabad.
For Shikast the book recommended is
Majmua-i-Khatt-i-Shikast, by M. A. Siddiqui, publish
ed by the Indian Publishing House, Allahabad.
Bengali.
1. Sitar Vanabasa, by Pandit Ishwar Chandra
Vidyasagar (Prose).
2. Katha-o-Kahini, by Rabindra Nath Tagore (Poe-
try).
3. Mahabharatiya Niti Katha in Bengali, Parts 1
and II, by Rajendra Nath Kanji Lai, 3, Madan Mittra
Lane, Calcutta. Rajendra Chandra Ghosh. 38 Cron-
wallis Street, Calcutta. Price, 12 annas each.
or
Arya Kirti, by Rajani Kanta Gupta, published by
Mohini Kanta Gupta, Rajani Kutir, 28/16 Akhil Mistrfs
126 CALENDAR 1928-29
Lane, Calcutta, to be had of the Sanskrit Press Deposi-
tory, 30, Cornwallis Street, Calcutta, price Re. 1-8-0, as-
an alternative to Mahabharatiya Niti Katha, Part II.
(Recommended for rapid reading Unseen.)
4. Bhasha Bodh Vyakaran, by Nakuleshwara Vidya-
bhusan. Re. 1 (recommended).
Marathi.
1. Keshavsut Yancha Kavita Sangrahwa Cha-
ritra, published by Sita Ram Keshva Damle, and printed
by the Chitrashala Press, Poona city. Price, Re. 1-8-0.
2. Gad Ala Pan Sinha Gela, by Hari Narain Apte^
published by the Arya Bhushan Press, Poona city. Price,
annas 8.
3. Swami Vivekanandachin Patren, published by
the Manoranjak Granth Prasarak Mandali,* Bombay.
Price, annas 4.
Grammar R. B. Joshi's Marathi Grammar " Prau-
dhabodha."
Recommended for the use of teachers.
Marathi Grammar, by M. K. Damle. Published by
the Indraprakash Press, Bombay.
Gujarati.
Paper /, Prose. Karanghelo, by Nandshanker Tulja-
shankar, published by the Gujarati Publishing Press,
Bombay. Price, about Re. 1.
For unseen The following book is recommended for
rapid reading : Balavilas, by M. M. Dwivedi.
Paper //, Poetry. Sudama Charitra, by Prema-
nand, edited by Manjulal Ranchhod Lai Majumdar of
Baroda.
For Grammar the following book is recommended :
Madhyama Gujrati Vyakarana, by K. P f Trivedi
(N. M. Tripathi, Bombay).
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 127
B. OPTIONAL SUBJECTS.
I. CLASSICAL LANGUAGES.
There will be two papers each of three hours in each
of these languages the first paper will be in the pres-
cribed texts and grammer, and the second paper in
Translation, Composition, and Unseen.
SYLLABUS.
(a) Sanskrit.
Paper I. (a) Text-books, (i) Mitra-labha (Hitopa-
desha) and (ii) Bhartrihari Nitishataka.
NOTES. 1. The edition of Hitopadesha and Bhartrihari Nitishataka
published by the Indian Press, Limited, Allahabad, or that of the Nirnaya
Sagar Press, Bombay, is recommended. All objectionable passages may
be omitted by the teachers.
2. The students should be taught to understand the passages with
context and the substance, and to learn the analysis of compounds, san-
dhis and the prose order of the poetry pieces.
(6) Grammar. Simple sandhis. Declension of nouns
and pronouns of frequent occurrence. Conjugation of
verbs of frequent occurrence in all classes but omitting
those of adadi O^fif), rudhadi fesnTSf), juhotyadi
), and kryadi (5R7TT^), classes in 35, &T?,
and ^5$ only.
NOTE. Questions on Grammar exclusively should be asked from the
prescribed books, as far as possible, and should carry about one-third of
the total marks.
Books recommended in Grammar
1. First Book of Sanskrit by Bhandarkar.
2. R. K. Banerjee's Sanskrit Grammar.
3. Sanskrit Teacher, by K. P. Trivedi.
4. Sanskrit Prathama Pustaka, by Professor Ram
Bihari Lai, D. A. V. College, Cawnpore.
5. Upakramanika, printed by Khadgavilas Press,
Bankipore.
6. Vigyan Dipika, by Pandit Sadashiva Shastri.
128 CALENDAB, 1928-29
7. Sanskrit Viakarana Bodha, by Pandit Kanhaiya
Lai Shastri, published by Ram Dayal Agarwala, Allah-
abad.
Paper II. Translation, Composition, and Unseen.
(a) Selected passages from books recommended for
rapid reading and from others of equal diffi-
culty for translation into the vernacular of the
candidate ; (6) substance of easy passages
from the abovementioned books to be expressed
in Sanskrit ; and (c) translation of easy Eng-
lish prose sentences into Sanskrit.
Books recommended for rapid reading and for com-
position :
(1) Kusum-mala, Part I, by V. S. Apte.
(2) ?TJT 5ROT T^rf compiled by Sant Gopal Chand
Shastri (published by Ram Narain Lai).
(3) A Manual of Sanskrit Composition, by Lalleram
Tewari (National Press, Allahabad).
(4)
N.B. Saiiskrit must be written in Devanagari character.
(b) Arabic.
Prescribed course
Paper / (a) Tert. ^MC^** complied by Zafar Iqbal,
M.A., B.T., Lecturer, Central Training College, Lahore.
Published by Atar Chand Kapoor & Sons, Anarkali,
Lahore.
(6) Grammar Mabadi-ul Arabia M-^-^I^U* by
Shartuni, Urdu edition, edited by Maulvi Izzat Ullah
(the Majidi Press, Cawnpore).
N.B. Questions on Grammar exclusively should be asked from
the prescribed books, as far as possible, and should carry about one-third
of the total marks.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 129
Paper II. Translation, Composition, and Unseen :
(a) Selected passages from books recommended for
rapid reading and from others of equal diffi-
culty for translation into Urdu ; (6) substance
of easy passages from the above-mentioned
books to be expressed in Arabic ; and (c) trans-
lation of easy English prose sentences into
Arabic.
Book recommended for rapid reading
(Anwar Ahmadi Press, Allahabad).
NOTE.- Arabic words must be written in Arabic character.
(c) Persian.
Prescribed course
Paper /(a). Text
Prose.
1. Gulistan u^tf L-^^'J L^.***/ Chapter I up to story
48 and Chapter IV up to story 12.
2. fJtc ASU by Abdul Latif Shustari
pages 291 306.
3. Anwar Sahaili ^l^*" ;!j'J by ^iiK IacJ 5 C2 >**
Chapter I, up to e^*^ ^A?^> )^ *^J & x*J> o^ & ^^
Poetry.
1. Bostan .U-y Chapter I, first 48 stories. Chapter
II first 35 stories, Chapter VI Introduction, Chapter VII
first 5 stories, Chapter VIII first 4 stories, Chapter IX
first 4 stories, and Chapter X.
2. Aiynai Sikandari, by Khusru ^^A
1. Ode y?})j 3! ^Jr^ *A>M / up to i>y ^b* ^ ^ T
2. Ode ^-1; uJ^Ai -J ^ ; !o ^Jlo up to
3. 24 Eubayat Umar Khyam per selection.
Recommended the selections of the above by An-
warul Matabay, Victoria Street, Lucknow.
9
130 CALENDAB 192S-2&
(6) Grammar. i**)^)***; by ol
(Oriental Publishing House, Lucknow), or
by S. Zafar Husain (Rai Sahib Kamdayal Agarwala,
Allahabad), (only etymology and syntax should be
taught to the High School classes).
N.B. Questions on Grammar exclusively should be asked from
the prescribed books, as far as possible, and should carry about one-third
of the total marks.
Paper II . Translation, Composition, and Unseen :
(a) Selected passages from books recommended for
rapid reading and from others of equal diffi-
culty for translation into Urdu ; (6) substance
of easy passages from the above-mentioned
books to be expressed in Persian ; and (c)
translation of easy English prose sentences
into Persian.
Books recommended for rapid reading :
published by the Oriental
Publishing House, Lucknow,
and Ayar Danish <jfc^o ^ Us
Students who offer Persian are required to have such a
knowledge of the etymology of the Arabic language as
will enable them to explain all Arabic words and phrases
which may occur in the text-books and in the books
recommended for rapid reading in Persian.
NOTE Persian words must be written in Persian character.
(d) Latin.
Paper /. Prescribed prose and poetry.
Text-books.
Caesar : De Bello Gallico, Book IV.
Livy : Hannibalian War, Selections from Books XXIII
and XXIV (Macmillan).
Virgil : Aeneid, Books II and IV.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 131
(6) Grammar. Gildersleeve's Latin Grammar or
Allen's Latin Grammar is recommended.
N.fl. Questions on Grammar exclusively should be asked from
the prescribed books, as far as possible, and should carry about one- third
of the total marks.
Paper II. Translation, Composition, and Unseen :
(a) Selected passages from books recommended for
rapid reading and from others of equal difficulty for
translation into the vernacular of the candidates ; (6)
substance of easy passages from the above-mentioned
books to be expressed in Latin ; and (c) translation of
easy English prose sentences into Latin.
II. COMMERCE.
The examination will consist of two papers, each of
three hours : (a) One paper on Business or Com-
mercial Practice, and (6) one paper on either (i) Type-
writing or (ii) Book-keeping.
The following is the syllabus in each subject :
Business or Commercial Practice. Office routine
Drafting simple business and official letters ; preparation
of telegrams and cablegrams, including a knowledge of
simple codes. Docketing, filing, copying, and despatch
of letters. Ordinary postal regulations, use of postal
forms, such as Money Order, V.-P. P., Acknowledgement,
Registration, and Insurance forms. Post Office Savings
Bank Accounts. Telephone. Simple duplicating and
other labour-saving appliances.
Meaning of ordinary commercial terms and abbre-
viations. Preparation of simple commercial documents,
such as indents, invoices, bills of exchange, promissory
notes, statements of account. Nature and use of Bills
of -Lading and Railway Receipts. Simple banking trans-
actions, involving the nature and use of cheques, deposit
slips, and pass books.
132 CALBKDAB 1928-29
Book recommended :
Extracts from Business Methods and Correspondence,
by Arthur Fieldhouse.
Typewriting. There will be no practical examina-
tion on the typweriter, but only a theory paper of two
hours' duration involving questions on
*(a) The mechanical construction of the typewriter ;
(6) care of the machine ;
(c) display of matter, including headings and titles,
centering, contractions and abbreviations ;
hyphenation ; punctuation ; stencil-cutting ;
adaptation of one or more characters to re-
present characters not given on the keyboard ;
corrections ; erasures.
There will also be a second paper of one hour's dura-
tion consisting of type-copying of three manuscripts.
Book recommended :
Expert typist, by J. A. Rosemond, Methodist Publish-
ing House, Lucknow, or Smith's, Pitman's, or Reming-
ton's Manual.
Book-keeping. Elementary theory ot double entry
book-keeping. Preparation and keeping of the Cash
Book, Brought and Sold Books, Returns Books, Bills
Receivable and Bills Payable Books, Journal and Ledger ;
recording therein simple transactions involving pur-
chases and sales, bills receivable and payable, real,
personal and nominal accounts, such as rent, salaries,
interest, discounts, bad debts, and depreciation. Draw-
ing up the Trial Balance, Closing the Ledger, and Pre-
paring Trading and Profit and Loss Accounts, and
Balance-sheet. Simple banking transactions involving
* Questions on the mechanism of the typewriter will be of a general
nature, so that students who are acquainted with the mechanism of any of
the more popular typewriting machines will be able to answer the questions
{vide G. L. no. B.-2773/VI 3, dated September 15, 1924, from the Sec-
retary of the Board).
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930
the nature and use of cheques. Deposit Slips and Pass
Book, and Preparation of Bank Reconciliaton State-
ments. The nature and use of Bills of Exchange and
Promissory Notes. Petty Cash and Imprest Systems,
Book, recommended :
Elementary Book-keeping, by Arthur Fieldhouse,
published by Simpkin, Marshall & Co., Limited, London,
B.C., 4.
III. SCIENCE (PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY).
The examination will consist of two papers one in
Physics and one in Chemistry, each of three hours.
Physics.
SYLLABUS.
Definition of Physics, measurements of length, area,
volume, mass, and weight. The balance. Density,
specific gravity. Principle of Archimedes. The three
states of matter. Pressure of air. Simple barometer.
Heat. Expansion of solids, liquids, and gases, tem-
perature, thermometers, melting and boiling points, con-
duction, convection, and radiation. Unit of heat, specific
heat, change of state, latent heat. Easy calculations.
Light. Rectilineal propagation of light. Reflection,
refraction, plane concave, convex mirrors, concave and
convex lenses and prisms. Position of object and image
with easy calculations. Dispersion.
Magnetism. Attraction and repulsion, magnetization,
terrestrial magnetism, magnetic meridian. The compass.
Electricity. Electrification by friction. Properties,,
of a charged body. Conductors and insultators. The
electroscope. Induction. The electrophorus. A simple
cell, simple forms of primary cells, arrangement of cell&
in series and parallel, magnetic and heating effect of a
134 CALBNDAB 1928-29
current. The simple galvanoscope, simple explanation
-of the telegraph, the electric bell, electric -light.
Practical Work.
The following list of experiments indicates the mini-
mum amount of practical work required to be per-
formed by students. Other experiments of equal edu-
cational value may be substituted. The experiments
.should be performed individually as far as can be
arranged. The teaching of theory should be fully illus-
trated by experiments, and demonstrations are to be
Considered an essential part of the teacher's work.
NOTE. A chart giving a list of the experiments to be performed
and the date on which each students completes tach experiment should
be maintained and hung in the laboratory at each school recognized in
Science (vide G. L. no. B/3149 3300/V 36, dated December 21, 1925,
from the Secretary of the Board).
General. Determination of the relative density of
(a) bodies which float in water ;
(6) bodies which sink in water ;
(c) liquids.
Use of the calipers.
Determination of the radius of a wire by Archimedes'
Principle.
Determination of the Internal radius of a narrow tube.
Light Reflection at a plane mirror.
Focal length of a concave mirror.
Refraction through a prism.
Refractive index of glass and water.
Focal length of a convex lens.
Heat. Cooling curve of water, and wax or naphthe-
lene.
Determination of the water equivalent of a
calorimeter.
Determination of Specific Heat.
Determination of the Latent Heat of Ice.
Determination of the Latent Heat of Steam.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 135
Magnetism. Mapping out lines of force by a small
magnet.
Determination of the direction of the Magne-
tic Meridiam.
Electricity. Charging an electroscope by Conduction
and Induction.
, The magnetic effect of a current on a magnetic
needle.
The electro-magnet.
The following books on Physics are recommended for
teachers' reference library :
Every Day Physics, by H. E. Hadley. Mac-
millan & Co., Price Rs. 4 ; or
An Introduction to Physical Science, by Ivor
B. Hart, Oxford University Press. Price,
Rs. 2.
A class book of Physics, by R. A. Gregory and H.
E. Hadley. Macmillan & Co. Price, Rs. 3-12.
A Course of Physics, by Charles H. Draper.
Blackie & Sons. Price, Rs. 3-12.
An Elementary Physics, by K. C. Bhattacharya
(Indian Press, Allahabad), Price Rs. 2.
Physics for IX and X classes, by K. Kumar (G. R.
Bhargava and Sons, Chandausi). Price, Rs. 2.
Chemistry.
Definition of chemistry.
Common properties of matter Hardness, porosity,
brittleness, solid, liquid, and gaseous states. Change of
state. Melting and boiling points.
Crystalline shape. Effect of heat on common things.
Solution in water. The above to be studied with
Nace, KNo 8 , CaCo 3 , Na 2 , Co 8 , CuSo 4 , 5H 2 0, FeSo 4 ,
7H 2 0, ZuSo 4 , Fe, Zn, Sn, Mg, Pb, Hg, P, S, Shellao
and linseed oil.
136 CALENDAR 1928-29
Solution, melting, evaporation, distillation, filtration t
solution in water and alcohol.. Slow and rapid evapora-
tion, saturated solutions. Crystallization studied from
solutions in water and of melted sulphur. Distillation
of water, mixtures, immiscible liquids. Elementary
and compound substances. Non-metals and metals.
Chemical symbols. Chemical action, the laws of definite
proportion, atoms, molecules, atomic and molecular
weights, valency, relation between equivalent and atomic
weight. Simple forumulae and equations.
Study of air Rusting of metals, oxidation, active and
inactive gases in air. Burning of phosphorus. Mean-
ing of combustion, slow and rapid combustion studied
with iron, magnesium, and phosphorus.
Oxygen -gas ; prepared from oxide of mercury, and
potassium chlorate. Important properties of oxygen
gas.
Acidic and basic oxides, acids, bases and salts..
Preparation and properties of the following :
Hydrogen, Nitrogen, Ammonia, Chlorine, Hydro>*
chloric acid, Nitric acid, Carbon dioxide.
Carbon Properties and varieties.
Action of carbon dioxide on animal and plant life.
Sulphur Properties 'and varieties.
Preparation and properties of sulphur dioxide and
sulphuric acid, their preparation treated in a very ele-
mentary manner, sulphur dioxide by burning sulphur in
air and by the action of hydrochloric acid on calcium
sulphite and sulphuric acid by the action of nitric acid on
sulphur dioxide and water.
Study of water Action of steam on red-hot iroik
filings.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930
1ST
Action of sodium on water. Action of magnesium on,
steam. Electrolysis of water.
NOTES. 1. The detailed course given below indicates the minimum-
amount of practical work required to be performed by students and sug-
gests a method of treatment of the syllabus for the guidance of teachers.
They may substitute other experiments of equal educational value. Prac-
tical work should be co-ordinated with the theoretical work and follow
it consecutively as far as possible. The practical experiment should be-
performed individually so far as can be arranged.
2. A chart giving a list of the experiments to be performed and the
date on which each student completes each experiment should be main-
tained and hung in the laboratory of each school recognised in Science (vide
G. L. no. B/3H9-3300, V.-36, dated December 21, 1925, from the Secretary
of the Board).
The use of stencils in answering papers in science is
not allowed.
(Classes IX and X.)
Classes IX and X will have six periods of Science per
week for at least 27 working weeks ;. this gives a total
of 162 periods in class IX :
Subject.
Chemistry . ,
Detailed svllabus.
Minimum list of experiments
which should be done by
the pupils individually.
Effect of dissolved sub- j To find B. P. of solutions of.
stances on boiling point. | calcium chloride. Solu-
' tion of different strengths.
Distillation,
of water.
Purification
Elements and compounds.
To bend tubes, bore corks, set
up apparatus for Ihtiila-
tion, and find B. P. before-
and after distillation-
To examine the elements
sulphur, copper, lead, mer-
cury, zinc. To examine
the compounds, ferrous
sulphate, copper sulphate,,
lead oxide, mercury oxide,,
and regain the elements
where possible.
138
CALBNDAB 1928-29
Subject.
Detailed syllabus.
Metals and
properties :-
non-metals,
The atmosphere. Com-
bustion, active and in-
active air.
Rusting
Minimum list of experiments
which should be done by
the pupils individually.
Increase in mass in rusting
and burning.
Explanation of above. In-
troduction of terms
"Oxygen" and "Nitro-
gen."
Oxygen
Metals and non-metals.
Oxide.
Nitrogen. Its use in the
atmosphere.
Water not an element
Burning a candle in a bell
jar. Repeat with sulphur,
phosphorus. To measure
the proportion of air used
up when a substance
burns in air.
To show iron will not rust
in dry air.
To measure the air used up
when iron rusts in air.
To show increase in mass
when magnesium and iron
burn in air and when iron
rusts in air when a
candle burns in air.
Preparation from mercuric
oxide and potassium chlo-
rate in small quantities
and on large scale from
manganese dioxide and
potassium chlorate, its
properties.
To show loss in mass when
potassium chlorate is
heated.
Their basic and acidic pro-
perties.
Properties to find accurate-
ly percentage of nitrogen
in air by pyrogallic acid.
(Lecture-room.)
Action of sodium on water-
Action of magnesium on
boiling water. Action of
steam on iron. Examina-
tion of oxide of iron
formed. Increase in mass,
comparison with iron rust.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930
139
Subject.
Detailed syllabus.
Resume of above. Intro-
duction of term " Hy-
drogen."
Preparation of Hydrogen
and its properties.
Carbon
Demonstration lesson
Carbonic acid gas. Chalk
Resume of above. Ani-
mal and plant life.
Chlorine gas . .
Hydrochloric acid gas
Ammonia gas
'Sulphur
Minimum list of experiments
which should be done by the
pupils individually.
From zinc and sulphuric
acid.
What happens to the zinc.
What happens when hy-
drogen burns in air. Ex-
plosion of hydrogen with
air.
Electrolysis of water and its
composition by volume.
Action of hydrogen on
copper oxide when heated.
(Lecture-room.)
Properties and varieties.
Formation when carbon or
carbonaceous matter burns
in air.
Effects of acids on chalk.
Examination of the gas ;
properties of gas obtained
by the effect of strongly
heating chalk. Examina-
tion of lime ; difference
between properties of chalk
and lime ; loss in mass on
heating chalk.
Formation of oxygen by
plants.
Preparation from manganese
dioxide and hydrochloric
acid. Its properties.
Preparation from sodium
chloride and sulphurie
acid. Its properties.
Preparation from ammonium
chloride and quicklime.
Its properties.
Effect of heat.
NOTE. In class X time is left for revising tne wnoie course in pro*
paration for the High School Examination.
140 CALENDAR 1928-29
The books recommended for use in Chemistry are-
Chemistry for Indian Schools for Standards IX and
X, by E. G. Hill, Professor of Chemistry, Muir Central
College, Allahabad. Indian Press, Allahabad. Price,.
Re. 1.
Physics and Chemistry for Secondary Schools in
India, Parts III and IV, in one volume. Macmillan &
Co,, 1918. Price, Re. 1-8.
An Elementary Chemistry for Indian Schools, Parts
I and II, by K. C. Bhattacharya, M.SC., L.T. (Indian
Press Limited, Allahabad). Price, Rs. 2.
Chemistry for Schools ; Wilson and Headley. (Oxford
University Press). Price, Rs. 2.
*Books recommended for the use of teachers in Chemis-
try :
Practical Chemistry, volumes 1 and 2, ^ Oxford Uni-
for Standard VII of High Schools in the ( versity Press,
Bombay Presidency, by H. E. H. Pratt. \ Bombay.
Price, 6 annas. . ;
Holmyard's Elementary Chemistry, published by
Arnold.
Gregory and Hodges : Experimental Science for
Indian Schools. (Macmillan).
K. Kumar : Chemistry for Classes IX and X. (Bhar-
gava, Chandausi.)
IV.- AGRICULTURE.
The examination will consist of two papers of three
hours each.
* In connexion with the books recommended for the use of teachers
in this Prospectus it should be noted that there is in addition a number
of books approved for the use of teachers generally (vide list of books,
approved for the use of teachers of Anglo- Vernacular and Vernacular
Schools, dated July 31, 1916, an4 its supplements issued annually).
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 141
The first paper will be on the subject-matter in the
syllabus up to and including sub-section (5) Tillage ;
and the second paper on the remaining portion.
SYLLABUS.
(1) Climatology. Weather and seasons in the country
and in the provinces.
(2) Soils. Soil-forming processes ; Weathering, Solu-
tion, Plants and Animal agencies.
Classification of soils. Local classification Clayey,
Loam, Sandy, Concretionary, Saline, Silt, Goind, Ahar,
Uparhar.
Mechanical analysis of soils. Determination of Stones.
Gravels, Moisture, Humus, Sand and Clay.
Texture of soils. Arrangement of particles of soil ;
Specific gravity ; Pore space ; Surfaces exposed ; Number
of particles in a unit volume ; Plasticity, Cohesion, Forces
of facilitating granulation.
Organic matter in the soils. Its sources and distribu-
tion. Decrease of organic matter. Estimation of
organic matter. Its effect on soil. Its maintenance.
Soil water. Its forms, its movements. Factors affectc
ing hydroscopic, capillary, and gravitational water,
Control of soil moisture. Run-off losses ; Percolation ;
Evaporation. Methods of checking the same ; Mulching,
Ploughing, Rolling, Shelter, Plants.
Soil heat. Relation of heat to germination and
growth. Sources of soil heat. Factors affecting soil
temperature.
Absorptive power of soils. Effect of colour. Effect of
texture and structure on heat. Radiation, Convection,
and Conduction. Absorptive power of soils in relation
to gases and solutions. Nature and properties of
in relation to soils.
142 CALENDAB 1928-29
(3) Irrigation and Drainage
Water requirements of plants. Factors affecting tran$r
piration. Wilting point. Optimum moisture for plant
growth. Conserving of moisture.
Sources of water of irrigation. Rain, its annual and
seasonal variations ; Ice, Frost, Snow, Dew, Hail, Wells
(spring and percolation), Rivers, Canals, and Tanks.
Types of ivater lifts. Persian Wheel, Chain Pump r
Hand Plunger Pump, Charsa, Baldeo Balti.
Distribution of water. Flow systems ; Pucca and
Kachcha channels ; Planning and laying-out of irrigation
drains.
Drainage. Earth bunds, Conditions making drainage
necessary. Types of soils requiring drainage, Situation
requiring drainage, Possible relation between irrigation
and drainage.
(4) Manures and manuring. Farm-yard manure,
Fermentation, Application ; Feeding for manuring ;.
Special manures, i.e., Bones, Potash Nitrate, Oil-cakes,
their manurial properties and application ; Green
manuring, important plants that can be used, their
method of application.
(5) Tillage. Objects of Tillage and description of
principal implements of tillage :
(a) Ploughs. (c) Cultivators.
(b) Harrows. (d) Harvesting Machines.
(6) Plant. Utilization of plants and plant parts of
the crops of the provinces.
General description of a plant and its parts and the
functions of each.
Plant nutrition, Growth, Substances necessary for
plant growth, Sources of those substances, Storage and
movements of food materials.
Reactions of the plant to moisture, light, and gravity.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 143
General idea of flowers and their parts, Pollination,
Different methods of pollination.
Fruits and seeds. Their general structure and their
functions. Length of life of seeds. Conditions necessary
for their germination. Selection of seeds and their storage.
(7) Farm Crops. Preliminary cultivation, sowing,
weeding, mammal requirements, harvesting, storage, and
marketing of the following crops :
Wheat, barley, gram, peas, rice, maize, jawar, pulses,
cotton, flax, sannai, ambadi, potatoes, sugarcane, tobacco,
vegetables.
(8) Farm Animals. Buffaloes, cows and oxen, their
care and maintenance. Determination of age of animals
goats, sheep, and poultry.
(9) Patwari papers, their use and maintenance.
Candidates are required to maintain note-books of all
work done, both theoretical and practical. These note-
books should be inspected periodically and initialled by
the teachers. These note-books may be called for at the
time of the examination.
Candidates will undergo the following course of prac-
tical work in connexion with the above syllabus :
1. Each student is required to keep records of the
following facts noted in the school observatory :
(a) Rainfall.
(6) Maximum and minimum temperature of air in
shade.
(c) Wind directions and velocities.
(d) Amount of clouds and their directions.
(e) The time of occurrence of frost, fog, hail, dust-
storm.
(/) Afternoon temperature of black soil, light-
coloured soil, ploughed soil, rolled soil, and
mulched soil.
144 CALENDAR 1928-29
2. Separation of stones, gravel, and fine soil by
sieve.
Separation of sand and clay by sedimentation.
Determination by ignition of moisture and humus
in soil.
Specific gravity of soils and pore space.
Weight of different soils in unit volume.
Organic matter in soil and sub-soil, is power of
absorbing moisture.
Weight of water absorbed by soils, from a saturat-
ed atmosphere.
Amount of percolation of water in a unit of time
through sand, clay, and loam.
Classification of soils as Domat, Matyar, Balwar
by sight.
3. Amount of water taken out in one hour by the
different water lifts in use.
Amount of water discharged on fields by kachcha,
pucca, and puddled channels.
4. Results of applications of green manuring, farm-
yard manure, oil-cakes, ground bones, bone
ash, potash nitrate applied to school garden
plots.
. Handling of farm implements, their use and
special designs.
6. Drawings of different parts of plants grown on the
farm.
7. Records of notes of cultivation of at least one
Kharif crop, one Rabi crop, one Garden crop
from the time of preparation of seed bed to
marketing, actually attended to by the candi-
date.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 145
8. Practical determination of age of farm animals.
Drawing up of descriptions of local breeds of farm
animals.
Recognition of different feeding stuffs.
Lay-out of stables from sanitary point of view.
Books recommended :
1. Meston Readers, Parts 1 to 3, by K. S. M. Quyum.
2. Krishi Shastra or Urn Zarayat, by Mr. Tej Shanker
Kochak.
3. Notes on Poultry-keeping in India, by Mrs. A. K*
Fawkes.
4. Tisdale's books on Dairying.
5. Monthly Journals, Leaflets, and Bulletins issued
by the United Provinces Agricultural Depart-
ment.
6. Lessons in Indian Agriculture, by D. Clouston.
Macmillan & Co., Ltd.
7. Rahber Zarait, by T. S. Kochak, published by the
author. Price, Rs. 2-8-0.
V.- DRAWING.
The examination will consist of two papers of three
hours each ; the first paper on Free Arm Drawing and the
second paper on Geometrical Drawing.
SYLLABUS.
Free Arm. This should be in Pastel, and should
comprise common objects from nature.
The' round. Such as Orange, Mango, Apple, Tomato,
Lichi, Melon, Peach ; Hockey and other Balls, Nutmeg,
Walnut, etc.
The Cylindrical. Such as Flower-pot, Household
Utensils, Degchies, Cups, Saucers, Surahi, Bowls, Tumb-
lers, Lotas, Bottles of kinds, Ink-pots, Gloy Bottle, Paper-
weight, Candle-stick, etc.
146 CALENDAR 1928-29
The Rectilinear. Open Book, Cigar and Cigarette
15oxes, Match Box, Attache Case, Cash Box, Flags, etc.
Miscellaneous. Hockey Sticks, Cricket Bat, Tennis
Backet, Mallet, Hammer, Screw Driver, Chisels, Padlock
Key, Scissors, Knives, Hatchet, etc.
Nature Study. Sample flowers and Leaves of all
sorts, Butterflies, Beetle, etc.
The above outline which is but suggestive should be
in Pastel on Tinted Paper and will involve instruction in
the art of Blending Colours, Colour Harmonies, Colour
Schemes, and Shadows.
Text-books recommended :
Pastel work for the standards, 3 volumes, author A.
G. Tompkins, Publishers, Messrs. Tssac Pitman & Sons,
London, Bath and New York. Price, Us. 3 each vol.
Materials. Pastels, Paper, etc. (Reeves). Obtain-
able from Messrs. J. N. Navalakhi & Co., Kalbadevi
Road, Bombay.
Geometrical Drawing. (1) The theory and use of
instruments especially of the protractor and
Marquoise scale.
(2) Plain block-letter writing.
(3) The whole of practical plane geometry.
(4) Drawing to scale, viz., scale of chords ;
diagonal scale ; plain scale ; comparative
scales (to be done in ink).
Text-books recommended :
Geometry, Plane and Solid (Morris), Long-
mans, Green & Co., Bombay and London.
New School of Art Geometry, (Gill), George
Gill & Co., Minerva House, Warwick Lane,
E. C., London.
Roorkee Drawing Manual (Veale), Roorkee
Thomason College Book Depot, Roorkee.
Materials. School Geometry set (Reeves).
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 147
VI.- MANUAL TRAINING.
The examination will consist of one paper of three
Shours in Drawing and a practical examination of four
hours in Woodwork.
SYLLABUS.
(1) Woodwork
(a) A series of models graduated in respect of the
tool manipulations involved to be made in wood
from working drawings (drawn in plan and ele-
vation, conventional isometric projection) or
from a given pattern in wood ; the construc-
tion of the models to involve the use of one or
more of the following tools : Jack Plane,
Try Square, Marking Gauge, Marking Knife,
Smoothing Plane, Tenon Saw, Bevel, Screw
Driver, Firmer Chisel, Hammer, Mallet,
Bradawl, Nail Punch, Compass, Firmer H
Gouge, Gimlet, Frame Saw, Spoke Shave,
Brace and Bit, File.
The following joints at least should be included
^amongst the models.
Half-lap, Housing, Mortise and Tenon, Half-lap
Dovetail, Box-Dovetail, Edge-Dovetail, Bridle.
(6) The care and maintenance in good working con-
dition of the abovernentioned tools, excluding
saw setting and sharpening.
(2) Drawing
Drawing in plan and elevations of all models in the
course and in conventional isometric projection of those
-of a rectangular shape.
NOTES. 1. A scheme drawn up on the above lines is given below.
Teachers need not keep strictly to the particular model mentioned in this
Fcheme, but if any changes in the models are made these should not involve
changes in the new tool manipulations employed. The course should, if pos-
sible, be commenced in Class VII.
2. Attention is invited to the suggestions for teaching of Manuat
Training contained in Director of Public Instruction's Circular no. 2 of
J<> 17-18.
CALENDAR 1928-29
*Bookg recommended for the me of teachers :
t
The Teacher's Handbook of Seojd, by O. Salloman^
George Phillip & Sons. 6 s.
Manual Instruction, Woodwork, by J. C. Pearson,
George Phillip & Sons. 6s.
MoDougall's Light Woodwork, by David Thomas.
McJJougalVs Educational Company, London. Is.
The Scholar's Woodwork Class-book, by T. W. Berry.
Cassell & Co., London. Ls 1 .
Practical Drawing by T. S. Usherwood. Macmillan
& Go. 2s.
Educational Handwork Junior Course, by J. L.
Martin and C. V. Manley. Blackie & Son. Is. 6ef.
Educational Handwork Intermediate Course, by
J. L. Martin and C. V. Manley, Blackie & Son. Is. 6dL
Educational Handwork or Manual Training, by A. H.
Jenkins. University Tutorial Press. Burlington House
Cambridge.
The " Self-Help " Course of Woodwork Exercise, by
E. J. Andrews. Charles and Dible, 10 Paternoster Square,
London. 2s. net.
Handcraft in Wood and Metal, Shirley and Hooper,
Rss. 9, Batsford.
* In connexion with the books recommended for the use of teachers
in this Prospectus it should be noted that there is in addition a number
of hooks approved for the use of teachers generally (virf* list of books approv-
ed for the use of teachers of Anglo- Vernacular and Vernacular Schools^
dated July 31, 1916, and its supplements issued annually).
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930
Table showing the tool manipulations involved in making the models of the course.
(* Indicates a new tool manipulation. 4- Indicates revision of a tool manipulation previously learnt.)^
149
"*
Serial number of exercise. -> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
H 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 ^
p
1
-sk
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
o "O
Name of exercises. -> . a j g -^ * TT 2- . 5
ijfgiijlJllL | ||j
g 11
1 i . i !!
f I 1 i 1 .1 fi^ !!
Illiiilllil ll!lIiU|1
Name of tool manipulation. Jj ^'^^^^^5a^'1^^5-Iw^
, OH^^CQ^PH^^ ^ H -H
Face planing . . . . * . . 4 + 4 4 + + 4 4- 4 4 + 4 4 + + + +
Edge . . . . - - * . . ^ 4 4 4- + + r 4- 4 4- 4- 4 4- f 4 4 4 4
Gauging .. .. .. * + 4 + 4- 4 4 4 - f- 4 4 4 4 4 + + + + +
Marking with knife * 4- -f- 4- -+- [ I- 4 f 4 4- 4 ^ + " r ~ r + 4-
, + .i. - r 4. 4 - 4444 + 44444 +44 39
t + iutt + -ti;tnu u:
4 ... + i- + 4 4- 4 - + 4- + + + + + + + + + + db !
4 4 4 + 4 H- 4 + + + + + + + + + + -| - t ^
4 4 4 4 4 -i- -f 4 + + + + + - + 4- + 4- 4 38
.. 4 4 + f 4- 4 - + .- y ' Y * Y Y Y Y 19
Sawinr* with tenon saw at right-angles to the
' grain .. .. ." -....* 4 4 + - + + + + + r + 4 + + 4 4
End planing .. .^ . . . . * 4 f -r + 4 4 f 4 f ^ f 4 4 4 4 4 i
Sawing with tenon saw with the grain .. * . .
i "f- . . 4 . . 4 - 4 r + *v
t " " " " 4 -- . 4 44 + 4 20
" I " t " " Y " 4 " - + " 44 + + + 21
t ~ + " + + 4 1 ::..:::: w
Use of bevel . . ~t~ 44. 4-4
Sawing through a face obliquely to the grain . . * _ 4 . 4 4 . . ^ . . |
obliquely to the grain . . . 1 ' I ' ' 1 1 1 i ' 1 1 ' T '
Sawing through an edge obliquely to the grair * ..+..+
Vertical chiselling parallel to the grain ^ f- f
Chamfering with plane with the grain " " * 4- 4
. f : [ t " + + ;. .. -- + + '+ I4 i
+ " V v l H "" r'TT' " 10 I
+ : :. :. :: 3
chisel across the grain *"""*" i " * ""~ r u
Vertical chiselling obliquely to the grain . . ^ .. t .
Inlaying .. .. .. .. ; y ,
Vertical chiselling at right angles to the gram ~r -r ' ' '
+ 4 f " * 3
Horizontal chiselling with the graind * ' ~^~
Boring with bradawl .. .. * " " 4.
Nailing . . . . . . * Y
Use of compass . . . . w
Modelling with jack plane . . w
Filing . . . . . . .."-*'"
Gouging .. .. .. ' #
Stop chamfering . . . . " *
Halving . . . . . . *
. . 4 4 4 4- 4 . . 4 + y ! + ' Q
. > 4 ' * * ' -
^ - 4
Screwing . . . . * * *
Boring with gimlet . . . . ' * -\
Housing . . . . . .
Frame sawing . . . .
Spoke shaving . . . . ' ' '
Mortising . . . . . . ....
Use of brace and bit . . . . '
Haunched t;noning . . . . ......
Fixing hinger . . . . . ......
Glueing . . . . . . ...
Half-lap dovetailing . . . .
Edge-dovetailing . . . .
Box-dovetailing . . . .
Vertical gouging across the grain ' * ' * * '
Concave and convex chiselling . . -......
Bridle jointing . . . .
Mortise mitring . . . . , ......
Rebating with chisel . . . .
Butt jointing . ..
+ + + 4 - + - + - ;;;;;;:: + ::.v:;:: 1
* 4. ' " .. 2
1*1 111 +' rrTTTTTT'l M 4 " + 2
-++ 2
* * + 1
.. * 5
*" * "* _|_ 2
:: :: :: :: .. :: :: .. .. ; ' 4 2
*.... + 2
" ;; " " * 2
* * * i
" !"!'.'.!!'...*'-'. '. 2
* " " * ... 2
; * .. i
;;;;;;;;;;; ;;;;;; + 2
Number of tool manipulation in each exercise-* 2 1 6 6 9 7 10 11 10 13 11 14 13 9 14 12 14 9 l
3 21 U 15 U 19 2( 14 19 10 17 10 12 12 11 13 1 13 16 11 11
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 151
VII. A MODERN EUROPEAN LANGUAGE.
French.
There will be two papers of three hours each. The
first paper will consist of passages for translation from
the prescribed Text-books, questions on the prescribed
Text-books, and questions on Grammar. The second
paper will consist of Unseen passages and idiomatic
phrases for translation from French into English and
vice versa.
Books prescribed
Ed. About : Le Roi des Montagners. Macmillan's
Edition (Siepmann'n Series).
Du Camp : La Dette de Jeu (Cambridge Uni-
versity Press).
Daudet : Letters de tnou Moulin [Edited by
Bradly and Rieu. (Oxford, Clarendon Press)].
Grammar recommended
French Grammar (Sonnenchien's Parallel Gram-
mar Series) or Heath's Modem French Grammar
(Harrap).
NOTE. The Viva Voce Examination bas been dropped for the present.
VIII.- DOMESTIC SCIENCE.
The examination will consist of two papers of three
hours each. The first paper will contain questions on
Physiology, Hygiene, Household Management, and
Home-Nursing. The second paper will consist of the
practical examination in Sewing to be held at the same
$ime as the examination in written work. There will
.also be an oral test in First Aid and Home-Nursing an<J
$ practical test in Cooking.
152 CALENDAR 1928-29
SYLLABUS.
As a basis for the teaching of Hygiene and Home-
Nursing there should be a preliminary simple treatment
of the following topics on Elementary Physiology :
The human skeleton, the organs of digestion, the cir-
culation of the blood, the nervous system, respiration.
I '. Hygiene.
NOTK. Great importance should be attached to pract'oal work
wherever the Hubjcct admits of thin.
Air. Composition of air, ventilation, importance of
pure air, impurities of air, diseases caused by impure air.
W^a/er.-+-Compoition of water ; quantity of water
required ; source of water-supply, springs, deep wells,
surface wells, rivers, tanks ; how water is polluted : how
to prevent pollution of water, how to purify water ;
boiling and filtering.
Food. Composition of food ; composition of good
diet and its importance ; preservation of food ; cook-
ing of food ; drinks and condiments.
Perxonql Hygiene. Cleanliness of body (hair, nails,
teeth, etc.) ; clothing ; exercise ; importance of temper-
ance ; the use of />#??, opium, and other drugs ; spitting.
Precaution* against diseases. Infectious diseases
(small-pox, measles, and diphtheria, etc.) ; tuberculosis ;
enteric fever ; dysentery and diarrhoea ; cholera ; plague ;
malaria ; itch ; leprosy ; ophthalmia (sore eyes).
, , . , I /. First Aid.
Roller bAtulage, figure of eight as applied to kne*,
elbow, finger, ear ; bandage for eye, nose, chin ; many-
tailed bandage for chest. Bleeding of different kinds \
how to stop bleeding ; drowning ; burns 5 scalds f
bruises ; 'sprains ; broken bones ; dislocation ; carrying,
injured people ; fainting ; sunstroke ; hysteria ; epilepsy t
suffocation ; foreign bodies in eye, ea'r, nose, aud throat ;
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930
bites of mad dogs; signs of madness in dogs; snake-bites,
stings.
/// . Home-nursing.
NOTE. None of the work is to be purely theoretical. Practice must
be given in every point which allows of practical work,
Room. Bed ; bedding ; furniture ; light ; warmth ;
ventilation.
Nurse. Health ; dress ; duties, and qualifications of
a nurse.
External Remedies. Poultices ; plasters ; fomenta-
tions ; ice ; baths hot and cold ; temperature of baths.
Food. Kind of food and preparation ; way of giving.
The Sick Room. Administration of medicine ; pulse,
and temperature charts ; bathing, changing of garments
and bedding.
Infectious illness. Precautions during illness ; disin-
fection of room, clothing, and bedding after illness ; use
of disinfectants.
Convalescence. Occupations ; visitors ; rest ; sleep,,
and food.
/ V . Care and Training of Children.
Food, sleep, exercise, play, clothing, cleanliness, sur-
roundings.
V ' . Household Management.
A. Choice of House. Furniture and Decoration,
Distribution of rooms. Cleansing and care of house
and furniture. Disposal of refuse and sewage. Pra*
cautions against flies and mosquitoes.
B. Care of the kitchen.
Preparation of simple food.
Two of the following groups :
(t) preparation of roti, rice, dal, and taricari ;
(ii) preparation and care of milk ;
154 CALENDAB 1928-29
(in) preparation and care of meat. (One dish only
required.)
(7. "Duties of the mistress of household.
Proper distribution of daily activities. Account and
budgetting of expenditure.
VI. Clothing.
(i) Choice and care of the clothing,
(ii) Methods of washing cotton, woollen, and silk
materials.
NOTE. Practical work should be done, if possible.
(iii) Sewing and Cutting out. Each candidate
should select three of the following groups.
A good standard of skill will be required in the various
-Stitches that are necessary in making up garments and
in mending worn articles of clothing :
(a) To cut and make up coat (achkan) or (pyjama)
or shirt (kurta) or waistcoat for a man.
(b) To cut out and make up kurti or blouse or
skirt or petticoat or pyjama for a woman.
(c) To cut out and make up frock or bonnet or
pyjama or bandi for a child.
(d) Drawn thread or crewel work or English em-
broidery or chikan work or fiulme sitare.
(e) Spinning.
(/) Weaving.
NOTE. As an indication of the scope and standard of instruction in
Hygiene and Home-Nursing, teachers are referred to sections II, JII
and IV of Personal and Domestic Hygiene for the School and Home,
by Mrs. Harold Hendley (Rai Sahib M. Gulab Singh & Sons, Lahore)
also to Indian Manual of First Aid and Indian Home- Nursing, published
by the Indian Council of the St. John's Ambu ance Association (Thacker,
Spmk & Co., Calcutta.)
Books for teachers' reference :
Tropical Hygiene, Lukis and Blackham (Thacker,
Spink & Co.)
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1930 155
Outline of Domestic Science for Indian Readers,
by Lilian Sawtell (Longmans Green & Co.).
Training of Children under five years.
' Child-Welfare, by Dr. S. K. Mukherji (Indian Press,
Allahabad).
IX. METAL WORK.
The examination will consist of one paper of three
hours in Drawing and Theory and a practical test for
four hours in Forging and Fitting Work.
(a) Practical work. A series of models graded in res-
pect of tool manipulations to be made in metal from
Working Drawings or from Patterns, and involving the
use of Forge, Anvil, Vice, Tongs, Top and Bottom Tools,
Drills, Hammers, Files, Stocks and Dies, etc. Exercises
should include Drawing Down, Upsetting, Welding,
Annealing, Hardening and Tempering, Rivetting, etc.,
and such objects as Punches (nail and centre). Scribing
Knife, Nuts and Bolts, Rings, Chain Links, Hasp and
Staple, Keys (for shafting), Coat Hook, W r all Bracket,
Letter Weight, Calipers, Wall-Holdfast, Cold Chisels,
Drills, etc.
(b) Theoretical work. Properties and uses of diff-
erent metals, Iron (malleable and cast), Steel, Brass,
etc. Sections and weights of above, Length calcula-
tions. Working heats, Care and maintenance of tools,
forge, etc.
(c) Drawing. In orthographic [projection of all
models made during the course.
Books recommended. 1. Smithy and Forge Crane,
approximate price Rs. 2, Publishers, Crosby Lockwood.
156 CALBNDAB 1928-29
2. Smith's Works, Hasluck, Rs. 2, Cassels.
3. Educational Handwork, Jenkins. Rs. 3, University
Tutorial Press.
4. Handcraft in Wood and Metal, Shirley and
Hooper, Rs. 9, Batsford.
5. Plain and Ornamental Forging, Schwarzkopf,
Wiley & Sons, Rs. 6-8-0.
X.-HISTORY OR GEOGRAPHY.
(The same course as in the compulsory subject.)
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 15?
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930.
The following grouping of subjects is approved for the
guidance of students and teachers. The subjects have
been so grouped that, while providing a sound general
education, suitable as an introduction to University
studies, they should also fit the students to enter upon
higher specialized courses in technical and professional
institutions :
General Arts. Mathematics, Economics, Civics*
Geography, Drawing, a Modern
Indian or European Language,
Logic, a Classical Language, His-
tory and Allied Geography, His-
tories of Greece and Rome and
Allied Geography. (Any three
should he taken.)
* Students taking Civics are advised, also to take History.
General Science. Mathematics, Drawing, Chemistry,
Physics, Biology, Geography, Eco-
nomics. (A ny three should be
taken.)
For Medicine. Chemistry, Physics and Biology.
For Engineering. Mathematics, Physics and Chem-
istry.
For Teaching. (1) History, Civics and Geography.
(2) History, Geography and Mathe-
matics*
(3) History, Geography and (Physix^
logy, Hygiene and Child-Study)
(women students),
(4) Geography. Mathematics aq4
(Physiology, Hygiene aad Child-
'ivonien students),
358 CALENDAR 1928-29
(5) Geography (or Mathematics),
Biology and (Physiology, Hy-
giene and Child-Study) (woman
students).
(6) History, Geography and Econo-
mics.
(7) Mathematics. Geography and
Economic* (or Drawing).
(8) Mathematics. Physics and Chem-
istry.
(9) Mathematics, Physics and Biology.
(10) Chemistry, Physics, and Biology.
(11) Biology, Physics (or Chemistry) and
Drawing.
(12) (Physiology, Hygiene, and Child-
Study), a Classical Language and
History or (Geography or Mathe-
matics (women #tudent#).
(13) (Physiology, Hygiene and Child-
Study). Drawing and Biology or
Geography or a Classical Langu-
age (women students).
ENGLISH.
There will be one paper of three hours on the prescri-
bed Prose course and a second paper of three hours will be
set on the Poetry course ; and in each paper there will be
one question on " Unseen " passages. The prose paper
will contain one or more prose unseens and the poetry
paper will contain one or more poetical unseens,
v In place of the Unseen passages candidates who
offer English as their mother-tongue will be required to
ttnswer questions on supplementary prescribed texts.
A third paper of three hours will include (a) trans-
lation from a vernacular into English, and (6) a narrative
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 159'
or descriptive piece of composition in English. In the case
of candidates who offer English as their mother- tongue,
the third paper will consist of an Essay, together with
questions on English composition and on the history of
English Literature from 1500, as in Hudson's Outline
History of English Literature (Bell & Co.).
NOTES. 1. In the cane of books prescribed for detailed study. can-
didates will bo expected to show a close familiarity with the text, in-
cluding meaning of words, construction of sentences, historical and other
allusions as well as knowledge and understanding of the subject-matter.
They should be able to indicate contexts and to paraphrase and explain
nny difficult passages in simple and correct English.
2. In the case of books prescribed for general study, detailed know-
lodge of the text will not be required, but candidates will be expected to
show that they have read the course with intelligence and with some-
appreciation.
Books prescribed :
Prose : (a) For detailed study
A book of English Prose, by Professor
P. Sheshadri (Oxford University Press),
(omitting the Convalescent ; the Beau-
tiful ; Dr. Skinner ; El Dorado ; the
Dedicated Life ; War).
The Trial and Death of Socrates, by
Church ; the following portions of
which are prescribed :
The Apology, Crito, and last part of
Phaedo (Chapter LXIII to end).
VThe Introduction is not prescribed, but
is recommended for general study).
(b) For general study
Scott's " Kenilworth " (abridged), pub-
lished by the Oxford University Press,
price Re. 1.
A Round of Tales, selected by Henry
and Treble (Oxford University Press).
(price Re. I as. 6).
160 CALENDAR 1928-29
foetry : (a) For detailed study
Arnold Sohrab and Rustam,
The following from Palgrave's Golden Treasury, Ox-
ford University Press, (Indian edition), price Re. 1,
are prescribed :
Shakespeare " When to the sessions of sweet
silent thought."
" Let me not to the marriage of
true minds."
66 Since brass, nor stone, nor earth,
nor boundless sea."
Keats " La Belle Dame Sans Merci."
Milton" On his Blindness."
" Captain, or Colonel, or Knight in
Arms."
Tennyson " Ring out, wild bells."
" Tears, idle tears."
" The splendour falls on castle
walls."
Wordsworth " The world is too much with us."
" Upon Westminister Bridge."
Tagore (Macmillan's Poems from Tagore)
" Where the mind is free."
" Traveller must you go."
" The fair was on before the temple."
" The Champa Flower."
1(6) For general study :
Shakespeare " As You Like It."
Tennyson " Morte d' Arthur "
Morris " Atlanta's Race."
Scott Battle of Bannockburn.
(The last three from S, A. Newbolts English
Narrative Poems Longman's).
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 161
Supplementary prescribed texts for candidates whose
mother-tongue is English :
Prose and Poetry : Approach to Shakespeare, Teach-
ing of English Series (Nelson's).
Dunn's selections from Tennyson
(Oxford University Press).
NOTES. (a) Half the total of marks will be allotted to the portions
for detailed study, 30 per cent, to the portions for general study' and 20
per cent, to Unseen passages and Grammar.
(6) Grammatical questions will, be asked, including Parsing,
Analysis, the Sequence of Tenses, and Conversion of the Direct and
I ml rect forms of speech.
(c) The attention of candidates is drawn to the fact that
examiners have been instructed to deduct marks for inaccuracy in
English.
MATHEMATICS.
There will be three papers of three hours each : one
paper in Algebra and Trigonometry, a second in Mensur-
ation and Pure and Analytical Geometry, and a third on
Elementary Dynamics.
(1) (a) Algebra. Quadratic equations involving two
or more unknown quantities, the theory of quadratic
equations and of expressions of the second degree ; surds
and imaginary expressions ; arithmetical, geometrical,
and harmonical progressions ; permutations and com-
binations ; theory of indices and logarithms, proof of
binomial theorem for a positive integral index and the
use of binomial and exponential theorems for any index.
(6) Trigonometry Including solution of triangles, and
simple problems on inscribed, circumscribed, and ascri-
bed circles.
(2) (a) Pure Geometry. Loci ; proportion and simi-
larity ; radical axis of two circles ; simple properties of
pole and polar with respect to a circle ; simple properties
of parabola.
162 CALENDAR 1928-29
(6) Analytical Geometry Straight line, pair of straight
lines, circle (including radical axis and pole and polar) ;
equation to parabola in form #'-'=4 ax and simple pro-
perties deduced therefrom ; simple properties of tangents
and normals to the ellipse deduced from the equation
\- -f ^ = 1 (Oblique cartesian and polar co-ordinates
will not be required).
(c) Mensuration of Solids. Surfaces and volumes of
parallelepipeds and right prisms, pyramids, circular
cylinders and cones, spheres, and spherical segments ;
frusta of pyramids, cones, and spheres.
The use of Trigonometry and Logarithms will he*
permitted in solving numerical examples.
(3) Dynamic* and Static*. Velocity, composition of
velocities ; relative velocity ; acceleration, rectilinear
motion under uniform acceleration, composition of
accelerations ; Newton's Laws of Motion ; rectilinear
motion under gravity in a vertical and down an inclined
plane ; motion of two masses connected by a string
passing over a pulley ; projectiles ; direct impact of
smooth bodies ; definition and calculation of kinetic
energy ; co-planar forces, parallel and non-parallel and
their composition ; equilibrium of a body under three
forces ; moments ; conditions of equilibrium of a body
under a system of co-planar forces and simple examples ;
centre of gravity ; friction ; work and power ; simple
machines (lever, balance, system of pulleys, wheel and
axle).
The following books are suggested (not prescribed) in
addition to more elementary text-books :
School Algebra, H. S. Hall, Parts I III.
School Algebra, Part II, by Paterson, (Clarendon
Press.)
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 163
Elementary Algebra, Part II, by P. Ross. (Long-
mans.)
Hall and Stevens' School Geometry, Part VI.
Co-ordinate Geometry, Smith or Loney. (Macmil-
lan.)
Elements of Statics and Dynamics by Loney. (Cam-
bridge University Press.)
Higher Algebra, Chapters I XVII, by Hall and
Knight (Macmillan.)
Intermediate Trigonometry, by C. C. Ghosh. (Mac-
millan.)
Plane Trigonometry, Fart 1, by S. L. Loney. (Mac-
millan.)
CHEMISTRY.
! N.H. Candidates will be required to pass MI the theoretieal as well
as practical part of each Science .subject.]
There will be two papers of three hours each and a
practical examination. The first paper will include
metals and non-metals and the second paper general
Chemistry and organic Chemistry.
The following syllabus is prescribed :
The course for the High School Examination of J930
with the following additions :
Elementary and compound substances, mixtures
solution, chemical action, the laws of definite and multi-
ple proportions, simple methods of the determination of
equivalent weights, atoms, molecules, atomic and mole-
cular weights, vapour density, the atomic theory and
Avogadro's hypothesis, combination of gases by volume.
Valency, relation between equivalent and atomic
weights, simple methods of determination of atomic
weights, Dulong and Petit's Law. Boyle's Law, Char-
les' Law, vapour pressure, diffusion.
11
164 CALENDAR 1928-29
Chemical symbols, formulae and equations ; calcu-
lations of an easy nature.
Oxidation and reduction.
Elementary ideas as to the nature of dissociation in
gases and electrolytic dissociation theory.
The outlines of the periodic law, studied from ele-
ments prescribed in the course.
Preparation and important properties of the follow-
ing elements and compounds and proofs of the com-
position of the compounds marked* :
Hydrogen, oxygen, water,* ozone, hydrogen dioxide,
nitrogen, the atmosphere*, the effects of animal and vege-
table life upon its composition ^ammonia*, nitric acid and
nitrates, nitrous acid and nitrites, nitrous* and nitric 11
oxides, nitrogen peroxide, carbon, carbon* dioxide,
carbon* monoxide, elementary ideas about combustion
and structure of flame, coal gas, chlorine, hydrochloric*
acid, the chlor'des, chlorine peroxide, chloric acid and
chlorates, bromine, iodine, their hydracids and salts.
Sulphur, hydrogen* sulphide, sulphur* dioxide and
trioxide, sulphuric acid and the suplhates, sulphurous
acid and sulphites.
Phosphorous, hydrogen phosphide, phosphorous tri-
oxide and pentaoxide, orthophosphoric acid.
Silica, silicates of Na. K & Ca, glass.
Sodium, potassium, their hydroxides, chlorides, ni-
trates, carbonates, sulphates.
Calcium, strontium, barium, and their oxides, carbo-
nates, sulphates, chlorides, nitrate^.
Magnesium, its oxide, chloride, sulphate, carbonate
and nitrate.
Lead, its chloride, sulphate, nitrate and acetate.
Copper, the outlines of its metallurgy, its oxides,,
chlorides sulphate, nitrate and sulphides.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 165
Iron, the outlines of its metallurgy, its oxides (FeO,
Fe 2 s , Fe 3 4 ), chloride, sulphates, and sulphides.
Zinc, its oxide, chloride, carbonate and sulphate.
Mercury, oxides, chlorides, nitrates, sulphides.
Aluminium, oxide, chloride, sulphate.
Arsenic, hydride, oxides, sulphides.
Antimony, hydride, oxides, chlorides, sulphides.
Tin, oxides, chlorides, sulphides.
Silver, oxide, hydroxide, chloride, bromide, iodide,,
nitrate^ and sulphate.
Organic :
A. The preparation, typical properties, and struc-
tural relationship of the following compounds :
Methane, ethane, ethylene, chloroform, iodoform.
Methyl alcohol and ethyl alcohol.
Formaldehyde and acetaldehyde.
Formic acid and acetic acid.
Ethyl acetate and methyl acetate.
Acetamide, act-tyl chloride, acetic anhydride.
Acetylene .
Methylamine.
B. The simpler properties of the following : -
Glyceroi, acetone, ether, oxalic acid, tartaric acid,
fats, soaps (and saponification) , starch, cane
sugar, grape sugar (and fermentation), urea,
benzene, nitrobenzene, phenol, aniline, benzole
acid.
Practical work.
Students will be examined in Practical Chemistry.
Students are expected to perform the following ex-
periments in the laboratory. An account of each ex-
periment must be written by the student in a special
note- book, which will be liable to examination by the
166 CALENDAR 1928-29
Examiners. This note-book should he kept in the
oharge of the laboratory instructor and each account
of an experiment should be signed by him. The Princi-
pal of a College will be responsible for the production
of this note-book when demanded by the proper autho-
rities.
The practical course is as follows :
1. Such practical work as is required for the High
School Examination of 1930.
2. Analysis of simple salts, soluble in water or
hydrochloric acid composed of acids and bases men-
tioned in the following list : Ag, Pb, Hg, Cu, Cd, Bi,
As, Sb, Sn, Fe, Al, Or, Ni, Co, Zn, Mn, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba,
Na, K, NH 4 , Cl, Br, I, C10 8 , S0 4 , SO 8 , N0 ;v NO,, P0 4 ,
S, CO 3 , C 2 O 4 , acetate.
3. Preparation and purification of simple salts in-
volving no special difficulty.
4. Simple gravimetric and volumetric estimations,
such as estimation of alkali, acids and alkaline carbo-
nates by titration, gravimetric estimation of iron and
simple gravimetric experiments such as change in mass
on oxidation of magnesium, change of weight on heating
(1) barium chloride, (2) copper carbonate and (3) ferrous
ammonium sulphate.
5. Determination of melting and boiling points.
6. Qualitative detection of nitrogen, sulphur chlo-
rine, bromine or iodine, alone or together, in an organic
compound.
7. Practical exercises involving
(i) dry tests,
(ii) phenolphthalein and methyl orange,
(iii) use of balance.
Books suggested :
SHENSTONE : Inorganic Chemistry (Arnold).
ROSCOE and LUNT : Elementary Inorganic Chemistry.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930
ROSCOE and HARDEN : Inorganic Chemistry for Ad-
vanced Students.
A Class Book of Organic Chemistry by J. B. Cohen.
Organic Chemistry, Part I, by Perkin and Kipping.
Donington's Class Book of Chemistry, Parts 1 4.
Holmyard's Inorganic Chemistry, published by Arnold,
66\ 6rf.
HOLMYAKD : Practical Chemistry, Bell & Sons, Ltd.
4*.
OSCROFT : Inorganic Chemistry, for Upper Forms
(Bell & Sons, Ltd.). 66-. 6d.
MALVEA : Practical Chemistry for Intermediate Col-
leges (Indian Press). Rs. 2.
NEWTH : Chemical Lecture Experiments for tea-
chers' use, published by Messrs. Longmans,
Green & Co., latest edition. Price 8,9. 6d.
HOLMYARD : Introduction to Organic Chemistry
(Arnold).
BRUCE AND HARPER : Practical Chemistry, edition
1925 (Macmillan).
PHYSICS.
(N r .B. Candidates will bo required to pass in the theoretical as
well as practical part of each Science subject.)
There will be two papers of three hours each as fol-
lows :
1st Paper Properties of Matter, Heat and Light.
2nd Paper Sound, Electricity and Magnetism.
The following syllabus is recommended :
General properties of Matter. Fundamental units and
their measurement. Principle of Balance. Verniers,
Calipers, Screw-gauge, Spheromoter, Volume, Density,
Specific gravity, Fluid pressure, Principle of Archimedes,
Nicholson's hydrometer, Barometer, Boyle's Law, Pumps,
Siphon, Elementary notions of volume, elasticity and
168 CALENDAR 1928-29
Young's modulus in the case of solids. Isothermal and
adiabatic elasticities of gases. Gravitation, simple har-
monic motion. Pendulum. Value of " g."
Heat. Temperature. Thermometers. Calorimetry.
Specific heat. Latent heat. Expansion of solids, liquids,
and gases. Vapour pressure. Hygrometry. Change
of state. Laws of unsaturated and saturated vapours.
Conduction. Convection. Radiation. Reflection and
absorption of heat. Isothermal and adiabatic changes.
Specific heat at constant volume and constant pressure.
Relation of heat to work. Determination of " J."
Light. Laws of propagation. Reflection and re-
fraction from plane and spherical surfaces. Dispersion.
Spectra. Fraunhofer's lines. Telescope. Microscope.
Spectrometer. Photometry. Phosphorescene. Fluo-
rescence. Velocity of light.
So and. Transverse and longitudinal waves. Nature
of sound waves. Intensity. Pitch. Quality. Mode of
propagation. Reflection. Refraction. Stationary waves.
Beats. Resonance. Vibrations of strings and air columns.
Monochord and organ pipes. Determination of velocity
in solids, liquids, and gases, Musical scale. The gramo-
phone.
Electricity and Magnetism. Magnetisation. Perma-
nent magnets. Magnetic induction. Unit of magne-
tism. Magnetic field. Lines of force and lines of induc-
tion. Tangent A and B positions of Gauss. Deflection
and vibration Magnetometers. Magnetic moments.
Earth as a Magnet. Magnetic elements. H. Declina-
tion and Dip and their determinations. Electrostatic
unit of quantity. Coulomb's law of force. Electric
field. Gold leaf electroscope. Surface density. Poten-
tial. Capacity. Ley den jar. Capacity of a parallel
plate condenser. Electrophorus Wimshurst's machine.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 it) 9
Voltaic cell. Electric current and its magnetic effects.
E. M. unit of current. Galvanometers. Ammeters.
Voltmeters. Ohm's law and its verification. Unit of
resistance and Potential Difference. Specific resistance.
Practical and absolute units. Determination of resistance.
Wheatstones' bridge. P. 0. Box. Heating effect of
current. Joule's law. Determination of J. Electric
glow lamp. Electric arcs. Chemical effects of current.
Faraday's laws of Electrolysis. Electrochemical equi-
valent. Voltameters. Electro-magnetic relations. Elec-
tro-magnetic induction. Induction coil. Simple dyna-
mo. Motor. Electric Telegraph. Telephone. Micro-
phone. Thermopile. X-Ray.
Books suggested :
A Text-book of Physics by R. 8. Willows (published
by Messrs. Arnold & Co.).
Everyday Physics by H. E. Hadley (Macmillan &
Company, Rs. 4.).
There will be also an examination in practical work.
The laboratory course is indicated by the subjoined
list of experiments. An account of each experiment
must be written by the student in a special note-book
which will be examined. The account of each experi-
ment should be signed by the Demonstrator, and the
books should be kept in his charge.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS.
Mechanics
Applications of the Triangle of Forces.
Equilibrium of Parallel Forces.
Principle of Moments.
Determination of co-efficient of Friction.
Ditto of " g " by the pendulum.
Nicholson's hydrometer.
170 CALENDAR 1928-29
General properties of Matter
Measurements of Mass by the balance.
Use of the Spherometer.
Ditto Screw Gauge.
Ditto Callipers.
Reading the Barometer.
Heat
Testing fixed points of Thermometers.
Determination of Specific Heats.
Ditto of Latent Heats.
Construction of a graph illustrating the rate of cool-
ing of a liquid.
Verification of Boyle's Law.
Determination of the co-efficient of linear expansion.
Light
Reflection and refraction of light at plane and spheri-
rical surfaces.
Determination of refractive indices.
Focal lengths of mirrors and lenses.
Sound te
Determination of the velocity of sound by resonance.
Ditto of the frequency of a fork by sonometer.
Magnetimn
Mapping outlines of force by a small magnet.
Determination of neutral points in a magnetic field.
Comparison of magnetic moments by the magneto-
meter.
Comparison of magnetic fields by a vibrating magnet.
Electricity
Variation of magnetic force at centre of a coil with
radius, number of turns, and strength of current.
Determination of resistance by the use of Wheat-
stone's wire bridge.
Determination of resistance by the use of Ammeter
and Voltmeter.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 171
Combination of cells in series and parallel.
Comparison of electromotive forces by the potentio-
meter.
Detailed accounts of the method of performing the
above experiments will be found in either Willows' Text-
book of Physics, or in any Intermediate course of Prac-
tical Physics such as Schuster and Lees.
BIOLOGY.
There will be two papers of three hours each and a
practical examination : the first paper on Zoology and the
second paper on Botany.
The following syllabus is prescribed. Instructions
for the teaching of Biology are appended :
I. Zoology.
(N.B. Candidates \\.11 be required to pass m the theoretical as
well as practical part of each Science subject.)
A. Living and non-living matter. The distinctive
properties of living matter or protoplasm and its chemi-
cal composition. The structure and life-history of
Amoeba and malaria parasite as examples of the Pro-
tozoa. A general conception of the structure and phe-
nomena of the animal cell, direct and indirect cell divi-
sion. The union of cells to form tissues and the com-
bination of tissues to form organs.
B. The structure of Hydra as an example of the
Metazoa. The principle of the physiological division of
labour and the correlated differentiation of structure.
C. The structure and bionomics of an Indian Earth-
worm as an example of a segmented animal.
D. The structure of the Cockroach as a type of
Arthropoda. A general survey of the life-history of the
Mosquito and House-fly, and their economic importance.
E. The general characters of the Chordata.
172 CALENDAR 1928-29
F. The general anatomy, histology, and physiology
of the various systems or organs in the Frog.
G. An elementary knowledge of the anatomy and
osteology of the Rabbit or other common Mammal.
The brain and eye of the Sheep, and the skull of the Dog
may be substituted for those of the Rabbit.
H. A general classification of the animal kingdom
with the characteristics of the principal phyla.
J. Reproduction, sexual and asexual : ova and sper-
matozoa ; oogenesis and sperm atogenesis. The ele-
mentary facts of the fertilisation and segmentation of
the ovum, the outlines of the development and larval
history of the Frog, the three primary germ-layers and
the organs derived from them.
II. Botany.
(N. B. Candidates will bo required to pass in the theoretical an well
as practical part of each Science subject.)
A. The structure and germination of seeds, the
morphology of the root, stem, and leaf. The chief types
of floral structures. The chief types of inflorescence
and the common types of fruits.
B. The parts of a typical vegetable cell, the cell
contents and their microchemical reactions, the division
of a cell, the chief types of plant tissues. A comparative
study of the internal structure of the root, stern, and leaf
of the Angiosperms. The structure of the reproduc-
tive organs of the Angiosperms.
C. The structure of Bacillus subtilis and the modes
of nutrition among the Bacteria.
D. The structure, physiology, and life-histories of
Ulothris, Spirogyra, Mucor, and Yeast.
B. The structure and life-histories of a moss and a
fern, and the phenomenon of alteration of generations.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 173
F. The life-history of Angiosperms. General struc-
ture of flowers and fruits, recognition and economic
importance of the following families :
Cruciferae, Malvaceae, Leguminosae, Compositae, and
Liliaceae.
G. An outline of the classification of the vegetable
kingdom to illustrate grades of structure and method of
reproduction.
H. Elementary plant physiology ; stability of the
plant body ; the usual constituents of plant food ; as-
similation ; transpiration ; respiration ; the main facts
about growth ; the chief types of movements.
Practical Work.
Students are expected to keep a record of all practical
work in a special laboratory sketch-book, which will
be liable to examination by the examiners. The labo-
ratory instructors should sign the result of each day's
practical work.
A. The microscopical study of Amoeba and Hydra ;
the study of Hydra by means of transverse and longitu-
dinal sections.
The general dissection of the earth-worm, cockroach,
and frog ; life-history of the mosquito : a microscopical
study of the chief animal tissues from fresh or prepared
preparations of muscle, nerve, cartilage, bone, blood,
and connective tissue. The microscopical study of the
earth-worm by means of fresh preparations and trans-
verse sections ; a microscopical examination of the
kidney, liver, spinal cord, stomach, ovary, and testis
of the frog. The skeleton of the frog.
The osteology of the rabbit substituting the skull of
the dog for that of the rabbit, and the dissection of the
alimentary, vascular, and reproductive systems of that
animal.
174 CALENDAR 1928-29
B. The dissection of plants and parts of plants ; the
preparation, simple staining, and study of microscopical
sections of plants. A practical study by microscopical
examination and otherwise of bacteria, yeast, Spirogyra,
Ulothrix, Mucor ; a moss, a fern, and the vegetative
and reproductive organs of Angiosperms treated in an
elementary manner.
The description of a flowering plant and its parts in
semi-technical language.
(Where fresh material cannot be obtained recourse
should be had to prepared specimens.)
Text-books suggested :
Parker and Bhattia : Elementary Course of Practi-
cal Zoology. (Macmillan.)
Holwes : Biology of the Frog.
Marshall and. Hurttt : Practical Zoology. (Murray.)
Hangachari : Botany for Indian Schools, second
edition. (Government Press, Madras.)
Gager : Fundamentals of Botany. (Blakistou.)
Huxley. Elementary Physiology. (Macmillans.)
Shipley. - -Life . ( Ditto . )
Transean. -General Botany (World Book Company,
New York).
Bahl, K. N . : Indian Zoological Memoirs. 1. Phere-
tima, Methodist Publishing House, Lucknow. 1920,
Re. 1-8.
APPENDIX.
Instructions for the teaching of Biology
1. The teacher must consider the purpose for which
he teaches Biology to prepare students for the Univer-
sity, for medical and forest colleges, and for more intelli-
gent and more joyful living. Biology deals with the
world of life surrounding the students, and every effort
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 175
should be made to present Biology as a living subject,
rather than as a vast mass of unrelated and (to the stu-
dents) often meaningless facts to be memorised.
2. Teachers may take more liberty in teaching Bio-
logy than has been considered possible in the past.
They should feel that they are not too rigidly bound by
the syllabus. Much of what is commonly accepted
as the interpretation of the syllabus, and as the proper
ontent of Biology, is a tradition from the past. Teach-
ers may to a much larger extent determine for them-
selves what they are to regard as the proper things to
include in their teaching, and the proper emphasis to be
given to these things ; the syllabus will then become a
friendly guide.
3. The syllabus is a record of work that ought to be
covered and the teacher may take up the various topics
in whatever order he thinks best.
4. The additional items in the new syllabus are not
intended to enlarge the syllabus, but to shift the em-
phasis given to the various parts of it. For instance,
it is not intended that the cockroach shall be studied in
minute detail, but that it shall be made the basis for
acquaintance with the great assemblage of arthropods.
The mosquito is to illustrate metamorphosis, and is used
because of the great importance of mosquitoes to man,
because it can be observed anywhere, and because it can
be readily reared in the laboratory. The mosquito is
to illustrate also the carrying of disease by insects, and
the malaria parasite is an illustration of a disease-pro-
ducing organism transmitted by an insect. The econo-
mic and bionomic importance of these animals is to be
emphasized rather than complete details of their struc-
ture.
Likewise it is intended to allow considerable freedom
to the teacher by permitting the use of mammalian types
176 CALENDAR 1928-29
that are most readily available. The purpose is to be-
come acquainted with characteristic features of mam-
malian anatomy, rather than with minute details of one
animal only, to the exclusion of all others.
In Botany more emphasis should be put on what
plants do and how they work, than on extensive study
of various growth forms, which have little meaning for
the student unless correlated with the great problems
of plant economy. Moss is added to the syllabus as a
simple, clear, and easily accessible plant illustrating
sex organs and alteration of generations ; it should be
treated from this point of view, and no effort should be
made to consider its anatomy in the detail usually re-
garded necessary in the fern.
DRAWING.
There will be two papers, each of three hours' dura-
tion : the first paper on Solid Geometrical Drawing and
the seond paper on Free Arm Memory Drawing.
Syllabus.
Free Arm. In pastels on Tinted Paper or Water
Colours on White Cartridge Paper.
Progressive work in groups of the common objects
listed for High Schools, such as
Plate of Oranges, Tomatoes, and Bananas ; Candle-
stick and Matches ; Ink-pot and Pen ; Gloy Bottle and
Brush ; Bundles of Firewood ; Glass of Water or Milk ;
Chinese Lantern ; Liquids in Bottles ; Umbrellas, etc.
Nature Study Advanced. The more difficult Flowers,
Bunches of Flowers, Leaves with Fruit and Flowers,
Compound Leaves.
The above, which is but suggestive, will involve in-
struction in the art of blending colours, colour harmonies,
colour schemes and shadows, together with technocali-
ties such as tint-softening, blending, direct colouring,
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 177
light tint on dark and dark on light, use of opaque colours
and back-grounds.
Memory Draining. (a) Objects such as listed above
which may be placed before students for a limited period
after which the object shall be taken away and the
drawing made.
(b) The drawing of some familiar and common objects
entirely from memory.
A number of small objects may be placed once A week
on a covered up tray, exposed, say for ten seconds, and
the class be asked to writ? down as many objects as they
remember to have seen.
Text-books recommended :
Pastel work, Vols. I and If, by H. A. Rankin, pub-
lishers Messrs. Isaac Pitman & Sons, price Rs. 4 per vol.
Materials. As for the High School Examination of
1930 (Free Arm).
Geometrical. Solid Geometry, simple solids, plans,
elevations, sections, and sectional elevations of such,
isometric orthographical projection, elementary per-
spective drawing, and all forms of Plain and Diagonal
Scales.
Text-books and Materials. As for the High School
Examination of 1930 (Geometrical).
ECONOMICS.
There shall be two papers of three hours each. The
first paper shall cover Production, Consumption, and
Taxation, and the second paper Exchange and Distribu-
tion.
Introductory.
Subject-matter. Relation to other sciences. The
development of Economic life,
178 CALENDAR 1928-29
Production.
Relation between wants and production. The factors
of production.
Land. Natural resources of India. Soil and Climate.
Sources of Power. Raw materials.
Labour. Density and distribution of population in
India. Health and vital satistics. Occupations.
Capital (fixed and circulating). Buildings and machi-
nery. Means of communication and transportation in
India. Irrigation.
Organization (management pi u # enterprise ) . Com b i -
nation of the factors of production in .village industries
and in factories. Efficiency of the factors of production.
Different uses and how efficiency increases. Efficiency
of labour increased by education. Division of labour
and specialization of machinery. Large scale produc-
tion and its limitations. Diminishing and increasing
returns. Development of industrial organization. Its
relation to means of transportation. Accompanying
changes in rural industries and in agriculture in India.
Extensive and intensive cultivation.
Exchange.
Utility. Marginal and total utility. Law of dimi-
nishing utility. Law of demand. Elasticity of demand.
Barter. Conditions of barter. How both parties
gain in utility by exchange.
Exchange by sale and purchase. Demand and sup-
ply schedules and curves. Balancing of demand and
supply in a local market. Relation of price to expenses
of production. Changes in the expense of production.
The development of markets. Causes of the extension
of markets. India's imports and exports.
The machinery of exchange. Money and banking,
.both to be illustrated from Indian examples (including
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 179
sahukari system in the villages and the sarafi system in
cities). Convertibility of paper money in India. Cheques
and hundies (Foreign exchanges are included).
Distribution.
The problem of distribution.
Rent. The law of rent as applied to India. Land
tenure in the United Provinces.
Salaries and wages. Real and money wages. Wages
as determined by supply and demand of labour. The
standard of living. Mobility of labour in India. In-
fluence of social customs.
Interest. Net and gross interest. Mobility of capital
in India. Principles of co-operative credit and its advan-
tages for India.
Profits As the reward of enterprise. The field for
enterprise in India.
Consumption.
Satisfaction as the end of all economic activity.
Wants and their classification. Division of income
among different items of expenditure. Family budgets*
Relations of saving to spending. The social side of
spending.
Taxation.
A description of the taxes and other sources of revenue
and items of expenditure of the Imperial Government,
of Bombay and the province or State in which the col-
lege is situated ; simple distinction between direct and
indirect taxes. (Nothing of the theory of taxation is
to be taught.)
The following books should be consulted :
Pension. Economics of Every-day Life, Parts 1
and 2.
Moreland. Introduction to Economics for Indian
Students.
12
180 OALENDAB 1928-29
India in 1928 (the latest edition of the publication
available in July, 1927, being recommended) published
by the Central Publicity Office. (Chapters dealing with
economic progress only are to be read.)
Teachers should also consult
V. 0. Kale. Indian Economics.
Marshall. Economics of Industry.
Chapman. Elementary Economics.
Jack. Economic Life of a Bengal District.
Mann. Life and Labour in a Deccaii Village.
B. G. Bhatnagar. Bases of Indian Economy.
Lettice Fisher. Getting and Spending : Collins' Clear
Type Press. London, 3/6.
E. K. Mukerjee. Groundwork of Economics (Long-
mans).
Fair child. Elements of Economics.
F. H. Robinson. Elements of Economics, Books I
and II.
Dori Lai Dubey. Elementary Indian Economics
(Indian Press, Allahabad, price Rs. 3-12.)
Frank O'Hara. Introduction to Economics.
Report on an Enquiry into Working Class Budgets
in Bombay by G. Findlay Shirras (Government of Bom-
bay Labour Office).
Teachers should give facts and figures from the latest
edition of the Indian Year Book (" Times " Press).
Practical Work.
Teachers should take out students to study small
industries, markets, and conditions of living in both
city and country. The principles should be illustrated
from these studies. The following is the minimum
INTEBMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 181
amount of practical work that should be done by stu-
dents :
(1) Two budgets of consumption : one of an artisan,
one of a cultivator, if possible, with the stu-
dents' own suggestions for improvement.
(2) Two statements showing the expenses of pro-
duction, for one month, or a longer period,
or for a fixed quantity of product, of two small
industries, with suggestions for the improve-
ment of the industry.
(3) Four diagrams illustrating the above four state-
ments.
(4) Two maps representing economic conditions in
India or parts of India.
Written Work.
Teachers should insist on as much written work a&
possible. The following methods are suggested :
NOTE. Teachers should not usually dictate ftotes, but should
require students to write out their own notes after each lecture from rough
notes taken in class and from memory. These notes should be inspected
and corrected by the teacher.
Questions. At the beginning of the lecture period
teachers should frequently give out a single question
on the work of the day before and allow the students-
5 or 10 minutes to write out the answer, which should
be corrected and returned to the students.
Essays. Occasional essays may be assigned.
The following written work is the minimum to be
done by each student :
(1) Two long examinations of at least 2| hours
each or six one-period tests, or one such ex-
amination and three such tests.
182 CALENDAR 1928-29
(2) Ten questions set in class to be answered in
about ten minutes each.
(3) Two essays of about ten pages, or four essays
of about five pages. (One long essay and two
short essays are advised.)
NOTE. The above modification is based on the following resolution
passed by the Board at its meeting held on February 12, 1929 :
That the practical examination in Economics for
the Intermediate Examination should be abolished ; that
the abolition should take effect from the Intermediate
Examination of 1930 ; that the practical and written
work in Economics should continue as hitherto and
that the Principal of a College recognised in Economics
for the Intermediate Examination should be required
to submit a certificate at the time of forwarding the
applications of students for permission to appear at the
examination to the effect that the practical work pres-
cribed in Economics has been done in the manner laid
down in the Prospectus.
CIVICS.
There will be two papers of three hours each : the
first paper on Civic Theory and the second paper on
Indian Civics.
Paper /. Civic Theory.
Syllabus
Nature of society. The State in relation to society.
Functions and structure of government, forms of govern-
ment. The place of local institutions in political life.
Meaning of citizenship. Benefits from society, State or
local institutions to the citizen. Duties and rights of
citizenship. A citizen's participation in the life of his
town, his province, his country. A citizen's relations
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 18$
with non-political associations like the colleges, clubs,
religious organizations, co-operative societies, etc.
Books recommended :
Raleigh . . Elementary Politics (Oxford
University Press).
Lay . . . . Citizenship. (Macmillan &
Co.).
Sir Henry Jones . . Principles of Citizenship.
Bryce . . . . Hindrances to Good Citizen-
ship.
Paper II. Indian Civics.
Syllabus
Structure of Indian government, central and pro-
vincial. Working of Indian government. Indian muni-
cipalities, district boards, village institutions with parti-
cular reference to those of the United Provinces of Agra
and Oudh. Education in India. Indian social life.
Cultural movements in modern India. National move-
ments in modern India.
Books recommended :
Harris and Garner Civil Government (Sanyal &
Co., Calcutta).
G. Anderson . . British Administration.
8. M. Bose . . Working of the Indian
Constitution (Oxford Uni-
versity Press).
Mrs. A. Besant . . India A Nation.
Farquhar . . Modern Religious Move-
ments in Ind a. ^
C. F* Andrews .. Renaissance in India*. (Ganesh
& Co., Madras).
184 CALENDAR 1928-29
HISTORY AND ALLIED GEOGRAPHY.
There will be two papers of three hours each.
Paper I. Indian History from the earliest time to
the present clay.
Books recommended :
Lane-Poole, S. : Mediaeval India (Story of Nations'
Series), T. Fisher Unwin, Ltd.
Smith, V. A.\ The Oxford History of India. (Cla-
rendon Press, Oxford.)
Reborts, P. E. : Historical Geography of the British
Empire, Vol. VII. Parts I and II (Clarendon
Press, Oxford).
Imperial Gazetteer, Vol. II.
JR. Aiyangar : Pre-Musalman India (Longmans, Green
& Co.).
Paper II. Either (a) Outlines of Modern Euro-
pean History from 1500 A. D. to 1914 A. D.
(Excluding the war period).
Books recommended :
Ramsay Muir : Atlas of European History.
A. J . Grant : History of Europe. Longmans, Green
&Co.
Thatcher and Schwill : History of Europe. John.
Murray, London.
J. H. Robinson : History of Western Europe. Ginn
& Co., Boston, New York, U. S. A.
Or (b) Modern English History from 1485 A. D. to
1914 A. D. (excluding the war period).
Books recommended :
Warner and Marten : Groundwork of English His-
tory. Blackie & Son, Ltd.
R. B. Mowat : A New History of Great Britain.
(Oxford University Press).
S. JR. Gardiner : A School Atlas of English History
(Longmans, Green & Co.).
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 185
HISTORIES OF GREECE AND ROME AND ALLIED
GEOGRAPHY.
There will be two papers of three hours each.
Paper I. History of Greece.
Books recommended :
Edmonds, C.D. : Greek History for Schools, Cam-
bridge University Press.
J . B. Bury : Greek History for Beginners.
E. Abbot : Pericles. G. Putnam and Sons.
Paper II. History of Rome.
Books recommended :
Bryant, E. E. : A Short History of Rome. Cam-
bridge University Press.
Shuckburgh : Aiigustus.
,, A Short History of Rome for Begin-
ners.
GEOGRAPHY.
There will be two papers of three hours each. The
first paper will contain questions on part I of the syllabus
and the second paper on parts II and III of the syllabus.
Syllabus.
I. World Geography with intensive study of the
regional geography of Eurasia and North America com-
pared or of the three southern continents compared.
NOTE. Teachers will be expected throughout to develop the human
aide of Geography, including the relations of Geography and History.
II. Study of the survey map with special reference
to 1 : 1/1000000. Survey of India and Adjacent Coun-
tries Series, sheet no. 43 (Srinagar), or no. 52 (Leh), or
no. 53 (Delhi and Simla), also 1-inch Survey of India map
no. 63 K/8. Study of the principles of map-projections.
Study of the weather maps published by the Meteoro-
logical Offices, Simla, and of other distribution maps.
186 CALENDAB 1928-29
The work should show that outdoor geographical stu-
dies have formed a feature of the course.
III. Economic Geography with special reference to
India. The world position of India, its natural resources,
its economic development. Man's influence over natural
conditions, land and water communications, internal and
external ; irrigation. This connotes a thorough study of
the distribution maps of India.
The world distribution of the following vegetable
products :
Wheat, rice, tea, coffee, vine, cotton, jute, sugar,
rubber, tobacco, conditions of their growth,
Books recommended :
/. Russell. North America. Oxford. 10s. 6rf.
Dawson. North America. Vol. I. Stanford. 15s.
Gannett. North America. Vol. II. Stanford. 15s.
Keane. Asia. Vols. I and II. Stanford. 15s. each.
Chisholm. Europe. Vols. I and II. Stanford. 15s.
each.
Keane. Central and South America. Vols. I and
II. Stanford. 15s. each.
Leonard Brooks. New Regional Geography. Book
IV. London University Press.
Keane. Africa. Vols. I and II. Stanford. 15s.
each.
Mackinder. Britain and the British Seas. Oxford.
10s. U.
Hogarth. The Nearer East. Oxford. 10s. 6d.
Little. The Far East. Oxford. 10s. 6d.
McMunn and Coster. A Regional Geography of
Europe, Oxford. 4s.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 187
Unstead and Taylor. Regional and*)
General Geography for Stu-
May be used as
dents. Philip. y text-books by
Herbertson, Senior Geography, i the students.
Oxford. 3s. U. J
Reynolds. The Americas, Africa, and Australasia.
Black. 2s. each.
Thomas. Africa and Australasia. Bell.
Bruce. The Americas. Bell. 2s.
Brown and Johnson. The Americas (Home of Man
Series).
Griffith Taylor Australia.
Wallis. Junior Geography of the World. Macmil-
Ian. 4s.
George. Relations of History and Geography.
Oxford. 4s. 6d.
Herbertson. (F. D.) Clarendon Geographies. Vols.
I and II. 4s. each.
II Esson and Philip. Map Reading made Easy.
Philip.
Dick son. Maps, how they are made ; how to read
them. Bacon. 6d.
Young and Fairgrieve. A Class-book of Practical
Geography. Philip.
Simmons and Richardson. An Introduction to Prac-
tical Geography. Macmillan. 4s.
Unstead. Practical Geography. Oxford. 4s.
Mori. An Elementary Practical Geography. Blac-
kie. 2s.
///. Chisholm. A Smaller Commercial Geography.
Longmans. 3s. 6<f.
Curr. Commercial Geography. Black. 4s.
Lyde.-*-~ Man and his Markets. Macmillan. 2s.
Herbertson. Man and his Work. Is. 6d.
188 CALENDAB 1928-29
Statesman's Year Book. Macmillan.")
1^5. ' Every two or
Whitaker's Almanack. 4s. ( three years.
Indian Year Book. Thacker. J
Imperial Gazetteer of India. Vols. Ill and IV.
Oxford. 75. 6d. each.
Atlas of Commercial Geography, Cambridge Uni-
versity Press. 85.
Oxford Economic Atlas. Oxford. 65.
Maps :
Stanfords' Maps with handbooks (expensive but good).
Philips' sets of maps of the various continents and
of India with explanatory handbooks.
Philips' sets of synthetic maps (for students' use).
Philips' Modern School Atlas.
Additional Reference Books
Lake. Physical Geography, Cambridge University
Press.
Salisbury. Physiography for Schools. Shorter
Course. Murray. 6s.
Davis. Elementary Physical Geography. Ginn.
5s. 6d.
Tarr. Elementary Physical Geography. Macmil-
lari. 7s. 6d.
Mill. The Realm of Nature. Murray. 55.
LOGIC.
There will be two papers o/ three hours each : the
first paper on Deductive Logic and the second paper on
Inductive Logic.
Deductive Logic.
The following syllabus is prescribed :
Definition, scope and value of Logic. Nature of
thinking. The laws of thought. The relation of thought
INTEBMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 189
and language. Terms and their classification. Deno-
tation and Connotation of terms. The predicables.
Formal division and definition. Propositions, their im-
port. Reduction of statements to logical form. Dis-
tribution of terms. Nature and forms of inference.
The opposition of propositions and various forms of
deduction. The syllogism, its figures and moods. Re-
duction, direct and indirect. Hypothetical, disjunctive
and mixed syllogisms. The Dilemma, Enthymeme,
Sorites, and Epicheirema. Function and value of
Syllogism. Analysis of deductive arguments. Falla-
cies.
Inductive Logic.
The following syllabus is prescribed :
The nature and presuppositions of inductive infer-
ence. Causation, its significance and importance in
induction. Observation and experiment. Classification
and nomenclature. Hypothesis. Imperfect induction
simple enumeration and analogy. Methods of scienti-
fic induction. The deductive method of investigation.
Analysis of inductive arguments and application of
inductive methods. Explanation and establishment of
laws. The relation of induction to deduction. Falla-
cies.
Books recommended (not prescribed) to indicate the
standard of treatment of the topics prescribed in the
.syllabus :
Introductory Text-book of Logic : S. H. Mellone,
Blackwood & Sons, Edinburgh.
Intermediate Logic : Welton & Monahan, Univer-
sity Tutorial Press, London.
Elementary Logic, Deduction and Induction : Diwan
<!hand.
Inductive Logic : P. K. Bay.
190 CALENDAR 1928-29
A MODERN INDIAN LANGUAGE.
Hindi.
There will be three papers in each of three hours
duration : the first paper will be set on the prescribed
Poetry and Alankar, the second paper on prescribed
Prose and Drama, and the third paper on Unseen and
Composition. Questions on History of Hindi literature
and critical questions will be distributed over the first
and second papers.
Paper I Poetry and Alankar.
Text-books prescribed :
1. Tulsidas TTJTHWT *Tf?|[> srci 1 TOTTO%
^rragft *f*m (printed in one volume) or
by Pandits Kashi Rama and Dwarka Prasad
Sharma. (Publisher, Ram Narayan Lai,
AlUhabad).
2. Surdas rornini edited by Satya Jiwan Varma.
(Lahari Press, Benares).
3. Din Dayal Giri m^lfffi 3ir*T (Nagari Pracha-
rini Sabha, Benares).
4. Maithili Sharan Gupta "Z&FJX gvr (Sahitya
Sadan, Chirgaon, Jhansi).
Paper II Prose and Drama.
Text-books prescribed :
1. Jai Shankar Prasad ^srrrncrsr (revised edition).
2. Shyamsundar Das TTO 5*J*TTS*ft (Indian Press,,
Allahabad).
3. Premchand jfa JT^TT (Ganga Pustak Mala,
Lucknow).
Paper III Unseen and Composition.
Books recommended for Alankar and History of
Hindi Literature :
1. Ram Ratna wfcKK TTSivr (Ratrasram, Agra).
2. m*r ft*m (published by the Hindi Sahitya Sam-
melan, Allahabad.)
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 191
3. Badri Nath Bhatta %< (Publisher, Ganga
Pustak Mala, Lucknow).
4. Keye Hindi Literature (Heritage of India Ser-
ies).
The following books are recommended for supple-
mentary reading :
1. Tulsidas srftrrrareft (N. P. Sabha, Benares).
2. Surdas HTO3Wft (published by Hindi Sahitya
<?
Sammelan, Allahabad).
3. Shridhar Pathak qWH3m1 &nft (Padmakot,
Allahabad) .
4. Badri Nath Bhatta jrrWft (Publisher, Ganga
Pustak Mala, Lucknow).
. Mishra Bandhu srTciT fwqj (N. P. Sabha, Bena-
res).
6. Ramchandra Shukla *rarT|F (N. P. Sabha, Bena-
7. Viyogi Hail *
8. Pratap Narayan Mishra f?Hn=vr wftrT (Abhyu-
daya Press, Allahabad).
9. Ramchandra Varma $srxrm (Hindi Grantha
Ratnakara, Bombay).
10. Padum Lai Bakshi trgqrsr (Publisher, Gandhi
Hindi Pustak Bhandar, Allahabad).
There will be three papers in each of the following
languages : each paper will be of three hours ; the first
paper will be set on the prescribed Prose, the second on
the prescribed Poetry and the third on Unseen and Com-
position. Critical questions will be set in the first and
second papers.
192 CALENDAR 1928-29
The following are the text- books prescribed :
Urdu.
Paper I Prose and Grammar.
Books prescribed :
(1) ^i jf ^^ ixnaa* J 5 i &***. ^lijlaisu* from page 2
^.)pk JA- V),*- up to pagc 54 endin S wit
(2) oljl ^i**^- ^s* ^r!)k ^/ 5;
from JAB J^ ^ ^U^ i*~M up to ^
(3)
/ - .
- ^csafL* the whole of the 1st chapter.
(4) 0*4, ^ ^i^^^ ( a ) v^-^* 5 (^) J^^ 5 ( c ) ^^ ^ ^f
(d) ,Ua. M ^yt (e) ^-6^ oy^ (/) uylU^I ^UJ (gr)
; ^yo 5 e^sx; (A) ^ o^ ^xjj (i) jU^) (j) e^ottf 5 k^
(5) ^ r ) ^oU ^ T - - M)^^ by National Press, Allah-
abad, 1st edition, 59 pages, ending with ^ j^;^ *j ^
Grammar : oM-^l**^- " Majma-ul-Fawaid/ 5 by
Maulvi Syed Hamid Ali (Ram Dayal Agarwala, Katra,
Allahabad).
Paper II Poetry and Grammar.
Prescribed : Poetry selections from the Intermediate
course for 1928 (published by R. S. Lala Ram Dayal
Agarwala, Allahabad) pages 1 148.
Grammar :
" Majma-ul-Fawaid," by Maulvi Syed Hamid Ali
(Ram Dayal Agarwala, Booksellers, Katra, Allahabad).
Paper III. Unseen and Composition.
Books recommended :
v^y ybjok by ^<j^ ij*V
Selected Essays by M. Zafar Husain Asi .^U
(National Press, Allahabad).
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 193
Bengali.
Poetry.
Kirtibas. Ramayan, Ajodhya Kanda.
Michael Madhusudan Datt. Chaturclaspadi Kabita-
bali, edited by Dina Nath Sanyal.
Nabin Chandra Sen. Prabhas.
D. L. Roy. Chandragupta, published by Gurudaa
Chatterji & Pons, Calcutta. Price, Re. 1.
Prose.
Bhudeb Mukerji. Pribarik Prabandha.
Gooroodas Banerji. Jhan Karma.
Ishanchandra Ghosh. Jatak, Volume I (nos. 1 25
and introduction).
Hara Prasad Sastri. Bharat Mahila.
Composition.
Rakhal Das Vidyaratna. Bengali Composition.
Unseen.
Tri-dhara, by Chandranath Basu, Price, about Re. 1.
(Recommended . )
Marathi.
1 . Kewal-swarajya-sathin, by Hari Narayan Apte.
2. Jiwaii Smriti, published by the Manor an jak
Granth Prasarak Mandali, Bombay.
3. Wagvaijayanti or a collection of Poems of Govin-
da 'raj, published by Keshavravji Gondhelekar and
printed at the Jagadhitechhu Press, Poona city. Price,
Rs. 2.
4. Selections from Tukararn as published in the
latest edition of the Navanit.
194 CALENDAR 1928-29
A MODERN EUROPEAN LANGUAGE.
r l\iere will be three papers of three hours each. The
first paper will consist of extracts from the prescribed
Text-books together with grammatical questions. The
second paper will contain unseen passages for translation
from French into English ; these passages are not to be
taken from the prescribed Text-books. The third paper
will consist of a passage or passages of English prose to
be translated into French.
French.
Prescribed Text-books
ERCKMANN-CHATRIAN : Le Conscrit.
DAUDET : Tartarin sur les Alpes. (Siepmann's edi-
tion.)
MoLikRE : Les Femmes Savantes. (Harrap.)
Grammar recommended
French Grammar (Sonnenschein's Parallel Grammar
, Series) or Heath's Modern French Grammar. (Harrap.)
Books recommended for rapid reading :
La Bastide Ronge (Elie Berthet). La Rose Blanche
.(Louise Enault) and La Viede Polichinelle (Octave
Feuillet), all of Siepman's French series and published
,by Macmillan & Co.
A CLASSICAL LANGUAGE.
There will be three papers of three hours each in each
of these languages : the first paper will be on Poetry
(including Drama in the case of Sanskrit) and Unseen,
the second paper on Prose and Unseen and the third
paper on Grammar, Composition, and Translation into
the classical language. Questions in Grammar relating
.to the text may be included in each of the first two
papers.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OP 1930 195
(a) Sanskrit.
Paper I. Poetry, including Drama and Unseen.
(a) Raghuvamsha, Canto XIII (as in Astapuspika
by Nilkamal Bhattaeharya or in any other
edition).
(b) Shakuntala, Act IV (as in Astapuspika by
Nilkamal Bhattaeharya or in any other edi-
tion).
NOTES. 1. Students are expected to explain selected passages in
their own Sanskrit.
2. No Prakrit passages shall be set for the examination.
Paper II. Prose and Unseen
(a Prose Chandrapeeda Charitam (the story of
Kadambari written concisely in Bana's
own words), by Pandit V. Anantacharya,
published by the editor in 1917, Nun-
gambaukam, Madras, and printed at the
Law Printing House, Mount Road, Mad-
ras. Price, annas 6.
(b) Unseen The following stories from the Maha-
bharata are recommended :
(1) Nalopakhyana.
(2) Sakuntalopakhyana.
NOTE. Easy passages from the above-mentioned bocks and similar
passages from other similar books should be set for translation.
Paper III. Grammar, Composition, and Translation.
Books recommended :
1. Apte's Guide to Sanskrit Composition.
2. Kale's Higher Sanskrit Grammar.
3. Vidya Bhushan's Sanskrit Grammar.
4. Bhandarkar's Second Book of Sanskrit.
In addition to the course in Grammar prescribed
for the High School Examination of 1930, the course in
13
196 CALENDAR 1928-29
Grammar for the Intermediate Examination of 1930
shall consist of the following :
The remaining declensions of all nouns and pronouns,
conjugations of verbs of frequent occurrence in classical
literature of all the gunas in all the lakaras, the use of
karakas, the tamasas, and the krit and taddhita forms.
N.B. Sanskrit must be written in Devanagari character.
(b) Arabic.
Paper I. Poetry and Unseen.
Text :
(a) vjtotf 0) ^L*^
r -
_
V -
A . UjS
^ - J,^o
t -* _
II .U
} r .
(0
ii -
t v -
t -
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION" OF 1930 197
rr -
f r - i
r A -
f 9 :*. if .c. ,*-o^ ^ t^
(6) *AJtyAxJ|j*A Page. No. of lines. Poet
(1) JiW ^ r ] j^b. T ^s) f 220 9
(2) >^ ^^ o ; j/t J ; ; ^t 94 4
(3) ^fcU/ja. 3c ,'-yJ /u ^ 147 7
414 9
201 6
(6) U ^Utc U/yUJ ^ 208 11
(7) oU &x^a^ ^.U; ^AAJ 243 9
(8) j ; icU *+*t ^(^ t j| 246 8
Jb) ^-*$ (, 251 9
28 22
(d) v^ljptjj 147 6
li J^Jja. ^ ^^J Uf
41 10
Dr. A. S. Tritton's edition o: these selections is
approved.
Unseen
Recommended :
jj by ^ytB 1st haH.
198 CALENDAR 1928-29
Paper II. Prose and Unseen.
Text :
(a) ^*l ^l (The biography of the Prophet.)
(6) Tajaribul Umam, Eclipse of the Abbaside Cali-
phate, volume I, pages 83 to 91. Imprisonment of Urn
Musa, the stewardess, and appointment of Ibn Furat
as Wezir, 310 to 311 Hijra, pages 202 to 216.
Unseen
Recommended :
^IjUca/LoUj by ^)A> 1st half.
Paper III. Grammar, Composition, and Translation
into the classical language.
Grammar
*Ajj*J|_ ; ),> by M. Izzat Ullah, published by Chashmai
Rahmat Book Agency, Ghazipur, U. P.
NOTE. Arabic words must be written in Arabic character.
(c) Persian.
Paper I. Poetry and Unseen.
Text :
(I 1 *) u^J^ c ^a 1st 15 G-hazals.
(2) L?;^ J U^ lsfc
(3) ,5^
(a)
(b)
(4) v> I J j (^ ^ t> tS .> Ua5
v
*A* jjtsw ^ot i ^ ,
A^^ y , yj.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OP 1930 199
(5)
(a) 1) ^f* jvH 5 ;oU L-A-.f ,jd^ t_>!y^' up to
t_x; J.o o^ ^ 5 u ^ )*>
(b) U>~)> ^l* ^* up tO 5 ^j* U*A*
The edition of the above, published by Anwarul Mata-
bay, Victoria Street, Lucknow, is approved.
Unseen
Recommended :
w-^xb-U ^Ijivi 21 41 Ghazals, published by Anwarul
Matabay, Victoria Street, Lucknow.
Paper II : Prose and Unseen.
Text :
2 - , 4 w;2w 1* ^t ^\^ from the beginning up to
*
Sot*; *jlfx> ^y-
- ; r T
3. from
vsjJb. U P to
5. X O ^j^\ Sir Syed Ahmad's edition, volume III, pages
291298, from aU^t* .^J^ m? up to ^^ ^^
no. 57.
6 - L .Atf\ li ^U Ji-i from Uj^Sjj ^^ *xi^^ ; M U P to t c U
The edition of the above, published by Anwarul
Matabay, Lucknow, is approved.
Unseen.
Recommended :
1. " Humayun Nama," by Gulbadan Begam.
2. ! 5| ^31^ from
200 CALENDAR 1928-29
Paper III. Grammar, Composition, and Translation
into the classical language.
Grammar : jj) 5 *J^s^ by Maulvi M. H. Nasiri,
Chapters I VII (Mission Press, Allahabad).
Stud3n s who offer Per Jan are required to have such
a knowledge of the etymology of the Arabic language as
will enable them to explain all Arabic words and phrases
which may occur in the t3xt-books and in the book * re-
commended for rapid read ng in Persian.
NOTE. Persian words must be written in Persian character.
(d) Latin.
Prescribed course :
I. T.xt CECERO : In Catilinim, I and II.
,, De Amicitia.
LIVY : Book XXII, Chapters 151.
VIRGIL : Aeneid, VI.
HORACE : Odes, Book II.
II. Grammar : Gildersleeve's Latin Grammar, or
Allen's Latin Grammar is recommended.
(e) Greek.
Prescribed course :
Text PLATO : Apology and Crito.
SOPHOCLES : Antigone.
(/) Hebrew.
Pr ascribed course :
I. Text SAMUEL, Boak I.
PSALMS, I LX.
II. Genesis is recommended for rapid reading 'in
connexion with Unse2n.
III. Grammar : Duff's Hebrew Grammar is re-
commended.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 201
PHYSIOLOGY, HYGIENE AND CHILD STUDY.
(For female candidates only.)
NOTE. The subject should be taught in such a way as to be practi-
cally beneficial to the students.
There will be two papers of three hours each : the
first paper will contain questions on (1) Activities of the
Modern Home, (2) Physiology and Hygiene, and (3)
Public Health and the second paper on Child-Study.
I. Activities of the Modern Home.
(1) To provide for the physical needs and develop-
ment of the members of the family.
(2) To provide for their mental, moral and social
needs.
(3) To "bo-operate with the community for the
better me3ting of these needs.
(4) To maintain the home on an economically sound
basis so as to make possible the meeting of
the above needs.
II. The study of Physiology and Hygiene, especially
from the point of view of the physical development of
the child.
A. The cells, the supporting tissues and their struc-
ture,
B. The skeleton ; bones ; joints ; the muscular sys-
tem. A special study of the conditions, making for the
normal development of these systems, such as posture,
etc.
C. Digestion and nutrition.
(1) The organs and processes of digestion.
(2) The food needs of the body.
(3) The classes of food-stuffs.
(4) The diet of the pre-school and school child.
(a) Constipation as a special dietary p.oblein of
school children.
202 CALENDAR 1928-29
(6) Mai nutrition, how to detect and remedy it.
(5) Effect of cooking on food ; method of cooking
with special emphasis on methods of cooking
food for children.
(6) Treatment of minor digestive ailments.
(7) Alcohol and drugs and their effect on the diges-
tive system.
D. The excretory system The skin, kidney, bowels.
Health habits of children in relation to the above.
E. The circulation of the blood The heart ; arte-
ries ; veins ; capillaries. The regulation of the blood
supply. The composition of the blood and its work in
the body.
The problem of the child with the weak heart.
F. Respiration.
(1) The lungs ; trachea ; larynx ; the composition
of pure and impure air, effect of breathing
on air.
(2) Formation of proper breathing habits in child-
ren. Posture ; special breathing exercises.
(3) Ventilation for the school and home.
O. The nervous system and sense organs.
(1) The nerves ; spinal cord ; brain.
(2) The structure of the eye ; ear ; nose.
1 (3) Health habits to promote the normal develop-
ment of these organs.
(4) Common defects of these organs how to
detect them.
(5) Treatment of minor ailments and accidents.
(6) The effect of alcohol and drugs on the nervous
system and sense organs.
H. Clothing.
(1) Selection of clothing, especially for children.
(2) Training of children as to care and cleanliness
of clothing.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1930 203
I. Occupation, exercise, recreation, rest, sleep.
Health habits to be established in children in the above.
J. Precautions against common diseases.
(1) Health habits which will protect the child from
common diseases.
(2) Health habits which will prevent the spread of
infectious diseases.
HI. Public Health.
A. Responsibility of the individual.
B. Disposal of refuse and waste water. Drainage.
Latrines.
C. Water supply, Food supply.
D. Prevention and arrest of infectious diseases.
E. Gardens. Play grounds. Open spaces.
F. Modern movement for the education of society
in the laws of health, e.g., " Child Welfare."
IV. Child-Study.
The study of children's development from the point
of view of physique, intelligence, and character, based as
far as possible on the observation of individuals and
classes.
An elementary study of the means by which children
acquire knowledge and skill, including such as the fol-
lowing :
The senses and sense training ; instincts and their
relation to children's interests ; forms of activity and
expression ; the function of play ; imitation and sugges-
tion ; habits and their formation, memory and imagina-
tion ; interest and attention ; the formation of clear and
connected ideas ; simple processes of reasoning ; growth
of the will.
204 CALENDAR 1928-29
The aims and methods of discipline ; training in res-
ponsibility, in the right use of freedom and in the social
duties.
Books of reference
*Elementary Physiology. W. B. Drummond.
2s. 2d. Publisher, Arnold.
* Elementary Hygiene for India. C. Beresford
Lahiri & Co., College Street, Calcutta.
Physiology and Hygiene. G. D. Cathcart. Macmil-
lan.
Elementary Physiology. Bhata and Suri. Long-
mans, Green & Co.
Child Mind, by Dumville.
Modern Psychology. Meredith (Constable).
Dawn of Mind. Drummond (Arnold).
Child-welfare, by Dr. S. K. Mukerji (Indian Press,
Allahabad.)
(The books marked* indicate the scope of the work
equired in Physiology and Hygiene.)
INTER. EXAMINATION IN COMMERCE OB 1930 205
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION IN COMMERCE
OF 1930.
The following are the subjects cf examination :
Compulsory subjects
1. English, including correspondence.
2. Book-keeping and Accountancy.
3. Business Methods and Elementary Economics.
Optional subjects
One of the following :
1. Commercial Geography
(a) General,
(b) India,
or
2. T^pe-writing,
cr
3. Shorthand.
The following papers will be set :
1. English, including correspondence. Two papers
of three hours each.
2. Book-keeping and Accountancy. Two papers of
three hours each.
3. Business Methods and Elementary Economics.
Two papers of three hours each : one paper on business
methods and one paper on Elementary Economics.
4. Commercial Geography. One general paper of
three hours. One paper on the Commercial Geography
of India, of three hours.
5. Type-writing. One paper of* three hours.
6. Shorthand. One paper of three hours.
*Theory paper Two hours.
Type-copying one hour.
206 CALENDAR 1928-29
The syllabus in each subject is as follows :
English, including correspondence.
First pape Commercial English.
This will consist of
(a) Draft of commercial and official correspondence.
(b) R3-writing in plain language of passages from
market reports (financial and commodity
markets), with explanations of selected
terms and phrases occurring in the passage,
(c) Precis- writing.
Book recommended (not prescribed)
Modem Commercial Correspondence, by John K.
Grebby, MacDonald & Evans, London.
Second Paper General English.
This will consist of
(a) Translation from indirect to direct speech and
vice versa.
(b) Re-writing of incorrect or badly constructed
sentences.
(c) Synthesis of simple sentences and the resolution
of complex sentences.
(d) An essay on a subject of general interest.
Books recommended (not prescribed)
A Course of practical English, by E. J. Belly. G.
Bell & Sons, Ltd.
How to summarise, expand or recast, by J. C. Nes-
field. (Macmillan & Co., Ltd.)
Modern English, by Brown and Walker. (Macmillan
A Co.).
Tale of Two Cities (abridged edition).
Vicar of Wakefield (abridged edition).
Book-keeping and Accountancy. The principles of
Double Entry Book-keeping and their application.
Books of original entry, Including Tabular Forms. The
INTER. EXAMINATION IN COMMERCE OF 1930 207
Ledger. Trial Balance. Manufacturing, Trading, and
Profit and Loss Accounts, with apportionments and
adjustments. Balance-sheets. Loose Leaf and Card In-
dex system of Book-keeping. Self-balancing Ledgers.
Single Entry Book-keeping.
In the treatment of the above the following matters
will be included : Cheques, Bills of Exchange and
Promissary Notes ; Goodwill; Classification of Assets ;
Bad Debts ; Depreciation, Reserves and Sinking Funds ;
Consignment, Joint Venture and Contract Accounts ;
Partnership and Company Accounts (including the
Double Account system), Capital and Revenue ; In-
vestment Accounts ; Accounts Current and Average Due
Dates.
Books recommended
Students' Elementary Book-keeping, by Arthur Field-
house. Simpkin-Marshall & Co., Ltd,, London, E. C. 4.
Advanced Accounts (third edition), by J. R. Batliboi.
S. Govind & Co., Bombay.
Advanced Accounts, by R. M. Carter. Published by
Pitman.
Business methods. 1. The general routine of a
Business House : Inward and Outward correspondence
(excluding drafting) ; Methods of rapid communication ;
Duplicating processes.
2. The significance of Trade, Commerce and Indus-
try ; Manufacturing and Distribution House. The buy-
ing and selling of goods. Mercantile Enquiry Agencies.
Importation and Exportation of goods. Documentary
Bills. Elementary Fire* and Marine Insurance as appli-
cable to this section. Use of Card Indexes.
3. The meaning of the principal commercial terms
occurring in connexion with the above and the pre-
paration of the chief documents involved, including
arithmetical calculations.
208 CALENDAB 1928-29
4. An elementary knowledge of the Law relating
to Contracts and Negotiable Instruments.
Contract Law. Agreements that are contracts ; essen-
tials of a good contract ; offer and acceptance ; genuine-
ness of consent ; contractual capacity of parties ; legality
of objects (agreements, unlawful, immoral and against
public policy void) ; performance and discharge of con-
tracts ; breach of contract ; damages.
Sale of goods. Sale of ascertained and unascertained
goods, passing of ownership, delivery, actual and cons-
tructive implied warranties, rights of unpaid seller.
Negotiable instruments. Making, drawing, accepting
and endorsing of Promissory notes, Bills of exchange
and cheques, holder in clue course, dishonour, noting
and protest, presentment for payment and acceptance
for honour.
Books recommended
Modern Business Training, by John K. Grebby.
Macdonald & Evans, London.
Elementary Economics. (The treatment of the sub-
ject should be very elementary and, as far as possible,
it should be illustrated by reference to Indian conditions.)
The subject-matter and scope of Economics, funda-
mental notions and simple definitions. Relation be-
tween wants, efforts and satisfaction.
Production. Factors of production : Land, Labour,
Capital and Organization.
Nature and Limitations of Land ; Division of Labour
and other factors of efficiency of labour ; Organization of
capital.
Laws of increasing, diminishing and constant returns.
Wants. Diminishing utility. Value its determina-
tion. Balancing of supply and demand.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN COMMEBCE OF 1930 209
Machinery of Exchange, Money and its functions.
-Qualities most desirable in currency legal tender
token money Gresham's Law Paper Currency Con-
vertible and Inconvertiable credit Credit instruments
Bills of Exchange Cheques.
Indian Currency. The Gold Exchange Standard
The Gold Standard Reserve, Council Bills Reverse
councils Indian Currency during and since the war
Indian Banks and the chief functions performed by them
the Imperial Bank, the Exchange Banks, and Indian
Joint Stock Banks.
Distribution . Rent interest wages profits ( w 1th
particular reference to Indian conditions).
Books recommended
PENSON : Economics of Every-day Life, Part I.
MORELAND : Introduction to Economics.
JEVONS : Money and Banking in India.
Introduction to Economics for Indian Students, by
W. H. Moreland. Macmillan & Co., St. Martin's Street,
London.
The Economics of Every-day Life, by Sir T. H. Pen-
son. Cambridge University Press,
Commercial Geography. A. General I. (a) Phy-
siographic Control of Commerce, Climate. Effect of
climate on vegetation. Vegetation regions. Distribu-
tion of important commodities as wheat, rice, cotton,
barley, flax, jute, etc,, and conditions under which they
are severally produced.
(6) Vegetation, its relation to industries,
(c) Trade routes connecting the most important
regions producing the different commodities as studied
above and the important markets for them. Ports.
Localisation of Industries.
II. A study of the various types of geographical
regions from the standpoint of commerce, particularly
210 CALENDAR 1928-29
of the West marginal type in Europe, the East marginal
type in Monsoonal Asia, and of continental types in N.
America.
(This would imply an intelligent study of the physical
features of the different regions, more particularly in
relation to their effects on climate, agricultural produc-
tion, and the easiest lines of inland communication,
whether by water, road or rail. Special attention should
be paid to the geographical distribution of industries.)
B. India. A study of the Commercial Geography
of India on the regional basis involving the study of
(a) Surface features and physical structure.
(6) Climate.
(c) Agricultural products.
(d) Irrigation.
(e) Distribution of minerals.
(/) Industries.
(g) Communications.
NOTE. In the study of regional types special attention may be devo-
ted to the parts of the British Empire occurring in these types.
Books recommended
Smaller Commercial Geography, by G. G. Chisholrn.
Longmans, Green & Co., 39, Paternoster Row, London.
TYPE-WRITING.
This will be the same as in Commerce for the High
School Examination of 1930, but of a more advanced
character the speed to be 30 words per minute.
The maximum marks and the time allotted to the
papers in this subject are as follows :
Marks Time
allowed.
Theory paper .. ... 30 2 hours.
m f (a) Passage and letter 50^).,
Type-copying ( j & > ^^ statement OQ j 1 hour '
Total .. 100 3 hours.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN COMMERCE OF 1930 2JL
Books recommended
1. Expert Typist, by J. A. Rosemond, Methodist
Publishing House, Lucknow, (or any other good Manual,
such as Smith's Pitman's, or Remington's).
2. A Type-writing Manual for Indian Students, by
E. M. Moffatt and V. A. Kshirsagar. Methodist Pub-
lishing House, Lucknow.
SHORTHAND.
1. Writing in Shorthand from a passage dictated at
the rate of 80 words a minute, for a period of ten minutes.
2. Writing in Shorthand from a business letter of
general commercial phraseology, dictated at the rate of
80 words a minute, for a period of five minutes.
3. Transcription of both the above.
Book recommended
Pitman's Instructor, by Pitman & Sons, London.
212 CALENDAR 1928-29
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION IN AGRICUL-
TURE OF 1930.
N. B. Preference for admission to this course will be given to candi-
dates who have studied (a) Chemistry and Physics or (6) Agriculture
for their admission test examination.
The following are the subjects of examination :
( 1. Elementary Farm Chemistry.
Croup I \ 2 E i ementary Farm Physics.
c 1. Botany.
Group II ( 2 Elementary Zoology.
,. L Farm Crops.
Group III } 2- Elementary Economics.
Agriculture A ) 3. Horticulture.
4. Climatology.
*
rl. Introduction to Animal Husban-
Group IV ^ 2. Elementary Irrigation and
Agriculture B | Drainage.
L3. Farm Machinery.
Group V English.
The following papers will be set :
1. Elementary Farm Chemistry
\ One paper of three hours.
Group I ^ 2. Elementary Farm Physics One
( paper of three hours.
1. Botany One paper of three
hours.
Group II ") 2. Elementary Zoology One paper
^- of three hours.
pL. Farm Crops and Elementary Eco-
I nomics One paper of three
Group III ^ hours.
Agriculture A j 2. Horticulture and Climatology-
One paper of three hours.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1930 213
There will be a practical examination of two hours in
Farm Crops and Horticulture only in this group.
f 1. Introduction to Animal Husban-
dry One paper of three hours.
Group IV, ^ 2, Elementary Irrigation and Drain-
Agriculture B | age and Farm Machinery
^ One paper of three hours.
There will be a practical examination of two hours' in
Introduction to Animal Husbandry and Farm Machinery
only in this group.
Group V English Two papers of three hours
each. The first paper will be on
composition and translation and
the second paper on general
topics of interest based on news-
paper reading, not of a political
character.
Theiv will be no separate practical examination in the
following, but practical question will be included in the
theoretical papers :
Farm Chemistry, Farm Physics, Botany, Zoology,
Economics, Climatology, and Irrigation and
Drainage.
The syllabus in each subject is as follows :
GROUP I.
ELEMENTARY FARM CHEMISTRY.
(1) Inorganic.
Common properties of matter.
Atoms, molecules, symbols, formulae, equations, and
chemical calculations.
The fundamental principles of Chemistry, the atomic
theory, laws of definite and multiple proportions. Avo-
gadro's hypothesis, Boyle's and Charles' laws, elements,
214 CALENDAR 1928-29
compounds, chemical combination and mechanical mix-
ture.
The sources, preparation and properties of the follow-
ing elements and their compounds which are of import-
ance in connection with Agriculture :
Hydrogen, oxygen and water. Temporary and per-
manent hardness of water, method for softening them.
Nitrogen, ammonia, oxides of nitrogen, nitric acid and
the nitrates. Nitrification.
The atmosphere. The physical and chemical pro-
perties of the air and its constituents.
Oxidation and reduction. Acids, bases and salts.
Halogens. Chlorine, hydrochloric acid and the chlo-
rides.
Sulphur. Sulphur dioxide and trioxide, sulphuric
acid, and the sulphates, sulphuretted hydrogen and the
sulphides.
Phosphorus. Phosphorus pentoxide, phosphoric acid
and the phosphates.
Arsenic and arsenious oxide.
Silicon, silica, and the silicates.
Carbon and carbonic acid and the carbonates.
The following metals and their chief compounds :
Sodium, potassium, ammonium, lead, copper, iron,
aluminium, calcium, manganese and magnesium.
(2) Organic.
Occiirrence, preparation, properties and uses of
Common saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbons,.
alcohols, fatty acids, fats, oils, soaps, carbo-hydrates and
organic nitrogenous compounds.
Laboratory work to consist of experiments, recorded
in not e-books based upon the problems developed from
\he syllabus.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1930 215
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. " Every -day Chemistry," Alfred Vivian Ameri-
can Book Co., New York. Price, about Rs. 5.
2. A foundation course in Chemistry for students of
Agriculture and Technology, by J. W. Dodgson and J. A.
Murray. Longmans, Green & Co., Calcutta. Price,
about Rs. 3.
3. Introduction to the Study of Inorganic Chemistry,
by W. A. Miller. Longmans, Green & Co., Calcutta.
Price, about Rs. 4.
4. Agricultural Chemistry, by R. H. Adic and T. W.
Wood, Vol. 1. Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.,
Ltd., Paternoster House, Charing Cross Road, London.
Price, about Rs. 4.
5. Organic Chemistry, by Perkin and Kippling.
W. R. Chambers, Ltd., London. Price, about Rs. 7.
0. Elementary Agricultural Chemistry, by H. Ingle,
Charles, Griffin & Co., Ltd., London. Price, about Rs. 4.
ELEMENTARY FARM PHYSICS.
1. Units and measurements, metric system, length,
area and volume. The balance and methods of weighing.
Use of screw gauge and callipers. Mass and density.
2. Gravitation ; falling bodies.
3. Liquids and gases. Forces due to weight of a
liquid. Forces transmitted by a liquid, Archimedes'
principle. Properties of gases. Expansibility and com-
pressibility of gases. Atmospheric density and baro-
meters. Applications of air pressure ; pumps.
4. Heat. Effect of heat on solids, liquids and gases.
Change of volume with temperature. Thermometers.
Transference of heat.
5. Light ; rectilinear propagation of light. Shadows.
Lenses. Images. Refraction. Colour.
216 CALENDAB 1928-29
6. Magnetism, magnetic forces and magnets. Com-
pass.
7. Electricity. Production of electricity by friction.
Properties of a charged body. Insulators. Conductors.
Electroscopes. Batteries. Magnetic effect of currents.
Electro-magnetic induction.
Laboratory w >- k to consist of experiments, recorded
in note-books, based upon the problems, developed from
the syllabus
The following book is suggested for reference :
A High School Course in Physics, by F. R. Gorton.
D. Appleton & Co., New York. Price, about Rs. 5.
SOILS (SOIL PHYSICS).
The origin of soils and processes of their formation,
The nature of soil constituents, sand, clay, chalk and
humus.
The classification of soils according to their constitu-
ents and origin.
Soil properties.
Manures (a) Organic manures ; (b) Chemical fertili-
zers.
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. The Soil, by A. D. Hall, John Murray, London.
2. The Physical Properties of Soils., by A. G.
McCall. Orange Judd & Co., New York. Price, about
Rs. 2-12.
3. First Principles of Soil Fertility, by Alfred
Vivian. Orange Judd & Co., New York, or Christian
Book and Tract Society, Allahabad. Price, Rs. 2-7.
4. Soils, their Properties and Management, Lyon,
Fippin and Buckman, Macmillan & Co., New York.
Price, Rs. 10.
5. Soils and Fertilizers, Harry Snyder, Macmillan
& Co., New York.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1930 217
GROUP II.
BOTANY.
1st year.
Fundamental Principles of Biology (Introductory).
General morphology (study in detail) :
Boot and its modification.
Stem and its modification.
Leaves arrangement of leaves, modification of
leaves.
Flower inflorescence, floral leaves, floral diagram.
Pollination floral adaptations.
Fruits classification and dispersal.
Life -history of maize and pea.
Internal anatomy. Study of cell ; elementary histo-
logy of root ; stem, leaf.
2nd year.
Physiology (study in outline) :
Chemical composition of the plant.
Absorption of nutrient substances.
Assimilation of food materials.
Transpiration.
Growth.
Reproduction (including germination of seed.)
Classification Principles of classification.
Study of Bacillus, Mucor, Spirogyra.
Fern and the following orders :
Leguminaceae (Papillionaceae).
Cruciferae.
Malvaceae.
Solanaceae.
Cucurbitaceae.
Graminaceae.
Weeds any plant out of place Common weed 5 of
cultivation Method of dispersal and perenation relation
218 CALENDAR 1928-29
to weed control Weeds as related to different soil
conditions of rice land of dry grain land Weeds as
indicators of soil conditions.
The work should be such that the students are en-
abled to make their own observations and deductions.
Field excursions under proper supervision should be
carried on regularly, special attention being given to
field crops.
Students will be required to submit at the final exam-
ination notes of field observations and work in the labora-
tory certified by the lecturer.
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. Text-book of Botany (Indian edition), Low-
son and Sohni. London University Tutorial Press, or
Thacker, Spink & Co.
2. Practical Botany, Cavers. London Univer-
sity Tutorial Press, or Thacker, Spink & Co.
3. Manual of Botany for Indian Schools, Govern-
ment Press, Madras.
4. Agricultural Botany, Percival Duckworth &
Co., 3, Henrietta St., Covent Garden, London, W. C.,
or Thacker, Spink & Co.
ELEMENTARY ZOOLOGY.
Distinctive properties of protoplasm, nutrition, growth,
respiration, secretion, excretion, and reproduction.
The cell its methods of division and differentia-
tion.
Practical acquaintance of the following :
Amoeba, paramoecium, earthworm, cockroach, frog,
rabbit (or other small mammal).
Each candidate will be required to submit notes of
work in the laboratory properly certified by the lecturer.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1930 219
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. Practical Zoology, Parker and Parker. Mac-
millan & Co.
2. A Text-book of Zoology, Wells and Davis.
London University Tutorial Press, or Thacker, Spink
&Co.
3. Agricultural Zoology, Theobald. Wm. Black-
wood & Sons, Edinburgh.
GROUP III.
AGRICULTURE -A.
FARM CROPS.
Classification, origin and distribution of farm crops.
Early culture of plants ; number of cultivated plants,
-classification by use, important botanical groups, most
important crops, factors affecting culture of crops.
Cropping systems : Productiveness, effects of crop-
ping, single system, alternating, rotation, results and
effects of different systems.
Juar : Origin, classification, varieties, growth and
development, effect of climate, soils for juar and potatoes,
importance of adaptation, fertilization, selection, improve-
ment, tests, preparation of land, tillage, harvesting and
utilizing, insects and diseases, seed-judging.
Crops to be studied :
(1) Cereals. Wheat, millets, etc.
(2) Fibres. Cotton, flax, etc.
(3) Oil-seeds. Castor, linseed, etc.
(4) Roots. Carrots, turnips, etc.
(5) Legumes. Peas, groundnuts, etc.
(6) Fodder. Juar, lucern, etc.
(7) Miscellaneous. Tobacco, tea, etc.
220 CALENDAR 1928-29
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. Agricultural Note-book of Facts and Figures for
the United Provinces, to be published shortly by the
Department of Agriculture, United Provinces.
2. The Complete Farmer, by Premirose MacCom-
niell. Cassell & Co., London.
ELEMENTARY ECONOMICS.
Introduction. What is Economics ? Why is one
nation richer than another ? Why is one man richer than
another ? What is wealth ? How does it differ from
income ? The whole course is an answer to these ques-
tions.
Production. What does it cost to produce wheat on
a village farm in the United Provinces ? Cost of labour,
ploughing, sowing, weeding, reaping, threshing, etc. Pur-
chase and depreciation. Interest on all expenses till the
crop is sold. Rent of the land and transportation to the
bazaar. Cost of ,-upervision.
Examine similarly the cost of producing and market-
ing milk and other common necessities.
Exchange. Has it paid to produce wheat and milk at
the above cost ? What are the present prices of wheat,
milk, etc., in the United Provinces for different qualities
at different seasons and for the last five years ? What
causes these differences and changes ? Laws of supply
and demand and causes for variation. Relation of prices
to cost of production over a period of years.
Consumption. Why do we demand wheat, cotton,
milk, pottery, tools ? Wants and their varying import-
ance. Necessities, comforts, luxuries. Division of in-
come between various wants. Budgets of students and
villagers. Do we get equal satisfaction from equal ex-
penditure ? How do we change our purchase when prices
fall and when our incomes increase ?
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1930 221
Difference in the cost of production and distribution.
Why do rents differ ? Kinds of land. Advantages of
fertility and situation.
Why do rates of interest differ ? Short and long
loans ; risks and management of loans. Co-operative
credit. Relation of the rate of interest to the supply of
capital. Causes of saving.
Why do wages differ. Grades of labour. Efficiency
of labour. Real and nominal wages. Cost of living and
the standard of living. Relation of wages to the supply
of labour. Relation of birth-rates and death-rates to
income.
Organization and management. In what different ways
might wheat be produced ? Does the method depend
upon situation ? Wages ? The rate of interest ? Edu-
cation ? Quality of the product ? How is the method
actually determined ? By whom ?
Carry out this reasoning for milk and other common
necessities.
In what cases is it most profitable to use a railway, a
bicycle and one's feet ? Compare the uses of hand-
writing, typewriting and printing press. Hand-sewing
and the sewing machine. Why do primitive methods
continue in use along with more advanced ones ?
Money, banking and foreign exchange, barter, uses
of money, reasons for minting and for free coinage, paper
money and cheques. The work of banks and their eco-
nomic importance. India's foreign trade and its advan-
tages.
Taxation. The necessity for taxation. The income-
tax, custom duties, land revenue and excise. Who-
bea r s these taxes ? Reasons for progressive taxation.
Imperial and local taxation.
222 CALENDAR 1928-29
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. Elements of Economics, Vol. I, by Alfred Mar-
shall. Macmillan & Co., London.
2. An Introduction to Economics for Indian stu-
dents, by Moreland.
HORTICULTURE.
Vegetable Gardening.
The place of vegetable on the farm as a main crop
as a side issue yield per acre expense relation to
other farm operations.
Food value of vegetables and fruit as substitute for
grains and meat carbohydrates contained as addition
to grains and meats acids, minerals and vitamines
different typ3S of food and their functions roughage and
variety vegetables necessary in balanced ration. Types
of vegetables annuals and perennials root, tuber, bulb,
foliage and fruit vegetables.
General production seed, its acquisition, growing
>seed, seed selection, seed preservation, the seed bed, its
n?cessity, preparation and treatment preparation of
land, clearing, levelling, grading, manuring, fencing,
division into plots, irrigation systems, paths, planting, in
field or beds, transplanting, thinning, weeding, cultivation,
irrigation, harvesting, marketing.
Special crops potato, tomato, brinjal, peppers, the
legumes, beets, turnips, carrots, radishes, lettuce, celery,
weet potato, yam, kohl crops, cucurbits, okra, spinach,
sag, maize, onion, leek, garlic, asparagus, globe and Jeru-
salem artichokes.
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. " Firminger's Manual of Gardening for India/'
W. Burns. Thacker, Spink & Co., Price, Rs. 10.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1930 223
2. Gollan's Indian Vegetable Garden Normal GilU
Thacker, Spink & Co.
or
Fruit Growing.
Opportunities. Demand for fruit ; wealth of varieties
suitability of climate ; long season ; present small produc-
tion ; present inferior quality ; possibilities in quality ;
production of superior quality.
Choice of enterprise ; selection of land ; favourable
climate ; fertile soil, slope for irrigation, drainage and
prevention of erosion, size and shape ; available labour,
available market, roads and railroads in fruit-growing
district ; spirit of people ; condition for family life ; reli-
gious school, medical aid ; water supply ; selection of
fruits to be grown ; advantages of specialization and
generalization ; suitability to region ; experience of grow-
er ; demand of market ; ripening season.
Preparation of land ; levelling and grading ; locating
farm buildings ; manuring ; fencing ; irrigation system.
Planting orchard ; propagation of trees ; raising seed-
lings ; budding and grafting stock and scions ; planting
plan ; square hexagonal and quincunx system ; distance
apart ; locating positions in field ; setting trees ; protec-
tion of small trees.
Cultivation ; clean vs. sod ; cover crops in rains ;
ploughing ; harrowing ; interculture when trees are-
small.
Irrigation ; need ; sources of water ; pumps and wells ;
distributing system ; canals and bunds ; pipe ; applica-
tion to soil ; principles ; effect of mulch ; flooding ; furrow
irrigation ; methods ; amounts ; frequency.
Measures and fertilizers ; elements used by plants ^
nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium ; work of fertilizers \,
types used in orchards ; methods of application.
224 CALENDAR 1928-29
Pruning ; kinds ; need ; object ; instruments ; time ;
how to make cuts desirable shape ; pruning nursery
stock ; young trees ; mature trees ; rejuvenation ; care of
wounds ; how wounds heal ; dressing ; root pruning ;
object ; methods.
Thinning ; definition ; advantages ; methods ; extent ;
time.
Insect and disease control ; damage done ; type of
insect ; their control ; types of diseases ; their control ;
spraying ; dusting ; fumigation ; natural enemies ; resis-
tant varieties and stocks.
Harvesting ; time ; picking practices ; ladders ; shears ;
receptacle ; handling in field ; sorting ; grading ; packing.
Marketing ; contracting ; retailing ; shipping ; diffi-
culties ; opportunities for co-operation.
Storage ; desirability ; possibility ; conditions ; cold
storage.
Preservation and products ; tinning jams and jellies ;
drying ; great opportunity ; extends market ; extends
season ; makes demands more uniform ; papain from
papayas.
Special fruits ; citrus ; mango ; guava ; custard apple ;
papaya ; date ; loquat ; litchi ; pomegranate ; mangostecn ;
jack-fruit ; banana ; cocoanut ; pineapples ; temperate
fruits ; new fruits (history, geography, description, value
and culture of each of the common fruits).
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. Manual of Tropical and Sub-tropical Fruits,
Popenoe. Macmillan & Co., New York. Price, Rs. 15.
2. Firminger's Manual of Gardening for India,
W. Burns. Thacker; Spink & Co. Price, Rs. 10.
3. Modern Fruit Growing, by Seabrook. W. R,
Seabrook & Sons, Ltd., The Nurseries, Chelmsford.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1930 225
CLIMATOLOGY.
Instruments used in Indian observations, the method
of interpreting the observations, weather in India ; effects
of weather changes on crops ; distribution of crops and
pest according to climates.
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. Agricultural Meteorology, by Warren Smith.
Macmillan & Co., New York.
2. Forecasting Weather, by W. A. Shaw. Con-
stable & Co., London.
GROUP IV.
AGRICULTURE B.
INTRODUCTION TO ANIMAL HUSBANDRY.
PART 1. Judging, Placing with reasons market
classes of dairy cattle, draft cattle and poultry, including
trips to farms of prominent live-stock breeders.
PART 2. Feeds, feeding and management. Handling
of feeding stuffs and compounding rations. The care
and handling of all classes of live-stock mentioned in
Part 1 above, including housing. The marketing of their
products.
PART 3. Elementary principles of veterinary science.
External and internal anatomy of the cow and domestic
fowl.
Physiology of (1) Digestion, (2) Milk secretion, (3)
Reproduction, (4) Muscular system.
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. Feeding of Crops and Stock, by A. D. Hall.
2. The Complete Farmer, by Premirose McCom-
mell.
3. Judging Live-stock, John A. Craig. Kenyon
Printing Co., Des Moines, Iowa. Price, Rs. 7.
226 CALENDAR 1928-29
4. Feeds and Feeding, (abridged edition), by
Henry and Morrison. Publishers, Henry and Morrison,
Madison, Wiscon. Price, Rs. 10.
ELEMENTARY IRRIGATION AND DRAINAGE.
/. Irrigation.
1. Hydraulic terminology ; definition of terms to be
used.
2. Sources of water for irrigation ; canals for flow irri-
gation, lift irrigation, well irrigation.
Tanks Advantages and limitations of tanks. Design
of tanks, with regard to capacity when full ; effect of
shape and depth on evaporation loss, average annual
evaporation loss from open bodies of water ; effect of tanks
on mosquito control.
Limiting factors and difficulties in pumping from a
river.
3. Elementary types of pumps and water-lifts, bul-
locks and handpower. Water-supply for use in the
home.
4. Distribution systems
Flow systems, pacca and kachcha channels.
//. Drainage.
1. Conditions making drainage necessary or profit-
able in India ; types of soils and situations which usually
require drainage. Possible relations between irrigation
and drainage.
2. Types of drains, open ditches, " blind stone "
drains, drainage by " mole-hole machine," tile drains ;
adaptability to different uses ; principles governing install-
ation as proper levels ; depth to be laid, types of
outlet.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1930 227
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. Agriculture and Irrigation in continental and
tropical climates, K. D. Doyle. Thacker, Spink & Co.
Price, Rs. 16-8.
2. Irrigation and Drainage, by King. Mount
Pleasant Press, Harrisburg, Pa.
FARM MACHINERY.
Course to treat of the common machines used for the
following purposes :
1. Preparation of soil
Plough, harrow, roller, drag.
2. Seeding
Various types of seeders from deshi plough
with bamboo attached to large grain drills.
3. Weeding and cultivation
Hand-tools such as khurpee, phawra, hoe, etc.,
cultivators adapted to animal draft.
4. Harvesting methods and machines
Hand and power.
5. Threshing machinery, silage-cutter and other ma-
chines for preparing crops for use.
This term's work to treat of one type of internal com-
bustion oil engine of any well-known make.
Carpentry or workshop practice in wood during the
1st year.
Smith or workshop practice in iron during the 2nd
year.
Application of triangle of forces. Equilibrium of
parallel forces. Principle of moments.
Work and energy. Friction. Machines ; principles
of the pulley lever, incline plane, screw and wedge.
The following book? arz suggested for reference :
1. Farm Mechanics, by Crawshaw and Lehman.
Manual Arts Press, Peoria, Illinois, U. S. A.
15
228 CALENDAR 1928-29
2. Farm Machinery and Farm Motors, Davidson.
Thacker, Spink & Co. Price, Rs. 11-8.
ELEMENTARY SURVEYING.
1st year.
The value of mensuration ; drawing to scale ; preli-
minary considerations when commencing a survey.
Knowledge of apparatus used in ordinary survey not
including levels, Surveyors' field-book, ability to enter
up neatly and correctly from data collected in the field.
Errors in measurement. Each student should know the
length of his average pace. The length of a chain and a
tape in use should be marked on the floor of one of the
College verandahs and variations during different times
of the year in length recorded.
Measurement of fields not requiring use of offsets.
Measurement and entry in field-book of offsets. Plotting
from field-book with offset scale. How to pole out a line
when surveying over hilly ground. The survey by plain
ohain traversing of a small plot such as the lawn in front
of the College.
2nd year.
The survey of a small plot such as the lawn in front
of the College, including roads and hedges surrounding it.
Plotting of the survey to a definite scale.
Ability to traverse with chain and prismatic compass.
Reduction of bearings.
Levelling Ability to set up and use the builders and
contractors-evel, the Dumpy-level with staff, and to
make entries in the level-book. How to reduce levels
How to plot levels on a survey map.
A level survey of a definite piece o ground to be
dore and a map prepared of the same shuxring contour
lires.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1930 229
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. Agricultural Surveyors and Estate Agents'
Hand-book of Practical Rules, Formulae, Tables and
Data, T. Bright. Thacker, Spink & Co. Price, Rs.
7-8.
2. Practical Surveying and field work, by Salmon
Charles Griffin & Co., London,
Sources of power for pumping.
A comparison of engines, including steam, electricity
<and oil engines with each other and with oxen as to capa-
city, cost of installation, depreciation and repair, num-
ber of men required and cost per unit of water or land.
The comparison to be limited to information not neces-
sitating the detailed study of engines.
Distribution systems :
Pipe systems with valve outlets and pressure, and
pip 3 with stand-pipe outlets for surface irriga-
tion. Sub-surface irrigation. Overhead irriga-
tion.
GROUP V.
GENERAL ENGLISH.
The following book are suggested for reference :
1. Men and Books, R. L. Stevenson.
2. The Little Minister, J. M. Barrie.
3. Daddy Long Legs, Jean Webster.
230 CALENDAR 1928-29
Maximum and Minimum marks assigned to the various
subjects for the examinations of 1931.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION.
Maximum marks . . 150 in English and 100 in
every other subject.
Minimum pass marks 50 in English" and 33 in every
other subject.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION.
Maximum marks . . 150 in English and 100 in
every other subject.
Minimum pass marks 50 in English and 33 in every
other subject.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION IN COMMERCE.
Maximum marks . . 100 in each subject.
Minimum pass marks 33 ditto.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE.
Maximum marks . . 100 in groups 1 and II each,.
150 in group III and 50 in
groups IV and V each.
Minimum pass marks 33 per cent, in each group.
DISTINCTION.
Minimum marks re- 75 per cent, of the aggregate
quired. marks in a subject.
DIVISION.
Minimum pass marks required 60 per cent, in the aggre-
gate for division 1.
Minimum pass marks required 45 per cent, in the aggre-
gate for division II.
Minimum pass marks required 33 per cent, in the aggre-
gate for division III.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 231
COURSES OF STUDY.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OP 1931.
A. COMPULSOKY SUBJECTS.
I. ENGLISH.
Three papers, each of three hours, will be set (1) on
the prescribed course in Prose and Poetry with questions
on Grammar and Idiom, (2) on Unseen Passages with
questions on Grammar and Idiom ; (3) passages in a
Modern Indian Language for translation into English
and a simple narrative or descriptive composition in
English. There will be no oral test, but there will be an
examination in English Dictation at each centre.
Text-books prescribed :
Group A.
1. Macmillarfs English Prose Selections.
2. Modern English Prose, by Brown (Macmillan).
3. Jones' English Prose Selections (Indian Press,
Limited, Allahabad.) Revised edition, com-
prising the following extracts :
(1) Robinson Crusoe explores the Island, by
Daniel Defoe.
(2) Robinson Crusoe learns Farming and Pottery,
by Daniel Defoe.
(3) Crusoe learns Boat Building and Tailoring,
by Daniel Defoe.
(4) An Adventure with a Bear, by Charles Reade.
(5) The Stage Coach, by Washington Irving.
(6) Oliver Goldsmith, by Lord Macaulay.
(7) Lost in the Desert, by Alexander Kinglake.
(8) The Merchant of Venice, by Charles Lamb.
232 CALENDAR 1928-29
(9) The Miraculous Pitcher, by Nathaniel Haw-
thorne.
(10) An Incident in the Life of Sir Walter Raleigh r
by Sir Walter Scott.
(11) The Keys of Calais, by Charlotte M. Yonge.
(12) The Golden Touch, by Nathaniel Hawthorne.
(13) Joan of Arc, by Charles Dickens.
(14) The Little Match Girl, by Hans Anderson.
(15) The Death of Nelson, by Southey.
(16) The Life of Buddha, by Max Muller.
Group J3.
1. Paths of Peace, Book II, by Mrs. Laurence Bin-
yon (Oxford University Press).
2. The Story of the Buddha, by E. Holland
(Harrap).
3. Heroes of Exploration (Ker and Cleaver ) r
(Blackie & Sons, Limited).
Group C.
1. Indian Schools Book of Verse, Part II, from
which the following poems are prescribed :
The Slave's Dream ; The Plate of Gold ;
The Honest Man ; Incident of the French
Camp ; The Old Order Changeth ; My
Heart Leaps Up ; Under the Greenwood
Tree; Blow, Blow, Thou Winter Wind;
The Burial of Sir John Moore ; Abou Ben
Adhem ; The Brook ; Ring Out Wild Bells.
2. High School Poetry (Indian Press, Limited,
Allahabad), the whole book omitting The
Tiger, The Isles of Greece, and Horatius,
Stanzas 120, 27, 28, 33, 34, 3643, 45 y
46, 54 57, 60 64.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 233
3. School Favourites, from which the following
poems are prescribed : Lochinvar ; The
Poet's Song ; The Honest Man ; The Plate
of Gold ; The Deserted Village ; To a
Waterfowl ; To the Cuckoo, by Words-
worth ; The Daffodils, by Wordsworth ;
Alexander Selkirk ; A Psalm of Life ; Ring
Out Wild Bells ; The Spacious Firmament.
N.B. The above text-books are arranged in three groups A, R and C.
Group A contains books of prose selections, Group B books of inspirational
stories, and Group C books of poetry. Every school must select for study one
book only from each of the above groups.
Books recommended for rapid reading and indicating
the standard of the unseen passages to be set in the
second paper :
1. Scott's Ivanhoe (abridged), by P. Wren (Oxford
University Press), Re. 1.
2. Scott's Ivanhoe (Victory Series).
3. Tanglewood Tales, by N. Hawthorne (Longmans,
Green & Co.), Is.
4. Shakespeare in Prose (Blackie).
5. Stories from Arabian Nights (Teaching of English
Series), (Nelson).
6. Westward Ho (Victory Series).
7. Jungle Book, Kipling (Macmillan).
8. A Persian Hero, by Gandy (Macmillan & Co.),
Is.
9. The Exploits of Brigadier Gerard (Oxford Uni-
versity Press).
10. Stories from Tagore (Macmillan & Co.).
11. The Story of Don Quixote (Blackie & Sons).
12. Simple Chapters of English Life (R. S. Gulab
Singh & Sons, Lahore).
13. Stories from Shakespeare, Wyatt (Oxford Univer-
sity Press).
234 CALENDAR 1928-29
14. The Children's Bible (Cambridge University
Press).
15. Pioneers of Invention (George G. Harrap & Co.).
16. Men of Science (George G. Harrap & Co,).
17. The Story of the Ramayana (Tndian Press
School Classics),
18. The Story of the Mahabharata (Ind'an Press
School Classics).
19. Teachers of India, by Kirtcaid (Oxford Univer-
sity Press).
20. Masterman Ready (Longmans, Green & Co.)
21. Legends from Greece and Rome (Victory Series).
22. Robinson Crusoe (Victory Series).
23. Tales from Indian History, by A. S. Roe (Macm-
millan).
24. The Golden Company (Oxford University Press).
25. Lamb's Tales from Shakespeare (Indian Press
School Classics).
II. MATHEMATICS,
There will be two papers, each of three hours one
in Arithmetic and Algebra and the other in Geometry
and Mensuration.
SYLLABUS.
(1) Arithmetic and Algebra.
The four simple rules ; British and Metric systems of
measurement ; Factors ; Prime numbers ; H. C. F. and
L. C. M. ; Decimal fractions including conversion of a
recurring decimal to a vulgar fraction and conversely ;
Square Root ; Ratio and Proportion ; Average ; Per-
centage ; Profit and Loss ; Interest, simple and com-
pound ; Present Worth and Discount ; Simple equations
of one or more unknown quantities ; Quadratic equa-
tions of one unknown quantity ; Graphs of statistics ;
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 235
Oraphs of straight lines and graphical solution of linear
simultaneous equations ; Problems.
N\B. Candidates will be provided with squared paper, if necessary.
(2) Geometry and Mensuration.
The course includes theoretical, practical and numer-
ical Geometry, and every candidate will be expected to
answer questions in both branches of the subject. The
questions on practical Geometry will be set on the con-
structions contained in the annexed Schedule A, to-
gether with easy extensions of them. All figures should
be drawn accurately, for which purpose every candidate
should provide himself with a graduated scale, a pair of
set squares, a protractor, a compass and a hard pencil.
The questions on theoretical Geometry will consist of
theorems and problems contained in the annexed
Schedules A and B, together with easy extensions and
deductions with numerical illustrations. Any proof of
a proposition will be accepted which appears to the
examiners to form part of a systematic treatment of the
subject ; the order in which the theorems are stated in
Schedule B is not imposed as the sequence of their treat-
ment. In the proof of the theorems hypothetical con-
structions will be permitted.
N.B. Candidates will be provided with squared paper if necessary.
SCHEDULE A.
Bisection of angles and of straight lines.
Construction of perpendiculars to straight lines.
Construction of an angle equal to a given angle.
Construction of parallels to a given straight line.
Simple cases of the construction from sufficient data
of triangles and quadrilaterals.
Division of straight lines into a given number of
<?qual parts.
236 CALENDAR 1928-29
Construction of a triangle equal in area to a given
polygon.
Construction of tangents to a circle and of common
tangents to two circles.
Simple cases of the construction of circles from suffi-
cient data.
Construction of a rectangle equal to a given polygon.
Construction of a rectangle on a given base equal in
area to a given rectangle.
Construction of a square equal to a given rectangle.
Construction of a rectangle of given area the sum or
difference of whose sides is given. (These construc-
tions should be based on the propositions on the geometry
of the circle.)
Construction of a fourth proportional to three given
straight lines and a mean proportional to two given
straight lines (as corollaries to previous constructions of
rectangles).
Construction of regular figures of 3, 4, 6 or 8 sides in
or about a given circle.
Mensuration of triangles and simple rectilineal
figures ; finding their area by means of field-book ; appli-
cation of formulae for length of circumference and for
area of a circle in terms of its radius.
SCHEDULE B.
Angles at a point.
If a straight line stands on another straight line, the
sum of the two angles so formed is equal to two right-
angles ; and the converse.
If two straight lines intersect, the vertically opposite
angles are equal.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 237
Parallel straight lines.
When a straight line cuts two other straight lines, if
(i) a pair of alternate angles are equal, or
(ii) a pair of corresponding angles are equal, or
(iii) a pair of interior angles on the same side of the
cutting line are together 'equal to two right-
angles, then the two straight lines are parallel ;
and the converse.
Straight lines which are parallel to the same straight
line are parallel to one another.
Triangle and rectilineal figures.
The sum of the angles of a triangle is equal to two-
right- angles.
If the sides of a convex polygon are produced in order,
the sum of the angles so formed is equal to four right-
angles.
If two triangles have two sides of the one equal to two-
sides of the other, each to each, and also the angles con-
tained by these sides equal, the triangles are congruent.
If two triangles have two angles of the one equal to
two angles of the other, each to each, and also one side
of the one equal te the corresponding side of the other,
the triangles are congruent.
If two sides of a triangle are equal, the angles opposite
to these sides are equal ; and the converse.
If two triangles have the three sides of the one equal
to the three sides of the other, each to each, the triangles,
are congruent.
If two right-angled triangles have their hypothenuses.
equal and one side of the one equal to one side of the
other, the triangles are congruent.
If two sides of a triangle are unequal, the greater side*
has the greater angle opposite to it, and the converse.
238 CALENDAR 1928-29
Of all the straight lines that can be drawn to a given
straight line from a given point outside it, the perpen-
dicular is the shortest.
The opposite sides and angles of a parallelogram are
equal, each diagonal bisects the parallelogram and the
diagonals bisect one another.
If there are three or more parallel straight lines and
the intercepts made by them on any straight line that
cuts them are equal, then the corresponding intercepts
qn any other straight line that cuts them are also equal.
Areas.
Parallelograms on the same or equal bases and of the
same altitude are equal in area.
Triangles on the same or equal bases and of the same
altitude are equal in area.
Equal triangles on the same or equal bases are of the
same altitude.
Illustrations and explanations of the geometrical
theorems corresponding to the following algebraical
identities :
k (a + b + c + . . ) = ka + kb -f kc +
(a + b)*=a* + 2ab + 6 2 .
(a b) 2 =a" 2a6+-6 2 .
a- 6 2 =--(a+6)(a 6).
The square on a side of a triangle is greater than,
equal to, or less than the sum of the squares on the other
two sides according as the angle contained by these sides
is obtuse, right or acute. The difference in the case of
inequality is twice the rectangle contained by one of the
two sides and the projection on it of the other.
In any triangle the sum of the squares on two sides is
equal to twice the square on half the base together with
twice the square on the median which bisects the base.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 239
Loci.
The locus of a point which is equidistant from two
fixed points is the perpendicular bisector of the straight
line joining the two fixed points.
The locus of a point which is equidistant from two
intersecting straight lines consists of the pair of straight
lines which bisect the angles between the two given
lines.
The circle.
A straight line drawn from the centre of a circle to
bisect a chord which is not the diameter is at right- angles,
to the chord ; conversely, the perpendicular to a chord
from the centre bisects the chord.
There is one circle and one only which passes
* hrough three given points not in a straight line.
In equal circles (or in the same circle), (i) if two arcs
subtend equal angles at the centres, they are equal ; (ii)
conversely if two arcs are equal, they subtend equal
angles at the centre.
In equal circles (or in the same circle), (i) if two chords
are equal, they cut off equal arcs ; (ii) conversely, if two
arcs are equal, the chords of the arcs are equal.
Equal chords in a circle are equidistant from the
centre ; and the converse.
The tangents at any point of a circle and the radium
through the point are perpendicular to one another.
If two circles touch, the point of contact lies on the
straight line through the centres.
The angle which an arc of a circle subtends at the
centre is double that which it subtends at any point on
the remaining part of the circumference.
Angles in the same segment of a circle are equal, and
if the line joining two points subtends equal angles at
two other points on the same sides of it, the four points-
lie on a circle. .
240 CALENDAR 1928-29
The angle in a semi-circle is a right-angle, the angle
in a segment greater than a semi-circle is less than a right-
angle, and the angle in a segment less than a semi-circle
is greater than a right-angle.
The opposite angles of any quadrilateral inscribed in
a circle are supplementary ; and the converse.
If a straight line touch a circle and from the point of
contact a chord be drawn, the angles which this chord
makes with the tangent are equal to the angles in the
alternate segments.
If two chords of a circle intersect either inside or
outside the circle, the rectangle contained by the parts
of the one is equal to the rectangle contained by the
parts of the other.
The following books are suggested :
For Algebra
1. Boss : Elementary Algebra, Part I (Longmans,
Green & Co.).
2. BAKER AND BOURNE : Elementary Algebra.
Part I (G. Bell & Sons).
3. H. S. HALL : School Algebra, Parts I and II
(Macmillan & Co.),
In Geometry
1. HALL AND STEVENS : A Shorter School Geometry,
Parts I and II (Macmillan & Co.).
2, PARKINSON AND PRESSLAND : A Primer of Geo-
metry (Clarendon Press, Oxford) (Indian
edition). Re. 1-12.
3. PIBRPOINT'S Elements of Geometrv.
III. HISTORY.
There will be two papers, each of three hours :
(i) Indian History and Allied Geography, and
4ii) English History and Allied Geography.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 241
Indian History.
Indian History in outline from the earliest Unit to the
present day.
The following syllabus is suggested :
I. The influence of Geography on Indian History.
II. Ancient India
A. Vedic period till 600 B.C.
1. The Dravidians.
2. The Aryan immigration.
3. Character of culture
(a) Vedic religion outline.
(b) Vedic society caste, woman.
(c) Literature Veda (Brahman, Upanishad,
Smriti).
B. Buddhist period, 600180 B.C.
1 . Life and teaching of Buddha.
2. Mauryas, Asoka.
3. Culture
(a) Dharma.
(b) Government.
C. Hindu period, 180 B.C. 650 A.D.
1. Sungas, Kanvas, Andhras.
2. Yuechis, Kushanas, Kanishka.
3. Guptas Samudragupta, Chandragupta, Vika-
ramaditya.
4. Harsha.
5. Culture
(a) Religion Puranas, Epic (toleration).
(b) Literature Kalidasa.
(c) Art Ajanta, Amaravati.
D. Rajput period, 650 A.D. 1200 A.D,
1. The origin of Rajputs.
2. Rajput Kingdoms, Chauhans, Chandels, Gahar-
war (Rathor).
242 CALENDAR 1928-29
3. The South Pandyas, Pawars, Cholas and
Keralas. *
4. The Deccan Yadavas, Chalukyas, Rashtra-
kutas.
III. Medieval India
A. Early medieval
1. Life and teaching of Muhammad.
2. The Arab expansion.
3. The Turks and their kingdoms.
4. Turkish invasions
(a) Mahmud of Ghazni.
(6) Muhammad Shahab-ud-din Ghori.
(c) The Slave kings Balban and Mongol in-
vasions.
(d) The Khiljis, Ala-ud-din and conquest of the
south.
(e) The Tughlaks Muhammad and Firoz
break up of early medieval empire.
(/) Provincial principalities and invasions of
Timur.
(g) The Hindu Kingdoms of the south.
(h) Culture.
Religion Kabir.
Literature Growth of Modern Indian Languages.
B. Later medieval
(a) 1. Syyads and Lodis Dissensions.
2. Babar and Humayun Conquest and failure.
3. Sher Shah.
4. Akbar Conquest and Consolidation.
5. Jahangir, Shahjahan Prosperity.
6. Aurangzeb
Religious quarrels.
Conquest of the south.
7. Successors of Aurangzeb.
Decay of Empire.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 243
(6) Mahrattas Shivaji The struggle with the Mu-
ghals The Peshwas up to 1761.
(c) Sikhs Nanak and Guru Govind Singh.
(d) Early European settlements, 1(500 1708.
1. Portuguese Discovery of the route from Europe
to India.
2. Dutch Settlement in the Spice archipela.go.
3. English Embassies to Mughal emperors and
establishment of factories.
4. French Establishment of factories.
(e) Culture
Religions, Bhakti movement.
Art Taj.
Literature 1. Hindi Tulsidasa, Surdasa, Rahim,
Malik Muhammad Jaisi.
2. Urdu.
IV. Modern India.
A. 1. Struggle between the empire and the Mah-
rattas.
2. Break-up of the empire and the establish-
ment of Subedars.
3. Sikhs Ran jit Singh.
4. Mahratta and other Indian States.
B. 1. Struggle of the European Powers. The
French and the British (17001763).
2. Struggle between the English and Indian
princes (1756 1774). Conquest of Bengal.
C. British rule, 17741857
1. Warren Hastings
(i) Regulating Act.
(ii) Internal difficulties.
(Hi) Wars with the Indian rulers.
2. Cornwallis
(i) The permanent settlement,
(ii) Wars with Indian rulers.
16
244 CALENDAR 1928-29
3. Wellesley
(i) The subsidiary alliance system,
(ii) The French rivalry,
(iii) Wars and expansions of British territory.
4. Minto
Embassies to Asiatic Powers.
5. Hastings Nepal war, Mahratta wars.
6. Bentinck Keforms.
7. Auckland and Ellenborough Afghan wars.
8. Hardinge Punjab war.
9. Dalhousie Completion of dominions.
T)._British rule, 18571919
(a) Wars and expansions
1. Afghanistan.
2. Burma.
(b) Internal developments
1. Constitutional, 1861, 1892, 1909, 1919.
2. Local Self -Government.
3. Education.
4. Justice.
5. Administration.
(c) National movements
1. Hindu reforms.
2. Muslim reforms.
3. Growth of Nationalism, Indian National Con-
gress.
The following books indicating the scope and stand-
ard of knowledge required are recommended :
1. V. A, Smith : Oxford Student's History of India
(Clarendon Press, Oxford). Us. 2.
2. R. D. Banerji : History of India (The Book Co.,
College Square, Calcutta).
3. Thompson : History of India (Christian Litera-
ture Society, Madras).
4 Har Prasad Shastri : History of India (Blackie).
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 245
5. Hoernle and Stark : A History of India (Orissa
Mission Press, Cuttack).
6. E. B. Havell : A short History of Jhidia (Mac-
millan and Co.).
7. Student's Atlas of Indian History (Macmillan).
8. Manmatha Nath Rai : History of India in Urdu
and Hindi, second edition (Nand Kishor and Bros.,
Benares).
9. Ishwari Prasad : Students' History of India in
Hindi and Urdu, second edition (The Indian Press,
Allahabad).
10. B. N. Mehta : A Handbook of Indian History
in Hindi (University Book D6pot, Agra).
11. Garrett, Manmohan and Sohan Lai : Historical
Atlas in Urdu (Rai Sahib Gulab Singh and Sons,
Lahore.)
English History.
English History in outline from 1485 A. D. to
1914 A. D.
The following syllabus is suggested :
I. The influence of Geography on English His-
tory.
II. History of England 14851688
A. Introductory to 1485
(a) Growth of Parliament.
(b) Evolution of commerce and industry.
(c) Social changes.
(d) Relations with European countries, espec-
ially France.
B. Tudors, 14851603
(1) Monarchy and Parliament.
(2) Religious evolution.
(3) Growth of commerce.
246 CALENDAR 1928-29
(4) Discoveries and beginning of colonial and
sea power.
(5) Relations with European Powers.
0. Early Stuarts, 16031649
(1) Monarchy and Parliament.
(2) Religion Puritans and Anglicans.
(3) Commercial and Colonial expansion.
(4) Civil War.
D. The Commonwealth, 16491660
(1) Cromwell
(a) Scotland and Ireland.
(6) European Powers, navigation laws.
(c) Religion Growth of Puritans.
(d) Parliament.
E. Latter Stuarts, 16601688
(1) Parliament
(a) Parties.
(6) Cabinet.
(2) Relations with European Powers France and
Holland.
(3) Colonial and Commercial expansion.
III. Constitutional Government, 1688 1914
A. William and Mary and Anne, 1688 1714
(1) Bill of Rights.
(2) Parliament
(a) Whigs and Tories.
(6) Cabinet.
(3) Affairs of Ireland.
(4) Relations with European Powers and growth
of Colonial Powers.
B. Early Hanoverians, 1714 1763
(1) Walpole, Pitt.
(2) European wars.
(3) Colonial expansion.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 247
C. Latter Hanoverians, 1763 1830
(1) Industrial Revolution.
(2) American Revolution.
(3) French Revolution, Wars with France
(4) Ireland Union.
D. Rise of Democracy
(1) 18301885
(1) Reform 1830, 1867, 1885, 1918.
(2) Relation with Europe
Crimean War, England and Russia.
(3) Imperial development.
(2) 18851914
(1) England and Russia.
,, ,, Germany.
,, ,. Empire.
(2) Ireland.
(3) Internal developments
(a) Parliament.
(6) Commercial and industry.
N.B. Students are expected to have a knowledge of " Representation of the
People Act, 1918."
The following books indicating thn scope and standard
of knowledge required are recommended :
1. S. R. Gardiner : A School Atlas of English
History (Longmans, Green & Co.).
2. Ed. J. S. Lay : The English People (Macmillan).
3. Oman : Junior History of England (Arnold).
4. S. R. Gardiner : Outline of English History
(Longmans, Green & Co.)
5. T. F. Tout : A History of Great Britain, Book II
(Longmans, Green & Co.).
6 Kerr and Rushbrook Williams : Growth of the
British Empire (Longmans, Green & Co.).
7. Macmillan's Atlas of the British Empire.
248 CALENDAB 1928-29
8. Guest, G : Outlines of British History (Oxford
University Press, 1922). 2s Qd.
9. Pupils' Study Book of English History by J. T.
Mulley, Books II, III, and IV (by E. J. Arnold & Sons).
10. Raghu Kul Tilak : History of Modern England,
Urdu and Hindi (Indian Press, Allahabad).
11. S. D. Tripathi Shastri : History of the English
People, Urdu and Hindi (Macmillan & Co.).
12. Ram Krishna Mathur : A Handbook of English
History, available in one volume (Hindi and Urdu ver-
sions). (S. S. Mathur, Anand Pustakalaya, Cawnpore).
13. Shiva Chandra Kapoor : History of England
(Urdu and Hindi), (Nandkishore Bros., Benares).
14. Pran Nath Vidyalankar : History of England
(Hindi), (Ganga Pustakmala Karyalaya, Lucknow).
15. J. Nelson Eraser : A first History of England
(English), (K. & J. Cooper, Educational Publishers,
Bombay).
16. Brij Mohan Sharma : History of England (Urdu),
(Newal Kishore Press, Lucknow).
or
Geography.
. There will be two papers, each of three hours' dura-
tion, as follows :
Paper I. General Geography of the World outside
of India. (Sections I and II of the syl-
labus.)
Paper II. India and its world relations. (Section
III of the syllabus.)
Syllabus.
I. (a) Shape of the Earth ; rotation and revolution ;
duration of day and night ; the seasons. Latitude and
longitude.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931
(6) Practical exercises based on simple contour
maps. Outlines of the relief and drainage of the lands
and study of the chief land-forms.
(c) The atmosphere. Study and measurement
of temperature, pressure and rainfall as factors of wea-
ther. Climate. Seasonal distribution over the globe of
temperature pressure and rainfall ; study of wind-belts
Ferrel's Law, Buys Ballots' Law, cyclones and anticyclo-
nes. Types of climate.
II. (a) The world treated according to its major
natural regions. . The knowledge of the principles of phy
sical geography and of the geographical distributions
should be applied to the study in outline of the major
natural regions of the world.
(b) The influence of his environment on man,
his activities, his industries ; exchange of commodities ;
communications ; growth of towns.
III. Geography of India in fuller detail. Its rela-
tions, physical aud climatic, with contiguous areas ; its-
commercial relations with the world in general.
Books recommended :
Morrison : Our World (Macmillan), Rs. 2-8.
Stamp : The World (Longmans). Rs. 3.
Morrison : Junior Geography of India (Nelson). 12
annas.
Unstead and Taylor : Essentials of World Geog-
raphy (Philip). 2s.
Fairgrieve and Young : The World (Philip). 2s. 6<L
(For general reading).
Wallis : Practical Exercises in Geography (Macmil-
lan). Is.
Fairgrieve and Young : Junior Contour, Exercise
Book, Philip. 9d.
Stamp : Geographical Exercise Books for India.
Part I. (Longmans). 9s.
250 CALENDAR 1928-29
Bartholomew : Indian School Atlas (Oxford). Rs. 1-6-0.
Visual Contour Atlas (Philip). Is. 4d.
Books of reference for teachers :
Brooks : The World (London University Press).
75. U.
Herbertson (F. D.) : Clarendon Geographies. Vols.
I and II. 45. each.
Chisholm : Smaller Commercial Geography (Long-
mans) 56'.
Lyde : Man and His Markets (Macmillan). 35.
Herbertson : Man and His Work (Black). 15. 6d.
Davis : Elementary Physical Geography. (Ginn).
55. 6d.
Skeat : Principles of Geography. (Oxford). 55. 6d.
Mill : The Realm of Nature (Murray). 55.
Mackay : The Oxford Picture Geographies (Oxford).
25. 6d. each.
Lands and their Stories. Books I to VII (Blackie).
Peeps at Many Lands (Black). 25. lOd. each.
IV. MODERN INDIAN LANGUAGES.
There will be two papers, each of three hours, in each
of these languages one paper will be set in Prose Text
and Unseen, and the other in Poetry Text and Composi-
tion. Grammatical questions will be set in both the
papers. The ability of the Urdu candidates to read
Shikast will be tested by means of a paper set for the
purpose.
The following are the text-books prescribed :
Hindi.
Poetry ; 1. jftfww TOwf), Part I (published by
the Nagari Pracharini Sabha, Benares).
2. ^jcif f^gfcr by Siya Ram Sharan Gupta (Sahitya
Sadan, Chirgaon, Jhansi).
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 25 1
Prose : Hindi prose selections by Professor Shyam
Sundar Das (Indian Press, Allahabad).
Special attention should be paid to Hindi Composi-
tion. The following books are recommended for Gram-
mar and Composition :
1. ^rr Jwfar by Ram Ratna (Ratnasram, Agra).
2. H%JT fi^ STTOTO by Kamta Prasad Guru
(Nagari Pracharini Sabha, Benares).
3. High School Hindi Vyakaran, by Ganga Prasad.
(Rai Sahib Ram Dayal Agarwala, Allahabad).
Books recommended for supplementary reading :
1. Harischandra .. " Satya Harischandra ' ' (Nagari
Pracharini Sabha, Benares).
2. Lakshman Singh " Shakuntala Natak " (Prose
edition), (Indian Press, Ltd.,
Allahabad).
3. Gadadhar Singh " Kadambari " (Indian Press,
Ltd., Allahabad).
4. Ganga Prasad . . Hindi Prose Selection (Pub-
lisher, Indian Press, Allah-
abad.)
5. Ayodhya Nath. . " Ujjawal Tare " (Indian Press,
Allahabad).
6. Mishra Bandhu " Purva Bharata " (Ganga Pus-
takamala, Lucknow.)
7. Shridhar Pathak " Shrant Pathik " (Padmakot,
Allahabad).
8. Jagannath Das " Harishchandra J> (Publisher,
N. P. Sabha).
9. Deshvrat .. " Hindu Jati ka Swatantrya
Prem " (Publisher, Gandhi
Hindi Pustak Bhandar, Allah*
abad).
252 CALENDAR 1928-29
10. Chandra She- " Viropakhyan " (Publisher,
khar Shastri Sahitya Bhawan, Limited, Al-
lahabad).
N.B. Students are not expected to read more than two books recom-
mended for supplemantary reading in the above list.
Urdu.
1. joj) ^XS by Jalaluddin Ahmad (Anwar Ahmadi
Press, Allahabad), (latest edition),
or
Khyaban Urdu (Indian Publishing House, Allahabad).
2. Nisab-i-Jadid, by Maulvi Mahdi Husain Nasiri
( An war-i- Ahmadi Press, Allahabad).
3. Qawaid Urdu, by Jamaluddin Haidar (Rai Sahib
Ram Dayal Agarwala, Allahabad),
or
5) I wJ~^ ^7 Jalaluddin (Anwar Ahmadi Press, Allah-
abad).
For Shikasht the book recommended is
Majmua-i-Khatt-i-Shikast, by M. A. Siddiqui (Indian
Publishing House, Allahabad).
Bengali.
1. Rajani (Novel), by Bankim Chandra Chatterji.
2. Katha Kahini, by Rabindra Nath Tagore
(Poetry).
3. Bhasha Bodh Vyakaran, by Nakuleshwara Vidya-
bhushan. Re. 1 (recommended).
Marathi.
1. Keshavsut Yancha Kavita Sangraha wa Cha-
ritra (published by Sita Ram Keshava Damle and printed
by the Chitrashala Press, Poona city). Price Re. 1-8.
2. Gad Ala Pan Sinha Gela, by Hari Narain Apte
(Arya Bhushan Press, Poona city). Price annas 8.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 253
3. Swami Vivekanandachin Patren (Manoranjak
Granth Prasarak Mandali, Bombay). Price, annas 4.
Grammar. R. B. Joshi's Marathi Grammar " Prau-
dhabodha."
Recommended for the use of teachers
Marathi Grammar, by M. K. Damle (Indraprakash
Press, Bombay).
Gujarati.
Paper /, Prose. B'llavilas, by M. N. Dwivedi (N. M.
Tripathi, Kalbadevi Road, Bombay).
Paper II, Poetry. Sudama Charitra, by Prermnand
(edited by Manjulal Raiichhodlal Majumdar, Baroda).
For Grammar the following book is recommended :
Madyama Gujarati Vyakarana, by K. P, Trivedi
(N. M. Tripathi, Bombay).
B.- OPTIONAL SUBJECTS.
I. CLASSICAL LANGUAGES.
There will be two papers, each of three hours, in each
of these languages the first paper will be in the Prescri-
bed Texts and Grammar, and the second paper in Trans-
lation, Composition and Unseen.
SYLLABUS.
(a) Sanskrit.
Paper I (a) Text-books.
1. Sanskrit P-thivall, by Babu Ram Saksena,
(National Press, Allahabad), of which the following selec-
tions are prescribed :
Numbers 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 12, 13, 16, 17, 19, and 21
of part I and nos. 1, 3, 7, 8, 10, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18 and 20
of part II.
2. ^rraft^fcrij (Kakolukiyam) as adopted in the
High School Sanskrit selections, by S. S. Sastry.
NOTE. The students should be taught to understand the passages
with context and the substance, and to learn the analysis of compounds,*
sandhis and the prose order of the poetry pieces.
254 CALENDAR 1928-29
(6) Grammar. Simple sandhis. Declension of nouns
and pronouns of frequent occurrence. Conjugation of
verbs of frequent occurrence in all classes.
NOTE. Questions on Grammar exclusively should be asked from the
prescribed books as far as possible, and should carry about one-third of the
total marks.
Books recommended for Grammar :
1. First and Second Book of Sanskrit, by Bhan-
darkar.
2. R. K. Banerjee's Sanskrit Grammar.
3. Sanskrit Teacher, by K. P. Trivedi.
4. Sanskrit Prathama Pustaka, by Professor Ram
Bihari Lai, D. A.-V. College, Cawnpore.
5. Upakramanika, Printed by Khadgavilas Press,
Bankipore.
6. Vigyan Dipika, by Pandit Sadashiva Shastri.
7. Sanskrit Vyakarana Bodha, by Pandit Kanliaiya
Lai Shastri (Rai Sahib Ram Dayal Agarwala, Allah-
abad).
Paper II. Translation, Composition and Unseen :
(a) Selected passages from books recommended for
rapid reading and from others of equal diffi-
culty for translation into the vernacular of
the candidate ; (b) substance of easy passages
from the above-mentioned books to be ex-
pressed in Sanskrit ; and (c) translation of
easy English prose sentences into Sans-
krit.
Books recommended for rapid reading arid for com-
position :
(1) Kusuma-mala, Part I, by V. S. Apte. (N. M.
Tripathi, Bombay).
(2) i&t wrr *qjft compiled by Sant Gokal Chand
Shastri (Ram Narain Lai, Allahabad).
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 25$
(3) A Manual of Sanskrit Composition, by Lalleram
Tewari (National Press, Allahabad).
(4) XT^fijaRT S^f ?T <TM|tjq|$ f^RTF by Iff UUE
N.B. Sanskrit must bo written in Devanagri character.
(b) Arabic.
Prescribed course
Paper I. (a) Tett L-^lfrT^ compiled by Zafar
Iqbal, M.A., B.T., Lecturer, Central Training College,
Lahore( A tar Chand Kapoor and Sons, Anar Kali, Lahore).
(6) Grammar. Mabadi-ul Arabia &^*^^ot** by
Shartuni, Urdu edition [edited by Maulvi Izzat Ullah
(the Majidi Press, Cawnpore).]
N.B. Questions on Grammar exclusively should bo asked from the
prescribed books, as far as possible, and should carry about one-third of
the total marks.
Paper II. Translation, Composition and Unseen :
(a) Selected passages from books recommended for
rapid reading and from others of equal diffi-
culty for translation into Urdu ; (6) substance
of easy passages from the above-mentioned
books to be expressed in Arabic ; and (c)
translation of easy English prose sentences
into Arabic.
Book recommended for rapid reading
8|jA/l^l^ (Anwar Ahmadi Press, Allahabad).
NOTE. Arabic words must be written in Arabic character.
(c) Persian.
Prescribed course
Paper I.(a) Text :
Prose.
1. Gulistan cj'otf uA^U ^*~ Chapter I up to story
48 and Chapter IV up to story 12.
256 CALENDAR 1928-29
2. fJU iaaaS by Abdul Latif Shustari
pages 291 306.
3. Anwar Suhaili ^Uf** fo*) by ^tX iac| 5 &$
Chapter I up to (j^^-o ^A
Poetry.
1. Bostan ^/L*^ Chapter I, first 48 stories ; Chap-
ter II, first 35 stories ; Chapter VI, Introduction ; Chap-
ter VII, first 5 stories ; Chapter VIII, first 4 stories ;
Chapter IX, first 4 stories ; Chapter X o>V 1 ** only.
2. Aiynai Sikandari, by Khusru ))*>*-
1. Ode ))) j| ^V *.A up to Ojf ^5^^)
2. Ode ^); <*-$' ^-\ ^;!^ ^-|o T ?) up to
^/.^ J)^* (J^
3. ^^ v^ c v^lxcl-.*^ beginning with the following
lines :
J^ J^t ( I )
^ r J
( T ^
* ^JyL ^J ( )
U^ ; Jo ^-| ( 1 )
y d / j^ ( V )
f ( A )
( 1 )
Jo >}1U ,-^c ^ & * ( f f )
( tr )
(10)
HIGH S CHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 257
J ( Iv )
*^ ( * A )
( 11 )
-a ( F*" )
O 2 ^-^O^ ( M )
^ J^ <=-\ ( ^f )
/^x? fct^- <tx*< ^ ijla*i? ( IT )
(6) Grammar. 4*1^8^5 by o
{Oriental Publishing House, Lucknow), or
by S. Zafar Husain (Rai Sahib Ram Dayal Agarwala,
Allahabad.)
(Only etymology and syntax should be taught to the
High School classes.)
N.B. Questions on Grammar exclusively should be asked from the
prescribed books, as far as possible, and should carry about one- third of
the total marks.
Paper II. Translation, Composition and Unseen :
(a) Selected passages from books recommended for
rapid reading and from others of equal difficulty for
translation into Urdu ; (6) substance of easy passages
from the above-mentioned books to be expressed in
Persian ; and (c) translation of easy English prose sen-
tenced into Persian.
Books recommended for rapid reading :
^u^U 4.4&. c-jl^-vj j by oK i $U> *iJi^j^3 (Oriental Publishing
House, Lucknow.)
2. ^to ; Uu
Students who offer Persian are required to have such a
knowledge of the etymology of the Arabic language as
will enable them to explain all Arabic words and phrases
which may occur in the text-books and in the books
recommended for rapid reading in Persian.
NOTE. Persian words must be written In Persian character.
CALENDAR 1928-29
(d) Latin.
Paper I. (a) Prescribed Prose and Poetry.
Text-books
1. Caesar : De Bello Gallico, Book IV.
2. Livy : Hannibalian War, Selections Books XXIII
and XXIV (Macmillan).
3. Virgil : Aeneid, Books II and IV.
(6) Grammar. Gildersleeve's Latin Grammar or
Allen's Latin Grammar is recommended.
N.B. -Questions on Grammar exclusively should be asked from the
prescribed books, as far as possible, and should carry about one- third of
the total marks.
Paper II. Translation, Composition and Unseen :
(a) Selected passages from books recommended for
rapid reading and from others of equal difficulty for
translation into the vernacular of tlie candidates ; (b)
composition will include translation into Latin of easy
English sentences and also of a simple passage of con-
tinuous English Prose.
Book prescribed
Junior Latin Composition by J. Mathewson Milne
(Harrap & Co.).
II. COMMERCE.
The examination will consist of two papers each of
three hours : (a) one paper on Business or Commercial
Practice and (6) one paper on either (i) Typewriting or
(ii) Book-keeping.
The following is the syllabus in each subject :
Business or Commercial Practice.
Office routine. Drafting simple business and official
letters ; preparation of telegrams and cablegrams, includ-
ing a knowledge of simple codes. Docketing, filing,
copying and despatch of letters. Ordinary postal regu-
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 259
lations, use of postal forms such as Money Order, V.-P.P.,
Acknowledgment, Registration and Insurance forms.
Post Office 'Savings Bank Accounts. Telephone. Simple
duplicating and other labour-saving appliances.
Meaning of ordinary commercial terms and abbre-
viations. Preparation of simple commercial documents
such as indents, invoices, bills of exchange, promissory
notes, statements of account. Nature and use of Bills
of Lading, and railway receipts. Simple banking trans-
action, involving the nature and use of cheques, deposit
slips and pass books.
Books recommended :
1. Extracts from Business Methods and Corre-
spondence, by Arthur Fieldhouse.
2. Commercial Practice by Roop Ram Gupta and
K. L. Govil, Part 1 (Messrs. Gautama Bros. & Co., Cawn-
pore).
Typewriting.
There will be no practical examination on the type-
writer, but only a theory paper of two hours' duration
involving questions on
*(a) the mechanical construction of the typewriter ;
(b) care of the machine ;
(c) display of matter, including headings and titles ;
centering ; contractions and abbreviations ;
hyphenation ; punctuation ; stencil cutting ;
adaptation of one or more characters to
represent characters not given on the key-
board ; corrections ; erasures.
* Questions on the mechanism of the typewriter will be of a general
nature, so that students who are acquainted with the mechanism of any of
the more popular typewriting machines will be able to answer the questions
(vide G. L. no. B-2773/V1 3, dated September 15, 1924, from the Secre-
tary of the Board).
17
260 CALENDAR 1928-29
There will also be a second paper of one hour's dura-
tion, consisting of type-copying of three manuscripts.
Book recommended
Pitman's or Remington's Typewriting Manual.
Book-keeping.
Elementary theory of double entry book-keeping.
Preparation and keeping of the Cash Book, Bought and
Sold Books, Returns Books, Bills Receivable and Bills
Payable Books, Journal and Ledger ; recording therein
simple transactions involving purchases and sales ; bills
receivable and payable, real, personal, and nominal
accounts, such as rent, salaries, interest, discounts, bad
debts, and depreciation. Drawing up the Trial Balance.
Closing the Ledger, and preparing Trading and Profit
and Loss Accounts and Balance Sheet. Simple bank-
ing transactions involving the nature and use of cheques,
deposit slips and pass book, and preparation of Bank
Reconciliation Statements. The nature and use of Bills
of Exchange and Promissory Notes. Petty Cash and
Imprest Systems.
Book recommended
Elementary Book-keeping, by Arthur Fieldhouse
{Simpkin, Marshall & Co., Limited, London, E. C., 4.)
IJL-SCIENCE (PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY).
The examination will consist of two papers one in
Physics and one in Chemistry, each of three hours.
Physics.
SYLLABUS.
Definition of Physics, measurements of length, area,
volume, mass, and weight. The balance. Density, spe-
cific gravity. Principle of Archimedes. The three states
of matter. Pressure of air, simple barometer.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 261
Heat. Expansion of solids, liquids, and gases, tem-
perature, thermometers, melting and boiling points,
conduction, convection^ and radiation. Unit of heat,
specific heat, change of state, latent heat. Easy calcu-
lations.
Light. Rectilineal propagation of light. Reflection,
refraction, plane, concave, convex mirrors, concave and
convex lenses and prisms. Position of object and image
with easy calculations. Dispersion.
Magnetism. Attraction and repulsion, magnetiza-
tion, terrestrial magnetism, magnetic meridian. The
compass.
Electricity. Electrification by friction. Properties
of a charged body. Conductors and insulators. The
electroscope. Induction. The electrophorus. A simple
call, simple forms of primary cells, arrangement of cells
in series and parallel, magnetic, and heating effect of a
current. The simple galvanoscope, simple explanation
of the telegraph, the electric bell, electric light.
Practieal work.
The following list of experiments indicates the mini-
mum amount of practical work required to be performed
by students. Other experiments of equal educational
value may be substituted. The experiments should be
performed individually as far as can be arranged. The
teaching of theory should be fully illustrated by experi-
ments, and demonstrations are to be considered an es-
sential part of the teacher's work.
NOTE. A chart giving a list of the experiments to be performed and
t ie date on which each student completes each experiment should be main-
tained and hung in the laboratory at each school recognized in Science
(vide G. L. no. B/3149 3300/V 36, dated December 21, 1925, from the
&ojrjbiry of the Board).
262 CALENDAR 1928-29
General. Determination of the relative density of
(a) bodies which float in water,
(6) bodies which sinkin water,
(c) liquids.
Use of the callipers.
Determination of the radius of a wire by Archimedes
Principle,
Determination of the internal radius of a narrow-
tube.
Light. Reflection at a plane mirror.
Focal length of a concave mirror.
Refraction through a prism.
Refractive index of glass and water.
Focal length of a convex lens.
Heat. Cooling curve of water and wax or naptha-
lene.
Determination of the water equivalent of a
calorimeter.
Determination of Specific Heat.
Determination of the Latent Heat of Ice.
Determination of the Latent Heat of Steam.
Magnetism. Mapping out lines of force by a smalt
magnet.
Determination of the direction of the
Magnetic meridian.
Electricity. Charging an electroscope by Conduction
and Induction.
The magnetic effect of a current on a
magnetic needle.
The electro-magnet.
The following books on Physics are recommended for
teachers' reference library :
1. Everyday Physics, by H. E, Hadley. (Mac-
millan & Co.). Rs 4, or
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 263
An Introduction to Physical Science, by Ivor
B. Hart. (Oxford University Press.) Rs. 2.
2. A Class Book of Physics, by R. A. Gregory and
H. E. Hadley. (Macmillan&Co.). Rs. 3-12.
3. A Course of Physics, by Charles H. Draper.
(Blackie & Sons.) Rs. 3-12.
4. An Elementary Physics, by K. C. Bhattacharya.
(Indian Press, Allahabad.) Rs. 2.
Chemistry.
Definition of Chemistry.
Common properties of matter : hardness, porosity,
brittleness, solid, liquid and gaseous states. Change of
state. Melting and boiling points.
Crystalline shape, effect of heat on common things.
Solution in water. The above to be studied with
NaCl, KNO 8 , CaCO,, Na, C0 3 , CuSO 4 5H 2 0, FeS0 4
7H 2 0, ZnSO ,7HO, Fe, Zn, Sn, Mg. Pb. Hg. P, S,
Shellac and linseed oil.
Solution, melting, evaporation, distillation, filtration,
solution in water and alcohol. Water of crystallization.
Slow and rapid evaporation, saturated solutions. Cry-
stallization studied from solutions in water and of melted
sulphur. Distillation of water, mixtures, immiscible
liquids. Elementary and compound substances. Non-
metals and metals. Chemical symbols. Chemical
action, the laws of definite proportion, atoms, molecules,
atomic and molecular weights, valency, relation between
equivalent and atomic weights. Simple formulae
and equations.
Study of air Rusting of metals, oxidation, active
and inactive gases in air. Burning of phosphorus. Mean-
ing of combustion, slow and rapid combustion studied
with iron, magnesium, and phosphorus.
264 CALENDAB 1928-29
Oxygen gas ; prepared from oxide of mercury, and
potassium chlorate. Important properties of oxygen
pas.
Acidic and basic oxides, acids, bases and salts.
Preparation and properties of the following :
Hydrogen, Nitrogen, Ammonia, Chlorine, Hydro-
chloric acid, Nitric acid, Carbon dioxide.
Carbon -Properties and varieties.
Action of carbon dioxide on animal and plant life.
Sulphur Properties and varieties.
Preparation and properties of sulphur dioxide and
sulphuric acid, their preparation treated in a very ele-
mentary manner sulphur dioxide by burning sulphur
in air and by the action of hydrochloric acid on calcium
sulphite and sulphuric acid by the action of nitric acid on
sulphur dioxide and water.
Study of Water Action of steam on red-hot iron
filings.
Action of Sodium on water. Action of magnesium
on steam. Electrolysis of water.
NOTES.-!. The detailed course given below indicates the minimum
amount of practical work required to be performed by students and sug-
gests a method of treatment of the syllabus for the guidance of teachers.
They may substitute other experiments of equal educational value. Prac-
tical work should be co-ordinated with the theoretical work and follow it
consecutively, as far as possible. The practical experiment should be
performed individually so far as can be arranged.
2. A chart giving a list of the experiments to be performed and the
date on which each student completes each experiment should be main-
tained and hung in the laboratory of each school recognized in Science
(vide G. L. no. B/3149 3300/B 36, dated December 21, 1925, from the
Secretary of the Board.)
The use of stencils in answering papers in Science is
not allowed.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931
265
(Classes IX and X.)
Classes IX and X will have 6 periods of Science per
wee k for at least 27 working weeks ; this gives a total
of 162 periods in class IX :
Subject.
Chemistry
Detailed syllabus.
Minimum list of experiments which
should be done by the pupils
individually.
Effect of dissolved
substances on boil-
ing point.
Distillation. Puri-
fication of water.
Elements and com-
pounds.
Metals and non-me-
tals, properties :
The atmosphere.
Combustion, ac-
tive and inactive
air.
Rusting
Increase in mass in
rusting and burn-
ing.
Explanation of above
introduction of
terms " Oxygen "
and " Nitrogen."
Oxygen
' Metals and uon-me-
j tals. Oxides.
Nitrogen. Its use in
the atmosphere.
To find B. P. of solutions of calcium
chloride. Solution of different
strengths.
To bend tubes, bore corks, set up
apparatus for distillation and find
B. P. before and after distilla-
tion.
To examine the elements sulphur,
copper, lead, mercury, zinc. To
examine the compounds, ferrous
sulphate, copper sulphate, lead
oxide mercury oxide and regain the-
elements, where possible.
Burning a candle in a bell jar. Jie-
peat with sulphur, phosphorus.
To measure the proportion of air
used up when a substance burns in
air.
To show iron will not rust in dry air.
To measure the air used up when iron
rusts in air.
To show increase in mass when mag-
nesium and iron burn in air and
when iron rusts in air when a
candle burns in air.
Preparation from mercuric oxide and
potasium chlorate in small quanti-
ties and on large scale from manga-
nese dioxide and potassium chlorate,
its properties.
To show loss in mass when potassium
chlorate is heated.
Their basic and acidic properties.
Proper cies, to find accurately percent-
age of nitrogen in air by pyrogallio
aoid (Lecture room).
266
CALENDAR 1928-29
Subject.
Detailed syllabus.
not an ele-
ment.
Resume of above. In-
troduction of term
| " Hydrogen."
Preparation of hyd-
rogen and its pro-
perties.
Hydrochloric
gas.
Ammonia gas
Sulphur
Carbon
Demonstration les-
Carbonic acid gas.
Chalk.
Resume of above.
Animal and plant
life.
Chlorine gas
acid
Minimum list of experiments which
should be done by the pupils
individually.
Action of sodium on water. Action
of magnesium on boiling water.
Action of steam on iron. Examina-
tion of oxide of iron formed. In-
crease in ma^s. Comparison with
iron rust.
From zinc and sulphuric acid.
What happens to the zinc. What
happens ^hen hydrogen burns in
air. Explosion of hydrogen with
air.
Electrolysis of water and its composi-
tion by volume. Action of hydro-
gen on copper oxide when heated.
(Lecture room).
Properties and varieties.
Formation when carbon or carbon-
aceous matter burns in air.
Effects of acids on chalk. Examina-
tion of the ga<*, properties of gas
obtained by the effect of strongly
heating chalk. Examination of
lime, difference between properties
of chalk and lime, loss in mass on
heating chalk.
Formation of oxygen by plants.
Preparation from manganese dioxide
and hydrochloric acid. Its pro-
perties.
Preparation from sodium chloride and
sulphuric acid. Its properties.
Preparation from ammonium chloride
and quicklime. Its properties.
Effect of heat.
NOTE. In class X time is left for revising the whole course
paration for the High School Examination.
in pre-
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 267
The books recommended for use in Chemistry are
1. Chemistry for Indian Schools for Standards IX
and X, by E. G. Hill, Professor of Chemistry, Muir
Central College, Allahabad (Indian Frew, Allahabad).
Re. 1.
2. Physics and Chemistry for Secondary Schools in
India, Parts III and IV in one volume (Macmillan &
Co.) 1918. Ee. 1-8.
3. An Elementary Chemistry for Indian Schools,
Parts T and IT, by K. C. Bhattacharya, M.sc.> L.T.
(Indian Press, Limited, Allahabad.) Price, Rs. 2.
4. Wilson and Headley : Chemistry for Schools.
(Oxford University Press.) Rs. 2.
* Books recommended for the use of teachers in Chem-
istry
1. Practical Chemistry, vol-
umes 1 and 2, for Standard VII
of High Schools in the Bombay I Oxford University
Presidency, by H. E. H. Pratt, I Prew, Bombay.
6 annas.
2. Holmyard's Elementary Chemistry, published by
Arnold.
3. Gregory and Hodges : Experimental Science for
Indian Schools (Macmillan).
4. K. Kumar : Chemistry for classes IX and X
(Bhargava, Chandausi).
* In connexion with the books recommended for the use of teachers in
this Prospectus it should be noted that there is in addition a number of
books approved for the use of teachers generally (vide list of books approved
for the use of teachers of Anglo-Vernacular and Vernacular Schools, dated
July 31, 1916, and it& supplements issued annually).
208 CALENDAR 1928-29
IV. AGRICULTURE.
The examination will consist of two papers of three
hours each.
The first paper will be on the subject-matter in the
syllabus up to and including sub-section (5) Tillage;
and the second paper on the remaining portion.
SYLLABUS.
(1) Climatology. Weather and seasons in the
country and in the provinces.
(2) Soils. Soil-forming processes ; Weathering, Solu-
tion. Plants and animal agencies.
Classification of soils. Local classification Clayey,
Loam, Sandy, Concretionary. Saline, Silt, Goind, Ahar y
Uparhar.
Mechanical analysis of soils. Determination of Stones,
Gravels, Moisture, Humus, Sand, and Clay.
Texture of soils. Arrangement of particles of soil ;
Specific gravity ; Pore space ; Surfaces exposed ; Num-
ber of particles in a unit volume ; Plasticity, Cohesion,
Forces of facilitating granulation.
Organic matter in the soils. Its sources and distribution.
Decrease of organic matter. Estimation of or-
ganic matter. Its effect on soil. Its maintenance.
Soil water. Its forms, its movements. Factors
affecting hygroscopic, capillary, and gravitational water.
Control of soil moisture. Run-off losses ; Percolation ;
Evaporation. Methods of checking the same ; Mulch-
ing, Ploughing, Rolling, Shelter, Plants.
Soil heat. Relation of heat to germination and
growth. Sources of soil heat. Factors affecting soil
temperature.
Absorptive power of soils. Effect of colour. Effect of
texture and structure on heat. Radiation, Convection
and Conduction. Absorptive power of soils in relation
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931
to gases and solutions. Nature and properties of sub-
soils in relation to soils.
(3) Irrigation and Drainage
Water requirements of plants. Factors affecting
transpiration. Wilting point. Optimum moisture for
plant growth. Conserving of moisture.
Sources of water of irrigation. Rain, its annual and
seasonal variations ; Ice, Frost, Snow, Dew, Hail, Wells
(spring and percolation), Rivers, Canals, and Tanks.
Types of water-lifts. Persian Wheel, Chain Pump,
Hand Plunger Pump, Charsa, Baldeo Balti.
Distribution of ivater. Flow systems ; Pacca and
Kachcha channels ; Planning and laying-out of irriga-
tion drains.
Drainage. Earth bunds, Conditions making drainage
necessary. Types of soils requiring drainage, Situation
requiring drainage, Possible relation between irrigation
and drainage.
(4) Manures and manuring. Farm -yard manure r
Fermentation, Application ; Feeding for manuring ;
Special manures, i.e., Bones, Potash, Nitrate, Oil-cakes,
their manurial properties and application ; Green ma-
nuring, important plants that can be used, their method
of application.
(5) Tillage. Objects of Tillage and description of
principal implements of tillage :
(a) Ploughs. (c) Cultivators.
(b) Harrows. (d) Harvesting Machines.
(6) Plants. Utilization of plants and plant parts of
the crops of the provinces.
General description of a plant and its parts and the
functions of each.
Plant nutrition, Growth, Substances necessary for
plant growth, Sources of those substances, Storage and
movements of food materials.
270 CALENDAR 1928-29
Reactions of the plant to moisture, light and gravity.
General idea of flowers and their parts, Pollination,
Different methods of pollination.
Fruits and seeds. Their general structure and their
functions. Length of life of seeds. Conditions neces-
sary for their germination. Selection of seeds and their
storage.
(7) Farm Crops. Preliminary cultivation, sowing,
weeding, manurial requirements, harvesting, storage, and
marketing of the following crops :
Wheat, barley, gram, peas, rice, maize, jawar, pulses,
cotton, flax, sannai, ambadi, potatoes, sugarcane, tobacco,
vegetable.
(8) Farm Animals. Buffaloes, cows and oxen, their
care and maintenance. Determination of age of animals,
goats, sheep, and poultry.
(9) Patwari papers, their use and maintenance.
Candidates are required to maintain note-books of
all work done, both theoretical and practical. These
iiote-books should be inspected periodically and initialled
by the teachers. These note-books may be called for
^tt the time of the examination.
Candidates will undergo the following course of
practical work in connexion with the above syllabus :
1. Each student is required to keep records of the
following facts noted in the school observatory :
(a) Rainfall.
(6) Maximum and minimum temperature of air in
shade.
(c) Wind directions and velocities.
(d) Amount of clouds and their directions.
(e) The time of occurrence of frost, fog, hail, dust-
storm.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 271
(/) Afternoon temperature of black soil, light
coloured soil, ploughed soil, rolled soil and
mulched soil.
2. Separation of stones, gravel, and fine soil by sieve.
Separation of sand and clay by sedimentation.
Determination by ignition of moisture and humus^
in soil.
Specific gravity of soils and pore space.
Weight of different soils in unit volume.
Organic matters in* soil and sub-soil, its power
of absorbing moisture.
Weight of water absorbed by soils from a sa-
turated atmosphere.
Amount of percolation of water in a unit of time
through sand, clay, and loam.
Classification of soils as Domat, Matyar, Balwar,
by sight.
3. Amount of water taken out in one hour by the
different water-lifts in use.
Amount of water discharged on fields by Kachcha,,
Pacca, and puddled channels.
4. Results of applications of green manuring, farm-
yard manure, oil-cakes, ground bones, bone
ash, potash nitrate applied to school garden
plots.
5. Handling of farm implements, their use and
special designs.
0.- Drawings of different parts of plants grown on the
farm.
7. Records of notes of cultivation of at least one
kharif crop, one rabi crop, one garden crop from
the time of preparation of seed bed to market-
ing, actually attended to by the candidate.
272 CALENDAR 1928-29
8. Practical determination of age of farm animals.
Drawing up of descriptions of local breeds of
farm animals.
Recognition of different feeding stuffs.
Lay-out of stables from sanitary point of view,
Books recommended
1. Meston Readers, Parts 1 to 3, by K. S. M. Quyum.
2. Krishi Shastra or llm Zarayat, by Tej Shanker
Kochak.
3. Notes on Poultry -keeping in India, by Mrs. A.
K. Fawkes.
4. Tisdale's Books on Dairying.
5. Monthly Journals, Leaflets, and Bulletins
issued by the United Provinces Agricultural Depart-
ment.
6. Lessons in Indian Agriculture by D. Clous ton
{Maemillan & Co., Ld.).
7. Rahbar Zarait, by T. S. Kochak, published by the
author, price Rs. 2-8.
8. Krishi Vigyan, Part I, by Sita Prasad Tiwari.
V. -DRAWING.
The examination will 'consist of two papers of three
hours each : the first paper on Free Arm Drawing and
the second paper on Geometrical Drawing.
SYLLABUS.
free Arm. This should be in Pastel, and should
comprise common objects from nature.
The Bound. Such as Orange, Mango, Apple, Tomato,
Lichi, Melon, Peach ; Hockey and other Balls, Nutmeg,
Walnut, etc.
The Cylindrical. Such as Flower-pot, Household
Utensils, Degchies, Cups, Saucers, Surahi, Bowls, Tumb-
lers, Lotas, Bottles of kinds, Inkpots, Gloy Bottle, Paper-
weight, Candle-stick, etc.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 273
The Rectilinear. Open Book, Cigar and Cigarette
Boxes, Match Box, Attach^ Case, Cash Box, Flags, etc.
Miscellaneous. Hockey Sticks, Cricket Bat, Tennis
Racket, Mallet, Hammer, Screw Driver, Chisels, Padlock,
Key, Scissors, Knives, Hatchet, etc.
Nature Study. Simple flowers and leaves of all sorts.
Butterflies, Beetles, etc.
The above outline which is but suggestive should be in
Pastel on Tinted Paper and will involve instructions in
the art of Blending Colours, Colour Harmonies, Colour
Schemes and Shadows.
Text-books recommended
Pastel work for the standards, 3 volumes, author
A. (J. Tomkins, publishers Messrs. Isaac Pitman & Sons,
London, Bath and New York. Price Rs. 3 each vol.
Materials. Pastels, Paper, etc. (Reeves), obtainble
from Messrs. J. N. Navalakhi & Co., Kalbadevi Road,
Bombay.
Geometrical Drawing. (1) The theory and use of
instruments, especially of the protractor and Marquoise
scale.
(2) Plain block-letter writing.
(3) The whole of practical plane geometry.
(4) Drawing to scale, viz., scale of chords ; diagonal
scale ; plain scale ; comparative scales (to be done in
ink).
Text-books recommended
1. Geometry, Plane and Solid (Morris), (Longmans,
Green & Co., Bombay and London).
2. New School of Art Geometry (Gill), (George
Gill & Co., Minerva House, Warwick Lane, E. C.. Lon-
don).
3. Roorkee Drawing Manual (Veale), (Roorkee Thom-
pson College Book DSpot, Roorkee).
Materials. School Geometry set (Reeves).
274 CALENDAR 1928-29
VI. MANUAL TRAINING.
The examination will consist of one paper of three
hours in Drawing and a practical examination of four
hours in Woodwork.
SYLLABUS.
(1) Woodwork
(a) A series of models graduated in respect of the tool
manipulations involved to be made in wood
from working drawings (drawn in plan and
elevations, conventional isometric projec-
tion) or from a given pattern in wood ; the
construction of the models to involve the
use of one or more of the following tools : -
Jack Plane, Try Square, Marking Gauge, Marking
Knife, Smoothing Plane, Tenon Saw, Bevil,
Screw Driver, Firmer Chisel, Hammer,
Mallet, Bradawl, Nail Punch, Compass,
Firmer Gouge, Gimlet, Frame Saw, Spoke
Shave, Brace and Bit, File.
The following joints at least should be included
amongst the models :
Half-lap, Housing, Mortise and Tenon, Half-lap
Dovetail, Box Dovetail, Edge-dovetail, Bridle.
(6) The care and maintenance in good working con-
dition of the above-mentioned tools, excluding
saw setting and sharpening.
(2) Drawing
Drawing in plan and elevations of all models in the
course and in conventional isometric projection of those
of a rectangular shape.
NOTES. 1. A scheme drawn up on the above lines is given below.
Teachers need not keep strictly to the particular model mentioned in this
scheme, but if any changes in the models are made these should not in-
volve changes in the new tool manipulations employed. The course
should, if possible, be commenced in class VII.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OP 1931 275
2. Attention is invited to the suggestions for the teaching of Manual
Training contained in Director of Public Instruction's circular no. 2 of
1917-18.
*Books recommended for the use of teachers
1. The Teacher's Handbook of Seojd, by 0. Sallo*
man. (George Phillip & Sons.) 6s.
2. Manual Instruction ; Woodwork, by J. C. Pearson.
(George Phillip & Sons.) 6s.
3. McDougall's Light Woodwork, by David Thomas.
(McDougalVs Educational Company, London). Is.
4. The Scholar's Woodwork Class-book, by T. W.
Berry. (Cassell & Co., London.) Is.
5. Practical Drawing, by T. S. Usherwood. (Mac-
millan & Co.) 2s.
6. Educational Handwork Junior Course, by J. L.
Martin and C. V. Manley. (Blackie & Sons). Is. 6d.
7. Educational Handwork Intermediate Course,
J. L. Martin and C. V. JManley. (Blackie & Sons). Is.
8. Educational Handwork or Manual Training, by
A. H. Jenkins. (University Tutorial Press, Burlington
House, Cambridge.)
9. The " Self -Help " Course of Woodwork Exercise,
by E. J. Andrews. (Charles & Dible, 10, Paternoster
Square, London.). 2s. net.
10. Handcraft in Wood and Metal, Shirley and
Hooper, Rs. 9. (Batsford).
*In connexion with the books recommended for the use of teachers in
this Prospectus it should be noted that there is in addition a number of books
approved for the use of teachers generally (vide list of books ap-
proved for the use of teachers of Anglo -Vernacular and Vernacular Schools,
dated July 31, 1916, and its supplements issued annually)*
18
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931
Table showing the tool manipulations involved in making the models of the course.
(* Indicates a new tool manipulation. H- Indicates revision of a tool manipulation previously learnt.)
277
*0
c
^o
SJ5
^ 3
s.B<
3 c
d l
3*
1
Serial number of exercise. >
1
2
3
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Number of times each tool manipu-
^ lation occurs in the course.
Name of exorcises.-^
Preliminary (planing).
: ; : * : : ' Preliminary (gouging).
Kectanguiar prism.
i
a
s,
O"
72
3
3
w
5
5.
c
_2
a
&
?
a
.2
4
4-
i
4
4
*
3
p
o
o
o-
E
o
+3
^
S
CO
&
Wooden pattern (a).
Wooden partern (h).
^
a
I
H
P.
1
1
Rhombus with chamfered edge.
Prism with inlaid pieces.
Match-box holder.
d
<D
a
Cj
ft
73
<D
g
d
1
c$
T3
H
Lapped halving joint. 1
Simple bracket. i
Housing joint.
J4
g
S
3
J4
g
1
^
Mortising.
B
CO
g
3
Haunched tenoning.
P
-X
8
2q
-X
?
>,
A
J
o
S
i
w
1
!
Edge-dovetailing.
M
3
fH
la
W
Box-dovetaihng.
g
2Q
| Paper-tile.
4
i
&
I Bridle jointing.
-*
!
Mortise mitrmg.
| Picture frame.
| Butt jointing.
i
D
C
oC
5
1
1
43
&
Name of tool manipulation.
+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Face planing
Edge
Gauging
Marking with knife
Sawing with tenon saw at right -angles to the
grain
End planing
Sawing with tenon saw with the grain
*
4
_i_
4
*
*
*
4
f
4
4
4
4
+
4
4
4
4
+
.{.
4
4
+
4
i
4
n _
i
4
i
4
+
4-
+
_u
j.
4
+
.{-
-f
+
-f
f
4
"i"
\-
^
f
-1-
+
\-
i-
4-
4-
4-
+
4
4-
4-
4
j
-f-
4-
-f
' i"
+
4
-f
4-
-f
+
1
-f
+
4-
4
+
4
4
1-
-f
]
4
f
-f
-H
}
+
+
t
f
4-
H
J_
4-
-f
4
+
4
-f
T
4-
~r
4-
4-
+
-h
4-
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
t-
4
4
4-
-1
4
4
t
4
4^
4
4
f
4-
-4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
T
4
4
4-
4
"T
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
f
4
4
4
4
-H
4
-r
-f
4
4^
4
4-
4
4
4-
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4-
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
T
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
39
39
39
38
37
38
9
19
20
21
10
6
14
10
6
3
9
3
22
13
9
4
9
2
5
1
1
2
4
9
3
2
2
3
2
2
1
5
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
Use of bevel
Use of screw-driver
*
*
4
4
I
1
I-
+
t
h
+
+
f
+
j
+
4-
4
4-
4-
4
4
4
4
4
4
_u
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Sawing through a face obliquely to the grain . .
*
Horizontal chiselling across the grain
obi in 11 civ to the grain
*
4
4
4-
f
+
-1-
4-
4
i
-4-
4-
4
4
4
Sawing through an edge obliquely to the graii
Vertical chiselling parallel to the grain
Chamfering with plane with the grain
*
*
*
*
4
4-
-h
+
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
+
-h
~r
T
4
Vertical chiselling obliquely to the grain
Inlaying ..
Vertical chiselling at right angles to the grain
Horizontal chiselling with the graind
Boring with bradawl
Nailing . .
Use of compass
Modelling with jack plane
Filing
Gouging
Stop chamfering
Halving
Screwing
Boring with gimlet
Housing
Frame sawing
Spoke shaving
Mortising
*
*
*
*
1
('
f
4-
*
*
*
*
*
T
4-
4-
f
*
_!_
*
4
4-
*
*
1
*
-h
-f
4
-f
r
4
4-
4-
}-
+
4
+
4-
*
*
i-
1
*
4-
}
4-
1-
+
f
..]..
4
f
4
4
4
4
+
4
4
4
4
4-
4
r
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
._L
4
f
4
4-
4
4
4
4
4
4
4-
4
Use of brace and bit . .
Haunched t.noning
Fixing hinger
Glueing
Half -lap dovetailing
Edge-dovetailing
Box-dovetailing
Vertical gouging across the grain
Concave and convex chiselling . . ,
Bridle jointing . . . . * . .
Mortise mitring
Rebating with chisel
Butt jointing
Number of tool manipulation in each exercise-^
2
1
6
6
7
9
7
10
11
10
13
11
14
13
9
14
12
14
9
13
21
11
15
*
11
4
4
*
19
%
^0
*
14
19
*
10
4-
4
17
*
10
f
12
*
12
*
11
*
13
4
*
16
13
16
11
4
11
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 279
VIL A MODERN EUROPEAN LANGUAGE.
French.
There will be two papers of three hours each. The
first paper will consist of passages for translation from
the Prescribed Text-books, questions on the Prescribed
Text-books, and questions on Grammar. The second
paper will consist of Unseen passages and idiomatic
phrases for translation from French into English and
vice versa.
Books prescribed
1. Ed. About : Le Nez d'un Notaire. Macmillan's
Edition (Siepmann's Series).
2. Du Camp : La Dette de Jeu (Cambridge Uni-
versity Press).
3. Daudet : Lettres de inon Moulin [Edited by
Bradley and Bieu (Clarendon Press).]
4. French Poetry for advanced students by A. Wat-
son Bain (Macmillan & Co.), of which poems numbered
1, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 31, 48, and 56 are prescribed.
Grammar recommended
French Grammar (Sonnenscheiii's Parallel Grammar
Series) or Heath's Modern French Grammar (Harrap).
NOTE. The viva voce examination has been dropped for the present.
VIII.-DOMESTIO SCIENCE.
The examination will consist of two papers of three
hours each. The first paper will contain questions on
Physiology, Hygiene, Household Management and Home-
nursing. The second paper will consist of the practical
examination in Sewing to be held at the same time as
the examination in written work. There will also be an
oral test in First Aid and Home-Nursing, and a practical
test in Cooking.
280 CALENDAR 1928-29
SYLLABUS.
As a basis for the teaching of Hygiene and Home-
Nursing there should be a preliminary simple treatment
of the following topics in Elementary Physiology :
The human skeleton, the organs of digestion, the cir-
culation of the blood, the nervous system, respira-
tion.
I. Hygiene.
NOTE. Great importance should be attached to practical work where-
ever the subject admits of this.
Air, Composition of air, ventilation, importance of
pure air, impurities of air, diseases caused by impure
air.
Water. Composition of water ; quantity of water
required ; source of water-supply, springs, deep wells,
surface wells, rivers, tanks ; how water is polluted ; how
to prevent pollution of water, how to purify water ;
boiling and filtering.
Food. Composition of food ; composition of good diet
and its importance ; preservation of food ; cooking of
food ; drinks and condiments.
Personal Hygiene. Cleanliness of body (hair, nails,,
teeth, etc.) clothing ; exercise ; importance of temper-
ance ; the use of pan, opium, and other drugs ; spitting.
Preca utions against diseases . Infectious diseases
(small-pox, measles and diptheria, etc.) ; tuberculosis,
enteric fever ; dysentery and diarrhoea ; cholera ; plague ;
malaria ; itch ; leprosy, ophthalmia (sore eyes).
II. First Aid.
Roller bandage, figure of eight as supplied to knee,
elbow, finger, ear ; bandage for eye, nose, chin ; many-
tailed bandage for chest. Bleeding of different kinds ;
how to stop bleeding ; drowning ; burns ; scalds ; bruises ;
sprains ; broken bones ; dislocation ; carrying injured
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 281
people ; fainting ; sunstroke ; hysteria ; epilepsy ; suffoca-
tion ; foreign bodies in eye, ear, nose, and throat ; bites of
mad dogs ; signs of madness in dogs ; snake-bite, stings.
///. Home-Nursing .
NOTE. None of the work is to be purely theoretical. Practice mugt
be given in every point which allows of practical work.
Room. Bed ; bedding ; furniture ; light ; warmth ;
ventilation.
Nurse. Health ; dress ; duties and qualifications of
a nurse.
External Remedies. Poultices ; plasters ; fomenta-
tions ; ice ; baths hot and cold ; temperature of baths.
Food. Kind of food and preparation ; way of giving.
The Sick Room. Administration of medicine ; pulse
and temperature charts ; bathing ; changing of garments
and bedding.
Infectious Illness. Precautions during illness ; dis-
infection of room, clothing, and bedding after illness ;
use of disinfectants.
Convalescence. Occupations; visitors ; rest, sleep, and
food.
IV. Care and training oj Children.
Food, sleep, exercise, play, clothing, cleanliness, sur-
roundings.
V. Household management.
A. Choice of House. Furniture and Decoration.
Distribution of rooms. Cleansing and care of house
and furniture. Disposal of refuse and sewage. Pre-
cautions against flies and mosquitoes.
J5. Care of the kitchen.
Preparation of simple food.
282 CALENDAR 1928-2
. Two of the following groups :
(i) Preparation of roti, rice, dal ; and tarkari ,
(ii) Preparation and care of milk ;
(Hi) Preparation and care of meat. (One dish only
required.)
C. Duties of the mistress of household.
Proper distribution of daily activities. Accounts
and budgeting of expenditure.
VI. Clothing.
(i) Choice and care of the clothing.
(ii) Methods of washing cotton, woollen, and silk
materials.
NOTE. -Practical work should be done, if possible.
(Hi) Sewing and cutting out. Each candidate
should select three of the following groups.
A good standard of skill will be required in the various
stitches that are necessary in making up garments and
in mending worn articles of clothing :
(a) To cut and make up coat (achkan) or pyjama
or shirt (kurta) or waistcoat for a man.
(6) To cut out and make up kurti or blouse or skirt
or petticoat or pyjama for a woman.
(c) To cut out and make up frock or bonnet or
pyjama or bandi for a child.
(d) Drawn thread or crewel work or English em-
broidery or chikan work or sulme sitare.
(e) Spinning.
(/) Weaving.
NOTE. As an indication of the scope and standard of instruction in
Hygiene and Home-Nursing teachers are referred to sections II, III and
IV of Personal and Domestic Hygiene for the School and Home, by Mrs.
Harold Hendley (Rai Sahib M. Gulab Singh & Sons, Lahore), also to Indian
Manual of First Aid and Indian Home-nursing, published by the Indian
Council of the St. John's Ambulanc6 Association (Thacker, Spink & Co.,
Calcutta).
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 283-
Books for teachers' reference
1. Physiology, by T. Huxley,
2. Tropical Hygiene, Lukis and Blackham (T hacker,
Spink & Co.).
3. Outline of Domestic Science (for Indian Readers),
by Lilian Sawtefi (Longmans, Green & Co.).
4. Training of Children under five years.
5. Child-welfare by Dr. S. K. Mukerji (Indian
Press, Allahabad).
IX. METAL WORK.
The examination will consist of one paper of three
hours in Drawing and Theory, and a practical test for
four hours in Forging and Fitting Work.
SYLLABUS.
(a) Practical work. A scries of models graded in res-
pect of tool manipulation to be made in metal from
Working Drawings or from Patterns, and involving the
use of Forge, Anvil, Vice, Tongs, Top and Bottom Tools,
Drills, Hammers, Files, Stocks and Dies, etc. Exercises
should include Drawing Down, Upsetting, Welding,
Annealing, Hardening and Tempering, Rivetting, etc.,-
and such objects as Punches (nail and centre), Scribing
Knife, Nuts and Bolts, Rings, Chain Links, Hasp and
Staple, Keys (for shafting). Coat Hook, Wall Bracket,
Letter Weight, Callipers, Wall- Holdfast, Cold Chisels,
Drills, etc.
(6) Theoretical work. Properties and uses of diff-
erent metals, Iron (malleable and cast), Steel, Brass,
etc. Sections and weights of above, Length calcula-
tions, Working heats, Care and maintenance of tools,
forge, etc.
(c) Drawing. In orthographic projection of all models'
made during the course.
284 CALENDAR 1928-29
Books recommended
1. Smithy and Forge Crane, approximate price Rs. 2.
{Publishers Crosby Lockwood).
2. Smith's Work Hasluck, Rs. 2. (Cassels).
3. Educational Handwork, Jenkins, Rs. 3 (Univer-
sity Tutorial Press).
4. Handcraft in Wood and Metal, Shirley and Hooper,
Rs. 9 (Batsford).
5. Plain and Ornamental Forging, Schwarzkopf
Wiley & Sons, Rs. 6-8-0.
X. HISTORY or GEOGRAPHY.
(The same course as in the compulsory subject.)
XL BOOK-BINDING.
(No course drawn up.)
XII. SPINNING AND WEAVING.
(No course drawn up.)
XIII. GENERAL SCIENCE (PHYSICS, CHEMISTRY, AND BIOLOGY).
There will be two papers of three hours each as
follows :
1st Paper Physics and Chemistry.
2nd Paper Biology and Chemistry.
(NOTE. Each paper will consist of eight questions three of which will
be in Chemistry.)
Syllabus
General Science. Pressure at different depths in
liquid. Density, Specific Gravity. Archimedes'
Principle and applications. Flotation (Ships, Airship,
Balloons, Iceberg). Air pressure. Effects of air pres-
sure. Syringe. Simple water pump. How the pres-
sure of the air is measured. Barometer movements
and weather. Action of the football and bicycle pumps.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 285
Bicycle valve. Kites, aeroplanes. Steam pressure.
Force on piston of steam engine. Simple manometer.
Light. Rectilinear propagation of light. Eclipses of
sun and moon. Candle-power. Plane mirrors. Laws
of reflection. Images in spherical mirrors (no formulae).
Refraction. Magnify ing glass. Camera. Telescope.
Microscope. Dispersion. Colour.
Sound. Nature of waves on water surface. Sound
waves in air, wave length. Frequency. Gramophone
Klaxon horn. The human voice.
Electricity. Electrification. Electroscope. Con-
ductors and insulators. Magnets. Polarity. Earth's
Magnetism. Compass needle. Cells and batteries.
Electro-magnet. Electric Bell. Telegraph. Simple
galvanometer. Heating and chemical effects of a cur-
rent. Electric light.
Heat. Sources of heat. Expansion of solids, liquids,
and gases. Effects of expansion ; platinum and glass ;
pendulums. Thermometers. Air, clinical, maximum
and minimum thermometers. Effects of salt on melt-
ing point. Freezing mixtures. Effect of salt and pres-
sure on boiling point. Transference of heat. Davy
lamp. Winds. Cold nights with cloudless sky. Ther-
mos-flask. Units of heat. Measuring of specific and
latent heat. Cold on evaporation. Heat on compres-
sion. Snow. Hail. Humidity. Change of volume on
melting. Freezing of ponds. Change of volume on
boiling ; hence steam pressure.
Chemistry. Solutions in water and other liquids.
Crystallization. Slow and rapid evaporation. Saturated
.solutions. Elements, compounds, and mixtures. Study
of the atmosphere. Oxygen and Nitrogen. Combustion;
.slow and rapid. Flame. Water. Properties of Hydrogen.
Ammonia. Limestone. Properties of sodium carbonate
286 OALENDA 1928-29
and caustic soda. Mortar and cement. Hard and soft
waters. Acids. Bases. Salts. Atoms and molecules^
Chemical symbols. Conservation of mass. Carbon :
Properties and varieties. Carbon dioxide. How plants
use air. Respiration. Coal gas. Coal-tar products. Sul-
phur: properties and varieties. Sulphur dioxide. Chlorine.
Hydrochloric acid. Phosphorus. Matches. Common
salt. Properties of metals, non-metals. Alloys* Iron
and steel. Petroleum : how obtained and properties.
Soap. Sugar. Glass.
Biology. A. LIFE OF ANIMALS, BASED ON THE FROG
(1) External parts and their work.
(2) Internal parts and their work
(a) Digestive system : food and digestion ; uses
of food.
(6) Circulatory system and blood : work of the
blood and need for circulation.
(c) Lungs and breathing.
(d) Kidneys and excretion.
(e) Nervous system : sensation and the special
senses.
(/) Muscles and movement.
(g) Bones and support.
(h) Reproductive system and reproduction.
(3) Mode of life.
(4) Life history o the frog.
B. GENERAL SURVEY OF THE ANIMAL KINGDOM.
Illustrated mainly by local animals.
C. LIFE OF PLANTS. Based mainly on mustard
(or bean plant)
(1) Various forms of plants : trees, shrubs, herbs,
climbing plants, parasites, non-green plants.
Parts of the plant and their work
{a) Leaves : manufacture of food ; loss of water
to air.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 28T
Stem : carrying water and food : support of
leaves.
(c) Root : collecting water and salts from the
soil ; holding the plant in position.
(d) Storage of excess food ; provides food for
man.
(e) Flower : reproduction ; pollination ; fruits
and the scattering of seeds.
(/) The view plant in the seed ; germination.
(3) Production of new plants from stems and roots.
(4) Response of plants to light and moisture.
D. GENERAL, SURVEY OF THE PLANT KINGDOM.
Illustrated mainly by local plants.
E. THE VALUE OF PLANTS AND ANIMALS TO MAN.
Food, fuel, clothes, power, building materials, medicines
pleasure, destruction of waste materials (dogs, jackals,
crows, bacteria, fungi).
F. ANIMALS AND PLANTS THAT ARE HARMFUL TO
MAN
(1) That feed on man and animals : ticks, lice,
fleas, bedbugs, mosquitoes, intestinal worms.
(2) That feed on plants : insects that destroy culti-
vated plants.
(3) That cause disease in man and animals : ani-
mal parasites (malaria parasite, kala azar,
hookworm) and bacteria (cholera, plague,
small-pox, tuberculosis, rabies, etc.).
(4) That cause diseases in plants : parasitic fungi
(mildews, smuts, rusts, etc.).
(5) That carry disease : insects (flies, fleas, sandflies,
mosquitoes) ; rats.
(6) That destroy property : rats ; white-ants ;
bacteria and molds in food ; wood-rotting fungi,
etc.
288 CALENDAR 1928-29
(7) Control of parasites disease-producing organisms
and other pests ; by nature (birds and insect-
eating insects) and by man.
G. STRUCTURE OF THE HUMAN BODY AND FUNCTION
OF THE PARTS
(1) Digestive system : food (sources, selection and
preparation) ; digestion ; habits of eating ;
care of the teeth ; harmful things (ganja,
tobacco, opium, alcohol).
(2) Heart, blood vessels, and blood : exercise.
(3) Lungs and breathing : pure air, ventilation.
(4) The skin, and protection : perspiration and
temperature regulation ; clothing ; bathing.
(5) Nervous system : brain and nerves ; special
senses and their care.
(6) Excretion : relation to health of the individual
and the community.
(7) Reproductive system and sex hygiene : res-
ponsibility of the individual to himself and to
the race.
(8) Good habits of thought and action.
H. HEALTHFUL SURROUNDINGS
(1) Drainage and disposal of waste materials.
(2) Water-supply and its protection.
(3) Care of food.
(4) Breeding places for harmful insects and other
animal pests.
(5) Making the home and community healthful and
beautiful.
I. INTERDEPENDENCE OF PLANTS AND ANIMALS
(1) Plants as food for animals : grazing lands.
(2) Animal products and remains used again by
plants.
(3) Plants and animals living together in com-
munities ; plants as the home for animals.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1993 289
(4) Domestication of animals and cultivation of
plants.
(5) The warfare against injurious plants and ani-
mals.
(6) Human society, the crowning achievement of
the world of life.
(7) The unity of life.
Practical work.
The following list of experiments indicates the mini-
mum amount of practical work required to be done by
each student. Other experiments of equal educational
value may be substituted. It should be possible for
most teachers to get their students to perform addi-
tional experiments. The experiments should be per-
formed individually as far as can be arranged. The
teaching of theory should be fully illustrated by experi-
ments and demonstrations are to be considered an
essential part of the teacher's work. The course in
Biology will not require extensive expenditure on equip-
ment and materials. Practically all materials can be
collected from the local fauna and flora. No microscopic
work is expected to be done individually by the pupils ;
only that may be done by demonstration on the part of
the teacher, when he believes it will add to the effective-
ness of the work.
NOTE. A chart giving a list of the experiments to be performed and
the date on which each student completes each experiment should be
maintained and hung in the laboratory at each school recognised in General
Science.
General. To show that the weight of a floating body
is equal to the weight of the liquid displaced (using a
loaded test tube in a graduated jar with different liquids)..
Determination of the radius of a wire by Archimedes'
Principle.
290 CALENDAR 1928-29
Determination of the relative density of (a) bodies
which sink in water, (b) liquids.
To measure (a) the pressure of the lungs, (b) gas supply
(if any).
Light. Reflection at a plane mirror.
Focal length of (a) concave mirror, (6) convex lens by
parallel rays method.
Relation between image and object produced by (a)
concave mirror, (b) convex Ions (no calculations).
Refractive index of glass and liquids.
Refraction through a prism.
Heat. Cooling curve of water and wax.
Determination of the apparent expansion of water
(by heating water in a flask and noting rise in level of
surface).
To compare heat required to melt ice and to boil water*
To show that the loss of heat of one body is equal to
the gain of heat in another.
Determination of specific heat of a solid.
Magnetism. To map lines of force by a small mag-
net. Charging an electroscope.
Magnetic effect of a current.
Chemistry. To observe the action of water on
sodium, sodium chloride, potassium nitrate, sodium
carbonate, copper sulphate.
To observe the action of heat on potassium nitrate,
calcium carbonate, copper sulphate, iron, zinc, tin, lead,
mercury, sulphur, phosphorus.
To determine the change in weight due to oxidization
when a substance is sufficiently heated in air.
To find the proportion of oxygen and nitrogen in air.
To prepare oxygen from potassium chlorate and study
its properties.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 201
To prepare hydrogen from zinc and sulphuric acid and
study its properties.
To prepare chlorine from manganese dioxide and
hydrochloric acid and to study its properties.
To prepare hydrochloric acid from sodium chloride
and sulphuric acid.
To prepare ammonia gas from ammonium chloride
and quicklime and study its properties.
To prepare carbon dioxide from limestone and
hydrochloric acid and study its properties.
To prepare coal gas.
To find the volume of oxygen given off by heating 15
grams of potassium chlorate.
Biology. A. Observation of living frogs : habits
and mode of life.
Demonstration o more important features of the
internal parts. Students should sketch easier parts.
Observation of life history in the field and in the
laboratory.
B. Demonstration of common representatives of
animal kingdom. Students should be encouraged to
collect materials ; should be developed as a museum
activity,
C. Collection and sketching of common plant forms.
Study and sketch parts of plant. No microscopic
work, except such demonstration as the teacher may
think desirable.
Simple experiments, mainly demonstrations, to show
1. Accumulation of food (starch) in leaves exposed
to light.
2. That water is lost through the leaves.
3. That plants require a continuous supply of
water.
4. That water rises through the stem.
292 OAI.ENDAB 1928-29
5. That CO 3 is given off during respiration.
6. That plants grown in darkness are not green,
but become green upon exposure to light.
7. That stems grow toward light, and roots toward
moisture.
8. Tests of plant parts for food substances. Pro-
cess of germination ; study and sketch (bean,
chana, castor bean).
D. Demonstration of common representatives of
plant kingdom. The project to be developed as for
animals (B).
E. Observation of the uses man makes of plants
and animals : the parts that are used ; the general
method of preparation ; the value of more important
Indian products.
P. Collection of animal and human parasites ; obser-
vation of their habits, and of their adaptations for such
a mode of life.
Observation and collection of insects that feed on cul-
tivated plants : at what stage in the life history of the
sect is the damage done ?
Collection of fungus diseases of plants, especially of
crop plants ; a study of the damage they cause.
Collection of animals that carry disease : their habits
and life histories.
Observation, collection, and study of plants and
animals that destroy property.
Methods of control of plant and animal pests. (One
of the most important aims in the study of the life his-
tory is to find some means for controlling pests.)
Control of bacteria by heat, cold, drying, chemicals.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION OF 1931 293
G. Test for CO 2 in exhaled air ; the need for venti-
lation ; whether ventilation is sufficient in home and
school.
Consideration of the various kinds of exercise, and
their value.
Consideration of clothes : various kinds ; various
materials ; purpose and value.
H. Study the drainage of the school premises, the
home ; and the village or city. How can the drainage
be improved ?
Study of various sources of water-supply ; see how
they are polluted. How improved. Danger of polluted
water.
Study, preparation and care of food in the home ;
in the bazar. Sources of contamination, and methods
of protection. Dangers of dirty food.
Study of breeding places of mosquitoes, flies, rats.
Study of life history of mosquito and house fly in
nature and in the laboratory. Methods of control.
I. Trips out into the field for the study of nature
should be as frequent as possible. The life of plants
and animals should be observed in nature as far as pos-
sible, especially to see the inter-relations and inter-
dependence of plant and animal life. What the pupils
see will depend largely on the teacher.
The following book is recommended :
Experimental Science for Indian Schools, by Gregory
and Hodges. (Macmillan & Co.), Rs. 3.
Recommended for the use of the teachers :
Life by Shipley (Macmillan & Co.).
19
294 CALENDAR 1928-29
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931.
The following grouping of subjects is approved for
the guidance of students and teachers. The subjects
have been so grouped that, while providing a sound
general education, suitable as an introduction to Uni-
versity studies, they should also fit the students to
enter upon higher specialized courses in technical and
professional institutions :
General Arts. Mathematics, Economics, *Civics,
Geography, Drawing, a Modern In-
dian or European Language, Logic, a
Classical Language, History and Allied
Geography, Histories of Greece and
Rome and Allied Geography. (Any
three should be taken.)
General Science. Mathematics, Drawing, Chem-
istry, Physics, Biology, Geo-
graphy, Economics. (Any
three should be taken.)
For Medicine. Chemistry, Physics, and Biology.
For Engineering. Mathematics, Physics, and Chem-
istry.
For Teaching. (1) History, Civics, and Geography.
(2) History, Geography, and Mathe-
matics.
(3) History, Geography and (Physio-
logy, Hygiene, and Child-Study)
(women students).
(4) Geography, Mathematics and
(Physiology, Hygiene, and Chil-
Study) (women students).
* Student* taking Civics are advised also to take History.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 295
(5) Geography (or Mathematics), Bio-
logy and (Physiology, Hygiene
and Child-Study) (women stu-
dents).
(6) History, Geography, and Econo-
mics.
(7) Mathematics, Geography, and
Economics (or Drawing).
(8) Mathematics, Physics, and Chem-
istry.
(9) Mathematics, Physics, and Bio-
(10) Chemistry, Physics, and Biology.
(11) Biology, Physics (or Chemistry)
and Drawing.
(12) (Physiology, Hygiene, and Child-
Study), a Classical language and
History or Geography or Mathe-
matics (women students).
(13) (Physiology, Hygiene and Child-
Study), Drawing and Biology or
Geography or a Classical Langu-
age (women students).
ENGLISH.
There will be one paper of three hours on the pre-
scribed Prose course and a second paper of three hours on
the prescribed Poetry course ; and in each paper there
will be one question on " Unseen " passages. The prose
paper will contain one or more prose unseens and the
poetry paper will contain one or more poetical unseens.
A third paper of three hours will include (a) transla-
tion from a Modern Indian language into English, and
(b) a narrative or descriptive piece of composition in
296 CALENDAK 1928-29
English. In the case of candidates who offer English as
their mother-tongue the third paper will consist of an
Essay, together with questions on English composition
and on the history of English literature from 1500. as in
Hudson's Outline History of English Literature (Bell
& Co.)
NOTES. 1. In the case of books prescribed for detailed study candidates
will be expected to show a close familiarity with the text, including mean-
ing of words, construction of sentences, historical and other allusions, as
well as knowledge and understanding of the subject-matter. They should
be able to indicate contexts and to paraphrase and explain any difficult
passages in simple and correct English.
2. In the case of books prescribed for general study detailed knowledge-
of the text will not be required, but candidates will be expected to show that
they have read the course with intelligence and with some appreciation.
Books prescribed
Prose (a) For detailed study
1. A Book of English Prose by P. Seshadri (Oxford
University Press) (omitting the Convalescent ;
the Beautiful ; Dr. Skinner ; El Dorado ; the
Dedicated Life ; War).
2. Sou they '$ Life of Nelson (abridged edition, by
the Indian Press, Ltd., Allahabad).
(b) For general study
1. Kingsley's Hereward the Wake (abridged edi-
tion, by the Indian Press, Ltd., Allahabad, or
by Messrs. Blackie & Sons).
2. A Round of Tales, selected by Henry and Treble
(Oxford University Press), price Re. 1 as. 6.
Poetry (a) For detailed study
1. Arnold Sohrab and Rustam.
2. The following from Palgrave's Golden Treasury,.
(Oxford University Press), (Indian edition,
price Re. 1), are prescribed :
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OP 1931 297
Shakespeare " When to the sessions of sweet
silent thought."
" Let me not to the marriage of
true minds."
" Since brass, nor stone, nor
earth, nor boundless sea."
Keats " La Belle Dame Sans Merci."
Milton " On his blindness."
"Captain, or Colonel, or Knight in
Arms."
Tennyson " Ring out, wild bells."
" Tears, idle tears"
" The splendour falls on castle
walls."
Wordsworth " The world is too much with us."
ki Upon Westminster Bridge."
3. Tagorc (Macmillan's Poems from Tagore)
k4 Where the mind is free."
" Traveller, must you go."
*' The fair was on before the temple."
" The Champa Flower."
(6) For general study
Shakespeare " As You Like It."
NOTES. (a) Half the total of marks will be allotted to the portions
for detailed study, 30 per cent, to the portions for general study, and 20 per
cent, to Unseen Passages and Grammar.
(6) Grammatical questions will be asked, including Parsing, Analysis,
the Sequence of Tenses and conversion of the Direct and Indirect forms
of speech.
(c) The attention of candidates is drawn to the fact that examiners
have been instructed to deduct marks for inaccuracy in English.
MATHEMATICS.
There will be three papers of three hours each ; one
paper in Algebra and Trigonometry, a second in Mensu-
ration and Pure and Analytical Geometry, and a third
on Elementary Dynamics.
298 CALENDAR 1928-29
(1) (a) Algebra. Quadratic equations involving two
or more unknown quantities ; the theory of quadratic
equations and of expressions of the second degree ; surd&
and imaginary expressions ; arithmetical, geometrical
and harmonical progressions ; permutations and combina-
tions ; theory of indices and logarithms, proof of binomial
theorem for a positive integral index and the use of bino-
mial and exponential theorems for any index.
(6) Trigonometry. Including solution of triangles
and simple problems on inscribed, circumscribed., and
ascribed circles.
(2) (a) Pure Geometry. Loci ; proportion and simi-
larity ; radical axis of two circles ; simple properties of
pole and polar ki respect of a circle ; simple properties,
of parabola.
(6) Analytical Geometry. Straight line, pair of straight
lines, circle (including radical axis and pole and polar);
equation to parabola in form y2=4 ax and simple proper-
ties deduced therefrom ; simple properties of tangents
and normals to the ellipse deduced from the equation
?L_L=I. (Oblique cartesian and polar co-ordinates
2 &,
will not be required.)
(c) Mensuration of Solids. Surfaces and volumes of
parallelepipeds and right prisms, pyramids, circular
cylinders and cones, spheres, and spherical segments;
frusta of pyramids, cones, and spheres.
The use of Trigonometry and Logarithms will be
permitted in solving numercial examples.
(3) Dynamics and Statics. Velocity, composition
of velocities ; relative velocity ; acceleration, rectilinear
motion under uniform acceleration, composition of
accelerations ; Newton's Laws of motion ; rectilinear
motion under gravity in a vertical and down an inclined
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OP 1931 299
plane ; motion of two masses connected by a string pass-
ing over a pulley ; projectiles ; direct impact of smooth
bodies ; definition and calculation of kinetic energy ;
co-planer forces, parallel and non-parallel, and their
composition ; equilibrium of a body under three forces ;
moments ; conditions of equilibrium of a body under
a system of co-planar forces and simple examples ;
centre of gravity ; friction ; work and power ; simple
machines (lever, balance, system of pulleys, wheel and
axle).
The following books are suggested (not prescribed)
in addition to more elementary text-books :
1. School Algebra, H. S. Hall, Parts I III.
2. School Algebra, Part II, by Paterson (Clarendon
Press).
3. Elementary Algebra, Part II, by P. Ross (Long-
mans).
4. Hall and Steven's School Geometry, Part VI.
5. Co-ordinate Geometry, Smith or Loney (Mac-
millan).
6. Elements of Statics and Dynamics by Loney
(Cambridge University Press).
7. Higher Algebra, Chapters I XVII, by Hall
and Knight (Macmillan).
8. Intermediate Trigonometry, by C. C. Ghosh
(Macmillan).
9. Plane Trigonometry, Part I, by S. L. Loney
(Macmillan).
CHEMISTRY.
(N.B. Candidates will be required to pass in the theoretical as well as
practical part of each Science subject.)
There will be two papers of three hours each and a
practical examination. The first paper will include
metals and non-metals and the second paper general
Chemistry and organic Chemistry.
300 CALENDAR 1928-29
The following syllabus is prescribed :
The course for the High School Examination of 1931
with the following additions :
Elementary and compound substances, mixtures,
.solution, chemical action, the laws of definite and mul-
tiple proportions, simple methods of the determination
of equivalent weights, atoms, molecules, atomic and
molecular weights, vapour density, the atomic theory
and Avogadro's hypothesis,' combination of gases by
volume.
Valency, relation between equivalent and atomic
weights, simple methods of determination of atomic
weights, Dulong and Petit's law. Boyle's law, Charles'
law, vapour pressure, diffusion.
Chemical symbols, formulae and equations, cal-
culations of an easy nature.
Oxidation and reduction.
Elementary ideas as to the nature of dissociation in
gases and electrolytic dissociation theory.
The outlines of the Periodic law studied from elements
prescribed in the course.
Preparation and important properties of the follow-
ing elements and compounds and proofs of the composi-
tion of the compounds marked* :
Hydrogen, oxygen, water*, ozone, hydrogen dioxide,
nitrogen, the atmosphere*, the effects of animal and
vegetable life upon its composition, ammonia*, nitric
acid and nitrates, nitrous acid and nitrites, nitrous*
and nitric* oxides, nitrogen peroxide, carbon, carbon*
dioxide, carbon* monoxide, elementary ideas about
combustion and structure of flame, coal gas, chlorine,
hydrochloric* acid, the chlorides, chlorine peroxide,
chloric acid and chlorates, bromine, iodine, their hydra-
cids and salts.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 301
Sulphur, *hydrogen sulphide, *sulphur dioxide and
trioxide, sulphuric acid and the sulphates, sulphurous
acid and sulphites.
Phosphorus, hydrogen phosphide, phosphorus tri-
oxide and pentaoxide, orthophosphoric acid.
Silica, silicates of Na. K & Ca, glass.
Sodium, potassium, their hydroxides, chlorides, nit-
rates, carbonates, sulphates.
Calcium, strontium, barium, and their oxides, car-
bonates, sulphates, chlorides, nitrates.
Magnesium, its oxide, chloride, sulpahte, carbonate
.and nitrate.
Lead, its chloride, sulphate, nitrate, and acetate.
Copper, the outlines of its metallurgy, its oxides,
chlorides, sulphate, nitrate, and sulphides.
Iron, the outlines of its Metallurgy, its oxides (FeO,
Pe" O ! , Fe s O*), chlorides, sulphates and sulphides.
Zinc, its oxide, chloride, carbonate and sulphate.
Mercury, oxides, chlorides, nitrates, sulphide.
Aluminium, oxide, chloride, sulphate.
Arsenic, hydride, oxides, sulphides.
Antimony, hydride, oxides, chlorides, sulphides.
Tin, oxides, chlorides, sulphides.
Silver, oxide, hydroxide, chloride, bromide, iodide,
nitrate and sulphate.
Organic :
A. The preparation, typical properties, and structural
relationship of the following compounds :
Methane, ethane, ethylene, chloroform, iodoform.
Methyl alcohol and ethyl alcohol.
Formaldehyde and acetaldehyde.
Formic acid and acetic acid.
Ethyl acetate and methyl acetate.
Acetamide, acetyl chloride, acetic anhydride.
Acetylene.
302 CALENDAR 1928-29
Methylamine.
B. The simpler properties of the following :
Glycerol, acetone, ether, oxalic acid, tartaric acid r
fats, soaps, (and saponification), starch, cane
sugar, grape sugar (and fermentation), urea,
benzene, nitrobenzene, phenol, aniline, benzoic
acid.
Practical Work.
Students will be examined in Practical Chemistry.
Students are expected to perform the following
experiments in the laboratory. An account of each
experiment must be written by the student in a special
note-book, which will be liable to examination by the
examiners. This note-book should be kept in the charge
of the laboratory instructor and each account of an ex-
periment should be signed by him. The Principal of a
College will be responsible for the production of this
note-book when demanded by the proper authorities.
The practical course is as follows :
1. Such practical work as is required for the High
School Examination of 1931.
2. Analysis of simple salts soluble in water or hydro-
chloric acid composed of acids and bases mentioned in the
following list : Ag, Pb, Hg, Cu, Cd., Bi, As, Sb, Sn, Fe,
Al, Cr, Ni, Co, Zn, Mn, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Na, K, NH 4 , C1. T
Br, I, CIO, S0 4 , S0 8 , N0 3 , NO S , P0 4 , S, CO,, C 2 O 4r
acetate (dry and wet methods).
3. Preparation and purification of simple salts in-
volving no special difficulty.
4. Simple gravimetric and volumetric estimations,
such as estimation of alkali, acids, and alkaline carbo-
nates by titration, and simple gravimetric experiments
such as change in mass on oxidation of magnesium,.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 30&
change of weight on heating (1) barium chloride, (2)
copper carbonate, and (3) ferrous ammonium sulphate.
5. Determination of melting and boiling points.
6. Qualitative detection of nitrogen, sulphur, chlo-
rine, bromine or iodine, alone, or together, in an organic
compound.
Books suggested
1. SHENSTONE : Inorganic Chemistry (Arnold).
2. ROSCOE AND LUNT : Elementary Inorganic Che-
mistry.
3. ROSCOE AND HARDEN : Inorganic Chemistry for
advanced students.
4. A Class-book of Organic Chemistry, by J. B.
Cohen.
5. Organic Chemistry, Part I, by Perkin and Kip-
ping. (W. and R. Chambers).
6. DONINGTON'S Class-book of Chemistry, Parts
14.
7. HOLMYARD'S Inorganic Chemistry (Arnold). 6s..
M.
8. HOLMYARD : Practical Chemistry (Bell & Sons,
Ltd.). 4s.
9. OSCROFT : Inorganic Chemistry, for Upper
Forms (Bell & Sons, Ltd.), 6s. 6d.
10. MALVEA : Practical Chemistry for Intermediate
Colleges (Indian Press, Allahabad). Rs. 2.
1 1 . NEWTH : Chemical Lecture Experiments for tea-
chers' use (Messrs. Longmans, Green & Co.).
(latest edition). Price 8s. 6d.
12. HOLMYARD : Introduction to Organic Chemis-
try (Arnold).
13. BRUCE AND HARPER : Practical Chemistry, edi-
tion 1925 (Macmillan).
304 CALENDAR 1928-29
PHYSICS.
(N.B. Candidates will be required to pass in the theoretical as well
^as practical part of each Science subject.)
There will be two papers of three hours each as fol-
lows :
1st Paper Properties of Matter, Heat, and Light.
2nd Paper Sound, Electricity, and Magnetism.
The following syllabus is recommended :
General properties of matter. Fundamental units and
their measurement, Principle of Balance, Verniers, Calli-
pers, Screw -gauge, Spherometer, Volume, Density, Speci-
fic gravity, Fluid pressure, Principle of Archimedes,
Nicholson's hydrometer, Barometer, Boyle's law, Pumps,
Siphon, Elementary notions of volume, elasticity, and
Young's modulus in the case of solids. Isothermal and
adia- batic elasticities of gases. Gravitation, simple
harmonic motion. Pendulum. Value of " g ".
H eat. Temperature . Thermometers . Calorimetry .
Specific heat. Latent heat. Expansion of solids, liquids,
and gases. Vapour pressure. Hygrometry. Change of
state. Laws of unsaturated and saturated vapours.
Conduction. Convection. Radiation. Reflection and
absorption of heat. Isothermal and adiabatic changes.
Specific heat at constant volume and constant pressure.
Relation of heat to work. Determination of J.
Light. Laws of propagation. Reflection and refrac-
tion from plane and spherical surfaces. Dispersion.
Spectra. Fraunhofer's lines. Telescope. Microscope.
Spectrometer. Photometry. Phosphorescence. Fluo-
rescence. Velocity of light.
Sound. Transverse and longitudinal waves. Nature
of sound waves. Intensity, Pitch. Quality. Mode
of propagation. Reflection. Refraction, Stationary
waves. Beats. Resonance. Vibrations of strings and air
columns. Monochord and organ pipes. Determination
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931
of velocity in solids, liquids, and gases. Musical scale.
The gramophone.
Electricity and Magnetism. Magnetisation. Perma-
nent magnets. Magnetic induction. Unit of magnetism.
Magnetic field. Lines of force and lines of induction.
Tangent A and B positions of Gauss. Deflection and
vibration magnetometers. Magnetic moments. Earth
as a Magnet. Magnetic elements. H. Declination and
Dip and their determinations. Electrostatic unit of
quantity. Coulomb's law of force. Electric field. Gold
leaf electroscope. Surface density Potential. Capacity.
Leyden jar. Capacity of a parallel plate condenser.
Electrophorus. Wimshurst's machine.
Voltaic cell. Electric current and its magnetic effects.
E. M. unit of current. Galvanometers. Ammeters.
Voltmeters. Ohm's law and its verification. Unit of
resistance and Potential difference. Specific resistance.
Practical and absolute units. Determination of resis-
tance. Wheatstoiie's bridge. P. 0. Box. Heating
effect of current. Joule's law. Determination of J.
Electric glow lamp. Electric arcs. Chemical effects
of current. Faraday's laws of Electrolysis. Electro-
chemical equivalent. Voltameters. Electro -magnetic re-
lations. Electro-magnetic induction. Induction coil.
Simple dynamo. Motor. Electric Telegraph. Telephone.
Microphone. Thermopile. X-ray.
Books suggested
1 . A Text-book of Physics by R. S. Willows (Messrs.
Arnold & Co.).
2. Everyday Physics by H. E. Hadley (Macmillan
& Co., Rs. 4.)
There will be also an examination in practical work.
The laboratory course is indicated by the subjoined
list of experiments. An account of each experiment
306 CALENDAR 1928-29
must be written by the student in a special note-book
which will be examined. The account of each experi-
ment should be signed by the Demonstrator, and the
books should be kept in his charge.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS.
Mechanics
Applications of the Traiangle of Forces.
Equilibrium of Parallel forces.
Principle of Momemts.
Determination of co-efficient of Friction.
" g " by the pendulum.
Nicholson's hydrometer.
General properties of Matter
Measurements of mass by the balance.
Use of the Spherometer.
Screw Gauge.
Callipers.
Reading the Barometer.
Heat
Testing fixed points of Thermometers.
Determination of Specific Heats.
Latent Heats.
Construction of a graph illustrating the rate of cooling
of a liquid.
Verification of Boyle's law.
Determination of the co-efficient of linear expansion.
Light
Reflection and refraction of light at plane and spheri-
cal surfaces.
Determination of refractive indices.
Focal lengths of mirrors and lenses.
JSound
Determination of the velocity of sound by resonance.
the frequency of a fork by sonometer*
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 307
Magnetism
Mapping out lines of force by a small magnet.
Determination of neutral points in a magnetic field.
Comparison of magnetic moments by the magneto-
meter.
Comparison of njagnetic fields by a vibrating magnet.
Electricity
Variation of magnetic force at centre of a coil with
radius, number of turns, and strength of current.
Determination of resistance by the use of Wheat-
stone's wire bridge.
Determination of resistance by the use of Ammeter
.and Voltmeter.
Combination of cells in series and parallel.
Comparison of electromotive forces by the potentio-
meter.
Detailed accounts of the method of performing
the above experiments will be found in either Willow's
Text-book of Physics or in any Intermediate course of
Practical Physics such as Schuster and Lees.
BIOLOGY.
There will be two papers of three hours each and a
practical examination : the first paper on Zoology and
the second paper on Botany.
The following syllabus is prescribed. Instructions
for the teaching of Biology are appended :
I. Zoology.
(N.B. -Candidates will be required to pass in the theoretical as well
-as practical part of each Science subject.)
A. Living and non-living matter. The distinctive
properties of living matter (protoplasm), and its chemical
composition. The structure and life-history of Amoeba
and malaria-parasite as examples of the Protozoa. A
general conception of the structure and phenomena of
308 CALENDAR 1928-29
the animal cell ; direct and indirect qell division. The*
union of cells to form tissues and the combination of
tissues to form organs.
B. The structure of Hydra as an example of the
Metazoa. The principle of the physiological division of
labour and the correlated differentiation of structure.
0. The structure and bionomics of an Indian earth-
worm, as an example of a segmented animal.
D. The structure of the cockroach as a type of
Arthropoda. A general survey of the life-history of
the mosquito and house-fly, and their economic im-
portance.
E. The general characters of the Chordata.
F. The general anatomy, histology, and physiology
of the various systems or organs in the frog.
G. An elementary knowledge of the anatomy and
osteology of the rabbit or other common mammal. The
brain and eye of the sheep, and the skull of the dog may
be substituted for those of the rabbit.
H. A general classification of the animal kingdom
with the characteristics of the principal phyla.
I. Reproduction, sexual and asexual ; ova and
spermatozoa ; oogenesis and spermatogenesis. The ele-
mentary facts of the fertilisation and segmentation of
the ovum, the outlines of the development and larval
history of the frog, the three primary germ-layers and the
organs derived from them.
II. Botany.
(N.B. Candidates will be required to pass in the theoretical as well as-
practical part of each Science subject.)
A. The structure and germination of seeds, the
morphology of the root stem and leaf. The chief types
of floral structures. The chief types of inflorescene and
the common types of fruits.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 30&
B. The parts of a typical vegetable cell, the cell
contents and their microchemical reactions, the division
of a cell, the chief types of plant tissues. A compara-
tive study of the internal structure of the root, stem
and leaf of the Angiosperms. The structure of the re-
productive organs of the Angiosperms.
O. The structure of Bacillus subtilis and the modes-
of nutrition among the Bacteria.
D. The structure, physiology, and life-histories of
Ulothrix, Spirogyra, Mucor and yeast.
E. The structure and life -histories of a moss and a
fern, and the phenomenon of alteration of generations.
F. The life-history of Angiosperms. General struc-
ture of flowers and fruits, recognition and economic
importance of the following families : -
Cruciferae, Malvaceae, Lcguminosae, Compositae, and
Liliaceae.
G. An outline of the classification of the vegetable
kingdom to illustrate grades of structure and methods
of reproduction.
H. Elementary plant physiology ; stability of
the plant body ; the usual constituents of plant food ;
assimilation ; transpiration ; respiration ; the main facts
about growth ; the chief types of movements.
Practical Work.
Students are expected to keep a record of all practi-
cal work in a special laboratory sketch-book, which
will be liable to examination by the examiners. The
laboratory instructors should sign the result of each
day's practical work.
A. The microscopical study of Amoeba and Hydra ;
the study of Hydra by means of transverse and longitu-
dinal sections.
20
310 CALENDAR 1928-29
The general dissection of the earthworm, cockroach,
-and frog ; life-history of the mosquito ; a microscopical
study of the chief animal tissues from fresh or prepared
preparations of muscle, nerve, cartilage, bone, blood,
and connective tissue ; the microscopical study of the
earthworm by means of fresh preparations and trans-
verse sections ; a microscopical examination of the kidney,
liver, spinal cord, stomach, ovary, and testis of the frog.
The skeleton of the frog.
The osteology of the rabbit, substituting the skull
of the dog for that of the rabbit, and the dissection
of the alimentary, vascular, and reproductive systems
of that animal.
B. The dissection of plants and parts of plants ;
the preparation, simple staining and study of micros-
copical sections of plants. A practical study by mic-
roscopical examination and otherwise of bacteria, yeast,
iSyirogyra, Ulothrix, Mucor, a moss, a fern, and the
vegetative and reproductive organs of Angiosperms
treated in an elementary manner.
The description of a flowering plant and its parts in
semi-technical language.
(Where fresh material cannot be obtained recourse
should be had to prepared specimens).
Text-books suggested :
1. PARKER and BHATIA : Elementary Course of
Practical Zoology. (Macmillan.)
2. HOLMES : Biology of the Frog. (Second edition).
3. MARSHALL and HURST Practical Zoology.
(Murray.)
4. RANGKACHARI : Hand-book of Botany for India
(Varadachary and Company, Madras, 1925).
5. GAGER : Fundamentals of Botany. (Blakiston).
6. HXJXLEY : Elementary Physiology. (Macmillan).
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 311
7. SHIPLEY : Life. (Macmillan).
8. TBANSEAU : General Botany (World Book Com-
pany, New York).
t). BAHL, K. N. : Indian Zoological Memoirs. I,
Pheretima (Methodist Publishing House, Luck-
now) 1926. Es. 1-8-0.
10. SMITH, OVERTON and OTHERS : Text-book of
General Botany (second edition), (Macmillan
and Company).
APPENDIX.
Instructions for the, teaching of Biology.
1. The teacher must consider the purpose for which
he teaches Biology to prepare students for the univer-
sity, for medical and forest colleges, and for more intel-
ligent and more joyful living. Biology deals with the
world of life surrounding the student, and every effort
should be made to present Biology as a living subject,
rather than as a vast mass of unrelated and (to the stu-
dents) often meaningless facts to be memorized.
2. Teachers may take more liberty in teaching
Biology than has been considered possible in the past.
They should feel that they are not too rigidly bound by
the syllabus. Much of what is commonly accepted as
the interpretation of the syllabus, and as the proper
content of Biology, is a tradition from the past. Teachers
may, to a much larger extent, determine for themselves
what they are to regard as the proper things to include
in their teaching, and the proper emphasis to be given
to these things ; the syllabus will then become a friendly
guide.
312 CALENDAR 1928-29
3. The syllabus is a record of work that ought to be?
covered, and the teacher may take up the various topics
in whatever order he thinks best.
4. The additional items in the new syllabus are not
intended to enlarge the syllabus, but to shift the em-
phasis given to the various parts of it. For instance,
it is not intended that the cockroach shall be studied in
minute detail, but that it shall be made the basis for
acquaintance with the great assemblage of arthropods.
The* mosquito is to illustrate metamorphosis, and is used
because of the great importance of mosquitoes to man,
because it can be observed anywhere*, and because it
can be readily reared in the laboratory. The mosquito
is to illustrate also the carrying of disease by insects,
and the malaria-parasite is an illustration of a disease
producing organism transmitted by an insect. The
economic arid bionomic importance of these animals
is to be emphasized, rather than complete details of
their structure.
Likewise, it is intended to allow considerable freedom
to the teacher by permitting the use of mammalian types
that are most readily available. The purpose is to
become acquainted with the characteristic features of
mammalian anatomy, rather than with minute details
of one animal only, to the exclusion of all others.
In Botany more emphasis should be put on what
plants do, and how they work, than on extensive study
of various growth forms, which have little meaning for
the students unless correlated with the great problems
ol plant economy. Moss is added to the syllabus as a
simple, clear, and easily accessible plant illustrating
sex organs and alteration of generations ; it should be
treated from this point of view, and no effort should be
made to consider its anatomy in the detail usually re-
garded necessary in the fern.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 313
DRAWING
There will be two papers, each of three hours' dura-
tion : the first paper on Solid Geometrical Drawing and
the second paper on Free Arm Memory Drawing.
Syllabus
Free Arm. In Pastels on Tinted Paper or Water
Colours on white Cartridge paper.
Progressive work in groups of the common objects
listed for High Schools such as
Plate of Oranges, Tomatoes, and Bananas ; Candle-
stick and Matches, Ink-pot and Pen, Gloy Bottle and
Brush ; Bundles of Fire- wood ; Glass of Water or Milk,
Chinese Lantern, Liquids in Bottles ; Umbrellas, etc.
Nature Study Advanced. The more difficult Flowers,
Bunches of Flowers, Leaves with Fruit and Flowers,
Compound Leaves.
The above, which is but suggestive, will involve
instruction in the art of blending colours, colour har-
monies, colour schemes and shadows, together with
technicalities such as tint-softening, blending, direct
colouring, light tint on dark and dark on light, use of
opaque colours and backgrounds.
Memory Drawing (a) Object such as listed above
which may be placed before students for a
limited period, after which the object shall
be taken away and the drawing made.
(6) The drawing of some familiar and common
objects entirely from memory.
A number of small objects may be placed once a
week on a covered up tray, exposed, say, for ten seconds,
and the class be asked to write down as many objects
as they remember to have seen.
Text-books recommended. Pastel work, vois. 1 and
II, by H. A. Bankin (Messrs. Isaac Pitman & Sons).
Price Ks. 4 per vol
314 CALENDAR 1928-29
Materials. As for the High School Examination of
1931 (Free Arm.)
Geometrical. Solid Geometry, simple solids, plans,
elevations, sections and sectional elevations of such,
isometric orthographical projection, elementary pers-
pective drawing, and all forms of Plain and Diagonal
Scales.
Text-books and Materials. As for the High School
Examination of 1931 (Geometrical).
ECONOMICS.
There shall be two papers of three hours each. The
first paper shall cover Production, Consumption and Tax-
ation, and the second paper Exchange and Distribu-
tion.
Introductory.
Subject-matter. Relation to other sciences. The
development of Economic life.
Production.
Relation between wants and production. The fac-
tors of production.
Land. Natural resources of India. Soil and Cli-
mate. Sources of power. Raw materials.
Labour. Density and distribution of population in
India. Health and vital statistics. Occupations.
Capital (fixed and circulating.) Building and machin-
ery. Means of communication and transportation in
India. Irrigation.
Organization (management plus enterprise). Combin-
ation of the factors of production in village industries
and in factories. Efficiency of the factors of production.
Different uses and how efficiency increases. Efficiency
of labour increased by education. Division of labour
and specialization of machinery. Large scale produe-
INTEBMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 316
tion and its limitations. Diminishing and increasing
returns. Development of industrial organization. Its
relation to means of transportation. Accompanying
changes in rural industries and in agriculture in India.
Extensive and intensive cultivation.
Exchange.
Utility. Marginal and total utility. Law of dimi-
nishing utility. Law of demand. Elasticity of demand.
Barter. Conditions of barter. How both parties
gain in utility by exchange.
Exchange by sale and purchase. Demand and
supply schedules and curves. Balancing of demand
and supply in a local market. Relation of price to ex-
penses of production. Changes in the expense of pro-
duction. The development of markets. Causes of the
extension of markets. India's imports and exports.
The machinery of exchange. Money and banking,
both to be illustrated from Indian examples (including
the Sahukari system in the villages and the Sarafi system
ii\ cities). Convertibility of paper money in India.
Cheques and Hundies (Foreign exchanges are excluded)*
Dist ibu ion.
The problem of distribution.
Rent. The law of rent as applied to India. Land
tenure in the United Provinces.
Salaries and Wages. Real and money wages. Wages
as determined by supply and demand of labour. The
standard of living. Mobility of labour in India. In-
fluence of social customs.
Interest. Net and gross interest. Mobility of capi-
tal in India. Principles of co-operative credit and its
advantages for India.
Profits. As the reward of enterprise. The field for
enterprise in India.
316 CALENDAR 1928-20
Consumption.
Satisfaction as the end of all economic activity.
Wants and their classification. Division of income
among different items of expenditure. Family budgets.
Relations of saving to spending. The social side of
.spending.
Taxation.
A description of the taxes and other sources of revenue
and items of expenditure of the Imperial Government of
Bombay, and the Province or State in which the College
is situated ; simple distinction between direct and in-
direct taxes. (Nothing of the theory of taxation is- to be
taught).
The following books should be consulted :
1. Penson. Economics of Everyday Life : Parts
1 and 2. (Cambridge University Press).
2. Moreland. Introduction to Economics for
Indian students. (Macmillan & Co.).
3. India in 1928 (the latest edition of the publi-
cation available in July, 1927, being recom-
mended), published by the Central Publicity
Office. (Chapters dealing with economic
progress only are to be read.)
4. P. Banerjee. A study of Indian Economics
(third edition, 1927). (Macmillan & Co.).
Teachers should also consult
J. V. 0. Kale. Indian Economics. (Aryabhusan
Press, Poona).
2. Marshall. Economics of Industry. (Macmil-
lan & Co.)
3. Chapman. Elementary Economics.
4. Jack. Economic Life of a Bengal District.
(Clarendon Press, Oxford.)
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 317
5. Mann. Life and Labour in a Deccan Village.
(Oxford University Press).
6. B. G. Bhatnagar. Bases of Indian Economy.
(Ram Narain Lai, Allahabad).
7. Lettice Fisher. Getting and Spending : (Collins
Clear Type Press, London.) 3s. BriL
8. R. K. Mukerjee. Groundwork of Economics*
(Longmans.)
9. Fairchild. Elements of Economics.
10. F. H. Robinson. Elements of Economics,
Books I and II.
11. Dori Lai Dubey. Elementary Indian Econo-
mics (Indian Press. Allahabad) R^. 3-12.
12. Frank O'Hara. Introduction to Economics.
13. Report on an enquiry into working class bud-
gets in Bombay by G. Findlay Shirras.
(Government of Bombay Labour office.)
Teachers should give facts and figures from the
latest edition of the Indian Year Book (" Times "
Press).
Practical Work.
Teachers should take out students to study small
industries, markets, and conditions of living in both
city and country. The principles should be
illustrated from these studies. The following is the
minimum amount of practical work that should be done
by students :
(1) Two budgets of consumption : one of an arti-
san, one of a cultivator, if possible, with the
student's own suggestions for improvement.
(2) Two statements showing the expenses of pro-
duction, for one month, or a longer period,
or for a fixed quantity of product, of two
small industries, with suggestions for the
improvement of the industry.
318 CALENDAR 1928-29
(3) Four diagrams illustrating the above four
statements.
(4) Two maps representing economic conditions
in India or parts of India.
Written Work.
Teachers should insist on as much written work as
possible. The following methods are suggested :
NOTE. Teachers should not usually dictate notes, hut should require
students to write out their own notes after each lecture from rough notes
taken in class and from memory. These notes should he inspected and
corrected by the teacher.
Questions. At the beginning of the lecture period
teachers should frequently give out a single question on
the work of the day before and allow the student 5 or
10 minutes to write out the answer, which should be
corrected and returned to the students.
Essays. Occasional essays may be assigned.
The following written work is the minimum to be
done by each student :
(1) Two long examinations of at least 2-| hours
each or six one period tests, or one such
examination and three such tests.
(2) Ten questions set in class to be answered in
about ten minutes each.
(3) Two essays of about ten pages, or four essays
of about five pages. (One long essay and
two short essays are advised.)
CIVICS.
There will be two papers of three hours each : the
first paper on Civic Theory and the second paper on
Indian Civics.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 319
Paper I. Civic Theory.
Syllabus
Nature of society. The state in relation to society.
Functions and structure of government, forms of gov-
ernment. The place of local institutions in political
life. Meaning of citizenship. Benefits from society,
state or local institutions to the citizen. Duties and
rights of citizenship. A citizen's participation in the
life of his town, his province, his country. A citizen's
relations with non-political associations like the colleges,
clubs, religious organizations, co-operative societies,
etc.
Books recommended :
1. Raleigh . . Elementary Politics (Oxford
University Press).
2. Lay . . . . Citizenship (Macmillan & Co.).
3. Sir Henry Jones. . Principles of Citizenship.
4. Bryce . . Hindrances to Good Citi-
zenship.
Paper II. Indian Civics.
Structure of Indian government, central and provin-
cial. Working of Indian government. Indian munici-
palities, district boards, village institutions, with par-
ticular reference to those of the United Provinces of
Agra and Oudh. Education in India. Indian social
life. Cultural movements in Modern India. National
movements in modern India.
Books recommended :
1. Harris and Garner, Civil Government (Sanyal &
Co., Calcutta).
2. G. Anderson ... British Administration.
320 CALENDAR 1928-29
3. S. M. Bosc . . Working of the Indian Consti-
tution (Oxford University
Preps).
4. Mrs. A. Besaut . . India : A. Nation.
-5. Farquhar . . Modern Religious Movements
in India.
ti. C. F. Andrews . . Renaissance in India (Ganesh
& Co., Madras).
HISTORY AND ALLIED GEOGRAPHY.
There will be two papers of three hours each.
Paper I. Indian History from the earliest time to
the present day.
Books recommended :
1. LANE-POOLE, S. : Mediaeval India (Story of
Nation's Series). (T. Fisher Unwin, Ltd.).
2. SMITH, V. A. : The Oxford History of India.
(Clarendon Press, Oxford).
3. ROBERTS, P. E. : Historical Geography of the
British Empire, Vol. VII, Parts I and II.
(Clarendon Press, Oxford).
4. Imperial Gazetteer, Vol. II.
5. R. AIYANGAB : Pre-Musalman India. (Long-
mans, Green & Co.).
6. A. YTJSTJF ALT : The making of India (A. &
C. Black, Ltd., London Agents in India,
Macmillan & Co.).
Paper II Either (a) Outlines of Modern European
History from 1500 A.D. to 1914 A.D. (excluding the War
period).
Books recommended :
1. RAMSAY MUIB : Atla o European History.
2. A. J. GRANT : History of Europe. (Long-
mans, Green & Co.).
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 321
3. THATCHER and SCHWILL : History of Europe.
(John Murray, London.)
4. J. H. ROBFNSON : History of Western Europe.
(Ginn & Co., Boston, New York, U. S. A.)
Or (b) Modern English History from 1485 A.D. to
1014 A.D. (excluding the War period).
Books recommended :
1. WARNER and MARTEN : Groundwork of English
History. (Blackie & Son., Ltd.).
2. R. B. MOWAT : A new History of Great Britain.
(Oxford University Press.)
3. S. R. GARDINER : A School Atlas of English
. History. (Longmans, Green & Co.)
HISTORIES OF GREECE AND ROME AND ALLIED GEOGRAPHY,
There will be two papers of three hours each.
Paper I. History of Greece.
Books recommended :
1. EDMONDS, C. D. : Greek History for Schools
(Cambridge University Press.)
2. J. B. BURY : Greek History for Beginners.
3. E. ABBOT : Pericles. (G. Putnam & Sons.)^
Paper II. History of Rome.
Books recommended :
1. BRYANT, E. E. : A Short History of Rome.,
(Cambridge University Press.)
2. SHCJCKBURGH : Augustus.
3. SHUCKBTTRGH : A Short History of Rome for
Beginners.
GEOGRAPHY.
There will be two papers of three hours each. The
first paper will contain questions on Part I of the syllabus^
and the second paper on Parts II and III of the syllabus..
322 CALENDAR 1928-29
Syllabus.
I. World Geography with intensive study of the
regional Geography of Eurasia and North America com-
pared, or of the three southern continents compared.
NOTE. Teachers will be expected throughout to develop the human
side of Geography including the relations of Geography and History.
II. Study of the survey map with special reference
to 1 : 10,00,000. Survey of India and Adjacent Count-
ries Series, sheet no. 43 (Srinagar) or no. 52 (Leh), or
no. 53 (Delhi and Simla), also 1 inch Survey of India
Map no. 63K/12. Study of the principles of the chief
map-projections, such as. Cylindrical (Mercator), Ortho-
graphic, Stereographic, Spherical, Conical, Elliptical
(Mollweipe). Study of the weather maps for the months
of January, 1930 and July, 1930, published by the
Meteorological offices, Simla, and of other distribution
maps.
The work should show that out-door geographical
studies including practical map-work have formed a
feature of the course.
III. Economic Geography with special reference to
India. The world position of India : its natural re-
sources, its economic development. The general rela-
tion between geographic factors and the production of
the major raw materials and food-stuffs. Sources of
power. Factors affecting transport, exchange of com-
modities, and the localization of major industries.
The world distribution of the following vegetable
products :
Wheat, rice, tea, coffee, vine, cotton, jute, sugar,
rubber, tobacco. Conditions of their growth.
Books recommended :
I. Russell : North America (Oxford). 10s. 6d.
Rodwell-Jones and Bryan : North America
(Methuen). 21s.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 32$
Dawson : North America. Vol. I (Stanford). 15s.
Gannett : North America Vol. II (Stanford).
15s.
Keane : Asia. Vols. I and II (Stanford). 15s.
each.
Chisholm : Europe. Vols. I and II (Stanford).
15s, each.
Keane : Central and South America. Vols. I
and II. (Stanford). 15s.
Keane : Africa. Vols. I and II (Stanford).
15s. each.
Mackinder : Britain and the British Seas.
(Oxford). 10s. 6dL
George : Relations of History and Geography
(Oxford). 5s.
Little : The Far East (Oxford). 10s. M.
Griffith Taylor : Australia Physiographic and
Economic. (Clarendon Press). 3s 6d.
McMunn and Coster : A Regional Geography
of Europe. (Oxford). 4s. 6d.
Unstead and Taylor : Regional"]
and General Geography fo r 1
Students. (Philip). 7s. 6d. t ,
v *' May be used as
Leonard Brooks : New Regio- }, text-books .by
nal Geography, Book IV.
the students.
The World (London Uni-
versity Press). 7s.
II. Esaon and Philip : Map-reading Made Easy.
(Philip). 3s. 6d.
Dickson : Maps, how they are made, how to
read them. (Bacon). 6d.
Young and Fairgrieve : A class-book of Practi-
cal Geography. (Philip). 2s. 6d.
.Simmons and Richardson : An Introduction to
Practical Geography (Maicmillan). 4s.
324 CALENDAR 1928-29
Unstead : Practical Geography (Oxford). 4s.
Mort : An Elementary Practical Geography
(Blackie). 2s. 6d.
Davis : Elementary Meteorology (Ginn). List
price, $2-50.
III. Chisholm : Commercial Geography (Longmans).
25s.
Carr : Commercial Geography (Black). 4s.
Lyde : Man and His Markets (Macmillan). 3s.
Herbertson : Man and His Work. Is. 6d.
Statesman's Year Book (Mac- "") Every two or
mill an). 20s. ^ ihree years.
Whittaker's Almanac. 4s. j
Indian Year Book. (" The Times of India "
office). Ks. 7-8-0. To be used as a text-
book.
Imperial Gazetteer of India. Vols. Ill and IV
(Oxford). 7s. 6d. each.
Atlas of Commercial Geography (Cambridge
University Press). 3s.
The Oxford Economic Atlas (Oxford). 6s.
Additional reference books :
Lake : Physical Geography (Cambridge Univer-
sity Press). 12s.
Salisbury : Physiography for Schools. Shorter
Course. (Murray). 6s.
Davis : Elementary Physical Geography (Ginn).
5s. 6d.
Tarr : Elementary Physical Geography (Mac-
millan). 7s. 6d.
Mill : The Realm of Nature (Murray). 5s.
Philip's sets of maps of the various continents
and of India, with eaplanatory handbooks.
Philip's sets of synthetic maps (for students*
use). Is. per packet.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 325
Philip's Modern School Atlas of Physical,
Political and Commercial Geography. 7s.
LOGIC.
There will be two papers of three hours each : the
first paper on Deductive Logic and the second paper on
Inductive Logic.
Deductive Logic.
The following syllabus is prescribed
Definition, scope, and value of Logic. Nature of
thinking. The laws of thought. The relation of
thought and language. Terms and their classification.
Denotation and Connotation of terms. The predicables.
Formal division and definition. Propositions, their
import. Reduction of statements to logical form. Dis-
tribution of terms. Nature and forms of inference.
The opposition of propositions and various forms of
deduction. The syllogism, its figures and moods.
Reduction, direct and indirect. Hypothetical, disjunc-
tive and mixed syllogisms. The Dilemma, Enthymeme.
Sorites and Epicheirema. Function and value of syllo-
gism. Analysis of deductive arguments. Fallacies.
Inductive Logic.
The following syllabus is prescribed :
The nature and presuppositions of inductive infer-
ence. Causation, its significance and importance in
induction. Observation and experiment. Classification,
nomenclature and terminology. Hypothesis. Imper-
fect induction simple enumeration and analogy. Me-
thods of scientific induction. The deductive method of
investigation. Analysis of inductive arguments and
application of inductive methods. Explanation and
establishment of laws. The relation of induction to
deduction . Fallac ies .
326 CALENDAR 1928-29
Books recommended (not prescribed) to indicate the
standard of treatment of the topics prescribed in the
syllabus :
1. Introductory Text-book of Logic : S. H. Mellone.
(Blackwood and Sons, Edinburgh).
2. Intermediate Logic : Welton and Monahan.
(University Tutorial Press, London).
3. Elementary JLogic, Deduction and Induction :
Diwan Chand. (Narayan & Co., Meston
Road, Cawnpore.)
4. Inductive Logic : P. K. Ray.
A MODERN INDIAN LANGUAGE.
Hindi.
There will be three papers, each of three hours' dura-
tion : the first paper will be set on the prescribed Poetry
and Alankar, the second paper on the prescribed Prose
and Drama, and the third paper on Unseen and Coin-
position. Question on History of Hindi literature and
critical question will be distributed over the first and
second papers.
Paper /. Poetry and Alankar.
Text-books prescribed :
1. Tulsidas *r*m$TT Hf|[, scl wrra<tf, trnfrft rin% nwft
(printed in one volume) or rm%\ gmj by
Pandits Kashi Rama and Dwarka Prasad
Sharma. (Ram Narayan Lai, Allahabad.)
2. sr*r fW Part II of *pfo*5T edited by Lala
Bhagwan Din.
3. Din Dayal Giri. 3T?st% wq<3pr (Nagari Pra-
charini Sabha, Benares).
4. Maithili Sharan Gupta ^rq^ ra (Sahitya Sa-
dan, Chirgaon, Jhansi.)
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 327
Paper II. Prose and Drama.
Text-books prescribed :
1. Jai Shankar Prasad sraTrrar* (revised edition).
(Sahitya-sadan, Chirgaon, Jhansi).
2. Shyamsundar Das n'4j3RyjJTS$rt (Indian Press,
Allahabad).
3. Premchand ifsr gTcjrft (Ganga Pustak Mala,
LuckncJw) .
Paper III. Unseen and Composition.
Books recommended for Alankar and History of
Hindi Literature :
1. Ram Ratna ^irefaTC irafar (Ratnasram, Agra.)
2. ^ERsrfpPTW (Hindi Sahitya Sammelan, Allahabad.)
3. Badri Nath Bhatta 1%^ (Ganga Pustak Mala,
Luckjiow.)
4. Kaye Hindi Literature (Heritage of India
Series.)
The following books are recommended for supple-
mentary reading :
1. Tulsidas *rf*OT9Qft (N. P. Sabha, Benares.)
2. Surdas g<^TSRft (Hindi Sahitya Sammelan,
Allahabad.)
3. Shridhar Pathak WFWrcft *ffrft (Padmakot,
Allahabad.)
4. Badri Nath Bhatta <4|WH (Ganga Pustak
Mala, Lucknow.)
5. Mishra Bandhu sirrrJT fw^r (N. P. Sabha,
Benares.)
6. Ramchandra Shukla ^naT|F (N. P. Sabha,
Benares.)
7. Viyogi Hari qr*wrf$
8. Pratap Narayan Misra fSr^wr Hq*firT (Abhyu-
daya Press, Allahabad.)
9. Ramchandra Varma smm (Hindi Grantha
Ratnakara, Bombay.)
10. Padum Lai Bakshi ^gqT9r (Gandhi Hindi
Pushtak Bhandar, Allahabad.)
328 CALENDAR 1928-29
Urdu.
There will be three papers in this language, each of
three hours' duration ; the first paper will be set on the
prescribed Prose, the second on the prescribed Poetry,
and the third on Unseen and Composition. Critical
questions will be set in the first and second papers.
Paper I. Prose and Grammar.
Books prescribed :
(!) *>)}! t^i^ *+^+ J;1 *"** (J"& i*)!*^" from
page 2 jjl:j fU ^j* ^jyj up to page 54 ending with tf ~>
(2) otjl ^-^ ci-sj^ ^jjl; ^ 5 o ; f ffci ^t^ \from
Ji* s5f* ijS- '^' u ? to vJ^ }# <* U)*9*
(3) ^U^L 3u)Ir c^^cw ^J ^^cl^ J 5 ) u^b
the whole of the 1st Chapter.
(4) 6*~ y ^A-U3^ (a) L-^-^W (b) JU<-X; (
(d) vs>Ua, v ji (e) ^ o^ (/) cyJUi. , ^
(5) |^; ^to 1)^-^ 8 ^1) L-irf^ by National Press,
Allahabad, 1st edition, 59 pages ending with jj>^; J 4J^
^ >J *) or jy*
Grammar. Majma-ul-Fawaid by Maulvi Syed Hamid
Ali (Rai Sahib Ram Dayal Agarwala, Katra, Allahabad).
Paper II. Poetry and Grammar.
omit lines 48, 49, 62, 63, 86, 94.
ty X ^- ^^t - ,*^ ( r )
- j ( r )
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 329
>'
*!*) l_S*\
i < ^l f u^ f --^ -
J#/ U>-T f J l i? ? 1
^i^ *^' ^ i^- u b ^
(II)
Grammar :
Majma-ul-Fawaid by Maulvi Syed Hamid All (Rai
Sahib Ram Dayal Agarwala, Booksellers, Katra, Allah-
abad.)
Paper III. Unseen and Composition.
Books recommended :
a> Ja cyl^^ by 5^
same book of the new series (
2. ^-.j^L.*!-* c.x^MxJL-f Selected Essays by
M. Zafar Husain Asi. (National Press, Allahabad).
There will be three papers in each of the following
languages. Each paper will be of three hours ; the
first paper will be set on the prescribed Poetry and
Drama, the second on the prescribed Prose, and the
third on Unseen and Composition. Critical questions
will be set in the first and the second papers :
Bengali.
Poetry.
1. Kirtibas. Ramayan, Ajodhya Kanda.
2. Babindra Nath Tagore. Naivedya (Viswa Bharati
Series).
330 CALENDAR 1928-29
3. Karnarjuna (drama) by Aparesh Chandra Muk-
hopadhyaya (Guru Das Cliatterji and Sons, Calcutta).
Re. 1-8.
Prose.
1. Bankim Chandra Chatter ji. Durgesh Nandini
(novel).
2. Ishanchandra Ghosh. Jatak, Volume I (nos.
1 25 and introduction).
3. Hara Prashad Sastri. -Bharat Mahila.
Composition.
Rakhal Das Vidyaratna. Bengali Composition. (Re-
commended.)
Marathi.
Paper I, Poetry.
1. , by Anna Kirloskar (the Arya
Bhushan Press, Poona).
2. Selections from Tukaram, as published in the
latest edition of the Navanit.
Paper II, Prose.
1. Ragini (novel), volumes I and II, by Vaman
Malhar Joshi (Manoranjak Grantha Prasa-
rak Mandali, Bombay).
2. Jiwan Smriti (Manoranjan Grantha Prasarak
Mandali, Bombay).
Paper ///, Unseen and Composition.
, by Mr. Vidyadhar Vaman Bhide
(Chitrashala Press, Poona city).
A MODERN EUROPEAN LANGUAGE.
There will be three papers of three hours each. The
first paper will consist of extracts from the prescribed
Text-books, together with grammatical questions. The
second paper will contain Unseen passages for trans-
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 331
lation from French into English ; these passages are not
to be taken from the prescribed Text-books. The third
paper will consist of a passage or passages of English
prose to be translated into French.
French.
Prescribed Text-books :
1. ERCKMANN-CHATEIAN : Le Conscrit.
2. MICHAND : Conteurs Francais d'aujourd'hui
(Heath).
3. French poetry for advanced students by A. Wat-
son Bain (Maqmillan & Co.), of which poems numbered
2, 15, 23, 24, 30, 34, 35, 38, 43, 57, 61, 75, 102, 108 and
116 are prescribed.
Grammar recommended :
French Grammar (Sonnenschein's Parallel Grammar
Series) or Heath's Modern French Grammar. (Harrap).
Books recommended for rapid reading :
La Bastide Ronge (Elie Berthet), La Rose Blanche
(Louis Enault) and La Vie de Polichinelle (Octave
Feuillet), all of Siepmann's French series (Macmillan &
Co.).
Book recommended for French Composition :
Easy steps in French Composition by Horsley and
Bonne (Rivington).
A CLASSICAL LANGUAGE.
There will be three papers of three hours each in each
of these languages : the first paper will be on Poetry and
Drama, the second paper on Prose and Unseen, and the
third paper on Grammar, Composition and Translation
into the classical language. Questions in Grammar re-
lating to the text may be included in each of the first two
papers.
332 OALENDAB 1928-29
(a) Sanskrit.
Paper I. Poetry and Drama
(a) Raghuvamsha, Canto XIII (as in Astapuspika
by Nilkamal Bhattacharya or in any other edition).
(b) Shakuntala, Act IV (as in Astapuspik by Nil-
kamal Bhattacharya or in any other edition).
NOTES. 1. Students are expected to explain selected passages in
their own Sanskrit.
2. No Prakrit passages shall be set for the examination.
Paper II. Prose and Unseen
(a) Prose Chandra pida Charitam (the story of
Kadambari written concisely in Bana's own
words), by Pandit V. Anantcharya, pub-
lished by the editor in 1917, Nungambaukam,
Madras, and printed at the Law Printing House,
Mount Road, Madras, price annas 6.
(b) Unseen
(1) Bharatanuvernanam vmmgar^g; by M. M. T.
Oanapati Sastri (Shridhar Power Press, Trivandrum).
(2) Shakuntalopakhyana from the Mahabharata.
NOTE. Easy passages from the abovementioned books and similar
passages from other similar books should be set for translation.
Paper III. Grammar, Composition and Transla-
tion.
Books recommended :
1. Apte's Guide to Sanskrit Composition.
2. Kale's Higher Sanskrit Grammar.
3. Vidya Bhushan's Sanskrit Grammar.
4. Bhandarkar's Second Book of Sanskrit.
In addition to the course in Grammar prescribed for
the High School Examination of 1931 the course in Gram-
mar for the Intermediate Examination of 1931 shall
consist of the following :
The remaining declensions of all nouns and pronouns,
conjugations of verbs of frequent occurrence in classical
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 333
literature of all the ganas in all the lakaras, the use of
Jcarakas, the samasas, and the krit and taddhita forms.
N.B. Sanskrit must be written in Devanagari character.
(b) Arabic.
Paper I. Poetry and Unseen.
Text :
(a) LS
f -
f r - i LJ u;
334 CALENDAR 1928-29
fV - jC?*)4e u)* \
PA l/^ I 1
I A *$+&* ljUuJJ
* 4&AJ
Page No. of lines. Poet
(1) ^iUJ *S f | 3^U ; J3H 220 9
(2) >ji3^ Oj* 0;^\ ,jL> ^1 94 4
(3) ^ jfeUJ ^ ^ ^Lyi/ c^s^ 147 7
(4) rt J c^X5 5 ^^S^xuaJ j,iJ 616 9
(5) T :a_MJ! <^^ ,^sw| f 201 6
x * i ij i
(6) U ,jUUc Ui ^y ^XJ 208 11
(7 ) oU 5x*<iu? L-^-JUJ ^>xSJ 243 9
(8) !yJ*U ^ T ^ -> M 246 8
254 9
28 22
(^) LJO'IO^'O 147 6
41 10
Dr. A. S. Tritton's edition of these selections is
approved.
Unseen.
Recommended :
yLlfcsJl ;J jly by ^fjAtf 1st half.
Paper II. Prose and Unseen.
Text :
(a) ^jjJU^ ^i\ (The Biography of the Prophet).
(b) Tajaribul Umam, Eclipse of the Abbaside Cali-
phate, volume I, pages 83 to 91. Imprisonment of Um
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 335-
Musa, the stewardess, and appointment of Ibn Furat a
Wazir, 310 to 311 Hijra, pages 202 to 246.
Unseen.
Recommended :
i^LjKssJI^J by ^ykli ls t half.
Paper I II. Grammar, Composition and Translation,
into the classical language.
Grammar :
IAJ jj^tjix* by M. Izzat Ullah (Chashmai Rahmat Book
Agency, Ghazipur, United Provinces).
NOTE. Arabic words must be written in Arabic character.
(c) Persian.
Paper I. Poetry and Unseen.
Text :
(1) ^ J4Jk jotfcJii 1st 15 Ghazals.
(2) ^)*&* jljio 1st 15 Ghazals.
(3) fi^Ly ^LJLy t*5Ur>
(a) ^tSj cJJU f jxA^A |j
(a)
(c)
(d)
(5) laax^
(a) \j ^ ; cio ^ ; oU ^J*~)* o t-*)^ U P
up to
336 CALENDAK *1928-29
Unseen.
Recommended :
L-^A^C ^jjo 21 41 Ghazals (Anwarul Matabay, Victoria
Street, Lucknow).
Paper II. Prose and Unseen.
Text :
\]j~ from the beginning up to
SU *-^:J} &>U*? f^** (*^
3. ^JJMA^ **U from ^J^fc ^Jlsw up to ^jU ^
vX^(o ^t-^^
4. ^Clfa. cJjy from Jj ^l.l^ ^l^l^ j| up to
5. -^j ^^1 Sir Syed Ahmad's edition, volume III,
pages 291 to 298 from *>Ui&li i^Jo ^ up to
no. 57.
'j^ from ^j.^jj) ^jii^Ajo 55; up to
Unseen.
Recommended :
1. Humayun Nama by Gulbadan Begum.
2. ^] ^Jt^ from ^jjiWl^
Paper III. Grammar, Composition, and Transla-
tion into the classical language.
Grammar : jStjiJl^i^ by Maulvi M. H. Nasiri, Chap-
ters I VII (Mission Press, Allahabad).
Students who offer Persian are required to have such
a knowledge of the etymology of the Arabic language as
Will enable them to explain all Arabic words and phrases
which may occur in the text-books and in the books
recommended for rapid reading in Persian.
NOTE. 1 Tsian words must be written in Persian character.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 337
(d) Latin.
Prescribed course :
I. Text (1) CICERO : Pro Milone.
(2) De Amicitia.
(3) LIVY : Book XXII, Chapters 151.
(4) VIRGIL : Aeneid, VI.
(5) HORACE : Odes, Book II.
II. Grammar : Gildersleeve's Latin Grammar or
Allen's Latin Grammar is recommended.
III. Latin Prose Composition.
Book recommended :
North and Hillard's Latin Prose Composition
(Rivington).
(e) Greek.
Prescribed course :
Text (1) PLATO : Apology and Crito.
(2) SOPHOCLES : Antigone.
(/) Hebrew.
Prescribed course :
I. Text SAMUEL : Book I.
PSALMS, I LX.
II. Genesis is recommended for rapid reading in
connexion with Unseen.
III. Grammar : Duff's Hebrew Grammar is re-
commended.
PHYSIOLOGY, HYGIENE AND CHILD-STUDY.
(For Female candidates only.)
NOTE. -The subject should be taught in such a way as to be practi-
cally beneficial to the students.
There will be two papers of three hours each : the
first paper will contain questions on (1) Activities of the
Modern Home, (2) Physiology and Hygiene and (3)
Public Health, and the second paper on Child-Study.
CALENDAR 1928-29
I. Activities of the Modern Home.
(1) To provide for the physical needs and
development of the members of the
family.
(2) To provide for their mental, moral and
social needs.
(3) To co-operate with the community for the
better meeting of these needs.
(4) To maintain the home on an economically
sound basis so as to make possible the
meeting of the above needs.
II. The study of Physiology and Hygiene, especially
from the point of view of the physical development of
the child.
(A) The cells, the supporting tissue and their structure.
(B) The skeleton ; bones, joints, the muscular sys-
tem. A special study of the conditions making
for the normal development of these systems,
such as posture, etc.
(C) Digestion and Nutrition.
(1) The organs and processes of digestion.
(2) The food needs of the body.
(3) The classes of food-stuffs.
(4) The diet of the pre-school and school child.
(a) Constipation as a special dietary problem of
school children.
(b) Malnutrition how to detect and remedy it.
(5) Effect of cooking on food ; method of cooking
with special emphasis on methods of cook-
ing food for children.
(6) Treatment of minor digestive ailments.
<(7) Alcohol and drugs and their effect on the di-
gestive system.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 339,
(D) The excretory system the skin, kidney, bowels.
Health, habits of children in relation to the
above.
(E) The circulation of the blood the heart : arteries ;
veins ; capillaries. The regulation of the
blood supply. The composition of the blood
and its work in the body.
The problem of the child with the weak heart.
(F) Respiration,
(1) The lungs ; trachea ; larynx ; the composition
of pure and impure air ; effect of breathing
on air.
(2) Formation of proper breathing habits in child-
ren. Posture ; special breathing exercises.
(3) Ventilation for the school and home.
(G) The nervous system and sense organs.
(1) The nerves ; spinal cord ; brain.
(2) The structure of the eye, ear, nose.
(3) Health habits to promote the normal develop-
ment of these organs.
(4) Common defects of these organs how to detect
them.
(5) Treatment of minor ailments and accidents.
(6) The effect of alcohol and drugs on the nervous
system and sense organs.
<H) Clothing.
(1) Selection of clothing, specially for children,
(2) Training of children as to care and cleanliness
of clothing.
(I) Occupation, exercise, recreation, rest, sleep.
Health habits to be establMied in children in
the above.
340 CALENDAR 1928-29
(J) Precautions against common diseases.
(1) Health habits which will protect the child
from common diseases.
(2) Health habits which will prevent the spread of
infectious diseases.
III. Public Health.
A. Responsibility of the individual.
B. Disposal of refuse and waste water. Drainage,
Latrines.
C. Water supply. Food supply.
D. Prevention and arrest of infectious diseases.
E. Gardens. Play grounds. Open spaces.
F. Modern movement for the education of society
in the laws of health, e.g., " Child Welfare."
IV. --Child-Study.
The study of children's development from the point
of view of physique, intelligence and character, based
as far as possible on the observation of individuals and
classes.
An elementary study of the means by which children
acquire knowledge and skill, including such as the fol-
lowing :
The senses and sense training : instincts and their
relation to children's interests ; forms of activity and
expression ; the function of play ; imitation and sugges-
tion ; habits and their formation, memory and imagi-
nation ; interest and attention ; the formation of clear
and connected ideas ; simple processes of reasoning ;
growth of the will.
The aims and methods of discipline ; training in
responsibility, in the right use of freedom and in the
social duties.
Books of reference.
1. *Elementary Physiology. W. B. Drummond.
2s. 2d. (Publisher Arnold.)
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION OF 1931 34f
2. *Elementary Hygiene for India. C. Beresford
(Lahiri & Co., College Street, Calcutta).
3. Physiology and Hygiene. G. D. Cathcart (Mac-
millan).
4. Elementary Physiology. Bhatia and Suri (Long-
mans, Green & Co.). }
5. Child Mind, by Dumville.
6. Modern Psychology. Meredith (Constable).
7. Dawn of Mind. Drummond (Arnold).
8. Child- welfare, by Dr. S. K. Mukherji (Indian*
Press, Allahabad).
9. Physiology by T. Huxley.
(The books marked* indicate the scope of the
work required in Physiology and Hygiene.)
842 CALENDAR 1928-29
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION IN COMMERCE
OP 1931.
The following are the subjects of examination :
Compulsory subjects
1. English.
2. Book-keeping and Accountancy.
3. Business Methods and Correspondence.
4. (a) Elementary Economics.
(6) Commercial Geography.
Optional subjects
One of the following :
1. Steno-typing (shorthand and typo writ ing).
2. Elements of Banking.
3. Elements of Industrial Organization.
4. Mathematics.
The following papers will be set :
1. English. Two papers of three hours each.
2. Book-keeping and Accountancy. Two papers of
three hours each.
3. Business Methods and Correspondence,. One
paper of three hours.
4. Elementary Economics and Commercial Geogra-
phy. Two papers of three hours each : one paper on
Elementary Economics and one paper on Commercial
Geography.
(Shorthand. One paper of three
5. Steno-typing <t hours.
{^Typewriting. One paper of one
hour.
6. Elements of Banking. One paper of three hours.
7. Elements of Industrial Organization. One paper of
three hours.
8. Mathematics. Two papers of three hours each.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN COMMERCE OF 1931 343
No.
Subject.
Paper.
Time
(hours
Marks
for each
paper.
Total
marks
for each
subject.
Mini-
mum
pass
marks.
COMPULSORY.
First paper
3
50
,
l
English* . . \
(Prose).
r 100
33
)
Second paper
3
50
f
f
(Composition).
'
2
Book-keeping ('
and Account- j
ancy. (.
First paper . .
Second paper
3
3
50
50
}- 100'
33
3
Elementary f
Economics
First paper
(Economics).
3
50
1
and Commer-"^
^ 100
33
cial Geo- |
graphy. L
Second paper
(Geography).
3
50
J
4
Business Me-
One paper
3
100
lOOf
33
thods and Cor-
respondence.
OPTIONAL.
r
First paper
3t
50
1
Steno- typing j
(Shorthand).
Second paper
1
50
1 100
33
l
(Typewriting).
'
2
Elements of
One paper
3
100
100
33
Banking.
3
Elements of In-
One paper
3
100
100
33
dustrial Organ-
isation.
4
Mathematics <{
First paper . .
3
50
I 100
33
L
Second paper
3
50
*The same as the First and the Third papers in English for the Inter-
mediate Examination.
fThere will be two sections in the paper, viz., -(a) Business Methods
and (6) Correspondence, carrying 60 and 40 marks, respectively.
J Excluding five minutes' interval between the dictation of the two
flections in Shorthand.
&44 CALENDAR 1928-29
The syllabus in each subject is as follows :
English.
(The same course as is prescribed for the Interme-
diate Examination of 1931, excluding Poetry portion.)
i
Book keeping and Accountancy.
The principles of Double Entry Book-keeping and
their application. Books of original entry, including
Tabular Forms. The Ledger. Trial Balance. Manu-
facturing, Trading and Profit and Loss Accounts, With
apportionments and adjustments.
Balance-sheets. Loose Leaf and Card Index system
of Book-keeping, Self-balancing Ledgers, Single Entry
Book-keeping.
In the treatment of the above the following matters
will be included : Cheques, Bills of Exchange and Pro-
missory notes ; Goodwill ; Classification of Assets ; Bad
Debts ; Depreciation, Reserves and Sinking Funds ;
Consignment, Joint Venture and Contract Accounts ;
Partnership and Company Accounts (including the
Double Account system) ; Capital and Revenue ; Invest-
ment Accounts ; Accounts Current and Average Due
dates.
Books recommended .
1. Students' Elementary Book-keeping, by Arthur
Fieldhouse (Simpkin Marshall and Co., Limited, London,
E. a, 4).
2. Advanced Accounts (fifthe dition), by J. R. Batli-
boi (S. Govind & Co., Bombay).
3. Advanced Accounts, by R. N. Carter (Pitman
Business Methods.
1. The general routine of a Business House :
Inward and Outward correspondence (excluding draft-
INTEB. EXAMINATION IN COMMERCE OF 1931
ing) ; Methods of rapid communication ; Duplicating
processes.
2. The significance of Trade, Commerce, and Indus-
try ; Manufacturing and Distribution House. The
buying and selling of goods. Mercantile Enquiry
Agencies. Importation and Exportation of goods.
Documentary Bilk. Elementary Fire and Marine In-
surance as applicable to this section. Use of Card In-
dexes.
3. The meaning of the principal commercial terms
occurring in connexion with the above and the prepara-
tion of the chief documents involved, including arith-
metical calculations.
4. An elementary knowledge of the Law relating to
Contracts and Negotiable Instruments.
Contract Law. Agreements that are contracts;
essentials of a good contract ; offer and acceptance ;
genuineness of consent ; contractual capacity of parties ;
legality of objects (agreements, unlawful, immoral, and
against public policy void) ; performance and discharge
of contracts ; breach of contract ; damages.
Sale of Goods. Sale of ascertained and unascertained
goods, passing of ownership, delivery, actual and con-
structive implied warranties, rights of unpaid seller.
Negotiable Instruments. Making, drawing, accepting
and endorsing of Promissory notes. Billb of Exchange
and Cheques, holder in due course, dishonour, noting and
protest, presentment for payment and acceptance, accept-
ance for honour.
Books recommended .'
1, Modern Business Training, by John K. Grebby.
(MacDonald & Evans, London.)
2. Commercial Practice by Roop Ram Gupta and
K. L. Govil, Parts I and II (Messrs. Gautama Bros. &
o., Cawnpore).
346 CALENDAR 1928-29
Correspondence.
This will consist of
(a) Draft of commercial and official correspond-
ence.
(b) Rewriting in plain language of passages from
inarket reports (financial and commodity
markets) with explanations of selected
terms and phrases occurring in the passage.
(c) Precis-writing.
Book recommended (not prescribed) :
Modern Commercial Correspondence, by John K.
Grebby. (MacDonald & Evans, London).
Elementary Economics.
(The treatment of the subject should be very ele-
mentary and, as far as possible, it should be illustrated
by reference to Indian conditions.)
The subject-matter and scope of Economics, funda-
mental notions, and simple definitions. Relation between
wants, efforts, and satisfaction.
Production Factors of production. Land, Labour,
Capital and organization.
Nature and Limitations of land ; Division of labour
and other factors of efficiency of labour ; Organization
of capital.
Laws of increasing, diminishing, and constant returns.
Wants. Diminishing utility. Value its determin-
ation. Balancing of supply and demand.
The Machinery of exchange. Money and banking,
both to be illustrated from Indian examples (including
the Sahukari system, in the villages and the Sarafi
system in cities). Convertibility of paper money in
India, Cheques and Hundis (Foreign exchanges are
excluded).
INTER. EXAMINATION IN COMMERCE OF 1931 347
Distribution Rent interest wages profits (with
particular reference to Indian conditions).
Books recommended (but not prescribed as text-
books) :
1. Outlines of Economics, by J. T. Goodchild (Uni-
versity Book Dp6t, Agra).
2. PENSON : Economics of Every-day Life, Part I.
3. MoRELANi) : Introduction to Economics (Mac-
millan & Co.).
4. JEVONS : Money and Banking in India.
5. Introduction to Economics for Indian Students,
by W, H. Moreland. (Macmillan & Co., St. Martin's
Street, London).
6. The Economics of Everyday Life, by Sir T. H.
Penson. (Cambridge University Press).
Commercial Geography. (a) An elementary study of
the principles of economic Geography on the basis of
regional divisions, and their correlation with the dis-
tribution of the principal commercial commodities and
industries.
(b) Trade Centres, Ports, Trade Routes.
(c) Detailed study of India on the regional basis on
the lines indicated above.
Books recommended :
(1) Rudmose Brown's " Principles of Economic
Geography/'
(2) Howarth's " A Short Commercial Geography."
TYPEWRITING.
This will be the same as in Commerce for the High
School Examination of 1931, but of a more advanced
character the speed to be 30 words per minute.
There shall be no paper on the theory of typewriting-
348 CALENDAR 192^29-
The maximum marks and the time allotted to the
papers in this subject are as follows :
Marks. Time
allmvecL
(a) Passage and 35 "]
Type-copying. - letter. >0ne hour.
Tabular 15 J
statement.
Total . . 50 1 hour.
Books recommended :
1. Pitman's or Remington's Typewriting Manual.
2. A Typewriting Manual for Indian Students, by
E. M. Moffatt and V. A. Kshirsagar (Methodist Pub-
lishing House, Lucknow).
3. The New Manual of Typewriting, by Y. D. Kash-
kar and Jagdish Saran (Methodist Publishing House,
Lucknow).
SHORTHAND.
1. Writing in shorthand from a passage dictated at
the rate of 80 words a minute, for a period of ten
minutes.
2. Writing in shorthand from a business letter of
general commercial phraseology, dictated at the rate
of 80 words a munite, for a period of five minutes.
3. Transcription of both the above.
Book recommended :
Pitman's Instructor, by Pitman & Sons, London.
ELEMENTS OF BANKING.
1. The nature of Banking.
2. The functions of a banker.
3. The meaning of Banking and other mercantile
terms.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN COMMERCE OF 1931 349
4. Simple banking operations.
5. The English money market.
6. Elements of foreign exchange.
7. The constituents of the Indian Money Market.
8. Indigenous Banking in India : " Shroffs " and
Mahajans and their operations.
9. The Indian joint-stock Ba,nks.
10. The Imperial Bank of India.
11. The question of a Central Bank for India.
12. The financing of Indian trade.
13. How to read the money market reports.
14. Elements of Indian law relating to bills, cheques
and promissory notes.
15. Defects and causes of the backwardness of Indian
Banking.
16. Development of Indian Banking,
ELEMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATION.
1 . The Organization of an Indian Village.
2. Landowner ship and methods of cultivation.
3. Obstacles to agricultural progress and remedies.
4. Cottage industries their relation to agriculture.
5. Elements of Factory Organization.
6. Co-operation in Production and Distribution.
Books recomme'rided :
1. Indian Industrial Organization Morrison.
2. Industrial Revolution Chatterton.
Reference should be made to :
India in 1926.
Indian Year Book.
MATHEMATICS.
Paper I (a). Commercial Arithmetic, Proportion,
Percentages, Stocks and Shares. Present Worth
and Discount, Exchange Rates, Partnership,
350 CALENDAR 1928-29
Profit and Loss, Commission, Brokerage,.
Premium.
(b) Algebra. The Theory, Quadratic Equations,
Arithmetical, Geometrical and Harmonic Pro-
gression, Permutations and Combinations,
Theory of indices and logarithms, Use of
binominal and exponential theorems.
(c) Trigonometry. Measurements of angles, trigo-
nometrical ratios, identities and trigono-
metrical equations, practical applications of
Logarithms ; Solution of triangles, proper-
ties of triangles.
Paper II. (a) (1). Pure Geometry as given in
parts V and VI of Hall and Stevens' Geometry.
(a) (2) Analytical Geometry. Straight lines, Circles,.
Elementary Properties of conies.
(b) Elements of differential Calculas.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1931 351
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE
OF 1931.
N.B. Preference for admission to this course will be given to candi-
dates who have studied (a) Chemistry and Physics, or (6) Agriculture for.
their admission test examination.
The following are the subjects of examination :
Group 1.
Maximum Time
marks.
25
25
allowed.
Three hours.
Ditto.
Ditto.
PAPER I. Chemistry
PAPER II. Physics
Practical Chem-
istry.
Practical Physics 25 Ditto.
Total . . 100
Group 2.
PAPER I. Botany . . 25 Three hours..
PAPER II. Zoology . . 25 Ditto.
Practical Botany 25 Ditto.
Practical Zoology 25 Ditto.
Total . . 100
Group 3.
PAPER I. Physical proper-
ties of soil, soil
geology, climat-
ology . . 30 Three hours.
PAPER II . Elements of
Plant Feeding,
Principles of
352
CALENDAR 1928-29
Maximum Time
marks . a Hawed .
manuring,
Principles of
Irrigation and
Drainage . . 30 Three hours.
Practical farming
Practical A. Crop
culture, Climat-
ology . . 45 Ditto.
Practical B.
Farm Machin-
ery, Animal
Husbandry . . 45 Ditto.
Total . . 150
Group 4.
ENGLISH.
PAPEK I . Translation and
composition . . 25 Three hours.
PAPER II. Essay and un-
seen passages
from text-
books .. 25 Ditto.
Total . . 50
Group 5.
ECONOMICS.
PAPER , I ^ . . 25 Three hours.
PAPER II .. .. 25 Ditto.
Total
50
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGBIOULTURE OF 1931
Ma rimum Time
marks. allowed.
MATHEMATICS.
PAPER I . . . . 25 Three hours.
PAPER II .. .. 25 Ditto.
Total . . 50
The syllabus in each subject is as follows :
GROUP I.
I. CHEMISTRY.
A. Inorganic.
Common properties of matter.
Physical and chemical changes ; elements ; mix-
tures and compounds. Atoms ; molecules, symbols ;
formulae ; equations and simple chemical calculations.
The fundamental principles of Chemistry : Law of
chemical combination by weight and by volume. Atomic
theory ; atomic, molecular and equivalent weights.
Valency. Avogadro's hypothesis and relation of gas
density to molecular weights. Charles' and Boyle's
laws. Elementary ideas as to the nature of dissociation
and of the ionic theory.
The outline of the periodic law.
The following elements and their compounds :
Hydrogen and Oxygen their preparation and pro-
perties. Oxidation and reduction. Oxides, acids,
bases and salts.
Water : Electrolysis ; synthesis ; solution ; crys-
tallization ; efflorescence and deliquescence ; pure and
natural waters ; temporary and permanent hardness ^
methods of softening water.
Nitrogen ; ammonia ; oxides of nitrogen ; nitric acid.
and the nitrates ; nitrification.
^354 CALBNDAB 1928-29
The atmosphere, its chief constituents and pro-
perties.
The family of the halogens with special reference to
-chlorine, hydrochloric acid and the chlorides.
Carbon ; forms of carbon ; carbon dioxide and the
carbonates.
Sulphur ; sulphur dioxide and trioxide ; sulphuric
acid and the sulphates ; sulphuretted hydrogen and the
sulphides.
Phosphorous ; phosphorous pentoxide ; phosphoric
acid and the phosphates.
Arsenic and arseiiious oxide.
Silicon, silica and the silicates.
Mercury and Silver their oxides, chlorides and
jnitrates.
Copper its sulphate, nitrate and oxides.
Lead its oxides, chlorides and sulphate.
Iron its oxides, sulphate, chloride and phosphate ;
steel, cast iron and wrought iron.
Aluminium its oxides, sulphate and chloride.
Zinc its oxide, chloride and nitrate.
Manganese its oxides, chloride, sulphate and potas-
sium permanganate.
Calcium its oxide, hydroxide, chloride, nitrate,
sulphate, carbonate and phosphate.
Barium its oxide, carbonate, chloride and sulphate.
Magnesium its oxide, chloride, sulphate, carbonate
and phosphate.
Sodium, Potassium and Ammonium their hydrates,
.chlorides, nitrates, sulphates, carbonates and phos-
phates.
B. Organic.
General composition ; physical properties and gene-
classification of carbon compounds.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1931 355
Hydrocarbons, saturated and unsaturated methane,
ethane, ethylene and acetylene.
Alcohols ; methyl and ethyl alcohols ; glycerine.
Aldehydes and ketones ; formaldehyde, acetaldehyde,
acetone.
Ethers : Ethyl ethers.
Acids ; formic, acetic, butyric, oxalic, lactic and
citric,
Fats, oils and soaps.
Carbohydrates : grape sugar, fruit sugar, cane sugar,
starch and cellulose.
Proteins : Albumin.
Practical work in chemistry.
Differentiation between chemical compounds and
mechanical mixtures.
Solution ; suspension ; sedimentation ; decantation ;
filtration ; precipitation ; crystallization and distillation.
Examination of the important atmospheric consti-
tuents.
Preparation of hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, nitrous
oxide, nitric oxide, nitric acid, ammonia, chlorine, hydro-
chloric acid, sulphur dioxide and carbon dioxide.
Examination of hard water amd methods of softening
o
Preparation of the following in their 'pure form :
Sodium chloride, potassium or ammonium sulphate,
calcium carbonate and ferric oxide.
Acidimetry and alkalimetry.
Qualitative reactions of the following :
Chlorides, nitrates, sulphates and sulphides, car-
bonates, phosphates : arsenic, silver, mercury,
copper, lead, iron, aluminium, zinc, man-
ganese, calcium, barium, magnesium, sodium,
potassium and ammonium.
356 CALENDAR 1928-29
Qualitative analysis of single salts containing one
acid and one base.
Preparation of methane.
Examination of the following organic compounds :
Ethyl alcohol, glycerine, oxalic acid, grape sugar,
fruit sugar, cane sugar and starch.
Study of the physical and chemical properties of
vegetable and mineral oils. Saponification.
Qualitative reactions of proteins.
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. " Every-tlay Chemistry," by Alfred Vivian
(American Book Co., New York). Price, about Rs. 5.
2. A Foundation Course in Chemistry for Students
of Agriculture and Technology, by J. W. Dodgson and
J. A. Murray. (Longmans, Green & Co., Calcutta).
Price, about Rs. 3.
3. Introduction to the Study of Inorganic Chemis-
try, by W. A. Miller. (Longmans, Green & Co., Calcutta.)
Price, about Rs. 4.
4. Agricultural Chemistry, by R. H. Adic and T.
W. Wood, Vol. I, (Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.,
Ltd., Paternoster House, Charing Cross Road, London.)
Price about, Rs. 4.
5. Organic Chemistry, by Perkin and Kippling.
(W. R. Chambers, Ltd., London). Price about, Rs. 7.
6. Elementary Agricultural Chemistry, by H. Ingle
(Charles Griffin & Co., Ltd., 'London.) Price, about
Rs. 4.
1L PHYSICS.
Units and measurements ; Metric system ; Length ;
Area ; Volume ; Mass ; Time. The Vernier and the mi-
crometer scales. Balance and density.
INTEB, EXAMINATION IN AGBICULTURE OF 1931 357
Velocity, acceleration and momentum. Kinematical
equations of rectilinear motion. Composition and reso-
lution of velocities or accelerations ; the parallelogram
law.
Force and motion ; inertia. Newton's laws of motion.
Measure of a force. Composition and resolution of
forces. Gravity and laws of falling bodies ; mass and
weight ; centre of gravity. Centripetal and centrifugal
forces. Projectiles, torques or moments.
Equilibrium of forces ; triangle and polygon of forces :
Stable and unstable equilibrium. Friction and its laws.
Simple illustrations of the conditions of equilibrium as
in levers, pulleys, inclined plane, field plough, etc.
Pressure of liquids at rest, variation with depth.
Transmission of liquid pressure ; Hydraulic press ; Pres-
sure on immersed and floating bodies : Laws of hydro-
meters. Specific gravity. Centre of pressure.
The atmospheric pressure. Boyle's Law. Force
and suction pumps. Syphon.
Work ; energy ; power ; efficiency of machines.
Matter and energy. Properties of matter. Surface
tension ; capillarity ; viscosity ; osmosis ; rigidity and
elasticity. Molecular structure of matter. Different
forms of energy.
Liquids and gases in motion, wave motion (element-
ary treatment).
Heat energy : Source ; modes of transference ; effects
of heat on matter ; thermometry ; specific heats ; eva-
poration and boiling ; vapour pressure ; condensation
and frost ; latent heats ; hygrometry and dew point ;
mechanical equivalent of heat.
Eadient energy: Source of light; mode of propa-
gation ; light waves ; shadows ; illumination ; reflection ;
transmission ; absorption and dispersion of light ; magni
fication ; images ; telescope ; microscope.
358 CALENDAR 1928-29
Magnetic energy : Magnets ; magnetic forces ; mag-
netization ; compass.
Electric energy : Electrification by friction : insula-
tors ; conductors ; electroscope ; electric machines. Elec-
tricity generated by chemical action ; batteries ; resis-
tance ; magnetic effect of current ; transformation of
electric energy into heat light and power galvanometers ;
voltmeters ; ammeters ; electrolysis.
Practical Work in Physics.
Accurate determination of length, area, mass, volume
and density. Use of calipers, screw gauge, sphero-
meter, balance, burette and squared paper.
Determination of acceleration due to gravity by the
simple pendulum.
Verification of the law of parallelogram of forces.
Verification of the principles of parallel forces and
of the lever.
Determination of centre of gravity of plane laminas.
Determination of co-efficient of friction.
Determination of efficiency of a system of pulleys.
Use of the Nicholson Hydrometer.
Use of the hydrostatic balance : determination of
specific gravities of
(1) insoluble sinking solid, (2) floating solid, (3) liquid.
Verification of Boyle's Law and practice in barometer
reading.
Use of the density bottle : -determination of true and
apparent density of soils and porespace.
Practice in reading various thermometers.
Determination of Humidity and Dewpoint.
Determination of Boiling points.
Preparation of a graph showing cooling of water by
radiation.
INTEB. EXAMINATION IN AGKICULTUKE OF 1931 359'
Determination of specific heat : (1) method of mix-
ture, (2) method of radiation.
Determination of Latent heats of vaporization and
fusion.
Reflection of light : use of plane and concave mirrors.
Refraction of light : determination of Refractive
index.
Determination of focal length of a converging lens.
Practice in use of a telescope and of a microscope.
Magnetization of needles and determination of their
poles.
Charting of lines of force due to a magnet in different
positions.
Use of simple electroscopes (Gold leaf and Pith ball).
Construction of a simple cell and use of the simple
galvanometer.
Determination of Electromotive force by the poten-
tiometer or balance method.
Determination of Electric resistance by substitution
method.
The following book is suggested for reference :
A High School Course in Physics, by F. R. Gorton
{D. Appleton and Co., New York). Price about, Rs. 5.
GROUP II.
BOTANY.
Zoology.
(The course will aim at the study of the phenomena
exhibited by living matter as illustrated by lower plants,
animals, and their organs.)
Introduction. Living and non-living matter; study
of life in its simplest form as illustrated by Amoeba,
Nostoc, Euglena, Volvox, Paramoecium, and Spirogyra ;
general properties of protoplasm as the basis of all life.
360 CALENDAR 1928-29
The cell, animal and vegetable, its growth and simple
division ; combination of cells to form tissues ; combina-
tion of tissues to form organs as illustrated by Hydra
and Moss,
I. Botany.
Study of plant in general.
External morphology of the plant organs : stem,
root, leaf, flower, fruit, and seed.
Internal Morphology
(a) Plant cell.
(b) Stem, root, and leaf.
Reproduction
Vegetative reproduction.
Sexual reproduction
(a) The flower : structure and functions.
(6) Pollination.
(c) The seed : development, structure, dissemina-
tion.
(d) The fruit : development, types, functions.
(e) Germination.
Physiology ; elementary study of the following :
(a) Chemical composition of plants.
(6) Water in plants ; intake of water and inorganic
salts.
(c) Carbon-assimilation.
(d) Transportation ; food storage.
(e) Transpiration.
(/) Respiration.
(g) Growth.
Rapid survey of the plant kingdom : Bacteria,,
spirogyra, mucor, moss, fern cycas.
Study of botanical characters of : (Field and garden
crop plants should be used as far as possible) Cruci-
ferae, Malvaceae, Leguminosae, Rosaceae. Cucurbit-
INTEB. EXAMINATION IN AGBICULTTJBE OF 1931 361
aceae, Compositace, Solanaceae, Euphorbiaceae, Liliaceae.
Gramineae.
Books recommended.
1 . Lowson and Sahni Text-book of Botany (Indian
edition), (London University
Tutorial Press or Thacker
Spink and Company, Calcutta).
2. Percival . . Agricultural Botany (Duckworth).
3. Ranga Chari. . Elementary Botany for Indian
Schools (Government Press,
Madras).
4. Gager . . Fundamentals of Botany (Bla-
kiston).
5. Transeau . . General Botany. (World Book
Company).
6. Farmer and Practical Introduction to the
Chowdhry. Study of Botany, (Longmans,
Green and Company, Limi-
ted).
II. Zoology.
Acquaintance with the following types as illustra-
tions of the various kinds of life :
Tapeworm, Earthworm, Leech, Snail and Slug, Ter-
mite, Fish, Frog.
General organization of Earthworm, Fresh water
mussel, Lobster, and Cockroach.
Elementary anatomy and physiology of the impor-
tant systems of the following :
Amphioxus, Fish, Frog, Fowl, and Squirrel or other
small mammal.
Books recommended :
1. Theobald . . Agricultural Zoology (W. Black-
wood).
2. Gilbert Bourne Comparative Anatomy of Ani-
mals (G. Bell and Sons).
362 CALBNDAB 1928-29
3. Marshall . . Physiology of Farm Animals
(Macmillan, Calcutta).
4. Marshall and Practical Zoology (Smith Elder
Hurst. and Company).
GROUP III.
I. ELEMENTARY SOIL SCIENCE.
Soil Geology. The origin of soils ; classification and
nature of soil forming rocks ; recognition of the following
rocks and their chief characteristics :
(1) Igneous : Granite ; Syenite ; Diorite ; Biabase ;
Gabbro ; Basalt.
(2) Sedimentary Limestone ; Sand stone ; Shale ;.
Dolomite.
(3) Metamorphic : Schists ; Gneiss ; Marble ; Slate ;
Quartzite.
The mineral constituents of the more important soil
forming rocks, their nature and composition.
The importance of Felspars in the formation of clay.
The nature of Kaolinite.
Acid and basic rocks and their effect upon soils form-
ed from them.
The Physical properties of soils. Pore space ; number
of soil particles per given volume and their relation to
surface area exposed to moisture and air, resistance to
cultivation operations, plasticity, absorption, cohesion ;
limits of moisture for successful tillage ; effect of presence
of organic matter on soil structure ; effect of lime ; effect
of cultivation ; sources of soil heat ; specific heat of the
soil ; specific gravity apparent and absolute of the soil ;
effect of colour on absorption of heat and of humus on
conductivity of heat ; effect of decay of organic matter
on soil temperature ; control of soil temperature.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGBIOULTUKE OF 1931 36$
Soil classes. Classification of soils into sand, loam,,
clay, calcarious, humic and peaty soils and the nature
of each class ; division of the United Provinces into
its natural soil classes and the characteristics of each
class.
Sources of Plant Food in the soil. Elements necessary
for plant growth and their sources ; abundant and defi-
cient elements in the soil : conversion of organic matter
into plant food, conditions necessary for bacterial ac-
tivity in the soil ; the Nitrogen cycle briefly explained ;
the relation of air, water and heat to plant food in the
soil, the presence of lime and its importance to the pro-
duction of plant food.
General Principles of manuring in relation to soil.
The effect of organic manures on the texture of soils,
the correct time of application of manures in relation to
irrigation and rain water ; losses of plant food by incor-
rect manuring ; losses by incorrect storage and their
prevention ; acidity and deflocation due to excessive
and unsuitable manuring ; remedies for this condition ;
condition of soil necessary before application of fertilisers
can be profitable ; the essential difference between
organic manures and inorganic manures as regards effect
on soils ; methods of manuring both with organic
manures and chemical fertilisers.
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. " The Soil," by A. D. Hall (John Murray, Lon-
don).
2. "The Physical Properties of Soils," by A. G.
McCall (Orange Judd and Company, New York). Price
about Rs. 2-12.
3. "First Principles of Soil Fertility," by Alfred
Vivian (Orange Judd and Company, New York ; or
Christian Book and Tract Society, Allahabad). Price
Rs. 2-7.
364 CALENDAR 1928-29
4. " Soils, their Properties and Management," by
Lyon, Fippin and Buckman (Macmillan and Company,
New York). Price Rs. 10.
5. " Soils and Fertilizers," by Harry Snyder (Mac-
millan and Company, New York).
Climatology. The distribution of rainfall, its effect
upon the composition, of soils ; determination of humi-
dity ; factors affecting dew ; changes in atmospheric tem-
perature and their effect upon humidity ; winds and their
importance in farming snow, ice and frost and their rela-
tion to the siol ; methods of obtaining data for climatic
reports, simple instruments used in meteorological obser-
veations; climate in relation to soils and plant growth.
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. " Agricultural Meteorology " by Warren Smith
(Macmillan and Company, New York).
2. " Forecasting Weather," by W. A. Shaw (Cons-
table and Company, London).
General Principles of irrigation and Drainage. (a)
Irrigation. -The necessity of irrigation, water require-
ments of crops and the danger of excessive water ;
methods of reducing water requirements of crops : eva-
poration and its relation to plant growth ; prevention
of losses of irrigation water ; amount of seepage in the
three main classes of soils, sands, loams and clays ; the
construction of irrigation channels ; measurement of
discharge of water from outlets ; measurement of water
in flowing channels : relation of depth in inches to total
quantity of water per irrigation ; systems and methods
of irrigating crops ; lift and flow irrigation ; appliances
commonly used for lifting water ; simple calculations
of discharge from common irrigation appliances.
(6) Drainage. The necessity of removing surplus
water from the soil ; the dangers resulting from excessive
INTBB. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1931 365
moi are in the soil ; alkali soils ; their formation and
prevention by drainage ; acid soils and their ameliora-
tion by drainage ; the combined effect of irrigation and
drainage on acid soils, alkali soils and neutral soils ;
kinds of drains ; cost of drains and upkeep ; correct
position of drains in a field ; size and depth of drains ;
control of erosion.
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. "Agriculture and Irrigation in Continental and
Tropical Climates," by K. D. Doyle (Thacker, Spink
and Company). Price Rs. 16-8.
2. " Irrigation and Drainage," by King (Mount
Pleasant Press, Harrisburg, Pa).
NOTE. -It is suggested that the lecture work in soil (Science be co-ordi-
nated as far as possible with related work in the field.
II.PRACTICAL FARMING.
/. Crop Culture : (A) The growing of farm arid
vegetable crops and their care by students ; practice in
the following operations :
(a) Preparation of seed bed and soils.
(b) Sowing of seed.
(c) Transplanting.
(d) Irrigation with and without water lifting appli-
ances.
(e) Interculture.
(/) Winding.
(g) Earthing.
(h) Harvesting including reaping with machinery.
(B) Crops : Special attention to be given to the
f ollow ng :
(1) Cereals . . Water, barley, rice, bajra, juar
and maize.
(2) Fibres . . Cotton, sunnhemp, patsunn.
(3) Oil-seeds . . Castor, linseed, mustard.
(4) Legumes . . Peas, groundnuts, arhar, gram.
366 CALENDAR 1928-29
(5) Fodders . . Juar, lucerne, guar, oats.
(6) Miscellaneous Sugarcane, potatoes, tobacco.
(C) Familiarity with the principles of rotations of
crops.
(D) Vegetable Crops :
(a) Cole-crops . . Cabbage, knol-koh, cauliflower.
(b) Root crops . . Carrot, beetroot, turnip, sweet
potato.
(c) Bulb crops . . Onion, garlic.
(d) Tuber crops . . Potato.
(e) Legumes . . Peas and beans.
(/) Cucurbitaceous Cucumber, torai, melons, pump-
crops kins, gourds.
(g) Miscellaneous Tomato, brinjals, bhindi, corns,,
chillies, turmeric, ginger,
maize.
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. Agricultural Note-book of facts and Figures for
the United Provinces to be published shortly by the
department of Agriculture, United Provinces.
2. The Complete Farmer, by Premirose McCommell
(Cassel and Company, London).
3. Roberts and Fawlkner : A Text -book of Punjab
Agriculture.
4. Crop Production, by A. and G. Howard, Institute
of Plant Industry, Indore, C. I.
//. Introduction to Animal Husbandry. The course
to deal with the draft bullock, the dairy cow and the
goat. The naming of the different external parts ; re-
lation of form and function ; ability to judge ages :
Score -card methods of judging ; measurement of speed
of work of the draft bullock, the handling of bullocks,
cows and goats ; cleaning of animals and byres ; milk-
ing ; practice in preparation of balanced rations for
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGBICULTUBE OF 1931 36T
dairy cow, bullock, young stock and goat ; practice in
watering and exercising ; familiarity with the appear-
ance and use of common medicines and antiseptics ;
ability to throw an animal with ropes, market value
of dairy, draft cattle and goats ; keeping of records of
dairy cattle.
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. " Feeding of Crops and Stock," by A. D. Hall.
2. " The Complete Farmer.'' by Premirose McCom-
mell.
3. " Judging Live-stock," by John A. Craig (Kenyon
Printing Company, Des Moines, Iowa). Price, Rs. 7.
4. " Feeds and Feeding " (abridged edition), by
Henry and Morrison. (Publishers. Henry arid Morrison,
Madison, Wiscon). Price, Rs. 10.
HI. Farm Machinery : Handling in the field of
the plough, harrow, cultivator, roller and planker ; ability
to plough with desi, Mould Board and Disc ploughs ;
familiarity with the methods of hitching ; adjustment
of implements and methods of ploughing : familiarity
with the use of common seed-drills ; weeding and culti-
vation with power and hand implements ; grinding,
cane crushing and fodder cutting.
The following books are suggested for reference : -
1. " Farm Mechanics," by Crawshaw and Lehman
(Manual Arts Press, Peoria, Illinois, U. S. A.)
2. " Farm Machinery and Farm Motors," by
Davidson (Thacker, Spink and Company). Price, Rs. 11-8.
IV. Calculations : The following simple calcula-
tions to be noted in the student's note book. Field
368 CALENDAR 1928-29
notes attested by the teacher to be produced at the ex-
aminations :
(1) Time taken to plough, harrow, cultivate and
plank one acre, under the following condi-
tions :
Hard soil.
Soft soil,
Sod and
Stubble.
(2) The variation in time taken in area ploughed
with differences in depth and width of plough-
ing under similar conditions.
(3) The area sown with simple seed drills per day
calculated from the work done in two hours ;
probabilities of error.
(4) Quantity of work done in hand-weeding, har-
rowing, etc., per hour by a given number of
labourers, in this case students.
^5) Calculations of discharge of water from outlets,
from irrigation channels and from irrigation
appliances.
^6) Estimation of loss by evaporation and seepage.
{7) Estimation of area of land irrigated in a given
time by irrigation appliances in common use ;
duty of water.
^ 8) Increase in outturn of crops by top dressing
with chemical fertilisers and oil cakes.
{9} Calculation of quantity of fodder chopped by
machine worked (a) by hand, (6) by electricity
or other power, and comparison with hand
chopping with gandasa.
(10) Calculation of speed of fodder cutter and other
machines in common use on the farm in revo-
lutions per minute.
INTER. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1931 369
GROUP IV.
ENGLISH.
There will be two papers of three hours each, one
on Translation and Composition and the other on
Essay and Unseen Passages. In the first paper ques-
tions on grammar will be set, including parsing, analysis,
sequence of tenses, and conversion of direct and indirect
forms of speech.
Text-books prescribed :
(a) For detailed study
(1) Easier English Unseens, by A. C. Mukerji.
(2) Translation, Essay -writing, and Unseens for
Intermediate Classes by Raghukul Tilak
and Deoki Nandan Sharma.
(3) A Book of English Prose, by P. Seshadri
(Oxford University Press), (omitting the
Convalescent, the Beautiful, Dr. Skinner^
El. Dorado, the Dedicated Life, War).
(b) General Study
(1) The Strange Case of Dr. Jekyl and Mr. Hyde,
by Robert Louis Stevenson.
Two books of general scientific interest, as for ins-
tance
(2) Biology the Science of Life, by Professor Hen-
derson, M.A.
(3) The Structure of the Earth, by Rev. Bonney,.
F.R.S.
GROUP V.
ECONOMICS.
Introduction. What is Economics ? Why is
nation richer than another ? Why is one man richer
than another ? What is wealth ? How does it differ
from income ? The whole course is an answer to these,
questions.
370 CALENDAR 1928-29
Production. What does it cost to produce wheat
-on a village farm in the United Provinces ? Cost of
labour, ploughing, sowing, weeding, reaping, threshing,
etc. Purchase and depreciation. Interest on all ex-
penses till the crop is sold. Rent of the land and trans-
portation to the bazaar. Cost of supervision.
Examine similarly the cost of producing and mar-
keting milk and other common necessities.
Exchange. Has it paid to produce wheat and milk
,at the above cost ? What are the present prices of
wheat, milk, etc., in the United Provinces for different
^qualities, at different seasons and for the last five years ?
What causes these differences and changes ? Laws of
supply and demand and causes for variation. Relation
of prices to cost of production over a period of years.
Consumption. Why do we demand wheat, cotton,
milk, pottery, tools ? Wants and their varying impor-
tance. Necessities, comforts, luxuries. Division of in-
come between various wants. Budgets of students
.and villagers. Do we get equal satisfaction from equal
expenditure ? How do we change our purchase when
prices fall and when our incomes increase ?
Difference in the cost of production and distribution.
Why do rents differ ? Kinds of lands. Advantages
of fertility and situation.
Why do rates of interest differ ? Short and long
loans : risks and management of loans. Co-operative
credit. Relation of the rate of interest to the supply
of capital. Causes of saving.
Why do wages differ ? Grades of labour. Effi-
ciency of labour. Real and nominal wages. Cost of
living and the standard of living. Relation of wages
to the supply of labour. Relation of birth-rates and
^death-rates to income.
1KTEB. EXAMINATION IN AGRICULTURE OF 1931 371
Organization and management. In what different
ways might wheat be produced ? Does the method
depend upon situation ? Wages ? The rate of interest ?
Education ? Quality of the product ? How is the
method actually determined ? By whom ?
Carry out this reasoning for milk and other common
necessities.
In what cases is it most profitable to use a railway,
a bicycle, and one's feet ? Compare the uses of hand-
writing, typewriting and printing press. Hand-sewing
and the sewing machine. Why do primitive methods
continue in use along with more advanced ones ?
Money, banking and foreign exchange, barter, uses
of money, reasons for minting and for free coinage, paper
money and cheques. The work of banks and their
economic importance. India's foreign trade find its
advantages.
Taxation. The necessity for taxation. The income
tax, custom duties, land revenue and excise. Who bears
these taxes ? Reasons for progressive taxation, im-
perial and local taxation.
The following books are suggested for reference :
1. Elements of Economics, Vol. I, by Alfred Mar-
shall (Macmillan & Co., London).
2. An Introduction of Economics for Indian Stu-
dents, by Moreland.
or
MATHEMATICS.
ALGEBRA : Quadratic equations involving one or
two unknown quantities.
Arithmetical and Geometrical Progressions.
Permutations and Combinations.
The Binomial Theorem for positive integral index.
Proportions and Variations.
Use of indices and logarithms.
Practical use of the Slide Rule.
372 CALENDAR 1928-29
GEOMETRY AND MENSURATION : Simple Plane and
Solid Figures ; excluding any detail about the
sections of a cone.
Similar figures and proportionals.
Field book.
Collinear points and concurrent straight lines.
TRIGONOMETRY : Trigonometrical Ratios.
Easy trigonometrical indentities and equations.
Solution of traingles.
Practical measurement of angles of elevation, heights
and distances including the necessary cal-
culations.
GRAPHS : Variables and co-ordinates.
Statistical graphs and those governed by a natural
law.
Continuity and discontinuity of graphs. Problems.
Graphs and Algebraical expression of functions.
The linear graph.
Use of Cartesian co-ordinates : Distance between
two points ; Distance between a straight line
and a point ;
Angle between two straight lines.
The quadratic graphs.
Practical Graphical Interpolation.
INTEGRATION : Small errors ; Infinitesimal quan-
tities.
Differentials : Differential coefficient.
Easy standard forms of differentiation explained
(without elaborate proofs). Sum and product
of functions.
Summation of series.
Integration, considered as summation of a series of
differentials.
A few very easy standard forms of integrals (with-
out elaborate proofs). Integration by parts.
Easy determinations of length, area and volume.
Practical use of the planimeter and the opisometer.
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS
373
.s
8
.95
^a
sit
I
|
Is
a g
2 H ^
*s
.-< .
;}
S'g
^ fl) $
H
i4 > .2 G^
(2
.2 o
cj r5
Kn
g
a 2
|
ii
^-.s
2
* *i
o
A f
^ll
S
i 1
13
1!
'S fM^;
4>
a
8PS
'as^O
|g
|| s
l^o 2
c
S ^
O
^ O ^H
O H^ -*i 4J
fe
A
CM
o
1
2 b
.sT
1
b
O >
o "
o o
o *
2 'w
JO
c
yd
J 's
^y
W k,
5 1
United Provinces (not maintained
Intermediate Examination of 1930
CD
1
1
M
1
15*
p
MEERUT DIVISION.
English, Persian, Sanskrit, History, Logic,
mics, Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry,
Drawing, Urdu and Hindi.
English, Persian, Sanskrit, Modern History
Economics, Mathematics, Physics, Che
Civics and Hindi.
English, Persian, Sanskrit, Modern History,
Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry, Cmcs,
mics, Urdu and Hindi.
AGRA DIVISION.
English, Persian, Sanskrit, History, Logic,
mics, Mathematics, Physios, Chemist]
Biology.
English, Persian, Sanskrit, Logic, Modern J
Economics, Mathematics, Physics, Ch<
Biology, Geography, Urdu and Hindi.
tt a.
eg
f*
oT
;
g
1
3
8~
oT
^ :
1
1
l
1
o
o
a
11
CS
4>
*o
"g
.2
B5
U)
3
t*
<u
il
IE
5
l.a
1
1
^
oT
1
SH
C
h-(
d|
of
|
G
S
>
*?
?
*
P
'. H
P5 5
*s
1
"^P
.
i>
3
*g
S
ft
fc
<
3
*ou roudCt
^
<N
CO
^
10
24
374
CALENDAR 1928-29
OH
c
3 O O C .i M
3
.-
^ q, "" ||
**
li
f^s ill
.
.2
.0 fM
.2 ^ ^ d *
J4
o
li
tt d <D ^* W
a
CH
^s
$3 *-H ^ V'
"^
ii
"3
.a
d a
'a o r * "S ; 3^o
boo
I 2
o o
y w
PH
|522|W-S2
has be en given.
.2
I
^ f
s .1
1 w
"S a
i o
11
o i
IP'S
3 .S
>;
* 11
2 w >
53 fl.2
.22
s
^W
^T5
o c
.1*
W bT
c^
i
O)
t, Latin, Modern
ogic, Economics,
:ry, Civics, Urdu
r hich recognition
DIVISION (con
, Sanskrit, Moder
I Mathematics.
, Sanskrit, Histoi
:s, Chemistry, Bic
HILKHAND DIV
, Sanskrit, Moder
athematics, Phys
> Sanskrit, Moder
Physics, Chemis
5
Q
<;
1
"B^ -2
1 a
S&8
02|0
r T w ^
.^j .""1 BQ
w.2
Cg 05
llf
*
.a
S |i
'So
S
3 r/r
II
O * 03
2 ^
-3
5) PH
.2
o ^
4> 06*5
o
.*
PH '3
* o
- P
.1
PH g
. ^iffi
'&
A fl
3 -2 en
&
3.
^ 8 i
'; te *
^ .w ta 'g
g-'H
aas
^W H
3 ^S 2
fWl rt
W
w
w
w
W
cT
^T3
j
g
.ed
PI
rS
In
1
cr
C
HH
S a
^ t?
!
2?
oP
^|
a
i
a
"eS
O
a
3!
s
1
'i
1
s
eO
PQ
i I
O> Jo
1
1
s
1
S ^*
|a
a
|
I
"a
li
I
3 4> "Tl
ill
i
PP
tf
PQ
OQ
co
^
00
cr-
o
on rBiiog
OF BJ1.COGN17FD .1KTITUTIONS
375
.S3
a,
a|
&
c
c ft
w
^
>g
&
a 1
^
$3 r-
.0 y
c
11
O d
"3
.2
I
11
'2 ^
P
^-r
.2
22 r~*
> CO
.ii o
O
|
6
O OS
|w
^V 5 --;
3,
k.r^'
A
2
ft-g
15^
S ^i
I'&l
"3-5
!<
'S >^ *
po
'5 65
l c )g
.2 co
c ^
i
118
83 *
R
fIJ
&p <
I 2
fl
|-|s
tf
c^
OS
tf
,
> ^
* * *
-P r ^
r-
o >>
o o
11
'1?
!'
It
ctf
I 1
*- o
w 1
^
_^ ^
<
^
w ^
^^
.2' 6
a >i
fl'l o 3
c^ of
.2
.2".?
.2* 'a
nglish, Persian, Sanskrit, History, Log
mics, Civics, Mathematics Physics,
Urdu and Hindi.
nglish, Sanskrit, Modern History,
Mathematics, Hindi, Logic, Geograp
Physics, Chemistry and Biology.
tiglish, Persian, Sanskrit, Latin, Moder
Ancient History, Logic, Economics, Mi
Physics, Chemistry, Geography, Biol
and Hindi.
iglish, Persian, Sanskrit, Modern His to
History, Logic, Economics, Mathematic
Chemistry and Biology.
Qglish, Sanskrit, Modern Histroy, Log
matics, Economics and Bengali.
BENARES DIVISION.
nglish, Persian, Sanskrit, History, Lo|
mics, Mathematics, Physics, Chen 1
Hindi.
GORAKHPUR DIVISION.
nghbh, Persian, Sanskrit, History, Lo
inatics, Physics, Chemistry, Biology 2
mics.
W
W
a
W
a
W
W
^
oo
"o
oT
"S
'
*
O
a/
Jj
I
m3
a;
'o
O
iS
-P
"S
^
0)
w
&
8
hH
^5
3
ce
S
e8
a
e
S
S
<D
S
1
1
d
^
o
1
o
-3
1
"^p
CU
C
Ij
1
fi c
CJ
o
&D
cS
X3 rO
.,-<
cc
1
1 1
ll
55
PH cJ
13 .
c'S
^D
? '
J3Q
V
rtj
,5 cT
o ja
M
J>
1 L
bO^
-f^
^ S
-o
a
^
X*c
.as
!>> of
')'^
.^- "cc
<5
Q
zi
W
t3"
9^
P
3
-
S
CO
3
S
2
r t
376
CALENDAR 1928-29
H
c
g
S2 lls
.9-g
H
d
d
t^s*- 2
S3 ^co
.2
fl c 2
<B-
.
'S
'3
| of5 'g 4 *
|'S>s
'5
1
S w
5 ^
| C W ^
2^^
fg
rj
Q* N ^i
o. ^
^ Oi
aS
as
-gllll
*#
as
Provision
tended
Provision
tended
l c .s ^ ,5*3
si "oOD
'3 'S ^
fcb^S
o jd^
gAHO
Provision
tended
8"
$
6
d
^ c
2!
62
d p 3
1
^b
o
o
W
1*
Us
I 6
a
|
cT
cT t>,
O ^
"0
.sS
+J fl?
H
to
jjO rj
O .^4
be
S
O
hS w ^
s .. w ^
3s
n which recognition has
LUCKNOW DIVISION.
ian, Arabic, Sanskrit, I
Mathematics, Physics,
ian, Arahic, Modern H
and Mathematics.
ian, Sanskrit, History,
ematics, and Hindi.
GIRLS' COLLEGES.
ian, Sanskrit, History,
onomics, Urdu, Hindi,
Hygiene and Child Stu
ian, Sanskrit, Latin, F
Ancient History, Logic
cs, Physics, Chemistry,
, Hygiene and Child Stu
sfcrit, Modern History,
and Physiology, Hygie
**
aa
CO O
t_ t^l
S i ^
r> ^>
d ^
$
o
$> C
o 1
2
a; W tjj
pS ^|j
^ffi
a" t
#
fo
aT o
i||i
i?ffr
&
^wS
^3
g
^is
'^w^S
w
w
H
w
H
H
oT
3
o
o
^
o>
o
^
1
o
F"
d
o
6
1
^ 1
s
tf
&
?
3
o
s
a
d
Q
8
1
i
.S
QT;
.s
H " 1
o
to
b
5
"5*
O
o
J9
h-i
P ^'
Mi
ll
3
OD
M
00
C5
Q
on pp*
R
1
*
LIST OP RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS
377
Recognized provisionally in
French, Physics and Che-
mistry up to 1931.
Examination of 1930,
~
1 S
geu
1
11
P
M
i> 93
"1
friO
1
%
si
ffS
1
|s
4J
^ w
i
>
-** o
>"S
OLLEGES FOR EUROPEANS.
Mathematics, Modern History,
Latin, French, Physics and C
3dern History, Ancient Histor
tics, Physics and Chemistry.
,tin, Ancient History, Modern
tics, Physics, Chemistry and
c
^
eg
.H
'S
8
ROHILKHAND DIVISION.
rsian, Arabic, Sanskrit, Histoi
tics, Physics and Chemistry.
ALLAHABAD DIVISION.
11
S
3 2
S
J*
II
rf k
*
Is" .
35 "_J 0j
rsian, Arabic, Sanskrit, Histoi
tics, Physics and Chemistry.
JHANSI DIVISION.
rsian, Arabic, Sanskrit, Histoi
tics, Ph^^sics, Chemistry, U
o
I=H
WH cj ^ eg
<D
o eg
cu oj .^
& cd
o ej
22
SH
2
^ 2 S
HH ^
2
M o
* <u o
(A
-^Ja
* 0) O
-3 -d p;
cTJE:
0) M.J
J.s
11)1^
S
I|
.s -a o
r-7 Q O
^ ^
lo||
w
1 'w H ft
'S
1
1
1 '
W
i
.
aT
oT
^
^s
oP
S?
g
s
O
1
*
Q
=3
'a
o
EH ^
&
D
tD
i)
O
?3 o
o
.2
1e
la
0}
I
3 p
CJ H?
>
d
05
^
7
1
^ oT
HH
1
1
g
2
So 5i
'S
-22
S
4) Q
O
G
fl
C
pj
"a
^ O
S
hH
HH
^
M
O V
a
T3
ja
oo o3
KM
fl S
fl^
C .
a
t. George
soorie.
11
o
overtime]
Moradal
overnme
Allahabj
overnme
E taw ah.
o
M
g.S
S 1 ^
3Q
S 5
O
O
O
C5
^r
ai c^i
3
a
s
8
378
CALENDAR 1928-29
s 5
2 c
.3 ?
>^ d S
? C fcfi O
o . e8 O CH H
1
$
> CO dT5
5S
Si o
g>
which
-
^ &'
. w ^
o .tf "
MH tn '
3 ^
> fl x
R * ^
as ??
& ^-s
< g t*4
S ,-
HH
w
>
s
' ^
>-< 2 :
o
3
O ^
s si
H C/2 _H
2 -a
< -o
III
w
w
W
bt
O
o
O
s
I
S
-5
'S
s
I
'SI?
I
oa
pueg
CJ
M
i
3*
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS
379
1* 1
a
2
1
1
fU
i
o
o
a
o
a
""*
Q^ ^
8
s
d
Cu
IS
I
1
a
i
a
= 1
>>
1
.2 ^
&
a;
.!
i
3 PI
-*-
tf
*F
o
OS
o
CS
1
^
-3
W
ft
W
1
1
.2
600 ri 1
O 4> W
^
<D
^ W ri
IS
K
g
tf
i
:
;
5
g
^
^2
6
a
a>
8
-**
^
O
S CO
'3 *
* CO
-'
tO)^
.S ^
r
S o
'3 ^
T?
i*
2 2
C
.2
C
t-
OS
I
CA S
a>
3
I
1
1
&
*H
a
PN zi
05
.S
en
?
ft
6
oT
cT
1
O
>'C
2^
P^ ^
*>
O
i-C
k
P
P i
-S
nstitutions in the United Pro
OJ
Meerut College, Meerut.
N. B. E. C. Intermediate College, K
Lucknow Christian College, Lucknoi
St. John's College, Agra.
D. A.-V. College, Cawnpore.
Sanatan Dharam College of Commer
Kayasth Pathshala Intermediate Col
Shyam Sundar Memorial Intermedia
Bareilly College, Bareilly
of institutions in the United
Allahabad Agricultural Institute, Na
Agricultural College, Cawnpore.
M
.
+
'
O
a
-< <N
cc *( 10
50
t-
00
o>
j
^
^5
-3
H*l
'
cc
380
CALENDAR 1928-29
S
fl
&
g-g
-2
'S
I
S "S
2 *
ft
i
a
:
*
W
!
*
I
sjf
1
rt
^
1
<a
a
1
a
o
o
s
W
-c
W)
S J
S
HH
c
s
15
H
^53 ^
1
|t
1
1
1
P
^
{H
1 -d
"* i * s 'e8
^ "
.
.
,
2i i i
fl
ps
wX ! eS
rf
Provinces recognized
Optional subjects including
istory* and Geography* w
;her optional or compulsory-
in which recognition has
been granted.
MEERUT DIVISION.
srsian, Sanskrit, Drawmg ;
Science.
K |
o" o
||
bB bb
.s 1
cd
"C
cr
_0
s
rsian, Sanskrit and Drawing
Tsian, Arabic and Drawing
rsian, Arabic, Sanskrit, Dri
ing, Science and Commerce.
"8
a^
ft
ft
ft
ft
ft
<u
?
e>
1
1
1
.2
J^
eg
1
tiaran- j
i
jCj
"S d
K
w
^ "3
S
(A
^g
K?^
1
1
1
%$
1 o
1
8
CO
1
|
a
o ^ &
^
J3
S OH
gp
'Si
gPH
-a
so
1.
fl
if
w
I
ftg
overnment Hi:
ranpur.
overnment i
High School,
Saharanpur.
a
Is
bC
s
li
overnment H;
zaffarnagar.
+*
ft
<i
O
M
CD
O
3
,
<^
CO
^
o
CO
^
OU j'BIJdg
LIST OP RKCOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS
38 1
J
IS
y.
1
5<N
'55
S
C
4) P"H
c
7
"3
& .
^
.2
S 4
ll
5
io
1
^
N
o
ej
fl
S
(2 s
|
1
^
1
W
cs5
oc
1
^3 ca
13
^
1
If
.
_0
i
w
_0
c
o
o
1
0^
S
Q P
a
5
1
i
s
1
3
P
^JH
1
1
* 0; X
i 2
1=3
.2 P
D
D
O fH
oi
!
i
00 ol
Ditto
Arabic, Sanskrit,
ng, Science, Commerce
anual Training.
h
Sanskrit and Drawing . .
1
1
I
_cT
cC
1
Sanskrit, Drawing and
e. i
Sanskrit, Draw ins.
e and Commerce. I
12
oJ
P
44
1
Sanskrit and Drawing . . i
E. Science = Physics and C
?s of those schools only wh
High School Examination
;re is no mention of either
History and Geography as
P* C
jf'gS
'&
c"
=i
fl -
S
ci
c -
I !
3 "5
2 '-'
.2 ^
63 grj
eS
8 Jj
eg
M 8
o
S-!i
93
^
i*
|P g
gw
1
|OD
1
W 2
o
cc
1*
1
o S
1-2
ft
ft
ft
ft
^
ft
ft
h
5^
rf< Eg
^
+-
^
j-j
.
^
1? ^
*o o
to
2
bO
bO
S
fl
""
.3 it3
S
S
W
3
-P
|
J3
^
s ^
a5
^
2 r?
'-S
1
-P
s
CO
S?
S3
1 Edward Anglo- Sanskri
School, Muzaffarnagar.
I
D. A.-V. High School, 1
nagar.
Government High Schoo
Brahman Anglo- Ve die
School, Meerut.
Cantonment Anglo-Beng
School, Meerut.
|
1
!>
I
Nanakchand Anglo-Sansl
bcnool, Meerut.
Devanagri High School, 3
Government High School
district Meemt.
Digambar Jain High
Baraut, district Meerut
*These subjects are shoi
into two sepaiate siibjtcts
Institutions against the
subjects from a date prior
00
* S
-
Cl
PH
CO
f-<
s
CO
i t
i-H
&
1
382
CALENDAR 1928-29
*
.s
--<
5
li
gg
&
1
s
HfJi
ia8SJ
.
2 -3 x
&*
1
5
ll
1
eS
W
r
0)
A
'S S
So
il
I
s
II
P-i
8
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS
383
i
c -^
flj
c ^
^ i m
JS
|
2
i
^
,0
h
>,
J3
.9
I!
CO d)
PH
ce
1
73
O
N
l
O
S
S 4 ' i ^
PH o
g
-ij
c
a?
s
1
<D
>
03
ca
JS
c
iS
a
s
"r> KJ no
S"- -5 5
s
bfl as
c
03
_G
~T
f
C
OS
JD
15 3 -2 o
bi
J ^p
tx
e8
ce
to
.9
; fl *5 .
fi-|
_c
5
s,
o
^
1
g ^ s^l],
^
2
P
-a
O
4j
.s
fl
Q
g |w g |
^
'(H
^ d
t-l M
aj O
S
"a c
a
ctf
fl < 'o *-*3 fl>
.Jj <u o CO 1
^
CO -^
2
QQ O
>
, a?
T*
-w
^ /^ "^ rl rM 1
^:
y
*
r^
a>
G
c6 73
5
3^
r*
-J)
;-.
-id
? ^{^ 0'
C
CA> ^
y. c3
a.
ts~ .
a> ^
& .
o
oS
0)
<
cc
(S
0^
I .
IX!
h* O.gPg &
n
1*
^ OD pp
^ o
c c
ea ^
p
al
1*
3
c -
||
.
s*
fl
08
s
^||l
^
&
&
^
a
1 8 J a
.ts-g
-*-> *->
d o
&
UJ
>p ^
,
*
i t^'-
||
00
*
T3
^
3
1
1*S |
JJ3 7?
^^
'3
"^
^T
,-r
08
H g
JS j
l!
o ,c
ss
HOQ
T^'C
|
1
8
1
J3
bC
3
g|S^
^^^0
as T?73 +j
1
TJ
J
fll
^-^^
H|
toD^I
.sSw
w <
I!
u
II
5"
Partap High Schoo
ctrict Garhwal (Teh
j Government High
garh.
Dharmsamaj High
garh.
Kayasth Pathshala
Aligarh.
*The subjects are
ito two separate subjei
Institutions against
acts from a date prior
a
o
CO
384
CALENDAR 1928-29
1
K
a
a
m o
1
2.
o
O
4 <
;g
.'S
bpco
o 01
S2
>
'^
r4
tH
o
t^
2 .
^ o
a^i
A w
>-
d
1
|S
F
11
'3 o
'S3
.2 c
^^
!Pj
1*
Q ^
I 3
r
o
:
:
3 a
s
*a
llf
1
6
1 1
o
6
0*
1^
1
a
1
S %
1
a
a
|5
i
.1
f
ec
'. <
8 :
^
OJ
3
IHL
J, 5, a -e
J l
?
>
I*
a
o>
.M-a
tfc
^c
1
I
S
1
O
.1
i
s
"S
O2 O
J
o C
Optional subject
History* and Geoj
ther optional or c
in which recog
been grar
'ersian, Sanskrit
History and Geog
31
go
<S r3
W 1
.8
SI
S o
3^
ersian, Sanskrit,
Science.
Ditto
anskrit, Drawing
History and Geog
ersian, Sanskrit an
ersian, Sanskrit,
Science.
.2 S'S
31?
^1
e8 e6f^
1*s
{-.
^
Pn
&
PH
Pn
PH
;
^
^
2 :
^
;
S
a
^
s
J
|
1
bo
S
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS
385
C
c
a
^ o
.2
.2
.2
^ 8
t"
tS CO
8)2
**s
*2
S
i
1 s
* P
IH
^3
3 .5
11
|f
rt ^
^ 'S
o* 1
|^
| g
||
1 ?
O 4>
2 S
o
*
fc
s
:
.2 o>
w ^
s
Q
5
1 s 1
ass
1 1
S S
-+3
s
o
s
if |f
6 2jj
fcfc
C
'S
T2
c *
ee
bb
c
to
till!
0}
n
.s
;_i
q
o
fcfj
c
'E
ee
IH
1
.2i M *8 c
,-
Q
d
P
2*
3
| 03 ^O ^
JJj c
. o o
c & S
^J"
e8
1 4> 2 '- O
2 o
4^
So
'C
ti
w o -^ S ^
j-O
S
| S S
P ^S
cc
>&
o fioS S S
*
c
i
O?
C
ee
^ 'S'SjS i?*
GO
* o
* o
C C
ej fc
c c
a 8
3 o>
'
S
cd
a 8jS
'P
A
!*
1*
'S 'o
r
'2
&
llli
1
1
I 1 \
t tJ D jj
.2<
5 w
ee
|
eg
lift
<
^
ft
?
So
^
^r g Jfl
I
S
1 I 1
1 i
1.
ffl
If**
o S
V 43 M
<
JS
fcC
S
. w
I
-p .
I i ^
I Jftc
s
W ^ 8
1
bo
a
Kshattriya
habad.
11
1
i&
la i 51
Q^ jy rrj M .ji
^ <v J
^
o
lojl
CO
r
r ^ P *s 'S
1
00
o
$
|ij
9
5 S
3 s
9
5
1 1
386
CALENDAR 1928-LM)
od
Is
G
O ^^
.3
; o
g
o
g-
i
0)
152
^1
P3
N
_N . jj
C PH
|a
1"
O) "^
S
'
s ^i
^
-5
I'-* 3 S
s
c
I 'la*
l ^
6
|
3
*
3
D
|||
!
3
S
i
5
3
3
j>
1
S
1 -
-
r'
tt.'
I-*
CO
^ o
^
k
Optional subjects including
History* and Geography* whe
ther optional or compulsory
in which recognition has '
been graDted.
AGRA DIVISION
i (concluded}.
' Persian, Sanskrit, Drawing ai
( Science.
Persian, Sanskrit, Dra win
Science and Commerce.
1 Persian, Arabic, Sanskrit ai
' Science.
i Persian, Sanskrit, Draw in
Science and Commerce.
1
i ROHILKHAND DIVISION.
1 Persian, Arabic, S'aiiskr
Drawing, Science, Commer
and Manual Training.
Persian, Drawing, History ai
j Geography.
Persian, Arabic, Sanskrit, Dra
ing and Science.
|
Z
T!*
i
|
^J
'3
"5
S
^
,^
3
S
_?
Si
w
w
-ji
25
8
'5
"o
f-T
_c
n
2
XJ
o
V/J
Sri Ram Chandra Vi<
School, Firozabad
Agra.
Governnicnt High Sc]
puri.
Mission High School, \
Government High Sch<
Government High Schc
id
a
00
State High Sehool,
(Rampur State).
3 o
l c
00
XT
9
To
"
a
LEST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS.
387
fr J
s .a
f i-
c 22"
0> fO 3
N O
d
o"
d
d
d
d
-4-)
=
d
o
| ^1
3
S
a
S
S
S
S
S
s
5
b s . ^|
.22 ^ ?? o ri
S * 2 ^ ^
-S 'S^S "^
.
-
*
^
TJ
^
-a
O ^3 ^ J
hn
_fi
c
eS
_id
5
"H "5 -fl
K> ** .TH pi
Sanskrit and Drawin
1
o
.<.
1
Sanskrit and Drawin
Sanskrit, Dra\i
:e and Commerce.
Arabic, Sanskrit
ing.
Sanskrit, Drawing
3e.
Arabic, Sans
ing and Science.
Sanskrit, Drawing
:e.
o
I
q
4-)
a
CE. Science = Physics
es of those schools on
High School Examine
ere is no mention of
of History and Geogra
d
a S
c
d d
d t
d d
a *
d
o S S "^ d
d
eg d
c5
d ^
d 5
CD
'S3
fe
AH
I s
2
&
!*
F
F
F
P-I
F'
'111!
jd
^
9 S?*S w
1 Eastern IngHs Memorial Hig
School, Bareilly.
Western Inglis Memorial Hig
School, Bareilly.
Edward Memorial High Schoo
Bareilly.
Government High School, Bijnor
Government Bullock High Schoo]
Najibabad, district Bijnor.
Government High School
Budaun.
Meston Islamia High School,
Budaun.
Government Intermediate Col
lege, Moradabad.
Coronation Hindu High School
Moradabad.
Parker High School, Moradabad .
*These subjects are shown agaiu
i^to two separate subjects with effe
Institutions against the names
te subjects from a date prior to the
J8
10
g
cH
CD
o
S
3
' ' S* 3
388
CALENDAR 1928-29
d
^<N
"1
ll
|s
rd
:
.2
d d *>
o d
3
J* g
d
'3
W
t t
*|*
S
B
o
Q -S
S
o g S
CO X O
d ,>
d
<&
5
5
s
i5 S
S
o
>
5
nal subjects including
j* and Geography* whe-
3tional or compulsory
vhich recognition has
been granted.
LKHAHD (concZuded).
Arabic, Sanskrit and
"g-
X
e
03
02
O
y
ll
bo
Sanskrit and Drawing . .
and Sanskrit
Sanskrit, Drawing
e and Commerce.
Arabic, Sanskrit,
ing, Science, Manual
ng and Commerce.
Arabic, Sanskrit,
ng and Science,
'gj .s
S
II
c
eg
S
dd rf*|
d d g'g
i
031
s
J*
1
(S
r l fiS
I s
75
o
s
si
"^ .
'G
S's -S
2> d 5
a
^35
d S >d
&
^^
ws
2|
MTS OQ
CO
A
.s
11
a .a
C
II
al
ai
|l . |
1
I
1
S3
1
HI
* ^
**
!I
ifl !
f
^*
S
.a
fcP-^g
<^
^ &
,2
s iS-
^ f^ **^*
oj *d
^o ^ s p^
Aj OH
Ss
d
is
1 S
N
d _flJ
M|
ill it
I!
X
o
i
s
t O
J*
8
s
s
s
S
s
LIST OF RECOGNITION INSTITUTIONS.
389
>
O
* 00
1 1
03 43
!
1 1
2
PHM
J4* -9
CO
3; ^
S 1
Is
bO 3
* ?
fl? nO
O ft
rt O^
9
^ P
>> C
P3
1 i
3 *
i |
^
r0 f]
W
| |J!
^ S 1 1
S
1
f ils
s
S S 8
a
s
.2 M *"
s
p
d 2 06 ^ **
-s
1
ii!ll
$%
._. <D . .
'o o ^5 T3
i
ce
: i
O |^ ^.
'5
"o
w
3 ^ 5
i.
ff ^ ^ S
1
W)
* "o *o P<
M
* "1 2 '3
eg
Ui
S
-tf 1 *
S * | fi . "I
fi
fi
1 li'lf
1 6 |
9 15 .t?o 'M |w
1 II 1 II
-4^
S cT
o 1
1|!i
O -3
1
'PI
^ 8 ^5 , .3
H c fl fl fl fl .2
>J e .2 -d 2 S R
< 'S5 o 'S3 P *S3 o ' ^?
^02 <ft ^02 M<1
.
.11
12
.s
I.i
So o
3^0
s 111!
Pn
PH plj 4
PH
PH
^. 3 g
r}
S
i 1 i i-s
!>
*'
"S -*J ^ '.>
I^*S SR S*
1
1
a
H
"i
-5 -3 ^ ^3
| | -3 |
CQ CQ ^ PH
f * 11'
H fl -a ii
1.1 ^ .
jimari Kshattriya ]
Tirwa, district
Kl.
jnt Intermediate
tawah.
igh School, Etawah
ubjects are shown a
arate stV jects with
)ns agains, the nam(
date prior to the sej
i*-
(1 1| !| ||
i;
i l w w
i SOT -9
ifla
& *s
fe^
||-
i ?8 l
M S" 3
l!||
* FI
CO ^ tO CO
t*.
GO 0>
Q
?
*" " " "
t-
t- l>
s g
25
390
CALENDAB 1928-29
1
lgi
'*3
q OS
o -<
6
^S o
' J
g"*
I Ctf
O
g^p
i S
11
(S3 OJ
1*
ej fi
111
c
:
*
*3 So
a
< ^ ^C
_o
25-2
O
i ll
s
S
s a s
a
S S
; *
^
Optional subjects including
History* and Geography* whe-
ther optional or compulsory
in which recognition has
been granted.
ALLAHABAD DIVISION
(continued).
aiiskrit, Drawing, Science and
Commerce.
ersian, Arabic, Sanskrit, Draw-
ing, Science, Commerce and
Manual Training.
ersian, Arabic, Drawing and
Science.
ersian Sanscrit. Drawing and
Science.
Ditto
ersian, Sanskrit and Drawing . .
ersian, Sanskrit, Drawing and
Science.
Ditto
02
f*
& PH
fr
fr
"
8
E
111
S
o 1
a
j
& 1
1
bO
S
_d ^ -d
Hip * H -^
M tri
S
t
"^ ^s
i o
d
4=1
>
o ^
g
a
| I -g
.1
^ *
^A
1
|| || ||
tig
H /v Q
||
s ^
18.
|| || j|
ll
3 ||
CC
O
Woo
M
Q QJ
2 o
**
S
00
<M CO ^J
00
D I>
00 GO
LIS T OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS.
391
=3*
X
B
43 0)
fl
c
2
00 "^
O
0}
|
S "5
"^ O
o
2 .
2 c
*co
a co
lH ^>
"S*
* 'S
N FH
N ^
CJ rt
So <u
1*
bo 43
;i|
O M
o fa
a
| K
o
:
{ 1
1
M >> O)
w
43
o
3
o
o
S 3,
'1
| *
X
S
S
5
s a
4
t o
1
1
00
|sf|
Persian, Sanskrit, Drawing, Com-
merce, Science and Manual
Training.
Sanskrit, Drawing, Commerce,
History and Geography*
Persian, Arabic, Sanskrit,
Drawing and Science*
Persian, Arabic, Sanskrit,
Drawing, Science and
Manual Training.
Persian, Arabic, Sanskrit,
Drawing, Science, Manual
Training and Agricultural
Botany.
Persian, Sanskrit, Drawing and
Science.
Persian, Sanskrit and Drawing . .
Persian, Sanskirt, Drawing and
Science.
NOTE. Science = Physic
the names of those schools only wh
from the High School Exammation c
dch there is no mention of their Histo]
on of History and Geography as twc
^
g
H
A
.3
I
o- n
U'S I
bhar Kath Sanatan Dl
atermediate College, Ca
arwari Vidyalaya, Ca
'o
o
tJQ
bO
a
a
<D
ment Intermediate (
Allahabad.
Christian Intermed
ge, Allahabad.
ha Pathshala Inter
College, Allahabad.
t i
w 1
ill
subjects are shown ag
eparate subjects with e
Uons against the names
a 'date prior to the se]
lit,
ii
N
o
i
3^
' O
||
11 )
||||
OQ
o
H
M
> Q
1 8
&
oo
s
S
o
S
1 2"
|r s
392
CALENDAB 1928-29
Vernaculars in which
reoognition. has been
granted.
1 1 1
a o- | 3 ^
1 1 ^ 1 1
O
a a
$2 1
!_*&*
1 I 1 1 I
f M g6 60 q
;
.S &c
liii
I Mil
.So S s S
'ni-is
^_i w O 'j^ r-
><
.0 N
ce .
'fi
il
a l
.si
i 6 i
Idit |8
^ PH
s
8
I 1
I
ifl
w
1
S
8i-4 <M
O O
r-\ r-4 i*4
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS.
393
a - s* -p o
o * 2 .s i
g l**J
'g ^ rt 6 ?
If!!!
ll'HI
II -gH^-a
<D ^T! <2
a .{5 .9
5 ^ 5
3*3'E
3D4
CALENDAR 1928-29
ji
P
?Pd
1
'^ 2
|
1
S g<
h Oi
i
d 8
- S
&
.
|l ;
b002
|.s
l.s
P
:
o
c
'^-^T-j
1
1
^
3
JH CO D
1
1i S 2 2 2 2
S ** 33 52 -w *-
* S i5 S S 5
1
P
3
^ ^
d
^f-i
a
P
* -d +r
^
tcSj
g -c
d
S ^ ^
c
^4
03
^ n c
i d
be
bD
.S .*
.5
l^s d
1 1
Optional subjects :
History* and Geogra]
ther optional or corn
in which recogniti'
been granted.
BENARES DIVIS]
(foncluded).
Miskrit, Drawing and
.1
* 1 1 1 If I
* u '"
9| S
1* 1*
Q
00
ce
d* d
.&
m
& fr
S
"o
S *o "5) g "o
p
.
$ g o a 2
M .'""i rj pQ Co ^c;
d
&
3 OQ ^ CC
r-T JEJ ^
HTJ
^ S W 3 ^r
1
t bC
'S *S H S ^ S
J 02 'J S h
C^ *) | ft ")
;& 3 ^ || W g
|
1
a
A
f
ISP S^ "iftci
eg
k>
E
R
P (5 W ^ O PH
1
1
3
IN
w -^ MS to i> oo
OS
S? d
OQ
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTIUTIONS.
395
Recognized provisionally
up 'to 1932.
S |
M X
S 2
^ 1
"H 'S
s i
bD ^N
qj P
c5 g 1
o ^
.1 ?
|
S
S S
s s
5
6
1
s
03
1
1
a j
1 1
^0 ^ *
S 'cL'S
o * 2 ?*
*s
bO
c
g
c
TJ
a
cti
fcJD
*C **
J4 g
Is
|}i!|
M l
1
1
1
1
^ bio
n -ii-sf
Persian, Arabic,
Drawing, Science
merce.
Persian, Sanskrit, Dr
Science.
Ditto
Persian Sanskrit and E
-S
Persian, Sanskrit, Dr
Science.
Persian, Sanskrit, Dr
Science.
GORAKHPUR DD
Persian, Arabic,
Drawing, Science,
and Manual Trainin
*NoTB Science =
the names of those scho
rom the High School Ex
lich there is no mention <
n of History and Geogri
^
j_|
-g'H'S
S
I |
o
o
SP
S,
I
S ^ $
in
PQ 02
OQ
g
^
C?
-^ s
<d
.I 4
3
M
03
O
ft
g|aj
Government Victor
School, Ghazipur.
City High School, Ghaz
Grovernment High Scho
L. D. Meston High
Ballia.
Anglo- Vernacular Hig
BalHa.
Meston High School,
(Benares State).
Lovett High School,
(Benares State).
Government Jubilee Hi
Gorakhpur.
*These subjects are she
to two separate subjects
Institutions against the
cts from a date prior to 1
S
pH
(M
<N eo
<
w:
*M
CO
(T<1
( - t ^
396
CALENDAB 1928-29
to *>
fill
"Sets
7 o S TJ
ifil!
rgS &
Ivilj
f o-g-a
.2^5?
&rf
.08
0.
|
3
|
I
I
1
kri
Sa
Sa
ab
i a a
1 .8 .2
f
"o
- 2
1
3
2
<
2
g
M
^3 *
48
o
a
f
ff
w
O
M 1
9
i
f.
1
i
i
Is S
^1 1
&S Is
(H O C8 p
O rh M s,
o O
O O
St. Andrew's C
Grorakhpur.
King Edward G
School, Deoria
i
Government Hig
* o ' S S
o
p4
co
g
te s ^ ^
^
i***
pH
CO
o
s
Drawin
kri
M 0>
J.S
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS.
397
g
^3
cL *
P
s
;43
i^3 O
>eo
n PH
.2 P
ROI
w>co
3 a
i?
!
O di
a
3
&i
"3
"o, '"
|1
n
"81
11
4 bO
'I6j
11
8 8
|f
|.si
Is
tL ">
r* o
fc
S
o rf>
"QQ 9
t
t
& S
M ^
| "El
_j c8 -
T(
3
^O (H jO
d> bo'n
d
.a
.9 O OQ
S
o
s
rrt
o^f
p v^
-M
F^l
s
1 M 1
1
s
+5
s
1
** J
p ; 1
iS
a
.P4
1
8 o S5
o^
3
E
Ed
8
'g rt os o
D
&
_ *S 4^ }T{ -*j
O _fi W)
1
&
:
1
T3
a
eg
1
id
'Jr-
! If If
Ig
-*i
i
bC
A
1
(ft
bO
eS
1
1
.2 o " 2
_rt O S ^ t>
2 o ^5 o rjj
j
1
tJ
-p
a
S
5
"d
c
c6
Is
^i
CO
Arabic an
T3
S
o
i
Sanskrit,
e.
Sanskrit,
erce.
'"S
s
+
S
, Drawing
1
S
ll|sf
s
F
AH
fS
Persian
1
11
P^
l|
pS
1-8
i*
.13
oc
% llf
5 2- d *
^3
'
<3
oT
^
06
11*8 I 1
^
,{
S-i
C3
2
1
i
C
'* w S ^
{_i
ce
bO
a
3*
y
eg
g
^
*e
*)
f
1
S
gill
i
JJ
^d
^2
1
3
'o
O
I
Sa-Sl
1 Wesley High School, i
George High School, A
Smith High School,
district Azamgarh.
[Government High S<
Tal.
LalaChet Ram Sah
High School, Naini
Government Intermed
Almora.
i
js
d
j>
Messmore High Sch
Garhwal.
Government High Sc
gar (Garhwal).
^ ^ A
O -< <N CO
2333
398
CALBNDAB 1928-29
^ p> +3 .
,O . fl 06
4
o 2 g S
(>
tf
fill
&S3 p
f g
\ ?
.
^Jsij
c
'S
e8 ^
a
s
.
,
c
'O
s
i
s
&
8
s o
3
3
8
1
1
ubjects including
d Geography* whe-
L or compulsory
t recognition has
>n granted.
VISION (coc/ttiecZ).
krit and Drawing . .
be
J
1
OW DIVISION.
Arabic, Sanskrit,
Science, Commerce
&1 Training. !
1
1
.S^'S
< d
<A
6D
c
1
(5
w
nskrit, Drawing,
d Commerce.
itll^
=
m *
t> d
1
i
af S
^ 68
d
rf'S
1.
tf
<3 S3
02 3
o.s % ~
^ !
t> 53
^ PM
1
g-0
1ss
rH
F
PH
.SJ
1*
P
^
i
W)
1
&C
*0
o
O
1
s
1
W
OD
S
1
1
li
1
M
8 ft
ernment
w.
a
a
1
1
1
!?
|
&|
2|
^1
1
11
,1
Birkett
w.
pd
a
d
'"!
$
}|
||
O
usainabi
School,
rf |
s
ee
M
li-
S
O ,
W
d
^
"5 .
^
10'
P
l>
X
<3>
*c o
rh
^* 1
S (4
*H
pt
<
,1t
ou
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS.
399*
400
CALENDAR 1928-29
05
ro
| S
JS
a
P
o d
11
TJ
2 S -j
d
00 CD
js.o d
s |
$
S -S
1 1
111
a a
a
a a
a a
S to
3
ll
12
Optional subjects including
H story* and Gsography*
whether optional or compulsory
in which recogn : tion has
been granted.
' LUCKNOW DIVISION
(continued).
Persian, Arabic, Sanskrit,
Drawing and Science.
Persian, Sanskrit and Science
i
Persian, Arabic. Sanskrit,
' Drawing, Science, Commerce
and Manual Training.
Persian, Sanskrit and Drawing . .
Persian, Arabic, Sanskrit,
Drawing, Science, Manual
Training and Commerce.
Persian, Arabic, Sanskrit and
Science.
! Persian, Sanskrit and Science
i
i
1 Persian, Arabic, Sanskrit
! Drawing and Science.
a
o
o
**
U *
3
u
I
gh
o
O
02
_r
o
a
li.
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS
401
s i
s s
5
fi
S
S
.g
3
1
1
I
o s
'
San
3
S
2 o
DIV
abic,
Scien
krit, D
HTJ 9 ^TJ ^
^ 2 ^ |
.| S .g 1 |
S" 1 * | || g g
F I^
'
II
" s s 'i s"
.V c8 eg d
1
O O fl T3
^o? S S
edia
Int
abad.
3 1 "i>
^ a
Go
Manohar Lai High Sch
abad.
ll
Lyall C!oll
pur, dist
g * I* 5
U'So 1
402
CALEB D^B 1928-29
fl CO
11?
OQ
i
sj,
tf
fog
1"*^ O
FH
- fl
i ^t
i
IIS
o S bO
be
! 5
a
o
i
s s
g a
i
-3
c
1
*"' O
ts
g&
J
1
Optional subjects including
History* and Geography* whe-
ther optional or compulsory
in which recognition has
been granted.
FYZABAD DIVISION
(conctudfed).
Persian, Arabic, Sanskrit,
Drawing and Science.
Ditto
60
1
(5
1
I
I
Persian, Arabic, Sanskrit,
Drawing and Science.
Ditto
Persian, Sanskrit, History and
Geography. !
GIRLS' HIGH SCHOOLS.
Domestic Science, History and
Geography.
T3 t-i
^
* .d
i-T
7$
S &
pS
1 w
o
|
o "S
1
'"S *?s
GO
OQ
_o
JS
_r|
^
<8 1
s 1
02 02
U)
s
W
1
1
bO W)
S 8
H
! 1
1
b
"8 "8 .
3j 4 fli _fl
S fc SB
l| e&
33 fl S) pQ
ga sa
i
" 'S
I a-' I
J, fl-jS fl^fl
?> M fl M W
2 <D 53 -S
i few S2
fl
^ s
0>r5
"^ ^
al Bagh
Lucknow.
o o
i
o o
PQ
^
3 -
r* x
O)
S S
oo
8
S fl
LIST OF BJJCOGNU&ED INSTITUTIONS
403
.2
X
g
U 5
43
^3 O
|
9 <?5
"tii-J
O
aw
,.0
be CQ
O Q)
c?8
1
b)^
1 - s
^S
* 3
3
|o
^J
1 1
*3 o
'g'S
ll
11
.sT!
2
||
tu
O CL
1^
.s ^
o a.
.3 ^
^
I'
*
I s
1
I s
>> |
DO 0)
i i
ts
s 1
.
lo
.
3
*H rP ri
* AS
1
W
PQ
In
1)1
'3* 9^
Tj
S
fl .^
o
1
1
I
W ^
b S iH
"*3
3
'O
3
p
t p
'S a
"^ O M ^5
s
'H
15
'S
o i
3 cd
'g * 3 o
w
P
s
^
p
W
i *s sU
I
i
1
\
i
i
:
O J3 2
Tf fe . a>
n oo ^ X
0)
Co
8
>
g
-o
o o l ~" 1 ^_> S 8
knd Domestic Scien
Domestic Scienc
Y-
,nd Domestic Scien
and Domestic Scie:
: 1
.23
0) W
I JV
5 * A
5 2 OH
ff
i
i. Scienoe=Phy3'j
3 of those schools
ol Examination of
e is no mention oi
History and Geogi
CO
CO
w 05 O g HH
2
a
.2
ll
fl
eg
1
g
1 S
1
^
eg
fS
!
OQ
'g
<s
CO
9
02
'g
<u
PH
a 'so
5 o
LJ Q,
w
1
* l||!
^
50 Q) 14^ ^J 1
'o
.
.
'o ^
4S ^
C ^C3 O oo
1
rj
03
o
5 3
'K-^
Sort S-
t
2
g
OQ
1
03
02 -3"
S
ri .h e3 O
, Manila Vidyalaya, Lucknc
Muslim Girls' High
Lucknow.
Balika Vidyalaya, Cawnpc
W)
s
e
p G
SJS
l
1.
^
,)
t>0
a
l|
$*
Queen Victoria Girls, High
Agra
Muslim Girls' High Scho
garh.
Theosophical National
School and Women's i
Benares.
* These subjects are showi
to two separate with effect i
Institutions against the n
subjects from a date prior t
2
i
CO
00'
00
X
00
$ 3
s
I, 1
a
404
CALENDAR 1928-29
cc
55 GQ boo:
00 ,g
I 1
2-2 M o
x i
a
*1S -
'f - s
tf
1|2g|
& J
I-S *9 *
fi
! i
d
la :
i i
w ^
J J
1 i
00
S|
"8 1*5
stifl
'd a
r
i **&
J^ O c3
d cd
w
bb hr 1 ^
|1 &
S-|
1
^1 i*
cf
p*'5* So
rj
| g oo |
K> M
'gO g
'S
S * S >-
P W
p
o-g^ ^^
Optional subjects including
History* and Geography* whe-
ther optional or compulsory
L in which recogn'tionjias
been granted.
GIRLS' HIGH SCHOOLS
(concluded.)
Persian, Sanskrit, Drawing and
Domestic Science.
Sanskrit, Drawing and Domestic-
Science.
Persian and Domestic Science . . '
-'
HIGH SCHOOLS FOR
EUROPEANS.
Recognized in all the subjects
taught by the University for
the Entrance Examination
previous to the passing of the
Universities Act of 1904.
Ditto.
NOTE. -Science =Phisycs and
the nam3i of those schools only wh
From the High School Examination o
hich there is no m3ntion of either Hi a
on of History and Geography as two
-r
A
3 o ^'&
j|
.? to 'o
"e8 ^*o ct
^ 1
w j 1
O OD
gill
1 !
| | .
o ^ B ^
'S 42 j
P-;
Op 2 H ,
I'^i^
o
*3 ^
J- ^
JC
^ o
g^3 - O
"'&?
^
!H M . 09
^ j ^ "5
$ d
g <t JD .g ^ 'g
*S 2 3 "^
1 II
^f l II
8 g^.9 *
ll i^
1*1 i| "
JifJt
3 i?
iS S
0^-2
-*^ $
5 o
828 1
p 00
CO
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS
405
P 5
IE
IE
09
* ZI "H
^ 5
O ft fe
J S3 O
I 8
^ g s
sN
1?
3
NOTE. Science = Ph
of those schools onl
igh School Examinati
no mention of either
of History and Geog
Hi
is
1
Jil
SaJjj
Si**
*=*
^j oa CO rj
.8^*1
f 8 3^
8S.4*
-^
406
1928^29'
f a
hf
3
Tl
d p _H
J3
0)
-g^g .
p
^ 4> CO
<?
!
d
c ^ .w*S
including History* and
ther optional or compul-
Vernaculars in which
has been granted.
1
p
1
^3
1
goT
o
w
Tj "Q
ce, Drawing and Urdu.
iwing and Urdu.
p
tJ
1
I
f
M
i
i
fc
I
S
1
1
w
Commerce, J Urdu and
fl) O
IH
'5be8
t^.a
l|
j
V
'Jo
3
02
1
cl
! Greography * whe
i sory and the
recognition
S (concluded).
Sanskrit, Science an
Persian, Sanskrit, S
d
o
1
1
French, German, Bra
Persian, Drawing an
Persian, Arabic, SaE
Urdu.
+S*
J2
d"
c8
S
'd
d
e8
3
12
1
Persian, Sanskrit,
Hindi.
5 COLLEGE.
Persian, Sanskrit,
matics, Physics,
mics.
g : :
.
.
.
rif
.
H
13
8
s
M |
5
g
CO <t]
%
&
a
w
S
H
3
o ^
a
h
T
H
a
.SP
5
a a
^
fl
^
03
d
'o
o
M
3
1
1 5
&? '
d 3
1
.a>
ta
-3
o
1
1
ta
cd
I
S
J
6
tiD o
S M
O3
a
1
1
X
A
.
43^
d e
P
g
J> ^
i
s
HH
W
d
d
S
!
a
5
9
o
rt
o
M
ol
o 2
M
^1 OQ
rt
^s
d
.3
go
d
M
"d ^
>
H DM
a
S^
OQ
O
c
|
CO ^
10
CO
**
00
O
^
LIST OF 5XCOGMZng5D 'INSTITUTIONS
407
is
.S o^M
p^bi g q
II
1
2 .S
,^S
|
1^1
i I 1
C8
tJ
o (^
',0""
o
2 &*
t'
^ s
^o^ i
"S
f" I
'Ssi
1 <s 1
. d
f'J.2
(J
ri ***
S.I
|gyj
if J
S 03
Jjf
COO
3 1
SJ
rr4
J JcT.3
^ -2
1
* {A 8
tatesof Rajputana admitte
High School and Intermedia
Sanskrit, Science, Urdu and Hindi.
Sanskrit, Science, Drawing, Urdu a
1
a
1
Hi
1
1
I
Ditto.
Arabic, Sanskrit, Science, Drawi:
erce, Urdu, Hindi and Bengali.
I
31
a
ctf
d
T3 O
^ s
Sanskrit, Science, Urdu and Hindi
e= Physics and Chemistry*
s schools only which are recognised
ol Examination of 1928.
nention of either History or Geogri
ind Geography as two different subj
M CD
(A ~
^->
"
<y Q M "
3 S
S^
*n
a
^r H
^
Q ^ Q ^>
08 f^
o .2
H
rH ^
13
Pn
^
00
q
cj
02
eg
s
^0
f
3
s
PH
-H
'io
1
w
>j JJ2 W Q
H* na
w
H
o
1 0< J^
-fli C3
a '
'S
'cT
fl ^Xl O
jq o
a
^
S
||||
rl*
O
g
^
v/2
institutions situated in
by the United Provinces
ir High School, Bharatpur
ger Collegiate School, Bikaner
.
"3
o
-a
s
"s
i
1
n
"o
o
1
J3
S
J
'S
^ S
"o -& 1
o to
1 -3-
a 5
a #
1 -
Q 'ST*
I 1
2 1
1" 1
s ^
OQ t>0
s.
M .8 ^
8 ^ QQ
'S o M
1
2.
S
a
"o
o
1
1
>se subjects are shown against
> ^eparate subjects with effect :
itutions against the names of
3ts from a date prior to the sop
-CM ^
*2
I
i
^H J=5
s II
-$
s j* .2,
;2
CQ
s
^
P
P 1
a I
1
* 3^1
> *3
jtn
r-H
IN
CO
TH
to co
i> 00
OJ
- $
^
d* 5
408
OALENDAE 1928-29
S 4 M bD^ "Sv*S
' ' a
d g
3 M CT-'S .SP
<D O O
rH g
t 8 *W rt
>>-5
!=l 'of2 o
^
rJ rj
j
l^dtsi
I^IS-S-S
S >
}gl
fl 'C
O bo
*w <J
^ r-< d y
fl
O Tl
I
^ii _ S S Cd
W d S o w
13 O p( r j7
- s !
rt O<
CO
M n 08 . rt
^
" -S *"*
cqs flT>r 6_;
'S J^ ^ ^
'2^2
o aJt-Sg
g -M cs d OQ^H
sill
p?
tf
ft
tf
^
A
P
lading History* j
>ptional or camp
aculars in Which
oeen granted.
:
H
ce, Commerce, ]
g
O
cj
n9e, Prawing,
o C
Ti
U)
Optional subjects -ini
Geography * whethsr
sory and the Ver
recognition has
SCHOOLS (concluded. )
Sanskrit and Hindi
i
I
Sanskrit, Commerce an<
^* .'H
I-S
5
a |*s
li
If
Sanskrit, Hindi, Drawin
1-
!i
w :
'oT ',
g
^
a*
H
OJ
CO
"
;_!
P
^
0,
Ei
'S
S
|
1
T 3
^ p*
i
1
-P
"5
08 'n
3
J
o
1 .
d
"3
a
S ^
^
1
*o
^
"o
&
1
1
'3
2
o
1
| S
1
.SP
w
S
: a
1*
.S 1
W
1
1
^
1
^q c$
'5*
S
3
2
t-H
<N CO
pH ' r-t
tt
a
R
05
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS
409
.,
*3 o
a,
4^ O
i
0) S
>> i
& J
t^
i
** 8
1
"5
a fj?j
o
&
1 1
g t^CQ ^
Ti
o *3
2-S ^
.^w
^? 9
Soee'tioa
w)2
E? S
,
|fiw-l
o
.2 fl
$
p
1
:
i "!
'
5
O
^ -^ GO
S
<
3
&
S {^"g
,
i
3
i and Hin
!
g
ft
I
a
i
Chemistj
ll
/3
o
a
9
Oj
T?
S IU O
W
(JJ.
rt
u
f>^
d
O tt3
1
i
-t^>
, Sanskrit, Urdu and
, Arabic, Sanskrit,
and Hindi.
t, Science, Drawing
3
+r
o
4
Sanskrit, Science,
lindL
Sanskrit, Science,
and Hindi.
Ditto .
k, History, Geography
c3
tr
!
II
o
fl
(0
1
* schools only which
ool Examination of J
ion of either History
Geography as two di:
a s
1
pf
A
tT
g
H
x iH "*^
a
1
'25
^
S
'S
2
1
3
^^ | g
s
&
&
c
02
s
(S
GO
^
*0 _bpO >
r-T
.
3
.
,
G
t
a *.2
ee
'S
rt
I
(H
H3
i
3
||||
%
1
]
.
3
3 S
I
1 8^2
S
JQ
O
PH
s
^p 0) P*
4
A
H
hH
.T| ? on
Shree Summer Pushtika
Jodhpur.
Maharaja's High School,
'o
M
1
s
OQ
.5P
w
I
S
(4 .
II
If
Darbar High School, Tonk
Maharana's Intermediate
pur.
Darbar High School,
(Jhalawar State).
Maharana High School, Dh
A.-V. Pinhey High School,
* These subjects are shown
to two separate subjects wit
nstitutions against thenam
cte irom a date prior to the
48
->*
oo
o>
1 1
a
* 9
S}
Tf
410
LIST OF RECOGNIZED OTOTITTmONS
411
ovinces
.2 S3
.2 G>
i!i
t
i !
<D ( ft
**
O Q
So'q
.2
**"
&*
g^-* 9
8m ^
.i
>>
i
be
^-d
I
f 1
S So
c
o .S
* j
bo o
D
'1
.2 So"* 3
S **
^
S
8 a
PH "^
^H*as
1 1
*o
M-
? I-
S "
2 g
S3 .2
1
1
i
t
P 1
#.a
.s s
W.S
1 11
S -*3
<5
<5
W ^ go
.0
T? H S
hn CS
&D
S
.
e privilege* of recoj
termediate Examin
c
'
&
1
o>
I 3
j|
o
CO
skrit, Science, Drawingf,
, Hindi and Marathi.
skrit, Science, Drawing,
, Urdu ahd Marathi.
SES.
ibic, Sanskrit, Ancient
istory, Logic, Economic*
hysics, Chemistry, Biol
dern History, Economic
[athematics, Physics and
ics and Chemistry.
*ls only which are recognh
amination of 1928.
i of either History or Geo
Geography as two different
a
** c
"o
*S
S A
*o o
HOOLS.
Persian, Sac
Hindi and
ll
ll
, , Persian, Sans
ture, Urdu,
-T O
^ of W
"So d U
c3 ^ H
Cu rf
S
rT flj O '
ej '0 -+3
OQ
i. Science= Phys
aes of those schoo
e High School Ex
*ere is no mentior
i of History and G
3 :
w
.
C8 M
s *
i
H
S
tf
W H Pi 'M M
g 5 ^ o
*iin
** 4s 5T
J> .
1
:
*
50 o S "2
"3 hi
M
^
S Is
* S
S
S 1
in
C2 CO
'o
1
0>
1
fg
r
i
^e, Lashkar
1
5*
1'^ 2s
l|l|
ll|
^ K
V
^p
CAJ
J^
i i
O <g c8 *
53
^
g
a
^
2*S S I
22
*
s
O
g
d
S ft -J
-s m
5 ;
.
1
1
1
|
i
l|i|
s
-'
M
-
10
CO
.s $
& 5
i
412
CALENDAR 1928-29
|
i
1
i
1
i
1
(
P
.
li
5
T"<
1
O
3
-O-i
1
1
P"
i
A
1
'*S
ool and Intermediate Examinatio
Optional subjects (including History* an
Geography * whether optional or compu
sory) and the Vernaculars in which
recognition has been granted.
SCHOOLS.
Persian, Sanskrit, Science, Drawing, Agr
ture, Urdu and Hindi.
Persian, Sanskrit, Science, Drawing, U
Hindi, Marathi and Gujrati.
French and Drawing.
Persian, Sanskrit, Urdu and Hindi.
Ditto.
_o
s
Persian, Sanskrit, Science, Urdu and Hindi
Persian, Sanskrit, Science, Drawing, U
Hindi and Bengali.
Persian, Sanskrit, Science, Drawing, Urdu
Hindi.
H
JS
W
_^
.
"S
CO
g '
'
jg
EC
o
G
HH
.SP
r
*
:
i3
eg
oj
G
.2
of institutions in Central
<M
Name of institution
1
I
A
I
I
o
IKhan Bahadur Edulji Peston;
High School, Mhow.
Convent High School, Mhow
s 1
S o
g t
I
^ -a
U> w
a -a
1 1
s &
1 f
s o
Maharaja's High School, Chhat
Rudrapratap High School, Pan
-Lord Reading High School, Da
Darbflr High School, Rewa .
2
3 o
t i
<M
CO
"*
CO
*""
oq
35
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS
413
I Recognised provisionally in
Science up to 1932.
1
a
1
and Marathi.
p*
T3
bD
q
'?
CO
1
1
|
P
q 3
q
S
-o
i
bp
1
o
q
I
q
S
ft
cT
5
'?
03
1
=3
3
'S
1
1
a
i
I
I
o
q
o
^a
T3
03
1
1
1
i
Oj
q
v
1
Drawing
1
S.j
i
.tT *
P
A
~
"tif ^
oT
JB
o
q
0>
1
eg t3
00 g
Science
3
QO
00
'f-l
44
^
1
&H
44
22
3
C
1
d
2i
i
a"
r
cT'S
q
q rg
q
fl'O
q
q ^
"
03
44
eg q
rt
03 C
^
03 q
<&
03 q
I
PH
1
1^
2
CU
^
| W
|
l w
1
r
i
CU
q
*
ft
,
O
8~
q
W
^
^
0!
q
OQ
_;
cd
o
U)
^
g
^*
_q
^
CQ
i
c6
S
f
M
^
S
&
K
CU
&0
t-i
o
ft
|
1
tf
"o
'I
I
1
School
1
1
J3
s
g
i
a
King-Emperor Ge
was (S. B.)
1
bio
H
|
1
42
iJO
W
1
1
I
4=
43
S
cd
'C
O
2
Government High
ment.
00
1
1
I
Anand High School,
1
a
S
!
o
>
2
^
F-l
CO
S
3
CO
H
55
00
2
O
0? O
a j
re r
28.
or
ren
l s
2 > >,
si^sl"
414
CALENDAR 1928-29
1
Remarks. !
|S 1 s^S
'S a ' 1 "8
.s | 3 .S
H-
Recognised provisionally up
to 1930. Recognition to
cease after 1930.
Recognised provisionally up
to 1932
"3-
I
p
c
a
1
1
1
1
* I-S
V
1
CH
60
,2
nal subjects (including History 51
raphy* whether optional or con
ry) and the Vernaculars in whi
recognition has been granted.
c
oj
s
g j
1
p
1
1
Sanskrit, Science, Drawing,
, Bengali, Gujrati and Marathi.
it, Drawing, Science, Commer(
Sanskrit, Drawing, Science,
, Marathi, and Gujrati.
:, Drawing, Science, History, Ge<
and Marathi.
Sanskrit, Drawing, History, Geo
Hindi and Marathi.
I
cT
3
oT
1
iff!
.--
og c
-Sis
8*1
J3!
sf|
1
00
*
ga
J
J H
^
CO K--X
<jj
F
p ,
ft
"
&
ft
' '
0-
^
O
o
'(
W)
13
C
P3
'3
H
g
^^
CO
la
o
O
a
T3
"S
^
5
C
cc
1
'o
a
B
HH
|
^
1
ttC
1
^
$
?
05
O
a
c8
o
i
!
H
"5"
s
.s
"S
1
a
S
1
a
s
a
60
S
'3
1
fe^
* S
1
i
5.
1
-M
1
t|
12
!
CO
M
o
| 1*
*
""O
.ll"
K
j
8
&r
J
OQ J
'S'S
M
i
g
1
a'"
r
^2 .
<N
Si
R
*
s
8
s
LIST OF RECOGNIZED INSTITUTIONS.
.S-e
a!
pli
_ fl>
ci
^3
'is
>*>
I
"
a
P
)*3
1
1
g gS
a
1
.2^0
?
8
o .5 >-rt
3
05
c;
Si
S
1
Pi
rO
<i T"S g
eg
t>
J '3 * '
t^'
la 1
.2
H.
c o tc!
c5 jj^ . PH
o
t>D
IB
CO
fl
s
Science,
i
i
W
H
i
.;-. o
Kg
.
11
HH >-j
G r^3 03
.5
I
fi
Q
(2
s -S-g frs
o> *s c
05 ^ X
oi S 73 J3
SS^g
'S.'S^S.
?s 'S
o
2 o
w O M **
5*31
00 CD ^ p*
i
1
S
1
416 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. A,
APPENDIX A.
Dates of the High School, Intermediate, and Inter-
mediate Examinations in Commerce and Agriculture
of 1930.
In 1930 The High School, the Intermediate, the Intermediate
Examinations in Commsrce and Agriculture will commence on March 24,
1930.
APP. B.] BYELAWS OF THE BOARD 417
APPENDIX B.
Byelaws of the Board framed under section 20 of the
Intermediate Education Act, 1921.
1. At all meetings of the Board, seven members inclusive of the Chair^
man shall form a quorum.
2. If a quorum is not present thirty minutes after the advertised
time of the meeting, there shall be no meeting.
3. If, in the course of a meeting any member calls attention to the
'absence of a quorum, the Chairman shall dissolve the meeting.
4. Every question shall be decided by a majority of the votes of the
members present. In the case of the votes being equally divided, the
Chairman shall have a second vote.
5. If a member continuously disregards or questions any order or
ruling of the Chairman made at a meeting of the Board, the Chairman
may take the vote of the meeting as to whether such member shall not
be suspended for that day. If the members present decide upon suspen-
sion, the Chairman shall declare the offending member suspended, and
nil ch member shall be bound immediately to withdraw.
6. No motion which has been negatived by the Board shall be
again brought forward, except with the permission of the Chairman, with-
in one year from the date upon which it was negatived.
7. All meetings of the Board shall be presided over by the ex-officiv<
Chairman of the Board. In the absence of the Chairman, the members
present shall elect a Chairman.
8. Meetings of the Board and of its committees shall, unless for special
rcaHons the Chairman otherwise directs, be held at Allahabad.
9. The election of co-opted members of the Board shall be held at the
annual meeting of the Board.
10. Notice in writing of meetings of the Board shall be despatched
to all members of the Board not less than three weeks before the meeting,
together with the agenda paper for the meeting.
11. No business other than that contained in the agenda paper
shall be transacted at a meeting unless with the consent of the Chairman.
12. Notice of a motion or resolution, to be moved at a mating of
the Board must be in the hands of the Secretary not less thaii 10 day*
before the meeting.
13. All questions as to whether prop?r notice of a motibn ha< been
given shall be decided by the Chairman, whose decision shall bi? final.
14. (a) No motion or resolution of which due notice ha* not been,
given may be moved at a meeting of the Board, except
(1) to adjourn a debate.
(2) to adjourn the meeting,
(3) to dissolve the meeting,
418 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. B.
(4) to change the order of business,
(5) to refer any matter to any authority of the department or the
University or the Government,
(6) to pass to tie next item of business,
(7) to appoint a committee,
(8) to resolve the meeting into a committee,
(9) to propose that the question be now put.
(6) A motion under (1), (2), (6) or (9) above shall be put to the vote
without discussion.
(c) Motions under (1), (2), (3), (4), (6), (8) and (9) shall only be moved
with the previous consent of the Chairman.
15. Every motion shall bo affirmative in form, and shall begin with
the words " that ".
16. Every motion must be seconded, otherwise it shall drop. The
seconder of a motion may reserve his speech with the permission of tho
Chairman.
17. When a motion that is in order has boon seconded, it shall be
stated from the Chair, before it is discussed.
18. If no member rises to speak to the motion after it lias been
stated from the Chair, the Chairman shall proceed to put the question
to the vote.
19. Not more than one motion and one amendment thereto sha 11 be
placed before the meeting at the same time.
20. A motion once disposed of shall not bo again brought forward at
the same meeting, or at any adjournment thereof.
21. No amendment shall bo proposed which would in effect consti-
tute a direct negative to tho original motion.
22. Every amendment must be relevant to the motion upon which
it is moved.
23. No amendment shall be proposed which substautively raises a
question already disposed of by the msDting, or which is inconsistent with
any resolution already passed by it.
24. The order in which am3ndments that arc in order are to bo taken
up shall be determined by the Chairman.
25. An amendment must be seconded in the same way as a motion,
-otherwise it shall drop. A seconder of an am3ndmsnt may reserve his
speech with the permission of the Chairman.
26. When an amendment that is in ord3r ha 4 bean moved and second-
ed, it shall be stated from the Chair.
27. The mover of a motion for dissolution or adjournment has no
right of reply.
28. When the Chairman has ascertains;! that no othsr number entitl-
,ed to address the meeting desires to speak the mover of the original
resolution may reply upon the whole debate.
B.] BYBLAWS OF THE BOARD 419
29. No member shall apeak to the question after the mover has entered
on his reply.
30. When the debate is concluded, the Chairman shall, after summing
wp, if he so desires, put the question to the vote thus :
(1) If there is an amendment, the Chairman shall state the motion
and the amendment and take the vote of the meeting.
(2) Tf the amendment is negatived, the original motion shall be
again stated from the Chair, and, subject to the foregoing
regulations, any other amendment which is in order may
then be proposed thereto.
(3) If an amendment is carried, the motion, as amended, shall be
stated from the Chair, and may then be debated as a sub-
stantive question, to which any further amendments to the
original motion which are in order, so far as they shall be
applicable, may be proposed, subject to the foregoing regula-
tions. Such further amendments shall be disposed of in the
same manner as the original amendment. When all the amend-
ments have been thus dealt with, the Chairman shall take
the vote of the meeting on the motion, as amended, as the
substantive resolution.
31. A motion for dissolution or adjournment may be moved at any
time as a distinct question, but not as an amendment, nor so as to inter-
rupt a speech.
32. If a motion for dissolution is carried, the business before the
meeting shall drop.
33. If a motion for adjournment is carried, the meeting shall be
adjourned, and the business shall be resumed at the adjourned meeting.
34. A motion for the adjournment at a debate to some specified date
and hour may be moved in the like manner, and if it be carried shall have
the effect of postponing the debate on the question under consideration
till the date and hour specified, and the other items on the agenda paper
shall be proceeded with. If the motion be negatived, the debate shall
be resumed.
35. A meeting or a debate, renewed or continued after an adjournment
is to be deemed one with that preceding the adjournment.
36. A motion to pass to the next item of business may be made at
any time, in like manner, and subject to the same rules as one for adjourn-
ment. If such motion be carried, the motion under consideration an 1
the amendment thereon, if any, shall drop.
37. At any time after a motion* or amendment has been made a mem-
ber may request the Chairman to put the question, and, if it appears to
the Chairman that the motion has been sufficiently discussed, he may
ulose the discussion by calling upon the mover for his reply, and may then
put the question to the vote.
420 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. B.
38. No member shall speak for more than fifteen minutes. When
proposing a motion or amendment, or for more than ten minutes when
seconding or speaking to a motion or amendment, or when replying.
39. The Chairman may, at any stage in the proceedings, at his own
discretion or at the request of a member, explain the scope and effect of
the motion or amendment which is before the meeting. He may also,
at the conclusion of a debate, sum up the debate, if he so desires.
40. Any member may, with the permission of the Chairman, rise, even,
while another is speaking, to explain any expression used by himself which
may have been misunderstood by the speaker, but he shall confine himself
strictly to such explanation.
41. Any member may call the Chairman's attention to a point of order
even while another member is addressing the meeting, but no speech
shall be made on such point of order.
42. The Chairman shall be the sole judge on any point of order, and
may call any member to order, and may, if necessary, dissolve the meeting
or adjourn it to some hour on the same or the following day.
43. A motion or amendment may be withdrawn by permission of
the Chairman by any member who has given notice of such motion or
amendment.
44. Any motion or amendment standing in the name of a member
who is absent from a meeting may be brought forward by any other mem-
ber.
45. On putting any question to the vote, the Chairman shall call for
an indication of the opinion of the Board by a show of hands in the
affirmative and negative and shall declare the result thereof according to-
his opinion.
46. A motion for the appointment of a committee on a subject under
debate may be made by any member at any time, and without previous
notice.
47. A motion for the appointment of a committee must define the
purpose for which the committee is to serve and the number of members
to compose it. Amendments for enlarging or restricting the number may
be marie without previous notice. If the motion is carried, the member
moving shall name the persons whom he wishes to form the committee.
A ballot shall then be taken, if necessary, and the requisite number appoint-
ed from those who obtain the largest number of votes.
48. The convener of a committee* shall be appointed at the time of
the appointment of the committee.
49. The resolutions of a committee appointed by the Board shall be
embodied in a report. The report shall be presented to the Board at its
next meeting, subject to due notice.
APP. B.J BYELAWS OF THE BOARD 421
50. Notice of meetings Of committees may be sent to members by
the Conveners through the Secretary or direct, but in the latter case a copy
of the notice must invariably be sent to the Secretary.
51. Meetings of all ordinary committees of the Board shall, as far as
possible, be held immediately before the meetings of the Board.
52. The Convener of a committee shall furnish to the Secretary a
copy of the report of every meeting of the committee together with a list
of the members present.
53. The quorum of a committee shall not be less than a majority of
the members constituting it.
54. If the meeting of a committee fails for want of a quorum, the
meeting may be adjourned to some other date when the members present
will, even in the absence of a quorum, transact the Business notified for
tho original meeting. The business of a meeting which fails for want of
a quorum may also be transacted by correspondence.
55. Committees of Courses may dispose of their business partly by
meeting and partly by correspondence.
56. At meetings of committees of the Board every question shall be
decided by a majority of the votes of the members present. In the case
of the votes being equally divided, the person presiding shall have a second
vote.
56(a). A member of a Committee of Courses or of the Curriculum
Committee or of a Sub-Committee who has or has had any pecuniary in-
terest in a book which is submitted to the Committee or Sub- Committee
for consideration as A text-book or for class use shall withdraw from the
meeting while the book is under discussion.
57. As soon as practicable, after meeting of the Board, a draft of the
minutes of such meeting shall be submitted by the Secretary to tho Chair-
man and attested by him. The minutes shall then be printed and circulat-
ed to all members and such of them as were present shall, within a fort-
night of the issue of Ihe minutes, communicate to the Secretary any excep-
tions they may take to the correctness thereof. The minutes and the ex-
ceptions taken, if any, shall be laid before the next meeting of the Board ,
and the minutes in their final form shall then be confirmed.
58. In any case not provided for by these byelaws the Chairman shall
be entitled to give his own ruling as to procedure.
27
422 CALENDAR, 1928-29 [APP. C.
APPENDIX C.
List of the Panel of Inspectors for the Inspection of
Intermediate Colleges.
The following persons have been nominated by the Board under Re-
gulation 4, Chapter VII of the Board's Regulations, for the inspection
of intermediate Colleges in association with the Divisional Inspector of
Schools :
1. Dr. S. A. Khan, Head of the Department of History, Allahabad
University, Allahabad.
2. Dr P. K. Acharya, Head of the Sanskrit Department, Allahabad
University, Allahabad.
3. Dr. N. R. Dhar, Professor, Allahabad University, Allahabad.
4. Mr. A. A. Simpson, Principal, Training College, Allahabad.
5. Mr. H. Tinker, Inspector of Schools, Allahabad Division, Allah-
abad.
6. Dr. Tara Chand, Principal, Kayastha Pathshala, University Col-
lege, Allahabad.
7. The Rev. Canon A. W. Davies, late Principal, St. John's College,
Agra.
8. Lala Diwan Chand, Principal, D.-A.-V. College, Cawnpore.
9. Dr. W. S. Dudgeon, Professor of Botany, Ewing Christian College,
Allahabad.
10. Dr. S. Higginbottom, Principal, Agricultural Institute, Nairn
(Allahabad).
11. Mrs. Saralabai Naik, Principal, Muslim Girls' High School, Luck-
now.
12. The Rev. Dr. J. R. Chitambar, M.A., D.D., Principal, Lucknow
Christian College, Lucknow.
13. Mr. S. G. Dunn, Head of the English Department, Allahabad
University, Allahabad.
14. Mr. B. Sanjiva Rao, Principal, Queen's Intermediate College,
Benares.
15. The Rev. E. M. Moffatt, Principal, Christian School of Commerce
Lucknow.
16. Mr. A. B. Dhruva, Pro-Vice-Chancellor, Benares Hindu Univer-
sity, Benares.
17. Dr. Ganesh Prasad, Hardinge Professor of Higher Mathematics,
Calcutta University.
18. Mr. P. K. Telang, Professor of History, Benares Hindu Univer-
sity, Benares.
19. Mr. S. B. Smith, Professor of History, Lucknow University, Luck-
now.
APP. C.] LIST OF THE PAKEL OF INSPECTORS 428
20. Dr. Radha Kamal Mukerjee, Professor of Economics and Sociology,
Lucknow University, Lucknow.
21. Dr. Wall Muhammad, Professor of Physics, Lucknow University,
Lucknow.
22. Dr. Zia-ud-din Ahmad, late Pro- Vice-Chancel lor, Aligarh Muslim
University, Aligarh.
23. Mr. M. M. Sharif, Professor of Philosophy, Aligarh Muslim Uni-
versity, Aligarh.
24. Dr. L. K. Hyder, Professor of Economics, Aligarh Muslim Univer
sity, Aligarh.
25. Mr. M. Hyder Khan, Professor of Chemistry, Aligarh Muslim
University, Aligarh.
26. Dr. A. S. Tritton, Professor of Arabic, Aligarh Muslim University,
Aligarh.
27. Dr. K. C. Mehta, Professor of Biology, Agra College, Agra.
28. Mr. H. Krall, Professor of Chemistry, Agra College, Agra.
29. Mr. A. C. Dutt, Officiating Principal, Bareilly College, Bareilly.
30. Mr. T. D. Sully, Vice-Principal, St. John's College, Agra.
31. Major E. W, Dann, Professor, Aligarh Muslim University, Ah'garh.
32. Mr. D. P. Bhattacharya, Professor of Mathematics, Bareilly Col-
lege, Bareilly.
33. Mr. V. S. Tamma, Professor of Physics, Meenit College, Meerut.
34. Mr. Madho Prasad, Professor of Chemistry, Meerut College,
Meerut.
35. Mr. Chand Bahadur, Professor of English and History, Meerut
College, Meerut.
36. Mr. Lakshman Prasad, Principal, D. A.-V. Intermediate College,
Dehra Dun.
37. Maulvi M. A. Nami, Lecturer, Arabic and Persian Department,
Allahabad University, Allahabad.
38. Dr. N. G. Chatterji, Assistant Chemist, Government Technological
Institute, Cawnpore.
39. Mr. F. Shah Gilani, Professor of Persian, Meerut College, Meerut.
40. Mr. C. D. Thompson, Head of the Economics Department, Allah-
abad University, Allahabad.
41. Mr. C. A. Warburton, Professor of Economics, Allahabad Univer-
sity, Allahabad.
42. Mr. J. A. Strang, Professor of Mathematics, Lucknow University,
Lucknow.
43. Mr. W. G. P. Wall, Inspector of European Schools, United Pro-
vinces, Allahabad. -
44. Mr. R. S. Weir, Assistant Director of Public Instruction, United
Provinces, Allahabad.
45. Mr. S. P. Prasad, late Professor of Physics, Agra College, Agra.
424 CALENDAR, 1928-29 [APP. C.
46. Maulvi S. M. Ibn Ibrahim, Professor of Arabic and Persian, Agra
College, Agra.
47. Mr. Hitkari Singh Seth, Professor of Zoology, Agra College, Agra,
48. Mr. J. C. Powell-Price, Inspector of Schools, Gorakhpur division,
Gorakhpur.
49. The Rev. A. C. Pelly, Principal and Professor of English, St.
Andrew's College, Gorakhpur.
50. Mr. G. N. Basu-Mullick, Professor of History, Meerut College,
Meerut.
51. Mr. P. Seshadri, Principal, S. D. College of Commerce, Cawnpore.
52. Mr. R. H. Moody, Deputy Director of Public Instruction, United
Provinces, Allahabad.
53. Dr. K. N. Bahl, Professor of Zoology, Lucknow University, Luck-
now.
54. Dr. S. M. Sane, Professor of Chemistry, Lucknow University,
Lucknow.
55. Mr. Maya Das, Principal, Agricultural College, Cawnpore.
56. Dr. Meghnad Saha, Professor of Physics, Allahabad University,
Allahabad.
57. Mr. M. K. Ghosh, Reader, Commerce Department, Allahabad
University, Allahabad.
58. Mr. Hira Lai Khanna, Principal, B. N. Sanatan Dharm Inter-
mediate College, Cawnpore.
59. Mr. Shankar Prasad Bhargava, late Principal, 8. D. College of
Commerce, Cawnpore.
60. Mr. S. C. Chatterji, Principal, Christ Church College, Cawnpore.
61. Rai Sahib Pandit Kali Prasad, Principal, Government Jubilee
Intermediate College, Lucknow.
62. Qazi Khurshed Ahmad, Vice-Principal, Government intermediate
College, Allahabad.
63. Lala Kishen Chand, Principal, Government Intermediate College,
Moradabad.
64. Pandit Manohar Lai Zutshi, Principal, Government Training
College, Lucknow.
65. Mr. F. J. Fielden, Principal, Agra College, Agra.
66. Miss M. E. Shannon, Principal, Isabella Thoburn College, Luck-
now.
67. Mrs. Padma Bai S. Rao, Principal, Theosophical National Girls *
School and Women's College, Benares.
68. Maulvi Mahdi Husain Nasiri, Head Master, Government High
School, Aligarh.
69. Pandit Gopi Nath Kaviraj, Principal, Government Sanskrit Col-
lege, Benares. .
70. Mr. J. D. Talibuddin, Principal, Training College, Agra.
APP, 0.] LIST OF THE PANED OF INSPECTORS 425
7 1. Mr. K. A. Subramanya Iyer, Reader in Sanskrit, Lucknow Uni-
versity, Lucknow.
72. Rai Sahib Pandit Sukh Deo Tiwari, Principal, Kanya Kubja Inter-
mediate College, Lucknow. f
73. Mr. Narayan Das, Principal, Radhaswami Educational Institute,
Agra.
74. Mr. Brahma Swarupa, Principal, Kanya Kubja Intermediate Col-
lege, Lucknow.
75. Mr. Asit K. Haldar, Principal, Government School of Arts and
Crafts, Lucknow.
76. Dr. D. R. Bhattacharya, Allahabad University.
77. Dr. Ram Prasad Tripathi, Allahabad University.
78. Mr. S. K. Rudra, Allahabad University.
79. Pandit Amaranatha Jha, Allahabad University.
80. Dr. J. H. Mitter, Allahabad University.
81. Mr. Kaushal Kishore, Registrar, Departmental Examinations,
United Provinces, Allahabad.
82. Mr. D. L. B. Riley, Agra College, Agra.
83. Mr. J. T. Goodchild, St. John's College, Agra.
84. Mr. A. C. Datta, St. John's College, Agra.
85. Rev. C. D. Wood, Christ Church College, Cawnpore.
86. Dr. K. C. Pandya, St. John's College, Agra.
87. Mr. N. K. Sidhanta, Lucknow University.
426 CALENDAR 1928-29 [AFP. D.
APPENDIX D.
List of the Teaching Staff of Colleges in and outside the
United Provinces recognized by the Board.
MEERUT COLLEGE, MEERUT
Affiliated in Arts, 1892 and 1895 ; in Science, 1906 ; in Law, 1893,
This institution owes its origin to the liberality of the nobility and
gentry of the Meerut division, who created an Endowment Fund for the
Encouragement of higher education within the division.
The College, which is aided by the Government and by the District
and Municipal Boards, teaches up to the M.A., B.A., B.So. and LL.B.
atandards, and also for the Intermediate Arts, Science and the Commei-
cial Diploma Examinations of the Board.
There is a Business department in which Typewriting, Shorthand and
Book-keeping are taught.
The College stands on its own grounds, 63 bighas in extent. The
building consists of (1) the College, (2) old Hindu Hostel including quartern
for Indian Professors, (3) new Hindu Hostel with a Pooja Hall given by
L. Hardeo Prasad, (4) third Hindu Hostel, (5) Muhammadan Hostel, (6)
Principal's and Vice- Principal's bungalows. The College Hostels provide
accommodation for 226 students and there are twelve Professors living
in residential quarters in the College compound.
The new College building, which up to the present has cost about-
Us. 1,00,000 consists of two wings, one containing the Arts classes and
the other the Laboratories and Science lecture rooms, with workshop and
gas plant.
The institution was founded in 1892, and is governed by a Board of
Management, but the immediate control of the College is in the hands
of an Executive Committee, three members of which are ex officio and tho
rest elected by the Board of Management.
An endowment, producing some Bs. 400 annually, was given by the
late Rai Ramanuj Dayal Bahadur. The endowment is spent in providing
scholarships to poor students of the Meerut College.
There are also :
(1) Four L. Har Sahai Scholarships of Rs. 4 each.
(2) Rai Bahadur Nihal Chand Scholarship for the best Sanskrit
student of the Vaish community. (Rs. 60 a year.)
(3) Four L. Nanak Chand Scholarships (one for each year) for Hindu
atudents whose circumstances render it difficult to continue
their studies. (Rs. 312 a year.)
(4) A Scholarship of Rs. 5 per mensem on behalf of the Boopay
Sahayak Bank, Ltd., Meerut, for a needy student of the
Meerut College.
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
427
(5) Professors' and students' King Edward VII Memorial Scholar-
ships (eight scholarships of Rs. 4 and eight of Rs. 3 each were
awarded during the year 1924-25).
(6) Hafiz Abdul Karim Scholarships for needy Muhammad arts.
(During the year 1924-25 eight Scholarships of Rs. 600 in
all were awarded.).
Besides these scholarships nine Government Scholarships were awarded
during the year 1924-25 to the meritorious students of the College.
The " Hem Swarup Medal " is awarded annually to the best student
in the fourth year B.A. class ; the " Nirtya Kali Dassi Silver Medal" to the
best student in the fourth year B.So. class ; and the " Ganga Saran Silver
Medal " to the first student in the Intermediate Arts and the " Oswini
Coomar Silver Medal " to the first student in the Intermediate Science class.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
3.
4.
Lieut-Col. T. F. O'Donnell, M.C., B.A.
(Honours) Classics, Royal Univer-
sity, Dublin.
V. S. Tamma, M.sc. (Allahabad)
B. R. Chatter ji, M.A. (Punjab), History
and Economics, D.LITT. (Pun-
jab), Ph.D. (London).
G. N. Bose-Mullick, M.A. (Allahabad) . .
Chand Bahadur, M.A. (Punjab), His-
tory (Allahabad), English.
Madan Mohan, M.A. (Benares)
J. N. Sinha, M.A., P.B.S. (Calcutta)
Madho Prasad, M.sc. (Allahabad)
9. F. S. Gilani, M.A. (Punjab)
10. D. N. Shastri, M.A., M.O.L. (Punjab),
M.B.A.S.
11. Nand Lai Bhatnagar, M.A. (Allaha-
abad).
12. V. P. Bidwai, M.SC., LL.B. (Allahabad)
13. Banwari Lai (Cer. Com. Dip.)
14. Rameshwar Dayal, M.A. (Allahabad)
15. Dr. S. S. Joshi, D.SC. (Lucknow)
16. J. C. Biswas, M.A. (Calcutta)
Principal.
Vice-Principal.
History, XI.
History, XI; Civics, XL
English Text, XII and XL
Mathematics, XII.
Logic, XL
Head of the Chemistry De-
partment.
Head of the Persian De-
partment.
Sanskrit, XII.
Economics, XII, XI and
XI (Commerce).
Physics, XL
Shorthand, XII and XI;
Typewriting, XII ; Book-
keeping, XL
Mathematics, XII and XI.
Chemistry, XII.
English Text, XL
428
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. D.
17. S. K. Tankha, B. Com. (Bombay)
18. H. M. Mukerjee, M.A. (Calcutta)
19. Parmatma Saran, M.A. (Benares)
20. J. P. Suda, M.A. (Allahabad)
21. Mian Mohd. Sharif, M.SC. (Aligarh)
22. Radhika Behari Mathur, M.SC. (Alla-
habad).
23. Shital Prasad, M.SC. (Allahabad)
24. Mahipal Gupta, M.SC. (Allahabad)
25. Pearey Lai Shastri (Punjab)
26. S. Mahmood Ali Grami, Munshi Fazil
(Punjab).
27. B. N. Tandan, B. Com. (Bombay)
28. U. N. Mathur, M.A. (Allahabad)
29. D.M. Roy, M.A. (Calcutta)..
30. S. A. Mazhary, M.A. (Bombay)
31. K. N. Pant, M.A. (Agra)
32. Sumat Prasad Jain, M.A. (Allahabad) . .
33. A. N. Chatterjee, M.SC. (Allahabad) . .
34. R. N. Tandan (Bombay School of Arts)
36. Roop Kishore, M.SC. (Allahabad)
36. Dhru Singh, M.A. (Allahabad)
37. G. P. Rajbanshi, M.A. (Lucknow)
38. Tshwar Saran, M.A. (Agra)
Com. Geography, XII and
XI; Com. English, XII
and XI ; Book-keeping,
XII ; Business Methods,
XII and XI.
English Text, XI.
History, XI and XII ; Eng-
lish Text, XII, XI and
XI (Commerce).
Logic, XII.
Chemistry, XII and XI.
Physics, XII and XI.
Physics, Xll and XI.
Chemistry, XII and XI.
Sanskrit, XII and XI.
Persian, XII and XI.
Typewriting, XI.
English Text, XII and XI ;
Genl. English, XII
Commerce.
Mathematics, XII and XI.
Persian, XII and XI ; Urdu
XII and XI.
Hindi, XII and XI ; Sans-
krit, XI.
Mathematics, XII and XI.
Chemistry, XII and XT.
Drawing, XII and XI.
Physics, XII and XI.
Economics, XII, XI and
XII (Commerce).
English, XII.
English, XII.
DAYANAND ANGLO VEDIC INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE,
DEHRA DUN.
This institution was first started at Meerut in 1893 as a school under
the control of a committee of management. The school was afterwards
taken over to Dehra Dun in 1904 and the munificent liberality of Thakur
Puran Singh Negi infused a new life into it. The signal success and im-
provement which began to attend the institution from 1912 encouraged the
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 429
Managing Body to take steps for raising its status, and it was converted
into an Intermediate College in 1922. It attracts students not only from
different parts of India but also from places such as Nepal, Burma and
Kabul. .
The College has an ideal site commanding a view of the Himalayas and
measuring about 20 acres. The College buildings which have been erected
at a cost of three lakhs of rupees now comprise 16 spacious class rooms, a
library, a Professors' common room and a big central hall. Two large wings
called the Shatabdi Blocks have recently been completed at a cost of
Ks. 54,000 containing four separate lecture halls and two laboratories.
The Hostels are surrounded by extensive playing fields and have accom-
modation for about 200 students. All Hostels have resident Superinten-
dents, almost all of them being teachers in the College. The laboratories
are equipped with adequate arrangements for practical work in Physics and
Chemistry. The apparatus . and chemicals alone cost Rs. 20,000. One
lakh of rupees is annually spent on the maintenance of the College and
Hostels. Attached to the College and under the control of the Principal
is a Sanskrit Pathshala which imparts free instruction up to the standards
of Shastri, Acharya and Tirtha Examinations of the various Indian Univer-
sities.
The staff consists of 37 experienced and qualified teachers, among
whom are to be reckoned 9 M.A.'s and M.Sc's. and 6 B.A's and B.Sc's
trained or experienced.
Adequate provision has been made for the physical welfare of the
students and athletic instruction is imparted according to Indian as well
as European methods. Religious instruction constitutes a special feature
of the institution. The College has Debating Societies, the object of which
is to inculcate in the students a higher conception of civic life and stimulate
the powers of expression. Extensive additions have been made to the
College Library which consists of carefully-selected educational books.
The Reading Room is provided with useful periodicals, newspapers and
magazines, both English and Vernacular. Drawing, Painting and Handi-
oraf ts receive special encouragement and the College Museum, affords ample
testimony to it. First-aid lectures are regularly given for the purpose of
promoting social service among the students.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Lakshman Prasad, M.A., Principal English Translation, XII ; Eng-
lish Dictation, X.
2. A. D. Banerji, M.A., B.L., Vice- History, X to XII ; Civics, XI
Principal. and XII.
3. B. N. Chhibbar, B.A., L.T. . . English Text, X ; History, X ;
Geography, IX and X.
430
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. D,
4. S. C, Bhattacharya, M.A.
5. A. S. Sinha, MJI., L.T.
6. L, N. Gupta, M.SC.
7. J. P. Ray, M.SC.
8. S. B. Roy, M.A.
9. O. N. Saksena, M.A., L.T.
10. Mahendra Pratap, M.A., M.O.L.,
Shastri.
11. Gaya Prasad Shukla, M.A.
12. Ralia Ram, B.A.
13. Salig Ram, B.A,
14. Mathura Prasad, B.sc.
15. Prem Singh, B.A.
16. Ayodhya Nath Khanna, Senior Cer-
tificate, Mayo School of Arts,
Lahore.
17. Abbas Husain, Experienced
18. Sheo Bhagwan Dixit, V.T.C., Munshi,
S.L.O. (Pun.), High School.
English Text and Composition
XII; English, XI; English
Text and Grammar, English
Unseen and Rapid Reading,,
X ; English Text, Unseen r
Rapid Reading and Grammar,
IX.
Mathematics, XII to IX.
Science, IX and X ; Chemistry,
XI and XII.
Science, IX and X ; Physics, XI
and XII.
Logic, XI and XII; English
Text and Grammar, Unseen,
Rapid Reading and Dicta-
tion, IX.
Economics, XI and XII ; Gram-
mar, XII ; English Transla-
tion and Composition, XI ,-
Geography and English Text
and Grammar, IX.
Sanskrit, X to XII ; Hindi, X,
English Translation and Dic-
tation, IX.
Hindi, IX to XI ; English-
Translation and Composi-
tion, X ; English Rapid Read-
ing and Dictation, IX.
Mathematics, IX and X.
English Grammar, Rapid Read-
ing, Unseen, Translation and
Composition, X ; History, IX
and X.
Demonstration, XI and XII ;.
Science, IX.
English Translation and Compo-
sition, IX.
Drawing, IX and X.
Persian, IX and X.
Urdu, IX and X.
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 43 1
19. Ram Chandra, Madhyama, 1 Khand : Hind', IX.
Acharya, Advanced .Hindi.
20. Raghubar Dayal, Acharya .. Sanskrit, IX.
N. R. E. G. INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, KHURJA.
The N. R. E. C. Intermediate College, Khurja, was established as a
High School in 1902 by the late Hon'ble Rai Nathi Mai Bahadur, C.I.E.^
and his brother Lala Ram Sahai Mai. It continued to prosper under
the fatherly care of the founders until 1915 during which period the
main building consisting of a hall and 20 rooms and Govind and Hewett
Hostels each accommodating about 100 students were built at a cost of
about Rs. 1,59,319. The Hon'ble Rai Nathi Mai Bahadur, C.I.E., died in
1915, but he very sagaciously had made over the institution in his life-
time to a Board of Trustees and had endowed it handsomely, The endow-
ment at present consists of a village worth about Rs. 80,000 and cash
Rs. 99,000, invested in various securities.
The Board of Trustees are managing the institution since 1909. Two
very fine blocks, one Physics laboratory and the other for the Chemistry
laboratory, have been built since and also a bungalow for the Principal
and one set of six class rooms for classes IX and X at a cost of about
Rs. 22,834, Rs. 16,310, Rs. 10,287 and Rs. 16,339 respectively.
Another block of six rooms has been built for the Intermediate and
CJD. classes which were added in 1923 and 1924 respectively.
A hostel for College classes is nearing completion. The Government
has generously given the entire cost of both the above,
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. C. L. Majumdar, M.A. (Hon.), Economics, XI and XII.
Calcutta, B.T., M.R.A.S., Acting
Principal.
2. R. S. D. Saksena, M.SC. (Allah- Chemistry, IX to XII.
abad), Officiating Vice-Prin-
cipal.
3. S. S. Chaterji M.SC. (Benares) . . Mathematics, X to XII.
4. G. N. Singhal, M.A. (Allahabad) Civics, XI and XII ; History, IX to-
XII.
5. H. N. Hukku, M.A. (Benares) . . English, X1A., X1IB, C. D. I.
and IXC.
6. B. N. Gour, M.A. (Hon.), (Luck- Logic, XI and XII ; English, XA
now). and IXA.
7. H. N. Shukla, M.SC. (Benares) Physics, IX to XII.
8. Gopi Saran Bhatnagar, C. D. . . Shorthand and Book-keeping, C
D. II., St. Typing, C. D. I.,.
English, C. D. II., Com. IX.
432
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. D.
9. Banwari Lai Vaish, M.A. (Allah-
abad), L.T.
10. B. N. Dave, M.A. (Benares)
11. Asa Ram Kaushic, M.A. (Delhi
and Agra), M.B.A.S.
12. C. P. Srivastava, M.A., B. Com.
(Allahabad).
13. R. C. Singhal, Inter. Grade
(Drawing), (Bombay).
14. Shanti Chandra Gupta, M.A.
(Agra).
15. Lakshmi Narain Gupta, B.SC,
(Aligarh), L. T.
16. Shri Ram, B. Com. (Agra)
17. Hoti Prasada, B.SC. (Benares) . .
18. Lakshmi Narain Sharma, B.A.
(Agra).
19. Sultan Alum, Inter., Kamil and
Maulvi-Fazil.
20. D. Sheshachal Shastri, Kavi-
Tirth (Calcutta). ,
21. Reoti Prasada, Madhma.
History, XI and XII ; Geography ,
IX and X ; English, XB.
Hindi, IX to XII ; English , IXC.
Persian, XII ; Urdu, XI and XII ;
English, IXB.
Economics, C. D. I and II ; Bank-
ing, Book-keeping and Busi-
ness method ; C. D. I.
Drawing, IX and X.
English, XIIA., XIB, and C. D. I.
Mathematics and Geography, IX.
Com. Geography, C. D. I., B. Me-
thod, C. D. I. and II ;
Com., X.
Demonstration work in Physical
and Chemical Laboratories.
History, IX.
Persian, IX to XI ; Urdu, IX and
X.
Sanskrit, IX io XTl ; Hindi, X.
Hindi, IX.
AGRA COLLEGE, AGRA.
In 1818 Pandit Ganga Dhar Shastri bequeathed to the East India
Company the rents of certain lands in the districts of Aligarh and Muttra
for the promotion of education. In accordance with the Shastri's will
the Agra College was opened in 1823, the endowment then yielding over
Ks. 22,000 a year. Subsequently, Government added to the income and
-raised the College to its present status.
In 1883 the management was transferred to a Board of Trustees. At
the time of the transfer the Trustees made an appeal to the noblemen and
.gentlemen of the Province of Agra, and a lakh of rupees was added to the
endowment while the capital of the Scholarship Fund was raised from
Us. 25,000 to Rs. 58,500. The Maharaja of Bharatpur maintains addi-
tional scholarships.
The immediate control of the College is in the hands of a committee,
.two of the members of which are official, the rest nominated by the Trus*
tees.
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
43$
The College formerly consisted of two departments, viz., the College
proper under a principal and the School under a head master. But in
July, 1909, the School department was handed over to Government by
the Trustees in order that they might be free to devote all their resources-
for the benefit of the College.
There are 422 students enrolled in the Intermediate (Arts and Science)'
classes, 331 in the degree and post-graduate classes of the College depart-
ment and 204 in the Law department, including 65 students who have
taken both M. A. orM. So. and Law simultaneously.
There are 378 College students residents in the College Hostels and
77 in the Caste Boarding Houses.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. F. J. Fieldcn, M.A. (London),
M.A. (Cantab)., First Class
with distinction in Mediaeval
and Modern Languages Tripos
(English and French).
2. Hitkari Singh Seth, M.SC., LL.B.
(Allahabad), Zoology.
3. Chandra Puri Goswami, M.A.,
LL.B. (Allahabad), English.
4. Syed Mohd. Ibn Ibrahim, M.A.
(Allahabad), First Class, Ara-
bic.
5. Krishna Lai Misra, M.A. (Allah-
abad), Sanskrit.
6. Agha Mahdi Husain, M.A. (Pun-
jab), History.
7. P. M. Bhambhani, B.A. (Hons.),
M. A. (Bombay). Philosophy.
8. Hari Rim, M.A., B.T. (Punjab),
English, M.A. (Allahabad),
Philosophy.
9. Gokal Chand, M.A., LL.B. (Allah-
abad), English.
10. Nagendra Nath Mookerji, M.A.,
(Calcutta), English, r. B. B. s.
(London).
11. Shyam Sundar Chaturvedi, M.A.
(Allahabad), English.
12. Mannoo Lai Misra, M.A. (Allah-
abad), 1st class, First, Maths.
Principal .
Professor of Zoology.
Ditto English.
Ditto Arabic and Persian
Ditto Sanskrit.
Lecturer in History.
Ditto Logic.
Ditto English.
Ditto ditto.
Ditto ditto.
Ditto ditto.
Lecturer in Mathematics*
434
13. Rama Kant Chaturvedi, M.SC.
B.Sc. (Hons.), (Lucknow),
Maths.
14. Budh Sen Agarwala, M.A. (Al-
lahabad), 1st class, Econ.
15. Kashi Prasad Mathur, M.A. (Al-
lahabad), Economics.
16. Sri Krishna Saxena, M.A. (Allah-
abad), 1st class, First (Philo-
sophy).
17. Chaman Lai Mital, M.SC. (Allah-
abad), Chemistry.
18. Jang Bahadur Jha, M.SC. (Allah-
abad), Chemistry.
19. Praneshwar Nath Kathju, M.SC.
(Allahabad), Chemistry.
20. Sukhdeo Prasad Khandelwal,
M.SC. (Allahabad), Physics.
21. Madho Lai Jaiswal, M.SC. (Allah-
abad), Physics.
22. Sada Bchari Eaizada, M.SC. (Al-
lahabad). Physics.
23. Salig Ram Sud, M.SC. (Punjab),
Botany.
24. Nawal Kiahore Singh, M.SC. (Al-
lahabd), Zoology.
25. Kanhaiya Lai, M.SC., (Allahabad),
Zoology and Botany.
26. Bishan Narain Varma, M.A. (Al-
lahabad), History.
27. Purshotam Das Goyal, M.SO.
(Allahabad), Chemistry.
28. Lalta Prasad Saxena, M.SC.
(Agra).
29. Rameshwar Dayal Gupta, M.SC.
(Allahabad), Chemistry.
30. Ram Swarup Singh, M.SC. (Al-
lahabad), Physics.
31. Mata Prasad Mathur, M.SC. (Agra).
Physics.
32. Raghunandan Prasad, M.SC.
(Allahabad), Zoology.
33. Babu Lai Gupta, M.SC. (Allah-
abad), Botany.
.34. Rup Kishore Kapoor, M.SC.
(Lucknow).
CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D.
Lecturer in Mathematics.
Ditto Economics.
Ditto ditto.
Ditto Philosophy.
Ditto Chemistry.
Ditto ditto.
Ditto ditto.
Ditto Physics.
Ditto ditto.
Ditto ditto.
Ditto Botany.
Ditto Zoology.
Ditto Botany.
Temp. Lecturer in History.
Demonstrator in Chemistry.
Ditto ditto.
Ditto ditto.
Demonstrator in Physics.
Ditto ditto.
Demonstrator in Zoology.
Ditto Botany.
Ditto Zoology.
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 435
ST. JOHN'S COLLEGE, AGRA.
The College is under the general control of the Church Missionary
Society and a Governing Body of which the Bishop of Luc know is ex-
officio Chairman.
The object of the College is twofold : to provide education on Christian
principles for the Christian under- graduates of the University and to
provide an opportunity for those who have been brought up in the religious
atmosphere of a mission school to continue their student life in surround-
ings similar to those to which they have grown accustomed.
The Degree and Intermediate classes have not been separated and
the students of both the classes live together in the five College Hostels.
The College provides instruction in Arts, Science and Commerce for
both Intermediate and Degree students.
There are various scholarships both for Christian and non-Christian
students, details of which may be had from the College office.
Instructive Staff.
The Rev. W. E. S. Holland. M.A. (Oxon.) Principal.
The Rev. T. D. Sully, M.A. (Oxon.) Vice-Principal.
C. Mahajan, M.A. (Bombay) . . Director of Intermediate Studies.
J. C. Taluqdar, M.A. (Cal.y . . Superintendent of Examinations.
Faculty of Arts.
Chairman : H. Mark, M.A., (Allahabad), M. A. (Cantab.).
English.
R. D. Trivedi, M.A. (Allahabad) . . English Poetry, XII A.
Suraj Prasad Sharma, M.A. (Allah- XIA, XII Arts and Science ; and
abad). XII, Com. Dip.
Bhawani Shanker, M.A. (Allahabad) XI and XII Arts ; XII Science
and XI Com.
Johiruddin Khan, M.A., Previous XI and XII.
(Allahabad), L.T. (Allahabad).
Logic.
The Rev. T. D. Sully, M.A. (Oxon) XII Arts.
H. Mark, M.A. (Allahabad), M.A. XI Arts.
(Cantab.) *
H. B. Mundle, M.A. (Cal.) . . XII Arts (Inductive Logic).
History.
The Rev. W. E. S. Holland, M.A. English History, XI Arts.
(Oxon.) *
P. C. Addy, M.A. (Cal.) . . British and Indian History, XI
and XII Arts.
Economics.
R. S. Dwivedi, M.A. (Agra), B. Banking, XI Com.
Com. (Allahabad).
Trilok Narain, M.A. (Lucknow), B. XI and XII Arts and Com ;
Com. Commercial English, XII Com.
Dip.
436 CALENDAB 1928-29 [APP. D.
Persian.
Abid Husain Faridi, M.A. L.T. (Allah- XI and XII Arts.
abad).
Wall Mohammad Khan, Munshi-Fazil Persian and Urdu, XI and XII
(Punjab), Fazil (Allahabad). Arts.
Mathematics.
E. D. Smith, B.A. (Cantab.) . . XI and XII.
Bankey Lai Govilla, M.A., LL.B. (Agra) XI and XII.
Urdu
Hamid Hasan Qadiri, Munshi Fazil Urdu and Persian, XI and XII.
(Punjab) ; Int. (Punjab), High Pro-
ficiency in Urdu (Punjab).
Hindi.
Hari Har Nath Tandon, M.A. (Bena- Hindi Literature, XI and XII
res). Arts.
Faculty of Science.
Chairman, Dr. K. C. Pandya, M.A.
(Bom.), ph. D. (London).
Chemistry.
N. M. Antani, M.A. (Bom.) . . XI Theory and XII Theory and
Practical.
F. R. Snell, B.A., B.SC. (Oxon.) . . XI Theory and Practical ; XII
Theory.
F. C. Bosnian, B.SC. (Allahabad) . . Practical, XII.
Zoology.
L. P. Mathur, M.SC. (Benares) . . XII (Theory).
Beni Charan, M.SC. (Allahabad) . . XI Theory, XII Practical.
B. P. Cornelius, M.SC. (Agra) . . XI and XII Practical.
Physics.
K. C. Banerji, M.SC. (Allahabad) . . XII Practical and Theory.
W. C. Chowfin, M.SC. (Lucknow) . . XI Theory and Practical.
B. S. Mathur, M.SC. (Agra) . . XI Theory and Practical and XII
Practical.
Botany.
N. M. Mukerji, M.SC, (CaL), JT,L.S, . . XI and XII Theory.
C* S. JCrishnamurti, M.SC. (Benares) . . XI Theory and XI and XII
Practical.
APP. D.J LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 437
Faculty of Commerce.
Chairman : Rup Ram Gupta, M.A. XI, Mathematics (Com.).
(Cal.), B. Com. (Allahabad).
Manohar Swarup, M.A., L.T. (Allah- Com. Geography, XI and XII.
abad).
N. Timothy, M.A. (Agra) ; B. Com. Book-keeping and Business methodf
(Lucknow). XI and XII, Com. Dip.
E. W. Lall, Diploma in Shorthand and Shorthand and Typewriting, XI
Typewriting, Pitman's Certified Tea- and XII Com. Diploma.
cher (Bath).
RADHASWAMI EDUCATIONAL INSTITUTE, AGRA.
This institution was founded by the Radhaswami Satsang Sabha,
Dayalbagh, Agra, with the object of placing the education of boys and
girls on a sound moral and spiritual basis. It was raised to the High
School standard in July, 1918, and to the status of an Intermediate
College in 1922. The institution is recognized in History, Geography,
Persian, Sanskrit, Science and Drawing for the High School Examina-
tion and in Physics, Chemistry, Biology, Mathematics, History, Econo-
mics, Logic, Persian and Sanskrit for the Intermediate Examination of
the Board.
The institute is located in a healthy locality outside the township
o Agra and classes are conducted in a magnificent double- storied build-
ing of red brick interspersed with white marble, constructed by the Sabha
at a considerable cost.
The management of the institution is placed in the hands of a Manag-
ing Committee consisting of eleven members. The institute is in receipt
of grant from the provincial revenues and the difference between the in-
come and expenditure of the Institute ia made good by the Radhaswami
Satsang Sabha from its funds besides meeting this difference, the Sabha
has, up to this time, spent about 5 lakhs on the construction and equip-
ment of College buildings, hostels, residential quarters for the staff, etc.
Of the important and distinguishing features of the Institute men-
tion may bo made of the following :
(1) The majority of the students live in the hostels and quarters
have been provided to almost all the members of the staff
in the vicinity of the Institute, so that they may associate
closely and frequently with the pupils.
(2) Co-education is encouraged and boys and girls are taught
together up to a certain age in the High School depart-
ment. There is, however, no hostel arrangement for girl*
yet.
28
438
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP D.
(3) It is an all-India institution and boys from all parts of the
country are admitted and made to live and dine like mem-
bers of a common brotherhood.
{4) Manual Training is encouraged among the senior boys and
facilities for the same are provided in our Model Industries
workshop.
<5) A religious class is held every Sunday in which lectures are
delivered on non -denominational theistic subjects and
general principles of morality, with the object of making
the students God-fearing and God- loving young men.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Narayan Das, B.A., s.c. (Allah- General English, XII, to X.
abad), F.B.S.A., Principal.
2. Misri Lai Gupta ,M.A., L.T. (Allah- History, XII to IX.
abad), M.R.A.S. (London).
3. Badri Prasad Mathur, M.A. (Al- English, XII.
lahabad), T. Dip. (London), Mem-
ber of the Royal Society of Litera-
ture.
4. Nand Lai Gheik, B.SC., Honours Chemistry, XII and XI.
(Wales), F.C.S. (London).
5. Som Prakash, M.SC. (Allahabad) Biology, XII and XI.
4J. Charan Adhar, M.SC. (Lucknow), Physics, XII and XI.
acting.
7. Gur Prasad Mehra, B.A. (Allah- Geography, X and IX.
abad), B.T. (Punjab).
~8. Ram Charan Prasad, B.SC. (Al- Science, X and IX.
lahabad), L.T. (Benares).
9. Dhirendra Lai Pal, M.A. (Cal- Logic, XII and XI and English,
cutta). IX.
10. Tulja Ram Thadani, S.T.C. English, XI and X.
(Honours).
11. Gur Prasad Mathur, B.A. (Allah- English, X.
abad), L.T. (Benares).
12. Babu Ram Jadon, M.A. (Allah- Hindi, XI and X.
abad), and (Patna).
13. Karta Sahai, M.SC. (Allahabad), Mathematics, XII, X and IX
acting.
14. Hari Ram Keval Ram Ani, B.A., English, XI and IX.
Honours (Bombay), acting.
15. Ranga Rao, M.SC., Previous (Al- Mathematics, XI.
lahabad), acting.
AIT. D.J LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 439
16. Sant Prasad M.A., Previous Economics. X LI and XI .
(Agra), acting.
17. Kamta Praaad Mulla (Allah- Persian, XTl to X and Urdu, XI
abad), Munshi Fazil (Punjab) and X.
and Inter.
18. Marii Ram Shastri, Sahitya Tir- Sanskrit, X and IX and Hindi,
tha (Calcutta). IX.
19. Har Charan Lai, M.A. Previous Persian, J X and Urdu, IX.
(Agra).
20. Rain Narain Lai, Matric. . . Hindi, X.
51. Mirza Mohammad Qasim, Gov- Drawing, X and IX.
ernment School of Arts and
Crafts (Lucknow).
BALWANT RAJPUT INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, AGRA.
The origin of this Institution may be traced back to the year 1885,
when Thakur Umrao Singh ji and his brother, Kunwar Nanni Lai Singhji
of Kotla, established a Boarding House in their private residence at Bagh
Farzana at Agra with only 20 Rajput boys under a Superintendent and
41 Tutor. They forthwith enlisted the support of several Rajput zamin-
dars, chief among whom were Raja Baldeo Singhji of Awagarh, Raja
Lachman Singhji of Wazirpura, Kunwar Lekhraj Singhji of Gabbana
and Thakur Kalyan Singhji of Jalalpur.
In 1886, Raja Balwant Singhji, C.I.B. of Awagarh, feeling the want
of a suitable English school for Rajput boys, in which the traditional
characteristics of the race could be fostered, purchased the present site
of the college with a few old dilapidated buildings at a cost of Rs. 13,000.
Subsequently, a sum of rupees one lakh was paid from his Estate for the
construction of the school buildings which were constructed, during
1907-08 and 1912-13, at a cost of Rs. 1,03,000 through the munificence
of the said Raja Sahib.
In 1887, the Hostel was formally opened by Sir Auckland Colvin,
the then Lieutenant-Governor of the United Provinces, and was named
the Jubilee Rajput Boarding House.
By the year 1889, the school was placed on a firm footing through
the strenuous efforts of Raja Balwant Singhji of Awagarh and the Hon.
Raja Rampai Singh Bahadur of Kalakankar. The school was formally
opened by Mr. Imfrey, then Commissioner of Agra division.
In 1908, the school passed directly under the management of Raja
Balwant Singhji and enjoyed his paternal care until his demise in 1909.
He had, however, left by a codicil of his will, the enormous sum of rupees
9 lakhs for the maintenance of the school which, since then came to be
inown as the Balwant Rajput High School in loving memory of its illus-
440 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. i>,
trious founder. The whole of this sum in Government Promissory notes
is kept in deposit with the Treasurer of Charitable Endowments for the
United Provinces, bearing interest at 3 per cent.
The Balwant Rajput High School Trust came into being in 1915
and His Honour the Lieutenant-Governor of the United Provinces con-
descended to become a visitor of the School. The School, and since lately >
the College, is under a Committee of Management of which the District
and Sessions Judge of Agra is the President and Raja Suryapal Singhji
Sahib of Awagarh is the Vice- President and Honorary Secretary.
The admirable success which began to attend the Institution in
past years encouraged the Managing Committee to raise its status and
it was transformed into an Intermediate College in 1928. At present
it is affiliated to the Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces, for the Arts Section only, but steps are bein^ taken
to start the Science section in the coming year. A sum of Us. 1,40,000-
has now been given by Raja Suryapal Singh Sahib of Awagarh from his
private purse for the advancement of the College.
The College enjoys an ideal site with s?ven extensive play-gr >iui(h
within the College area. The Boarding House provides accommod-
ation for 300 boys and is divided into 8 blocks, viz., (1) Kashmir block,
(2) Udaipur block, (3) Awagarh block, (4) Jaipur block, (5) Bikaner block,
(6) Karauli block, (7) Jodhpur block and (8) Alwar block, after the name
of Rajput states.
There is a separate Boarding House outside the College compound
for boys under 14 years, placed under the charge of a house master and
a whole-time Doctor of the College, who resides there.
In 1922 the Warden system was introduced in the Hostels, which
is still in vogue with added facilities for the wards.
The Hostel has a dispensary which is attended by the whole -time-
Doctor and is also provided with a Library and a Reading- Room apart
from those existing in the College.
The College Library contains more than 3,000 volumes and large
additions are being made every day. The College has a big Central
Hall, spacious Class-rooms arid a well-equipped Reading-room regu-
larly supplied with periodicals, newspapers and magazines. There is
also a religious instructor and prayers are regularly offered by the stu-
dents under his guidance. Admission is open to all but reduced fees arc
charged from the Rajputs.
Besides the college scholarships aggregating Rs. 2,580 awarded
to deserving students, there are also special Awagarh Scholarships amount-
ing to Rs. 288.
The College has a Literary Society and publishes a quarterly Maga-
zine which provide ample facilities to the students to improve their lite-
rarv faculties.
. D.] LIS/ OF THE TEACHING STAFF 441
One of the special features of the College is the strict attention paid
to compulsory games and sports directed by the Games Secretary, the
Drill Master and the members of the Staff.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. S. 0. Sarkar, Ph.p. (London), F.Z.S. Science, X and IX.
(England), Principal.
2. P. C. Goswami, B. so., L.T. (Alia- Mathematics, X.
habad), Vice- Principal.
3. K. 0. Ma^umdar, M.A. (Calcutta) English Composition, X.
-4, B. C. Mukherjee, M.A., English Text and Dictation.
5. JShankar Lai, M.A. B.SC. Mathematics, IX.
6. Sabal Siui^h, M.A. B.SC. Mathematics, IX Science Prac-
tical, X and IX.
7. Jaipal Singh, M.A., LL.B., History, X and IX.
9. Kanhaiya Lai Mathur, B.A., L.T. English Text and Composition, IX.
10. R. P. Saraswat, B.A., L.T. English X and IX.
11. Ganeshi Lai Sahityopa-dhyaya Sanskrit, Xand IX.
12. Syed Abdullah, Inter. Persian, X and IX.
13. N. C. Gupta, B. Com. C.E.T.D. Commerce, X and IX.
14. Asrar Husain Khan, D.M.C. Drawing, X and IX.
15. Ram Bharose Tripathi, Sahitya Hindi, X and IX.
Sanskrit.
16. Muhammad Husain . . Urdu, X and IX.
DHARMA SAMAJ INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, ALIGARH,
This institution is maintained by the Dharma Samaj Society founded
by the late Rai Saheb L. Badri Prasad, a prominent raia of Aligarh. The
main object of the Society, which is a registered body according to Societies
Registration Act XXI of 1860, is to spread education. This society
started a Sanskrit Pathshala about the end of the last century ; but owing to
the increasing demands of English Education and want of accommodation
in the local High Schools, English classes were added to the Pathshala
and it was recognised as a Middle School in 1909. Two years later it rose
to be a High School and from 1911 to June 1929 it continued to be called
the Dharma Samaj High School. The College classes have been opened
:from July, 1929. The Dharma Samaj Intermediate College is recognised
by the Board of Secondary and Intermediate Education for the teaching
of History, Logic, Mathematics, Economics, Sanskrit, Persian, Hindi and
Urdu. Tn addition to teaching the ordinary subjects of the Curriculum
prescribed by the Department of Education and the Board, a special
-course of lessons on religious instruction is taught to the students.
442 CALENDAR 1928-29 [AFP. IX
Its immediate control is in the hands of the Managing Committee of
the Dharma Samaj Society assisted by an Education Committee of which,
the Principal is an ex-officio member.
The institution gets a grant from the Provincial Government and the
Aligarh Municipal Board. It also gets income from landed property en-
dowed by the late Rai Saheb L. Badri Prasad and interest on Rs. 42,000
invested in Government Securities.
The main College building consists of a big hall having on two of its sides
seven small class rooms for the teaching of some optional subjects. In
addition to this there are three blocks, the biggest of which consists of 12
class rooms, 6 of them being 22 feet by 25 feet each, and 6 (six) 22 feet by
35 feet each. There are two side blocks of 4 rooms each. Classes from
VII to XI are accommodated in these rooms. The lower classes from III
to VI have been shifted to a separate building. The Hostel attached to
the College is for the present accommodated in a hired building situated
near the College but the negotiations for the acquisition of an adjoining
land of 12J acres are nearly complete. The money for building a hostel
accommodating a hundred students is already deposited in the bank and
the work of building will be commenced as soon as the formal sanctum
for this is received from the Local Government.
The College has its own monthly Magazine to which students are en-
couraged to contribute frequently. In addition to this, the College
possesses a number of students' associations that contribute to its corporate
life : the Students' Common Room, the Debating Society, the Dharma
Samaj College Athletic Association, the Scout Troop, the Old Boys' Associa-
tion and the Brotherhood Association, the principal aim of which is to give
help to poor deserving students. There is a running shield for Elocution
Competition presented by the Hon'ble Rai Bahadur Sita Ram Saheb, M.A. V
LL.B., President of the United Provinces Legislative Council in honour of
his late father L. Jugal Kishore Ji.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. H. B. Malkani, M.A., S.T.C.D., G eneral English, XI; Hhglish Text,.
(Bombay), Principal. XB.
2. K. K. Kaul, M.A. (Benares) . . English Text, XI, XA, and IXA;
General English, XA ; Rapid
reading, XA.
3. Ram Prasad Saxena, M.A., L.T., History, XI, XA f XB and XC^
(Allahabad). General English, XB.
4. Bri jMohan Mehrotra, M.A. (Agra) Mathematics, XI and XA ; Logic-
XL
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 44$
5. Murli Dhar Tandon, M.A. (Alia- Economics, XI ; English Text,
habad), B.T. (Aligarh). XC and IXC; General Eng-
lish, XC.
6. Gokal Chandra Sharma, M.A. Hindi, XI, X A, B and C and IXA.
(Agra) V.T.O.
7. Dhiraj Lai Sabr, Munshi (AUaha- Urdu, XI X, A and C and IX.
bad).
8. Earn Swamp Sharma, Dabir- Persian, XI, X A and C and IXB.
Kamil, (Lucknow).
9. Ganga Prasad Goutam, Shastri Sanskrit, XI, X A and C and IXA
1st year, Sanskrit College, and C.
(Benares).
10. Balmukand Pali, B.A., L.T. (Alia- Geography, XA and B and IX ^
habad). English Text, IXB ; General Eng-
lish, IXB.
11. Pramod Bihari Lai Matlmr, B.so., Science, XA, B, C., and IXA, B, C.
L.T. (Allahabad).
12. Bhagwat Swarup, Inter. Drawing, Drawing, XA and ^C. and IXA
(Bombay). and C.
13. Bhagwati Prasad Mital, B.A., L.T. Mathematics, XB and C. and IXC ;
(Allahabad). General English, IXC.
14. Ram Swarup Jain, B.A. (Agra) Mathematics, IXB. ; General Eng-
lish, IXC.
15. Kishori Lai Gupta, M.A. (Agra), History, IX; General English,,
C.T. IXA.
16. Kali Charan Gupta, B.A. (AUaha- History, IX.
bad).
17. Tika Ram Sharma, V.T.C., Prath- Hindi, IXC.
ma Sanskrit and Advanced
Hindi.
18. Brij Nandan Lai, B.A. (Agra) . . Mathematics, IXA and C.
BAREILLY COLLEGE.
This College was started in 1884 in the form of College classes attached
to the Bareilly High School to take the place of a College formerly main-
tained by Government at Bareilly, which, having been originally started
as a school in 1836, became a College in 1850, and on the abolition of the*
College department in 1877 was converted into a High School.
444 CALENDAR 1928-29 [ATP. D
The College is maintained from a fund raised by public subscription,
among the original subscribers having been the Most Hon'ble the Marquis
of Ripon, K.G., His Highness the late Nawab of Rampur, His Highness the
late Maharaja of Darbhanga, Raja Jagat Singh of Jaipur, Raja Madhava
RaoVenayek, Raja Jai Kishen Dass, c.s.i. of Moradabad, Munshi Newal
Kishore, C.I.B, Maharani Sarnomai of Kassimbazaar, Bengal and others.
The College is aided by Government and by the principal district and
municipal boards of Rohilkhand and Kumaun.
An increase in the Endowment Fund and handsome donations from
Raja Kishen Kumar of Moradabad, the late Rai Sheo Baksh, Rai Bahadur,
and Rani Naraini Koer, supplemented by liberal contributions from Gov-
ernment, have made the foundation of the College as an independent
institution possible, and it has now been transferred to buildings which
were erected on a site presented by His Highness the Kawab of Rampur,
and were opened by His Honour Sir J. D. LaTouche, K.C.S.I., Lieutenant-
Go vernor of the United Provinces, on July 17, 1906.
The general control of the College is vested in a Board of which the
{Commissioner of Rohiklhand is President, the executive management
being in the hands of a committee elected from the Board of Control.
There is a residential house for students erected by Government. It has
accommodation for 72 students. The library is well-equiped and is divided
into general and departmental sections. The departmental sections arei n
charge of professors of the various departments.
The students' organizations comprise a College Debating Society called
the Union, a Hindi Literary Society, a Urdu Literary Society and a Board-
ing House Debating Union. The College Commor Room is managed by
students themselves. All the organizations are under the direct super-
vision of members of the staff.
The College teaches up to the B.A. and B.Sc. standards of the Univer-
sity of Agra, and prepares for the Intermediate Examinations in Arts and
tkiences and the Commercial Diploma Examination, conducted by the Board
of High School and Intermediate Education, United Provinces. The
Intermediate and Commerce classes are carried on in the same buildings as
the Degree classes and with very largely the same staff.
Besides six Government stipends, there is a scholarship fund for the
benefit of the poor and deserving students of the Bareilly College. There
are 13 endowed and 12 municipal and other scholarships. Medals and
prizes are annually awarded to deserving candidate?.
APP. D.J
LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
445
The College has undergone considerable development and an exten-
sion fund has been opened for purposes of further expansion. The family
of the late Lala Brij Mohan Lai have donated over Rs. 15,000 towards the
'construction of a chemistry block in his memory. The building is com-
plete and the equipment hag been finished by Messrs. Mansfield and Sons,
Calcutta.
The number of students at the close of the session was 135 in the Inter-
imediate, and 29 in the Commercial Diploma classes.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. William Owens, B. A. (Sydney and Principal.
London), M.B.E.
2. A. C. Dutt, M.A. (Allahabad) and English, XI and Xll.
(Lucknow), M. R. A. s. (Eng-
land). Vice-Principal.
3. B. K. Pande, M.A., Research English, XII.
Scholar in English, (Allahabad
University), Gold Medallist in
B.A., Victoria Jubilee Bursary
Holder in Sanskrit.
4. D. P. Bhattacharyya, M.A. (Cal- Mathematics, XI and XU.
cutta), Griffith Memorial Prize-
man, 1919.
.5. Ram Krishna Vaish, M.SO., (Allah- Engnlish, XI and Mathematics,
abad), Research Scholar in
Mathematics, (Allahabad).
>6. S. B. Banerji, M.A. (Calcutta) . .
7. R. K. Sharma, M.A., LL.B.,
(Allahabad).
8. H. D. Gupta, M.A., LL.B. (Allah-
abad).
9. Kabir Ahmad, M.A. (Allahabad), Persian, XI and XII ; Urdu, XI.
Alim Examination and M.A.
(Previous) in Arabic (Allah-
abad), High Proficiency in
Urdu.
10. ShriDhar Panth, M.A., (Allah- Sanskrit, XI and XII ; Hindi, XI,
abad), L.T. (B. H. U.), M.A.
(Previous) in Hindi (Ag.),
Kavyatirtha, Sahitya Shastri,
Sankhya-Yoga Shastri.
41. Bhola Nath Sharma, B.A. Hindi, XI ; Sanskrit, XI.
(Ag.), 1st class 1st, M.A. (Pre-
vious) in Sanskrit {Ag.), T. C.
Jones Memorial Medallist.
Engnlish, XI and
XII.
History, XI and XII.
Economics, XII.
Logic, XI and XII.
446 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D.
12. J. C. Pal, M.SC. (Allahabad) . . Physics, XI.
13. Bishambher Prasad Saksena, Physics, XII.
M.SC. (Lucknow), LL.B. (Luck-
now).
14. Lakshmi Narayan, M.SO. (Allah- Chemistry, XI.
abad) F.C.S.
15. A. K. Bhattacharyya, (Allahabad), Chemistry, XII.
M.SC. Research Scholar in Chem-
istry.
1C. Shankar Lai, M.A. (Allahabad), Inter. Com. I and C. D. II..
B. Com., (Lucknow).
17. Raghubir Narayan Bhatnajrar, Inter. Com. I and C.D. II.
(Com. Dip. (Allahabad).
SHYAM SUNDAR MEMORIAL INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE,.
GHANDAUSI.
Recognized, 1909.
This institution was founded in loving memory of the late Sahu Shyanu
Sundar by his widow Rani Ram Kali Devi, K.I.H., and mother Srimati Tulsa
Devi, raises, bankers and landholders of Chandausi. It was started as a
High School in the year 1909, and raised in 1923 to the status of a College
teaching up to the standard of the Intermediate and Commercial Diploma
Examinations.
The College stands on an ideal site measuring about 173 bighas. The
buildings comprise five blocks.
There is a net annual income from endowments of Rs. 9,000 and annual
grant of Rs. 5,000 for the upkeep of the College classes.
Hostels. Attached to the College are five hostels to accommodate
250 boarders. A whole-time medical officer, a dairy, a dhobi, a barber and/
a book and stationery shop have been provided within the College prem-
ises.
Courses of study. As prescribed by the Board, Lectures on First- Aid
and Hygiene and lessons on Music are also given
Scholarships, prizes and medals.
A number of small scholarships aggregating in value Rs. 116 per men-
sem and medals and prizes are awarded annually to deserving students.
Games. Ample provision exists. One shield and three cups are an-
nually competed for by the different teams of the College.
Besides a College magazine which appears once a quarter, there are a
number of associations, viz., Commerce Association, Nagri Pracharni
Sabha, Historical Society, Debating Society and Old Boys* Association A
poor Boys' 'Aid Library and a Loan fund are managed by the Old Boys''
Association for the benefit of the poor students.
AJ>P. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
44T
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Rai Sahib Babu J. Mukharji, B.A. Eng. Gram., XII, XII Com., & X.
(Calcutta), Principal.
2. Shiva Shanker Saxena, M.A., L.T., English Text, XII, XI and XII
(Allahabad), F.R.BOON.S., Vice-
Principal.
Com.; English Composition and
Translation, XII and XI ; Eng-
lish Essay, XII, Com.; Persian
English Portion, XII.
History, XII and XI ; Logic, XII
and XL
4.
5.
6.
Woinjah Chaulra Ba-nerji, M.A.,
L.T. (Allahabad), F.R.Hist.s.
Moti Lai Mathuria, M.A., 1st cUss Physics, XII and XI ; Sicence, X.
(Mathematics), M.SC., (Phy-
sics), (Allahabad), P.P.S., (Lon-
don), Sir Elliot Colvin Medal-
list, and Cox Gold Medallist.
Krishna Kumar Gupta, M.SC., Chemistry, XII and XI ; Science,
(Chemistry), 1st class (Allaha- IX.
bad).
Mewa Ram Saxena, M.A., 1st Mathematics, XII to IX.
class, 1st (B. H. U.), B.SC.,
(Allahabad).
7. Y. D. Keakar, M.A., (Cjm.), 1st English Preois, XII C3in. ; Econo-
cla^, 1st prize-winner (CaU mic?, XI, Com. and XII Com. ;,
cutta), Gold Medallist, B. com., Book-keeping, XII Com.; Busi-
(Bombay), F.B. ECON.S. ne Method, XII Com. ; Bank-
ing, XI Com.
8. Shiva Dutta Tripathi Shastri, English General, XII and XI
M.A., (Econ.), (B.H.U.). Economics, XII and XI ; His-
tory, X and IX.
9. Bhagwan Das Gaur, M.A., (Alia- Sanskrit, XII to X ; Hindi, XI and
habad), Shastri, (Jaipur), X.
Acharya (Benares).
10. J. P. Dube, M.A. (English), L.T. English, XI, Intermediate and
(Allahabad). Commerce, and X.
11. Kampta Prasad, B.A., L.T. (Alia- English, X.
habad).
12. Rahas Behari Lai, B.A., L.T. Geography, X and IX ; English.^
(Allahabad). IX.
13. Mahadev Prasad Vaish, M.A. English, IX.
(Phil.), (Agra).
14. Jainti Prasad Choubey, B.SC. Mathematics, X a ad IX.
(Allahabad).
448
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. D.
15. Jaidev Prasad Gupta, B. Com..
(Lucknow), M.A. (Previous),
Economics.
16. Jagish Saran Agarwala, Com.
Dip. (Allahabad), F.O.I., O.T.D.,
(Birmingham).
17. Reoti Saran Sharma, Com. Dip.,
(Allahabad), B. Com., (Agra).
18. Chhail Behari Lai Varma, School
of Arts and Crafts (Lucknow),
Fine Arts Schoo
(Bombay), Medallist
19. Shabbir Husain, Molvi Fazil,
(Punjab).
20. Maya Ram Pande, Madhyam
Visarat (Benares).
21. Jageshwar Saran Porov., Inter.
Kamil(AUahabad),and Munshi
Examination.
Precis and Correspondence, XII
Com. and XI Com.; Commercial
Gaography, XII Com. and JQ
Com. ; Business Method, X and
IX; Economics, XI Com.;
and Industrial Organisation, XI
Com.
Shorthand, XI Com. ; Typewriting,
XII Com, XI Com., X and IX;
Correspondence, IX.
Correspondence, XII Com. ; Book-
keeping, and Accountancy, XI
Com.; Shorthand, XII Com.
Business Method, XI Com
BoDk-ke3ping, X and IX ; Cor-
respondence, IX.
Drawing, X and IX.
Persian, XII to IX ; Urdu, X.
Sanskrit, IX ; Hindi, IX.
Urdu, IX.
CHRIST CHURCH COLLEGE, CAWNPORE.
Affiliated in Arts F. A. 1892 ; B.A. 1893 ; M. A. 1S13.
Degree classes re~started, 1926.
College, classes were, at the outset, held in the High School building.
A separate College building was erected and opened for use in 1897
To the main building additions Have since bean male. In 1909 a
Science lecture room and Physical and Chemical laboratories were built.
In 1911 the reading room was enlarged and converted into a Library. The
College Hall was enlarged and re-furnished in 1916.
The College Hostel provides accommodation for about 70 students,
Hindu, Muhammadan and Christian. It was opened in 1893 anl has since
been enlarged by the addition of two new blocks. A European member
-of the staff is in residence as Warden of the Hostel.
The College is under the general control of the Lucknow Diocesan Board
of Missions and a Governing Body of whioh the Right Rev. the Lord Bishop
*-of Lucknow is Chairman.
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
449-
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
S. C. Chattcrji, M.A. (Punjab)
S. D. Seth, M.SO. (Allahabad),
Vice- Principal.
F. T. Fisher, M.A. (Cantab)
C. B. Gordon, B.A. (Cantab)
M. N. Sen, M.A. (Calcutta)
Tara Chandra, M.A. (Allahabad)
Murari Lai, M.A. (Allahabad)
L. K. Tripathi, M.A. (Allahabad)
P. D. Gupta, M.A. (Allahabad) . .
V, Mitter, B.A. (Punjab)
A. K. Chowdhury, M.sc. (Allah-
abad).
J. N. Budhwar, M.SO. (Lucknow)
K. A. Wajid, M.A. (Aligarh)
B. D. Shastri, B.A. (Punjab)
Daya Narain Nijram, B.A. (Alla-
habad).
Din Dayal Gupta, M.A. (Allah-
abad).
Principal.
Mathematics, XI and XII.
English, XI and XII.
Mathematics, XI and XII.
English, XI and XII.
Economics, XII.
Logic, XI and XII ; English, XIL
Indian History, XI and XII.
English History, XI and XII;
Economics, XI.
English, XI and XII.
Chemistry, XI and XII.
Physics, XI and XII.
Persian, XI and XIL
Sanskrit, XI and XII.
Urdu, XI and XII.
Hindi, XI and XII.
DAYANAND ANGLO-VEDIC COLLEGE, CAWNPORE.
The Dayanand Anglo-Vedic College, Cawnporc, was started in the year
1919 as a Degree College affiliated to the University of Allahabad includ-
ing Intermediate (Arts) and Commercial Diploma Classes. Now the Col-
lege is affiliated to the University of Agra for the Master of Arts and Bache-
lor of Laws, Arts, Science and Commerce Examinations and is also affiliat-
ed to the Board of High School and Intermediate Education, United Prov-
inces for the Intermediate Examination in Arts, Science and Commerce.
The College was housed in a bungalow for the first six years. The
accommodation available in it was found to be inadequate and the con-
struction of a new building was commenced in the year 1924. Now the
College building consists of : (a) Science Block of 10 big rooms (six rooms
30' x 36' and four rooms 20' X 30') and six snaller rooms ; and the Main Col-
lege Building having 20 lecture rooms, 7 smaller rooms and the Central
Hall (70' X56'). The College building is one of the finest educational build-
ings in the Province, situated in healthy environments and consisting of
airy commodious class rooms.
The number of students on the 31st March, 1929, was 482 ; 207 in the
Degree Classes and 275 in the Intermediate Classes.
450 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D.
The results achieved by the students of the College at the University
and Intermediate Board's Examination have been satisfactory. The per-
centage of passes has uniformly been above the average.
The number of scholarship and stipend holders during the year was 31
in the Intermediate Classes, and 39 students got concession in fee.
The College Hostel is situated in close proximity to the College and prb-
vides accommodation for about 280 boarders.
The College maintains Football, Cricket, Hockey and Volley Ball Teams,
Basket Ball, Tennis, Badminton and Indian Games are also played. There
is also a boating and swinmmig club. Provision is made for Physical Ex-
ercise also. The College won the following Cup and Shields in the Games
-organized by the Cawnpore Inter-College Tournament Committee besides
numerous medals won by individual sportsmen :
(1) Mrs. David Hockey Cup. (For the third year consecutively.)
(2) Babu Brijendra Swarup Tug-of-war Shield (for the fourth year
consecutively).
(3) Babu Dwarka Prasad Singh Regatta Championship Shield.
The following associations are maintained in the College :
(1) The College Union.
(2) The Historical Association,
(3) The Economic Association.
(4) The Hindi Sahitya Samity and
(5) The Commerce Union,
This year, for the first time, the College published two issues of the
'^College Magazine.
The Special Features of the College are as follows :
(1) Religious and moral instruction in accordance with the broad
principles of Vedic Theology is given in addition to the secular education
required for the various University and Board's Examinations.
(2) Students are brought in close personal touch with their profes-
sors who not only supervise their studies but also see that
they make proper use of their opportunity to develop a good
moral character.
(3) Simple living and high thinking is the guiding principle for all
who work in the College as Professors or as students.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Diwan Chand, M.A. (English, Pun- Principal.
jab ; Philosophy, Calcutta).
2. Ekanath Banerji, M.A. . . Mathematics, XI and XII.
3. Kanhaiya Lai Misra, M.A., B.SC. (Al- Ditto.
lahabad).
4. Rajendra Kumar Ghosh, M.A. English, XI and XII.
(Calcutta).
5. Ram Chandra Rao, M.A. (Allah- Ditto.
abaci.)
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
451
6. Kalka Prasad Bhatnagar, M.A.,
LL.B. (Allahabad).
7. Dr. Raj Bahadur Gupta, M.A.
(B. H. U.), Ph. D. (Lucknow).
8. Govind Ram Sebh, M.A. (Punjab) . ,
9. Kanhaiya Lai Verma, M.A. (B. H. U.)
10. Ram Behari Lai, Shastri, Ved.
Tirth, M.A. (Previous, Allah-
abad).
11. Deputy Lai Nigam, M.A. (Calcutta)
12. Krishna Kumar, M.A. (Punjab)
13. Shanker Lai Jindal, M.SC. (Allah-
abad) (on leave).
14. Hazari Lai Rohatgi, M.SC. (Allah-
abad).
15. D. P. Goswami, M.A. (Allahabad) . .
16. Pandit Tota Ram Sharma, M.SC.
(Allahabad).
17. Bishambhar Dayal, M.SC. (Allah-
abad).
18. Munshi Ram Sahityalankar, M.A.
(Punjab), M.A. (Previous, Agra).
19. Dattatraya Krishna Sakhwalkar,
M.A. (Commerce, Calcutta), B.A.
(Honours), LL.B., B. Com.
(Bombay.)
20. Thakur Balwant Singh, M.A. (Allah-
abad), B. Com. (Lucknow).
.21. Raghunath Sahai Saksena, Com.
Dip. (Allahabad), B. Com. (Pre-
vious) (Agra).
22. Thakur Jaideva Singh, M.A. (Agra)
,23. Satya Doo, B. Com. (Lucknow), L.
T. (Allahabad).
24. Chandra Deo Prasad Srivaatava,
M.A. (Agra), B. Com. (Allah-
abad).
Economics, XI and XII.
Ditto.
History, XI and XII.
Civics, XI and XII.
Sanskrit, XI and XII.
Persian, XI and XII.
.Logic, XI and XII.
Chemistry, XI and XII.
Ditto.
Ditto.
Physics, XI and XII.
Ditto.
Hindi, XI and XII.
Business Methods, C. D. I and II.
Accountancy and Economics,
C. D. I and II.
Shorthand and Typewriting,
C. D. I and II.
General English, C. D. I and II ;
English, XI and XII.
Commercial .English and Geog-
raphy, C. D. I and II.
Commercial English and Bank-
ing, C. D. I and II.
BISHAMBHAR NATH SANATAN DHARMA INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE,
CAWNPORE.
The College is under the general control of Brahmavarta Sanatan
Dharma Mahamandal, Cawnpore. It aims at imparting the liberal edu-
cation in Arts and Science up to the Intermediate standard in such a reli-
452 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D.
ious atmosphere that its products may be inspired by the high ideals of
the Sanatan Dharma.
The institution was first started in 1917 as a small Pathshala, which,,
within two years, developed into a Middle School. In 1922 it was raised
to the status of a High School with commerce as its special feature. Be-
ing the only institution of its kind in the vicinity it soon gained in popu-
larity.
Thanks to the munificence of late Rai Bishambhar Nath Bahadur,
who in addition to the endowment of property worth one lakh of rupees,,
made a gift of a valuable garden on the Mall, which enabled the Manag-
ing Committee to convert the institution into an Intermediate College.
The College is recognised in the following subjects :
1. English.
2. Mathematics.
3. Sanskrit.
4. History.
o. Logic.
6. Hindi.
7. Physics.
8. Chemistry.
9. Biology.
10. Geography.
11. Economics.
12. Urdu.
There are two departments of the College, distributed over in two-
separate buildings. The upper department consisting of classes VIII to
XII is in the new building on the Mall, and the lower department con-
sisting of classes III to VII is accommodated in the old building on the
Meston road.
Special features : We claim the following as the special features of our
institution :
(1) Moral and religious instruction in accordance with the broad
principles of the Sanatan Dharma.
(2) Personal contact between the teachers and the taught.
(3) Emphasis on the ancient Hindu Ideal of " Plain living and high
thinking."
(4) Special attention paid to the physical culture of our students.
(5) The variety of subjects offered for choice both in the Interme-
diate and High School classes.
(6) The special facilities for poor and deserving students through
Scholarships, Principal's Aid Chest, and Vidyarthi Sahayak
Sabha.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Hiralal Khanna, M.SC., Principal . . Mathematics, X to XII.
2. Bakshi Mangal Sen, M.A. (Prov.) English, IX and X.
B.T., Vice-Principal.
3. Balkrishna Tandon, M.A. . . English, XI and XII.
4. Chhotey Lai Mehrotra, M.A., B. Com. Economics, XI and XII.
Geography, XI and XII.
Commerce, IX and X.
APP. D.J LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
45S
5. N. C. Mukcrjee, M.A.
(>. Jagannaih Singh Mehra, M.A.
7. Rajendra Kumar, M.A., o.T.
8. M. S. Dave, M.SC.
9. Radhey Shiam, M.SC.,
10. Raghupati Sahai, M. A. (Prev.)
11. Saraswati Prasad, M.A.
12. Ram Swamp Sharma, M.SC.
13. Sadgur Saraa Awasthi, M.A. (Prev.)
14. Ram Swarup, M.A.
15. Sardar Narain Singh, B.A., L.T.
16. G. N. Misra, M.A. (Prev).
17. N. N. Banerjee, B.A., L.T.
18. Sheo Narain Lai, B.A., L.T.
19. Deo Dutta Arora, B.SC.
20. Narbada Prasad Pandey, M.A., B.
Com.
21. Kanhaiya Lai, Vyakaran Tirth
22. Shiv Govind Misra, Visharad Pra-
thama Vyakaran.
23. Ahmad Husain, Munshi Aiim
24. Madho Prasad, Specialised in Man-
ual Training.
25. Ram Chandra Tandon, Bombay
Inter. (Drawing).
English and History, IX and XI-
Logic, XI and XIT,
English, IX.
History, IX to XII.
English, IX.
Chemistry, XI and XII.
Biology, XI and XII.
Urdu and English, XT and XH.
Sanskrit, XI and XII.
Hindi, X.
History and English, IX.
Physics, XI and XII.
Hindi, IX to XII.
Mathematics, IX to X[L
Geography, IX to XII.
English, IX.
Mathematics, IX and X.
History, X.
English, IX and X.
Mathematics, IX.
Physics, IX and X.
Commerce, IX and X.
Sanskrit, IX and X.
Hindi, [X.
Urdu and Persian, IX and X^
Man. Trg. , IX and X.
Drawing, IX and X.
EWING CHRISTIAN INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, ALLAHABAD.
In October, 1846, the British East India Company made over its Col*
lego work at Allahabad to the American Presbyterian Mission. When
the Civil Station was removed from the Jumna in 1853 the Mission pur-
chased the Court building for educational work and started a Collegiate
School. After a few years college classes were given up and school classes
alone continued, the institution being known as the Jumna Mission School
or the A. P. Mission High School.
In 1900 the American Presbyterian Mission decided to reopen the
College at Allahabad, and the First Class was formed in 1902. In order
to keep school and College separate, the old court building wag torn down
29
454 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D.
.nd a better home for the school erected at the western end of the Jumna
compound, leaving the eastern end free for the College.
This has now the following buildings : -A main College building with
.a Laboratory for Biology, a Library (of more than ten thousand volumes),
administrative offices, eleven lecture rooms, and an Assembly Hail to seat
one thousand ; a Laboratory for Physics and one for Chemistry ; an
Infirmary, ten residences for members of the Staff ; and five Hostels,
with a total accommodation for two hundred. Four of the Hostels are arrang-
-ed with suites of rooms for one or more unmarried professors.
In 1923, as a result of the reconstruction of the University of Allahabad,
the College gave up its B. A. and M. A. classes to the University, and was
resolved into two Institutions an Intermediate College, which took over
classes IX and X from the High School, and an Internal College
which provided Hostels for University students awl gave them tutorial
instruction.
The Intermediate College now (August, 1925) has 580 students on it*
Toll.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
Priiiclp il-elec*.
Charles Herbert Rice, M.A., ph. D. (Princeton) (on furlough W29-.W,
Acting Principal.
Winfield Dudgeon, Ph. D. (Chicago).
English.
Bene Simlai, M.A. (Lucknow).
N. K. Biswas, M.A. (Calcutta).
C. H. Hazlett, B.A. (Washington and Jaffer?ouV
R. C. Roy, B.A., L.T. (Allahabad).
Sidh Nath Chaube, M.A. (Allahabad).
Sadiq Ali, B.A. (Allahabad).
Vidyanand, M.A. (Lucknow).
Logic.
H. T. Bose, M.A. (Calcutta).
Econ ojrt Ics .
Saraswati Prasad, M. A. (Allahabad).
M. W. Maclay, B.A. (Columbia).
E. C. Bhatty, M.A. (Allahabad).
History.
F. R. Collins, M.A. (Wooster).
:N. N. Ghosh, M.A., L.T. (Allahabad).
Ujagar Singh, M.A., r.T. (Purjah),
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 455
Geography.
J. C. Manry, M.A. (Harvard), ph. D. (Iowa) (on furlough, 1929-30).
E. V. Noble, B.A., L.T. (Allahabad), (on study leave, 192830).
Kam Narain Misra, B.A. (Allahabad).
*M. W. Maclay.
fL. K. Shah, M.A. (Butler), B. D., ph. D. (Chicago).
Urdu and Persian.
M. A. Hakk, M.A., LL. B. (Allahabad).
Hammad All, M.A. (Allahabad)'.
Md. Habib Husain, Fazii (Allahabad).
Hindi and Sanskrit.
R. K. Shukla, M.A. (AHahaVad).
Ram Lakhan Shukla, B.A. (Allahabad).
Krishna Shastri.
Mathematics.
N. B. Mitra, M.A. (Calcutta).
F. Bose, M.SC. (Allahabad).
L. P. Tandon, M.A., L.T. (Allahabad).
Chemistry.
B. B. Malvea, M.A. M.SC. (Allahabad) (on study leave, 1929-31).
S. C. Agarwal, M.SC. (Allahabad).
A. K. Roy, M.SC. (Allahabad).
S. S. Lai, B.SC. (Allahabad).
S. K. Bose, B.SC. (Punjab), B. T. (Bombay).
Physics.
R. K. Sharma, M.SC. (Benares).
P. K. Sur, M.SC. (Allahabad).
A. C. Roy, B.SC. (Allahabad).
Bala Prasad Srivastava, B.SC. (Allahabad).
Biology.
'(Winfield Dudgeon).
Kali Sahai Srivastava, M.SC. (Allahabad).
D. N. Coondoo.
fPanchanan Maheshwari, M.SC. (Allahabad).
*W. K. Wesley.
General Science.
K. D. Banerji, B.SC. (Calcutta).
W. K. Wesley, M.SC., L.T. (Allahabad).
Manual Training.
Bhagwati Prasad, S.L.C., Government Carpentry School.
N. Bowen.
*Major work in another subject.
456
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. D_
KAYASTHA PATHSHALA INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE,
ALLAHABAD.
The Kayastha Pathshala owes its origin to the magnificent generosity
and far-sighted patriotism of Munshi Kali Prasad Kulbhaskar, who gave
away his entire property for the intellectual, moral ani physic^ uplift
of the Hindu community. In 1873 it was started as a Primary School;
it was raised in 1878 to the status of an Anglo-Vernacular School, and in
1 882 to that of a High School. In 1895-96 it was affiliated to the Allahabad
University up to the Intermediate standard, and in 1914 to the
B.A.
Since April, 1922, the Kayastha Pathshala has been divided into three
departments :
(i) The Internal College of the University which provides resid-
ence and tutorial and supplementary instruction for students
reading in the University ;
(ii) The Intermediate College, which consists of classes IX and X
of the High School ; the First an! Saoond-year classes of the
College (called now classes XI and XII) ; and the First and
Second-year commerce classes preparing candidates for the
Commercial Diploma Examination of tli3 Intarmoliate Bsard ;
and
(iii) The Middle School which consists of classes 111 to VIII.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Gokal Chand, B.A. (Hons) ; M.A., English XI and XII.
LL.B., T. D. (London) Principal.
2. J. Sen, M.SC., Vice-Principal
3. Brijraj, M.A,, B.SC., LL.B.
4. G. Bhargava, M.SC.
5. B. L. Varma, M.A.
6. B. C. Bose, M.A.
7. Dharam Narain, M.SC.
8. Madhav Prasad, M.A., L.T.
9. Sundar Lai, M.A., L.T.
10. Ganeshi Lai, B.A., M.F.
11. S. D. Murty, M.A., Kavyatairtha
12. Jalpa Prasad, M.SC.
13. B. L. Gaur, M.A., B. COM.
14. Ganesh Prasad, B.A. . .
15. Gaya Prasad, M.A., B.SC.
Mathematics, X to XII.
English, XI, XII, XI C. D. and
XII C. D.
Physics, XI and XII.
English, IX; History, IX to XIT.
English an 1 Logic, XI and XII.
Biology, XI and XII.
Geography, IX and X.
English, IX and X; History, XI.
Persian, XII IX.
Sanskrit, XII to IX.
Chemistry, XI and XII.
Economics, XI, XII, C. D. I and
II year.
Mathematics, IX and X.
English, IX, X, and C. D. I year.
-APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 457
16. S. Sharma, B. Com. . . Accountancy, XI C. D., and XII
C. D. ; Stenotyping, XI
C. D. ; Shorthand, XII C.D.
17. P. D. Saxena, B. Com. . . Business method, XI C. D. and
XII C. D.; Typewriting, XII C.D.
18. Babu Rama, High School, M.F. , . Urdu, IX and X.
19. Anandi Prasad, Intermediate . . Hindi, IX and X.
20. Dwarka Prasad, Bombay II I Grade, Drawing, IX and X.
ANGLO-BENGALI INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, ALLAHABAD.
This institution took its birth as a humble pathshala in November,
1875, when the Bengali residents of Allahabad, feeling the want of a suit-
able school for imparting English education to the Bengali boys through
the medium of their mother-tongue, made a small beginning with five
boys and one teacher in a private house in the city. With the help of
private subscription this infant school steadily worked its way through
many weary years of struggle. In the year 1886 it became a self -support-
ing institution with 178 boys on its roll and it taught up to the Entrance
Standard of the Calcutta University down to 1888, and in 1889 it was
affiliated to the Allahabad University, sending up boys for the Matricu-
lation examination every year and achieving excellent results in most years.
In 1894 Sir Promoda Charan Banerji laid the foundation-stone of the
present building, and on 28th November, 1899, the late Sir Arthur Strachey,
Chief Justice, opened the school in the new building as it then stood. At
the end of December, 1925, when it had completed 50 years of its existence,
it had 523 boys on its roll. With the sanction of the Board of High School
and Intermediate Education the school was raised to the status of an
Intermediate College, recognition in the first instance having been limited
to English, Mathematics, Sanskrit, Modern History and Logic, and it was
formally opened on the 9th July, 1926. The Primary classes I to IV have
been removed to a separate building.
The school was managed by the Allahabad Bengali Educational Society,
which is a registered body.
The College is located in a double- storied commodious building in a
.healthy part of the town between the city and civil station on a public road
.and has ample play -grounds.
The management of the institution is placed in the hands of a manag-
ing committee formed out of the above society, consisting of a President,
two Vice-Presidents, one Secretary and two Assistant Secretaries and 25
elected members. The office-bearers are as follows :
President. Sir Promoda Charan Banerji, Kt.
458 CALENDAR 1928-29 IAPP. B..
Vice-Presidents The Hon'ble Mr. Justice Lai Copal Mukerjee
and
Dr. Saraju Kumar Mukerji, Rai Bahadur.
Secretary Babu Burga Charan Banerji.
Assistant Secretaries Baku Haridas Mukerji (deceased)
and
Babu Kumar Chandra Bhattacharya
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. B. N. Kar, M.A., B.SC., LL.B., Princi- Mathematics, XII and XI.
pal.
2. P. C. Ghose, B.A. officiating . . General English, XI ; English
text and General English, X.
'4. K. C. Mukherji, M.A., L.T. . . Mathematics and Logic, XII and
A. I.
4. B. N. Butt, M.A., B.T. . . English and General English, XII
toX.
6. B. T. Sen, M.A., B.L. .. .. History (Indian), XI [ and XI;
History (English), X and
IX.
6. B. N. Chakravarti, M,A. , . Sanskrit and Bengali, XII and
XI; Bengali, X and IX.
7. S. C. Bose, M.A. . . . . Economics and English History,
XII ; Economics, Xj ; Eng-
lish text and General
English, IX.
8. K. C. Sinha, M.A., L.T. . . . History (European), XII and XI ;
History (Indian), X ;
Genera 1 English and History
(English), XI.
9. Jogendra Nath Bhattacharji, B.A., Mathematics, X and IX.
L.T.
10. J. N. Bhattarcharji, B. A. . . Geography, X and IX.
11. A. T, Bhattacharji, B.A., C.T. . . Mathematics, X and IX.
12. T. B. Chakraberty, M.A., . . General English, X ; English
text and General English,.
IX.
13. M. N. Bagchi, B.A., L.T., . . General English, X.
14. K. C. Misra, B.A. . . . . Sanskrit and Hindi, X ; San-
skrit, IX.
15. Muhammad Amiruddin . . Persian and Urdu, X and IX.
16. Muhammad Umar . . . . Persian, X and IX.
17. K. B. Malviya, Madhyama . . Hindi, IX.
18. G. K. Bhattarcharji, B. sc. . . Science, X and IX.
19. G. P. Shastri, Madhyama .. Bengali, IX,
20. B. N. Bas, Inter. .. .. Bengali, IX.
21. S. Chatterji Normal Tra. .. Brawing, X and [X.
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 459*
UDAI PRATAP COLLEGE AND HEWETr KSHATTHIYA SCHOOL,
BENARES.
The Udai Pratap College and Hewett Kshattriya School was originally
a High School founded by Raja Udai Pratap Singh, o.s.i., of Bhinga, with
an endowment of 1QJ lakhs of rupees for the purpose of spreading English
education among the Kshattriya community and fostering the traditional
characteristics of the Kshattriya race. The endowment was generously
increased in July, 1921, by the Mabarani Sahiba, widow of the late found-
er, to 12| lakhs to provide for increase of salaries to the staff and ha*
recently been further increased by her to 18 J lakhs to raise the school to the
status of an Intermediate College.
The management of the institution is under the control of the Local-
Government assisted by a committee of managenunt composed of Gov-
ernment officials and Kshattriya Rajas and gentlemen.
His Excellency the Governor of the United Provinces and some Kshat-
triya Ruling Chiefs are visitors of the school.
The school was opened on the 1st of January, 1909, in the old school
building by Sir H. V. Lovett, K.C.S.I., l.o.s., the then Commissioner of
Benares. The foundation-stone of the new building was laid on the 25th
November, 1909, by His Honour Sir J. P. Hewett, G.O.S.I., K.O.I.E., the
then Lieutenant-Governor, United Provinces.
A new Science Laboratory has been constructed and equipped at a
cost of about Rs. 75,000.
The grounds cover more than 50 acres. The total value of land and
building exceeds 8 laklis of rup3es.
The staff consists of a European Principal and a Vice-Principal and
over 30 Assistants, most of whom are Kshattriyas and resident.
Foundation scholarships, aggregating Rs. 3,960, are awarded annually
on the combined results of the half-yearly and yearly examinations. One
Edward Kshattriya scholarship each year to the value of Rs. 96, also Bhinga
Raj scholarships aggregating Rs. 684, are now tenable only in this institution*.
All masters and pupils before their appointment are required to make
a declaration of loyalty to the British Government, and a promise to keep-
aloof from sedition, race hatred, rowdyism, and ribaldry. The aim and
object of this institution as set forth by its founder is not only to stimulate-
English education amongst his community, but also to turn out God-
fearing Kshattriyas, loyal to the King-Emperor, dutiful to their parents,,
and respectful towards their superiors.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. B. E. English, Principal, B.A. (^lan- English, XII.
tab.).
?. N. K. Ghosh, Vice-Principal, B.A., English, X.
17.R.3.A.
460
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. D.
3. Ganga Saran Bhargava, B.so., L.T.
4. Lantoo Singh, M.A., L.T.
5. Tara Prasad Singh, M.A.,LL.B.
6. Rama Krishna Vaishya, M. A., LL.B.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Rajwant Singh, M.C., LL.B.
Durga Singh, M.SO., LL.B.
Ohand Narain Hangal, M.SO.
Lalita Pd., B.A., L.T.
Ram Pratap Singh, C.T.
Ram Palat Singh, M.A.
Bimal Chandra ChaUorji, B.SO., L.T,,
LL.B.
Jag Mohan Jha, Kavyatirtha,
Entrance Examination, Allah-
abad, Special Vernacular.
Md. Azhar Ali, Fazil, Dabri Kamil
and H. S. Examination.
Bechan Singh, s. L. c., and Inter.
Grade Drawing, Bombay.
Nand Lai Singh, C.T. . .
Rama Lagan Singh, S.L.C.
Anant Ram Shastri, Sahityopadh-
Science, X and IX.
History, XII to IX.
English and Logic, XII and XL
Economics, XII and XI ; Mathe-
matics and English, IX.
Mathematics, XII to X.
Chemistry, XII and XL
Physics, XII and XL
English, X and IX.
Geography, X and IX.
Hindi, XII to IX.
Mathematics and English, IX.
Sanskrit, XII to X.
Persian, XII and XI ; Urdu, X
and IX.
Drawing, X and IX.
Hindi, X.
Hindi, IX.
Sanskrit, XII and IX.
Saiyed Ashghar Husain, Munshi Persian, X and IX.
Fazil and Mulla.
ST. ANDREW'S COLLEGE, GORAKHPUR.
The Intermediate classes were opened in 1901 whan recognition was
granted in the usual subjects including Science. Tli3re were 29 students
in the two classes in that year and they formed additional classes to the
Mission High School. In the year 1905 the numbers had rison to 35 and
recognition was granted in Physiology. During these early years the Rev.
R. J. Kennedy was Principal.
About the year 1915 it was decided to opan T>. A. classes for which a
new building was a necessity. It was made possible by a generous gift from
a friend of the College and was opened during the principalship of Dr. Gar-
field Williams in 1916 by Sir James Meston, the then Lieutenant-Governor
of the United Provinces. The Intermediate classes were moved to the
new building, but the teaching of Science subjects was dropped. Since
this date the numbers have steadily risen until to-day the numbers in these
classes total 170.
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
461
Another step forward in the history of the College was made possible
in 1925 by the liberal help from the local gentry. A new Science depart-
ment was built and recognition was granted by tha Intermediate Board
in Chemistry, Physics and Biology. This department like the Arts depart-
ment is well built, well equipped and well staffed.
The College is under the control of the Church Missionary Society. It
endeavours to meet the needs of higher education in the Gorakhpur divi-
sion. In examination results its record is remarkably good. It is well
situated in a convenient site with play-ground close at hand, but its hostel
accommodation is at present inadequate. It is hop^d to make good this
weakness as soon as possible.
INSTBUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Rev. A. C. Felly, M.A. (Cantab.),
Principal.
2. C. C. Chatterjee, M.A., B.SC.
3. H. C. Mukerjee, M.A. . .
4. N. N. Mundle, M.A. . .
5. R. N. Sanyal, M.A.
6. B. G. Nandi, B.A. }
7. A. Osmand, M.A. j ' *
8. K. C. Chattarjee, M.SC. . .
9. L. M. Kar, M.A.
10. Muhammad Asghar
11. J. W. Paul, M.SC.
12. B. N. Ghosh, M.SC.
13. M. 0. Varkey, M.SC. . .
14. Jokhu Lai Agarwala, B.SC.
English.
English, XII.
English, XI and XII.
History, XI and XII.
History and Economics, X[ and
XII.
Logic, XI and XII.
Mathematics, XI and XLf.
Sanskrit, XI and XII.
Persian, XI and XII.
Chemistry, XI and XIL.
Physics, XI and XI).
Biology, XI and XII.
Demonstrator, XI and XII.
LUCKNOW CHRISTIAN COLLEGE, LUCKNOW.
This institution was founded in the year 1866 in Inayat Bagh, and in the
1877 the school was removed to GoJaganj and a beautiful and strong
brick building known as the Centennial High School was built.
The College was founded in 1888 by the late Rev. Dr. B. H. Badley,
whose name the Science block bears. It gradually grew to ba a first grado
College affiliated to the B. A. and B. Sc. standards of the Allahabad Uni-
versity.
The School of Commerce founded in 1892 has had Government patron-
age and has given instruction in commercial subjects, especially in Short-
hand and Type- writing, to scores of Government officials deputed by Gov-
ernment, as well as to hundreds of other young men now in business life.
The College has the distinction of being the inventor of Urdu Shorthand.
462 CALENDAR 1928-29 (APP. DL
With the establishment of the Luekiuw University this College was
made an Interm9diat3 College in the year 1921. It has two other depart-
ments connected with it, the School of Commerce and the Centennial Middle
School both in separate buildings.
There is an enrolment of 751 in all the departments of this institution
during the current year. The Intermediate College has an enrolment of
498 this year, the largest enrolment being in the Science and Commercial
Diploma classes.
There are two hostels connected with the College, one for Christian
students called the Osman Caldwell Hostel with accommodation for 130*
students, and the other the C. L. Bare Hostel (named after an ex-Principal
of this College) with accommodation for 120 students.
The buildings arc most commodious and their hygienic condition is all
that could be wished. The Science Laboratories for Physics, Chemistry and,
Biology have been equipped at a cost of about Rs. 2,00,000.
There are six Americans and 24 Indians on the teaching staff. There
are 11 M. A.'s, four M.Sc.'s, seven B. A.'s, throe B.Sc.'s, one B. Com., one
commercial diploma-holder in addition to a highly-qualified Pandit, a Shastri
and a well -qualified assistant Maulvi. Of these three are trained teach-
ers.
There i.s a whole-time Physical Director, who is an American gentleman..
The students play cricket, foot- ball, hockey, basket-ball, volley-ball and
base-ball and tennis. Every student has to undergo an annual compulsory-
physical test.
There is satisfactory arrangement for the medical supervision of students.
Two qualified doctors have been appointed by the institution for this pur-
pose.
Thjre are two Literary Unions or Debating Clubs in the College which
meet every Saturday. There is also a Literary Union conducted by the
inmates of the C. L. Bare Hostel under the supsrvision of the head of the
department of English. Annual Oratorical Contests are held and prizes
are awarded to the best speakers among the students. Mushairas are also'
held annually. This year the College has started classes in Elocution and
in Music.
There is a good library connected with the College which has nearly
4,500 volumes on almost all profitable subjects, and it is well organized. It
is supplied with the leading English, American, and Indian newspapers,
and magazines.
The College not only tries to give intellectual training to its students,,
but it also endeavours to turn out loyal and law-abiding and useful citizens^
Their moral and religious welfare is carefully looked after. The Christian
students have thsir Students' Christian Association, Church Services and
Young People's Society which they regularly attend. There are organiza-
tions like the Friends Federation within the institution which encourage*
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHIHG STAFF
all students to tak3 an active part in social and community service. The -
development of true character is recognized by the College as its supreme
task.
The College has an " Old Boys' Association " and its members are
beginning to take an active interest in the welfare of their Alma Mater.
The College is under the control of the Methodist Episcopal Church.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Rev. J. B. Chitambar, M.A., D.D., English, XII.
(U.S.A.), Principal.
2. Rev. B. C. Harrington, M.A., B.Litt. Economics, XI.
(Columbia and Princeton),
U. S. A., Vice-Principal.
3. Tarak Nath Das, B.SC., (A.U.), F.O.S., Chemistry, XI and XII.
London.
4. Nalini Nath Bose, M.SC., (A.U.)
5. Rev. E. R. Tweedie, M.SC., (U.S.A.)
6. G. N. Bhakay, M.SC., (A.U.), LL.B.,
(L.U.).
7. M. L. Agarwala, B. Com., (L.U.),
F.R.E.9.
Mathematics, X, XI and XII.
Chemistry, XII.
Biology, XI and XII.
8. S. K. Zibbu, M.SC., (P. U.)
9. M. P. Nigam, M.SC., (L. U.), F.R.M.S.,
London.
10. S. K. Mukerji, B.SC., (A. U.)
11. N. C. Sircar, M. A., (C. U.)
12. Rameshwar Prasad Shastri, Sahi-
tyopadhyaya, Shastri, Kavya-
tirth and Matric.
13. Rev. S. L. Sheets, M.A., (Harvard),
s. T. B.
14. Rev. M. C. Biswas, B.A., L.T., (A. U.)
15. D. Loomba, M.A., (P. U.), LL.B.,
(L. U.) F.B.E.S.
16. Syed Mohammad Hussain, M.A.,
LL.B., (A. U.), Maulvi Fazil,
Mulla Fa/,il and Munshi Fazil.
17. Syed Akbar Husain, Maulvi Dabir-
i-Kamil and Matric.
18. Y. Shipstone, o. D. and Commer-
cial Normal Trained.
19. W. C. Thoburn, M.A., B.SC., (U. S.
A.)
Book-keeping, Business Methods,
Commercial English, XI and
XII.
Zoology, XI and XII.
Biology, XI and XII.
Science and Mathematics, IX
andX.
English and Logic, XI and XII.
Sanskrit, IX to XII and Hindi,,
IX and X.
English, IX to XII.
English, X and XII.
Economics, XI and XII.
History. IX and X and Persian,
XI and XII.
Urdu and Persian, IX and X.
and Arabic, XI.
Commerce, IX and X and.
Typewriting, XI and XII.
Physics, XI and XII.
464
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. D.
20. N. Joardar, B.A. (Hons.), M.A.
(C. U.\ B. Ed. (Pat.), F,O. P.
London).
21. Syel Huzur-ul -Hasan Zaidi, B.SC.
(L. U.)
22. Heny H. Lyons, B.A. (C. U.)
English, XI and XII.
Physics, XI and XII.
History Ancient and Modern, XI
and XII and English His-
tory, X.
Shorthand, XI and XII.
23. O. Joshua, Senior Cambridge, Gov-
ernment Technical Examina-
tion, Madras, F. I. p. s. (Lon-
don.)
24. K. W. Mathur, B.A. (P. U.), L.T. English, IX to XII.
(A. U.) and Vernacular Depart-
ment Examination in Hindi,
(A. U.).
25. C. K. Gon, M.SC. (L. U.)
26. N. K. Mundle, B.SC. (C.U.)
27. Adittya Sharma, B. com. (L. U.
28. J. S. Kankikoppa Patel, B.A. (L. U.)
29. C. M. Solomon, B.SC. (L. U.)
Physics, XI and XII.
Chemistry, XI and XII.
English, XI, XII C. D. ; Geo-
graphy, X ; Commercial Geo-
graphy, XII.
Tutorial Work in Economics,
XI and XII.
In Training.
SHIA INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, LUCKNOW.
In 1914-15 Nawab Sir Fateh AH Khan Qazilbash started a movement
for opaning a college for Shia bay.3 and invited the co-operation of his co-
religionist * in India. A fund called the Shia College Fund amounting to
rupees nin3 lakhs wn raised undar the leadership of the Nawab in course
of a few years. The Government also offered to contribute half the cost
of secular instruction in the College when started.
In July, 1920, the Shia Intermediate College was opened with two inter-
mediate classes and two years later the 9th and 10th classes of the Shia
School, which were opened in 1919, were transferred to the Intermediate
1 College. The College has thus four classes and prepares boys for the
Intermediate and High School Examinations of the Board. There is also
a Theological department which imparts instruction in Shia Theology.
Attendance at Theology lectures is compulsory for Shia boys, but optional
for others.
Without detriment to the main object of the College youths of other
denominations are freely admitted to the College.
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 465
The supreme control, direction and management of the Shia Inter-
mediate College and tin Shia School are vested in a Board of Trustees.
The executive administration and government of the Shia Intermediate
College and its hostel, subject to the general control and supervision of the
Board of Trustees, vest in a Managing Committee of twelve members.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. S. C. Sen, M.A. (Philosophy), B.A,, Logic, XT and XTI.
Honours in Phil. ; Scholar of English Text, XII.
Jena and Gottingen (Germany),
Principal.
2. C. C. Sarkar, M.A. (Mathematics), Mathematics, X to XII.
Vice-Principal.
3. Mirza Ashiq Husain, M.A. (Eng- English, XII and X!".
lish), L.T,, (Allahabad). Composition, IX.
4. S. C. Bhadury, M.A.D. (History) .. History, IX to XII.
5. S. Naqi Hosain Alley, M.A. (Eco- Economics, XII and XI.
nomics, (Alig.), LL.B. English, IX.
6. S. Bundey Hasan, B.A., L.T., LL.B. English Comp., XII.
English Text and Comp., X and
IX.
7. S. Akbar Ali, B.A., L.T., M.A. Pre- Geography and Math., X and IX.
vious.
8. M. S. Sadiq Husain, Munshi Fazil, Arabic, XII IX ; Urdu, IX.
Maulvi Fazil and Mulla Fazil.
9. Mohammad Ahmad, (Bekhud), M.A. Persian, XII IX ; Urdu, X.
(Persian).
10. M. Wajid Mirza, Final Examina- Drawing, X and I X.
tion of Arts, Lucknow, and Sir
J. J. School of Arts, Bombay.
KANYAKUBJ INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, LUCKNOW.
It was in the year 1918 that tho Kanyakubj community, at its con-
ference under the Presidentship of Pandit Gokaran Nath Misra, M.A., re-
solved to open a Kanyakubj English School. The resolution was given
effect to on July 3, 1918, when Raja Sahib Lieutenant Pandit Kali Charan
Misra of Bareilly laid the foundation of tho Kanyakubj school.
In July, 1920, permission was obtained for opening classes IX and X.
The High School began its work in July, 1921. On the opening of class
X in 1922 it was found desirable to raise it to the Intermediate standard,
for which a request was made to tho Director of Public Instruction.
On April 5, 1923, the Director of Public Instruction sanctioned the
raising of the High School to the Intermediate standard. Accordingly,
*n July, 1923, XI class was opened, and in July, 1924, XII class was added.
466
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. D.
>l. Bramha Swarupa, M.A., Eng. (Al-
lahabad), O.T. (Lahore), Princi-
pal.
2. Karuna Shanker Misra, B.A. (Oxon).
Vice-Principal.
- 3. Krishna Lall Shastri, M.A. (Math.)
Shastri (Punjab).
4. Satish Chandra Banerji, B.SO., L.T.
(Allahabad).
5. Nirmal Chandra Ghatterjee, M.A.,
English (Banare ).
6. Iqbal Bahadur Saksena, M.A., Eco-
nomics (Allahabad).
7. Sheo Prasad Shukla, M.A., Sanskrit
(Lucknow).
*8. Girwar Shanker Dixit, M.A., His-
tory (Allahabad), LL.B. (Alld.).
9. Changa Lall Malviya, M.A., Hindi
(Allahabad).
10. Ram Behari Panday, B.A., L.T. (Al-
lahabad).
11. Satya Prasanno Mukerjee, Govern-
ment School of Arts, Calcutta.
12. Khadim Husain, Maulvi Punjab,
Mulla-Fazil, (Allahabad).
13. Ujji Lall Awasthi, B.A., Allahabad,
L.T. (Benares).
14. Jaffer Husain, Dabir Kamil (Luck-
now).
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
English Prose, XI and XII.
English Poatry, and General Eng-
lish, XI; English, IX B; English
History, XI and XII.
Mathematics, X; Geometry, IX
B ; Mathematics, XI and XII.
Science, IX and X.
English Poetry and General
English, XII; English, X;
Unseen and Grammar, IX.
English, IX A; Economics, XI
and XII.
Sanskrit, IX, to XII.
History, IX ; Indian History,
X to XII.
Logic, XI and XII ; Hindi, XI
and XII.
Geography, IX and X.
Drawing, IX and X.
Persian, IX, XI and XII;
Urdu, IX.
Mathematics, IX.
Persian, X ; Urdu, X.
ST. GEORGE'S COLLEGE, MUSSOORIE.
Founded in 1853 on a site acquired by the Italian Capuchin Mission,
surrounded by an extensive and well- wooded estate, the College was staff-
ed by the Mission Fathers up to 1893, the last clerical Principal being the
learned and esteemed Father Duggan, who handed over to the Irish Bro-
thers of St. Patrick in January of that year.
The coming of the Brothers marks the beginning of a new era in the
'history of the College. Primarily intended as it was for the higher educa-
tion of the sons of better class Europeans in India the College, under the
A D. LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 467
Principalship of Rev. Brother Stapleton, took on the tone of the Homo
'public schools and intended its curriculum to meet the highest demands
of those who sought in India the benefits of a Home education without
the excessive expenditure and separation from their families that going
Home would entail.
At this time the College taught for the Provincial High, Middle and
Primary Examinations, the Entrance Examinations of the various public
departments, and of the Roorkee Engineering College. St. George's was
also affiliated to the University of Allahabad.
Under the Principalship of Rev. Bro. Haverty new buildings, including
-an entirely new wing, were erected, the north wing was raised and re-
roofed and many structural changes were made to render the edifice more
suitable for its purpose. Under Rev. Bro. Smyth the present extensive
playing flat literally hewn out of the rock was completed, and to his
successor, Rev. Bro. Dineen, the College owes the hospital, an airy and
comfortable building situated at a sufficient distance from the main block
. and staffed by a fully qualified medical attendant and a trained sister ; as
well as the commodious teachers' quarters for the lay staff. To the Rev.
Bro. Commins, who succeeded Bro. Dineen, is largely due the present
excellent tone in the matter of field sports of which the College is justly
proud.
Quite recently, under Rev. Bro. Doyle, St. George's has taken rank as a
'Secondary College, entitled to teach up to the Intermediate Arts. Owing
to his exertions, and at very considerable expense, two Science Halls have
been built and recognition is sought to enable the College to teach Inter-
mediate Science. The existing Intermediate Arts Class is flourishing.
Graduates in Arts and Science on the stafi are doing excellent work, and
the successes of the College in the Cambridge Locals entitle St. George's
,to the front rank among such institutions.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Rev. Bro. S. J. Commins Principal, Latin and French.
2. Rev. Bro. S. J. Darcy . . English.
3. M. Hanrahan, B.A. (Home) . . Ancient and Modern History.
4. J. N. Day, M.sc., L.T. . . Science and Mathematics.
5. Rulia Ram Aul, B.A. . . . . Mathematics.
ST. JOSEPHS, COLLEGE, NAINI TAL.
St. Joseph's College, Naini Tal, was founded in 1888 by the Capuchin
Fathers. It was handed over to the Irish Christian Brothers in 1892. Its
beginnings were small, whether with regard to buildings or numbers. New
wings were added in 1900, 1910 and 1920, and minor improvements were
made yearly. The numbers increased from 27 in 1893 to 302 in
468 CALENDAR 1928-29 fAPP, D.
The College has well-equiped laboratories and libraries. It ha^ four good
play-grounds and a swimming and rowing club.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
Rev. Bro. J. B. Connolly, Principal Mathematics.
Rev. Bro. E. B. Mockler, Vice- Physics.
Principal.
3. Rev. Bro. T. A. Murphy . . English and Mathematics.
4. 8. N. Roy, M.SC. . . . . Chemistry.
LA MARTIN I ERE COLLEGE, LUCKNOW.
The La Martini^re College is the result of an order in the will of Major-
General Claude Martin, H.E., i.c.s., a native of Lyons, in France, who died
in Lucknow in 1800 A.D. He leaves his house to be " A School or College
for teaching young men the English language and Christian religion."
Owing to legal difficulties 40 years passed before his will was carried
nto effect, but in that year the High Court of Calcutta passed an order
instituting the College. The College ran till 1857, when under Mr. Schilling
98 boys entered the Residency and played their part in that memorable
siege. On being relieved the College went to Benares, but returned to
Lucknow in 1859.
From that date onward it has occupied a prominent place in European
education in the north of India. Under the guidance of Mr. Sykcs, who
was Principal from 1880 to 1908, the College dominated the entrance to
Roorkee and the work of the school was made subservient to this ideal.
When Mr. Sykes retired the College was re-organised along the lines
suggested by Sir Harcourt Butler, the then Deputy Commissioner of Luck-
now. The College was extended in 1912 and laboratories and numerous
buildings for masters were added. Recognition as an Intermediate Col-
lege was obtained in 1923.
The College, which is housed in the fine old building of " Constantia,"
has an enrolment over 250, 200 of whom are in residence. The bulk of
the boys aim at the Cambridge School Certificate, and Intermediate class
caters for those who care to go up for higher education.
With the funds provided by the Founder the College maintains a very
strong staff of teachers, most of whom are trained, and in addition pro-
vides for a roll of foundationers 100 strong. Election to the Foundation
is made by the Governors, who include the Chief Judge of the Chief Court
of Oudh, the Commissioner, the General Commanding, the Deputy Commis-
sioner, and two co-opted members. The finances of the College are in the
hands of Trustees, who arc the European Members of the Executive Coun-
cil of His Excellency the Governor, United Provinces, and the Legal Re-
membrancer to Government, United Provinces.
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 469
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
.1. W, E. Andrews, M.A. (Oxon), F. R. European History, XII and XI ;
a. s., Principal. Empire History, X ; Latini
X ; Geography, XII.
2. J. G. Taylor, M.A. (Glasgow), B.SC. Science (Physics and Chemis-
try), XII and XI ; Chemis-
try, X and IX.
3. N. A. Holdaway, M.C., B.SC. (Lon- Geography, IX to XII ; Mathe-
don), F. R. G. s. matics, IX to XII.
4. R. A. Cowling, M.A. (Sheffield) . . English, IX to XII.
5. W. C. James, B.A.L.T. (Allahabad) Mathematics, IX.
6. J. H. Clay, B.A., L.T. (Madras) . . Latin, IX.
7. G. P. Banerji, M.Sc. (Allahabad) . . Science (Physics), IX and De-
monstrator, IX and X.
8. T. De Gruyther, C.T. (Sanawar), Drawing, X and IX.
A. 0. P. (London^.
9. G. L. Cummings, B.A. (Allahabad), Indian History, XI and XII ;
L.T. History, IX.
10. Maulvi Abdul Majid .. Urdu, X and IX.
CROSTHWAITE GIRLS' INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE,
ALLAHABAD.
This institution was started in the year 1894, under the auspices of
the Association for the Higher Education of Women in the United Provinces
of Agra and Oudh a body constituted at the suggestion of the late Sir
Charles Crosthwaite, K.C.S.I., the then Lieutenant-Governor of the United
Provinces. A primary school was first established in Lucknow and was-
given the name of the Crosthwaite School. The school could not prosper in
Lucknow, and in 1898 was removed to Allahabad, where it was located
for some time in muhalla Mahajani Tola. In 1908 the present site, cota-
prising about 40 bighas of land, was obtained for it. The school which
was started only with the primary classes grew into a Vernacular Middle
School. In the year 1910 it was converted into an English Middle School,
and in 1915 into a High School. The first group of students oame out suc-
cessfully in the Matriculation Examination of the Allahabad University in
1918. Classes for preparing candidates for the Intermediate Examination
were opened in 1919, and the school developed into a second grade college
with the result that the first group appeared at that examination in 1921.
When the Board of High School and Intermediate Education was con-
stituted the institution was recognized by that body and permitted to-
teach almost all the important subjects excepting Science for both the In-
termediate and High School Examinations. Besides these Intermediate*
classes, for the training of women teachers were also added in July, 1921.
30
470
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. D.
A new hostel, " Lady Sunder Lai Hostel," was completed in the year
1920 at a cost of Es. 80,000 and provides accommodation for Hindu, Mu-
hammadan, and Christian pupils, 96 in number. It has been recognized
by the Allahabad University for the residence of the girls studying for the
various University Examinations. The tuitional staff consists of a Lady
Principal assisted by 17 other teachers of whom nine are graduates and
nine under-graduates. The number of trained teachers in the staff is
.eight.
INSTBUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Miss C. R. Poovaiah, B.A.
2. Miss S. Duara, M.A., B.T.
3. Miss M. S. Rawani, B.A., B.T.
4. Miss S. Uthup, M.A., L.T.
5. Miss L. K. Rao, B.A.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Miss L. D. Pathak, B.A.
Miss B. Ghosh, M.A.
Miss C. Tripathi, M.A. . .
Miss L. P. Das, B.A. . .
Miss 0. Noble, Special Trained in
Drawing.
11. Miss S. Basu, Expert in Needle-
work.
Mrs. A. Dalai, Expert in Embroid-
ery.
Mrs. Patwardhan, Expert in Music
12.
13.
English, XII to X.
Child-Study, XI and XII.
Geography, IX and X ; Logic,
XI and XII ; Geometrical
Drawing, X.
Economics, XI and XII ; History,
X to XII; General English
XI and XII.
Domestic Science, IX to XII;
English, IX and X.
English, X to XII.
Mathematics, X to XII ; Sans-
krit, IX to XII.
Hindi, IX to XII.
Bengali, X to XII; Sanskrit,
IX and X.
Drawing, IX and X; Geomet-
rical Drawing, IX and X.
Sewing, IX and X.
Embroidery work, X to Xtt.
Music, IX to XL
ISABELLA THOBURN COLLEGE, LUCKNOW.
The Isabella Thoburn College received its charter in 1886 and was
affiliated to the Allahabad University. It grew out of the Lai Bagh School
which had been opened in 1870 and was the natural outgrowth of an in-
creasing demand for the education of women in the higher classes. The
Oollege continued its affiliation with the Allahabad University presenting
candidates for the Intermediate Examination and for the B.A. The
College and the School were administered in conjunction until the year 1919
when a separate Principal was provided for the School, and the College ad-
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 471
ministration became wholly distinct. As the number increased the accom-
modation at Lai Bagh became insufficient, and in 1921 the new site was
procured just outside the municipal limits of Lucknow and new buildings
were erected. When the Lucknow University was organized, there being
no women's department provided in the University scheme, Isabella
Thoburn College was permitted to retain its B.A. classes and now serves
the purpose of a women's college for the University. The old affiliation
with the Allahabad University was discontinued from the time of the
organization of the Lucknow University.
The College maintains the following departments :
The Intermediate (-classes XI and XII).
The University B.A., (B.Sc.).
The Training Department (E. T. C.).
The Education department for the training of Graduates (Diploma
in Teaching, Lueknow University).
The present total enrolment is 131.
The College compound is known as Chand Bagh. Nicholas Hall con-
tains class rooms, laboratories, Hbrary and offices. There are two hostels,
a. common dining-room and a hospital, while the staff live in the same com-
pound. Each hostel is in charge of two American teachers who act ay
wardens. The buildings are all airy -and open, solidly constructed, and are
ih' re-proof . The College maintains its own water system and sewage system,
but is lighted with electricity from the city supply.
The examination results have always been good, but this docs not indi-
.caio that all efforts are concentrated on academic work. Various social
and helpful activities are carried on both within and without the College
by the students and teachers. The aim is to train young women for useful
Jiving and helpful service in and for India.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Miss M. Shannon, M.A., Principal.
2. Munshi Baij Nath Figar . . Persian, XII.
3. Miss Shunity Ghosh, B.ac. . . Physics, XI and XII ; Dynamics,
XII.
4. Miss Henrietta Inglis, M. A. ., Ancient History, XII; Mathe-
matics, XI and XII.
5. Miss Ruth Manchester, M.A. . . European History, XII.
6. Miss Sadie Johnson, B.A. . . English, XII.
7. Miss Roxana Oldroyd, M.SC. . . Biology, XL
8. Miss Ethel Prem Singh, B.SC.' . . Physiology and Hygiene, XI.
9. Mr. S. Roy, M,SC. ... . . Organic Chemistry, XI and XII.
AO. Mr. Sri Ram Srivastava, M.A, .. Sanskrit and Indian History,
XII.
II. Miss Thillayampalam, rh.. .- Biology, XII.
472 CALENDAB 1928-29 [APP. m
12. Miss Ivy Thomas, B.A., D.T. . . Economics, XI and XII,
13. Miss Butchamma Venkata Ratnam, Child-Study, XII.
M.A.
14. Miss Shelomith Vincent, M.A. . . European History, XI and XII.
15. Miss Margaret Wallace, M.A. . . Chemistry, XII.
16. Miss Laura Williams, M.A. . . English, XI.
17. Miss Shanti Dey, M.A., B.T. . . Indian History, XL
THEOSOPHICAL NATIONAL GIRLS' SCHOOL AND WOMEN'S
COLLEGE, BENARES.
The Theosophical National Girls' School and College for women was
established in 1913 by Dr. Annie Besant and Miss F. Arundale with the
idea of imparting to Indian girls an education which, while preserving air
that is best and highest in the ancient ideal of womanhood, would endea-
vour to equip the Indian girls for the changed life of to-day. The insti-
tution, which for many years was carried on entirely by private effort,,
has now won recognition and support from Government, and is a recognized
College preparing students for the examinations of the Board of High
School and Intermediate Education ; it also prepares candidates appearing
privately for the B.A. Degree examination of the Benares Hindu Univer-
sity.
The School and College buildings are situated in the extensive grounds
adjoining the premises of the Indian section of the Theosophical Society,
thus securing the proper conditions for the effective carrying on of the work
of the institution. There are large play-grounds, where the girls can play
about in sufficient privacy and seclusion.
The staff consists of a number of Indian ladies drawn from the best
families who have devoted their lives to the service of their fellow- women.
They bring to the work a spirit of consecration, and by living in close
association with them the pupils will be able to imbibe the spirit of Hindu
culture, which is so vital for the regeneration of India. There is also on
the staff a number of European ladies who have come to India with the de-
sire to help the country, who are in thorough sympathy with Indian
culture and are gladly co-operating with the Principal in the work of lifting
the womanhood of India to its proper position in the life of the nation.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Mrs. B. Padmabai S. Rao, B.A. (Al-
lahabad), Principal.
2. Miss H. Veale, B.A. (London), English, Mathematics and Erg -
Vice-Principal, lish Histcry-
3. Miss K. K. Sharga, M.A. (B.H.U.) Hindi and Economics.
4. Miss S. Duara, M.A., L.T. Indian and Erglfsh History.
APP. D,] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 473
5. Miss K. Desai, M.A. (Philosophy) . . Logic, Child-Study and General
English.
6. Mr. A- S. Patwardhan, M.A., Hony. Economics and History.
7. Miss A. Wagh, B.A. . . . . English and Geography.
8. Miss Suniti Kaira, B.A. . . English, English History and
Hindi.
9. Miss N. Kisch (Drawing) T. T. II L Arts and Drawing.
1st class, L.U.C. Ablett Teacher,
Artist, R.D.S.
10. Miss K. Veale, Experienced Teacher English and Geography.
11. Mr. Jagdish Narain Upadhya, M.A. Hindi.
(Hindi).
12. Mr. T. A- Bhandarkar, Intermediate Sanskrit.
and Acharya.
13. Mrs. Biraj Lakshmi, Intermediate Mathematics and Sanskrit.
14. Miss Annapurna Khanna, School- Hindi.
Leaving.
15. Pt. Laxman Vinayak Dandvak, Music.
Music.
16. Dr. R. V. Phausalkar, L.M.S. (Bom.) Physiology, Hygiene, etc.
17. Mrs. S- Sharga, Needle- work . . Needle- work.
18. Syed Fasahatullah, Dip, Fine Art, Drawing.
Lucknow.
GOVERNMENT INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, MORADABAD.
The Government School, Moradabad, was established sumo jseven years
after the mutiny.
It remained under Government control up to 1885, and afterwards it
was made over to the District Board and it remained under the control
of the Board up to June, 1910.
From July, 1910, it again became a Government institution.
In July, 1922, its status was raised to that of an Intermediate College.
The Moradabad citizens and public made a contribution of about a
lakh of rupees in cash and property. The cash was deposited with the
Treasurer, Charitable Endowments, and the property under the control of the
Collector.
The income of the Moradabad High School Endowment is Rs. 4,000 a
year.
A hostel with accommodation for 105 boarders is attached to the iai
fititution.
474
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. D,
JO.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
Kishan Chand, B.A., s.o. t Principal
Jitendra Nath Banerji, M.A., C.T.,
Vice-Principal.
Niranjan Lai Tayal, M.A., B.SC.
Umed Ali, M.SC.
Arun Prakash Banerji, M.A.
Lalit. Mohan Pramanick, M.SC., L.T.
Jagan Prasad Gupta, B.A., O.T.
Jai Dutt Sodha, M.A., B.SC., L.T. . ^
Mool Chand Sharma, B.A., L.T.
Sri Kam Mathur, B.A., L.T.
Jawahar Lai Gupta, B.A., L.T.
Hari Mohan, B.A., L.T.
Zahir Ahsan, B.A., C.T.
Vishnu Das Chaturvedi
Riasat AH Khan, B.A., L.T.
Tajendra Chandra Roy, B.SC., L.T.
Bhagat Singh Khalsa (has passed
the Highest examination of Mayo
School of Arts, Lahore and Senior
Drawing Masters' Certificate Ex-
amination).
Fida Husain Khan, Mimshi Fazil,
Maulvi Fazil, Matric (Punjab).
Gopal Dat Pant, Sahityacharya,
Shastri and Matric.
Lalmani Sharma, Visharad (Punjab)
Mushtaq Ahmad, Munshi Fazil and
Matric. (Punjab).
English, X to XII.
English, XI and XII; Logic,
XII,
Mathematics, XI and XII.
Chemistry, XI and XII ; Science,
IX.
History, X to XII.
Physics, X to XII.
English and Mathematics, IX.
Mathematics, IX and X.
Mathematics, IX and X ; Eng-
lish, IX.
English, X.
History, IX.
Geography, IX and X ; Logic,.
XI.
English, X.
English, XI; History, IX.
History, IX and X.
Science, X.
Drawing, IX and X.
Persian and Arabic, XI and XII ;
Urdu, X.
Hindi, IX; Sanskrit, XI and
XII.
Sanskrit and Hindi, X.
Persian and Urdu, X.
GOVERNMENT INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, ALLAHABAD.
The old Government High School was raised to the standard of an
Intermediate College in 1922. Mr. O. J. Gardener, M.A., I.B.S., was the
first Principal. Provision was made for the teaching of the following sub-
jects in the Intermediate classes : History, Logic, Sanskrit, Persian,
Arabic, Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry. Biology was introduced in
1923. As the proposed College building has not yet been constructed the
Intermediate classes at present meet in the building which was meant for
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 475
the junior classes of the old Government High School. There are two
sections each in classes IX to XII with a total enrolment of 248 students.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. VV. G. P. Wall, M.SC., I.E.S., Princi- On spacial duty.
pal.
R. N. Kaul, M.A., L.T., 0%. History, XE and XL
Principal.
2. Qazi Khurshed Ahmai, M.sc. (Alia- Mathematics, XII to X.
habad), Vice-Principal.
3. S. D. Malaviya, M.SC. (Allahabad) Chemistry, XII to X.
4. M. H. Naqvi, M.A. (Allahabad) . . H<st:>ry and Logic, XII and XL
5. R. K. Wahal, M.SC. (Allahabad) . . Physics, XIE to X.
6. P. N. Bhattacharya, M.A. (Ailaha- English, XI L an:l XL
bad).
7. M. P. Chattsrji, M.SC., L.T. (Ailaha- Biology, XII and XL
bad).
8. R. A. Khan, M.A. (Allahabad) .. Economics, XE; English, XC
ani XL
9. G. C. C'laudhari, M.\. L.T. (Ailaha- English, X anl XI.
bad).
30. P. Clement, M.A., L.T. (Allahabad), Geography, X and IX; English*
(on transfer to the Training IX.
College, Agra*.
Manjari Gopal Banerji, Offg. .. Payaics, Xtl, XI and IX.
11. H. Drummond, B.A., L.T. (Ailaha- History, IX and X.
bad).
1-2. P. K. BanerjL B.A., L.T. (Allahabad) English, X and IX.
13. Bishambher Datt, B.A., L.T. (Alia- Mathematics, X and IX ; Eng-
habad)' lish, X.
14. D. P. Mushran, B.A., L.T. (Ailaha- English, IX.
bad).
15. Nisar Ahmad,, B.A., L.T. (Allahabad) English and History,, X
and IX.
16. L. P. Srivastava, B.A., L.T. (AUaha- Geography, X and IX.
batf).
17. S. B. L. Varma, B.A., L.T. (Ailaha- Mathematics, X and IX.
bad).
18. K. N. Sukul, TJ.SC., L.T. (Allahabad) Chemfairy, XIC, XI and IX.
19. H. P. Mathur, Matric., (Holder of Drawing, X and IX.
diploma and medal in photo
mechanics, Thomason Engineer-
ing College, Roorkce.)
476 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D:
20. L. M, Chatterji, s.t.c., M.T.C. (Alia- Manual Training, X and IX
habad).
21. H. K. Kaul, Shastri (Calcutta) . . Sanskrit, XII and XI ; Hindi,
IX.
22. Nand Prasad Shastri, (Madhyama Hindi, IX.
Parikchha and three parts of
Acharya.)
23. Durga Datt feharma (f aur parts of Sanskrit, IX.
Acharya, Sanskrit Collage, Ben-
arcs.)
24. Krishna Nand Misra, (Madhyama Sanskrit, X.
Parikchha and three parts of
Acharya.)
25. Mohd. Isa, Inter., c. T. (Allaha- Arabic, XII ; Persian, XI.
bad).
26. Jalaluddin Ahmad Jafri . . Persian, XII and XI ; Arabic,
XI ; and Urdu, X.
27. Abdul Hafiz .. .. Arabic, X; Persian, IX; and
Urdu, IX.
28. Siraiul Haq, Inter. (Allahabad), Persian, X Arabic, IX.
Mulla Fazil Examination.
GOVERNMENT INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, FTAWAH
The beginnings of the institution were laid as far back as 1856, when
Mr. A. O Hums, the then Collector, started a school in the old city. The
outbreak of the Mutiny retarded its progress for a time but after the storm
was over the zeal and earnestness of the founder enlisted the sympathy of
a large section of the local gentrv and the school was soon in a flourishing
condition. The ftilla School, under the name of the Hume High School,
continued to exist with varying fortune, till with a change in the Dolicv of
Government the institution was turned into a Government H'gb School.
After about a decade the old building and the Library were acquired by the
authorities of the Sanatan Dharam High School, and the Government High
School was located in a new building, built according to the approved model
near the railway station. The school was raised to the status of an Inter-
mediate .College in 1922, under the management and control of the Gov-
ernment.
The rjates of fees, etc., are the same as in other Government Intermediate
Colleges.
In addition to the scholarships granted by the Government there are
a few local scholarships and prizes detailed as follows :
1. S. C. PATHAK SCHOLARSHIPS.
The income received from the endowment is expended in awarding
annually two scholarships of the value of Rs. 4 per mensem eaoh, and one
APF. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
of the value of Rs. 6 pier mensem tenable for one year by students under 18
years of age of classes VIII to X, preference being triven to these ^ho are
poor and bona fide residents of the town or the district.
?, HUME SCHOLARSHIPS.
The income derived from the endowment, invested by Mr. A. (). Hume,
is spent on four scholarships of the value of Rs. 6 each. Two of the
scholarships are awarded for proficiency in English and t\\o for prcfickncy
in Mathematics to scholars who are below 14 years of age.
3. DISTRICT BOARD SCHOLARHIPS.
There are four scholarships of^theValue of Rs. 2 each to be awarded to
the most eligible boarders, who are the residents of the district.
4. TONK PRIZE.
A sum of Rs. 40, the interest yielded by the endowment of the Nawab
of Tonk is divided between the two best students in Mathematics in
classes IX and X.
5. DEMELLO PRIZE.
A prize, of Rs. 40 is awarded annually to the best student cf class X.
There are three hostels attached to the College with accommodation
for about 130 scholars. One of the hostels is reserved for a particular class
of Rajputs, who live rent-free and enjoy other concessions as well.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Anil Nath Ghosh, M.sO., Principal Chemistry Organic, XII.
2. Sudhir Kumar Ghosh, M.SO., Vice- Physics, XII to X.
Principal.
3. Jagadish Prasanna Mukerji, M.SC., Mathematics, XII and XI.
L.T.
4. Mohd. Bashirul Haq Haqqi, M.A., English, XII and XI ; Logic, XI.
L.T.
5. Abani Kumar Sanyal, M.SC. . . Chemistry, XII to X (Inor-
ganic).
6. Mirza Najmul Husain, M.A. . . History, XII and XI ; English,
XI ; and Logic, XII.
7. Behari Jas, M.A., O.T. . . , . History, XA ; English and His-
tory, IXA.
8. Lakshmi Naraiii Varma, JJ.A., CUT.
9. Krishna Nand Josh', B.A., L.T.
10. Lakshmi Naraiii Saksena, B.SC., . . Mathematics, X ; Physics, IX.*
L.T.
11. Chandra Bhushan Awasthi, B.A., Geography, XB ; English and
L - T - Geography, 1XB.
478 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D.
12. Gaya Prasad Awasthi, B.SC., L.T. Chemistry, IX.
13. Jawahar Lai Dalela, Inter., C.T. . . Mathematics, IX.
14. Ram 8ahai Misra (Acharya 5 parts.) Sanskrit, XII to IX,
15. Muhammad Husain, Inter. Munshi Persian, XII to IX.
Fazil and Maulvi Fazil, Trained.
16. Xarain Dutt Tripathi Shastri, 3 Hindi, XB and IXB.
parts of Sahitya (Acharya) Kab-
yatirtha and Bishariad.
17. Mata Din Tripathi, 1st year Sahitya Hindi, XA and IXA.
Acharya, Madhyama Pariksha.
18. Mahesh Chand . . . . Drawing, IX.
19. Rajendra Prasad Srivastav (Passed Drawing, X.
Industrial Apprentice and Draw-
ing class Examination).
20. Mohd. Hasan, Inter., V.T.C., Munshi Urdu, X and IX.
Fazil and High Proficiency in
Urdu.
GOVERNMENT INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, JHANSI.
The College was opened in the year 1921 as a result of the recommen-
dations of the Sadler Commission on the Calcutta University. It is situ-
ated on the Gwalior Road at a distance of a mile and-a-half from the heart
of the city in an op9n place. The huilding consists of two big blocks with
quadrangles in the middle. These blocks are joined to each other by the
hall. One of these blocks was constructed for the junior classes III to VII [,.
while the other for classes IX to XII the new type of Intermediate
College. The two blocks have sufficient accommodation in them for open-
ng double sections in all the classes. A little to the west of the Collegei
building is a workshop for the Manual Training Classes which unfortunately
could not so far be started for want of funds.
The College has within its compound two hostels with quarters for
the superintendents in each, one for the junior and the other for the senior
students with a total accommodation of ninety boarders in both. There
are extensive play- grounds although not yet properly laid out. The whole
building was constructed at a cost of Us. 5,05,000.
The College is wholly maintained byGovernment.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Anil Nath Ghosh, M.sc. (Allahabad) Science (Chemistry), IX and X.
Offg. Principal.
2. Mirza Abdul Hai Beg, M.A. (AUaha- English, XII, XI and XB,
bad). Offg. Vice-Principal.
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 479
3. Vithal Jaikrishna Kale, M.A., L. T. Mathematics, XII to X.
(Allahabad).
4. Ramesh Chandra Banerji, M.sc. Chemistry, XII to, IX.
(Allahabad). F.S.C. (London).
5. Iftikhar Husmin, M.A., LL.B. (Alia- History, XII and XI ; English
habad). Translation and Composition,
IXB.
6. Chandra Datta Tiwari, M.SC., L.T. Physics, XII to X.
(Allahabad).
7. Abdul Baqa, B.A., L.T. (Allahabad) .English Text and Grammar,,
IXB ; English Translation and
Composition, XB ; Geography r
X and IX.
8. Hari Pado Roy, B.A., L.T. (Banares) Logic, XII and XI.
9. Monindra Kumar Sanyal, B.A., L.T. English, X A ; and History, X
(Allahabad). and IXA.
10. Har Narayan Lai, B.SC., L.T. (Alia- Mathematics, XB and Science,.
habad). IX.
11. Nihal Chandra Mathur, B.SC., L.T. Mathematics, IX.
(Allahabad).
12. Babu Shastri Bhave, Acharya Sanskrit, XII to X. and Hindi, X^
5 pts. in Dharma Shastra, 1 pt.
in Sahitya and 1 pt. in Vya-
karana of B.S.C.E., Trained as
Language Teacher.
13. Mirza Ali Ahmad, Maulvi and Mun- Persian XII, XI and IX.
shi of the Punjab, Mulla of Al-
lahabad, Trained at T. C., Luck-
now.,
14. Ayodhya Prashad, B.A. (Allahabad) English, IXA and History, IXB..
c. T. (Agra.)
15. Venkat Rao Gopal Telang, III Drawing, X and IX.
Standard Mayo School of Arts,
Lahore.
16. Kedar Nath Tripathi, Madhyama Hindi, IX and X.
in Vyakarana and Acharya in 5
par^s of Benares.
17. Abdul Lateef Khan, Munshi Fazil Urdu, XII to X, and Persian, X.
(Punjab), Honours in Persian.
18. Prem Vallabh Pant, Acharya in Hindi, XII, XI and IX; Sans-
Sahitya of Benares, Shastri of krit, IX.
the Punjab, Vyakarana Tirth of
Calcutta, Ratna Degree of Ba-
roda, Madhya in Nyaya of .Cal-
4SO CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D
cutta, V. F. E., of U. P. and In-
termediate (English) of U. P.
Board.
19. Riaz Ali Fazil (Allahabad) .. Urdu, IX.
QUEEN'S INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, BENARES.
The Queen's College, Benares, is now an Intermediate College affiliat-
ed to the Board of High School and Intermediate Education, United Prov-
inces. But before 1922 it was a first grade College affiliated to the Allaha-
bad University in Arts and Science. It is maintained by Government, and
is under the control of the Education department. The tuition fees vary
from Rs. 6-8-0 to Re. 1. Government scholarships are awarded according
to the results of the Board's examinations. There are also local scholar-
ships, amounting to about Rs. 100 per mensem.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. B. Sanjiva Rao, B.A. (Cantab), English Text, XI B ; General Eng-
Principal. lish, XII.
2. Chandi Prasad, M.A. (Mathema- Physics, XI and XII.
tics), B.SC. (Allahabad).
3. Ali Ameer, B.A., 1st Class, Gold English Text, XI, Arts, XII ;
Medallist of the Allahabad Uni- Arts and Sc'ence, and Logic,
versity. M.A. (Eng.), LL.B. (Al- XII.
lahabad).
4. Beni Madho Singh, M.A. (Mathe- Mathematics, X to XII.
matics, 1st Class, (Benares), B.SC.
(Allahabad).
-5. Shantimoy Banerji, M.A., L.T. (Al- History, XI and XII ; Logic, XI,
lahabad). and General English, XII
Arts (Section B).
6. Panna Lai Loiwal, M.SC. (Zoology) Biology, XI and XII.
(Allahabad).
7. Moti Lai Jaini, M.A. (Economics), Economics, XI and XII ; Eng-
0. T. (Lucknow). lish Text, XB ; General Eng-
lish, XII Arts (Section A).
8. Amba Dutta Chaudhri, M.SC. (Al- Chemistry, XI and XII.
lahabad).
9. M. M. Pandit Lakshman Shaatri Sanskrit, IX to XII.
Tailung (Sahityacharya, Bena-
res).
10. Hari Mangal Misra, M.A. (Sans- Hindi, IX, to XII.
krit), o. T. (Allahabad).
11. Himayutul Hasan, M.A. (Previous) Persian and Arabic, XI and XII.
in Persian, B.A' (Allahabad).
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 481
12. N. D. Banerji, B.sc., L.T. (Allah- Science, IX and X.
abad).
13. Bindesri Lai, B.A., L.T. (Allahabad) English translation and Dicta-
tion, etc., XB ; Dictation etc.,
IXA ; Mathematics, IX.
14. Manni Lai, M.A., Pre. Sans., B.A., General English, XA; English
L.T. (Allahabad). Text, IXB ; Geography, IX
andX.
15. P. Banerji, B.A., L.T. (Allahabad).. English Text, X; General Eng-
lish, IXB and XIB ; History ,
X.
16. G. L. Sinha, B.SC., L.T. (Allahabad) Practical Science, XI and XII.
17. S. C. Kapoor, M.A., L.T. (Allahabad) General English, XI A ; History,
IX and X.
18. D. N. Tripathi, B.A., L.T. (Allah- General English, IXA.
abad).
19. A. H. Siddiqi, Mulla and Fazil (Al- Persian and Urdu, IX and X,
lahabad).
20. Nanak Chand, Final Drawing Mas- Drawing, IX and X.
tership Ex., Indian Arts School
(Calcutta).
GOVERNMENT INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, ALMORA.
The College was started in July, 1921, by adding Intermediate classes
to the Government High School. A scheme for building an Intermediat
College on a new site fell through for want of funds, and the College is still
housed in the buildings of the Government High School . It is hoped that a
new Junior school will be begun next year. The following subjects are
taught :
Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry, Sanskrit, Persian, Arabic, History,
Logic and Economics.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
L Naipal Singh, B.A. (Oxon.), Principal English History, XI ; Eng. Com.,
XII ; Eng. Rapid Reading, XA
and X B.
2. Prakash Chandra Mukerji, M.sc. Chemistry, XI and XII ; English
(Allahabad), Vice-Principal. Dictation, XB.
3. Padma Dat Pant, M.SC. (Allahabad) Physics, XI and XII ; Science, X .
4. Kunwar Krishna Sukhia, M.A., LL.B., English Text, XII, XI and XB ;
L.T. (Allahabad). Eng. Translation, XII ; Eng-
lish Unseen, XII.
482
CALENDAB 1928-29
[APP. D
5. Sham Bahadur Mathur, M.A. (Luck-
now).
<6. Mukhatar Husain Naqavi, M.A.,
L.T. (Allahabad).
7. Ram Narayan Gupta, M.A. (Allah-
abad).
8. Hari Ram Tripathi, B.A., L.T. (Al-
lahabad^.
9. Hari Ram Joshi, B.A., L.T. (Allah-
abad).
10. Govind Ballabh Pandc, M.A., L.T.
(Allahabad).
11. Lakshmi Bat Pant, H.A., L.T. (Al-
lahabad).
12. Harish Chandra Pant, B.SC.. L.T.
(Allahabad).
13. Lakshmi Dat Tiwari, M.A., L.T. (Al-
lahabad).
14. Manorath Pancle, Jyotishacharya
(Benares), Kavya Tirtha (Cal-
cutta), Matric.
15. Ghananand Bhatt, Matric., C.T.,
Teacher's Senior Examination
in Drawing (Lahore).
16. Ram Lai Varma, Lithographic Exa-
mination (Lahore), Teacher's Exa-
mination (Calcutta).
17. Vishnu Dat, Madyama ; 4th year
of Sahitya Acharya (Benares),
Honours in Sanskrit (Punjab),
Intermediate in English (Pun-
jab).
18. Mohammad Iftikhar, Fazil (Allah-
abad).
Mathematics, XU, XI and XB.
History, XII and XA ; In. Hist.,
XI ; Eng. Unseen, 1KB. ; Eng.
Rapid Reading, IXA; Eng-
lish Composition, XI.
Economics, XII and XI ; English
Unseen, IXA ; Eng. Text, 1XA
English Translation, XI;
English Dictation, XA and
IXA; Eng. Grammar, IXA.
English Text, Rapid Reading,
IXB; Eng. Translation, Com-
position and Unseen, XA.
Mathematics and English Text,
XA ; Eng. Translation, [X.
Logic, XII and XI; En<4. Com.,
IXA and IXB; Eng. Trans-
lation and Dictation, : XB ;
Historv, Xtt.
English Composition, I X A ;
Science Practieal, IX.
Mathematics, IXA and IXB;
Science, IX ; So. Practical, X.
History, IXA and IXB ; Eng-
lish Translation, Comi. and
Unseen, XB.
Sanskrit, XL and XII.
Drawing, XA and XB.
Drawing, IX.
Hindi, IXA and I XB ; Sans-
krit, IX.
Persian, XI and XII; Urdu, X*
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
483
19. Mohammad Yahya Abidi, Fazil Urdu, IX.
(Allahabad).
30. Lokmani Joshi, Khand Acharya Sanskrit, X ; Hindi, XA and
(Sahitya), Advanced Hindi. XB.
GOVERNMENT JUBILEE INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, LUCKNOW.
This institution was started as an aided High School in 1887 on the
occasion of the first Jubilee of the late Queen Victoria. It was taken over
by Government on April 1, 1908, and in July, 1922, was raised to the
status of an Intermediate College. The options taught in the High sec-
tion are the three Indian classical languages, Science, Drawing and Com-
merce, while in the Intermediate section the College is recognized in Mathe-
matics, Chemistry, Physics, Biology, History, Logic, the three Indian
classical languages, Economics, Urdu and Hindi.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Rai Sahib Pandit Kali Prasad, B.A.,
Principal.
2. Parmeshwar Dyal, M.SC. (Allah-
abad), F.P.S. (London), Vice-
Principal.
3. B. L. Agarwala, M.A., C.T., LL.B.
(Allahabad), M.R.A.S., M.K.H.S.,
M.R.E.S.
4. Khawaja Athar Husain, M.A., Eng-
lish (Allahabad), M.A. Prev. in
Philosophy (Allahabad).
6. P. K. Banerji, M,A. (Lucknow) . .
6. Sachchldanand Mittra, M.SC. (Al-
lahabad).
7. Narottam Lai, M.SC. (Lucknow)..
8. B. N. Tandon, M.SC., L.T. (Allah-
abad).
9. Ali Abbas Husaini, M.A., L.T. (Al-
lahabad).
1(X J. V. Singh, M.A., L.T. (Allahabad)
11. J. N. Chowdhry, M.A., B.Sc., L.T...
English Grammar, XII, Arts and
Science, XI, Arts and Science,
XA and XB,
Physics, XI and XII; Practical
Science, X.
Modern History, X J I and XI ;
Ancient History, Xll.
Logic, XII Arts ; English, XII
Arts and Science.
Economics, XI Aifr; XII,
Arts ; Logic, XI Arts.
Mathematics, XI Arts and
Science and XII Arts and
Science, XA and B.
Biology, XI and XII.
Chemistry, XI and XII ;
Practical Scienc* , IX.
History, XA, IXA and B ; Eng-
lish, IXB and XI Science.
Geography, IXA and B, XA and
B ; English, XI Arts,
Practical Physics and Chemistry,
XI and XII. (
484 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D.
12. P. G. Banerji, B.SC., L.T, (Allah- Science, XA and B, IXA and
ahad). and B; Mathematics, IXA
andB.
13. P. K. Mittra, B.A., L.T. (Allahabad) English, XI Science and XA ;
Mathematics, XA and B.
14. Sankar Sahai, B.A., L.T. (Allaha- English, IXA ; History, XB.
15. Jhaii Lai Sharma, B.A., L.T. (Al- Mathematics, IXA and B ; Eng-
lahabad). lish, XB.
16. Ahmad Husain, Mulla Examina- Persian, X to XII.
tion (Allahabad), Maulvi Alim,
and Munshi Fazil Examinations,
Honours in Persian and addi-
tional examination in English
(Punjab).
17. Ram Dat Avast hi, Shastri of the Sanskrit, XI and XII.
Punjab, Kavyatirtha (Calcutta),
I and II Years Uttama (Benares)
Upadhyayas in (1) Dharam
Shastra and (2) Sankhya Shastra
with English of Bihar and Orissa.
Trained as Language Teacher
at the Training College, Luck-
now. Passed English Optional
Examination of Calcutta.
18. Sri Dhar Singh, M.A. (Benares) .. Hindi, XI Arts, XII Arts, XA
and B.
19. Hamid Ullah Afsor, B.A. (Allah- Urdu, XI and XII; Arts, XA
abad). and B.
20. L. N. Dhaon, Inter., C.T. . . English, 1XB.
21. Fateh Bahadur, S.L.C. and Matri- Drawing, IX and X.
culation. Passed in special Draw-
ing Course, J . J. School of Arts,
Bombay.
22. C. P. Avesthi, E.C.T., V.T.C. I. . . Hindi, IXA and B.
23. Bhagwati Prasad Kapur, Inter. . . Commerce, IXA and B, XA and
B.
24. Khurehed A4i, Trained in Manual Manual Training, IXA and B.
Training at T. C., Allahabad.
25. Mahabir Acharya, Vyakaran Sanskrit, IXA and B, XA and B,
Acharya.
26. Akhtar Ali, Maulvi Fazil and Mun- Arabic, XII and XI.
shi Fazil, Matriculation.
APP. D.]
LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
485
27. Saquib Husain, Mulla Fazil . . Urdu, IXA and B ; Persian, IX A
and B.
28. Manzurul Haq, Fazil of Allahabad Arabic, XA and B.
GOVERNMENT INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, FYZABAD.
This institution was founded by the Taluqdars of tho district in 1860.
It is now entirely maintained by Government and is under the control
of the Director of Public Instruction, United Provinces.
Since July, 1921, it has been raised to the standard of an Intermediate
College. There are two blocks of buildings : one for School classes com-
prising classes III to VIII and the other for College classes comprising
classes IX to XII. There are two hostels attached to this institution
under the supervision of resident teachers.
The following subjects are taught to the Intermediate classes : (1)
Logic, (2) History, (3) Classical Languages (Arabic, Persian and Sanskrit)-
(4) Mathematics, (5) Biology, (6) Physics and (7) Chemistry.
There are a frw local scholarships for students.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
5.
6.
7.
8.
0.
10.
11.
12.
Durga Dutta Joshi, B.A., M.sc.,
Principal.
Harish Chandra Misra, M.A.
S. N. Kichlu, M.A., LL.B.
U. C. Dutta, M.A., L.T.
K. K. Srivastava, M.A.
K. S. Asthana, M.A.
Jai Ram Avasthi, Shastri
Hafiz Abdullah, Fazil
Zahid Hu.sain, Fazii
ShaniWm Nath Varma, M.A., L.T.
Ehtisham Ali, M. so.
Shyama Charan Misra, M.SC., L.T.
13. Bhabhcsh Chandra Banerji, M.SC.
14. Muket Bohari Lai, B.A., B.SC., C.T.
15. Nath Prasad, B.A., L.T.
31
Science (Tutorial), XA, XB,
IXA and B, XII and XI.
History, XITA and B, XIA and
B, IXA.
English, XIIA and B, XIB.
Logic, XIIA and B, XIA and
B; Eng., XIA.
Urdu, XIIA and B, XIA and B,
Economics, XIIA and B, XIA
and B; English, XIB.
Sanskrit, XIIA and B, XIA
and B and Hindi, XA and B,
Persian, XIIA and B, XIA and
B.
Arabic, XIA and B, IXA and B*
English, XIIB; History, IXB.
Biology, XII and XI.
Physics, XIIB, XIB, IXA and
B.
Chemistry, XIIB, XIB, IXA
and B.
Mathematics, XB.
English, XB ; History, IX AJ
486 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D.
16. Maharaj Bahadur, M.A., L.T. . . History, XA and B ; English,
IXA.
17. J. N. Mittra, B.A., L.T. . . English, XA ; Mathematics, 1XB.
18. U. P. Mukerji, B.SC., L.T. . . Science, XA and B ; Mathe-
matics, IXA.
19. Gangadhar Vishnu Potdar, 1st Drawing (Pastel), X and IX.
and 2nd grade Examination,
{School of Arts, Bombay.
20. Jokhan Ram Miara, 1st Part Sanskrit, X.
Achariya Benares).
21. Faiyaz Ahmad, Mullah .. Persian, X.
22. Lakshman Swarup Vidyarthi, C.D., Commerce, X and IX.
C.T.
23. Panchanan Chatterji, B.A., L.T. . . History, X and Geography, IX.
24. Shankar Dutta Malviya, B.A., L.T. Geography, X; English, IX B.
25. Nolini Mohan Banerji, Arts and Drawing (Geom.), X and IX.
Crafts, Lucknow.
26. Abdul Ali, Fazl . . . . Urdu, IX and X ; Persian, I X.
27. Maheshwar Prasad, Shashtri . . 11 ndi, IX.
2f>. Rama Kant Shukla, Madhyama .. Sanskrit, IX.
SANATAN DHARMA COLLEGE OF COMMERCE, CAWNPORE.
The College owes its origin mainly to thw lib -ratify n-nd publie-spir.ted-
ness of tho mercantile community of Cawnpore, European as well as Indian.
The foundation stone of the College building was laid by Hit? Excel-
lency Sir Harcourt Butler on March 1, 1920. The College, opened on
July 16, 1921, within a period of seven years has developed into a first
grade College.
The College is housed in a magnificent building overlooking the Ganges.
The hostels are situated close to the College and provido accommodation
for about 250 students.
The annual maintenance expenditure during the year 1928-29 amount-
ed to about Rs. 65,223-8-6, of this amount Rs. 36,742 were contributed by
the Government and the balance was met from fees and income from
the Endowment Fund.
The Management of the Institution is in the hands of a Board of Manage-
ment consisting of 25 members.
The College is affiliated to the Agra University, and imparts instruc-
tions leading to the B. Com. Degree ; the M.A. Degree in Economics, Sans-
krit, Hindi and English ; the B.A. Degree in English, Economics, History,
iSanskrit, Hindi and Mathematics; and the LL.B. Degree. The College
is also recognized by the Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces, for the Commercial Diploma Examination.
APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 487
Religious and moral instructions in aceo dance with the Sanatana
Dharma lines is provided for Hindu students in addition to the secular edu-
cation required for the various University and Intermediate Board's Exa-
minations.
The number of students on the College Rolls in 11)28-29 was 300, of which
116 were in the Commercial Diploma classes. >
The College maintains an up to date reading room to which a largo num-
ber of important newspapers and magazines are subscribed. The Library
contains about 4,000 books, of which about 500 are Hindi books.
A Commercial Museum was established four years back and is attached
to the Geography department of the College.
Several associations are run by the students of the College, the chief
among which are the 8. D. College Union, the C. D. Literary Association,
and Sanskrit Association.
In the College athletics, as far as possible, every student takes part in
one game or another. The College maintains almost all games, both Indian
and European.
The health of the students is looked after by a regular medical officer
with the assistance of a whole- time Compounder in charge of the College
Dispensary.
Besides the Government scholarships, a large number of stipends and
scholarships provided by public bodies and friends and sympathisers of
the College are available to the students of the College. In 1928-29, 61 scho-
larships, 35 freeships and 34 half-freeships were given to the students
of the College.
A Poor Boys' Fund, collections for which are made by the {Staff and
students, is also maintained for the help of poor and deserving students.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. P. Seshadri, M.A. (Eng.), lately Principal and Professor of 1&ig-
Head of the Department of Eng- lish.
lish Studies, Benares Hindu Uni-
versity.
.2, B. N. Chopra, A.I.S.A., L.A.A., F.R.E.S., Vice- Principal and Proteasor of
Associated Accountant, and In- Accountancy,
corporated Secretary (London).
3. K. L. Govil, B. Com. (Allahabad), Professor of Business Methods
M.A. Prev. (Agra). and Commercial English.
4. G. S. Sharma, B. Com. (Allahabad) Lecturer in Accountancy.
F.C.I., C.T., G.D.A.
5. B. N. Sharma, B.A. (Hons.), L.T. , . Lecturer in English.
6. K. K. Sharma, M.A., B. Com. . . Lecturer in Commerce.
7. D. P. Mehrotra, B. Com. (Allah- Lecturer in Economics,
abad), M.A. Previous (Agra).
488 CALENDAB 1928-29 [APP. D,
8. Bhagwati Prasad Gupta, M.A. Lecturer in Shorthand and Geo-
(Agra), B. Com. (Allahabad). graphy.
9. Tilak Singh Kushwaha, B. Com. Lecturer in Geography and Type-
(Agra), LL.B. Previous. writing Instructor.
AGRICULTURAL INSTITUTE, NAINI, ALLAHABAD.
The Agricultural Institute was founded in 1912, in the belief that the
improvement of Indian agriculture is fundamental to all material and
spiritual progress. In particular the Institute has emphasized the train-
ing of scientific agriculturists, rather than agricultural scientists. It has
striven to prepare its students to take their places as farmers, on their
own land or for others, and as teachers, either in schools or in the Agri-
cultural services. Many have been successfully engaged in such work.
Following the purchase in 1912 of 275 acres considerable progress has
been made in improving the land and in erecting th? necessary build-
ings. A gift has been received which is making possible the extention
of the farm to 1,000 acres. On the farm the students actually carry on
farming operations, while in the class rooms and scientific laboratories
they learn the theory which governs the practice.
Students have come from all over India, from Kashmir to Assam, and
even from Mesopotamia and the Fiji Islands. A number have been sent
here by Indian States and others by several missions. Believing that
students who complete the course satisfactorily should receive a diploma
recognized by the Government the Institute has brought to the attention
of the educational authorities the need for an agricultural course. In this
it has now been successful.
In January, 1925, the Minister of Education approved the action of the
Board of High School and Intermediate Education in instituting a diploma
course in agriculture.
This course is of Intermediate College rank, on the analogy of the Di-
ploma in Commerce, and is designed to prepare students for the Degree
Course in agriculture as well as to fit them to manage farms or to teach
agriculture in lower schools. The Board of High School and Intermediate
Education, United Provinces, has granted provisional recognition to the
Allahabad Agricultural Institute to prepare students for the Agricultural
'Diploma Examination up to the Examination of 1930.
The Dairy department has always played an important part in the
Institute. It was thus particularly gratifying when the Institute wag in-
vited to teach to the newly-sanctioned Indian National Diploma in Dairy-
ing. This course prepares men to manage private dairies or to enter Gov-
ernment dairy service.
Because of the increasing demand for teachers of agriculture and for
teachers in rural schools adapted to the needs of the community, the In-
4.PP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
489
stitute opened in July, 1923, the Rural Teacl^rs' Training Cours<\ In
connexion with this course a rural community school has been opened,
Tvhich affords an opportunity for the students in the training course to
'Observe method^ and to teach under supervision.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Dr. Sam Higginbottom, M.A., Economics.
D. Fhilan. (Princeton Univer-
sity) ; B.sc. in Agr. (Ohio State
University): M.SC., (Amherst
College), Principal.
2. W. Brewster Hayes, B.SC. in Agr. Horticulture.
(Oregon State Agricultural
College.) (On furlough],
3. Mason Vaugh, B.SC. in Engineering, Department of Agricultural
B.SC., in Agriculture, A. E. (Uni Engineering,
versity of Missouri). Vice-
Principal
4. Ira A. Hatch, Cornell University . . Farm Manager.
.5. Adin P. Brooks, A. B. (Colorado Department of Chemistry.
College), M.SC., (George Wash-
ington University).
6. Dr. H. G. Kribs, Ph.D. (Pennsyl- Biology,
vania). (On furlough),
7. Wilmer J. Hanson, B.SC. in Agr., Animal Husbandry and Dairying,
(University of Manitoba), M.SC.
(University of Minnesota).
,8. D. Haldar, L.M.E. (Benares Hindu Agricultural Engineering.
University).
9. Bransley M. Pugh, B.SC. (Calcutta Agronomy.
University), B.SO. in Agr. (Uni-
versity of California).
10. N. D. R. Joshi, I.D.D. (Allahabad). . Dairying.
11. I. D. Caleb, M.SC. (Allahabad Uni- Zoology and Chemistry.
versity).
12. 1. A. .fotdan, B.A. (Allahabad Uni- English.
versity).
13. C. P. Dutt, M.SC. in Agr. (Univer- Physics.
sity of California).
44. S. K. Roy, Dip. in Agr. (Allahabad) Asst. Farm Manager.
d5. S. R. Misra, Intermediate "Dip, Field Accountant,
in Agr. (Allahabad).
490 CALENDAR 1928-29 IAPP. IK
AGRICULtURAL COLLEGE, CAWNPORE.
In 1803 a small school was started near the present site of the Agricul-
tural College with the object of training selected men as tymungoes under
the Department of Revenue, United Provinces. Agriculture then formed
a very small part of the training imparted. In 1906 the school course of
two years was elaborated to a three years' course and the school raised to
the status of a College. From 1906 to 1913 the College Diploma was a
qualification for entry into the Subordinate Agricultural Service of the
United Provinces and the grade of supervisor kanungo in the revenue ser-
vice. In the autumn of the latter year a school was re-opuned for the
training of kanungoes ; and a scheme for the re-organization of the College
was promulgated. This re -organization came into force in October, 1914.
Under this order the management of the college is vested in a governing,
body which deals with admissions, fees, grants of stipends, the curriculum
of the College, holidays and such other matters of internal administration
as may be put before it.
Three courses are now given. The first of thes is one of two years'
duration terminating in the Agricultural Diploma Examination of the
Board of High School and Intermediate Education ; the second a four
years 1 course terminating in the College Diploma of L'ccntiate in Agricul-
ture ; and the third a two years' course in the Vernacular which is mainly
practical in character.
The qualification for admission to the first two courses is the High
School Certificate or a certificate of equivalent standing. For the Verna-
cular Course no special educational qualifications are demanded, but
candidates must be able to read and write the Vernacular fluently, prefer-
ence being given to such as have reached the standard of the Vernacular
Final or Middle standard in an English school.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. C. Maya Das, M.A., B.SC. (Edin.), Principal arid Professor of Agri-
I.A.S., culture.
Khwaja Nafees Hasan, L.Ag. . . Lecturer in Agriculture.
M. Wasiullah Khan, L.Ag., M.R.A.S. Ditto.
4. H. C. Verma, I.D.D. . . . . Lecturer in Dairying and Anima)i
Husbandry.
5. Khalil Ahmad, B.A., LL.B. . . Lecturer in English. *
6. Nanak Chand, Veterinary Assis- Lecturer in Veterinary Science.
tant Surgeon.
7. Hansraj Singh (qualified in Roor- Lecturer in Agricultural Eugin-
kee). neering.
8. H. N. Batham, M.A, . . . . Inorganic Chemistry, 1 year.
Head of (and supervision,
of Practicals) Section.
APP. !>.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 491
i). G. K. Saxena, B.A. . . . . Organic and Inorganic Chemis-
try, II year. Chemistry Prac-
tical*, I and II year,
10. T. R. Goel, L.Ag. . . . . Chemistry Practical, I and 1 1
year.
11. S. N. Chatterji, M.SC. Physics (Theory and Practs.), I
and II year ; Mathe-
matics, I year,
32. Shripal Singh, S B.3e. (M.A., Previ- Physics Practical, 1 and II
ous). year.
13. T. S. Sabnis, B.A. (Hons.), M.SC. .. (Head of the B:>tany, Zoology,
Biology, Botany and Horti-
culture section).
14. II. V. Damle, B.A. . . . . Botany.
15. M. G. Phatak, L.Ag. (Bombay) . . Botany.
](>. V. N. Sane, B. Ag. . . . . Horticulture.
17. D. S. Chowdhry, M.se. .. Zoology.
GOVERNMENT COLLEGE, AJMER.
In 1836 a Government School was started in Ajmer, but it received
small encouragement. It was, therefore, closed for a number of years
until 1851, when it was re-established on a sounder basis under the sanc-
tion of the Hon'ble the Court of Directors. From 1861 the institution
was affiliated to the Calcutta University, fiwt preparing students for the
F. A. and later on from 1868, when a larger staff and a more commodious
building were provided, for the B. A. of that University. The College
was affiliated to the University of Allahabad in the year 1888. Up to 1912"
the High School and the College were accommodated in the same buildings
but in October of that year the College was separated, and equipment pro-
vided for the teaching of Science to the B.Sc. standard. The Intermediate
classes now prepare for the examination of the Board of High School and
Intermediate Education, United Provinces. The College is now in a flour-
ishing condition and the number of students continues steadily to increase..
The subjects taught are English, History, Economics, Logic, Persian, Sans-
krit, Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry.
The College is maintained by the Government of India.
The fees are the same as in the Colleges of the United Provinces.
Scholarships. A sum of Rs. 1,220, derived partly from eontributions-
and endowment, is annually distributed in scholarships, some tenable for
two years, others for one year only.
Medals. The Sir Elliot Colvin and the Col. Pinhey medals are award-
ed annually to graduates for superior excellence in work and games.
492 CALENDAR 1928-29 APP. D.
Attached to the College are comfortable boarding-houses and good
play-grounds. Every student is required to join in games unless exempted
on medicaji advice.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. A. Miller, M.A., (St. Andrews) . . Principal.
2. Hari Prasad, B.A. (Punjab), B.SC. Chemistry, XI and XII (Theory
(Manchester), Vice-Principal. and Practical).
3. Bishamber Pershad Mathur, M.sc. Mathematics, XI and XII.
(Allahabad.)
4. Lalji Srivastava, M.SC. (Allahabad) Physics, XI and XII (Theory and
Practical, XI).
r>. K. S. Mankar, M.A. (Oxon) . . Economics, XI and XII.
(5. Bhav Datt Shastri , . . . Sanskrit, XI and XII.
7. Hamidullah Khan Usafzai . . Persian, XI and XII.
8. Shiv Shankar Mathur, M.A. (Delhi) English, XI and XII.
9. Karam Ghani Khan, M.A., L.T. History, XI and XII.
(Allahabad).
10. Deoki Nandan Sharma, M.A., LL.B. Logic and Eng. Com., XI and
(Allahabad). XII.
11. Shri Narain Mathur, B.SC. (Allah- Chemistry, XI (Theory and Prau-
abad). tical) and XII (Practical).
12. Raj Kishore, M.SC. (Benares), B.SC., Physics, XI and Xll (Theory
L.T. (Allahabad). and Practical).
MAHARAJA'S INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, JAIPUR.
Maharaja's College, which is perhaps the oldest institution in Raj-
putana, was founded in 1844, and in the beginning was affiliated to the
University of Calcutta. In 1887 it was affiliated to the University of Allah-
abad. In pursuance of section 7(5) of the Allahabad University Act, 1921,
the Jaipur Darbar separated the Intermediate classes from the Degree
classes in the year 1923.
This is a free institution and no tuition fee is charged from the pupils.
As many as 22 scholarships are awarded to the students of which ten are
merit scholarships of Bs. 8 per month and 12 are local scholarships of
Rs. 5 per month which are awarded to poor students of the State. The
college comprises classes both in Arts and Science. There are attached
to it a library, a laboratory, and gymnasium. The " Glancy " gold medal
is also awarded to the boy who stands first in order of merit at the Inter-
mediate Examination.
APP.. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF
493
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Panna Lai Mathur, Principal . . Logic, XI and XII.
2. N. N. Roy, M.A., B.B.
3. G, P. Srivastava, B.A.
4. S. S. Jain, M.A.
5. V. V. Tamhankar, B.A.
6. Girja Dayal, M.A., LL.B.
7. Hami Uddin Khan, M.A.
8. P. L. Mathur M.A., B.SC.
9. B. B. Gupta, M.SC.
10. R. N. Bhargava, M.A., B.SC.
11. M. F. Soonawala, M.SC.
12. Altaf Husan
13. Mathura Nath Bhatt . .
14. N. L. Mukerji, M.SC. . .
15. S. B. Chaturvedi, M.SC.
Chemistry Physical, XII.
English, Special and General, XI
and XII.
Ditto.
Economics, XI and XII.
Logic and Economis, XI and XII.
History, XI and XII ; General
English, XL
Physics, XII ; Mathematics, XI.
Biology and Chemistry, XI and
XII ; Biology, XI.
Mathematics and Practical Phy-
sics, XI and XII.
Physics (Theory), XII.
Urdu and Persian, XI and XII.
Hindi and Sanskrit, XI and XII.
Chemistry, XII.
Botany, Theory, Biology Practi-
cal and Chemistry Prac-tical,
XI ; Biology Practical
Chemistry Theory, XII.
BIRLA INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, PILANI (JAIPUR).
The Birla College was orginally started as a Primary School inJanu-
ary, 1901, by Raja Baldeo Dass Birla and his eldest son Sriyut Seth Jugal
Kishore Birla. In 1916 it wa reoogniz3d by the Jaipur State as an Anglo-
Vernacular School. It was first housed in a small building in village
Pilani. The present building was erected on the outskrits of the village
in 1921. In 1922 it was recognized as a Middle School andl in 1925 as a
High School by the United Provinces Board of High School and Inter-
mediate Education. Another block was added in 1928. A Hostel building
was added in 1926. In the current year the institution has been raised
to the status of an Intarmediate College. Mr. G. D. Birla ha* advanced
a large sum of money for the erection of a new College buiHimr more
commodious than the present.
In the vicinity of the College are situated quarters for th* Cjllege staff
which are rent free. No tuition fees are charged from the students. Sti-
pends are given to deserving poor students, preference being given to
residents of the Shekhaw'ati district. Many of the local poor boys are, in
.addition, given books and clothes free.
494 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D,
The College Library contains over 4,000 volumes and there is
ing Room which is supplied with five or six daily papers and many impor-
tant Indian and foreign Periodicals of educational and general interest.
No fee is charged from students for residence in the hostel or for
medical aid. Students are helped to make their own messing arrangements
in groups as suits them best. A cook, some necessary utensils and a kit-
chen are provided free to each such group and the cost of messing comes gene-
rally to between Rs. 5 and Rs. 8 per boy per month. There is a second
hostel attached to the College which provides cheap boarding and lodging
for about eighty students of the Jat community.
There are five play-grounds on which hockey, football, cricket and
tennis are regularly played. Boys are also encouraged to learn Lathi play
and other defence games and there is a regular Medical Examination.
There is a splendid Scout's corps consisting of Rovers Scouts and Cubs.
Parliamentary debates, regular fortnightly dramatics, musical con-
certs, regional survey and co-operative organization are regular features
of the institution. The College isdiies a monthly Magazine of its own,.
edited and written mostly by the students themselves.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. V. J. Shivdaiani, B. com. (Bombay), English, XI.
Certificate of Pedagogical studies
(Geneva), Diploma in Educa-
tion (Leeds), Docteur-es-Lettres,
(Montpellier, France 1 ), Princi-
pal.
1'. S. Pal, M.A. (English), .. English, X and XI.
B.T., (Calcutta).
3. K. R. Pandya, M.A. (Sanskrit and History, IX to XI ; Sanskrit,.
History), (Allahabad). XI.
4. Shri Ram, Visharad (Allahabad), Mathematics, IX to X 1 .
B.sc. (Allahabad), M.A., (Mathe-
matics) (Agra), LL.B. (Agra).
5. T. K. Dutt., M.A., (English) (Cal- Logic, XI ; English, IX.
cutta), M.A., (Philosophy)(Dacca).
6. S. Karan Pareek, Visharad (Allah- Hindi, X and XI ; English, X.
abad), M.A., (English) (Benares), and IX.
M.A., (Hindi) (Benares.)
7. Anant Deo Tripathi, Vyakaran Sanskrit, IX and XI.
Acharya.
S. D. N. Abrol, M.SC., (Geology) (Pun- Geography, IX and X.
jab).
API'. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 495-
9. B. S. Audholia, Visharad (Allah- Book-keeping, IX and X ; Busi-
abad), B. Com., (Allahabad), ness Practice, IX ; Hindi^ .
M.A., Previous. (Economics) t IX.
(Agra).
10. R. K. Gupta, c. D. . . . . Typewriting, IX and X ; Busi-
ness Practice, X.
11. G. D. Sharma. (Private Studies) .. Sanskrit, X.
MAHARANA'S INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, UDAIPUR.
Inspected $th January, 1924.
Recognised in 4rts and Science, 1922.
Thi<* College (raised to the Intermediate standard in 1922), maintain-
ed entirely by the Darbar, is a free institution, no fees of any kind being
charged from the pupils. It now comprises classes IX to XII. Attached
to it are a laboratory, a reading room and a library. Some stipends are
annually awarded to poor students.
I N STBUCT1V E STAF1 .
1. Kanhaiya Lai Verrna, M.A. in English, XJI ; English General,
Endish (Allahabad), Principal. Xll and XT.
2. tSateesh Chandra Bose, M.sc. in Mathematics, XII to X.
Mathematics (Calcutta), Vice-
Principal.
3. Taj Khan Qurban Hussain, M.A., Physics, XI 1 to IX.
in Applied Mathematics (Pun-
jab).
4. Ram Charan Gupta, M.SC. in Che- Chemistry, XH to IX.
mistry (Lucknow).
5. Rajendra Nath Roy, M.A., in Phi- Lo^>ie, XIL and XI; English, X.
losophy (on leave] (Allahabad).
6. Ashirbadi Lai, B.A. (Hons.), M.A. History, Xll to X.
in History (Lucknow).
7. Shambhu Dayal Jagdhari, M.A. English, X! and X.
in English (Lucknow).
8. Shankar Sahai axena, B. Com. Hindi, XI to IX; Geography, X.
(Allajiabad), M.A. in Economies and IX.
(Agra).
9. Umrao Singh, M.A., in Economics Economics, Xlt and XI; His-
(Agra). tory, X and IX.
10. Imam Uddin Rizvi, B.A. (Benare?) English General, IX ; English -
and Urdu, IX.
11. Rama Shankar Chhaya, B.A. (Bom- Eng'ish, X and IX ; History, IX.
496 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D.
12. Ram Sunder Shastri, Acharya (Be- Sanskrit, XII to IX ; Hindi, X.
nares), Shastri (Punjab).
13. Saved Nazim Uddin, B.A. in Per- Persian, XII to IX ; Urdu, X.
sian and Economics, LL.B.
(Allahabad).
14. Ram Chander Sanadhya, B.SC. Practical Science, XII to IX.
(Allahabad), Demonstrator.
15. Pyare Lai Sharma . . . . Drawing, X and IX.
JASWANT COLLEGE, JODHPUR.
The College was founded in 1893. It is maintained entirely by the
Jodhpur Darbar.
Ten scholarships of Rs. 90 each, tenable for two years are awarded
annually to fresh students joining the College.
An up-to-date laboratory and a well-furnished library are attached
to the College.
Games are compulsory for all students. The College provides foot-
ball, cricket, volley ball, and tennis grounds and materials. Cadet Corps
and Robber Scout troops were started last year.
Besides the usual system of lectures, tutorial classes have been started
this year. Every student receives individual attention from his teachers
in all the subjects he takes up. The staff has on this account been in-
creased.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. A. P. Cox, M.A., I.E.S., Principal.. English.
'2. P. P. Shahani, M. A., Vice- Principal Logic and Philosophy.
3. K. L. Mathur, M.A., B.SC. . . Mathematics.
4. H. B. Tatke, M.A. , . . . Sanskrit.
5. W. V. Wadhwani, M.A. . . Economics.
6. S. D. Arora, M.SC., L.T. . . Chemistry.
7. Dina Nath Bhargav, M.A., L.T. . . English.
8. R. K. Tripathi, M.A. . . . . English.
9. S. S. Shukla, M.A., L.T. . . English.
10. P. L. Nag, M.SO., L.T. . . . . Physics.
11. Shi v Raj Bahadur, M.SC. .. Biology.
12. H. D. Seth, M.A. . . . . Mathematics.
13. Abdul Baqui, Molvi Fazil . . Persian.
14. K. N. Tewari, M.A. . . . . Hindi.
. 15. Hem Raj Gopal Ram, M.A. . . History.
16. R. N. Roy, M.A. . . . . Logic.
7. Nemi Chand Gupta, B. Com. . . C. D. Class.
APP. D.] LIST OF T*E TEACHING s*TAFF 497
HERBERT INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, KOTAH.
This institution dates back to the year 1874 when it was called the
Maharao's High School and was housed in a large but ill-ventilated build-
ing in the thickest part of the city. In 1894 another institution called
the Nobles' School open only to tho nobility of the State, came into exis-
ence, and the two institutions ran parallel till June, 1909, when the whole
system of Secondary Education in the State was overhauled and the Noble V
School was amalgamated with its sister institution and christened " the
Herbert High School " in memory of the late Lieut. -Colonel Charles Herbert,
c.s.i., Political Agent, Kotah and Jhalawar States (18981896). In 1912 it
was shifted to the present commodious building outside the city erected at
a cost of about three lakhs of rupees. In 1924 it was raised to an Inter-
mediate College and provisionally recognized by the Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, United Provinces, for three years in English,
Mathematics, Modern History, Economics, Persian, Sanskrit, Physics,
and Chemistry. First year class was opened in July, 1924, and second year
in July, 1925.
The College has a very decent library, arranged on the " Dswey's Deci-
mal System," and good play-grounds for hockey, football, volley ball,
cricket, tennis, and basketball. Games are compulsory for all students
and are organized and developed on the lines of Inter-class Tournaments
in hockey, football and volley ball, a silvpr challenge cup being held by the
winning team in hockey and volley ball, and a silver challenge shield in
football. Two silver medals, called Palaita medals, are awarded every
year to the best athletes, one from the Middle department and the other
from the High School and College classes.
The Physics and Chemistry laboratories are housed in a separate part
of the building and have been equipped with all the necessary up-to-date
apparatus and appliances at a cost of Rs. 16,000. There arc separate
lecture and practical rooms for both subjects and a separate gas installa-
tion for the supply of gas to the laboratories.
A sum of Rs. 50 per mensem is earmarked for scholarships, a part of
which is distributed every year at the discretion of the Principal, to poor
and deserving students as stipends. A sum of Rs. 120 is set apart for
prizes to be given away every year to students on the results of the annual
examination in important subjects.
The institution is maintained by the State and no tuition fee is charged.
Two boarding houses, both lying in the city, are attached to the insti-
tution and provide accommodation for about 100 students. One of them
called the Nobles' Boarding House is meant exclusively for the sons of noble
and jagirdars and boarders are given f*>fd, clothing books, stationery, in
fact everything free by the State. The other called the Self-Supporting
498
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. D.
Boarding House is meant for the children of the general public wh > have to
pay for their board and lodging, the State providing only accommodation,
furniture, and servants.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
Daya Krishna, M.A., LL.B., Principal English, XII.
1.
2. Fateh Shanker Dube, M.A., B.SC. .
;*. Ram Chandra, M.A., L.T.
4. Bhagwan Das Batta, M.SC., F.C.S.
5. Shri Krishna Hari Ekbote, M.SC. .
6. Ram Gopal Gupta, M.A., L.T.
7. Girdhari Lai Khullar, M.A.
8. Jagannath Singh Mchra, M.A.
9.
10.
II.
13.
14.
15.
10.
Phul Singh Raghuvanshi, M.A., LL.B.
Hari Narain, B.A.
Jwala Prasad, Kavya Tirth, Hon-
ours in Hindi, F.A., in English,
Shastri.
Mohammad Ali, Munshi Fazil, Mat-
riculate in English.
Bal Mukand, B.SC.
Madan Mohan, B.SC.
Mohammad Ibrahim, Munshi Fazil
N. G. Nabar, I, II, [II Grade Draw-
ing passed (School of Arts, Bom-
bay).
Mathematics, XII, XI, XA and
IXA.
English, XI and XA.
Chemistry, XII to IX.
Physics, XII to IX.
History, Xll to X ; Civics, XL
Economics, XII and XT ; Civics,
XII; History, IX.
Logic, XII and XI ; English,
TXA.
Mathematics, XB and JX.
English, XB and IXB.
Sanskrit, XII to X ; Hindi, X.
Persian, XII to IX.
Demonstrator.
Ditto.
Urdu, X and IX.
Drawing, X and IX.
DUNGAR INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, BIKANER.
This College is named after His late Highness Maharajah Sri Dungar
Singhji. The school formerly, known as the Darbar High School, was
the first institution in the State where the teaching of English was intro-
duced. The first batch of students for the Entrance Examination wa*
sent up in the year 1896. Since the assumption of full powers by Major-
General His Highness Maharajah Sri Sir Ganga Singhji Bahadur, G.C.S.I.,
O.C.I.B., G.C.V.O., G.B.B., K.o.B., A.D.c., LL.D., in 1898 the School, along
with other departments of the State, has been making rapid progress in
every branch of its activities. In 1912, on the occasion of the Silver Ju-
bilee of His Highness the Maharajah, this institution waa experimentally
raised to the status of a College and was named the Dungar College. Th<i
opening ceremony of the present building, which is a magnificsnt struc-
ture of red sand stone designed by Sir Swinton Jacob, was also performed
.APP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 499
in the same year. It is situated just outide the city wall near the Rail-
way Station. Attached to the College are extensive play-grounds. The
College classes had however to be stopped on account of the War and His
Highness' munificent contribution to the Hindu University was eufficient
to maintain the boys of College classes at Benares on stipends.
With the rise of the number of boys in the High School classes it was
decided to start regular College classes and consequently the College has
been raised to Intermediate standard in 1928 ; and is affiliated in Mathe-
matics, History, Logic, Hindi, Sanskrit and Economies in Intermediate
classes and Science, Drawing, History, Geography, Hindi, Sanskrit, Per-
sian and Urdu in High School classes.
Education is entirely free and there is a Boarding House attached to
the colleg $.
There is a provision of Rs. 1,3 per annum for scholarships and several
medals and prizes are given for proficiency in study and sports by His
Highness the Maharajah and the Maharaj Kumar Sahib.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
I. Sri Ram Tiwarey, M.A., L.T. (speci- Principal.
lised in Mathamatics and M.T.)
'2. Tarak Nath Mukcrjea, B.SC., L.T.
(specialized in Science) .. Vice-Principal.
3. P. K. Goawami, M.A., LL.B. . . Lecturer in English.
4. lUshrath Sharma, M.A. . . Lecturer in History.
o. Ram Ratan Agarwala, M.A. . . Lecturer in Philosophy.
6. Shyam Sundar Shukla, M.A., L.T., Lecturer in Economics.
P.R.E.S. (London) (specialized in
History.)
7. Suraj Karan Pareek, M.A., Bisha-
rad.
8. Vidya Dhar Shastri, B.A. (Punjab), Lecturer in Sanskrit.
M.A. Prev. (Agra).
*). Shiva Butt Singh, B.A.
10. Jeth Jtal, B.A.
II. Din Dayal, B.A.
12. K. R. Bklwalkar, passed Interme-
diate Grade of tho Bombay
School of Arts in Drawing.
J!?. Prahlad Goswami, Visharad.
14. Dadshah Husain, Fazil (Punjab).
500 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D.
VICTORIA COLLEGE, LASHKAR (GWALIOR).
This institution is entirely maintained by the Gwalior Darbar, and 'is
under the control and supervision of the Inspactor-Gcnoral of^Education,.
Gwalior State.
The College building is a magnificent edifice of In do- Saracenic style r
situated in an open space outside the town, and has attached to it a gym-
nasium, a library, and well-equipped laboratory with a workshop and gas
installation.
The scale of tuition feo for outsiders is R*. 3 per mensem for the Inter-
mediate classes. Natives of the State pay half the fee. An additional 7
fee of one rupee a month is also charged from all students.
At a little distance from the College there is a boarding house under the
supervision of a resident superintendent.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. H. M. Bull, M.A. (Cantab), Princi- Ancient History, XI and XII.
pal.
2. H. F. Manley, M.A. (Cantab),
Honours in Philosophy and
Economics, Certificated Tea-
cher, Higher Education Univer-
sitv of Cambridge, Vice-Princi-
pal.
3. Hiia Lai Chatterjce, M.A. (Allaha- }
bad). f English, XI and XII.
4. V. K. Tatke, M.A. (Allahabad) . . )
5. P>. L. Vajpayee Bhimpure, M.A., Economics, XI and XII.
LL.B. (Allahabad).
(\ Asok Nath Roy Chaudharl, M.A. History (Modern), XI and XII.
(Calcutta).
7. Barlri Narayan, M.A., LL.B. (Allaha- History (Modern) and Hindi,.
bad). XI and XII.
8. G. R. Deo, M.A. (Allahabad) . . Mathematics, XI and XII.
<). B. R. Bokil, M.A. (Allahabad) . . Logic, XI and XII.
10. V. II. S. Dravid, M.A. (Allahabad) Sanskrit, XI and XII.
11. M. A. Saquib . . . . Persian, XI and XII.
J2. Vidya Bhushan Saxena, M.SC. (Al-^| *
lahabad^. f Biology, XI and XII.
13. Kanhaya Lai Saxena, M.SC. (Al- J
lahabad).
14. B. S. Bhagwat, B.SC. (Allahabad). . } ,
15. Ghasi Ram Jain, M.SC. (Allahabad) } Ph y sics > XT and .
16. G. N. Manke, B.A. (Allahabad) . . ) n , . , vr
17. Ram Perahad, M.SC. < Allahabad) . . ) ^cmwtry, XI and ML
APP, D.] LIST OF *THE TEACHING STAFF 501
MADHAVA INTERMEDIATE COLLEGE, UJJAIN,
This College owes its origin to the development of XTjjain High School,
founded by tho Gwalior Darbar in 1888. It was affiliated to the Allahabad
University for the Inter-Examination in 1890 and for the B.A. Examination
in 1893. Subsequently tho Director of Public Instruction, Malwa, request-
ed His Highness Maharaja Madhava Kao Scinda to allow this College to be
named after him. The request was kindly granted by Maharaja Saheb
and thus this institution came to be called Madhava College.
The College taught up to the B.A. standard till 1906, when, from econo-
mical considerations, the classes of the College, proper were transfeiTed to
and amalgamated with the Victoria College, Gwalior, in 1906, and the
College was reduced merely to a High School. But again in 1926, the Coun-
cil of Regency resolved to have a College at Ujjain, in pursuance of a wish
of His late Highness, as stated in his " Policy " Volume I. Accordingly
an application was made to the Board of the United Provinces for the High
School and Intermediate Education, and affiliation is sought from July,
1928, in English, History (Modern) Economics, Sanskrit, Marathi, Hindi,
Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics for the purposes of the Intermediate
Examination.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. G. S. Apte, M.A. (Chemistry), B.SC. Chemistry, XI and XII English
(Honours in Chemistry), (All aha- X,
bad), Principal.
2. S. K. Abhyanker, M.SC., I..T. Mathematics, X to XII.
(Nagpur).
3. N. B. Paradkar, B.A. (English Ho- English, XI and XII ; Marathi,
nours and Marathi), M.A. (Eng- X to XII.
lish and Marathi), Bombay.
4. T. P. Bajpai, M.A.Hn English, and English, X to XII ; Hindi,
Hindi (Banares). " XI and XII*
5. Pritam Singh, M.SC. (Physics), Physics, IX to XII ; Mathema*
(Agra). tics, IX.
6. Trilochan Das, M.A. in History (Al- History, IX to XII Economics*
lahabad). XI and XII (Officiating).
7- E. S. Rewadikar, M.SC. (Honours Chemistry, XII to IX, Prao*
in Chemistry) (Bombay), A.I.I.SG* ticaL
Demonstrator.
8. R. V. 1?antoji, M.A. in Sanskrit ( Ali- Sanskrit, XI to XII.
garh).
9. Ganesh Shasfcri Vishwaroop, Shastri Sanskrit, IX, X, XI and XII.
(Honours) Punjab, Acharya-
khanda 4 (Benares).
10. T. S. Gokhale, B.SO. (Allahabad). Mathematics, X ; Marathi, IX,;
Demonstrator. Physics, XII and XI (Practi-
cal).
32
502 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D.
11. Narain Prasad, B.A. (Allahabad). . . English, IX and X.
12. S. K. Shastri, Inter. . . Mathematics, IX.
13. Prahhu Lall, Matrio. . . Urdu and Persian, X.
14. Gokul Das, Matric. . . . . Mathematics, IX and X.
15. Balmukand . . . . Hindi, IX and X.
16. Mohammad Mohtadi . . . . Urdu and Persian, IX.
17. B. V. Koramme, j. jr., School of Arts, Drawing, IX and X.
3rd grade.
INDORE CHRISTIAN COLLEGE, INDORE.
This institution, which is maintained by the United Church of Canada,
was opened as a High School in 1884. In 1888 it was affiliated to the Cal-
cutta University as a College. Coming in 1904 under the jurisdiction of
the University of Allahabad, it was recognized by the latter as one of its
affiliated Colleges, until its Intermediate department was brought under
the Board.
The buildings and grounds are within the limits of the Indore Besidency
Area. Four members of the staff reside on the premises.
There is hostel accommodation for about 125 students. These make
their own messing arrangements, the College providing kitchens, utensils,
tc., if desired.
The library is well-equipped, and affords opportunity for extensive
reading. The reading-room is furnished with English and Vernacular
papers and magazines. There are also recreation rooms for in-door games.
The students' organizations comprise an Economic Club, an Anthro-
pological Society, Dramatic Club, Debating Society, and the usual Athle-
tic Associations.
A number of freeships and exemptions are open to students of Central
India.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Rev. H. W. Lyons, B.A. (Honours) Economics Supervisor, XI and
Toronto, Political Economy, XII.
Acting Principal.
2. Rev. C. F. Grant, M.A. in History European History, XI and XII.
and Philosophy (Dalhousie).
3. C. P. Shashtree, M.A. in Sanskrit Sanskrit, XI and XII.
(Allahabad).
4. P. N. Bhattacharya, M.A. in Pure Mathematics, XI and 11.
Mathematics (Calcutta).
6. B. B. Singh, B.A. in English and English, XII.
Philosophy (Madras).
. N. C. Chatterji, M.A. in Philosophy, Indian History, XI ; English,
L.T. (Allahabad). XII.
7. R. N. Langer, M.A. in Political Economics, XI and XII.
Economy (Agra).
JLPP. D.] LIST OF THE TEACHING STAFF 503
8. C. P. Brahmo, M.A. in Sanskrit, Logic, XI and XII ; English,
LL.B. (Aligarh). XII.
9. Thomas Mathewa, B.A. in History English, XI ; Indian History,
and Persian (Agra). XII.
10. C. W. David, B.A. in Philosophy English, XI.
and Mathematics (Agra).
HOLKAR COLLEGE, INDORE.
This College was founded in 1891 by His Highness the Maharaja Sivaji
Rao Holkar, G.O.S.I., and is maintained by the Government of His Highness
the Maharaja Holkar.
The monthly tuition fee is Rs. 3 for Intermediate students. There are
many free-studentships and a sum of Rs. 20 per mensem is distributed in
competitive scholarships and about Rs. 45 annually in prizes.
The fine College buildings are situated in an open space outside the
immediate precincts of the city of Indore and comprise a handsome main
structure containing a physics laboratory, a library, a reading room, and
lecture rooms flanked on either side by boarding houses for upwards of 60
students, a gymnasium and a separate block for Chemistry, and Science
lecture rooms.
INSTRUCTIVE STAFF.
1. Praphulla Chandra Basu, ph.D. Economics, XI and XII.
(Cal.) Economics, M.A. (Cal.), His-
tory and Economics, B.L., Princi-
pal.
2. Charles A. Dobson, B.A., M.R.A.S.,
Vice-Principal.
3. S. S. Deshpande, M.sc. (Allahabad), Chemistry, XI and XII.
Ph.D. (London) Chem., Associate
of the Institute of Chemistry,
Associate of the Royal College
of Science.
4. H. Ghosh, M.A. in English (Calcutta), English, XI and XII.
1st class second.
6. I. J. ftornelius, M.A. in Mathematics Mathematics, XII.
(Allahabad).
6. Syed Saghir Ali, M.A. in Persian Persian, XI and XII.
and Arabic (Allahabad).
7. V. B. Shrikhande, M.A. in Philosophy Logic, XII.
(Bombay) Dakshina Fellow and
Padhya Prizeman, D^coan College,
Poona, LL.B, (Bombay).
504 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. D.
8. N. Padmanabha Shastri, M.A. in Physics, Xt and XII.
Physics (Madras).
9. Sailandra Nath Dhar, M.A. in His- History, XI and XII.
tory, (Calcutta), 1st class, second
Medalist and Prizeman.
10. L. C. Dhariwal, M.A. in Economics Economics, XI and XII.
(Allahabad) 2nd class, LL.B.
(Allahabad).
11. Shriniwas Chaturvedi, M.A. in Sans- Sanskrit and Hindi, XI ; Hindi,
krit (Allahabad). XII.
12. W. G. Urdhwareshe, M.A. in Sans- Marathi, XI and XII.
krit (Allahabad), M.B.A.S., Kavya
Tirtha, Calcutta.
13. V. G. Gole, M.A. in Mathematics Mathematics, XI.
(Allahabad) B.SC. in English
(Allahabad), Mathematics, Physics
and Chemistry (Allahabad), LL.B.
(Allahabad).
14. D. M. Borgaonkar, M.A. in English English, XI arid XII.
(Allahabad), 2nd class, United
Provinces Government Research
scholar.
15. Jwala Prasad Singhal, M.A. in Eco- Economics, XI and XII ; Logio>
nomics and LL.B., (Allahabad), XI.
F.B.E.S., and F.R.S.A.
16. Kesarilal Bordia, M.A. in English English, XI and XII,
(Punjab).
17. S. V. Chitale, M.SC. in Physica (Al- Physics Practical.
lahabad).
18. Parana Sukh Mathur, M.SC. in Che- Chemistry Practical.
mistry (Allahabad).
19. Kamala Shankar Mishra, B.A. (Al- Sanskrit and Hindi, XI; Sans-
lahabad). krit, XII.
20. K. P. Rassay, B.SC. in English, Chemistry Practical.
Mathematics, Physics, and Che-
mistry (Allahabad).
21. Y. R. Shintre, B.SC. in English, Physios Practical.
Mathematics, Physics and Che-
mistry (AUaha%ad).
ABP. B.] MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS OF TEACHERS $05
APPENDIX E.
Minimum qualifications prescribed for Teachers in recog-
nized High Schools and Intermediate Colleges.
I. Principal of Intermediate College
2. Head Master of High School
A graduate with experience
of teaching in High School
and Intermediate or higher
classes amounting in all
to not less than five years,
B.A., L.T., or M.A., M.So.,
(exparience ia essential).
3. (a) Assistant Master teaching classes XT M.A. or M.Sc. preferably
and XII in English, Logic, also L.T.
History, Mathematics, Physics,
Chemistry or Economics.
(6) Assistant Master teaching Biology M.Sc., in Zoology or Botany.
to Intermediate classes.
(c) Assistant Master teaching Civics to M.A. in Civics or History.
Intermediate classes.
4. Demonstrator for Intermediate classes B.Sc., preferably also L,T.
in Science.
/(a) Aoharya of the Benares N
Sanskrit College,
or
Sanskrit Teacher forj (6) Acharya or Shastri of the |
classes XI and^ Benares Hindu Uni-
XII.
Persian and Arabic /
Teacher
classes XI
for
and
versity, or
(c) M.A. in Sanskrit, or
(d) Qhastri, B.A. of the Pun-
. Jab.
/(a) Fazil of Allahabad, or
(6) Maulvi Fazil or Munshi
Fazil of the Punjab,
or
(c) Fazil (in Arabic) of Luck-
now University, or
(d) Dabir-i-Kamil (in Per-
sian) of Lucknow Uni-
versity, or
(?) M.A. in Persian or Ara-
bic,
or
(/) Kamil Examination in
Persian (Allahabad), '
with a Buffi*
cient fenow-
) ledge of
Eaglish.
with a suffi-
cient know-
ledge
506 CALBNDAE 1928-29 [APP*
7. Urdu Teacher for
classes XI and XII. ,
/M.A. in Urdu as far as possible ; failing that
B.A. with Urdu as an optional subject,
or
(1) Kamil Fxamination of the Department
or Dabir-i-Kamil Examination of the
Lucknow University
N and
(2) The Intermediate Examination in English
only,
and
(3) The Departmental Examination in Ad-
vanced Urdu.
8. Hindi Teacher for ( M.A. in Hindi as far as possible ; failing that,
classes XI and XII. ij. B.A. with Hindi as an optional subject*
9. Drawing Teacher for f Drawing Teachers' Training Certificate of the
classes XI and XII. { Government School of Arts and Crafts,
(^ L'icknow *.
10. Head Master of &\
Middle School f B.A. or B.Sc. preferably trained or ex-
1 1 . Assistant Masters in ( perienced.
High Sections. )
12. Assistant Masters in Intermediate certificate or S. L. C., C. T.
Middle and Primary
Sections.
13. Science Masters in B. Sc., preferably trained.
High or Middlt Schools.
/(a) Teachers' Senior Certificate Examination ,.
( Mayo School of Arts, Lahore, or
\ (b) Third grade Arts School Examination,
j Bombay, or
14. Drawing Masters ( (c) Final Drawing Teachership Examination,
Calcutta, or
(d) Drawing Teachers' Training Certificate of
the Government School of Arts and
Crafts, Lucknow. f
f(a) Complete Madhyama of Benares, or
5. Head Pandit or Se- | (6) Madhyama of the Benares Hindu Univet-
cond Pandit in a^ sity, or
Hig h or Middle | (c) Shastri of the Punjab.
School. L
f (a) Maulvi or Alim or Fazil of Allahabad, or
16. Head Maulvi or Se- (b) Fazil (in Arabic) of the Lucknow Univer-
cond Maulvi in a High I sity, or
or Middle School. v r) Dabir-i-Kemil (it Persian) of the Lucknow
Univeisity, or
(tl) Kamil (Allahabad*. ,
*The qualifications, experience, etc,, of teachers of High School classes-
teaching the subject to these classes in recognised High Schools previous
to 1928, but not posfessing the above certificate of the Government School
of Arts and Crafts, Luiknow, will te considered on their merits.
tin the case of future new appointments of Di awing Masters in recog-
nised High Schools preference will be given to holders of this certificate*.
Drawing Masters at present confirmed in their appointments will be eli?
gible for future new appointment equally with the holdeia of this certi-
ficate.
AFP. B.] MINIMUM QUALIFICATIONS OF TEACHERS 507
17. Urdu Teacher in a V. T. C. with Munshi qualification of Allah-
High School. abad.
(a) V. T. C. with the Prathma Pariksha of the
Benares Sanskrl
18. Hindi Teacher n a
High School.
19. Commerce Teacher for
High School classes.
20. Commerce Teacher
for the Commercial
Diploma classes.
21. Teacher of Agricul-
ture for classes IX
and X.
22. Teacher for the
Agricultural Dip-
loma classes.
(6) B.A. with Hindi as an opt'onal (subject
or
(c) (1) The Prathama Examination of the
Government Sanskrit Colleg3, Benares,
or the Praveshika Examination of the
Benares Hindu Uoivoisity
and
(2) Tho Intermediate Examination of the
Beard of Hiph School and Interme-
diate Education or an Examination
recognised as equivalent thereto with
Hindi as on^ of the optional subjects
or
(d) (I) The Prathma Examination of the Go-
vernment Sanskrit College, Benares, or
ths Praveshika Examination of the
Benares Hindu University
and
(2) The departmental advanced Examin-
ation in Hindi
and
(3) The High Schoo- Examination of the
Board of High School, and Interme-
diate Education or an Examination
v recognised as equivalent thereto.
Commercial Diploma of the Board of High
School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces.
M.A., B. Com. or C.D. (for Shorthand and
Typewriting).
Intermediate Diploma or higher Agricultural
Degree.
Licentiate of Agriculture, or
(b) Bachelor of Agriculture, or
| ('*) B.So., in Agriculture, or
\ (d) Higher degree in Agriculture of any re-
cognised College.
N.B. No minimum qualifications are for the present prescribed for the
following subjects recognised for the Intermediate Examination. The
qualifications of teachers in these subjects will be considered as individual
oases of institutions applying for recognition arise.
(1) Physiology, Hygiene, and Child- Study (for girls only);
(2) Geography.
508
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. P.
APP, G.] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
509
APPENDIX 6.
List of candidates who have passed the Intermediate
Examination of 1929.
Name of candidate.
NameofCoileye.
1 Abdul Nasir Khan ..
. . Agra College, Agra . .
III
3 Amar Singh
Ditto
II
4 Amar Singh Yadava . .
Ditto
II
5 Amba Prasad Mathur..
Ditto
III
6 Anand Bihari Lai Sinha
Ditto
III
8 Bahadur Singh
Ditto
III
9 Balbir Singh
Ditto
Til
11 Bhagwan S war up
Ditto
rn
14 Bhawani Singh Ranawat
Ditto
II
15 Birendra Singh Batshi
Ditto
III
17 Chand Bahadur
Ditto
III
18 Chandrapal Singh
Ditto
II
1 9 Chaube Jugai Kbhore Pande*
Ditto
I
20 Chhotey Lai Yadava . .
Ditto
III
22 Devendra Kumar
Ditto
II
23 Faqir Chand
Ditto
III
28 Govind Narayan
Ditto
III
29 Hari Har Sircar
Ditto
II
30 Hari Krishna Chaudhri
Ditto
III
35 Jagdamba Prasad Kapoor
Ditto
III
37 Jagdish Prasad Sarbhai
Ditto
III
39 Khyali Ram Tiwari . .
Ditto
III
40 Krishna Charan Agarwal
Ditto
JII
41 Krishna Gopal Sharraa
Ditto
III
42 Kuar Ram Indra Pal Singh
Ditto
II
45 Manik Chandra Chaturvedi
Ditto
III
46 Mohan Chandra Joshi
Ditto
II
62 Nihal Chand
Ditto
III
66 Raja Ram
Ditto
III
59 Rama Shankar
Ditto
II
61 Ram Narain Chaturvedi
Ditto
11
64 Ram Swarup
Ditto
HI
66 Sankatha Sahai Srivastava
Ditto
II
69 Sheobaran Singh Sharma
Ditto
II
70 Sohan Singh
Ditto
III
73 SuraJMal
Ditto
II
* Distinguished in Mathematics*.
510
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. a*
77
Name of candidate.
Syed Rafjq Husain Rizvi
Name of College.
.. Agra College, Agra.
III
82 Ambika Prasad Misra
Ditto
III
84 Baikunth Nath Nagar
Ditto
III
86 Bah am Singh Baswani
Ditto
III
89 Bhagwat Saran Vidyarthi
Ditto
II
90 Bimal Chandra Sirkar
Ditto
II
91 Birendra Pal Singh ..
Ditto
II
92 Bishambhar Nath Srivastava
Ditto
II
93 Brahma Swarup Kashyap
Ditto
II
97 Champa Lai B. Rai
Ditto
II
98 Chandoo Lai Bhatnagar
Ditto
II
101 Devendra Mohan Kasliwal
Ditto
III
102 Devi Prasad Tandon ..
Ditto
II
104 DhakVan Lai Gariia
Ditto
II
105 Dhatri Saran Mathur*
Ditto
I
106 Din Day al Josh i
Ditto
It
107 Dineh Chandra Chaturvedi
Ditto
II
109 Gappu Mai Aqarwala
Ditto
II
111 Girdhar Lai Shamm ..
Ditto
III
116 Har^ndra Naiain
Ditto
III
119 Indra Gupta A/arwjJ
Ditto
II
121 Ishwar Dayal
Ditto
III
) 22 Jagannath Arora
Ditto
II
124 Jagannath Prasad Agarwala
D'tto
III
125 Jagannath Prasad Arora
Ditto
II
127 Jagdiah Bahadur Asthana
Ditto
II
132 Kailas Narain Tankhaf
Ditto
II
J33 Kali Prasad Faizada
Ditto
III
135 Kamta Pi asad Upadhya
Ditto
II
130 Keshav Deo Sharma
Ditto
III
138 Krishna Kumar Govil
Ditto
It
139 Krishna Rao Deo Rao Chauhan . .
Ditto
III
140 Krishna Saran Mathur
Ditto
11
144 Madan Gopal AroraJ
Ditto
I
146 Madho Parsad Jaiswal
Ditto
Ifl
150 Mirza Saeed Habib Hosain
Ditto
III
151 Muhammad Ishaq
Ditto
II
162 Nihal Chandra Jain
Ditto
Jt
154 Om Prakash Kulsreshthaf
Ditto
II
155 Onkar Singh
Ditto
ri
* Distinguished in Mathematics, Physios and Chemistry,
t Distinguished in Chemistry.
{ Distinguished in Mathematics.
APP. G.I
LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
511
Name of candidate. Name of College. j^^
160 Radha Ballabh Bhargava
.. Agra College Agra. .
161 Radha Raman Agarwala*
162 Raghunandan Prasad Garg
163 Raj Bahadur
169 Rameshar Narain Agarwala
170 Rameshwar Prasad
172 Ramesh Swarup
173 Ram Nath Chaturvedi
174 Ram Sharan Agrawal
175 Ratan Lai Bhargava
178 Reshi Kumar Chaturvedi
180 Sachchida Nand Kulsreshtha
182 Shanti Swarup Bhatnagar
185 Shiva Narayan
186 Shiv Narayan Agrwal
189 Shyam Pada Sen
190 Shyam Sunder Chaturvedi
191 Sudershan Lai Paliwal ! .
193 Surendra Singh Bhatnagar
194 Sureshwar Nath
195 Surya Prakash Govel
196 Tara Chand Kala
199 Trilokya Prakash Mittal
Compartmental Under Regulation 18, Chapter
XII of the Boards' Regulations.
Ditto
I
Ditto
II
Ditto
II
Ditto
I
Ditto
ni
Ditto
in
Ditto
ni
Ditto
n
Ditto
n
Ditto
in
Ditto
n
Ditto
n
Ditto
in
Ditto
n
Ditto
n
Ditto
n
Ditto
n
Ditto
n
Ditto
n
Ditto
ii
Ditto
in
Ditto
in
202
Hardwari Saran Bhatnagar
. . Agra College, Agra. .
Passed.
203
Kaikhusro Hormuaji Patei
Ditto
Passed.
205
Akhtar Ali Khan
. . St. John's College,
HI
Agra.
208
Ernest Jeziel Sawai Ram
Ditto
in
210
Gajraj Singh Chauhan
Ditto
in
211
Harold Wilfred Thomas
Ditto
in
214
KajeLal
Ditto
III
218
Mohammad Jalil Siddiqi
D'tto
III
219
Musarrat Husain Zubairif
Ditto
I
220
Pershadi L Sharma . .
Ditto
in
224
Rashid Ahmad Zubairi
Ditto
in
225
Shalbir Raza
Ditto
in
* Distinguished in Chemistry,
f Distinguished in Urdu.
612
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP.
Roll
no.
227
231
235
236
238
240
243
244
245
246
247
248
250
251
257
263
264
265
Name of candidate.
Sukhi Ram Sharma . .
Saiyid Razi-ul Hasan Chishti*
Vinod Rai Antani
Arnold Eric Williams
Azhar All Khanf
Cyril Leslie Olive
Gajraj BahadurJ
Hemant Kumar Basu . .
Isharat Husain
Kanhaiya Lai Tandon
Krishna Murari Lai Misra
Kundan Lai Gupta . .
Maharaj Sarati Kapur
Mohammad Salim Ullah
Muhammad Latif Ullah
Saiyid Muzamrnil Ali . .
Wahid Ullah Khan . .
Zamir Uddin Siddiqi..
Compartmental Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII of the
Board's Regulations.
Keshao Yadaorao Mokaddam Sir-
Nan.eofO^e. **
St. John's College,
III
Agra.
Ditto
I
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
I
Ditto
in
Ditto
i
Ditto
in
Ditto
i
Ditto
it
Ditto
IT
Ditto
in
Ditto
ii
Ditto
[i
Ditto
ni
Ditto
n
Ditto
ii
Ditto
in
deshmukh
266 Amar Chand Aggrawala
St. John's College, Passed.
Agra.
267 Bijai Kumar Roy
268 Ganga Prasad Agarwala
269 Jog Sadhan Kantha ..
272 Muneshwar Dayal . .
273 Murari Lai
274 Parameshwar Dayal Srivastava
275 Prayag Narayan Bajpai
276 Sadh Saran Srivastava
278 Akshai Kumar Srivaatava
279 Anand Prakaah Guptaj|
* Distinguished in Urdu.
t Distinguished in Physios and Chemistry.
J Distinguished in Mathematics, Physios and Chemistry.
Distinguished in Chemistry.
jj Distinguished in Mathematics and Chemistry.
. . Radhasoami Educa-
tional Institute,
Dayalbagh, Agra.
III
Ditto
ill
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
?a . . Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
IT
O.] LIST OP STJOOESSFTJL CANDIDATES 51$
^ Name of candidate.
tatfcu*. $*
280 Ajodhya Nath Gupta alias Ajodhya Radhaswami Educa-
I
Prasad Gupta*
tional institute,
Dayalhagh, Agra.
281 Bankey Behari Lai ..
Ditto
II
282 Bishan Swarup Saxena*
Ditto
II
283 Brij Mohan Johri*
Ditto
I
284 Daya Shankar Daref
Ditto
I
285 Daya 'Prasad Lubdhani*
Ditto
II
286 DwarkaDass
Ditto
n
287 Kanti Vira Gupta*
Ditto
ii
288 Krishna Bahadur Pradhan*
Ditto
i
289 Mahadeo Prasad Bhatnagar ; .
Ditto
n
290 NawalKishor*
Ditto
i
291 Nihal Chand Jain
Ditto
n
293 Onkar Sarup Bhatnagar
Ditto
n
294 Prakash Chandra Bhatia*
Ditto
n
296 Prem Chand Gupta* ..
Ditto
n
297 Prem Shankar Sataangi
Ditto
ii
299 Sant Saran Mehta
Ditto
ii
301 Saran Pi asad Satsangi
Ditto
i
302 Soami Saran Sharma
Ditto
ii
303 Sri Bam Singh
Ditto
ii
304 Surendra Singh Sundoo
Ditto
ii
305 Tirloki Nath Shiva Puri
Ditto
u
Compartmental Under Regulation
IB, Chapter XII of the
Board's Regulations.
306 Sundar Singh . . . . Radhaswami Educa-
Passed.
tional Institute,
Dayalbagh, Agra.
307 Anand Ram Yajnik
Herbert Interme-
IU
diats College,
Kotah.
308 Balaji Bhansaheb Hardo
Ditto
in
312 Inder Sain Sethi
Ditto
ni
815 Mohansinh Bhagi Rathji Mehta . .
Ditto
in
316 Prem $ihari Lai Mathur
Ditto
n
317 Rajenjlra Behari Mathur
Ditto
m
319 Rameshwar Prasad
Ditto
ii
820 Ram Nivas Jindal
Ditto
ni
321 Rattan Chand Batta ..
Ditto
n
322 Sunder Lai Baijal
Ditto
ni
* Difltinguished in Chemistry.
f Distinguished in Physics and Chemistry.
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. G.
Name of candidate.
Name of College. *'
isea tn
.323 Abid Raza
Ewing Christian
III
College, Allah-
abad.
325 Ahmad
Ditto
II
*326 Akbar Htisain Mirza . .
Ditto
III
328 Amrit Lall
Ditto
III
329 Anil Kumar Mukerji . .
Ditto
III
330 An^ ar Husain
Ditto
in
"332 Balbhadra Krishna . .
Ditto
in
333 Bftlbhadra Prasad Srivastava
Ditto
ITI
336 Bhagwan Dass Gupta. .
Ditto
in
337 Bhagwati Lai JShah . .
Ditto
in
339 Bihari Lai
Ditto
ii
340 Bindeshwari Pra*ad . .
Ditto
in
341 Bir Singh
Ditto
ii
342 Bishwambhar Dat Bhatt
Ditto
u
344 Chandra Sirgh Rawat
Ditto
ii
345 Chandika Prasad Sinha
Ditto
in
347 Diwakar Prasad Pande
Ditto
in
349 Ganga Prasad
Ditto
in
350 Girdhari Lai Goenka . .
Ditto
in
364 Iftakhar Hasan
Ditto
in
355 Imdad Husain Khan . .
Ditto
ii
.357 Indra Singh
Ditto
in
359 Jagannath Prasad Misra
Ditto
ii
361 James Sath Morar
Ditto
ii
,363 Keshava Prasad Pathak
Ditto
in
365 Krishna Nand Singh . .
Ditto
in
369 Lakshmi Shankar Lai. .
Ditto
in
370 Lai Bahadur Lai Srivastava
Ditto
in
371 Lai Bihari Singh
Ditto
in
372 Lai Chakradhar Singh
Ditto
ii
373 Mahbub Ahmad
Ditto
Hi
374 Mahendra Shankar Pande
Ditto
II
377 Markanday Lai Srivastava
Ditto
ill
379 Mata Pra al Awasthy
Ditto
ill
.380 Mohd. Masud Ail Khan
D.tto
ii
381 Mohammad Ahmad . .
Ditto
u
382 Mohammad Aaim Khan
Ditto
in
383 Mohammad Ayub Ansari
Ditto
in
384 Mohammad Ishaq*
Ditto
ii
* Distinguished in Mathematics.
XPP. G.] LIST OF SXTOOBSSB'tTL CANDIDATES
515
Roll ,, . ,., M
no Name of candidate.
-385 Mohammad Mustafa Khan
. . Ewing Christian
III
College Allah-
abad.
387 Mohan Lai
Ditto
II
388 Mnhammad Kamil . .
Ditto
III
389 Muhamma 1 Zia-ud-din
Ditto
II
390 Narbadi Pramd Srivastava
Ditto
iir
'391 Nelson PhiHpp
Ditto
n
393 Pratap Bahadur Chaudbry
Ditto
in
396 Qamar Hasan Khan
Ditto
in
397 Rahas Bihiri Laii Srivastava
Ditto
in
40) RinaCiiaranDu
Ditto
in
401 Ram Kali Lai Ag^rwala
Ditto
in
402 Ram Kishore Malaviya
D.tto
n
403 Ram Prasad Rawat . .
Ditto
in
405 Rama Kant Tewari . .
Ditto
in
407 Rup Narain Upadhya
Ditto
in
408 Saghir Ahmad
Ditto
in
409 Saiyid A!i Hasan Naqvi
Ditto
in
410 Saiyed Kibsjr Hisan Rizvi
D tto
in
412 Satyed Rizwan Husain
Ditto
in
413 Saiyid Ahmad
Ditto
in
414 Saiyid Hamid Hasan . .
Ditto
n
415 Saiyid Jafar Raza
Ditto
in
417 Sayid Mahammad Akbar Raza
Ditto
n
421 Surendra Narayaii Miara
Ditto
in
423 Syed Mohammad Jafar
Ditto
n
425 Thakur Shiva Nath Singh
Ditto
m
426 Trilold Nath Goyal ..
Ditto
n
427 Upendra Nath Chaturvedi
Ditto
in
428 Viet >r Crossly Simon . .
Ditto
in
429 Vireshwar Singh
Ditto
m
430 Vishnu Prasad Sharma
Ditto
in
431 Wellington Joab
Ditto
m
433 Ale Hasan
Ditto
in
434 Amanat Ali
Ditto
n
435 Amar B.lash Roy
Ditto
n
436 Anwar Ali
Ditto
n
437 AsgharAli
Ditto
n
438 Bajrang Bahadur Srivastaya*
Ditto
i
* Distinguished in Chemistry.
516
CALENDAR 1928*29
APP. G.
Name of Candida e.
440 Balkriahna Sridhar Kale
Name of CoUege.
Bwing Christian
II
College, Allaha-
bad.
441 Basant Ram Nagar
Ditto
II
442 Batuk Nath Agarwal
Ditto
II
443 Bhuban Chandra Joshi
Ditto
II
445 Christopher Stephens
Ditto
III
447 George Nath
Ditto
III
448 Ghulam Qadir Farid
Ditto
II
451 Guru Sewak Sinha
Ditto
I
455 Ismail Ahmad Minai . .
Ditto
II
456 Iqbal Bahadur Hukkoo*
Ditto
I
457 Jagdish Chandra Josh
Ditto
II
459 Jagdishwar Sahai
Ditto
II
461 Janardan Prasad Shukla
Ditto
II
463 Kamala Kant Sinha
Ditto
III
464 Keshab Chandra Dobhai*
Ditto
II
467 Kuar Balbir Singh
Ditto
II
469 Muhammad Fazalul Karim Sid-
Ditto
II
diqui.
470 Madan Mohan Dubey
Ditto
III
471 Mahesh Prasad Khanna
Ditto
III
472 Mano Ranjan Chaudhary
Ditto
II
473 Mirza Fahim Begf
Ditto
I
475 Muhammad Khalil
Ditto
II
477 Muhammad Latif Zar Hashimi . .
Ditto
III
479 Muhammad Husain
Ditto
in
481 Nirmal Kumar Roy
Ditto
ii
482 Prem Govind Prasad
Ditto
ii
483 Promode Ranjan Mookherjeef
Ditto
i
484 Radha Charan Verma
Ditto
ni
485 Rajendra Bahadur Lai*
Ditto
ii
486 Ram Datta Tewari J ..
Ditto
i
487 Ram Lakh an Singh
Ditto
ii
489 Sampat Raj Mathur
Ditt ,.
i
492 Satya Deo Misra
Ditto
ii
493 Satyendra Nath Chatterjee
Ditto
ii
496 Shamfl, Charan Chatter ji*
Ditto
ii
496 Shankha Dhar Singh ..
Ditto
ii
* Distinguished in Chemistry.
t Distinguished in Mathematics and Chemistry.
I Distinguished in Mathematics.
APP. a.] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
517
Boll
no.
497
498
499
500
502
504
506
Name of candidate.
Shanti Moy Ghosh . .
Name of Ccllege.
Ewing Christian
College, Allaha-
bad.
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
508
509
510
511
512
Shivdayal Saksena . . . .
Sudhir Kumar Mukherji*
Sushil Kumar Banerji
Tansukh Lai Ratan Shankar Vaish-
nav.
Vasudeo Moreshwar Ranade . . Ditto . ,
Vishnu Chandra Gupta . , Ditto
Compartmental Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII of
the Board's Regulations.
Inamul Haqq . . . . Ewing Christian
College, Allaha-
Jiwan Sinha Chordia . .
Shiva Bihari Misra
Vishnu Nath Goyal . .
Additioi
Chandra Kanta Prasad
Passed in
division.
ir
1
Tl
IT
lit
II
II
Passed.
513 Attendriya Bhattacherji
514 Bhagwan Swarup
515 Baij Nath Sinha
516 Badri Beshal
517 Brij Nandan Lai Srivastava
518 Brahma Swarup Bhatnagar
521 Bhagwat Swarup Gupta
522 Chhail Behari Lai
523 Chauharja Lai Srivastava
525 Deo Narain Lai Srivastava
526 Durga Prasad
527 Girija Nand Lai
530 Gur Charan Prasad Sinha
531 Girish Chandra Varma
636 Iqbal Bahadur Singh
641 Jagdish Prasad Upadhyaya
542 Kuber Nath Srivastava
544 Krishna Bihari Lai ..
545 Kameshwar Nath Srivastava
646 Kailash Chandra Verma
bad.
Ditto
Passed.
Ditto
Passed.
Ditto
Passed.
itional Subject.
Ewing Christian
College, Allaha-
bad.
. . Kayastha Pathshala
Intermediate Col-
lege, Allahabad.
Passed.
Ill
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
I
Ditto
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
: Distinguished in Chemistry.
33
518
CALENDAB 1928-29
[APP. G.
547
549
550
552
553
555
556
557
558
560
562
563
565
566
567
573
574
576
577
579
580
584
586
587
588
589
592
594
596
600
601
602
603
605
606
611
612
616
617
618
619
Name of candidate.
Lalta Prasad Srivastava
Manohar Saran K am than
Mata Din Lai Srivastava
Maheshwar Dayal
Mukund Lai Mehrotra
Prithvi Nath Bajpai . .
Prajesh Chan Ira Banerji
Rama Kant Verma
Rama Nand Jha
Rajindra Nath
Rai Bahadur
Ram Narain Kapcor . .
Rajeshwari Prafad
Ram Singh .Ja(.dhari ..
Raghunath Das
Surendra Nath
Shankar Swarup Bhatnagar
Shiva Shankar
Vishnu Dinkar Kher
Ayodhya Prasad Srivastava
Ayodhya Prasad Singh
Babban Prasad Singh . .
Badri Prasad
Baij Nath Singh
Balgovind Prasad
Durga Prasad Maole . .
Har Shankar Prasad . .
Indu Bhushan Mittra
Kamala Prasad Rai
Krishna Avatar Nirmal
Kudur Prayag Raja Rao
Kamala Kant Varma
Lakshmi Sahay Mathur
Murli Dhar Lai Srivastava*
Manohar Nath Mathur
Prabhat Kumar Banerji
Prithivi Raj Gupta
Rameshwar Chandra Asthana
Ramji Srivastava
Ram Dhari Lai
Ram Kumar Saxena . .
Name of College.
Passed in
. . Kayastha Pathshala
Intermediate Col-
lege, Allahabad.
Ditto
m **m
11
Ditto
11
Ditto
11
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
111
Ditto
1
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
in
Ditto
111
Ditto
111
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
Ii
Ditto
11
Ditto
rn
Ditto
in
Ditto
ii
Ditto
in
Ditto
n
Ditto
in
Ditto
ii
Ditto
ii
Ditto
ii
Ditto
i
Ditto .<.
UI
Ditto
ii
Ditto
ii
Ditto
11
Ditto
ii
Ditto
ii
Ditto
in
* Distinguished in Biology.
APP. G.] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
519
no Name of candidate.
Name of College.
Passed in
division.
623 Romesh Chandra Chatterji
Kayastha Pathshala
II
Intermediate Col-
lege, Allahabad.
624 Shri Radhe Charan Sahai Sinha . .
Ditto
II
625 Shashadar Datta
Ditto
II
626 Shiva Dahin Lai ' ..
Ditto
III
631 Tribhuan Nath Srivastava
Ditto
III
635 Vishnu Narayan Khanna
Ditto
III
636 Arnold Ern?st John Sewell
Boys' Intermediate
111
College, Allah a-
bad.
637 Mervyn Hugh Hardaker
Ditto
III
638 Badri Narain Sinha
Anglo- Bengali Intftr-
III
mediate College,
Allahabad.
639 Hari Har Prasad Chaube
Ditto
III
640 % Moni Mohan Bhattacharya
Ditto
III
641 Sadananda Mukerji
Ditto
11
642 Amar Nath Kapoor
Government Inter-
I
mediate College,
Allahabad.
643 Anand Narain Mathur
Ditto
III
644 Anand Narain Razdan
Ditto
H
645 Aon Muhammad Khan* -
Ditto
I
646 Baman Das Mukerji
Ditto
11
648 Brahman Saran Mathur
Ditto
II
650 Ganga Prasad Tiwari
Ditto
II
651 Habib-ul-Aziz
Ditto
II
652 Jugal Kishore Shukla
Ditto
lit
653 Kailash Nandan Prasad
Ditto
II
655 Madan Mohan Kulshrestha
Ditto
II
656 Madan Mohan Swarup
Ditto
II
657 Moti Lai Kakkar
Ditto
II
658 Navendra Nath Varma
Ditto
II
659 liiranjfw Chandra Maitra
Ditto
III
660 J Nisha Nath Chatterji..
Ditto
II
661 Percival Joseph Fonceca
Ditto
III
662 Perry Noel Scwake
Ditto
II
663 Prahlad Chandra Mathur
Ditto
11
665 Prem Chandra Mathur
Ditto
II
666 Provash Chandra Mukerji
Ditto
II
* Distinguished in Chemistry.
520 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. G.
^ Name of candidate.
Nanie of College,
Passed in
division.
667 Raghunath Prasad Tandan
Government Inter-
11
mediate College,
Allahabad.
668 Bam Murti Capoor
Ditto
11
669 Katneshwar Dayal Bhatnagar* . .
Ditto
I
670 Saiyid Akhtar Husain
Ditto
III
671 Sankata Charan Bhattacharya . .
Ditto
II
672 Santosh Kumar Srivastava
Ditto
II
673 Udai Pratap Narayan Singh
Ditto
11
674 Vasant Anand Eamji Mehtaf
Ditto
I
Compartmental Under Regulation 18,
Chapter XII of the Board's
Regulations.
675 Parch anaii Chattcrjee . . Government Inter-
Passed
mediate College,
Allahabad.
676 Abdul Bashir
Ditto
III
677 Aditya Prasad Tewary
Ditto
11
678 Anand Kumar Vatal . .
Ditto
I
670 Bhrigunnath Praead Rai
Ditto
II
680 Chhabi Narayan Towari
Ditto
III
681 Farid-ul-Haque
Ditto
II
682 Girish Chandra Srivastava}
Ditto
' I
683 John Eric Mark Drummond
Ditto
II
685 Madhur Behari Lai Srivastava . .
Ditto
II
686 Mahesh Ram Mullick
Ditto
111
687 Mohammad Abu Jafar
Ditto
II
688 Muhammad Idris
Ditto
11
689 Narmada Prasad Dikahit
Ditto
II
690 Radha Krishna
Ditto
HI
691 Saiyid Muhammad Fakhir
Ditto
,n
692 Saiyid Mohammad Ilyas Alvi
Ditto
ii
693 SatchitaNand
Ditto
ii
694 TribhuanNath
Ditto
in
695 Uma Shankar Tripathi
Ditto
HI
699 Muktamala Winifred Rawam* (Miss)
Crosthwaito Girls*
ii
College, Allaha-
bad.
700 Nirmala Mukerjee (Miss)
Ditto
ii
701 Rajeshwari Tiwari (Mrs.)
Ditto
HI
702 Ramavati Bhatnagar (Mrs.)
Ditto
ii
* Distinguished in Mathematics and Chemistry.
t Distinguished in Chemistry.
t Distinguished in Logic.
APP. G.] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES 521
^0 Name of candidate.
Naftta of Coll&ffc . ....
d \ i'i&t09i>.
703 Sabita Chaudri (Miss.)
.. Crosthwaite Girls' II
College Allaha-
bad.
704 Subarana Chatterjee (Miss)
Ditto .. II
705 Sudakhshina Verma (Miss)
Ditto .. II
706 Anwar Shah Khan
.. Government Inter- III
madiate College,
Almora.
707 Asoka Prokash Banerji
Ditto .. II
708 Bhairab Dat Pant
Ditto .. Ill
710 Devendra Prasad Joshi
Ditto .. II
711 DuIareyLal
Dtt> .. Ill
7 1 2 Girish Chandra Pand 3
Ditto .. II
714 Jeewan Chandra Pant
Ditto . . II
715 Nand Kishore Khandelwal
Ditto .. II
716 Nitya Nand Misra* ..
Ditto . . II
720 Amba Dat Joshi
Ditto .. [II
722 Daya Nand Josh If
Ditto .. I
723 Girish Chandra Uprety
Ditto . . HI
726 Murli Dhar Joshi
Ditto .. II
728 Ram Prasad Tamta . .
Ditto .. Ill
729 Abdul Hakim Khan . .
.. Bareilly College, [[I
Bareilly.
730 Abdul Hamid Khan . .
Ditto .. HI
733 Anup Narain Srivastava
Ditto .. [II
734 Azhar Husain
Ditto .. Ill
739 Dorabjee Framjee Poonawala
Ditto . . HI
740 Harish Chandra
Ditto .. IIT
742 Jagdteh Swarup Hajailay
Ditto .. HI
743 Jageshwar Nath
Ditto .. Ill
744 ,[anki Ballabh Saran Singh
Ditto .. Ill
745 Keshava Charan
Ditto . . ' 111
746 Krishna Gopal Sharroa
Ditto .. Ill
753 Mahmud Raza Khan . .
Ditto . . II
7if5 Mohammad Sabir Husain
Ditto .. Ill
758 Mottammad Baqa Ullah Khan . . Ditto . . Ill
759 Muhammad Jamilur Rahman
Ditto .. Ill
Qureshi.
763 Radhey Raman
Ditto .. Ill
764 Raghunandan Prasad Johri
Ditto .. ll
765 Rahas Bihari Lai Mathur
Dtto .. Ill
* Distinguished
in Sanskrit.
f Distinguished
in Chen,istry.
522
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. G.
Name of candidate.
no. '
766 Raja Bahadur Singh . .
767 Kam Narain Chaudhri
769 Ram Shanker Sukul . .
770 Ram Swamp
722 Saiyid Manzur Husain
773 Sayed Mazhar Hasan
774 Seth Ram Rakshpal Agarwala
775 Shanti Prasad Johri . .
778 Shree Narain Vaish . .
780 Syed Muzaffar Ali Zaidee
791 Virendra Mohan Chaudhri
783 Yaqub Husain
785 Akhilesh Chandra Kanchan
786 Amar Nath Kapur ..
787 Basant Kumar
788 Basheshur Nath
789 Brij Rai Kishan
791 Gir Raj Kishan
795 John Sinclair Barrow
796 Kishen Narain
797 Krishna Gopal Agarwal
01 Madan Mohan Lai Agarwala
804 Nasir Sultan Ali Khan
806 Prem Narain
807 Prem Narain Saksena . .
811 Rameshwar Dayal Agarwala
812 Rama Nand Saksena . .
813 Ram Premangshu Maitra
816 Satish Chandra Gupta
819 Sheo Ratan Singh
Compartmental Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII of the Board's
Regulations.
AT f si 11 Passed in
Name, of College. divi8i(m .
Bareilly College,
Barf 'illy.
HI
. Ditto
in
Ditto
n
Ditto
rn
Ditto
in
Ditto
in
Ditto
ni
mto
in
Ditto
TI
Ditto
HL
Ditto
111
Ditto
111
Ditto
ir
Ditto
ii
Ditto
ITT
Ditto
I!
Ditto
IIT
Ditto
IT
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
II
Ditto
u
823 Urna Shakar Jauhari . .
824 Austen Kouwen
825 Douglas Dixie
826 Esmond Arnold Beetles
328 Patrick Brockcn
829 Vernon Dudley Lewtey
Bareilly College,
Bareilly.
St. Joseph's College,
Naini Tal.
Ditto ..
Ditto ..
Ditto . .
Ditto . .
Passed.
H
II
II
II
II
APP. a.]
LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
Roll
no.
Name, of candidate.
Na^,,/^,.
Passed in
830
William Walter Fay
St. Joseph's College,
11
Nairn Tal.
831
William Whittaker
Ditto
II
832
Abdul Khallq
Qu.*3ii'rf Interme-
111
diate College,
Benares.
833
Aditya Prasad
Ditto
II
834
Aditya Prasanna Roy
Ditto
III
835
Anant Pandey*
Ditto
I
837
Baij Nath Singh
Ditto
III
838
Bhami Das Haldar
Ditto
III
839
Bhola Nath Ghosh
Ditto
1U
840
Bhupendra Nath Bhattaeharya . .
Ditto
III
842
Byomkesh Chandra Chakravarti . .
Ditto
II
844
Dina Nath Khanna
Ditto
II
845
Dost Muhammad
Ditto
III
847
Ganpat Sahae Sri vast ava
Ditto
III
848
Ghulam Husain
Ditto
III
851
Gulab Sinh
Ditto
III
852
Harikeshwar Nath Singh
Ditto
III
853
Ishwar Deo Rai
Ditto
III
854
Jai Singh
Ditto
III
856
Kuber Nath
Ditto
II
857
Madan Mohan Mehrotra
D.tto
III
868
Madhu Sudan Das
Ditto
III
859
Muhammad Hamidullah Abulkhairi
Ditto
III
861
Muhammad Usman
Ditto
III
862
Muhammad Zubair Siddiqi
Ditto
III
863
Murli Dhai*
Ditto
II
864
Najm-ud-din Ahmad
Ditto
III
865
Nand Kishore Pande
Ditto
III
866
Narendra Bahadur Singh.
Ditto
III
868
Parmeshwari Prasad Srivastava . .
Ditto
III
869
Pro vat Kumar Mukherji
Ditto
III
870
Raja Ram Dhundhiraj Gadgil
Ditto
11
876
Ram*Narayan Tewari
Ditto
II
877
Ram Pratap
Ditto
III
878
Ram Raj Rai
Ditto
III
880
Saiyid Karamat Husain
Ditto
Ilf
881
Santosh Kumar Banerji
' Ditto
lit
882
Sarda Nand Singh . . , ,
Ditto
IL
883
Satya Narain Prasad . .
Ditto
III
' Distinguished in Mathematics.
S24
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. G.
no Name of candidate.
Name of College. P g
884 Shailawati Prasad
Queen's Inter me- III
diate College,
Benares.
886 Sudhanshu Bhushan Chatterji* ,
Ditto .. 1
889 Tarkeshwar Tewari ..
Ditto .. II
890 Umrao Singh
Ditto .. II
891 AbdusSa!am
Ditto .. Ill
892 Amiya Kanti Mukerjea
Ditto . . Ill
893 Avadh Narayan Singh
Ditto .. II
894 Bala Prasad
Ditto .. II
895 Banwari Rai Sharma . .
Ditto .. FIT
896 Bhupendra Mohan Bauer ji
Ditto .. II
897 Birendra Nath Bagchi
Ditto .. Ill
898 Chintal Ram Narain Rcddy
Ditto .. Ill
899 Dvij Dev Sharma
Ditto .. Ill
900 Gur Charan Das
Ditto . . II
902 Harish Chandra Varma*
Ditto .. I
903 Har Narain Simha . .
Ditto . . II
904 Indu Bhushan Malik ..
Ditto .. II
905 Jiwan Das*
Ditto . . I
907 Kali Prasanno Sircarf
Dtto .. II
908 Kashi Naresh Lai
Ditto .. II
910 Keshava Nath Singh . .
Ditto .. 11
917 NarottamDas
Ditto .. Ill
919 Rishi Bhajan Misra* ..
Ditto . . I
920 Sachindra Narayan Munshi
Ditto .. ][
922 Sharda Prasad
Ditto .. II r
923 Satya Charan Mukerji
Ditto .. II F
927 Suresh Chandra Tewary
Dtto .. II
Compartmental -Under Regulation
18. Chapter XII of the Board's
Regulations.
929 GirishSahae
. Queen's Interme- Passed.
diate College,
Benares.
930 Ambika Singh
. Udai Pratab College, III
and Hewett
Kshattriya School,
Benares.
932 Bhrigu Nath Singh ..
Ditto .. Ill
933 Braj Bihari Singh
Ditto .. Ill
* Distinguished in Mathematics.
1 Distinguished in Physics.
APP. 0.] LIST OP SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES 52
Roll
no.
Name of candidate.
Name of College. P
riSoT
934
Dharam Raj Singh
Udai Pratab College
in
and Ebwett
Kshattriya School,
Benares.
935
Hazari Singh
Ditto
n
1)36
Jadgish Narain Singh
Ditto
in
937
Jhinku Singh
Ditto
in
938
Lakshmi Narain Singh
Ditto
in
939
Lakshmi Shankar Singh
Ditto
n
940
Mar Kanday Singh
D.tto
in
943
Ram Krishna Singh Gaharwar
Ditto
in
944
Shiva Shankar Singh
Ditto
n
945
Shukdeo Narayan Singh Gautam
Ditto
in
U46
Suraj Bali Singh
Ditto
in
948
Udai Raj Singh
Ditto
in
949
Venkatcshwar Singh
Ditto
in
950
Vishwa Nath Singh
Ditto
in
951
Miss Indubala Baxi
Theosophical Na-
nr
tional Girls' School
and Women's Col-
lege, B?nares.
952
Mrs. Malati Pandya
D tto
n
953
Miss Padmavati Tilak
Ditto
in
954
Miss Padmavati Tcrway
Ditt:>
n
955
Miss Radha Pyari Mathur
Ditto
in
956
Miss Sati Ram Chandra Barpute . .
Ditto
in
957
Miss Sushila Das
Ditto
n
958
Asa Ram
Christ Church Col-
n
leg?, Cawnpor?.
959
Ashwini Kumar Dube
Ditto
n
963
Anand Shankar
Ditto
in
965
Baikxmth Narain Dube
Ditto
in
968
Baindur Raghuvir Rao*
Ditto
n
969
Chhavi Nandan Prasad Misra
Ditto
in
970
Damodar Das Agarwala
Ditto
it
971
Daya Shankar Misra
Ditto
in
972
Deo Datt Divivedi
Ditto
in
973
Dhyan Pal Singh
Ditto
in
974
Ghanshyam Singh
D.tto
in
976
Harish Chandra Agrawal
Ditto
in
977
Hari Shankar Vidyarthi
Ditto
ii
' Distinguished in Chemistry .
526
CALENDAB 1928-29
[APP. G.
w Xa me of ca ndida te.
N ame ofr n , lf9f . 2rir
978 Harry Jonathan Lambert
Christ Caurch Col-
III
lege, Cawnpore.
980 Jai Narain Tandon
Ditto
II
981 Jagdamba Prasad Pande
Ditto
II
985 Krishna Bahadur Srivastava
Ditto
III
987 Kripa Shankar Pathak
Ditto
II
988 Mumtaz Husain Haidery
Ditto
II
990 Maqsud Khan
Ditto
It
993 Mahabir Prasad Tripathi
Ditto
11
994 Manmohan Lai Gupta
D.tto
III
996 Nathaniel Wishard
Ditto
III
997 Purna Chandra Sen
Ditto
II
1000 Rameshwar Nath Bhalla
Dtto
11
1001 Raghubir Singh
D tts
III
1003 Rudra Nand Misra ..
Ditto
III
1005 Ramefh^ar Nath Muttoo
Ditto
111
1006 Ramratan Lai Maihar*
Ditto
II
1007 Ram Swarcop Trivedi
D.tto
in
1009 Shriiang Hari Divekar
D.tto
n
101 1 Satish Chandra Dube
Dtto
rn
1012 Surya Kumar Shukla
Ditto
in
1013 Shiva Singh
Ditto
in
1014 Shyam Bahadur Srivastava
D tto
in
1017 Shyam Sunder Sharma
Ditto
n
1018 Shyam Krishna Agarwala Jahana-
badi.
Ditto
n
1019 Saiyid Muhammad Ahmad
Ditto
in
1020 Tej Narayan Batham
Ditto
ir
1021 Tiiloki Nath Chaturvedi
Ditto
n
1022 Tej Bahadur Pradhan
Ditto
in
1023 Uttam Chand Dikshit
Dlt.o
in
1025 Vishwanath Raghunath Damle . .
D tto
ii
1026 Viaya Prakash Khattrif
Ditto
I
1028 Yamuna Pi amd
Ditto
in
1031 Angad Prasad Agnihotri
B. N. S. D. Inter-,
n
mediate C)lleg9/
Cawnpore.
1032 Badri Narain Mehrotra
Ditto
ii
1033 Basanta Kumar Banerji
Ditto
in
1034 Chandra Dutt Gupta
Ditto
in
1036 Devi Prasad Dhavan . .
Ditto
in
* Distinguished in Chemistry.
f Dhtingunlnd in Mathematics and Chemistry.
APP G.~| LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
527
Nnm* of candidate.
1039 Oh an hv^TTi Da-?s Agrawal '
1049 Gopi Ballabh A<$rawal
1041 Harish Chandra
1043 Jagdish Natfi Dhavan
1044 .Tata Shankar Tripathi
1045 Kripa Shankar Shukla
1046 Lakshmi Naraya,n Dubp
1048 Munna Lall Barry
1049 Rai Gopi Chandra
lp f r >0 Ramchandra Ganesh Pendharkar
1051 Ram Dayal Singh Yadav
1052 Ram Sanehi Dwivedi
1053 Sagar Mai Agra wal ..
105 i Sheonath Singh
1058 Amar Finch Ymlnva ..
1061 Bal Mukund Gupta . .
1063 Bhagwati Prasad
1064 Bhawa Datt Dwivodi
1065 Bhupal Singh Chandel
1067 BirSen
1068 Brij Bihari Raj Gupta
1069 Chandra Bhal
1071 Chhotay Lall Gupta .,
1072 Chuni Lai Kurichh ..
1073 Decpchand Srivastava
1074 Devendra Swarup
1075 Devi Charan
1077 Dwarka Das
1078 Dwarka Prasad
1079 Gaj Raj Singh
1081 Ghasi Lai Jain
1082 Gyanendra Nath Singh
1083 Gyan Singh
1084 Hanuman Prasad Sharma
1087 Har Prasad
1093 Jagannath Prasad Misra
1091 Jagat Narain Srivastava
1092 Jagdish Narayan Misra
1095 Jang Bahadur Singh (Secundus)
Name of CoUrge. !
ifixed in
B. N. S. D. Inter-
III
mediate College,
Cawnporc .
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
in
Ditto
in
Ditto
in
Ditto
in
Ditto
Tit
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
D. A.-V. Interme-
III
diate College,
Cawnporc 1 .
Ditto
ir
Ditto
in
Ditto
in
Ditto
n
Ditto
in
Ditto
ii
Ditto
HI
Ditto
ii
Ditto
in
Ditto
n
Ditto
n
Ditto
in
Ditto
n
Ditto
n
Ditto
in
Ditto
n
Ditto
in
Ditto
in
Ditto
IT
Ditto
in
Ditto
in
Ditto
in
D'fctD
in
Ditto
nr
.528
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. o.
Roll , r .
no A ame of candidate.
1099 Kishore Chandra
of College.
D. A.-V. Interme-
diate , College,
Cawnpore.
ITI
1100
Krishna Narayan Tandon
Ditto
III
1101
Kunwar Jaswant Singh Kushwah
Ditto
III
1105
Laxmi Narayan Srivastava (Pri-
Ditto
11
mus).
1109
Manohar Singh Kushwaha
Ditto
III
1111
Murari Lai Shukla
Ditto
III
1113
Narain Prasad Srivastava
Ditto
[[I
1117
Peyarey Lai Gupta
Ditto
III
1118
Pratap Bahadur Singh
Ditto
III
1119
Pratap Narain Trivedi
Ditto
III
1120
Prem Behari Gupta
Ditto
III
1121
Prithvi Nath Tiwari
Ditto
II
1122
Raghavendra Nath Saxena
Ditto
III
1123
Raghubar Singh
Ditto
III
1124
Raghunandaii Prasad Goureigh ,
Ditto
III
1125
Raghuraj Prasad
Difcto
m
1126
Raghu Raj Singh Sanger
Ditto
rn
1127
Rai Bali Pandey
Ditto
ii
1128
Rajendra Dev Tiwari
Ditto
ii
1130
Rama Chandra Gupta
Ditto
n
1132
Rama Shankar Avasthi
Ditto
in
1133
Rama Shankar Srivastava
Ditto
in
1134
Ram Lall Rathi
Ditto
ii
1137
Ram Narayan Lai Varma
Ditto
in
1141
Ram Saran
Ditto
in
1142
Ram Swarup Rohatgi
Ditto
ii
1145
Sahdeo Tiwari
Ditto
in
1151
Shanti Swarup Shukla
Ditto
in
1152
Sher Bahadur Singh
Ditto
in
1153
Shiva Narain Lai
Ditto
in
1157
Shriman Narain Saxena
Ditto
in
1159
Shri Ram Gupta
Ditto
ii
1160
Shyam Bahadur Srivastava
Ditto .,
ii
1163
Siddheshwar Tewari
Ditto
in
1165
Soma Deva Sharma
Ditto
in
1167
Bidya Dhar Mital
Ditto
in
1170
Brij Bihari Sinha*
Ditto
i
1171
Desh Deepak
Ditto
ii
1173
Jagannath Singh
Ditto
ii
1 Distinguished in Mathematics and Chemibty.
APP. G.] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
w Name of candidate.
Name of College.
Tasfed in
1177 KishoriLal
D. A. V. Interme-
IF
diate College,
Cawnpore.
1178 Lakshman Swarup Miara
Ditto
II
1179 Nawin Chandra Sharma
Ditto
III
1180 Prahlad Swarup Kapoor*
Ditto
IT
1181 Prem Narain Mathur . .
Ditto
II
1182 Raja Ram Srivastava. .
Ditto
III
1184 Ram Prakash Saksena
Ditto
II
1189 Bhim Singh
D. A.-V. College,
II
Dehra Dun.
1190 ChanduLal
Ditto
II
1191 Deep Chand Kukrati
Ditto
III
1 192 Devendra Pratap
Ditto
II
1193 Goviiid Ram Manjkhola
Ditto
III
1194 Har Charand Guptaf . .
Ditto
I
1195 Harish Chandra Gupta*
Ditto
I
1196 Jitendar Mohan Sinha
Ditto
II
1198 MadanLal
.Ditto
III
1201 Mano Mohan Roy
Ditto
III
1203 Nand Lai GuptaJ
Ditto
[I
120* Niharika Das (Miss) ..
Ditto
III
1205 Om Prakash
Ditto
III
1206 Pitambar Datt
Ditto
II
1207 Prem Chand
Ditto
II
1208 Puran Chandra Gupta ( Primus) J..
Ditto
I
1209 Puran Chandra Gupta (Secundus)
Ditto
II
1210 Raj Bahadur Saksena..
Ditto
nr
1212 Ram Nandan Srivastava
Ditto
in
1213 RamSaranDas
Ditto
in
1214 Rameshwar Singh
Ditto
ii
1215 Rashid-ud-din Ahmad Siddiqif . .
Ditto
i
1216 Sanat Kumar Banerji. .
Ditto
r
1218 Sumati Devi (Miss) ..
I?itto
in
1219 Tara Datta Nautiyal ..
Ditto
in
1220 TatafManiPandey ..
Ditto
in
1221 Theodore Sylvastre Ram
Ditto
ii
1222 Tota Ram GairolaJ
Ditto
i
1225 George Lumb*
St. George's College,
i
Mussooric.
* Distinguished in Mathematics.
t Distinguished in Mathematics and Chemistry.
| Distinguished in Chemistry.
330
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. G.
Name of candidate.
Ar fft ,, Passed in
Name oj College. diviaion .
1227 Lionel Anthony Weston
St. George'^ College,
1IT
Mussoorie.
1228 Varden Alexander Hugh Maclnnis
Ditto
HI
1229 Abdul Majid Khan ..
Government Inter-
III
mediate College,
Etawah.
1234 Bhami Putt Vajpei
Ditto
III
1235 Brij BUanu Kishore Saxena
Ditto
11
1236 Kedar Nath Dikshit ..
Ditto
111
1237 KirpaShankar
Ditto
IT
1239 Manohar Nath Mehrotra
Ditto
IT
1241 Nawal Kishore* .. ..
Ditto
I
1242 Panna Lall Balela ..
Ditto
II
1248 8 ura j Prasad Agarwala
Ditto
III
1252 Data Din Tiwari
Government Inter-
II
mediate College,
Fyzabad,
1253 Douglas Arthur Browne
Ditto
II
1254 Ganesh Prasad Shukla
Ditto
III
1255 GurSahaiLal
Ditto
II
1256 Hausila Bakhsh Singh
Ditto
III
1257 KhushiRam
Ditto
II
1259 Mahendra Narain Singh Asthana
Ditto
III
1261 Mshdi Hasan Zaidi ..
Ditto
III
1262 Muhammad Habibur Rahman
Ditto
11
1263 Narsingh Narain Singh
Ditto
III
1264 Naraingh Narain Srivastava
Ditto
III
1266 Parbhu Dayal Trivedi
Ditto
II
1267 Ram Bihari Singh
Ditto
III
1268 Ram Chandra
Ditto
III
1269 RamaJauhari
Ditto
III
1270 Ram Samujh Tiwari . .
Ditto
III
12>71 Rama Shanker Khare
Ditto
111
1272 Riazuddin Ahmad
Ditto
III
1273 Saghir Hasan Qureshi
Ditto
III
1276 Saiyid Qadir Hasan ..
Ditto .. <
III
1277 Saiyid Siddiq Ahmad
Ditto
II
1278 SatgurSaran
Ditto
III
1279 Shamsher Bahadur Singh
Ditto
III
1281 SheombarLal
Ditto
II
1282 Sri Rama Varma
Ditto
III
1283 Sushil Singh
Ditto
III
' Distinguished in Mathematics and Che mistry ,
APP. G.I LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
531
Name of candidate.
1286 Badri Prasad Srivastava
Government Inter- . II
mediate College,
Fyzabad.
1287 Bhawani Prasad Srivastava
Ditto . . II
1292 Jagannath Prasad Srivastava
Ditto . . II
1294 Lakshmi Narayan Singhf
Ditto . . II
1295 Nizamul Hasan
Ditto . . II
1299 Saiyid Saghir Hasan
Ditto . . II
1300 Sri Narayan Saksena
Ditto . . HI
1301 Sundar Lai Murkan*
Ditto .. I
Compartmental Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
1302 A jit Kumar Roy
Government Inter- Passed.
mediate College,
Fyzabad.
1303 Adya Prasad Srivastava
St. Andrew's College, 11
Gorakhpur.
1304 Amarnath Shukla
Ditto . . Ill
1306 Babban Tewari
Ditto . . HI
1308 Beni Madhav Prasad Dube
Ditto . . HI
1309 Bhagwati Prasad Dikshit
Ditto . . HI
1311 Bindhya Prasad
Ditto . . II
1313 Chetan Singh
Ditto . . Ill
1315 Ghulam Sibtain
Ditto . . Ill
1316 Girja Dayal Khare
Ditto . . HI
1317 Girja Shankar
Ditto . . II
1318 Gorakh Nath Sarkar ..
Ditto . . Ill
1320 GovindDas
Ditto . . HI
1321 Gyan Chandra Raif
Ditto . . I
1322 Hari Bansh Misra
Ditto . . Hi
1323 Hari Shankar Chaudhri
Ditto . . II
1325 Hrishi Kesh Banerjee
Ditto . . II
1328 Kaushal Kumar Singh
Ditto . . HI
1329 Keshav Prasad Srivastava
Ditto . . HI
1331 Mahcndra Lai
Ditto . . HI
1332 MahipatRay
Ditto . . HI
1333 Mata Baksh Prasad Srivastava ..
Ditto . . II
1336 Mohammad Ahmadullah
Ditto . . HI
1337 Mohammad Hakim Uddin Ansari
Ditto . . in
1340 Moti Lai Srivastava
Ditto . . in
1342 Murari Lai Srivastava
Ditto .. 11
' Distinguished in Mathematics and Chemistry.
t Distinguished in Chemistry,
532
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. G.
Roll XT f ,., .
no Name of candidate.
1346 Pm-an Dat Vidyarthi . .
St. Andrew's College,
Gorakhpur.
II
1347 Purnendu Nath Banerji
Ditto
III
1349 Radhey Raman
Ditto
11
1350 Raja Ram Pandey
Ditto
III
1351 Rajmangal Chaube
Ditto
III
1355 Ram Prasad Srivastava
Ditto
III
1358 Ratan Narain Mulia
Ditto
II
1359 Ramesh Chandra
Ditto
11
1360 Ram Raksha Prasad ..
Ditto
II
1361 Sachida Nand Verma
Ditto
Til
1365 Satya Narayan Lai . .
Ditto
III
1366 Shambhu Narain*
Ditto
II
1368 Shaukat Hasan Ansari
Ditto
III
1369 Shiva Kumar Lai Srivastava
Ditto
III
1372 Sripat Lai Sinha
Ditto
III
1373 Sudhansu Mohan Karl
Ditto
I
1375 Surendra Nath Singh
Ditto
III
1376 Urna Shankar Lai Srivastava
Ditto
111
1377 Umesh Chandra
Ditto
HI
1 378 Vishwa Nath Mani Tripathi
Ditto
III
1380 Wishnu Bhasker Gokhale
Ditto
I
1385 Damodar Sahai Saksena
Government Inter-
Til
mediate College,
Jhansi.
1386 Kashi Ram Tewari
Ditto
II
1387 Khande Rao Narayan Ganjiwale
Ditto
III
1389 Mohammad Yunus Beg
Ditto
III
1392 NazirAli
Ditto
II
1394 Saiyid Mohammad Wasi Naqvi . .
Ditto
11
1395 Sajid All Khan Yusuf-Zai
Ditto
III
1397 Banarsi Lai Varma
Ditto
II
1399 Ho^hangji Edulji Godiwalla
Ditto
III
1402 Kripa Shankar Nigam
Ditto
III
1403 Krishna Murari Gupta
Ditto
III
1404 Lakahmi Prasad Varmaf
Ditto ..
I
1405 Madan Mohan Saksena
Ditto
III
1406 Moti Lai Agarwalf
Ditto
II
1407 Narayan Prasad Srivastava
Ditty
II
1409 Raghubir Saran Srivastava
Ditto
II
1410 RajjanLal
Ditto
II
1 Distinguished in Chemistry.
f Distinguished in Mathematics.
APP. O,] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
53S
JRoll , T - ,., .
no Name of candidate.
1412 Ram Saran Nigam . .
1413 Shri Krishna Kapoor
1414 Surendra Mohan Saksena
1415 Zakawat All Naqvi
1416 Miss Beulah Irene David
1417 Miss Cecelia Phillips ..
1418 Miss Chandrakanta Bohatgi
1419 Miss Doris Mildred Lilian Wilson.
1420 Miss Ethel Priscilla Marr
1421 Miss Florence Emily Ulrich
1422 Miss Gladys Walter . .
1424 Miss Karunahai Joshi . .
1425 Miss Lilavati Raj
1426 Miss Lilian Cornelius . .
1427 Miss Lily James
1429 Miss Lolita Bose
1430 Miss Lorna Lois Williamson
1431 Miss Mable Matthews
1432 Miss Marjorie Grace James
1433 Miss Mary Annabelle Thomas
1434 Miss May Edith Thomas
1435 Miss Maya Dutt
1437 Miss Miriam Singh
1438 Miss Muriel Nellie Raymond
1439 MiSjB Nancy Martin
1440 Miss Pansy Elsie Martin
1441 Miss Pauline Hilda Macdonald .
1442 Miss Rebecca David Wasnikar
1444 Miss Ruby Chandravati Singh
1445 Miss Saboor-un-nisa Abdul Hafiz
1446 Miss Shanti Devi Bhatnagar
1447 Miss Shyama Khanna
1448 Miss o Sugunam Andrews ,
1449 Miss Violet Shahadat Masih
1450 Miss Zillah Soule
Compartmental Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
1451 Miss Christine Gopalnath *. Isabella Thobum
College, Lucknow.
34
Government Inter-
Ill
mediate College,
Jhansi. %
Ditto
11
Ditto
11
Ditto
H
Isabella Thoburn
III
College, Lucknow.
Ditto
I
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
11
Ditto
II
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto . ,
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
II
Ditto
I
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
II
Ditto * ,
II
Ditto
II
Ditto
II
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto ^.
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto .
II
Passed.
.534
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. G.
Roll Name of candidate. Name of ColUge. Passed in
no. divisi&n.
1452 Alopi Prasad Rastogi . . Government Jubilee III
Intermediate Col-
* lege, Lucknow.
1453 Anil Kumar Mitra . .
Ditto
111
1455 Brij Kumar Bhatnagar
Ditto
11
1456 Bishambhar Nath Agarwala
Ditto
II
1467 Bisheshwar Nath Bajpai
Ditto
III
1458 Brahma Datt
Ditto
II J
1460 Guru Narain Seth ..
Ditto
ni
1461 Harmanohar Das Saxena
Ditto
li
1462 Haridey Narain Seth
Ditto
in
1463 Haider Husain Mosavi
Ditto
in
1465 Jagdish Prasad Avasthi
Ditto
m
1466 Jagdeo Narain Bajpai
Ditto
in
1467 Krishna Kumar Bhatnagar
Ditto
ii
1469 Kunwar Sher Singh Rathor
Ditto
in
1470 Krishan Kumar Srivastava
Ditto
in
1472 Lakshmi Shankar Misra
Ditto
in
1473 Mohan Krishna Zutshi
Ditto
in
1474 Muiz-ud-din Ahmad Kirmani
Ditto
ii
1477 Nagendra Bahadur
Ditto
in
1479 Ram Saran Tandon
Ditto
ii
1480 Rameshwar Nath Misra
Ditto
in
1481 Raj Kishore Tiwari ..
Ditto
ii
1482 Raghubir Prasad Srivastava
Ditto
in
1483 Sheikh Irf an Ahmad Farooqi
Ditto
ii
1486 Sae^d Ahmad Shah ..
Ditto
in
1490 Shy am Krishna Narain
Ditto
ii
1491 ShiVa Dularey Chaudhari
Ditto
ii
1492 Sri Krishna Mehrotra
Ditto
ii
1494 Vishnu Narain
Ditto
in
1496 Byom Kesh Trivedi* ..
Ditto
r
1497 Gauri Shankar Tandon
Ditto
in
1498 GhyasUddin
Ditto
in
1502 Ja^deshwar Dayal Seth
Ditto
in
1505 Knnwar Surath Bahadur Shah . .
Ditto
HI
1507 Pratap Narain Mulla
Ditto
11
1509 Raj Kumar Mukerji . .
Ditto
111
1511 Saiyid Hasib Ahmad
Ditto
II
1514 Saiyid Saeed Ahmad
, Ditto
II
* Difltuiguished in Chemistry.
G.] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CAKDIDATES 535
Moll Name of candidate. Name of College. Passed in
I n <>> division.
1515 SunderjLal Agrawal*.. .. ^Government Jubilee I
Intermediate Col-
lege, Lucknow.
1516 Wazir Singh Sethf .... .. Ditto .. I
Compartmental -Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
1517 Prabhash Chandra Ghosh . . Government Jubilee Passed.
Intermediate Col-
lege, Lucknow.
1520 Kaisarul Islam Rizvi . . . . Shia Intermediate II
College, Lucknow.
1523 Moinuddin Siddiqui .. .. Ditto
II
1 525 Nasir Husain Rizvi . . . . Ditto
II
1527 SriRamSinha .. .. Ditto
III
1 530 Saiyid Moshin Ali Naqvi ' ' . . Ditto
III
1531 Saiyid Mohammad Hasnain .. Ditto
III
1533 Saiyid Muhammad Saddiq Ali Khan Ditto
III
1535 Saiyid Tayyeb Husain Riivi .. Ditto
II
Compartmental. Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
1539 Saiyid Muhammad Zaki . .. Shia Intermediate
Passed.
College, Lucknow.
1540 David William Llewellyn .. La Martiniere Col-
. II
lege, Lucknow.
1541 Edward Humphrey Brown . . Ditto
II
1542 Eustace Reginald John D'Rozario Ditto
II
1543 Fredrick William Kelly .. Ditto
II
1544 Govind Narain . . . . Ditto
III
1545 Kenneth Lambert Law . . Ditto
III
1546 Madan Lall Bhargava .. Ditto
III
1549 Mirza Anis Beg . . . . Ditto
II
1550 Rishad Shahid Husain Kidwai .. Ditto
II
1552 Syed Sajid Husain . . . . Ditto
III
1553 Wilber Dennis CaldeiraJ; . . Ditto
II
1555 Anilis Ahmad Khan . . . . Lucknow Christian
III
College, Luck-
now.
1560 Bhawani Charan Bhattacharya .. Ditto
III
1562 Clarence Lyle Ward . . . . Ditto .
n
* Distinguished in Chemistry.
f Distinguished in Mathematics and Chemistry.
t Distingished in Geography,
536
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP.
Roil
nc>.
1566
Name of candidate. Name of College. Passed m
division.
Ganga Narain Saigal .. .. Lucknow Christian II
College, Luck-
. now.
1567
George Goodwin Shaw . .
Ditto
III
1568
George Sylvester Sahai . ,
Ditto
111
1569
Jagannath Prasad . . .
Ditto
111
1570
Jagdish Prasad Siriha
Ditto
III
1572
Jai Shankar Mihar
Ditto
in
1573
Jamal Ahmad Rizvi
Ditto
II
1576
Krishna Datt Bajpai
Ditto
m
1577
Krishna Mohan Lai Saksena
Ditto
III
1579
Llewellyn Velentine Singh
Ditto
III
1580
Mirza Muhammad Bashir
Ditto
HI
1581
Muhammad Akhtar Siddiqi
Ditto
in
1582
Mohammad Nawab Ali Siddiqi . .
Ditto
Ill-
1585
Muhammad Husain . .
Ditto
Ill
1586
Nasir Husain Rizavi
Ditto
III
1587
Patrick Oswald Dunn
Ditto
nr
1590
Rajiva Narain Shukla
Ditto
ill
1591
Rama Krishna Narain , .
Ditto
nr
1592
Rup Narain Kacker
Ditto
lit
1594
Sheikh Midhat Kamil Kidwai
Ditto
ii
1595
Shiam Narain Srivastava
Ditto
nr
1596
Shital Prasad Roy
Ditto
IIT
1597
Shiva Lai Gupta
Ditto
in
1598
Shyam Nath Kapur
Ditto
in
1601
Surendra Nath Dutta
Ditto
iir
1603
Saiyed Ahsan Ali
Ditto
nr
1604
Saiyid Fazil Abbas Kazmi
Ditto
tn
1605
Saiyid Mazhar Hasan
Ditto
in
1606
Saiyid Sibte Haider ..
Ditto
IT
1608
Terence Vincent O'Brien
Ditto
in
1611
Anath Bandhu Sen
Ditto
ii
1613
Ashok Kumar Sen*
Ditto
11
1614
Badri Prasad Chaurasia
Ditto
n
1615
Baij Nath Khanna
Ditto
ii
1617
Basanta Kumar Nandi
Ditto
n
1618
Bertram William Lyal
Ditto
n
1619
Bijay Shankar . . *
Ditto
in
1622
Brij Behari Srivastava
Ditto
n
1624
Chakrapani Trivedi . . , .
Ditto
if
1625
Abdul Rahim Khan
Ditto
n
* Distinguished in Chemistry.
APP. G.] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
537
Roll Name of candidate. Name of College. Passed in
no * division.
1626 Daya Ram Gupta Lucknow Christian II
College, Luck-
now.
1627 Devendra Nath Bhattacharyya . .
Ditto
III
1628 Gopi Nath Srivastava .. ,.
. Ditto
III
1629 HabibAshraf
Ditto
II
1631 Hari Datt Sharma
Ditto
III
1632 Jageshwar Dayal Pradhan
Ditto
III
1633 Jitendra Mohan Mathur
Ditto
II
1635 Kali Shankar Sovakar
Ditto
II
1637 Krishna Behari Mathur
Ditto
II
1638 Krishna Kumar Srivastava "
Ditto " . .
II
1640 Kundah Lai Khullar . . ' . .
Ditto
III
1641 Lalit Kumar
Ditto
II
1642 Maharaj Bahadur Bhatnagar
Ditto
11
1644 Maiku Lai Nigam
Ditto
11
1645 Mani Dafct Patial
Ditto
II
1647 Meraj Uddin Ahmad
Ditto
II
1648 Mohammad Abdul Rashid
Ditto
III
4649 Mohammad Farooq Ahmad
Ditto
III
1650 Mohammad Mehdi Jafri
Ditto
III
1651 Mohammad Sayeed Khan
Ditto
II
1654 Nawal Kishore Arora
Ditto
III
,1655 ]53iawal Kishore Seth . .
Ditto
II
1656 Onkar Datt Nigam ..
Ditto
III
1658 Plianindra Nath Maji
Ditto
II
11660 Radhey Shyam Mahneddrew
Ditto
III
1662 Raghubir Sahai Mathur
Ditto
II
T664 Rajendra Prasad Saksena
Ditto
II
1665 Ram Anand
Ditto
III
1666 Ram Chandra
Ditto
III
1667 Ram Narain Khanna
Ditto
II
1671 Roshan Lai Sethi
Ditto
II
1675 Santi Charan Biswas
Ditto
III
1676 SatyaJ?al Gupta
Ditto
III
1680 Shiv Nandan Lai .. " ..
* Ditto
III
1681 Shiva Shankar Bhargava
' Ditto
II
1682 Shiva Shankar Narain
Ditto
II
1686 Sripat Sahai Srivastava
' Ditto
[II
1688 Saiyid Mohammad Ahmad Rtzvi
Ditto
TI
1689 Saiyd Majibul Rahman
Ditto
III
.169 1 Tahir Husain
Ditto
II
1692 Tribhtfvran Nath Srivastava' '
' Ditto
ni
538
CALENDAR 1928-29
| APP G?,
Name of candidate.
1694 Uma Kant Saran Shukla
1695 Virendra Singh
1698 Zahirul Hasan
Compartmental. -
1699 Ehsan Mustafa Kazmi
1700 Nizam Uddin
1701 Sayid Wall Ahmad
1702 Satya Swaroop Sharma
1703 Subodh Chandra Ghosh
1709 Bhagwati Prasad Sinha
1714 Girdharilall Pandey
1717 Jagdish Prasad Tewari
1719 Jai Narain Dikshit
1720 Kailash Nar-iin (Kapur)
1721 Kamta Rai
1725 Nitai Chandra Ghosh
1727 Raj Bahadur Saxena . .
1729 Rato Hari Mitra
1731 Ram Ratan Sharma
1733 Sanat Kumar Dutta
1734 Shiva Dulare
1740 Tribhuwan Dutt Pandey
1741 Uma Shankar
1742 Vikramaditya Singh Nigam
1743 Abdul Salim
1744 Ahmad Ali Khan Rohaila
1748 Amar Nath
1749 Anup Singh Sharma
1762 Balak Ram
1753 Balbir Saran
1755 BaldeoBehari
1760 Birendra Prasad Jain
1761 Bishambhar Dayal Saksena
1762 Bishwambhar Sahai
1764 Brij Bhusan Lai
Name of College.
Luoknow Christian
College, Luck-
now.
HI
Ditto
III
Ditto , .
TIT.
Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII of
the
Board's Regulations.
mi
. . Lucknow Christian
Passed!.
College, Luck-
now.
Ditto
Passed..
Ditto
Passed .
ma
Ditto
Passed .
osh
Ditto
Passed.
iha
. . Kanyakubja Inter-
I1U
mediate College,
Lucknow.
Ditto
III
ari
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
E>ur)
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
h
Ditto
III
i ..
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
..
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
idey
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Nigam
Ditto
III
..
. . Meerut College,
II
Meerut.
haila
Ditto
HI
.-
Ditto .'.
III
..
Ditto
III
..
Ditto
III
..
Ditto
III
..
Ditto
II
i
Ditto
It
aksena
Ditto
III
..
Ditto
III
Ditto
It
APP. G.I
LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
53* ;
Roll Name of candidate.
Name of College.
Passed in
no.
division.
1766 ChandooLal
. . Meerut College,
Hi
Mserut.
1771 Indra Prakash Jain ..
Ditto
III,
1772 Islam Ahmad Khan ..
Ditto
III
1775 JohariMal
Ditto
III
1777 Kali Charan Vats
Ditto
III
1778 Kamalesh Ghosh
Ditto
111
1780 Krishna Chandra Sharma
Ditto
HI
1782 Madhusoodan Dayal ..
Ditto
HI
1784 Mahmud Hasain Khan
Ditto
III
1787 Muhammad Abdul Majid Khan
Ditto
11
1789 Muhammad Razi Khan
Ditto
HI
1792 Cm Prakash
Ditto
III
1793 Om Prakash Goel
Ditto
II
1794 Onkar Krishan
Ditto
II
1796 Padma Datt Sundriyal
Ditto
III
1798 Permatma Sharan Vaiah
Ditto
in
1799 Pt. Shamsundar Nath Aga
Ditto
ii
1800 Ra^hubar Dayal Mithal
Ditto
ii
1801 Raj Narayan Saxena . .
Ditto
ii
1802 Ram Chandra Kapoor
Ditto
HI
1807 Randhir Singh Varrna
Ditto
in
1809 Ratan L,al
Ditto
UI
1811 Satyid Aijaz Husain Rizwi
Ditto
in
1813 Santosh Kumar Sharma
Ditto
in
1814 Satish Chandra Gupta
Ditto
HI
1816 Shanti Prashad Pathak
Ditto
HI
1818 Sheikh Muhammad Salahuddin
Ditto
III
1821 Shiam Mukat Raizada
Ditto
111
1822 Shri Krishna Gupta , .
Ditto
II
1824 Sri Tir Bhawane'shwari Prasad
Ditto
. nj
1825 TrilokiNath
Ditto
in
1826 Vijai Singh Vadaya ..
Ditto
HI
1828 Abhay Pada Banerjeo
Ditto
in
1830 BadriNath
Ditto
ii
1833 Bhafat Bhushan
" Ditto
i
. t ii
1834 Bharat Raj Bajaj
Ditto
u
1845 Habib Ahamd Faruqi , .
Ditto ' .,
IH
1846 Hulas Chandra Jain* , .
Ditto
I
1848 Indra Mohan
Ditto
, ^ .
Distinguished in Mathematics and Chemistry. ,
540
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. G.
Roll Name of candidate.
Name of College.
I 'assed in
no.
division.
1851 Jagdishwar Prasad Mital
Meerut College,
II
Meerut.
1854 KanhaiyaLal .. ..
Ditto
II
1855 Karam Singh
Ditto
II
1857 Lakfchmi Narain Shankdhar
Ditto
II
1859 MazharUmar
Ditto
II
1860 Mritunjoy Kumar De
Ditto
ir
1863 MunnarLal
Ditto
in
1864 MutsaddiLal
Dittd
ii
1867 Nem Kumar Jain
Ditto
ii
1868 Nikhil Krishna Ghosh
Ditto
1870 PhulChand
Ditto
in
1872 Prayag Sharan Shinghal
Ditto
i
1873 Raj Bahadur Saksena. .
Ditto
ii
1875 Rajendra Prasad Saxena
Ditto
ii
1876 Raj Kumar Bajpai
Ditto
in
1877 Rameshwar Lai Gupta , .
Ditto
Ji
1883 Riyaz Muhantmad Khan
Ditto
in
1888 Shiam Sundar Lai Sharma
Ditto
ii
1889 S. K. Anand
Ditto
til
1891 Shiva Shankar Lai ..
Ditto
in
1892 Shyam Sundar Lai
Ditto
ii
1893 Sohan Lai Sharma
Ditto
in
1899 Triloki Nath (Secundus)
Ditto
in
1901 Umrao Singh Bhatnagar . .
Ditto
ii
1902 Yagya Prasad Parti . .
Ditto
II
Compartmental. Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
1904 KeshoDas
Meerut College,
Passed.
Meerut.
1904 Bhagwat Das
Government Inter-
Ill
mediate College,
Moradabad.
1909 Gokaran Dayal Saksena
- Ditto
II
1911 HaqdadKhan
Ditto
III
1912 Harish Chandra Saxena
Ditto
II
1919 Madan Mohan Mathur t .
Ditto
II
1920 Mahmud Husain Khan
Ditto
III
1922 Mohan Lai Misra
Ditto
II
1927 Pxayag-DatPant .
Ditto
III
1928 Radhe Shiam Vaish ..
Ditto
III
1930 Raghu Nandan Prasad Rastogi . .
Ditto
II
APP. G.] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
541
Roll Name of candidate.
Name of College.
Passed in
no.
division.
1931 Ram Rhankar Jaitly ..
Government Inter-
II
mediate College,
Moradabad.
1933 Ramesh Nandan Sinha
Ditto
111
1934 Rameshwar Prasad Rastogi "
Ditto
III
1936 Ram Narain Gupta . . " "
Ditto
II
1937 RiyazUddin .. "" ..
Ditto
III
1938 SafdrHusain .. ..
Ditto
III
1939 Saiyid Hasan Atiqi ..
Ditto
III
1940 Saiyid ftihal Ahmad Rizvi
Ditto
III
1941 Saiyid Riaz Ahmad .. ..
Ditto
II
1 942 Saiyid Zamir Husain . . "
Ditto
III
1946 Umrao Dulah Khan Emazie .
Ditto
III
1947 WahajulHaq .. ..
Ditto
III
Compartmental. Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
1948 Vishun Prasad Bhatnagar
Government Inter-
Passed.
mediate College,
Moradabad.
1949 Babu Ram Gupta
N. R. E. C. Inter-
Ill
mediate College,
Khurja.
1950 Baleshwar Prasad Srivastav*
Ditto
II
1952 Bansdeo Prasad Gangal
Ditto
III
1953 Beni Ram Gupta
Ditto
III
1955 Bishambhar Nath
Ditto
III
1956 DilshadNabi .. ...
Ditto
II
IU57 Harish Chandra
Ditto
III
1058 Jagdieh Prasad Saxena
Ditto
III
1959 Jwala Prasad Gupta
Ditto
III
1960 KanchhiLal
Ditto
III
1961 Kehar Singh
Ditto
I
1962 Kunwar Shiva Vansh Rao Nigam
Ditto
III
1965 MulJWmmad Baud Khan Kheshgi
Ditto
II
1966 Moti Ram Mittal
Ditto
II
1968 Prakash Vir Sharma
. Ditto
III
1970 Raghunandan Singh Chauhau
Ditto
III
1971 Raizada Shyam Sundar Lai Saxena
Ditto
III
1973 Ram Gopal Gaglesh ..
Ditto
III
1974 Rrtm Prasad Singh ..
Ditto
III
1975 Ram Swamp Saxena . . , ,
Ditto
III
1078 Tulsi Kama Sharma ..
Ditto
III
542
CALENDAR 1928-29
Roll
no.
Name of candidate.
Name of College. Passed i n
division.
1979 Vijai Pal Singh Raghava
.. N. R. E. C. Inter- Ill
mediate College,
Khurja.
1982 Abdul Rahman Khaii . .
Ditto .. II
1984 Chandra Prakash Mital
Ditto .. II
1986 Girraj Singh Parswal . .
Ditto .. 11
1987 Har Lai Singh
Ditto .. Ill
1988 Hari Shankar Gautam
Ditto .. II
1989 HarPrasad*
Ditto .. II
1990 Hukam Bahadur Singh
Ditto .. Ill
1992 Om Saran Kaizada ..
Ditto .. II
1993 Prasadi Lai Gupta* ..
Ditto .. II
1997 Ram Rich Pal Agarwal
Ditto .. II
2000 Sugan Lai Mathur . .
Ditto .. II
2005 Balkrishna Varshney f
. . S. M. Intermediate II
College, Chandausi.
2006 Banwari Lai Gupta , .
Ditto .. Ill
2010 Chandrapal Varshney
Ditto .. 11
20 12 Har Prasad Agarwsla . .
Ditto .. II
2013 Ishwar Saran Gupta . %
Ditto .. Ill
2014 Jai Krishna Jain
Ditto .. Ill
2015 Jai Narain VarshneiJ . .
Ditto .. II
2016 Krishan Kumar Barseria
Ditto .. Ill
2018 Kunwar Bahadur
Ditto .. Ill
2019 Makkan Singh
Ditto .. II
2020 Manmohan Dayal Chaturvedi
Ditto .. II
2021 Mahesh Behari Lai Saxena ,
Ditto .. Ill
2022 Narauttam Dutta Sharma
Ditto .. Ill
2025 Ram Kumar Singh Yadava . .
Ditto .. Ill
2026 Roop Narain Varma ..
Ditto .. Ill
2027 Shambhoo Nath
Ditto .. II
2028 Shambhoo Prasad PujariJ .
Ditto .. II
2029 Shivapal Singh
Ditto .. Ill
2031 Shreemohan Gupta J . .
Ditto .. I
2032 Shri Prakash
Ditto ... Ill
2033 Shri Ram Govila*
Ditto .. I
2034 Vishweshwar Prasad . .
Ditto .. Ill
2035 Abduljalil
.. Government Inter- III
mediate College,
Ajmer.
* Distinguished in Chemistry.
f Distinguished in Mathematibs and Ch&nistiy.
{Distinguished in Mathematics.
- *
APP. G.] LIST OP StrCCSSSFtfL CANDIDATES
543
Roll Name of candidate.
Na fat of College.
Jawed in
no.
division.
2036 Albert Livingston Baric*
Government Inter-
II
mediate College,
Ajmsr.
2037 Arjun Singh
Ditto
III
2039 Jagdeesh Narayan Mehra
Ditto
III
2041 Jawahir Lai Chobisa ..
Ditto
II
2046 Narayan Wasudeo Godbole
Ditto
ni
2047 Pearey Lai Guptft
Ditto
in
2050 Ram Prashad Garg . .
Ditto
ii
2051 Rikhab Chand Jaini ..
Ditto
in
2053 Umrao Mai Dhaddha . .
Ditto
in
2057 Behari Lai Mathur ..
Ditto
in
2059 Champa Lai Bogawat . .
Ditto
ii
2060 Damodar Dass Mathur
Ditto
ii
2061 Damodar Prasad Kaushik
Ditto
ii
2062 Gangadhar Vishwanath Vaidya
Ditto
ii
2064 Gulab Das Badgel
Ditto
in
2065 Harish Chandra Govel*
Ditto
i
2067 Henry Kenneth Prim
Ditto
in
2068 Krishna Chandra Gupta
Ditto
in
2071 Mehta Kamini Kumar Rai Vaid
Ditto
in
2075 Nand Lai Mathur (Secundus)
Ditto
in
2086 Sital Prasad Mittal ..
Ditto
in
Compart mental. Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
2087 Madan Gopal Sharma. ,
. . Government Inter-
Passed.
mediate College,
Ajmer.
2088 Surat Singh Amtal . .
Ditto
Passed.
2089 Chatar Bhuj Sanadhya
. . Maharana's College,
III.
Udaipur.
2090 Damoder Lai Khandelwal
Ditto
Ill
2091 Gulab Singh Bhatnagar
Ditto
III
2093 Indra Lai Gobhil Agrawal
Ditto
II
2094 Kesari Lai Tiwari
Ditto
III
2097 Lehar Singh Mehta . .
Ditto
II
2098 Manohar Lai Bapna . .
Ditto
III
2101 Radhey Shyam Joshi
Ditto
III
2102 Roop Lai Gandhi
I)itto
m
2104 Goti Lai Singatwaria . .
Ditto
n
* Distinguished in Mathematics. <
544
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. G.
Roll
Name of candidate.
Name of College.
Passed in,
no.
division*
2105
Gulab Chand
Maharana's College,
III
Udaipur.
2106
Hari Singh alias Hagami Lai Jat
Ditto
II
2107
Hem Shankar Nagar
Ditto
III
2109
Madan Sinha Kothari*
Ditto
II
2111
Muhammad Khali! -ullah Khan . .
Ditto
II
2112
Manoranjan Roy
Ditto
11
2131
Padam Singh Dosie
Ditto
III
2115
Ratan Lall Dashora . .
Ditto
III
2117
Sajjad Husain Paliwala
Ditto
III
2118
Sharaf All
Ditto
III
2119
Shyam Lall Bhatnagar*
Ditto
I
2122
Babu Lai
Victoria College,
11
Gwalior.
2123
Balwant Vishnu Pitre
Ditto
III
2124
Bhagwan Swamp Vcrma
Ditto
III
2130
Brij Bhushan Saxcna
Ditto
in
2134
Chintaman Govind Rao Pande . .
Ditto
in
2135
Dattatraya Vishnu Kulkarni
Ditto
in
2143
Hardatta Singh Sharma
Ditto
in
2146
Hari Narayan Araonker , .
Ditto
n
2147
Hari Vansh Lai Mahendra
Ditto
in
2151
Jang Bahadur Saxena
Ditto
in
2156
Kishan Lall Sharma
Ditto
in
2157
Krishna Ganpati Dube
Ditto
in
2161
Mahadeo Krishna Rao Sangole
Ditto
in
2162
Mahadeo Raghunath Tikekar
Ditto
in
2163
Mahendra Lall Dhir
Ditto
in
2164
Maruti Govindrao Keche
Ditto
in
2166
Murlidhar Shankar Rao Aras
Ditto
n
2169
Narayan Vishwanath Kanhere
Ditto
in
2171
Prakash Narain Gutch
Ditto
in
2173
Radhey Shyam Sharma
Ditto
in
2176
Ramchandra Dhondoji Satam
Ditto
n
2177
Ramchandra Yadaorao Choudhari
Ditto
in
2180
Ram Narain Dhody
Ditto
in
2182
Roshan Lall Gupta
Ditto
in
2193
Syed Muhammad Ahsan Rizvi
Ditto
in
2195
Vinayak Bhaskar Tambey
Ditto
in
2198
Vishnu Sawaleram Karpe
Ditto
in
2202
Vishwanath Trimbak Rao Pagnis
Ditto
in
* Distinguished in Chemistry.
APP. G.j LIST OF StrCOESSJTTl CANDIDATES
545
Name of candidate.
Roll
no.
2208 Amolakchandra Jain . .
2213 Bhai Shankar Pramanik
2216 Bihari Vallabh Purohit
2217 Damodar Ramehandra Gokhale ,.
2219 Dattaraya Krishna Aboo j
2220 Dayn Ram Gargiga
2222 Devidas Ramchandra Chjmanpure
2225 Dinker Rao Mandloi ..
2226 Fazal Masih Nathaniel
2227 Gajanan Bhikaji Shidhaye
2229 Gajanan Vishanath Deolekar . .
2230 Ganesh Nilkanth Joshi
2234 Gegige Baburao Shindhe .
2235 Gopilai Shrivastava
2236 Govind Balkrishna Rao Kaskhediker
2237 Gorindrao Vinayakrao Khadikar
2238 Govind Vinayak Mathakari . .
2239 Govind Vishnu Deshmukh . .
2240 Gulab Chand Sagunchand Jain .
2241 Hari Ramrao Deshpande . .
2242 Hazari lal Balmukund Agarwal . .
2243 Hukam Chand Jain .,
2244 Inayat Ali Hasan Ali . .
2249 Kaehinath Sonaji Deshpande
2251 Khanderao Durgashankar Joshi ..
2252 Konkipudy Ramarao Naidn
2254 Krishna Narhar Bhagwat
2260 Laxmanrao Zangoji Lad
2262 Mahadeo Narayan Limaye . .
2263 Moti Lal Jain
2264 Munna Lal Parmanand Singhai , .
2265 Nand Kishore Acharya , .
2266 Narayan Dagadoo Patil
2267 Narayan Krishnaji Khale ,
2270 Nathoo Sonaji Sonwane
2272 Onkar Shiorao Deshpande , ,
2275 Pannalal L. Bhandari
2276 Phool Chandra Panchratan
2278 Prabhakar Anant Padalker
2279 Prabhakar Madhaoiao Peshpande
2280 Purdnji Hari Nawkar
Name of College. Passed in
division.
Indore Christian , JI
College, Indore.
Ditto . , III
Ditto . III
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . , III
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . II
Ditto . . II
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . , III
Ditto . . II
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto , , II
Ditto III
Ditto , . Ill
Ditto . , III
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . II
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . II
Ditto . , III
Ditto . t III
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto . . II
Ditto . . JII
Ditto ... Ill
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto III
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto f , III
Ditto . . II
Ditto , . Ill
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto . II
Ditto ,. Ill
546
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. o.
no.
2284
2286
2287
2291
2292
2293
,2294
2296
2299
2301
2302
2303
2305
2306
2307
2310
2311
2316
2317
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2328
2329
2331
2332
2333
2335
2336
2337
2339
2340
2344
2352
2353
2354
2355
Name of candidate.
Raghunath Wamanrao Latike
Eamchandra Motiram Naphade
Ramchandra Shukla . .
Ranchhod Rai Ghairia . .
Samirmal Ratanlalji Surana
Sambhudayal Sanghi
Shamrao Ramrao Deshmukh
Shanker Ramchandra Maidiker
Shri Chandra Jain
Shri Vallabh Gupta . . .
Sita Charan Barod . . . .
Sohan Lai Vyas
Sushila MadJiava Kibe (Miss)
Timothy Morris David
Tukaram Vishnu Kalkar
Vasant Shivaram Durve
Vinayak Rang Nath Sakle
Yashwant Pandurang Pakil
Ganesh Moreshwar Wadodkar
Anand Rao Gopalrao Purauik
Anant Sadashiv Patwardhan
Baboolal Sookhlal Paideohi
Balkrishaq Rambhan Thackar
B as want Yeswantrao Deshmukh
Bhimsinha Raghunathuinhu Chaudhaiy
Brindaban Shukla ...
Darshan Singh
Dattatraya Hari Oke
Dattatray Vishnu Dhoble.
Dhannalal Pannalal Thakyjr
Dinkar Madhaorao Pagnis .
Fatteshing Vithoji Shirke
Ganesh Madhao Shenduin^ar
Gaiiesh Raoli Rege ....
Gopalrao Narayain ao Deore
Jaya^vant Rao Vinayak ,|lao Tal-
ch^rkar.
Ka^i Abdul Majid . .
Muhamnuad Yunuf All Khan
Sadas^iiy .Kaveesh^ ar
Name of College.
Indore Chhstian
College, Indors.
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Holkar College,
1 ndore.
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Passed in
division.
lil
111
111
111
ill
1L
III
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
11
111
111
III
II
111
III
111
111
III
111
11
111
111
III
111
III
III
111
111
111
111
I
JtPP. G.] LIST OP SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
547
Jtoll Name of candidate .
no.
2358 Laxman Balkrishna Deshpande . .
5359 Laxman Bhikajee Naik ..
,2360 Laxman Krishna Auiangabadkar
-2361 Laxman Kishandas Mahajan
.2364 Mahabir Pershad Bhatnagar
2365 Mahboob Husain .. -
2366 Mahadeo Anand Eao Vyas
.2368 Manglakant R. Tiwari..
2370 Martand Rao Bhika Lalge ,
.2373 Muhammad Aitezad Ahmed Khan
2375 Moreshwar Waman Moghe
5376 Mukund Shripad Patil
.2378 N. R. Gangadhar
2380 Namdeo Atmaraxn Shinde ,
2381 Narayan Fakirrao Mhaske .
2382 Narayan Mahadeo Ketkar .
2389 Quyata ud-din
2390 Raghubir Parashuram Desbpande
2392 Ram Bharose Tiwari
2394 Ramphandra Dhanna Lai J.oshi .
2396 Ramchandra Keshava Pa^dit
-2399 Ramanarayan Someshwar Dube ,
2401 Ram Gopal Inani
2402 Ranjeet Singh ....
2403 Rao Sahib Hanmant Rao Mphite.
2404 Sadashiva Bhaskar Nemawarkar
2411 Shankar Narayan Agashe, .
2414 Shankar Wasudeo Kapse
2416 Shanti Prasad Varma
2417 Shiva Narayan Kapoor
2418 Shriniwas Yeshwantrao Dighe
2420 Shrikrishna Vaman Pant^Vaidya
2423 Syed Tasadduq Ali ..
2425 Trikam Lai Kanahya Lall
2430 Vithal Shridhar Chintaman
243 1 Waman Narayan Pendharker
2433 Wasudeo Ramakrishna Gokhale
2434 Wasudeo Yashwant Pande
2435 Bhalchandra Wasudeo Kayeeshwar
3AM -J&aekef hifitAmn I>ewal
2438 Brajendra Kumar Joshi
Chintamaii Praahuram Deshpande
Name of College. Passed i
division
Holkar College,
III
Indore.
Ditto
III
Ditto
111
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
111
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
in
Ditto
ill
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
HI
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
. . Ditto
III
Ditto
II
. .. Ditto
III
.. _ Ditto
III
Ditto
UI
Ditto
in
Ditto
u
Ditto
HI
Ditto
n
Ditto
11
Ditto
II
ar Ditto ; ..
III
Ditto
in
Ditto,
in
5 Ditto
in
548
CALEffDAB 1928-29
[APP,
Roll , Name of candidate. Name of College
Passed in
no. ,
division.
2440 Ganesh Madhav Chaphekaj . . Holkar College,
II
Indore.
2443 Gopal Devidas Ansingkar . . l)itto
III
244.5 Gourishankar Ganpat Lai Shree- Ditto
II
maJi.
2446 Govind Dattatraya Gharpure . . Ditto
II
2452 Keshav Ranganath Deo* . . Ditto
II
2454 Krishnajee Dattatraya Ranade . . Ditto , .
II
2455 Krishnajee Sadashiva Khaie . . Ditto
11
2456 Madho Vinayak Vaidya . . Ditto
J1I
2458 Mahendra Narayan Deendayal Ditto . .
11
Awasthi.
2460 Narayan Prasad Jain .. Ditto
II
246 1 Narayan Raghunath Newaskar f 1 , . Ditto
11
2462 Narayan Vinayak Vaidya . . Ditto
n
2463 Padmanabha Mahadeo Sule* . . Ditto
ii
2464 Prabhakar Kondopant Phatak . . Ditto
in
2466 Roop Singh .. .. Ditto
in
2469 Trimbak Ramchandra Parchure . . Ditto
ii
2471 Vishnu Mukand Taranekar .. Ditto
n
2472 Viehnoo Narayan Dabir , * Ditto
in
2473 Vishwanath Narhar Adsule . . Ditto
m
Compartmental. Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
2475 Lai Mohan Dos . . . , Holkar College, Indore.
Passed-
2478 Abid Husain . . . . Maharaja's College,
III
Jaipur.
2480 Amar Narain Mathur . . Ditto
III
2485 Balchandra Vaidya . . . . Ditto
HI
2486 Bhawani Shankar Sharma . . Ditto
III
2487 Bijay Singh Panwar . . . . Ditto
lit
2489 Chhattar Singh .. .. Ditto
III
2490 Dwarka Prasad Sharma , , Ditto
III
2492 Ganga Prasad Bhargava . . Ditto
III
2493 Gopal Lall Purohit . . . . Ditto
III
2494 Gopal Narain Saxena . . Ditto
II
2496 Gouri Lai Jain . . . . Ditto
III
2497 Hari Das Sharma . . . . Ditto
III
2499 Hari Shankar Bhargava - . . Ditto
II
2502 Jagdish Narayan Mathur .. Ditto
HI
*Di8tinguished in Chemistry.
tt>jstinguiehed m Mathematics.
APP, <Sk] LIST OF SUCOESSITtTL CANDIDATES
Roll JV 'ame of candidate.
Name of College.
Passed?*
WQ.
division.
2504 Kaiiahya Lai Gupta . . . . B
laharaja's College,
Ill
*
Jaipur.
2505 Krishna Gopal Sharma
Ditto
II
2506 Kunj Bihari Lai
Ditto
III
2507 Maheshwar Xath Tankhwah
Ditto
III
2510 Maiv.'.oor Hutain
Ditto
II
2511 Mathura Prat ad Sharma
Ditto
II
2512 Md. Ikram All Khan . .
Ditto
rn
2515 Mool Chand Goswami
Ditto
in
2517 Muhnmiruul Ghulam Abid Siddiqi
Ditto
ni
2518 Nasrullah Khnn
Ditto
ii
2510 Nawal Kushorc Bhnrpava
Ditto
HI
2521 Phanindranath Baneiji
Ditto
in
2522 Puran Singh Thapa . .
Ditto
in
2523 Radha Mohan Lall Mathur
Ditto
in
2525 liaikh Singh Khatri
Ditto
n
2528 Ram Narain .ihalani ..
Ditto
in
2529 R. B. Nar ISin^h Das Haldia
Ditto
in
2530 Ruop Karayan Mathur
Ditto
in
2532 Shri Chandra Jain
Ditto
in
2537 .Shyamhehari Lall Saxena
Ditto
n
2539 SyedAbdulla
Ditto
in
2540 Syed Bashir Hiisain
Ditto
ir
2541 Syed Hasan Mtijtaha
Ditto .
ir
2542 Vidya Prakash Kala
Ditto
ii
2543 Anand Swaroop Bhatnagar
Ditto
n
2544 Asok Kumar Sen*
Ditto
i
2546 Bansi Lai Jain (Luhadiya)
Ditto
n
2548 Chandra Mani Shrotriya
Ditto
H
2549 Durga Prasad Rastogij
Ditto
i
2550 Hari Narain Jain
Ditto
in
2552 Jai Bahadur Singh Gurkha
Ditto
ni
2557 Muhammad Akhtar ..
Ditto
in
2560 Protihat Coomar Das
Ditto
nr
2561 Ratna Lall Shrivastava
Ditto
n
2562 Shri Govind Tewari ..
Ditto
in
2563 Shyam Narayan Bhargava
Ditto
in
2565 Vishnu Datta
Ditto
n
* Distinguished in Chemistry,
f Distinguished in Mathematics.
35
550
CALENDAR 1928-29
[AFP. 0.
Jtoll
no.
Name of candidate.
Name of College.
Passed in
division .
Compartmeiital Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
2566 Chunni Lai Batra
2569 Bakhtawar Mai Kothary
2570 Bhanwar Lall Mangal . .
2571 Dashrath Mai 8inghvi
2672 Fateh Hoop Rai
2574 Ganpat Lall Rawut . .
2575 Gopi Nath S. Rai
2576 Govind Mai Mehta . .
2577 Govind Singh Baish . .
2578 Gulab Singh
2580 Iqbal Nath Kaul
2581 Jayanti Prasad Gour . .
2585 Kapoor Chand Mehta
2586 KishanMal
2587 Laksbini Narayan Chhangoni
2589 Maharatna
2590 Mahesh Chandra
2591 Mehtab Chand Mehta
2593 Mool Singh Rathore (Mertia)
2596 Poonam Chand Bohra
2598 Radha Krishana Lohra
2602 Sugan Lai Rai
2603 Sugyan Chandra Bhandari
2604 Sumer Mai Jain
2606 Swanri Keshava Puri . .
2607 Taj Behari Lall Mathur
2609 Zora-war Mai Mehta . .
2613 Behari Lai Sharma Palhaur
2614 Bridhi Lai Sethi
2615 Bishan Raj Singhi
2621 Chiranji LalJain
2623 Drona Charya Sharma
2636 M.A.Latif
2647 Tancham Lai Chaturvedi
Maharaja's College, Passed.
Jaipur,
Jaswant College, II
Jodhpur.
Ditto .. VII
Ditto .. HI
Ditto .. HI
Ditto . . HI
Ditto . . HI
Ditto . . HI
Ditto .. Ht
Ditto .. HI
Ditto .. HI
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto . . II
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto .. II
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto ,. II
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto .. II F
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto .. ill
Ditto .. II
Ditto .. II
,. Private candidates. Ill
Centre Radha-
swami Educa-
tional Institute,
Agra %
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto ., Ill
Ditto III
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto .. II
Ditto .. II
APP, G.] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATE i
551
Roll Name of candidate.
no.
2648 Parsadi Lai Sharma . ,
2650 Kaghubar Dayal Srivastava
2652 Raghunath Shankar Bhatnagar
2654 Ram Sharan Vidyarthi
2655 Ram Swaroop Sinha
2660 Saiyid Kamal-ud-din Ahmad
2661 Sant Prasad Satsangi
2663 Shiain Chancier Jo-shi
2667 Sura j deo Pramd
2671 Ratan Lai Gupta
2675 Ajodhya Prasad Ambist
2677 Ambika Prasad
2680 Bakhtawar Singh Sharma
2684 Brijnandan Lai Bhatnagar
2696 Jagdamba Prasad
2697 Jagadish Chandra Chakravarti
2699 Jyoti Narain Varma
2700 Kanhaiya Lai Sharma
2703 Krishna Prasad Malaviya
2704 Kunwar Bra j raj Singh
2710 Manik Lai Ghosh
2711 Manfiu Lai Dubey
2724 Raj Bahadur Lai Varma
2725 Rajeshwari Prasad Sinha
2728 Ramadhar Shukla ..
2730 Ram Piare Lall Srivastava
2734 Saiyid Mulazim Husain
2735 SajanLalSadh
Name of College.
Passed in
division.
Private candidates.
Ill
Centre. Radha-
swami Educa-
tional Institute,
Agra.
Ditto
11
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
HI
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
111
itton 18, Chapter XII
lations.
Private candidates.
Passed,
Centre. Radha-
swami Educa-
tional Institute,
Agra.
Private candidates
III
Centre Govern-
ment Intermediate
College, Allahabad.
Ditto
HI
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto . ,
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
lit
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto .,
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
552
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP.
Roll
no.
2738
2739
2742
2746
2750
Name of candidate. Name of College.
Shankar Bahadur . . Private candidates.
Centre. Govern-
ment Intermediate
College, Allahabad.
Shib Singh Ratan Singh . . Ditto
Shital Prasad Vaish . . . . Ditto
Sudarshan Shukla . . . . Ditto
Vasantarao alias Anand Rao Raghu- Ditto
nath Rao Khedkar.
Gompartmental. Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
Passed in
division,
HI
III
III
III
III
2755 Shio Kumar Pandey
2762 Banarsi Lai Tewari . .
2764 Gopal Narayan Saxena
2774 RoshanLal
2780 Shyama Charan Misra
2790 Anand Sharma Regmi
2793 Bhrigunath Pandey . .
2794 Baldeo.Rai
2799 Chandrika Prasad Misra
2801 Gauri Shanker Lai . .
2802 Ganpati Ram Chandra Nasery
2803 Hari Shankar Lai
2809 Laxman Dass
28)3 Manmatha Nath Chatterji
2816 Narain Das Gupta
2823 Ram Nandan Pande . .
2831 ShivaMurat Singh
2832 Sadaplial Pande
2834 Somnath Chaube
Private candidates. Passed.
Centre Govern-
ment Intermediate
College, Allahabad.
Private candidates. Ill
Centre. 'Bare illy
College, Bareilly.
Ditto .. HI
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . Ill
Private candidates. ; [III
Centre, Queen's
Intermediate Col-
lege, Benares.
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
111
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
HI
Ditto
III
Ditto .. '
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
APP. G.] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
553
Roll
no.
Name, of candidate.
Name of College.
Passed in
division.
2837
2838
2842 Balbadar Kumar Srivastava
2843
2846
2853
2854
2856
2864
2869
2872
2880
2881
2882
J2905
i
Compartmental Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
Alopi Pi asad . . . . Private candidates Passed.
Centre Queen's
'Intermediate Col-
lege^ Benares.
Under Regulation 1, Chapter XIV of the Board's Regulations.
Abu Yahya Mohamcd Abdul Matin Private candidates Passed.
Ce ntre . Queen's
Intermediate Col-
lege, Benares.
, Private candidates III
Centre Christ
Church College,
Cawnpore.
Ditto ., II
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto .. II
Ditto .. HI
Ditto . . HI
Ditto . . HI
Ditto .. Ill
Ditto . . Ill
Compartmental Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
Harish Chandra Varma . . Private candidates Passed.
Cent re Christ
Church College,
Cawnpore.
Sambhu Dayal Agarwala . . Ditto . . Passed.
Shri Krishna Singh . . . . 4 Ditto . . Passed.
Appearing in additional optional subject.
Baijnath Prasad* . .
Babu Ram
Jafar AH
Kedar Nath Vajpei ..
Madhawa Prasad Tiwari
Padam Kishen Das . .
Rup Narain Sharma . .
Shiv Datt Parashar . .
Krishna Swamp Bhatnagar
2907 Kanhaiya Lai Bajpai
2908 Mohammad Khalil-ullah Qureahei
Private candidates Passed.
Centre. D. A. V.
Intermediate Col-
lege, Dehra Dun.
Private candidates III
Centre Govern-
men t I n tor med ia to
College, Etawah.
Ditto
""Distinguished in Mathematics.
554
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. G.
Roll
no.
2913 All Husain Khan
Name o/ candidate.
Name of College.
. Private candidates
Centre. Govern-
ment Intermediate
College, Fyzabad.
2919 Prayag Prasad Dube .. . . Ditto
Compartmental Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
2921 Rajiva Lochan Singh .. Private candidates
Centre Govern-
ment Intermediate
College, Fyzabad.
Pawed \n.
division*
III
III
Passed.
2924 Abdur Rahman
2937 Rajdeo Ram Yadav
2939 Sukhdeo Pandey
2941 SakhrajLai
2952 Nand Kishore Jain
2957 Chandravati Johari (Miss)
2964 Guru Das Nigam
2981
2982
2986
2997
2998
3011
Narottam Singh Bais . .
Onkar Narain Chitravanshi
Ram Kumar Dikshit , .
Rup Krishna Chakbast
Saiyid Muhammad Hasan Khan
Saiyid Hasan Akhtar Rizvi
Private candidates. II
Centre St. Andrew's
College, Gorakhpur.
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . in
Private candidates. Ill
Centre. Govern-
ment Intermediate
College, Jhansi.
Private candidates. Ill
Centre Isabella
Thoburn College,
Lucknow.
Private candidates. II
Centre. Govern-
ment Jubilee In-
termediate College
Luoknow.
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . II
Ditto '. . ill
Ditto . . II
Ditto . . in
Compartmental Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII
of the Board's Regulations.
Mool Chandra Singh . . . . Private candidates, Passed.
Centre- Govern-
ment Jubilee In-
termediate College,
APP. Q.] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
55S
Boll Name of candidate. Name of College. Passed in
n - division.
Under Regulation 7, Chapter XIV of the Board's Regulations.
3013 Ahmad Adhami
3014 Chiranji Lai Sharma
3021 Ajodhya Prasad
3026 Balbir Singh Verma . .
3029 Chandra Mul Agarwala
3032 Debi Dayal Gupta
3033 Daya Prakash
3034 Ghulam Mustafa
:i041 Har Saran Dags Kamboh
3048 Krishna Dev Sharma
3049 Keyhava Prasada Gupta
3059 Nihal Singh
3062 Pyaray Lai Shrotriya
3069 Ram Nath Gupta
3073 Saiyid Husain
3076 Said Ahmad Rashid .. '
3078 Shiva Nath Singh Tiagi ' '
Compartmental Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII of the Board's
Regulations.
3084 Jagdinh Prasad Gupta .. Private candidates. Passed.
Centre . Meerut
College, Meerut.
Under Regulation 7, Chapter XIV of the Board's Regulations.
Private candidates.
Passed.
Centre. Govern-
ment Jubilee In-
termediate, College,
Lucknow.
Ditto
Passed.
Private candidates.
II
Centre. Meerut
College, Meerut.
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
II
Ditto
II
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
3087 Shadi Ram Mittal
3088 f Sharf-ud-din
3090 Augustine Dominic
3091 Arthur John Beanland
3092 Chandra Swarup
3094 Ganga Datt Paiit
Private candidates. Passed.
Centre. Meerut
College, Meerut.
ditto . . Passed.
Private candidates. II
Centre. Govern-
ment Interme-
diate College,
Aforadabad.
Ditto . . Ill
Ditto . . HI
Ditto . . HI
556 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. G.
Roll Name of candidate.
Name of College.
Passed in
no.
division.
3097 Jaswant Lai Shanna ..
Private candidates.
HI
Centre Govern-
ment Interme-
diate College,
Moradabad.
3099 Lakshmi Saran Mathur
Ditto
HI
3100 Muhammad Mashood Hasan
Ditto
HI
^3101 Muhammad Nairn
Ditto
Jll
3105 Sayed Ghaus Ahmad
Ditto
111
Compartmental -Under Regulation 18,
Chapter XII of the Board's
Regulations.
3111 Saiyid Naushah Husain Naqvi
Private candidates.
Passed.
Cent n'- Govern -
ment Interme-
diate College,
Moradabad.
3112 Saiyid Irtaza Khan Naqvi
Ditto
Passed.
3119 Charan Singh
Private candidates.
ITT
Centre N. R. E. C.
Intermediate Col-
lege, Khurja.
3124 Kanhaiya Lai
Ditto
III
3129 Naunidh Rai
Ditto
III
3133 Shri Chandra Gangal
Ditto
III
Compartmental Under Regulation 18,
Chapter XII of the
Board's
Regulations.
3134 Jai Swarupa Sharma
Private candidates.
Passed .
Centre N. R. E. C.
Intermediate Col-
lege, Khurja.
3135 Nepal Singh
Ditto
Passed.
3138 Abdul Qayyoom Khan
Pri\ ate candidates.
II
Contre- Go vern -
,
ment College,
Ajmer.
3139 Akbar Mohammad ..
Ditto
111
3143 Bansi Dhar Jaria
Ditto
II
3144 Deo Datta Sharma ..
Ditto
HI
3153 Mohamed Idrees
Ditto
III
3160 Uma Shanker Varma
Ditto
III
5161 Vop Dev Sharma
Ditto
III
APP, G,] LIST OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES
557
Name of candidate.
3162 Ramindra Singh Jhajj
3170 Dsojit Singh
Name of College. 1 assed in.
no. division.
Compartmental Under Regulation 18, Chapter XII of the Board's
Regulations.
Private candidates. Passed
Centre Govern-
ment College,
Ajmer.
Private candidates. Ill
Centre Victoria
College, Gwalior.
Jai Narain Varma
3179 Madhava Ram Chandra Moghcy
3 1 80 Purshottam Martand Newaskar
3181 Raghunandan Lai Bhatnagar
3187 Abdul Rahim Siddiqi
3188 Autar Kishan Gurtu . .
3197 Behari Lai Surali
3200 Chintamani N a ray an Dosai
3202 Gajanan Dhondadeo Mulyc
3205 Hazari Lai
3215 Motiial Shreomar
3219 Nilkantha Vinayak Mulye
3224 Raghunath Balkrishna Dingre
3226 Raghunath Atmaram Sanglikar. .
3233 Shankar Amrit Bhalerao
3239 Sobhag Mai M.Jain ..
3240 Satyawant Shukla
3242 Vasanti Amritrao Gulgule (Miss) .
3245 Venkatesh Babaji Barwo
3246 Wilfred Singh
3253 Bannu Singh alias Banney Singh .
3256 David Loyal
3264 Govind Prasad
3265 Gaj Raj Ojha
3273 Kunwarlal Asopa
3278 Murari Lai Sharma
3279 Mata Din Gupta
3280 Man Singh Sharma
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Private candidates.
III
Centre Indore
Christian College,
Indore.
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
111
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
HI
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
Private candidates.
III
Centre Mahara-
ja's Intermediate
College, Jaipur.
Ditto
III
Ditto
II
Ditto
III
Ditto
1H
Ditto
111
Ditto
III
Ditto
III
558 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. G.
Roll Name of candidate. Name of College. Tasted in.
no . division*.
3283 Prayag Ohandru Aganval . . Private candidates. II
Centre Mahara -
ja's Intermediate
College, Jaipur.
3284 Pratap Narain Kak .. .. Ditto .. II.
Appearing in an additional optional subject.
3300 Fakir Chand Sharma . . . . Private candidates. Passed.
Centre Mahara -
ja's Intermediate
College, Jaipur.
APP. H.] LIST OF SCIENCE MATERIAL AND APPARATUS 559
APPENDIX H.
List of apparatus and chemicals for an Intermediate
College and a High School.
(For 24 boys in a class.)
Section A.
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Higb
School Examination only.
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
A
B
PHYSICS (GENERAL).
12 ..
12
Balances, 250 g.m. in cases, beams graduated.
12
12
Weight Boxes from 1 g.m. to 100 g.m.
2
12 ..
Ditto -001 g.m. to 100 g.m.
4 !!
4
Spring balance, to weigh 10 Ib.
2 sets.
2 seta.
Weights, ;[ oz. to 1 Ib.
2 doz.
2 doz.
Half Metre Rules, Maple Wood, cm. on one
side
and inches on the other.
1 ,.
2
Metre Rules, ditto.
2
Screw GaugeH, ordinary.
2 .'.'
6 ,.
Ditto good quality, with ratchet.
Clamp Pulleys, brass.
1 doz.
Idoz.
Protractors, brass, ordinary.
4
Hare's apparatus, simple form.
1 doz.
1 doz.
Stools for specific gravity experiments.
16 only
16 only
Bunsen Burners or Spirit Lamps.
2 doz.
2 doz.
Retort stands, with clamps, small ; base 7 *
X4
with rod 24*.
2
2
Tripods, triangular top.
lib.
21b.
Lead shot.
1
2
Mercury pure.
1 ,.
1 ..
Mercury Tray.
10ft.
Rubber tubing, thin, 1/8* pressure.
2 doz.
3 doz.
Flasks, flat-bottom, 200 C.C.
1
1
Ditto 100 C.C.
2
3
Ditto 600 C.C.
5 ,"
3
Beakers, with spout, ht. 6 cm, cap. 100 C.C.
3
Ditto ht. 9 cm. 250 C.C.
..
1
Ditto ht. 145 cm. 1,000 C.C.
1 gross
1 gross
Corks, assorted.
5lb.
5 Ib.
Glass tubing 5 m.m., 8 m.m. and 10 m.m.
1
Glass rod.
. .
1
Thermometer tubing.
1 gross
1 gross
Test-tubes, 5*x5/8' r ,
2 only
2 only
Relative density bottles (small flasks can be used).
Idoz.
1 doz.
Graduated jars, 100 C.C.
. .
6 only
Vernier Callipers.
4
Spherometere.
2
Pendulums for " G " experiments.
560
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. H.
Section A (continued}.
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the High
School Examination only.
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
A
B
PHYSIOS (GENERAL) (continued).
1 set
Pulley System.
6 only
Hooks Law apparatus (cheap form).
1
Fortins Barometer (student's form)
2
Stop-watches (cheap form).
3
Hydrometers.
12 pairs
12 pairs
Compasses.
4
4
Scissors. :
2 reels
2 reels
Linen thread no. 30.
12 pairs
12 pairs
Inside and Outside Callipers, graduated.
2 quires
2 quires
M. M. Square paper, 9"x7" (nearly).
2
2
Squared paper in inches and tenths of an inch.
12 " ..
12 " ..
Set-square?. 60.
12
12
Set-squares, 45.
24
24
Cubes truly t-ut in .hardwood, 1 cm. edge.
3
3
Ditto 4 cm. do.
1
1
Cube truly cut in hardwood 10 cm. do.
1
1
Ditto 1 ft. do.
3
3
Rectangular blocks (wood) graduated in inches,
4"X3"X1".
3
3
Ditto ditto 4"X3"X2*.
3
3
Ditto ditto 4*x3"x4".
24 ..
24
Cylinders truly cut in hardwood, dia. 3 cm. and
height 5 cm.
3
3
Spheres truly cut in hardwood dia. 4 cin.
1
1
Wooden rectangular prism, 5x4x3 cm., graduated
in cm., top layer, one row and one cube remov-
able.
6 ..
6
Graduated glass cylinders, 500 C.C. ")
Ditto 300 C.C. V 2 each.
Ditto 50 'C.C. 3
1 ..
1
Litre glass jugs, graduated.
1
1
Pint " ditto.
2 sets
2 sets
Small cylinders of iron, brasfe, copper, and ,tin, of
the same dimensions. :
2 ..
2
Small cubes of iron, brass, copper, and tin, of the
same dimensions. !
1 set ..
1 set
Brass bucket and cylinder for verification of Ar-
chimedes* principle.
12
12
12
12
Tin chimneys for spirit lamps, if required.
Clay-pipe triangles.
16 pieces
16 pieces
Wire gauze, 6" square, 30 meshes.
12
12
Iron tongp, 6* long, plain.
12
12
Glass Flasks, round bottom, 500 C.C.
: ; ,
APP. H.] LIST OF SCIENCE MATERIAL AND APPARATUS 561
Section A. (continued).
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the High-
School Examination only.
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity. \
A
B
PHYSICS (CEXERAL).-(cwwtoefe<0.
12
12
Test-tube stands, cheap form, 8 holes, with pegs.
24
24
Test-tube cleaners with I. R. ends.
1
1
Hollow tin cone, height 8', diameter of base 4*.
I
1
Hollow tin cylinder, height 8" ditto 4*.
i
HEAT.
1
1
Gravesando's Ball and Ring.
1
*>
Linear Expansion Apparatus.
1
1
Compound bar of brass and iron.
2
Boyle's Law Apparatus.
I ..
Regnault's Hygrometer.
1 doz
1 doz.
Copper Calorimeter Cans and Shields.
1
1
Six's MaximWi and Minimum Thermometer.
1
1
Convection Apparatus.
1
1
Compensated Pendulum.
1 set
Leslie's Cubes.
1
Dry wet Bulb Hygrometer, Mason's.
1 doz.
1 doz.
Thermometers, 220 1 " F. in wooden case.
1 ,
2
Ditto 110C. ditto (divided into *>
I only
Ditto 360 C. ditto.
1 doz.
1 doz.
Ungraduated Thermometers.
1
1
Steam Boilers, tin.
I
1
Davy's Safety Lamp.
3
Hypsometers, Tin.
I
1
Air Thermometer.
1
Bunsen ice calorimeter, simple form, 6*.
3
Glazebrook and Shaw's Sp. heat apparatus.
1
Hope's Apparatus, tin.
1
1
Bar and Gauge to show expansion of metal bar.
1
1
Contraction Apparatus.
1 doz.
1 doz.
White card board sheets 1* square.
2lb. ..
21b. .,
Thin tin sheet.
1
1
Rod half brass and half wood, for conduction ex~
pcriment.
I
1
Rod of copper and 1 rod of iron, each 1' long and
i* diameter.
1 doz.
1 doz.
Marbles.
3
3
Chimneys, glass 1" dia. at bottom.
LIGHT.
1
Telescope, Student's cheap.
1
1
Pinhole, Camera.
6
6
Concave Mirror, 2* dia.
1
Wire Pyramid (to show inverse square).
o62
CALENDAR 1928-29
fAPP. H.
Section A (continued).
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the High
School Examination only.
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
A
B
- -
LIGHT (continued).
1 doz.
1 doz.
Glass Cubes, or slabs.
1 ..
1 ..
Prisms, right-angled.
1
Convex Lenses, double, "1".
1 doz.
Lens holders.
1
Newton's colour disc.
3
Optical benches with accessaries (cheap form).
Spectrometer (cheap form).
. t
Nicol prism.
. ,
Tourmaline Tong.s.
1 doz.
1 doz.' '
Strips of mirror glass 4"x 1* (thin).
1
1
Sheet pins.
6
6
Cheap spectacle lenses with rough edges, concave,
about 20 cm. focus.
><J
6
Cheap spectacle lenses with rough edges, convex
about 20 cm. focus.
1
1
Packet candles.
1 doz.
1 doz.
Candle holders, mounted on wooden base.
1 ..
1
Sc een holders, ditto itto.
SOUND.
..
3
Sonometers with spring balance.
2
Resonance Apparatus.
6 .'!
Tuning forks.
1
Siren.
1 set
Organ pipes.
MAGNETISM AND ELECTRICITY.
I doz.
1 doz.
Pocket magnetic compasses.
, ,
3 only
Deflection Magnetometers.
3
Vibration Magnetometers.
. .
6
Horse-shoe Magnets, 4*.
1
Mariner's Compass.
1
Leyden Jar with movable coatings.
1
2
Ebonite sheet, 3 and 6 mm. thick.
1
I
Wimshurts Machine, glass disc., 10*.
1
'2
Electroscopes, cheap pattern, flask.
1
1 '.'.
Ditto wooden model.
1
Biot's Apparatus.
1
Faraday's lee Pail, set of four.
1
2
Daniel's Cells.
1 doz.
1 doz.
Leclanche's Cells, complete.
1
2
Bunsen's cells.
2 doz. '
Terminals,
APP. H.] LIST OF SCIENCE MATERIAL AND APPARATUS 563
Section A (continued).
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the High
School Examination only.
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the
Intermediate Examination only.
A
B
2 doz.
2 doz.
. .
1 only
1
1
i Ib.
21b. ..
4 ..
1 ..
3
3
1 1
2
2
1
< g
4
1 ..
1
1 doz.
1 doz.
f 9
I
1 1
Iset ..
^
1
. .
1
1 Ib. each
1 Ib. each
lib. ..
Ireel
2
1 " ..
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.. ..
1
1
1
1
1 doz.
1 doz.
1
1
1 doz.
1 doz.
1
1
9
9
2
2
12 pieces
12 pieces
2
2 ..
2
2
2
2
2
2
MAGNETISM AND ELECTRICITY
(concluded).
Binding Screws.
Copper Voltameter.
Voltameter for electrolysis of water.
Copper sulphate.
Zinc sulphate.
Sal Ammoniac.
Galvanometers Tangent.
Mirror Galvanometers (Steward) ; with lamps and
scale.
D'Arsonval Galvanometer.
Wheatstone Bridges, cheap.
Dip circle (simple form).
Magnets, small, 6*,
Ammeter (cheap with 1 5 amperes range) 1/10*.
Resistances.
Condensers (simple plate).
Model of a Dynamo.
Copper Wire, nos. 18, 20, 26.
Ditto Silk covered.
Unspun Silk.
Soft Red Wax.
Voltameter, cheap (1 10 volts, 1/10).
Reversing Keys.
Electric Bell.
Electrophonis.
Morse Key.
Piece Lode Stone.
Horse-shoe magnet with armature, 6".
Packet steel knitting needles.
Sewing needles.
Flat cast-iron rod, 1' long.
Steel clock springs,
Glass rod, 12'.
Ebonite rods, 12*.
Shellac rods, 12*.
Flannel.
Silk.
Pith-ball pendulums.
Simple coll elements.
Magnetic needles and stands, 3* and 6*.
564
CALENDAR 1928-29
Section B.
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up ta the High
School Examination only.
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
A
B
PHYSFCS WORK BENCH TOOLS.
1
1
Cutting pliers.
1
1
Ditto flat nose.
1
Bench hack, saw.
1
2
Hammers.
2
3 !!
Screw drivers (set of three).
2
6
Triangular and square files.
1 '.'.
2
Flat files.
I
2
Half round files.
1
Automatic hand drill.
1
1
Spirit level mounted.
1
1
Measuring tape, 50 ft.
. . ,
Nails, assorted.
-
Brass and iron screws.
APP. H.] LIST OF SCIENCE MATERIAL AND APPARATUS 565
Section C.
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the High?
School Examination only.
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
A
B
CHEMISTRY (GENERAL).
12
Balances, 250 g.m. with beams paduated sensitive-
to l/10th of a milligram in cas^ .
12
Sets of weights with forceps, -0001 to 50 g.m.
1
Set of ditto ditto '0001 to 100 g.m.
4 doz.
Beakers, with lip, 100 C.C.
4
Ditto 250 C.C.
1
Ditto 400 C.C.
1
Ditto 600 C.C.
m
1
Ditto 1,000 C.C.
2
Flasks, flat bottom 125 C.C.
2
Ditto 300 C.C.
1
Ditto 500 C.C.
i
Ditto 1,000 C.C.
2
Flasks, conicaj, 500 C.C.
6 only
Flasks, round bottom, 300 C.C. and 500 C.C.
6
6
Distilling flask*, round bottom, 300 C.C.
Crystallizing dishes, 7 cm. dia.
f
4
Ditto 10 cm.
t
6
Desiccator?, Scheiblers, 13 cm. .">*.
2
12 ..
Woulff's bottles, 250 C.C., 2 necks.
1
4
Ditto 500 C.C.
f
2 each
Filter pump, flask, 250 C.C. and 500 C.C.
24
12
Covers for gas jars.
12
6
Funnels, 2*.
,
3
Do. 3*.
12
12
Do. for burettes.
3
3
Retorts, stoppered, 500 C.C.
12
3
Pneumatic troughs, circular, porcelain.
12
3
Beehive shelves for above.
2
16
Liebig's condensers, 30 cm. I. R. connection.
12
12
Mortars and pestles, 4* dia.
2
Do. wedgewood, large.
, .
Idoz.
Calcium chloride tubes, U forms, 6*X5*.
m
1 ..
Ditto ditto with side tubes.
1
Ditto straight.
1 only . .
Glass filter pump, Universily pattern.
I grossP
1 gross
Test-tubes, 2*Xi*.
4 doz.
Do. 4*xi".
3 doz.
6 ..
Do. 6" XI".
4 ..
3 ..
Test-tubes combustion, 6" x %*.
25 lb ..
Glass tubing, assorted.
21b. ..
3 , ..
Ditto combustion .
1 .-
3 , ..
Glass rods, assorted.
12 " ..
2 , ..
6 , ..
Thermometer tubings.
Burettes with stopcock, 50-1/10 C.C.
Ditto pinchcook, 50-1/10 C.C.
566
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. H.
Section C (continued).
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the High
School Examination only.
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
A
B
CHEMISTRY (GENERAL) (continued).
2
9
Pipettes, 25 C.C., 10 C.C. and 20 C.C., 3 each.
4
Do. 50 C.C.
3
Measuring jars, 50 C.C.
. .
2 doz.
Ditto 100 C.C.
. .
6 only
Ditto 500 C.C.
. .
1 ..
Ditto, 1,000 C.C.
2J doz-
Thermometers, 150 C. in wooden case, 3 oi 2000 C,
3 of 300 C.
200
Filter papers, cut circles, 9 cm.
300
200
Ditto ditto 12-5 cm.
. .
100
Ditto ditto 16 cm.
6ft. ..
30ft. ..
T. R' tubing, 5/16".
6ft. ..
Pressure tubing.
1 gross
1 gross
Corks, ordinary, assorted.
12 sets
12 sets
Corkborers, set of three.
. .
1
Cork squeezer, wheel pattern.
18
18
Deflagrating spoons with tin caps.
12ft. ..
60ft. ..
I. R. connection tubing, 3/16*.
, .
1
Foot bellows.
Idoz...
2 doz. . .
Mohr's burette clips.
6 only
Screw clips.
4
Retort stands, small.
2
large.
..
Idoz.
Rings, 2t* 3J% 4' dia.
1 ..
Clamps, small and large with boss.
3
Wooden clamps.
12
3
Funnel stands, double.
12
4
Burette stands, for one burette.
2
2 doz.
Safety funnels with one bend.
16
2 ..
Thistle funnels, 12*.
.
6
Asbestos sheets, 10* X 10*.
1
pad, 6' X 6".
1
> > ^* **
..
1
Ozone apparatus.
.
1
Vapour density apparatus, Victor MeyV
2
Combustion boats, porcelain.
1
Pippette stand for ten pipettes.
4
Calcium chloride towers, 8".
.
4
Separating funnel, pear-shaped.
.
6
1
Kipp's apparatus, 500 C. C. capacity.
Tube to show composition of ammonia.
1
Diffusion apparatus (porous pot, tube, etc*)
3
Glass trough (big) 13'5* diameter.
1
Copper flask.
1
1 set . .
Copper tube with cap.
Copper distilling apparatus for distilling water*
4JPP. H.] LIST OF SCIENCE MATERIAL AND APPARATUS 567
Section C (concluded).
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the High
School Examination only,
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
A
B
CHEMISTRY (GENERAL) -{concluded}.
30 ..
Weighing tubes.
2
Clock glasses.
16 " ..
1 doz. '
Watch
4
Bunsen burners.
6
Fishtail
4
Spatulas porcelain.
6
4
,, horn.
G
6
,, steel.
6
36
Wine- Hester quart bottles.
t ,
6
Filter plates, two of each size.
1 t
6
Books of labels.
1 doz.
2 doz.
Litmus books (red and blue).
. .
1
Fractionating column (pear-shaped, bulbed) 3 or
5 bulbs. '
2
Nickel foils, 3*x3*.
, ,
4
Tripod stands.
, ,
2
Crucible tongs.
t .
2
Drying cones.
6 '.'.
Hoffman's bottle for Victor Meyer's apparatus.
16*' ..
4
Porcelain basin.
. .
4 only
Graduated flasks, 250 C.C.
2 ..
1,OOOC.C.
. ,
6 ..
100 C.C.
6 ..
200 C.C.
1
2
Water bath.
2
2
Potash bulbs.
16
6
Crucibles with lids.
12
12
Small U-tubes, height 4* dia. J*.
Idoz.
1 doz.
Wire-gauze spoons for sodium.
1 ..
14 only
Iron tubes, 8" long and I" diameter.
2
2 ..
Cork-borer sharpner.
12
6
Triangular files, and 6 rat-tailed or round files.
24
12
Gas- collecting jars with round glass covers.
26
Stoppered bottles for chemicals.
* 4 N. M., reagent bottle, 12 oz. stoppered.
*' ft >f J9 ** >'
5 W. M. ,, 2 ,. corked.
568
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP.
Section D.
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the High.
School Examination only.
Column E gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter*
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
1
3 doz.
1 ..
1 ..
3
3
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
1
100
2 books
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
4
17
5
3ft.
3
1 doz.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CHEMICAL LABORATORY.
Apparatus required for each bench.
Wire gauze, 30 meshes, 6* X 6*,
Test-tubes,
Test tube stand.
brush.
Beakers (one without lip, 200 C.C. and two lipped,.
250 C.C.)
Flasks (500 C.C. two only and 200 C.C. one only).
Mouth Blowpipe.
Wash bottle 500 C.C.
Retort stand with 1 ring, 1 clamp and 1 boss, length
of rod 20".
Tripod stand triangular top.
Crucibles with lid.
Crucible tongs, brass, plain 6".
Porcelain basins.
Funnels plain 3*.
Triangular file, 4* with handle.
Iron-tinned Japan rectangular pneumatic trough
with shelf.
Pipette, 10 C.C.
Filter papers, 12*5 cm. dia.
Litmus papers, red and blue.
Test-tube holder crosswise pattern.
Burner or spirit lamp.
Burette 501/10 C. C. with pinchoock (i.e., with
Mohr's burette clips).
Watch glasses 4 cm.
Clay-pipe triangles.
Funnel stand, double.
Burette stand.
Drying cone of tin.
N. M. Reagent bottles, 12 oz., stoppered.
N. M. 5
W. M. 2 with corks.
Rubber tubing for burner 3/8* diameter,,.
Collecting jars (glass) and cover for saine.
Cork assorted.
Beaker cover for quantitative work (clock glass).
Desiccator each 6*.
Glazed paper.
Platinum wire.
Graduated flask, 100 C.C.
Quill pen.
Spatula.
Blue glass, 2* X 2*.
APP. H.] LIST OF SCIENCE MATERIAL AND APPARATUS 569
Section E.
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the High
School Examination only.
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
8lb.
8li>
lib.
1
21b
2oz.
70 Ib.
20
25
30
40
6
25
20
1
16
4
2
1
2
4
6
3
1
1
10
3
2
^
3
8
1
CHEMICALS.
Concentrated Hydrochloric acid pure (medically
pure).
Hydrochloric acid pure.
Concentrated Nitric acid, pure.
Sulphuric
commercial.
Glacial Acetic acid.
Ammon, Liquor.
Chloride.
Carbonate resubl.
ordinary.
Sulphate, pure.
Acetate.
Molybdate.
Nitrate.
Oxalate.
Sodium, Metal.
Carbonate, pure.
commercial.
,, chemically pure anhydrous.
Bicarbonate.
Hydroxide sticks, pure.
Acetate.
Nitrate.
Phosphate.
Chloride, pure.
commercial.
Sulphate.
Formate.
Nitrite.
Bromide.
Borax.
Fusion mixture.
Potassium, metal.
,, Bichromate.
Chromate.
Bisulphate.
Chlorate.
Chloride, pure.
Cyanide.
Ferricyanide.
Ferrocyanide.
Iodide.
Nitrate.
Permanganate.
570
OAL1NDAB 1928-29.
[An.
Section E (continued).
Column A gives the minimum reqiurements for wo r k up to the High
School Examination only.
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
A.
lib.
21b.
1
2
2oz.
21b.
lib'/
2 Ih.
i >,
21b."
B.
1 Ib.
1
1
k
1 ,,
6
1
4oz
Jib
1
1
1
4 oz
lib
1
4.
lib
*
4
I
4
4 oz
1
lib.
1
1
1
CHEMICALS (continued).
Potassium, Sulphate.
,, Sulphocyanide.
,, Hydrate sticks.
,, Percholrate.
Barium Carbonate ppt.
Chloride, pure.
Nitrate.
Sulphide.
Sulphate.
Acetate.
Strontium Carbonate, pure.
Chloride.
Nitrate.
,, Sulphide.
,, Acetate.
Calcium Carbonate ppt.
Chloride anhydrous.
Calcium Nitrate.
,, Sulphate, pure.
,, Hypochloride (Bleaching power).
Oxide.
Plaster of Paris.
Marble.
Calcium Sulphide.
Magnesium Ribbon.
Corbonate.
Chloride.
Sulphate.
Oxide.
Manganese Chloride.
Sulphate.
,, Dioxide.
granulated.
Copper turnings.
Oxide.
Corbonate.
Chloride (ic.)
Nitrate.
Sulphate,
foil.
Silver Nitrate.
Mercury Metal
Chloride (ic.).
Oxide (red)
Nitrate (ic.^.
APP. H.} LIST OF SCIENCE MATERIAL AND APPARATUS 571
Section E (continued).
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the High
School Examination only.
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
A.
B.
CHEMICALS (continued}.
*lb. ..
Mercury Nitrate (ous).
lib " . .
2 , ..
Lead shots.
.
I , ..
foil.
4 , ..
Acetate.
1 , ..
Carbonate.
1 , ..
Nitrate, pure.
1 oz.
2
Oxide (litharge).
1 ..
1 ' 1 .
(red).
1 , ..
Chloride.
o
Metal.
1 oz
Bismuth Nitrate.
* ,
Cadmium Nitrate.
lib ..
Iron turnings.
.
2 , ..
Chloride (ic.) pure.
lib." ..
4 , ..
, Sulphate (ous).
30 , ..
Ferrous Sulphide.
, .
1 , -.
Ammonium Sulphate.
1 , ..
Iron Oxide.
21b'.' ..
M ))
filings.
1
1 '
Alum Ammonium.
4 oz. . .
2 oz. .
Aluminium foil.
2 -
Arsenic metal.
*ib. .
Oxide.
2 oz. .
Antimony metal.
2 Ib. ..
1 Ib. .
Zinc granulated.
1 .
Carbonate, pure.
.
i .
Oxide.
Sulphate.
2 oz. .
Nickel Sulphate.
lib. .
Cobalt Nitrate.
} Ib.' .
1
Tin foil.
Granulated, pure.
2 !! !
Commercial,
2 ..
Tin Chloride (ous).
,
1 ..
Chrotaium Alum.
.
3 ..
Potassium
2lb
4 ..
Sulphur roll.
2 ..
Flowers.
2oz
8 oz. . .
Phosphorus white.
,
8 ..
red.
f
8 ..
Bromine.
8 .
Iodine resublimed.
2 Ib. .
Pumice Stone.
9
2 oz. .
Phosphorus Trichloride.
-
2
,, ' Pentachloride.
572
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. H.
Section E (continued).
Column A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the High
School Examination only.
Column B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
A.
B.
CHEMICALSfcowcZwefed).
1 Ib. . .
Animal charcoal.
i
Graphite.
* .-
Emery powder.
2oz.
Phosphoric acid.
lib'.' ..
|lb. ..
Iron sheet.
i
Lead ,,
a
- M '
| -
Microcosmic salt.
ORGANIC CHEMICALS.
4 oz. . .
Acid Formic.
4 ..
Stearic.
2 Ib.
Oxalic.
2 oz.
4 oz. . .
p yrogallic.
. .
tib. ..
Tartaric.
, .
1 oz.
Butyric.
. .
4 ..
Salicylic.
.
lib.
Benzene.
21b'.' ..
8 ..
Carboon disulphide.
1 ..
Acetone.
1 Ib". . .
2 ..
Alcohol (abs).
9 f
* ,,
Chloroform.
. .
I ..
Cream of tartar.
, ,
1 ..
Formaldehyde.
. .
2 oz.
Acetaldenyde.
4 Ib.
2 Ib.
Glycerine.
loz. ..
lodoform.
1 Ib. . .
4 Ib.
Naphtlialenc.
f t
1 ..
Castor oil.
m t
4 oz. . .
Phenol.
t
4 ..
Bees wax.
. .
1 ..
Acetatnide.
% ,
2 ..
Acetanilide.
. .
2 ..
Sulphamlic acid,
, ,
1 -.
Methyl Salicylate.
. .
ilb. ..
Urea.
4 9
4 oz. . .
Methyl Alcohol.
, .
2 ..
Aceybl Chloride.
. .
4 ..
Ethyl Acetate.
2 ..
Fuchsine.
2 Ib.
Rochelle Salt.
*
1 oz.
Sodium Nitoprusside.
1 1
1 Ib.
Fuller's Earth.
. .
4 oz. . .
Methyl Orange.
4 ..
4 ..
Phenolphthalein.
Lampblack.
4lb." ..
2 Ib. . .
Ether.
APP. H.] LIST OF SCIENCE MATEBIAD AND APPARATUS 573
Section ^(concluded).
Coulmn A gives the minimum requirements for work up to the High
School Examination only.
Coumn B gives the minimum requirements for work up to the Inter-
mediate Examination only.
Quantity.
A.
B.
ORGANIC CHEMCALS (coMcJucfod).
1 Ib.
Starch.
.
4 oz.
Grape sugar.
2 Ib.
Turpentine oil.
1
Olive oil.
m
1 ',
Vaseh'ne.
*lb
. .
2 ,
Cane sugar.
1 ,
. .
1
Paraffin wax.
.
2oz
Litmus granular.
2 ,
. .
Albumen.
t
lib
Amylalcohol.
.
1 ,
Aniline.
.
2oz
Benzoic Acid.
,
1
Gelatine.
.
2 |
Indigo sulphate.
2 ,
Glass wool.
.
2 Ib. . .
Na 2 So 3 dry anhydrous.
2 ..
Sodium hyposulphite.
574
OALENDAB 1928-29
[APP. H.
Section F.
Apparatus for showing lecture experiments in Chemistry.
Quantity.
A. B. C*.
1
1
1 set
1
1
] eadi
1
1
8
1 set
1
1
Name of apparatus .
Hoffmann's apparatus for the electrolysis of water
with platinum electrodes, stand metal complete
limbs 50 C. C. '
Water voltameter.
Hoffmann's apparatus for the volumetric synthesis
of steam complete with vapour jacket, metal stand
and binding screws.
Hoffmann's apparatus for the electrolysis of hydro-
chloric acid or ammonia complete with stand
carbon ele?trode% Umbs 50 C.C.
Hoffmann's apparatus to show the volumetric com-
position of hydrochloric acid by means of sodium
amalgam with metal stand and clamp.
Glass Tube with two taps and platinum electrodes.
Hoffmann's apparatus for showing that 1 volume
of nitrogen and 3 volumes of hydrogen unite to
form 2 volumes of ammonia, limbs 50 C.C., metal
stand and platinum electrodes complete.
Apparatus to demonstrate the volumetric composi-
tion of ammonia by the action of chlorine glass
tube with tap, ont?r jacket and stand complete.
Apparatus to show the composition of carbon dioxide
or sulphur dioxide.
Apparatus for the synthesis of acetylene.
Gas measuring tub'j graduated in C.C. with tap 50
C.C. in l/5th.
Glass cutting knives.
Warm condenser.
Cork borer, set of 12.
Iron mortar and pestle.
Graduated pipette 25 C.C. graduated in 1 /10th.
Proeelain evaporating basin, 1 litre and 2 litre capa-
city.
Perforated shieves to be used in ordinary glass funnel *.
Glass stopcocks.
Flasks, 2 litre capacity.
4 *
Stout flasks, round bottomed, 80 litre capacity, wide
mouth for preparing sulphuric acid.
Martin's chemical lecture diagrams for clap? illus-
trations, set of 39.
Filter paper case.
Gfas holder.
Watch glass bands.
Models of crystal.
Hot air drying oven, 9* X 9" X 9*.
Hot water drying oven.
*For teacher's use for the Intermediate classes.
APP. H.J UST OP SCIENCE MATEBIAL AND APPABATUS 575
Section F (concluded).
Apparatus for showing lecture experiments in
Chemistry (concluded. )
Quantity.
A. B.
C*.
1
2
3
3
2
1
1
1
2
1
6
25
12
2
2
6
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
12
I
2
6
2
3
3
3
1
1
2
1
200
6
6
4
1
2
doz
Name of apparatus.
Aspirator metal.
,, glass.
Adapters bent 6" long.
straight 6" long.
Balloons ordinary.
Bell jar open at top.
stoppered.
Bunsen Burner, Teclu.
Fletcher's Burner diam., top wire gauze 7/8.
U*.
Flame protector metallic.
Wooden shades.
Fire clay crucibles.
Nickel evaporating basin.
Tongs with bow gun metal.
White porcelain tiles glazed, 5" x 8".
Detonating bottle.
Glass pencil.
Funnel, 6" diameter glass.
Bibbed Funnel, 3* diam.
Measuring cylinder, 250 C. C.
25
^-pint measure.
1-oz measure.
Pipette, 5 C.C.
1
Condenser clamps.
Rubber corks assorted.
Spoons horn with spatula.
Wire gauze asbestos lined.
Glass reduction bulbs.
,, tubes straight.
T tubes glass.
Y
Pneumatic trough glass 12".
Beehive shelve for the above.
Gas jars with cover 16" X 3|* with covers.
Hydrometer specific gravity scale.
Analytical filter paper, 12 "5 c.m.
Brushes for burettes,
,, ,, gas jars.
,, glass tubes.
Drying cylinder with bulb, hard glass.
Weighing bottles, stoppered.
*For teacher's use for the Intermediate classes;
N.B. For replacing breakages, buying chemicals and acids, pre-
paring distilled water and gas or buying spirits a contingent grant of
Rs. 1,200 per annum for the Intermediate chemical laboratory is recom-
mended.
576 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP, H.
Minimum requirements of an Intermediate College,
Biology department.
Non-recurring requisites (for a class of 16 students or a class of
32 students in two batches).
Rs. a. p.
Seventeen Microscopes . . . . 2,333 4
Seventeen Dissecting Lens complete with stands 682 2
Two Dissecting cases . . . . . . 32
Ordinary balance . . . . . . 40
Zoology and Botany Charts . . . . 100
Physiological Apparatus . . . . 200
Chemicals, Stains and Reagents . . . . 163 5
Glass-ware and Slides. . . . . . . 344 130
Skeletons .. .. .. 283 8
Dissecting Dishes, etc. . . . . 98
Museum Jars and Tubes . . . . 35
Books for Zoology and Botany . . 31800
Miscellaneous . . . . . . 100
4,730
Freight, etc. . . 270
Total .. 5,000
Recurring charges . . . . . . 500 a year
. 8. d. Rs. a. p.
Student's Microscopes, Model III
Complete with stand, three double
nosepiece, achromatic objectives,
huyghenian eyepieces
C/ .9-3-0 .. .. 17 only .. 155 11 0=2,333 4 0.'
FROM MESSRS. O'GILVY & Co.,
18, Bloomsbury Square, London, W. C. 1.
Or
FROM MESSRS. ADA1R, DUTT & Co.,
22, Canning Street, Calcutta ,and 60, 61, and
62, Burnhill Row, London, E. C. I.
. s. d. Rs. a. p.
Dissecting Lens-
Rack and pinion Lens holder, im-
proved pattern with heavy base in
one piece, clamping screws and
holder to carry any of the dissecting
aplanats without lens
. C/ .1-18-6 each .. ..17 only .. 32 14 6=490 1
liens for the above
15. .. .. .. 17 only .. 1215 0= 191 4
FROM MESSRS. FLATTERS AND GARNETT,
309, Oxf ord Road, Manchester.
APP. H.] LIST OF SCIENCE MATERIAL AND APPARATUS 577
Rs. a. p.
Dissecting Instruments
C/ Rs. 16 each.. .. 2 only .. 32
FROM THE SCIENTIFIC INSTRUMENT CO.,
1, Johnatonganj, Allahabad.
Or
FROM MESSRS. FLATTERS AND GARNETT,
309, Oxford Road, Manchester.
Rs. a. p.
Balance ordinary 1 only .. .. 40 0-
FROM THE SCIENTIFIC INSTRUMENT Co.,
1, Johnstonganj, Allahabad.
Rs. a. p..
Botany and zoology charts to be made
under the supervision of the teacher . . . . 100
Physiological Apparatus .. .. .. 200
FROM THE SCIENTIFIC INSTRUMENT Co.,
1, Johnstonganj, Allahabad.
Rs. a. p..
Chemicals, Stains, and Reagent-
Acid Acetic glacial, Rs. 2-8 per lb. . . 1 Ib. . . 280
Hydrochloric, annas 7 per lb. . . 2 14
Nitric, annas 9 per lb. . . . . 1 ..090-
Sulphuric, annas 6 per lb. 1 ..060
Potassium Iodide, Rs. 22 per lb. . . J . . 11
Hydrate, Rs. 4-8 per lb. . . 1 ..480
Zinc Chloride (sticks), Rs. 3 per lb. , . 1 . . 300-
Iodine (resublimed), Rs. 2 per oz. . . 4 oz. , . 800
Glycerine pure, Rs. 2-12 per lb. . . 4 Ibs. . . 1100
Formaline 40 per cent., Rs. 4 per lb. . . 1 gall. . . 40
Absolute Alcohol, Rs. 5 -10 per lb. .. 2 Ibs. .. 11 4
Oil of Cloves, Rs. 1-8 per oz. . . . . 8 oz. . . 12
Xylcfl purif, Rs. 5-8 per lb. .. .. 2 Ibs. .. 11
Chloroform pure, Rs. 3-8 per lb. . . 3 Ibs. . . 10 8
Borax, powdered, annas 12 per lb. . . 1 lb. . . 12 w
Balsam in Xylol, Rs. 1-8 per oz. . . 4 oz. ..600
Methylic alcohol, Rs. 15 per lb. . . . . 1 lb. . . 15
Carried over . . 148 5
878 CALENDAR 1928-29 [AFP. H.
Rs. a. p.
Brought forward . . 148 5
Stains
Haematein, Rs. 5 per 5-gram tube . . 1 tube . . 500
Methylene blue, Rs. 2-8 per 10 gram tube . . 1 . . 280
Eosine sol. in water, Rs. 1-8 per 5 gram tube 1 ..180
Eosine sol. in alcohol, Rs 1-8 per 5 gram
tube .. .. .. .. 1 ..180
Carmine rubr., Rs. 9 per oz. . . . . $ oz. ..480
Total .. 163 5
FROM THE ORIENTAL INDUSTRIAL Co.,
9, Bondfields Lane, Calcutta.
FROM MESSRS. FLATTERS AND GARNETT,
309, Oxford Road, Manchester.
'{JJpssware . s. d. R. a. p.
K 1378 Glass rods with knobs,
3" long, lid. per doz. .. 2 dozen .. 1 10 = 1 6
K 1354 Watch glasses 60 M. M.,
2,9. 8rf. per doz. . . . . 5 . . 13 4 = 10
K 1351 Glass boxes with lids,
60 X 20 M. M., 25. each ..2 .. 2 8 = 36
K 1207 Cover glasses, no. 15s.
6rf. per oz. . . . . 6 oz. . . 1 13 = 24 12
K 2001 Glass funnels 5 C.M. dia.,
Id. each . . . . 2 only . . 1 2 = 14
K 2001 Glass funnels 11* C.M.
dia., Is. 2d. each . . . . 2 . . 2 4 = 1 12
K 1200 Glass slips 3'XT extra
thin crystal white, 6s. per $
gross . . . . . . 2 gross . . 140=1800
K 2075 Glass beakers with tum-
bler form spout 250 C. C. Is. Id.
each . . . . . , 6 only . . 6 6 = 4 14
K 2075 Glass beakers with tum-
bler form spout 400 C. C., Is.
4d. each .. -.6,, ..080=600
K 2083 Graduated cylinders 25, C. ,
C., 2s. each . . . . 2 ..040=300
K 2083 Graduated cylinders, 500
C. C., 5s. 3d. each . . 2 . . 10 6 = 7 14
K. 2083 Graduated cylinders, 1,000
*C.C. .. .. .. 2 .. 16 = 12
Carried over ..126 8
t H.] LIST OF SCIENCE MATERIAL AND APPARATUS 579
. s. d. Rs. a. p.
Brought forward ..126 8
K 1372 Dropping bottles with
grounded glass stoppers, capa-
city 60 C. C., 8*. 6d per doz. .. 2doztn .. 17 = 12 12
K 1395 Balsam bottles with rods
and ground on cap, capacity 30
C. C., Is. 6d. each . . l , 1 7 = 20 4
K 1320 Staining troughs with
glass covers to hold 20 slips
3* XT' in 10 prs. grooves, l
11*. Gd per dozen .. 6 only .. 15 9 = 11 13
K 1331 Glass tubes for staining
3$*XlJ* with good cross cut
corks, 4. 6d. per doz. . . 4 doz. . . 18 = 13 8
K 1367 spirit lamps with ground
on cap and brass screw wick-
holders, capacity 120 C. C., 3*.
each . . . . . . 2 only . . 060=480
K. 1416 Bone cutting forceps, best
quality, nickel plated 1" 12s.
6<J. each. .. .. 2 .. I 5 = 18 12
K. 814 Triple pocket lens f * dia.,
3. each .. ..2,, .. 060=480
K 1208 Elder Pith per bundle M. 9
5s. 6d. per doz. .. .. 2 doz. bundles 11 = 840
Grammes weights physical qua-
lity in polished boxes from 1 to
500 grams., 17s. 6d. per set .. 1 set . . 17 6 = 13 2
K 1725 Test tubes (Bacteriologi-
cal test tubes) 6*Xj', Is. 8d.
per doz. . . . . 2 dozen . . 034=280
K 1384 Widemouth stoppered
bottles, capacity 500 C. C.,
13*. 3d. per doz. . . . . 2 . . 1 6 6 = 19 14
K 1384 Widemouth stoppered
bottles, capacity 300 C. C.,
Us. 3d. per doz. . . . . 2 . . 1 2 6 = 16 14
K. 1937 Bolljars for Microscopes
46 C. M.xSO C. M., 12s. 9d.
each . . . . . . 2 only . . 1 5 6 = 10 2
Prepared slides (Histological and
Physiological slides) can be
obtained from the above firm. . . . 3 10 = 52 8
Total .. 34413
580 OALBNDAB 1928-29 [APP. H.
Skeletons
FBOM MESSES. CHANDLER & Co.,
10, South Road, Allahabad, United Provinces.
Rs. a. p.
Rabbit (disarticulated skeletons), Rs. 9 each . . 17 only * .. 153 O
Wooden box for the above, annas 14 each . . 17 . . 14 14 O
Rabbit (articulated skeletons), Rs. 15 each . . 1 . . 15 0>
Frog (disarticulated skeletons), Rs. 3 each . . 17 . 51 (V
Wooden boxes, annas 10 each . . . . 17 . . 10 10 O
Frog (articulated skeletons), Rs. o each 1 . . 5 (>
Dog skulls, Rs. 2 each . . . . 17 . . 34
283 8
Dissecting Dishes, etc.
Dissecting Boards 22* X 15* X 1$' Rs. 1-8 each . . 17 only . . 25 8
Dissecting Dishes' 12" X8"X2', Rs. 4 each . . 17 . . 6&
Awls for pinning specimens for dissection,
annas 6 per dozen . . 1 gross . . 480
Museum Jars, etc.
FROM MESSES. GEORGE HOLT & Co.,
49, Kingswood Road, Brixton Hill, London, S. W. 2.
. 3. d. Rs. a. p.
Specimen tubes, fig. 21, 2"X%
Is. 5d. per dozen. . . 4 dozen . . 058=440
Specimen tubes, fig. 21, 4" X 1% 5.
U. per dozen .. -.2,, .. Oil 0=840
Cylindrical Museum jars, 8"X4",
3 per dozen . . . . \ . . 1 10 = 22 8
35
APP. H.] LIST OF SCIENCE MATERIAL AND APPARATUS 581
LIST OF BOOKS FOR ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY.
rr , &8
Zoology
1. Text-book of Zoology, by Parker and Haswell, vols. I and IJ 50
2. Vertebrate skeleton, by Reynold . . . . . . 15
3. Practical Zoology, by Marshall and Hurst . . . . 12
4. Frog, by Marshall . . . . . . . . 3
5. Biology, by Lloyd . . . . . . . . 8
6. Biology and its Makers, by Locy ,. .. ..15
7. The Microtomist Vade Mecum, by Bolles Lee and Gatenby
(latest edition) .. ,. .. ..12
8. Comparative Anatomy of Animals, by Bourne, vols. I and II 12
9. Variation and Heredity, by Lock . . . . 14
10. Schafer's Essentials of Histology . . . . 15
11. Comparative Anatomy, by Weidersheim and Parker (English
edition) . . . . . . . . 15
12. Biology of Frog, by Holmes . . . . 15
13. Elementary Physiology, by Huxley (latest edition) . . 12
198
Botany Us.
1. Strasburger Botany . . . . . . 20
2. Strasburger and Hill House Practical Botany , . 20
3. Lowson's Botany . . . . . . 10
4. Oliver's Indian Botany . . . . . . 10
5. Scott's Structural Botany .. .. ..15
6. Green's Botany . . . . . . 15
7. Tansley's Plant Biology . . . . . . 10
8. Practical Botany by Gwynne and Vaughan . . 10
9. Mitra's Botany, vols. I and II . . . . 10
120
Total .. 318
FROM MESSES. H. K. LEWIS & CO.,
136, Oower Street, London, England.
37
A PP. 1.]
FORMS
583
s
<D
G
O
g
X
3
JZ5
CO
s
a
2
** o
<-< *X
fl "5
w) 2
o.g
*
0)
s
09
a
o
O
M
I
O
3
a
+ .2
o i
H
c
n t ^
8
H
o
x
a
w
o
<D
jj
-P
recognii
(S
^
0)
1
o
c
hN
+* i
L
A B
Cation fo:
School
' e" i
?
1 !
i i
w
o i
<
a
fl I
M ',
&
584
CALENDAR 192C-29
[APP. I.
o
I
o
03
!
i
4)
J=
o
I
3
I
o
| |
CD
s
3
.a g
1*
2 S
II
!'i
C *
ities
4)
*O
I
'3
"3
Sta
Sfcatem
APP, I.]
FORMS
85
586
CALENDAR 192829
[APP. r.
I
I
APP. I.]
POEMS
587
588
CALEiNDAR 1928-29
[AFP, i.
!
8
I
13
03
1
o
2
o
U
I
J
A1P, I.
POfcMS .
589
590
CALENDAR 1927-28
[AFP. I.
Jl
o d g
e 23
o
o TO
**
o g
o 55
o ^^
fc, O
c
""" f
O * K
1 51
2 1^
O
a*-**
^ <D-M
3
O .
Ml
|ll
s
o
a
AFP. I.]
FORMS
591
CALENDAR 1928-29
*
bo
.5
-
u
2
>>
08
a
CD
V
t!>
o
03
-a
*tN
cation
, Diploma
ficates, etc.
8.
APP. |.J
FOBM3
593.
s
594
CALENDAR 1928-29
[A?P, I.
en
O
S
CO
9
o
CQ
o
&o
c
u
t
09
1
&
CD
-00
W
o
S
1
5
I.j FORMS 595
o
I
a
o
,4
*o
JU
M
o
J
-W
w
596
CALENDAR 192849
fAPP. 1
e
eg
fee
1
"5
s 1
u.
M
i
35
S
1
1
C.
d
i
C
s
1
i
tj
^
L.
52
C O
+5 o
Is
i
C **
c
8*3
.2
"5
a
OS
d
^u
HH
i
T3
A
I
MM
M
4>
4>
Sf
E
1
c
^
o
**
2
^
i
atemeni
d
APP. |J
FORMS
597
3
I
I
I
8
I
38
*98
CALENDAR 1928-29
f AP*. I
1
^
VJ
g.
1
I
-E
to
.s
n ao
I P
(o) em^ipuedxe
oq^. SuiJnp 9Jityip
UadxO
~'W
1
a
a
-! ^
I .M -if
< .l"S S.l
o o *
fill ii
i fe s s ^
nj jo
(0) 9THOOUI
(q) j9X pnoo
98 ^q^ 3mJiip
1
.e
s
Oil
o
H
o
H
APP. I.]
599
h only Class IX |
with only Class XI 1
X
1
M
M
j IX and XII 1
1
0}
i
tolarships, Students*
3tel expenditure on
concerned with the
600
OALENDAE 1928-29
[APP. i.
1 1
I
ll
5
f *
1
1 p
i j
1
M
f +
5 (X|
Q
4>
K
,
Hi ^
5 S
ce <i
^ 4S
^ "-
5 *D
1
o
S =
5 ^
5
5 ^'
.5
O 05 J ^
o ^ .3
^ M K* ^)
O
c fl *"* vT
u
O .O HH 15
'~* *rt _< &i
* .
i"> +
c8
3 o
r or Head Mas
>r recognition.
P
%^
PH e
ce ^
3-
"SI
J-4 W
11 1
if
<i> <
<D W
9 ^
1?
^ -SP
^f^
c .S
S
M +3
It
u a
QQ (
ll
rf
5
afc W
O ^H
&
1 1
4->
U
c
J i
1?
^ 8 ^
o
^ O
us
^S r
H ^3
O
' r^
1
c+H d
111
KH Vp **H
u
C
I ^ ^
fl 3
w ^
i i S
.3 "S
APP, I.]
FORMS
601
ns
*
I
AW,. I,]
FORMS
603
at 75*
M o
3
o
3
Q)
8
^^W jfl
b
*" rt
5
s a
w
* "
rt 5
S
o
Tj ^
t
Q,
O
5
"S
*3
c
TJ
PH
o
&
C
OS
&JJ
M
s.
TJ
T5
ci
W
o
fl
C!
JC
**
&
fl
(^
J
o
2
CM
*
^jj
t A
Cw
C
M
*>
!
Scho
Intermediati
fl
<H
s
S
X
w
a
604
CALENDAR 1928-29
[A PP., I,
* 2
li
f -
2
m
ti)
O
f*
t" 3
"o
B
a
*
M
S
O
s *
i
M
1 1
1
1
*3 ^
s
4-4
09 $
o
O
B
1
44
** 5
S
5 o
pS
e
V
i!
SI
j
JJ Qi
S 08
C "5
e
o
d
o
d
.2
o
1*
|
3
I
tS "*
^4
4S
CO 4
1
V)
00
tjjj
.9
e
-
2 2
1
bo
J
55
8
*
*0
*5 .S
x
1
g
1
1
sirabilH;
ititution
|
1
I
1
^
49
0)
t. The general
existing
Statemei
2. The probabt
Statemei
AFP. t]
FORMS
i
e
be
o
.5
c
5
<*)
a
C
O
u
Numbe
o
^1
o
I
a
fA
CQ
3
600
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP. i,
1
i
^
s
5
U
g
I
X?
1
i
3
1
fH
b.
o
O
on
02
1
+rf
u
=8
i
I
(A
a
i
a
C
c
4,
.2
a
5
3
o
Q>
^
03
e
*-
*o
Xj
O
S
Is
fl
D
9
s
j{
a'S
3
CJ
<D
a
3
0)
;
K
as
?
o> '
5
1
2?
M
C
3
^
w
w
*o
' U
3
^^
, o
J :
1
5J
5
U
5
X)
4
X)
1
8
"3
^
d
1
i
I
|
3
^Q
I
-o
2
I
5
i?
a
8
App. I.]
FORMS
60T
*
i|.
s-sf
01
%
fl tog
.S-3
C
<P
2
3
S^-S
3
o
1,
*^^"i
l<
e
Jl
l|^
|
S
o
8
s l
8
I
1
$ J^o
a
1
1
ilf
I
HH
1
s
il
*s
4>
TJ
""^ 07
F^4
3
00 to 2
oj
*
Q
jq ^ ^
g
E
S
!i|
4|
|l
c "*
ilf
1 h
o^^
be o
^ +> ^
s+
CJ tc ^
il
a
g! || g
r
the institatio
43 qi 'O fa
dJ .j O Q
c S *ja
08 >>B **
tt g -a o-d
he institution,
c
*S
** I .tf^ *
-*a
ttf
an
u fl o r
*8
S
1
5 te SH*S ^
8
c
ft
H fl? S O
la Ns
S
1
a
98
7 the aut]
*c ^5 * M 5
o -^ ^
a| |3|
1
o
C
*
0*8 |?1
^ d
qj -S S
*>
>
a
5 -d S M
S
i
i
111,1
E * iso
Si
?
g i i'* 5
*
< ^
608
CALENDAR 1928*29
[Air i.
JB ,
!.
f J
O 03
e 3
J2M
* %
g o
!*
ii
*
!
i!
M
|l.
>>*0 P
^ ea.2
' of the present
the teaching of tl
Statemen
authoriti
institu
08
*
*O
nd rates of j
e engaged f
1
iJi
S5
||||
tigqtralificatioi
staff proposed
ly^g'ca
g
*i i
||
31
|
1 ~ ' | -*
Apr, i,]
FORMS
,. '
e &
2 na
* 1
1-1 ^
3
J *S -
"
Is '?
1 I X F
S 3 5 ,-,
a
1
j&
&
*S
ilili
S-Sl i
. .
'
CALENDAR 1928-29
[fl'P. J.
*1
III
S.
j-eoX puooos
Sautip sin^tp
uodxe
&
paooas
oq^ Saunp oin^tp
|
A
*O
^
APP, I.]
FOBUB
611
08 O
^ O
^ -V
'I
1^
t) ^
<a>
a
'
e
^ ^Q
r|
*~*
&e
^
*)^ pd
**
o
8
^
1
5 M
1
O
E
s
c
d*S
1
1
*<N
j-
I
1
d o
<s pq
I
|
1
e
S-, "**
0*0
1
d
1
2
05
<D d
S-|
tq
o
d
1
+'
,,
cc
^
*i
.11
-P W)
*
^>
I
2,
.2
O ft^
$
Q>
jk
5 a
*&
8
i-H
P^ o
-p
t
X* 4>
.S ^
^
^
. fc<
*d
CO
I*
rS
T3
*- 2
.3 ^2 m
'g
&o u
O
O
.s
^ ^ .9
CQ
jjj ^.
^ ff* *f^
QQ
FH
S S;
OQ W 2
52 2
!"
O ^fTj
O O
I' 8 -
|^
B
-2 .2 '3
8 ,-S
M CQ c!
I
43 Qf-J
S
fe l|
U ^ >
3
"S ^ S
o _3
** *TJ X
!
3
^> 2 c8
^ M
HI
|
|||
1 1*
5 d^3
"S tD'
tt
t>v
< Q ^d
3
1!l
EH *Tg
p^
00
^ w M ^
t
d2
"9
w S^ -5
I
IH g
1
.sl <S
\
a
q
612 CALENDAB 1928-29. APP. I*
(2) Forms of applications for admission to the Board's
Examinations.
Roll no. ,
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL' AND INTEBMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION, 1929.
This application must reach the office of the Secretary, Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, United Provinces, Allahabad, on or before
December 28, 1928.
APPLICATION.
To
THE SECRETARY, BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES, ALLAHABAB.
SIR,
I BEQUEST permission to appear at the ensuing High School Exa-
mination of the Board of High School and Intermediate Education, United
Provinces.
The prescribed fee has been paid.
I am, etc.,
Dated the 192 .
(Name to be written in full and very legibly.)
CERTIFICATE BY THE HEAD MASTER OR PRINCIPAL.
I HEREBY certify that has attended a regular
course of study in a recognized institution (as required by Board's Regula-
tionsvide footnote to Regulation 4, Chapter XVII) and that his/her date
of birth, according to the register of the School/College is*
and
I also certify that his/her character and conduct have been satisfactory,
1 that he 'she has paid the prescribed examination fee.
1 1 also certify that he/she has actually performed the experiments
laid down in the syllabus.
Head Master
Principal
' School
College
Dated the . 192 .
Enter here date, mooth, and yew, and not month -nd year only '
tFor sc'ence candidates otfj.
APP I.] FORMS 613
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN BY THE CANDIDATE.
1. Name in full .. -
2. Optional subject (a) . . . ~
3. Vernacular (6)
4. Does he offer History or Geogra--
phy as a compulsory subject ? (c)
(i) Optional sub-_
ject.
(ii) Vernacular . ._
5. Medium of ( (in) Mathematics .
Examination
offered in (d).
(iv) History or
Geography as
a compulsory
subject.
6. District and town or village where-
resident.
United Provinces
Ajmer-Merwara
7. Length ofJ
residence in Rajputana
the
^ Central India
8. Name of father
9. Name of guardian
*10.
(i) Name of the subject in which
eligible for Compartmental
Examination . .
(ii) Name of the year in which
declared eligible for Com-
partmental Examination
f- i . r _ _ _ A _J
(Hi) Medium of examination offer-
ed
(iv) Subjects offered at the previ- f 1. Optional .
ous High School Examina-j
tion. (. 2. Vernacular .
(Signature of candidate in full.)
(a) Candidate! Ukinsr C i merce should clttarl? show whetuer for Commerce
second paper, thfyofter f< BJ * -keeping" or ** Typewritingr."
(i) This will *Uo be the Vernacular from nhich tne candidate will be required to
translate in the third p -per of En liah.
(e) Only one teither History or rteographtl should be given,
*) A candidate is permitted to answer through a Vernacular medium in the
following subjects only :-
ti) Math- matics, () History (3) Geography, (4) Sanskrit, (5) Arabic, (8) Persian.
(7) Agriculture, (8) Domestic Scieoce,<9j Hindi, and (lOj Urdu.
* To be filled in by Compartment*! candidates only.
39
614
CALENDAR 1928-29.
[APP. i.
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES .
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION, 1929.
ADMISSION CARD.
All tke entries excepting Eoll number should befitted up in the office of the
Head Master or Principal.
Admit .
(Roll no.
-) of.
School
to_
College
Centre
ALLAHABAD :
March 6, 1929.
Issued on
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADUB,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate
Education, United Provinces.
_1929.
Signature-
Head Master
"""~ "" '~ " ~%
Principal
School
College
APP. I.] FORMS 616
RULES FOE THE GUIDANCE OF CANDIDATES.
1. The dates and the hours of the High School Examination of 1929,
will be* notified separately.
2. The doors of the Examination Hall will be opened a quarter of an
hour before the commencement of each examination and will be closed at
the time of commencement daily, after which no candidate will be admit-
ted.
3. A seat marked with his Roll number will be allotted to each candi-
date and a book in which to write his answers will be found on his desk.
Candidates will be required to find out their allotted seats for themselves.
4. Candidates are no L '/o have about them, while sitting to answer
their papers, any books, notes or papers whatever.
5. The answer must be written on one side of the page only, the other
side may be used for rough work and no portion of the answer-book provid-
ed may be torn out. If a candidate wishes to cancel any part of his ans-
wers, he may do so by drawing distinct lines across it.
0. All candidates are required to provide their own pens, pencil or
pastel, etc. To answer the Second Paper of Domestic Science on sewing
and cutting out, candidates are required to provide their own needles,
thread, and pair of scissors. Blotting-paper will be supplied in the answer-
books.
7. Candidates must obey any instructions they receive from the Officer
in charge of the Examination.
8. Candidates must produce their admission card when demanded.
<>. A duplicate copy of the admission card is issued on payment of
Rs. 2 (Two).
10. No guarantee will be given to the candidates as to the order in
which, and the dates on which, the question papers will be given to them.
11. Candidates must await the publication of the result in Part IV
of the United Provinces Government Gazette. No inquiries by wire or letter
can be attended to. If any candidate wants a copy of Part IV of the Qcv
eminent Gazette, in which the result will be published, he should apply for it
to the Superintendent, Government Press, Allahabad. *
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADTTB,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate Educo(\(.T^
United Provr (&*
ALLAHABAD :
March 6, 1929.
616 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. I
Roll no.
BOARD OP HIGH SCHOOL AND INTEEMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION, MARCH, 1929.
This application must reach the office of the Secretary, Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, United Provinces, Allahabad, on or before
December 28, 1928.
APPLICATION.
To
THE SECRETARY, BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES, ALLAHABAD*
[Snu
I BEQUEST permission to present myself at the ensuing Interme-
diate Examination of the Board of High School and Intermediate Educa-
tion, United Provinces.
The prescribed fee has been paid.
I am, etc.,
(Name to be written in full and very legibly .)
CERTIFICATE.
I CERTIFY that the above-named candidate has satisfied me* that
he has passed the Board's High School Examination or an examination
declared equivalent thereto, vide
This certificate IB to be signed bj the Regulation 2, Chapter XIV of the
Principal of the College. Board's Regulations ; that I know
nothing against his character which
ought to exclude him from this Examination ; that he has attended a regular
course of study at College as required by the Regulations vide footnote to
Regulation 4, Chapter XVII in each and all of the subjects offered ; that
he has paid the prescribed examination fee ; and that I believe the sub-
joined account to be true.
Name-
Principal .
College.
The 192
* The forwarding officer is particularly requited to inspect ench candidate'*
original certificate of pining the pretioun examination.
APP. I.] FORMS 617
PARTICULARS TO BE PILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE.
1. Name (in full) ..
(Wtmen candidates must write
Miss or Mrs. before their names.)
2. Date of birth ..
3. Name of father . . . .
4. Name of guardian . . . ._
5. Race (i.e., nation, tribe, etc.)
6. District and town or village where
resident . .
7. Length of residence in
(a) United Provinces . . . .
(6) Rajputana .. .._
(c) Ajmer-Merwara ..
(d) Central India
8. Language from which translation
is to be made into English in the
third English paper or English
composition in the case of candi-
dates whose mother-tongue is
English . . . ._
9. Date of passing the High School
or an equivalent examination,
together with the name of the
examination passed ..
10. The name of the optional subjects
offered .. .. (!)-
11. (a) Whether eligible for compart-
mental examination; if so, the
name of the subject . . . ._
(6) The year of the examination on
the result of which he was de-
clared eligible for compartmental
examination
(c) Subjects offered in the year
ref <*red to in (b) . . . . _
12. Whether he appeared at the Inter-
mediate examination of any pre-
vious year ; if so, the year in
which appeared ..
(Signature of candidate infuU.)
* In the case 4f History, the name of History [e.g. Modern History (Indian-Euro-
9 tan}, Modet n Hist TJ (Indian-English), Ancient History J should be definitely i
618 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. i_
BOABD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTEBMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PBOVINOHS.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION, 1929.
ADMISSION CARD.
AU the entries except those for Roll number and centre should be fitted up
in the office of the Principal.
Admit - . .- , . r .
(Roll no ) of College.
, , . to _ . Centre.
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADUR,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate
Education, United Provinces.
ALLAHABAD :
The 6th March, 1929.
Issued^ . 1929.
8 'iy nature-
-Principal.
^College.
. I.] MBS
RULES FOR THE GUIDANCE OF CANDIDATES.
1. The dates and the hours of the Intermediate Examination of 1929,,
will be notified separately.
2. The doors of the Examination Hall will be opened a quarter of an*
hour bffore the commencement of each examination and will be closed at
the time of commencement daily, after which no candidate will be admit-
ted.
3. A seat marked with his Roll number will be allotted to each candi-
date and a book in which to write his answers will be found on his desk-
Candidates will be required to find out their allotted seats for themselves,
4. Candidates are not to have about them, while sitting to answer
their papers, any books, notes or papers whatever.
5. The answers must be written on one side of the page only, the other
side may used for rough work and no portion of the answer-book provided
may be torn out. If a candidate wishes to cancel any part of his answers,,
he may do so by drawing distinct lines across it.
6. All candidates are required to provide their own pens.
7, Candidates must obey any instructions they receive from the Officer
in charge of the examination.
8. Candidates must produce their admission cards when demanded.
9. A duplicate copy of the admission card is issued on payment of two-
rupees.
10. No guarantee will be given to the candidates as to the order in
which, and the dates on which, the question papers will be given to them.
11. Candidates must await the publication of the result in the United
Provinces Government Gazette, No inquiries by wire or letter can be attend-
ed to. If any candidate wants a copy of the Government Gaztte, in which
the result will be published, he should apply for it to the Superintendent*
Government Press, Allahabad.
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADUB,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate
Education, United Province*
ALLAHABAD :
The 6/fc March, 1929.
620 CALENDAR 1923-29 [APP. i.
Roll no.
BOAED OF HIGH SCHOOL' AND INTEEMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
COMMERCIAL DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, MARCH, 1929.
This application must reach the office of the Secretary, Board of High School
and Intermediate Education^ United Provinces, Allahabad, on or before
December 28, 1928.
APPLICATION.
To
THE SECRETARY, BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES, ALLAHABAD.
SIB,
I BEQUEST permission to present myself at the ensuing Commercial
Diploma Examination of the Board of High School and Intermediate Edu-
cation, United Provinces.
The prescribed fee has been paid.
I am, etc.,
Student College.
(Name to be written in full and clearly.)
CERTIFICATE.
I CERTIFY that the above-named candidate has satisfied me* that
he has passed the Board's High
This certificate is to be Bigned by the Priii- Sch o1 Examination or an exami-
Jpal of the College. nation equivalent thereto ; that I
know nothing against his character
which ought to exclude him from this Examination ; that he has attended
a regular course of study at College in each and all of the subjects offered ;
that he has paid the prescribed examination fee and that I believe the sub-
joined account to be true.
Name . _
Principal .
-.College.
The 192
The forwarding officer is particularly rogue 8 ted to inspect each candidate's
certificate of pawing the previous examination,
APP, I*] FORMS 621
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE.
(in full)
(Women candidates must write
Miss or Mrs. before their names.)
2. Date of birth
3. Name of father .. .._
4. Name of guardian . .
5. Race (i.e., nation, tribe, etc.)
6. District and town or village where
resident . . . . . .
7. Length of residence in
(a) United Provinces . .
(6) Rajputana .. .._
(c) Ajmer-Merwara ..
(d) Central India
8. Date of passing the High School
or an equivalent examination,
together with the name of the
examination passed .. .._
9. Optional subject . . . . _
10. (a) Whether eligible for compart -
mental examination ; if so, the
name of the subject .. .._
(6) The year of the examination on
the result of which he was declared
eligible for compartmentai exami-
nation . . . . . . __
(c) Subjects offered in the year
referred to in (6) . . . .
11. Whether he appeared at the Com-
mercial Diploma Examination of
any previous year ; if so, the year
in which appeared . . . ._
(Signature of candidate tn/d?.)
622 CALENDAR 1928- 29 [APF. I.
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
COMMERCIAL DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, 1929.
ADMISSION CARD.
All the entries except those for Roll number and centre should be filled up in
the office of the Principa I.
Admit-
(Roll no ) of College
to Centre.
A C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADUR,
Secretary, .Board of Iligh School and Intermediate
Education, United frovinces^
ALLAHABAD T
The Qth March, 1929.
Issued on 1929.
Signature ,
-Principal*
-College.
APP, I,] FORMS 62$
RULES FOR THE GUIDANCE OF CANDIDATES.
1. The dates and the hours of the Commercial Diploma Examination
of 192J will be notified separately.
2.The doors of the Examination Hall will be opened a quarter of an
hour before the commencement of each examination and will be closed at
the time of commencement daily, after which no candidate will be admit-
ted.
3. A seat marked with his Roll number will be allotted to each candi-
date and a book in which to write his answers will be found on his desk.
Candidates will be required to find out their allotted seats for themselves.
4. Candidates are not to have about them, while sitting to answer
their papers, any books, notes or papers whatever.
6. The answers must be written on one cide of the page only ; the other
side may be used for rough work and no portion of the answer-book pro-
vided may be torn out. If a candidate wishes to cancel any part of his
answers, he may do so by drawing distinct lines across it.
6. All candidates are required to provide their own pens.
7. Candidates must obey any instructions they receive from the Officer
in charge of the examination.
8. Candidates must produce their admission cards when demanded.
9. A duplicate copy of the admission card is issued on payment of two-
rupees.
10. No guarantee will be given to the candidates as to the order in
which, and the dates on which, the question papers will be given to them.
11. Candidates must await the publication of the result in the United
Provinces Government Gazette. No inquiries by wire or letter can be attend-
ed to. If any candidate wants a copy of Part IV of the Government Gazette^
in which the result will be published, he should apply for it to the Super-
intendent, Government Press, Allahabad.
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADUB,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate
Education, United Provinces-
ALLAHABAD :
The Qth March, 1929.
624 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. I.
Roll no
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
AGRICULTURAL DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, MARCH, 1929.
This application must reach the office of the Secretary, Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, United Provinces, Allahabad, on or before
December 28, 1928.
APPLICATION.
To
THE SECRETARY, BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOLT
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES, ALLAHABAD.
SIB,
I BEQUEST permission to present myself at the ensuing Agricul-
tural Diploma Examination of the Board of High School and Intermediate
Education, United Provinces.
The prescribed fee has been paid.
I am, etc.,
Student College.
(Name to be written in full and clear ly.)
CERTIFICATE.
I CERTIFY that the above-named candidate has satisfied me* that
he has passed the Board's High
This certificate is to be signed by the School Examination or an exami-
Principal of the College. ^^ equivalent thereto . ^ j
know nothing against his character
which ought to exclude him from this Examination ; that he has attend-
ed a regular course of study at College in each and all of the subjects offerdd ;
that he has paid the prescribed examination fee ; and that I believe the sub-
joined account to be true.
Name .
Principal . .
College.
The 192 .
^__ ,.
* The forwarding officer is particularly requested to impact each candidate's original
-certificate cf passing the previous eiamlnmion .
AIT. I.] FORMS 625
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE.
1. Name (in full) . .
(Miss or Mrs. must be written
before the names of women
candidates.)
2. Date of birth .. ..-
3. Name of father ..
4" Name of guardian , .
5. Race (i.e., nation, tribe, etc.)
6. District and town or village where
resident . . . . .
7. Length of residence in
(a) United Provinces . .
(b) Rajputana . .
(c) Ajmer-Merwara
(d) Central India ..
8. Date of passing the High School or
an equivalent examination toge-
ther with the name of the exami-
9. Language from which translation
is to be made into English in the
first English paper . . . .
(Signature of candidate infutt.)
626 CALENDAR 1928-29 [App. i.
BOAED OP HIGH SCHOOL AND INTEEMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
AGRICULTURAL DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, 1929.
ADMISSION CARD.
All the entries except those for Roll number and centre should be filed up in
the office of the Principal.
Admit
(Roll no ) of
College
-to
.Centre.
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADUR,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate
Education, United Province*.
ALLAHABAD :
The Gth March, 1929.
Issued on 1929.
Signature
Principal^
College.
. i.] FORMS 627
RULES FOR THE GUIDANCE OF CANDIDATES.
1. The dates and the hours of the Agricultural Diploma Examination,
1929, will be notified separately.
2. The doors of the Examination Hall will be opened a quarter of an
hour before the commencement of each examination and willl be closed at
the time of commencement daily, after which no candidate will be admit-
ted.
1 3. A seat marked with his Roll number will be allotted to each candi-
date and a book in which to write his answers will be found on his desk.
Candidates will be required to find out their allotted seats for themselves.
4. Candidates are not to have about them, while sitting to answer their
papers any books, notes or papers, whatever.
5. The answers must be written on one side of the page only ; the
other side may be used for. rough work and no portion of the answer -book
provided may be torn out. If -a candidate wishes to cancel any part of
liis answers, he may do so by drawing distinct lines across it.
6. All candidates are required to provide their own pens.
7. Candidates must obey any instructions they receive from the
Officer in charge of the Examination.
8. Candidates must produce their admission cards when demanded,
9. A duplicate copy of the admission card is issued on payment of
Rs. 2.
10. No guarantee will be given to the candidates as to the order in
which, and the dates on which, the question papers will be given to them.
11. Candidates must await the publication of the result in Part IV
of the United Provinces Government Gazette. No inquiries by wire or letter
can be attended to. If any candidate wants a copy of Part IV of the
Government Gazette, in which the result will be published, he should apply
for it to the Superintendent, Government Press, Allahabad.
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAJ BAHADITB,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate. Education,
United Provinces.
ALLAHABAD :
The &h March, 1929.
628 CALENDAR 1928-29 [App. i.
Note. No fee should be sent with this application form.
BOAED OP HIGH SCHOOL AND INTEBMBDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
P
For Private Candidates only.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION, 1929.
This application must reach the office of the Secretary, Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, United Provinces, Allahabad, on or before
the 1st October, 1928.
APPLICATION.
To
THE SECRETARY, BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES, ALLAHABAD.
SIR,
I BEG to apply for permission to appear asi a private candidate at the
ensuing High School Examination of the Board of High School and Inter-
mediate Education, United Provinces.
1 am, etc.,
Private Candidate,
Full address of the can-
didate to be given here.
CERTIFICATE.
I CERTIFY that I know nothing against the character of the above-
This certificate should he signedibjlthe Inpcc- name candidate which ought to
tor of Schools or the Division or the Chief exclude him/her from the High
Educational Officer of the Jndi n State where Rr>Jinnl "1?;+; ^la* i?L/
the candidate residee unless he is a failed '^ool ^xammation that he/
cand date of a previou^e^, in which case eh * has SJ & ned the above a PP h ;
the certiflcnle may be Figned by the head cation in my presence, that I
of the institnt on at which he last studied, believe the sub-joined account
to be true and that the conditions under which he/she has been study-
ing and is proposing to continue his/her studies are satisfactory. I recom-
mend that he/she may be allowed to appear at the examination as a
private candidate.
*Name
Designation
Station .
The . 1928.
* 1-The countersigning officers shonld assure themselves that the applicants hare
given the foil particulars required in the application and have attached to the application
the necessary certificates.
* . The forwarding officers re requested to keep in their offices the addresses of
candidates whose applications are forwarded by them.
3. The regulations given in Chapters XII and XI II of the Hoard's Begu tations
may be consnlte d.
APP. I.] FORMS
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE.
1. Name (in full)
2. Date of birth
3. Age (at the time of submitting
this application) . . . . . years months.
4. District and town or village where
resident . . . . .
f (a) United Provinces . .
5. Length I (6) Ajmer-Merwara
of resi-
dence | (c) Rajputana
in the
Central India
6. *The optional subject (and papers
when alternative papers exist)
and the vernacualr which the
candidate offers . . . . (Optional) (Vernacular) .
7. Does he offer History or Geography
as a compulsory subject ?
!8. School last attended
9. Date of leaving school
Falfcre to comply with all the condition*! or to give full particular of information m \
entail rejection of application,
Candidates appearing: for the first time from beyond the territorial jurisdiction of tie
Board must give adequate reasons for their takin? 1 he United Provinces Examination
Age-limit or other restriction imposed by the local University orlExamining authority,
will bo equally enforced by the United Provinces Board in the case of such candidates
even although each restriction ia not imposed on the United Provinces candidates,
* CandHates (Including failed candidates) will not be allowed to offer an option**
abject for which practical work or practical examination is prescribed, e.g., Phjsie
Id Chemistry, Agriculture, Manual Training, Domestic Science and Metal work.
(n) To be filled in by candidates appearing for the first time.
40
630, CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. I.
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE (concluded).
f 10. Class in which the candidate was
reading at the time of leaving
(Scholar's Register or transfer
certificate should be attached) . ..
11. Reasons for discontinuing school
studies . . . .
12. If the candidate left at the end
of the session, whether promot-
ed or not . .
t 13. Date of the candidate's last fail-
ing at the High School or an
equivalent Examination . .
14. Full name of the examination last
taken . . . . . .
15. Optional subject and the verna-
cular offered at the last exa-
mination . . . . (Optional) (Vernacular)
16. Subjects of failure in the last exa-
mination . . . . ..
17. Name of the school from which
the Candidate appeared . .
18. Whether declared eligible for com-
partmental examination, if so,
(i) in what subject ?
(ii) in what year of examina-
tion ?
(Signature of Candidate in full)
A candidate who failed in th* exom nation of a previotw year and who depircfi to offer
newgnbjects for the next examination mnst give adequate reasons and show (mth Hi~
fieattt as to the arrangement* ade) that he can tatisf actor ily complete the course of rtudr
IB toe new subject.
Candidates ahall not be allowed to offer for their examination any imbject even
not
(q) To be filled in bv failed oandidat esonly.
APP. I.] FORMS
RoJ/No
BOARD OP HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
P HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION, 1929. P
This application must reach the Office of the Secretary, Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, United Irovinces, Allahabad, en or before
December 28, 1928.
APPLICATION.
To
THE SECRETAEY, BOARD op HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES, ALLAHABAD.
SIR,
I REQUEST permission to present myself at the ensuing High School
Examination of the Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces.
'The prescribed fee -=- - '" ""* " T ""*-'*" _
1 has be<m credited into the Government Treasury
(in the case of candidates from an Indian State)
<chalan to be attached in the case of candidates from the U. P.)
I am, etc.,
* Address :
Private Candidate.
(Name to be written in full and very legibly.)
CERTIFICATE.
I certify that I know nothing against the character of the above-named
This certificate should be signed by the candidate which ought to exclude
Inspector of t-choolg of the Division or the him/her from the High School
Chief Education*! Officer of the Indian State Examination, that he/she has
7atd e ^SfflSAfiS mwhU signed the above application in my
cast) the certificate may be signed by the presence and that 1 believe the sub-
head of the institution at which he laet joined account to be true. I fur-
8tudied ' ther certify that he has been per-
mitted by the Board to appear as a private candidate (vide letter no. 1. B.
38, dated October 25, 1928.
Signature
Designation
Station
Dated --------- 192 .
Those offering commerce-typewriting or Domestic Science must select
In column 12, such institution as their centre as is recognized in that
particular subject and can make arrangements for the conduct of the
practical examination in that subject.
+ Instructions given in the letter of permission should be strictly followed*
* The candidate should also give the address in the Admission Card.
CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. 1.
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE.
1. Name in full* .. .. , .
2. Optional subject (a) . .
3. Vernacular (6) . . . .
4. Does he offer History or Geo-
graphy as a compulsory sub-
ject ? (c)
f (t) Optional subject .
6. Medium I (it) Vernacular . .
Examina- I
tion offered < (in) Mathematics .. _. ,
in (rf) j
I (iv) History or Geo-
I 8 ra P n y aa a com-
(^ pulsory subject . _.
6. District and town or village
where resident
7. Length
of residence
in the
United Provinces
A j mer-Merwara
Rajputana
Central India
8. Date of birth (e) . .
9. Name of father
Girl candidates mast write ' Miss ' or ' Mrs. ' before their names.
(a) Candidates taking Commerce should clearly show whether for Coicm&ce lecond
paper they offer " Book-keeping " or " Typewriting/'
(6) This will also to the Vernacular from which the candidate will be required to
translate in the i bird paper of English.
(c) A candidate offering History or Geography as a compulsory subject mast not offer
the same subject as an optional subject.
(d) A candidate is permitted to answer through a Vernacular m^dlunj in'the following
subjects only :
(1) Mathematics , (9) History., '8) Geography, (4), Sanskrit, (6) Arabic, (6; Feitinn,
(7) Agriculture, (8) Domestic Science, (9) Hindi, (10) Urdu.
() bate, month, and year to be enterei here.
APP. I.]
.FORMS
633
10. Name of guardian . .
(i) Name of the subject in
which eligible for Com-
partmental examina-
tion
(M) Name of the year in
which declared eligible
11. $ for Compartmentai Ex-
animation
JS.S
(Hi) Medium of Examination
offered (d)
(it?) Subject offered at the pre-
vious High School Ex-
mination
' 1. Optional
\
. 2. Vernacular-
12. Where to be examined (/)
Signature of candidate (in futt) .
(/) The foil i wing places are the centres of examination : Dehra Dan, Maz&ffarnazar,
Meerut, Bnlandshahr, Khurja, Aligarh, Muttra, Agra, Mainpari, Bareilly, Bijnor, Budaan,
Moradaba^, Chandauii, Shahjahanpur, Farrukhabad. Fatehgarh, Etawah, Cawnpore,
Allahabad, Jhaod, Benares, Jaunpore, Ballia, Gorakhpar, Azamgirh, Basil, Nalni Tal.
Almora, Srioagar, Lac know. Sitapar, Unao, Bie Bareli, Fyzabad, Qondt, Ajiner,
Owallor, Nowgong, ludore and (Jdai|>ur.
The Iht o ' centres is subject to additions and alterations by the Board.
634 CALENDAR 1928-29. [API*. J.
BOARD OP HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION, 1929.
ADMISSION CARD.
All the entries except those for roll number and centre should be filled
'In by the candidate.
Admit - . . - . -
Roll no.. . . . . ~__ of . . . _ district
to . . . Centre,
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADUR,
Secretary, Board of High School and intermediate Education,
United Provinces*
ALLAHABAD :
Tht 6th March, 1929.
Issued on 1929.
The address of the candidate to be given herc-
Signature and designation
of Forwarding Officer.
APP. I.] FORMS 635
RULES FOR THE GUIDANCE OF CANDIDATES.
1. The dates and the hours of the High School Examination of 1929,
wil^be notified separately.
2. The doors of tfee Examination Hall trill be opened a quarter of an
hour before the commencement of each examination and will be closed
at the time of commencement c&fty, after which no candidate will be ad-
mitted.
3. A seat marked with his Roll number will be allotted to each can-
didate and a book in which to write his answers will be found on his desk.
Candidates will be required to find out their allotted seats for themselves.
4. Candidates are not to have about them, while sitting to answer
their papers, any books, notes or paper whatever.
5. The answer must be written on one side of the page only, the other
side may be used for rough work and no portion of the answer- book pro-
vided may be torn out. If a candidate wishes to cancel any part of his
answers, he may do so by drawing distinct lines across it.
6. Candidates are required to provide their own pens, pencils,' or pas-
tels, etc. To answer the Second paper of Domestic Science on sewing and
cutting out, candidates are required to provide their CAvn needles, thread*
and pair of scissors. Blotting-paper will be supplied in the answer-books.
7. Candidates must obey any instructions they receive from the
Officer in charge of the Examination.
8. Candidates must produce their admission cards when demanded.
9. A duplicate copy of the admission card is issued on payment of
Rs. 2.
10. No guarantee will be given to the candidates as to the order in
which, and the dates on which, the question papers will be given to them.
11. Candidates must await the publication of the reault in Part IV
of the United Provinces Government Gazette. No inquiries by wire or letter
can be attended to. If any candidate wants a copy of Part IV of the
Government Gazette, in which the result will be published, he should apply
for it to the Superintendent, Government Press, Allahabad.
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADUR,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Province*.
ALLAHABBD :
The Qth March, 1929.
636 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP I.
Note. No fee should be sent with this application form.
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
For Private Candidates who have passed a public
examination In an Oriental Language
(Sanskrit, Persian, or Araoicj.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION, 1929.
This application must reach the office of the Secretary, Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, United Provinces, Allahabad, on or before
October 1, 1928.
APPLICATION.
To
THE SECRETARY, BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES, ALLAHABAD.
SIR.
I BEG to apply for permission to appear as a private candidate at the
ensuing High School Examination of the Board of High School and Inter-
mediate Education, United Provinces, in English only.
I am, etc.,
Full address of the candidate to be given here.
Private candidate.
CERTIFICATE.
1 CERTIFY that I know nothing against the character of the above-
named candidate which ought to
ThU jertiflcate 1 to be d^ned by the In.prc- exclude him/her from the High
tor of bshooli, of the Dirfcion or the Chief School Examination, that he/she
Educational Officer of the Indian State where has signed the above application
the candidate reside.. {n ^ ^ence, that I believe the
sub-joined account to be true
and that the conditions under which he/she has been studying and is pro-
posing to continue his/her studies are satisfactory. I recommend that
he/she may be allowed to appear at the examination as a private candidate
under Regulation 7, Chapter XIII of the Board's Regulations.
* Name l> .
Designation
Station
JV.JB *t'ue countersigning officer thonld awure himself thut the applicant has
given the fall patticnlan required in the application and has attached to th application
the necessary certificates duly atftsdd by the officer.
*2. The forwarding: officer! re requested to kiep in their offices the addressee of
andidate* whom application forma nrf forwarded by them.
8 The Regulation* contained in Chapters XII and XIII of the Board's Regulation!
may be consulted
APP. I.] FORMS 637
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE.
1. ^ame (in full)
2. Date of birth
3. Age (at the time of submitting
this application) .. years months
4. District and town or village
where resident .. ...
(a) United Provinces-
/ (b) Ajmer-Merwara^
-5. Length of residence in the
1 (c) Rajputana __.
(d) Central India.
6. t Name of the public examina-
tions passed in an oriental Ian-
guage (a copy of the certificate
of the oriental examination
passed duly attested by the
countersigning officer should be
attached) . . . . _
7. Name of the University, De-
partment or other authority
holding the oriental examina-
tion which the candidate has
8. If serving as a teacher, name of
the institution in which he is
serving . . . . _
9. Arrangements made for the
study of English . .
(Signature of candidate in full.)
TV.J9. Failure to comply with all the conditions or to gite full particulars of
information tnty entail rejection of application.
t The following examinations are recognised by the Board as Public Examinations in
an oriental language :
(1) Mnulvi, Allm, Mulla (now defunct) and Fazil in Arabic and Month* snd Kamtt
in Persian conducted by tbe Education Department of the United Provinces.
(8) The Sanskrit Eiaminttlone conducted by the Government Sanskrit College,
Keoares.ond by the Benares Hindu University,
IS) The Diploma Examinations in Arabic and Persian conducted by the Lucknow
University.
638 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. I..
Roll no.-
BOAED OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTEEMEDTATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION, 1929.
U This application must reach the office of the Secretary, Board of High U
School and Intermediate Education, United Provinces, Allahabad,
D on or before December 28, 1928. D"
APPLICATOIN.
To
THE SECRETARY, BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL,
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PBOVINCES, ALLAHABAD.
SIR,
I REQUEST permission to present myself at the ensuing High School
Examination of the Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces, In English only.
, rri -i i r i fi 8ent *>y money order (in the
fThe prescribed fee
has ueen credited into the Government Treasury
case of candidates from a-n Indian State.)
(chalan to be attached in the case of candidates from the U. P.)
I am, etc.,
* Address :
Private candidate.
(Name to be written in full and very legibly.)
CERTIFICATE.
I CERTIFY that the above named candidate has satisfied me that
he has passed a public examination
This certificate ia to be signed by the j n an oriental language ; (Sanskrit,
Inepcctor of Schools of the Division or A ra hir> nr Persian 1 that F know nnth
the Chief Educational Officer of the Indian ^raoic ? r l ersianj, tnat I Know notn-
Stato where the candidate resides, mg against him which ought to ex-
elude him from the High School
Examination, that he has signed the above application in my presence and
that I believe the subjoined account to be true. I further certify that he
has been permitted by the Board to appear as a private candidate (vide
letter no. I. B. 28, dated October 25, 1928). *
Signature ,
Designation-
Station
.102 .
ttn*trtictiotif given in the letter of permission should be strictly followed.
* This address should also be given in iho Admission Card.
1PP. I. FORMS
BE MLLE1?> IN 'COfcftECTLY AND LECH&L1T
BY THE CANDIDATE.
1. Name (in full)*
2. Date of birth (date, month and
year to be entered here, and not
month and year only)
3. Vernacular from which translation
is to be made into English in the
English third paper . .
4. District and town or village where
resident ..
fi. Length
of resi-
dence
United Provinces
Aj mer-Mer wara
Rajputana . .
in the-
(_ Central India
6- Name of father
7. Name of guardian
8. Where to be examined (a,}
(Signature of candidate in full.)
* Ctrl candidates should write ' Miss ' or ' Mn.' before their names.
(a) The following places are the centres of examination : Dehra Dun, Muzattar-
nagar, Moerut, Bulandshahr, Khurja, Aligarh, Mutt ra, Agra, Main purl, Bare illy. Bijnor,
Budaun, Moradabad, Chandnnai, Shahjahanpur, Farrukhabad, Fatebgarh, EUwah, Cawn~
pore, Allahabad, Jhane{, Benares, BallU, Jaunpore, norakhpur, A z am garb, Bastl, Nainf
Tal, Almort, Srlnagar, Lacknow, Sitapnr, Unno, Bae Bareli, Fyzabad, Gonda, Ajmer, rfo^pw
OwaJlor, Nowgorg, Indnre and Udaipur.
The Hit of centres is subject (o additions a d alterations by the Board
640 CALENDAR 1928-29 [Alt. I.
BOARD OP HIGH SCHOOL' AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
V HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION, 1929. "
P ADMISSION CARD.
All the entries except those for Roll number and centre, should be filled in by
the candidate.
Admit-
<Roll no ) of District
to Centre.
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADUR,
Secretary, Board of High School nnd Intermediate Education,
United Provinces*.
ALLAHABAD :
The %th March, 1929.
Issued on . 1929.
tit
111
Signature and Designation
of Forwarding Officer.
APP. I.] FORMS 641
RULES FOR THE GUIDANCE OF CANDIDATES.
1. The dates and the hours of the High School Examination of 1929,.
will<be notified separately.
2. The doors of the Examination Hall will be opened a quarter of an
hour before the commencement of each examination and will be closed at
the time of commencement daily, after which no candidate will be admit-
ted.
3. A seat marked with his Roll number will be allotted to each candi-
date and a book in which to write his answers will be found on his desk.
Candidates will be required to find out their allotted seats for themselves.
4. Candidates are not to have about them, while sitting to answer their
papers, any books, notes or papers whatever.
5. The answer must be written on one side of the page only, the other
side may be used for rough work and no portion of the answer -book pro-
vided may be torn out. If a candidate wishes to cancel any part of hifr
answers, he may do so by drawing distinct lines across it.
6. All candidates are required to provide their own pens. Blotting
paper will be supplied in the answer- books.
7 . Candidates must obey any instructions they receive from the Officer
in charge of the Examination.
8. Candidates must produce their admission cards when demanded.
9. A duplicate copy of the admission card is issued on payment of Rs. 2-
10. No guarantee will be given to the candidates as to the order in
which , and the dates on which, the question papers will be given to them.
11. Candidates must await the publication of the result in Part IV
of the United Provinces Government Gazette. No inquiries by wire or letter
can be attended to. If any candidate wants a copy of Part IV of the Gov-
ernment Gazette, in which the result will be published he should apply for it
to the Superintendent, Government Press, Allahabad.
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAT BAHADITB,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate Education
United
ALLAHABAD :
The Qth March, 1929.
CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. I
Note. No fee should be sent with this application form.
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PBOVINCES.
for Pflvat* Gandidgtes only.
P INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION, 1929. p
This application must reach the office of the Secretary, Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, United Provinces, Allahabad, on or before
the 1st October, 1928.
APPLICATION.
To
THE SECRETARY, BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES, ALLAHABAD.
SIB,
I BEG to apply for permission to appear at the ensuing Intermediate
Examination of the Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
^United Provinces.
The address of the candidate to be given here-
I am etc.,
Private Candidate.
CERTIFICATE.
I CERTIFY that I know nothing against the character of the ahove
named candidate which ought to ex-
This certificate .houid be signed by th elude him/her from the Intermediate
Divisional Inspector of Schools, or by the Examination, that he/she has signed
Chief Educational Officer of the Indian State the above application in my pre-
^^S^'KAWKSZ ** f th f * be ) ieve *e subjoined
mediate Eiamination us a student of some account to DC true and that the
college, this certificate should be signed by conditions under which he/she has
the bead .of the institution at which he last been studying and is proposing to
studied for the Intermediate Examination. ,. u- /u + v Y- *
continue his/her studies are satisfac-
tory, I recommend that he/she may
be allowed to appear at this examination as a private candidate.
Name ,
Designation ,
Station . .
The 1928.
y. B, (1) The countersigning officer should insure himself that the applicant has privet*
the foil particulars required in the application and haw attached to the application the
necessary certificates.
(2) The countersigning officer should keep in hie office the addresses of the candidates
tt applications he forwards
(3) Regulation* given in Chapters XII und XIV of the Board's BeguUtioni may be
consulted.
1.] FOBMS 643
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE.
1. *Tame (in full)
2. Age (at the time of submitting this
application) .. .. years months
3. Place of residence .. . .
4. Length of residence in the United
Provinces . . . . . . _
.5. Date of passing the High School or
an equivalent Examination (name of
.xamination and University should
be given) . . . .
.Subjects taken in the High Schcol
or equivalent Examination
7. (a) School or college last attended .
(b) Date of leaving class in which
the candidate read (Scholar's Regis-
ter or Transfer Certificate should be
attached) . .
NOTES. 1. Failure to comply with all the conditions or to five full particulars of in-
formation required may entail rejection of application.
8. Candidates appearing for the first time from beyond the territorial jurisdic-
tion of the Board must give adequate reasons for their taking the United Provinces Board's
examination. Age-limit or other restriction imposed by the local University or examining
authority will be equally enforced by the Uuited PraYincea Board la the case of such candi-
dates even alt ho ugh Unit el Provinces candidates are free from such restriction.
B. A candidate who failed in the examination of a previous year and who
desires to offer new subjects for the next examination must give adequate reasons for the
change and show (with certificates) thai he cat) satisfactorily complete the coarse of study
in the new subject s.
4. *Candidates who have passed the Cambridge School Certificate Examination
and intAd to appe <r at the Intermediate Examination should specify in the application form
the standard of attainment in each of the subjects in which they have passed the Cambridge
School Certificate Examination as shown in the detailed result of the examination.
5. Candidates shall not be allowed to offer for their examination any subject,
even if the subject is recognised for the examination <*hich is not being taught in a re-
cognised Institution or in which no institution is recognised.
0. Candidates (including failed candidates) cannot offer any subject which
involves practical work or & practical examination, viz. () Chemistry, (&) Phyrtct, (*)
Biolngy.(rf) Economic*, (a) Physiology, Hygiene ani Child Stud t.
644 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. i.
PARTICULARS TO BE PILLED IN CORRECTLY AND*LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE (concluded).
8. Whether the candidate has ever
attended a regular course oi study
for the Intermediate Examination
at any recognized college ; if so, the
name of the college . . . ._
9. Language from which translation is
to be made in the third English
paper
10. Optional subjects now offered
11. In the case of failed candidates date
of last appearing at the Board's
Intermediate Examination . . -
12. Optional subjects offered at last
appearance at the Examination
13. Subjects in which the candidate
failed
14. Whether declared eligible for Com-
partmental Examination ; if so,
(t) in what subject ? . .
() in what year of Examination ? . . .
(Signature of candidate in full.)
. I.J FOBMS 645
Roll no. ,
for Private Candidates only.
BOAKD OP HIGH SCHOOL AND INTEEMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PBOVINOES.
Y INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION, MARCH, 1929. \*
This application must reach the office of the Secretary, Hoard of High School
and Intermediate Education, United Provinces, Allahabad, on or before
December 28, 1928.
APPLICATION.
To
THE SECRETARY, BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES, ALLAHABAD.
SIR,
I RBQUBST permission to present myself at the ensuing Intermediate
Examination of the Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces.
., , . has been credited into the Government Treasury (gaZo
H The prescribed fee j ~ g , nt by mone7 . rder (in the use of
attached in the case of candidates from the United Provinces)
"candidates from au Indian state)
I am, etc.,
Address :- -
___ Private Candidate
[Name to be written in full and clearly.]
CERTIFICATE.
1 CERTIFY that the above-named candidate has satisfied me (a)
that he has passed the Board's
This certiBcate should be signed by the High School Examination or an
Divisional Inspector of Schools or by the examination declared equivalent
hief Educational Officer of tje Indian SUte h vid Regulation 2 Chapter
jMZfi^^ XIV of the Board's Regulations
diate Examination as a student of some col- that I know nothing against his
leae, this certifloate should be signed by the character which Ollg ht to exclude
iSwfE^^^ him *'<> m this Examination; that
he has signed the above application
in my presence, and that I believe the subjoined account to be true.
Name _
Designation __^_ . .
Station .
The -192 . _______
The Admission Card will be sent to the offlcer who signs this application form
* 1 his certificate should be signed by the same officer who forwarded the candidate's
Pr (a)The forwardintr offlcer i particularly requested to inspect each candidate's original
certificate of oaesiug the previous elimination.
II Instructions contained in the letter of permission ahould be strtotly followed.
P.T.O.
41
646 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. I.
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE.
1. Name (in full) ..
(Girl candidates must write Miss or
Mrs. before their names.) .
2. Date of birth ..
3. Name of father . .
4. Name of guardian . .
5. Race (i.e., nation, tribe, etc.) . .
6. District and town or village where
resident .. ..
7. Length of residence in
(a) United Provinces . . m
(b) Rajputana . . . . ._
(c) Ajmer-Merwarn . . . .
(d) Central India ..
8. Language from which translation
ia to be made into English in the
third English paper or English
composition in the case of candi-
dates whose mother-tongue is
English .. ..
9. Date of passing the High School
or an equivalent examination,
together with, the name cf the exa-
mination passed . .
10. The name of the optional subjects
offeredf .. .. .. (1)_
11. (a) Whether eligible for compart-
mental examination, if so, the name
of the subject . . . . _
(b) The year in which first failed and
declared eligible for the compart-
mental Examination . .
(c) Subjects offered in the year re-
ferred to in (6) .. . . (1)
12. Whether permitted by the Board to
appear as a private candidate ; if
so the number and date of the
letter in which permission has been
granted . . . .
13*. Where to be examined .. .._
(Signature of candidate in full.)
The following pUceg ure the centres of examfntlon 5 A&ra, Ajraer, illahabRd,
Almora, BiHlly, Benares, /awnpore, Dehra Dun, Etawnh, Pytabad, florufchpar, Gwalior,
Indrtte, Jftipu-, Jh nsi, Lnckno*, M^rut, Mnradabad, Khurja and Chndaugi.
The Ifat of centre* 18 'Object to addition- and alterations b) the Hoard <
t In th case of H^tory, the name of hUory f e g , Modern Hlatory (rndian-Eoroptan)
Modem History (Indian-English)], Ancient HUlory should be definitely mentioned.
APP. I.] FORMS 647
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION, 1929.
ADMISSION CARD.
All the entries except these for Roll number and centre should be fitted up in
the office of the Forwarding officer.
Admit,
(Roll no ) of_
_to _ Centre,.
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADUR,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces*
ALLAHABAD :
The 6th March, 1929.
Issued OIL 1929.
Signature and designation
of Forwarding Officer.
P.T.CL
648 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. I.
RULES FOR THE GUIDANCE OF CANDIDATES.
1. The dates and the hours of the Intermediate Examination of 1929,
will be notified separately.
2. The doors of the Examination Hall will be opened a quarter of an
hour before the commencement of each Examination and will be closed at
the time of commencement daily, after which no candidate will be admit-
ted.
3. A seat marked with his Roll number will be allotted to each candi-
date and a book in which to write h is answers will be found on his desk.
Candidates will be required to find out their allotted seats for themselves.
4. Candidates are not to have about them, while sitting to answer
their papers, any books, notes or papers whatever.
5. The answer must be wrtten on one side of the page only, the other
side may be used for rough work and no portion of the answer book pro-
vided may be torn out. If a candidate wishes to cancel any part of his
answers, he may do so by drawing distinct lines across it.
6. All candidates are required to provide their own peas.
7. Candidates must obey any instructions they reeeivo from the officer
in charge of the examination.
8. Candidates must produce their admission cards when demanded.
9. A duplicate copy of the admission card is issued on payment of two
rupees.
10. No guarantee will be given to the candidates as to the order in
Which, and the dates on which the question papers will be given to them.
11. Candidates must await the publication of the result in the United
Provinces Government Gazette. No inquiries by wire or letter can be attend-
ed to. If any candidate wants a copy of the Government Gazette, in which
the result will be published, he should apply for it to the Superintendent,
Government Press, Allahabad.
A. C. MUKERJ1, M.A., RAI BAHADUK,
Secretary, Board of High School and fnterrnediafa Kducalion,
United Provinces.
ALLAHABAD :
The &h March, 1929.
APP. I.] FORMS 640
Note. NO fee should be sent with this application form.
BOARD OP HIGH SCHOOL AND INTEBMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
fl for privatG Candidates who have passed a A
P ublic examination in an Oriental Language "
P (Sanskrit r Persian or Arabic). O
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION, 1929.
(In English only.)
This application must reach the, office of the Secretary, Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, United Provinces, Allahabad, on or before
October 1, 1928.
APPLICATION.
THE SECRETARY, BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES, ALLAHABAD,
^JR
I BEG to apply for permission to appeal at the ensuing Intermediate
Examination of the Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces, in English only.
I am, etc.,
The address of the candidate to be
given bere__
Private Candidate*
CERTIFICATE.
I CERTIFY that 1 know nothing against the character of the above-
named candidate which ought to ex-
This certificate is to be hifrned by the elude him/her from the Intermediate
^r^cK^oterT'lhf^^ Examination in English only, that
State where tbe candidate resides, he/she has signed the above applica-
tion in my presence, that I believe
the sub-joined account to be true and that the conditions under which
he/she has been studying and is proposing to continue his/her studies
are satisfactory. I recommend that he/she may be allowed to appear at
the examination as a private candidate under regulation 7, Chapter XIV
of the Board's Regulations
Name, , . . . ,
Designation-
Station _
The 1928.
NJJ _(D The countersign ing officer riumld nesure himself that the applicant hlft
(riven tbe full particulars required in the application and ha attached to th implication
the necessary certificate duly attttttd by that officer.
(2) The count eriigu in; officer thould keep In his office the addresses of the-
candidate* whose applications he forwards.
(3) Regulation* contained in Chapter XII and XIV o the Board's Regulation*
may be consulted,
650 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. J.
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE.
1. Name (in full) .. ____ , _ _ __ u _
2. Age (at the time of submitting this
application).. .. ____ ___ -years __ months
District and town or village where
resident . . . .
, (a) United Provinces-
A T ,, , . , . ., J (6) Ajmcr-Morwara
4, Length of residence in the ( J
| (c) Rajputana , ,_
d) Cantral India
5. *Date of passing the High School
or an equivalent examination in
English only (namo of examina-
tion should be given) .. . .___ ___ __ ,____
*6. fName of the Public Examination
passed in an oriental language
(a copy of the certificate of the
oriental examination passed duly
attested by the countersigning
officer should be attached)
7. Name of the University, Department
or other authority holding the
oriental examination which the
candidate has passed
8. If serving as a teacher, name of the
institution in which he is serving . .
9. Arrangements made for the study of
English . . . .
10. Language from which translation its
to be made in the third English
paper . . . .
(Signature of Candidate in full.)
NOTES. (1) Failure to comply with all tbe conditions or to give full particuiara of
information may entail rejection of application.
(2) Candidates appear-in p (or the first time from beyond tiio territorial
Jurisdiction of th? Hoard must give adequate reasons for their taking the United Pro-
vincefl Board's Exatninf.tion. Age-limit or other restriction imposed 07 the local uni-
versity or examining authority will be equally enforced by the United Provinces Board in
tbe ease of ach candidates even although United Provinces candidates are frfe from
ach restrict! n
The name of the University or other authority holding the examination should
also be specified.
t(-1) The following examinations are recognised by the Hoard at public examinations
4n an Orient*! language :
(1) Maulvf, Alim, Malta (now defunct; and Fa?il in Arabic;
(2) Munghi and Kamil in Persiau conducted by the Kduc^tion di-partmont of the
United Frovmcen ;
(S) Tbe Sanskrit Exair.inationp conducted by te Government Sanskrit College,
Benares, and by the I lunar en Hindu University ; i
i'4) Ihe l>iploma Kxaminations in Arabic aud Pcrttinn conducted by the Luck now
University.
APP. I.] FOBMS 651
Roll No.
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
For Private Candidates who have passed a Q
examination In un Oriental Language _
(Sanskrit, Persian or Arabic?) P
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION, MARCH, 1929.
This application must reach tiie office of the. Secretary, Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, United Provinces, Allahabad, on or before
December 28, 1928.
APPLICATION.
To
THE SECRETARY, BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITE u PROVINCES, ALLAHABAD.
SIR,
I BEQUEST permission to present myself at the ensuing Intermediate
Examination of the Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces, in English only.
+Th '\ - 1 f is sent by money-order (hi the case of candidate
fine proscnueo. lee^ beeu oreaited - luto ttte a overnineut Treasury (caalaa attach*!
from an Indian State).
in the case of candidates from the United Provinces)-
I am, etr.,
Address :
Private Candidate.
(Name to be written in full and clearly.)
652 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. I.
CERTIFICATE.
I CERTIFY that the above-named candidate has satisfied me that he-
has passed the Board's High School
sio*: a ^^^^^^ SS& Examination in English only, umder
totSM^^u" 1 " ''****" State Whwe Regulation 7 ' ^apter XIII of the
Board's Regulations or that he has
passed an Examination equivalent to the High School Examination in
English only under similar conditions, that I know nothing against
him which ought to exclude him from the Intermediate Examination in '
English only, that he has signed the above application in my presence and
that I believe the sub-joined account to be true.
Signature . . ,
Designation ,
fttulion
The 192
Tbe Admission Card will *e sent to the officer who signs this application
form and not direct to the candidate.
t Instructions contained in the letter of permission should bo strictly
followed.
(This certificate should be signed bv the same officer who forwarded the*
candidate's previous application.
APP. I.] FOBMS
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
_ INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION, 1929.
P
ADMISSION CARD.
AU the entries except those for Roll number and centre should be fitted up in
the office of the Fonvarding Officer.
Admit-
(Boll no ) of District
to . Centre.
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADUR,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces
ALLAHABAD :
The m March, 1929.
Issued on 1929.
Signature ani Designation of Forwarding Officer.
P.T.O.
*654 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. I.
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE.
Name (in full)
Date of birth (date, month and year to
be entered here and not month and
year only) . . . .
Name of father . . . .
Name of guardian . .
District and town where resident
Length of residence in the-
(a) United Provinces . .
(b) Ajmer-Merwara ..
(c) Raj put an a . .
(d) Central India
'Date of passing the High School or an
equiva!ent Examination in English
only . . . . . . _
Vernacular from which translation is to
be made into English in the English
Third Paper
Whether permitted by the Beard to appeal-
as a private candidate, number and
date of the letter in \Uiich such per-
mission ha3 been granted to the candi-
date should be quoted here
\ Where to be examined
(Niy nature of Candidate in full.}
t The following places are the centre* of examination -.Dehra Dun, Meerat,
Khnrju, Agra, Barcilly, Moradabad, Ctumlanai. Klawah, Cawuporr, Allahabad, Jhuwi,
Jidnarc8, Gora^hpnr, Altnora, Luck now, Fyzahad, Ajmer, Jaipur, ( waller and 1m' ore.
Tb tiit of centre- is subject to additions aud alterations by the Hoard.
APP. I.] FORMS 655
RULES FOR THE GUIDANCE OF CANDIDATES.
1. The dates and the hours of the Intermediate Examination of 1929
will be notified separately.
2. The doors of the Examination Hall will be opened a quarter of an
hour before the commencement of each examination and will be closed at
the time of commencement daily, after which no candidate will be admit-
ted.
3. A scat marked with his Roll number will be allotted to each candi-
date and a book in which to write his answers will be found on his desk.
Candidates will he required tu find out their allotted seats for themselves.
4. Candidates arc not to have about them, while sitting to answer their
papers any books, notes or pap?rs, whatever.
5. The answer must be written on one aide of the page only, the other
side may be used for rough work and no portion of the answer-book pro-
vided may be torn out. If a candidate wishes to cancel &ny part of his
answers, he may do so by drawing distinct lines across it.
6. All candidates are required to provide their own pens. Blotting
paper will be supplied in the answer hooks.
7. Candidates must obey any instructions they receive from the office
in charge of the Examination.
8. Candidates must produce their admission cards when demanded.
9. A duplicate copy of the admission card is issued on payment of
Rs. 2.
10. No guarantee will be uiven to the candidates as to tho order in
which, anil the dates on which the question papers will be given to them.
11. Candidates must awciit the publication of the result in Part IV of
the United Provinces Government Gazette. No inquiries by wire or letter
can be attended to. If any candidate \\ ants a copy ot Part 1 V of the Gov-
ernment Gazette, in which the result will be published he should apply for it
to the Superintendent, Government Pros-*, Allahabad.
A. C. MUKtiRJl, M.A.. RAI
Secretary, Board of High iSVA<W<rW Intermediate Kducation,
United Provinces.
ALLAHABAD :
The M March, 1929.
656 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. I*
Note. Ho fee should be sent with this application form.
BOABD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES
For Private Candidates only.
P COMMERCIAL DIPLOHA EX \ VTINATION, 1929. P
This application must reach the office of the, Secretary, Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, United Promnces, Allahabad, on or before
the 1st October, 1928. .
APPLICATION.
To
THE SECRETARY, BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES, ALLAHABAD.
SIR,
I BEO to ap]<ly for permission to appear at the ensuing Commercial
Diploma Examination of the lv ard of High School and Intermediate-
Education, United Provinces.
The address of the candidate
to be Driven here ._ .. . -~
I am, etc.,
Pfivitc c.
CERTIFICATE.
that I kno\\ nothing against the character of the above-
named candidate which ou^ht to-
exclude him/her from the Com-
Thi certificate gh-/n!d be signed by the mercial Diploma Examination,
Divisional Inspector 01 t^choolg, or by thftj . hp/she ha-i sirrn! th ahnvo
the Chief Eda ational Officer of the In- ^nacne/sne nas signed tn, aDove
din State where the candidate resides, application in my presence, that
]{nt in the case of a candidate who his I believe the subjoined account to
f ailed at the Commerc ial Dtplom* Examination u p 4- rup anf i f L.4- 4-u,, nn lifinna
as a ttadeotof w>me college, thi* certiticnte De , e ,* n ? *,. ^ C . n lltlon8
should be signed by ihehead of the iotuatiott under which he/she has be n stu-
at which he/she last studied for the Commercial dying and is proposing to continue
Diploma Examination. his/her studies are satisfactory, F
recommended that he/she may
be allowed to appear at thiH examination as a private candidate.
Th 1928.
N.B (1) The countersigning Officer should asnre h^m^lf that the applicant ha
gireo the fall particalarx required in the application, and has attached
to the application ths ntvcsanry certiflcatef
(9) The coantirRijfning officer should keep in his office the addresses of the
CJtndi )e whose nppUcationti he forwards
(3) EeKulatong contained in Chapters XII and XV of the Hoard's Regulations.
may b c conwlted.
APP. I.] FORMS 657
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE.
i. Name (in full) ..
2. Age (at the time of submitting
this application) , .
3. Place of residence . .
4. Length of residence in the United
Provinces. .. ..
Date of passing the High School
or an equivalent Examination
(name of examination should be
given) .. ..
Subject* taken in the High School
or equivalent Examination
7. (a) School or college last attended
(b) date of leaving class in which
the candidate read (Scholar's
Register or Transfer Certifi-
cate should be attached) .
$. Optional subjects now offered
(Commercial Geography or Type-
writing or Shorthand) .
9. In the case of failed candidates,
date of last appearing at the Com-
mercial Diploma Examination
10. Optional subjects offered at last
appearance at the Examination
HI. Subjects in which the candidate
failed . . . . . .
12. Whether declared eligible for Com-
partmental Examination ; if so
( i) In what subject ?
(ii) in what year of Examination?-
Signature of candidate in full.
NOTE 1. Failure to comply with all t<ie conditions or to give fall particulars of
information required may eiitail rejection of application.
2. Candidates Appearing for the first time from beyond the territorial
jurisdiction of the Hoard mutt jriv* adequate reasons for their taking the United Prov-
iiees Hoard's Examination. Age limit or other restriction imposed by the local uni-
voity or Examining Authority will be equally enforced by tha United Provinces Board
in the case of such candidates even although United Provinces Candidates aw free from
such rebtrictiou.
3. A candidate who failed in the Examination of a previous year and who
desires to offer new Mibjects for the ntit Exam mat ion must give adequate reasons for the
plunge and show (With certificates) that he cau satisfactorily complete the coarse of study
in the new Mibjects,
4. Candidates shall not be allowed to offer for their Examination any
subject, even if the subject is recognised for the examination which is not befog taught in
* recognUed institution or iu which uo institution is recognised.
658 CALENDAR 1928-29 [APP. I.
Roll No.
For Private Candidates only.
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
P COMMERCIAL DIPLOMA EXAMINATION MARCH, 1929.
This application wu$t reach the office of the Secretary, Board of High School
and Intermediate Education, Unihd Provinces, on or before December
28, 1928.
APPLICATION.
To
THE SECRETARY BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL
AND INTERMEDIATE EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES, ALLAHABAD.
SIB,
I JREQVEST permission to present myself at the ensuing Commercial
Diploma Examination of the Board of High School and Intermediate
Education, United Provinces.
hasjjeen credited into the Government Treasury (chn,'an attached
liie prescribed tee - - iTsolS'by mone^ord"er"(iTi"tho case of candies'
In th case of candidates from the United Provinces)
from an Indian State).
I am, etc.,
Private Candidate.
Address
(Name to be written in full and clearly.)
CERTIFICATE.
I CEBTIFY that the above-named candidate has satisfied me (a) that
he has passed the High School
t This certificate should t>e signed by the Examination or an Examination
Division*! Inspector of Schools, or by the eqlliva ] ent thereto ; that I know
Chiet Educational Officer ol the Indian * 1 ' ,
State where the candidate resides But nothing against his character-
in the cast' of a candidate who has failed at the \vhich ought to exclude him from
Commercial D.plonu Examination, as a student (hi Examination; that he has
of borne college this certificate should be , , , ,. ..
signed by the head of the institution at which signed the above application m;
he/she lart studied for the Commercial Diploma my presence and that I believe
Examination. the subjoined account to be true.
Name . . . .
Designation .
The 192 .
Station
J Inxttuctiourf contained m tbe letter of permission should be strictly followed.
The Admii-kioo Card will be bent to the otttcer who signg this application form,
and not direct 10 tlio can ndate.
tihiH ceitticutt> should be signed by the dame officer who forwarded the candi-
date's previous application
(a ) The Forwarding Officer la particularly requested to inspect each candidate**.
original certificate of passing the previous examination.
APP. I.] FOEMS 669
D BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATED*
1 EDUCATION, *
UNITED PROVINCES.
COMMERCIAL DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, 1929.
ADMISSION CARD.
All the entries except those for Roll number and centre should be ftted up
in the office of the Forwarding Officer.
Admit
(Roll no
-Centre.
A. C. MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BAHADUB,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces. .
ALLAHABAD :
The Mh March, 1929.
Issued on - . 1929.
Fipnaiure and designation of Forwarding Officer.
P.T.O.
CALENDAB 1928-29 APP I.]
PARTICULARS TO BE FILLED IN CORRECTLY AND LEGIBLY
BY THE CANDIDATE.
1. Name (in full)
2. Date of birth
3. Name and occupa- "|
tion of father. >Name . __. Occupation
4. Name of guardian . . .
5. Race (i.e., nation, tribe, etc., etc.)
6. District and town or village where
resident . .
7. Length of residence in
(a) United Provinces ^
(6) Rajputana .. .._
(c) Ajmer-Merwara
(d) Central India ..
8. Date of passing the High School
or an equivalent examination to-
gether with the name of the exa-
mination passed ..
9. Optional subject
10. (a) Whether eligible for compart -
mental examination ; if so,
the name of the subject . .
(6) The year t \\ hen first failed and
declared eligible for the com-
partmental examination .
(c) Optional Hubject offered in the
year referred to in (6) . .
11. Whether permitted by the Board
to appear as a private candidate,
if so, the number and date of the
letter in which permission has
been granted . .
12. f Where to be examined
(Signature of candidate in full.)
of Examination. 8t. John's Ccllepf, AjraiChrifUa* Imtermtdi a ff CoUtg* .
Xj*ek*ou> ; Bin u tan Dharm College of Commerce, Catc*j>or, D. 4. jr. Colltg*, Cato/po**; S .
Memorial; Inttrmtdinie Collggt. C*<m' cim' M*r*t Cdtjt* ^iftervt; JiartiUf/ CdU*,
BartiHj; Koyattl I'atbtlala Intermrilat* Colhgt, AM+b&M* ff. H. S. C,
' The list of cintrei in t*bj*cl to addition* and alteration* by tot
APP, !] FORMS 66t
RULES FOR THE GUIDANCE OF CANDIDATES*
1. The dates and the hours of the Commercial Diploma Examination
o%J929 will he notified separately.
2. The doors of the Examination Hall will be opened a quarter of ail
hour before the commencement of each examination and will be closed
at the time of commencement daily, after which no candidate will be ad-
mitted.
3. -A seat marked with his Boll number will be allotted to each candi-
date and a book in which to write his answers will be found on his desk*
Candidatss will be required to find out their allotted seats for themselves.
4. Candidates are not to have about them, while sitting to answer;
their papers, any books, notes or papers whatever.
5. -The answers must be written on one side of the page only, the other
side may be used far rough work and no portion of the answer-book pro-
vided may be torn out. If a candidate wishes to cancel any part of his
answers, he may do so by drawing distinct lines across it.
6. All candidates are required to provide their own pens.
7. Candidates must obey any instructions they receive from the Officer
in charge of the Examination.
8. Candidates must produce their admission cards when demanded.
9.__A duplicate copy of the admission card is issued on payment of two*
rupees.
10. -No guarantee will be given to the candidates as to the order in
which, and the dates on which, the question papers will be given to
them.
11. Candidates must await the publication of the result in the United
Provinces Government Gazette. No inquiries by wire or letter can be
attended to* If any candidate wants a copy of the Government Gazette,
in which the result will be published, he should apply for it to the Superin-
tendent, Government Press, Allahabad*
A. C, MUKERJI, M.A., RAI BABADUB,
Secretory, Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces*
ALLAHABAD :
The Offt March, 1929.
CALENDAB 1928-29
[APP. i.
(3) Forms of certificates awarded to successful candidates
at the Board's examinations.
JNc.
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION, .
UNITED PROVINCES,
HIGH SCHOOL EXAMINATION. 1929.
Roll
This is to certify that-
on , , passed the High School Exa-
mination, 1929, from the . School/College
. 1. , held in the month of
March/April, 1929, in the following subjects :
1. English.
2. Mathematics.
4
5. , .
With distinction in
And was placed in the
Division.
M.A,, RAI BAHADUR,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate Education^
'United Provinces.
ALLAHABAD:
1929.
"?* Ij
fjo.-
FORMS
663
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES.
INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION, 1929.
Roll no.
This is to certify that .
of
College
District
passed the Intermediate Examinati 3n held in the month of March/ April,
1929, in the following subjects :
1. English Literature.
2.
3.
4.
with distinction in
and was placed in the
Division.
M.-A., RAI BAHADUR,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
United Provinces*
ALLLAHABAD :
The 22nd June, 1929* *
664
A0._
CALENDAR 1928-29
[APP.
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE.
EDUCATION.
UNITED PROVINCES,
COMMERCIAL DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, 1929.
Roll no.
I certify that . t _ __.
^College
District
passed the Commercial Diploma Examination, held in the month of March/
April, 1929, and was placed in the_^ .
Division with distinction in
The subjects in which he was examined were English, including cor-
respondence ; Book-keeping and Accountancy ; Business Methods ancfc
Elementary Economics, and
M.A., RAT BAHADUR,
Secretary, Board of High School and Intermediate Education,
Unitei Provinces.,
ALLAHABAD :
The 22nd June, 1929.
APP. I.]
FOEMS
665-
BOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATE
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES,
AGRICULTURAL DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, 1929.
Roll no
I certify that .__.
College . ,__ , , .
passed the Agricultural Diploma Examination, held in the month of March/
April, 1929, and wag placed in ths . . .
Division with distinction in . , .
The subjects in which he was examined were English Literature, Ele-
mentary Farm Chemistry, Elementary Farm Physics, Botany, Elementary
Zoology, Farm Crops, Elementary Economics, Horticulture, Climatology,
Introduction to Animal Husbandry, Elementary Irrigation and Drainage,,
and Farm Machinery.
M.A., RAI BAHADUR ,
Secretary, Board of High Softool and Intermediate Education,
Uni'ei Provinces^
.ALIAHABAD :
The 22nd June, 1929.
CALENDAR 1928-29 APP. I-
(4) Form of application for Examinership for the
Board's Examinations.
iBOARD OF HIGH SCHOOL AND INTERMEDIATED
EDUCATION,
UNITED PROVINCES,
FOBM OF APPLICATION FOR EXAMINERSHIP.
Name . _~ _^ . . . . , . .
Dssignation - . .
Address - , . . .. _
Academic qualifications. ....
Experience as Teacher .__ _
Previous experience as Examiner-
Examination for which the applicant desires to examine .
Subject in which the applicant desires to examine. (Only one subject
and one examination to be mentioned on one form) , ._^ .
Recommendation of the Head of the Institution or some other person
who knows the applicant well . . .
r . , Signed
The 192 .
Norms. (1) The recommendation girea above is all that the applicant jteod send up.
Any farther communication, direct or indirect, witU members of Committees or of the
Board, ig disallowed,
, (2) Persons who acted as Examiners for the previous year need not submit a fresh
application.
(8) This application form should reach the Secretary of the Board not later than 16th
Jannarf. The receipt of the application form wttl be acknowledged, bat no other oorro-
f pondencf In this eonnet)on will be attended to.
(4) Tjie applicant should also state whether be ii competent to mark answer-books
unites in Urdn or HfD4t.
